zx-spectrum.com

microbib - The Microcomputer Bibliography

E&OE. All data in this document is believed to be correct and is offered in good faith. Errors may have been made in original source material and copied here. You have been warned. Use your browser's SEARCH facility to find material. Please note: This is a bibliography. It is not a library catalogue. I do not own, nor have access to the articles and books listed within it, and have sold my computer collection to a museum. Note that publication dates given on texts and recorded in publishing trade data vary. Records of reprints and reimpressions is rarely accurately recorded. Different publishers often publish the same book for different markets (ie. the UK and the US). Entries are under constant revision.

Last update: 2 December 2007.

http://www.davidharrison.org/microbib.html

Online resources:
Old-Computers.com

Bookfinder.com

Contents

Archives.
Books and Articles:
-General Works (before 1970).
-Multi-Platform and Processor-Based Works.
--DIY Systems.
--Language.
--Microcontrollers.
--OS.
--Processor.
--Robotics.
--General Works (from 1970).
-Early Computers by Manufacturer.
-Modern Computers.
Software:
-Machine Specific.
Hardware:
-Generic.
-Machine Specific.
Chips:
-CPUs by family.
-Memory.
-Miscellaneous.
Software: Minimum Requirements.
State of the Art.
Glossary.

[ART] denotes an article. These are listed in each section after the books.


Archives

ICL Archive. Science Museum, London.
Based upon the collection originally held in the ICL Company Musem, Stevenage. Includes material from the various companies that merged to eventually form ICL: British Tabulating Machine Co. (BTM), Powers-Samas, International Computers and Tabulators (ICT), English Electric.


Books & Articles

General Works (before 1970)

Alt, Franz Leopold. Electronic Digital Computers: Their Use in Science and Engineering. New York: Academic Press, 1958.

Bashkow, Theodore Robert, ed. Engineering Applications of Digital Computers. New York; London: Academic Press, 1968.

Brotton, Derick Maxwell. The Application of Digital Computers to Structural Engineering Problems. London: E. & F. N. Spon, 1962.
Spon's Civil Engineering series.

Barron, David William. Assemblers and Loaders. London: Macdonald, 1969.
2nd (1972); 3rd (1978).

Bell, William D. A Management Guide to Electronic Computers. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1957.

Benrey, Ronald Michael. Understanding Digital Computers. New York: J. F. Rider, 1964.
UK edition: London: Iliffe, 1965.

Booth, Andrew Donald. Digital Computers in Action. Oxford: Pergamon Press, [1965].

Boschen, Lee. Computer Circuit Projects You Can Build. Indianapolis: Howard W. Sams, 1963.
143pp. English edition: Slough: W. Foulsham, 1964 (143pp; With a specially written chapter for the guidance of the English reader by W. Oliver; The original TP has been removed, and a new TP and preface bound in. Foulsham-Sams Electronics series). Boschen's original preface dated April 1963. Contents (Foulsham edition): 1. Parts, Tools, and Techniques; 2. Automatic Signal Flasher; 3. A Rally Computer; 4. Simple Stroboscope...Plus; 5. A Magic Lamp; 6. Analog Addition; 7. Electronic Tachometer; 8. Counting with Relays; 9. Logic Lock; 10. Battery Trickle Charger; 11. At Last-Perpetual Motion; 12. The Sonolamp; 13. The Black Box; 12. Puzzle Box; 13. Regulated Power Supply.

Bowden, Bertram Vivian, ed. Faster Than Thought: A Symposium on Digital Computing Machines. London: Pitman, 1953.
xix, 416pp. Reprinted: 1955; 1957; 1963; 1964; 1967; 1971. Foreword by the Earl of Halsbury, Managing Director of the National Research Development Corporation. Preface dated January 1953. Contents (1967 reprint): 1. A Brief History of Computation; 2. The Circuit Components of Digital Computers; 3. The Organization of a Typical Machine; 4. The Construction, Performance, and Maintenance of Digital Computers; 5. Programming for High-Speed Digital Calculating Machines; 6. The University of Manchester Computing Machine; 7. Calculating Machine Development at Cambridge; 8. Automatic Computation at the National Physical Laboratory; 9. The Harwell Electronic Digital Computer; 10. The Telecommunications Research Establishment Parallel Electronic Digital Computer; 11. The Imperial College Computing Engine; 12. The Royal Aircraft Establishment Sequence-Controlled Calculator; 13. Calculating Machines at the Birkbeck College Computation Laboratory; 14. Computers in America; 15. Machines for the Solution of Logical Problems; 16. Special-Purpose Automatic Computers; 17. Digital Computation and the Crystallographer; 18. The Use of High-Speed Computing Machines in Meteorology; 19. An Application to Ballistics; 20. Digital Computers and the Engineer; 21. Machines in Government Calculations; 22. The Application of Digital Computers to Business and Commerce; 23. Electronic Machines and Economics; 24. Problems of Dynamic Astronomy; 25. Digital Computers Applied to Games; 26. Thought and Machine Processes. With plates and a frontispiece depicting Ada, Countess of Lovelace. 24 contributors are listed. Alan Turing is listed as a contributor to chapter 25.

Braun, Edward Louis. Digital Computer Design: Logic, Circuitry, and Synthesis. New York: Academic Press, 1963.

Bukstein, Edward J. Digital Counters and Computers. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, [1960].

Burton, Alfred Joseph, and Ronald Gerald Mills. Electronic Computers and their Business Applications. London: Ernest Benn, 1960.

Chapin, Ned. An Introduction to Automatic Computers. Princeton, N. J.: Van Nostrand, [1957].
2nd edition: [1963]. Van Nostrand series in Business Administration and Economics.

Christopoulis, J. C. "Logic Design of Digital Computers." MSc Thesis. University of Newcastle upon Tyne, 1969.

Conway, B., J. Gibbons, and D. E. Watts. Business Experience with Electronic Computers. A Synthesis of what has been Learned from Electronic Data Processing Installations. A Research Study and Report Prepared for Controllers Institute Research Foundation. New York: Waterhouse, 1959.

Chu, Yaohan. Digital Computer Design Fundamentals. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1962.
Prentice-Hall Behaviorial Sciences in Business series.

Davison, John Frederick. Programming for Digital Computers. London: Business Publications, 1961.
2nd edition: 1967.

Dineley, Jack Leonard, ed. The Use of Digital Computers in Electric Power Systems. Newcastle upon Tyne: Oriel, [1967].
Based on a conference on the use of digital computer techniques for power system calculations, held in the Department of Electrical Engineering, University of Newcastle upon Tyne, 1965.

Evans, George William, II, Clay Lamont Perry, and R. E. Keirstead, Jr. Programming and Coding for Automatic Digital Computers. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1961.
McGraw-Hill series in Information Processing and Computers.

Evans, George William, II, Graham F. Wallace, and Georgia L. Sutherland. Simulation Using Digital Computers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, [1967].
Prentice-Hall series in Automatic Computation.

Fahnestock, James D. Computers and How They Work. New York: Ziff-Davis, 1959.
xii, 228pp, 113 illustrations. Contents: 1. What Electronic Computers Do; 2. Computer Language; 3. Computer Arithmetic; 4. Digital-Computer Programming; 5. Computer Logic Circuitry; 6. How Men and Machines Communicate; 7. How Computers Remember; 8. Analog Computers; 9. Data-Acquisition Systems; 10. Typical Computer Systems.

Flores, Ivan. Computer Logic: The Functional Design of Digital Computers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1960.
Prentice-Hall Electrical Engineering series.

Flores, Ivan. Computer Software: Programming Systems for Digital Ccomputers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1965.
Prentice-Hall series in Applied Mathematics.

George, Frank Honywill. Automation, Cybernetics, and Society. London: L. Hill, 1959.

George, Frank Honywill. Basic Principles of Digital Computing. Bristol: Teaching Programs, 1965.
Bristol Self-Teaching Programmed Book. Reprinted 1966.

George, Frank Honywill. Computer Arithmetic. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1966.
Commonwealth and International Library. Programmed Texts.

George, Frank Honywill. An Introduction to Computer Programming. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1968.
Commonwealth and International Library. Programmed Texts.

George, Frank Honywill. An Introduction to Digital Computing. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1966.
Commonwealth and International Library. Programmed Texts.

George, Frank Honywill. A Survey of Digital Computing. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1968.
Commonwealth and International Library. Programmed Texts.

Green, Bert Franklin. Digital Computers in Research: An Introduction for Behavioral and Social Scientists. New York: McGraw-Hill, [1963].
Lincoln Laboratory publications.

Gschwind, Hans W. Design of Digital Computers: An Introduction. New York: Springer-Verlag, 1967.
2nd edition by Hans W. Gschwind and Edward J. McCluskey (New York: Springer-Verlag, 1975).

Haas, Gerhard. Fundamentals and Components of Electronic Digital Computers. Eindhoven: Philips' Gloeilampenfabrieken; London: Cleaver-Hume Press Ltd., 1963.
Translated from the German by E. Grubba. Philips Technical Library. Original edition: Grundlagen und Bauelemente Elektronischer Ziffernrechenmaschinen (Eindhoven: 1961).

Haberman, Charles M. Use of Digital Computers for Engineering Applications. Columbus, Ohio: C. E. Merrill, [1966].

Hastings, Cecil, Jr., Jeanne T. Hayward, and James P. Wong, Jr. Approximations for Digital Computers. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press; London: Oxford Univ. Press, 1955.
Reprinted: Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press, 1970.

Hawkins, Joseph K. Circuit Design of Digital Computers. London; New York: Wiley, 1968.

Heath, Frederick George. Digital Computer Design. Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd, 1969.
Electronic and Electrical Engineering Texts, 3.

Ivall, Thomas Edward, ed. Electronic Computers: Principles and Applications. London: Iliffe; New York: Philosophical Library, 1956.
2nd impression: 1957; 2nd edition: 1960.

Jeenel, Joachim. Programming for Digital Computers. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959.

Kilner, D. P. A Survey of Digital Computers Available in the United Kingdom. [United Kingdom]: [c.1959]. 2 vols.
Issued by the Advisory Panel on Electronic Computing and Control Devices. Distributed by the British Transport Commission.

Ledley, Robert Steven, and James Bruce Wilson. Programming and Utilizing Digital Computers. New York: McGraw-Hill, [1962].
McGraw-Hill series in Information Processing and Computers.

Livesley, Robert Kenneth. An Introduction to Automatic Digital Computers. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, 1957.
Cambridge Engineering series. 2nd edition: 1960.

Lytel, Allan Herbert, and Benjamin Wilfred Willis Oliver. Digital Computers in Automation. With a Specially Written Chapter for the Guidance of the English Reader by W. Oliver. Slough: W. Foulsham & Co., [1966].
Original edition: Indianapolis: H. Sams [1966].

Maisel, Herbert, and Donald L. Wright. Introduction to Electronic Digital Computers: With Emphasis on the System/360, FORTRAN IV, and PL/1. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1969.

Maley, Gerald A., and John Earle (Manager, Exploratory System Logic Group, IBM). The Logic Design of Transistor Digital Computers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1963.
Prentice-Hall International series in Electrical Engineering.

Maley, Gerald A., and Melvin F. Heilweil. Introduction to Digital Computers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1968.
Prentice-Hall series in Electronic Technology.

Maley, Gerald A., and Edward J. Skiko. Modern Digital Computers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, [1964].
Prentice-Hall Electrical Engineering series.

Mandl, Matthew. Fundamentals of Digital Computers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1958.

Mandl, Matthew. Fundamentals of Electronic Computers: Digital and Analog. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967.

Marchant, John Philip, and David Pegg. Digital Computers: A Practical Approach. London; Glasgow: Blackie, 1967.
2nd edition: London; Glasgow: Blackie, 1969.

McCormick, Edward Mack. Digital Computer Primer. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959.
McGraw-Hill series in Information Processing and Computers.

McCracken, Daniel Delbert, Harold Weiss, and Tsai-Hwa Lee. Programming Business Computers. New York: Wiley, 1959.

Michaelson, John Martin. "Some Applications of Electronic Digital Computers to Statistics." MSc Thesis. London School of Economics, 1964.

Murphy, John Stewart. Basics of Digital Computers. New York: J. F. Rider, 1958. 3 vols.
Revised 2nd edition: New York: Hayden Book Co., [1970]. 3 vols. in 1.

Ligomenides, Panos A. Information-Processing Machines. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1969.

Philips Electron Tube Division. Tubes for Computers. Eindhoven: Philips, 1956.
Philips Technical Library. ix, 51pp.

Phister, Montgomery. Logical Design of Digital Computers. New York; London: Wiley, 1958.
2nd printing: 1959; 3rd printing: 1959; 4th printing: 1959; 5th printing: 1960; 6th printing: 1961; 7th printing: 1963; 8th printing: 1966; 10th printing: 1967.

Postley, John A. Computers and People: Business Activity in the New World of Data Processing. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1960.

Pressman, Abraham I. Design of Transistorized Circuits for Digital Computers. New York: John F. Rider; London: Chapman & Hall, 1959.
xi, 316pp. Preface dated March 1959. 1st printing: March 1959; 2nd printing: June 1959; 3rd printing: January 1960. UK distribution by Chapman & Hall, London, using an slip pasted under the imprint. Dustjacket (3rd printing) states: 'Using "worst-case" design, this book explains how switching time and drive capabilities and requirements of all the essential digital computer building blocks may be calculated, and how these blocks may be assembled in chains to perform computer-type logical operations. Methods for performing computer logic to obtain maximum operating speed and pyramiding factor are analyzed in detail'; 'The author received his M.S. in Physics from Columbia University, New York, in 1939. During World War II he served as a Captain in the Signal Corps, in charge of radar maintenance teams and depots in the European Theater of Operations. Working at Brookhaven National Laboratory after the war, he designed the frequency-control system for the 3-billion-volt Cosmotron, the highest energy particle accelerator built to that date. Later, Mr. Pressman joined Raytheon Manufacturing Corporation as Senior Design Engineer on RAYDAC, one of the earliest high-speed general purpose digital computers. Subsequently he was with Remington Rand for three years as Chief Electronics Engineer on the UNIVAC high-speed printer, and has since acted as consultant on vacuum tube, transistor, and magnetic circuits, for leading companies in the digital computer field. Mr. Pressman is at present on the staff of the Radio Corporation of America as Digital Circuits Consultant'. Contents: 1. Basic Building Blocks in Digital Computers; 2. Logical Chains in Digital Computers; 3. Transistor Fundamentals; 4. Transistor Transient Response; 5. Diode Gating; 6. Voltage-Switching Diode Gate Logic with Transistor Inverting Amplifiers; 7. Current-Switching Diode Gate Logic with Transistor Inverting Amplifiers; 8. Resistance Logic with Transistor Inverting Amplifiers; 9. Direct-Coupled Transistor Logic; 10. Miscellaneous Transistorized Logic Circuits; 11. Design of Flip-Flops and Delay Multivibrators; Appendix: Measurement of Transistor Turn-On, Turn-Off, and Storage Times.

Pritchard, Alan. A Guide to Computer Literature: An Introductory Survey of the Sources of Information. London: Clive Bingley, 1969.
130pp. 2nd edition: London: Clive Bingley, 1972 (194pp). 2nd edition published simultaneously in the US by Linnet Books, an imprint of Shoe String Press, Inc., Hamden, Connecticut.

Ralston, Anthony, and Herbert S. Wilf, eds. Mathematical Methods for Digital Computers. New York: Wiley, 1960-1977. 3 vols.
Vols. 1-2: 2nd printing: 1962; 4th printing: 1964; 5th printing: 1964; 6th printing: 1965; 7th printing: 1965; 8th printing: 1965; 10th printing: 1967 (some copies of vol. 2 of the 10th printing incorrectly given as '2nd edition' on the spine). Vol. 3 (1977) with the title Statistical Methods for Digital Computers edited by Ralston, Wilf, and Kurt Enslein.

Richards, Richard Kohler. Arithmetic Operations in Digital Computers. New York: Van Nostrand, 1955.
397pp. Reprinted: Princeton, New Jersey: Van Nostrand, 1960.

Richards, Richard Kohler. Digital Computer Components & Circuits. Princeton, New Jersey: D. Van Nostrand, 1957.
vii, 511pp. Reprinted: 1958; 1965. Intended as a companion to Arithmetic Operations in Digital Computers (1955). Dustjacket states: 'Basic engineering approaches related to digital techniques carefully organized for practical use, including a wide range of components and circuits of an experimental nature, a discussion of logical functions, digital storage, and advantages and disadvantages of the several approaches to design'. Preface states: 'intended to supply engineers with the information needed to reduce the ideas about arithmetic and logic [in the 1955 text] to a working machine'. Contents: 1. History and Introduction; 2. Diode Switching Circuits; 3. Vacuum Tube Systems of Circuit Logic; 4. Transistor Systems of Circuit Logic; 5. Magnetic Core Systems of Circuit Logic; 6. Large Capacity Storage: Non-Magnetic Devices; 7. Storage on a Magnetic Surface; 8. Magnetic Core Storage; 9. Circuits and Tubes for Decimal Counting; 10. Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog Converters.

Roberts, Frank David Kenyon. "Pseudo-Random Number Generators for Digital Computers." MSc Thesis. Liverpool University, 1966.

Sackman, Harold. Computers, System Science, and Evolving Society: The Challenge of Man-Machine Digital Systems. New York: Wiley, [1967].
xviii, 638pp.

Sangren, Ward Conrad. Digital Computers and Nuclear Reactor Calculations. New York: Wiley, 1960.
208pp.

Smith, James Maberley Sandford. The Management Approach to Electronic Digital Computers. London: Macdonald & Evans, 1957.
xi, 227pp. The author was a chartered accountant and management consultant. Contents: 1. The Development of Statutory and Management Accounting; 2. Integrated Data-Processing Machines; 3. The Main Units of a Computer; 4. Input; 5. Arithmetic Unit; 6. Storage; 7. Output; 8. The Program Controller; 9. Checks and Controls; 10. Programming; 11. The Impact of Integrated Data-Processing on Organisational Structure; 12. The Size of Business which can Use a Computer; 13. The Practical Approach; 14. Some Available Business Computers; 15. The Auditor and the Computer; 16. The Computer in the United States; 17. The Social Significance of the Introduction of the Computer. Chapter 14 describes and illustrates: British Tabulating Machine Co. Apollo, Hec 4; Burroughs E101, Datatron; Elliott-National Cash Register 405; EMI Electronic Business Machine; English Electric Deuce; Ferranti Mercury and Pegasus; IBM 650 and 705; Lyons' LEO II; Powers-Samas PCC; Standard Telephones and Cables Stantec-Zebra.

Sangren, Ward Conrad. Digital Computers and Nuclear Reactor Calculations. New York: Wiley, 1960.

Saxon, James Anthony, and Wesley W. Steyer. Basic Principles of Data Processing. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, [1967].
2nd edition: 1970.

Say, Maurice George, Alistair Colin D. Haley, and Wilfred Emberton Scott, eds. Analogue and Digital Computers. London: Newnes, 1960.

Scott, Norman Ross. Analog and Digital Computer Technology. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1960.
2nd edition with the title Electronic computer technology. New York; Maidenhead: McGraw-Hill, 1970. McGraw-Hill Series in Information Processing.

Sellers, Frederick F., Jr., Mu-Yue Hsiao, and Leroy W. Bearnson. Error Detecting Logic for Digital Computers. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1968.

Sherman, Philip M. Programming and Coding Digital Computers. New York: Wiley, 1963.

Siegel, Paul. Understanding Digital Computers. New York: Wiley, [1961].
2nd edition: [1971].

Smirnov, Gennady Dimitrievich. Electronic Digital Computers. New York: Pergamon Press, 1961.
Translated by G. Segal. Translation editor: Jack C. Burfoot. International Tracts in Computer Science and Technology, 7. Original title: Elektronnye Tsifrovye Mashiny.

Smith, Charles Victor Lovett. Electronic Digital Computers. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959.

Southworth, Raymond William, and Samuel Leonard DeLeeuw. Digital Computation and Numerical Methods. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1965.
McGraw-Hill series in Information Processing and Computers.

Theodore, Chris Athanasios. Boolean Algebra and Digital Computers. Columbus, Ohio: C. E. Merrill, [1969].

Trakhtenbrot, Boris Avraamovich. Algorithms and Automatic Computing Machines. Boston: Heath, [1963].
Topics in Mathematics series. Translated and adapted from the 2nd Russian edition, 1960, by Jerome Kristian, James D. McCawley, and Samuel A. Schmitt. Original title: Algoritmy i Mashinnoe Reshenie Zadach.

Turing, Ethel Sara. Alan M. Turing. Cambridge: W. Heffer & Sons, 1959.
Biography.

United Kingdom, British Standards Institution. Glossary of Terms Relating to Automatic Digital Computers. London: British Standards Institution, 1955.
British Standard 2641: 1955.

United Kingdom, Institution of Structural Engineers, London. Report of a Committee on the Use of Digital Computers in Structural Engineering. London: Institution of Structural Engineers, 1962.

United Kingdom, Mathematical Association (Midland Branch). A Guide to Digital Computers. Birmingham: Mathematical Association, 1962.

United Kingdom, National Physical Laboratory. Wage Accounting by Electronic Computer. London: Dept. of Scientific and Industrial Research, 1956.
Inter-Departmental Study Group on the Application of Computer Techniques to Clerical Work, Report 1.

United States of America, National Academy of Sciences/National Research Council. Digital Computer Needs in the Universities and Colleges: A Report of the Committee on Uses of Computers. Washington, D. C.: National Academy of Sciences, 1966.
NAS-NRC Publication No. 1233.

Wallace, Frank. Appraising the Economics of Electronic Computers: An Approach for a Company to Determine the Feasibility of Acquiring a Computer. New York: Controllership Foundation, 1956.

Wass, Charles Alfred Alan. Introduction to Electronic Analogue Computers. London: Pergamon Press, 1955.
Pergamon science series. 2nd edition: By Wass and Kenneth Charles Garner, Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1965, International Series of Monographs in Electronics and Instrumentation, 6.

Weik, Martin H. A Survey of Domestic Electronic Digital Computing Systems. Maryland: Ballistic Research Laboratories, 1955.
Report 971. 3rd edition: 1961, Report 1115.

Weinstein, Seymour Maurice, and Armand Keim. Fundamentals of Digital Computers. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, [1965].

Wilkes, Maurice Vincent. Automatic Digital Computers. London: Methuen, 1956.
Reprinted with minor corrections in 1957.

Wilkes, Maurice Vincent. An Experiment with a Self-Compiling Compiler for a Simple List-Processing Language. Cambridge: Univ. of Cambridge Mathematical Laboratory, 1963.
Technical Memorandum, 63/1.

Wilkes, Maurice Vincent. Time-Sharing Computer Systems. New York: American Elsevier. [1968].
2nd edition: 1972; 3rd edition: 1975.

Wilkes, Maurice Vincent, David J. Wheeler, and Stanley Gill. The Preparation of Programs for an Electronic Digital Computer, with Special Reference to the EDSAC and the Use of a Library of Subroutines. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1951.
2nd edition: 1957; Reprinted: Los Angeles: Tomash Publishers, [c.1982].

Williams, Samuel Byron. Digital Computing Systems. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959.
McGraw-Hill series in Information Processing and Computers.

Wrubel, Marshal Henry. A Primer of Programming for Digital Computers. New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 1959.
McGraw-Hill series in Information Processing and Computers.

Multi-Platform and Processor-Based Works

[DIY Systems]
Adamson, Malcolm. Small Real-Time System Design: From Microcontrollers to RISC Processors.
Wilmslow: Sigma, 1990.

[DIY Systems]
Anderson, Don. FireWire System Architecture: IEEE 1394A.
2nd edition; Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1998.

[DIY Systems]
Anderson, Don, and Dave Dzatko. Universal Serial Bus System Architecture.
2nd edition; Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2001.
With a CD-ROM.

[DIY Systems]
Anderson, Phil. Computers and the Radio Amateur.
Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1982].

[DIY Systems]
Axelson, Janet Louise. The Microcontroller Idea Book: Circuits, Programs and Applications Featuring the 8052-BASIC Microcontroller.
Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, 1994.

[DIY Systems]
Axelson, Janet Louise. Parallel Port Complete: Programming, Interfacing & Using the PC's Parallel Printer Port.
Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, [1997].
With a 3.5" floppy disk.

[DIY Systems]
Axelson, Janet Louise. Serial Port Complete: Programming and Circuits for RS-232 and RS-485 Links and Networks.
Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, [1998].
With a 3.5" floppy disk.

[DIY Systems]
Axelson, Janet Louise. USB Complete: Everything You Need to Develop Custom USB Peripherals. With Firmware Tips & Host Code in Visual Basic and Visual C++.
2nd edition; Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, 2001.
1st edition c.1999, with a CD-ROM.

[DIY Systems]
Barden, William T., Jr. Z-80 Microcomputer Design Projects.
Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, 1980.

[DIY Systems]
Berk, A. A. The Art of Micro Design.
London: Newnes Technical, 1984.

[DIY Systems]
Bishop, Owen Neville. Simple Interfacing Projects.
London: Granada, 1983.

[DIY Systems]
Brunning, Peter E. Experimenting with PC Computers: A Beginner's Introduction to the Design of Simple Electronic Circuits, Writing of Assembly Language Programmes, and Interfacing to a PC Computer.
Clacton-on-Sea, Essex: Brunning Software, 1996.
300pp. Spiral bound. With a disk containing BrunWord MCA assembler. Contents: 1. Introduction and Software Installation; 2. What is Computer Control?; 3. Simple Digital to Analogue Converter; 4. Three Bit Digital to Analogue Converter; 5. Measuring the Performance; 6. Using a Ladder Network; 7. Analogue to Digital Converter; 8. Creating Simple Computer Graphs; 9. Successive Approximation A/D Converter; 10. Dynamic Temperature Measurements; 11. Plotting Temperature Measurements; 12. Using Screen Mode 12h; 13. Using a Thermocouple; 14. Working with Audio Waves; 15. Analysing Audio Waves; 16. Fourier Analysis; [Appendices:] A. Components and Tools Required; B. The 8086 Registers; C. The 8086 Instruction Set; D. Software Interrupts; E. Logic Circuit Parameters.

[DIY Systems]
Bursky, Dave. The S-100 Bus Handbook.
Rochelle Park, New Jersey: Hayden Book Co., [1980].

[DIY Systems]
Carr, Joseph J. Digital Interfacing with an Analog World.
No. 1070; Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1978.
406pp. 1st printing: September 1978. 2nd edition: No. 2850; Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1987 (xiii, 464pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. Transducers; 2. Types of Transducers; 3. Operational Amplifiers; 4. Operational Amplifier Circuit Design; 5. Signal-Processing Circuits; 6. Some Useful Digital Circuits; 7. Analog Function Modules; 8. Controlling the World; 9. Digital Codes; 10. Basics of Computer Conversion; 11. D/A Converters: Some Real Products; 12. A/D Converters: Some Real Products; 13. Some Data Converter Applications; 14. Analog & Digital Multiplexing; 15. Data Acquisition Systems; 16. Readout & Display Devices; 17. Serial Data Transmission; 18. Tape Recorder & Data Loggers; 19. Telephone Dialler Circuits.

[DIY Systems]
Chubb, Bruce A. Build Your Own Universal Computer Interface.
Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: Tab Books, 1989.
ix, 309pp. 2nd edition: New York: McGraw-Hill, 1997 (xv, 411pp; with a 3.5" floppy disk). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Basics for Building a Computer Interface; 2. Selecting the Best Interface Options; 3. The Internal Bus Extender Card; 4. Universal Serial Interface Card; 5. Configuring and Installing the IBEC; 6. The Universal Bus Extender Card; 7. Connecting UBEC to Your Computer; 8. Digital I/O Circuits and Test Card; 9. Testing the Parallel (IBEC-Based) System; 10. Serial Interface Software; 11. Testing the Serial (USIC-Based) System; 12. Testing the Parallel (UBEC-Based) System; 13. Connecting External Hardware to the I/O Cards; 14. Adding Analog Interface Cards to a UCIS; 15. Generating I/O Handling Software; 16. Original I/O Circuits and Test Card; 17. Sample Interface Application: External Hardware; 18. Sample Interfacing Application: System Hookup and Software; Appendix A. Circuit Board Order Blank and Circuit Artwork; Appendix B. Electronic Parts Ordering: Address Summary.

[DIY Systems]
Ciarcia, Steve. The Best of Ciarcia's Circuit Cellar.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1992.
ix, 453pp. From Vols. 1-7. Includes: Z8-Based Control Computer with BASIC; Basic-52 Computer/Controller; SB180 Single-Board Computer.

[DIY Systems]
Ciarcia, Steve. Build Your Own Z80 Computer. Design Guidelines and Application Notes.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Books/McGraw-Hill, 1981.
ix, 332pp. The classic work.

[DIY Systems]
Clements, Alan. Microcomputer Design and Construction: Building Your Own System with the Motorola 6800.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall International, 1982.
xviii, 520pp.

[DIY Systems]
Dietsche, K.-H., and M. Ohsmann. MatchBox BASIC Computer: A Miniature Controller System.
Dorchester: Elektor Electronics, 1999.
274pp with a 3.5" floppy disk. Describes a microcontroller system built on a 65 x 45mm PCB, running MBL, a higher programming language derived from BASIC and Pascal. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The MatchBox BASIC Computer; 3. A Development System for the MatchBox; 4. MBL, the MatchBox Language; 5. Connecting Peripherals to the MatchBox; 6. Specialities of the 8051; 7. MatchBox BASIC Computer Applications; 8. Microcontroller Systems; 9. Appendix.

[DIY Systems]
Dirksen, A. J. Microcomputers: What They Are and How To Put Them to Productive Use.
Slough: W. Foulsham, 1982.
231pp. Translated from the Dutch (1978). Published in the USA as TAB Book No. 1406, Blue Ridge Summit: TAB, 1982 (231pp). Based on the 8080 processor. A detailed examination including a circuit for a Hex microtrainer. Contents (Foulsham edition): 1. What is a Computer?; 2. What is a Microcomputer?; 3. The Microcomputer in General; 4. How Does a Computer Compute?; 5. Circuitry in a Computer; 6. Main Memory; 7. Simple Programming; 8. CPU Architecture-1; 9. CPU Architecture-2; 10. Microcomputer Architecture; 11. Description of the Instructions; 12. Syntax and Subroutines; 13. Addressing Techniques; 14. Flowcharts; 15. From Task to Solution; 16. Sample Programs; 17. Traffic Lights; 18. System Software; 19. Development Systems; 20. Peripheral Equipment; 21. I/O Interfacing; Appendix A. 8080 Instruction Set; Appendix B. 8080 Instruction Timing.

[DIY Systems] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 1.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1980.
148pp. Contents: 1. Getting Acquainted with the 'Junior Computer'; 2. The Binary Number System; 3. Programming; 4. A Simple Beginning; Appendix 1. Instruction Codes in Numerical Order; Appendix 2. Instruction Listing; Appendix 3. Hex Dump of the Monitor Program; Appendix 4. Pin Assignment of the Connectors.

[DIY Systems] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 2.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1981.
212pp. Contents: 5. The Editor and the Assembler; 6. The Peripheral Interface Adapter or PIA; 7. The Monitor Program; 8. The Editor Program; 9. The Assembler Program; Appendix 1. The Program Listing of the EPROM; Appendix 2. Listings of the Programs used in Chapters 5 and 6.

[DIY Systems] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 3.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1981.
199pp. Contents: 10. Junior Grow Up: From Single Board to Double-Decker 'Sandwich'; 11. The Cassette Interface: A Magnetic Memory; 12. Adding Peripherals to the Junior Computer; Appendix 1. The Main Board Plus a Single RAM/EPROM Card; Appendix 2: Using the PIA RAM with the Original Monitor Routine; Appendix 3. The Vectors and Bus Board Memory; Appendix 4. The Hex Dump for the Tape Monitor (TM) Program; Appendix 5. The Hex Dump for the Printer Monitor (PM) Program; Appendix 6. RAM Test Program; Appendix 7. ASCII Character Codes.

[DIY Systems] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 4.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1982.
221pp. Contents: 13. Editing and Assembling; 14. 1.2K Bytes of PM Software; 15. The PME Software; 16. The Cassette Software; Appendix 1. The Complete Listing of the PME System Program; Appendix 2. The Hex Dump of the PME System Program; Appendix 3. The Complete Listings of the Tape Monitor and Printer Monitor System Programs; Appendix 4. Working in Decimal; Appendix 5. BASIC on the Junior Computer.

[DIY Systems] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: VIA6522.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1983.

[DIY Systems]
Fuller, Walter. Build Your Own Microcomputer Based on the Intel 8088.
Albany, New York: Delmar, 1995.
ix, 193pp. Contents: 1. The Voltage Regulator Circuit; 2. The Power Bus; 3. Wire-Wrap Technique and Practice; 4. The 8088 Clock Circuit; 5. The 8088 Microprocessor Installation; 6. The Memory Circuit; 7. The Programmable Timer Circuit; 8. The 8255A Parallel I/O Port; 9. The 8259 Interrupt Controller; 10. The Serial I/O Circuit; 11. The Monitor Program; 12. Simple Parallel I/O Using the 8255A; 13. Exploring Interrupts; 14. The Polled Centronix [sic] Printer Interface; 15. The Interrupt Driven Centronix [sic] Interface; 16. The Interrupt Driven Serial I/O Circuit; 17. Analog-to-Digital Conversion; Appendix A. Parts List for the Microcomputer; Appendix B. Programming Features of the Monitor Program; Appendix C. How to Write and Assembly Language Program for the Microcomputer.

[DIY Systems]
Gook, Michael. PC Hardware Interfaces: A Developer's Reference.
Wayne, Pennsylvania: A-List Publishing, 2004.

[DIY Systems]
Haviland, Robert Paul. The 'Compulator' Book: Building Super Calculators and Minicomputer Hardware with Calculator Chips. How to Mate the COMPuter with the CalcULATOR.
No. 975; Blue Ridge Summit: Tab Books, 1977.
320pp. 1st printing: July 1977. Contents: 1. Calculator Operating Principles; 2. Elements of Calculator Electronics; 3. The Components of the Calculator System; 4. The Experimenter's Calculator; 5. Interfacing: The General Problem; 6. Interfacing Calculator Output: Giant Displays and Other Uses; 7. Interfacing Calculator Inputs: Counting and Timing; 8. Elements of Teletypewriter Operation; 9. Construction Hints for Two-Sided Circuit Boards; 10. The Tape-Controlled Calculator; 11. The Code Converter: A Calculator Output Interface; 12. The Data Printer and the Recording Calculator; 13. Additional Projects.

[DIY Systems]
Haviland, Robert Paul. How to Design, Build, and Program Your Own Advanced Working Computer System.
No. 1332; Blue Ridge Summit: Tab Books, 1981.
321pp. 3rd printing: 1981. Contents: 1. Review of the Microprocessor Field: Advanced Systems Concepts; 2. New Fast Memory Cards: Improved Construction Techniques; 3. A NIBL-Based Operating System; 4. ROM Cards, NIBL in ROM and NIBL Extension; 5. Hard-Copy Devices for I/O; 6. A Tape Cartridge Data System and Its Controls; 7. PROM Programming; 8. An Auxiliary Processor Panel and Its Programs; 9. Using Other Microprocessors (INS-8073; Z80); 10. Multitasking, Multiprogramming and Multiprocessing. The appendix includes 13 programs reprinted from Computer Newsletter.

[DIY Systems]
Haviland, Robert Paul. How to Design, Build, and Program Your Own Working Computer System.
No. 1111; Blue Ridge Summit: Tab Books, 1979.
308pp. 1st printing: March 1979; 2nd printing: January 1980. The system is based upon the National Semiconductor SC/MP-II (SCAMP). Contents: 1. A Home-Built Computer-The Basic Approach; 2. Main-Frame Construction: Peripherals and Input/Output Programming; 3. The Central Processor: Address Programming; 4. The Control Panel & First System Test: The Operating System; 5. The Read/Write Memory Board: Building Your Operating System; 6. A Serial I/O Board: Building the Operating System; 7. Read-Only Memory Cards: Elements of Assemblers; 8. Expanding Your Computer.

[DIY Systems]
Hordeski, Michael F. Microprocessor Cookbook.
No. 1053; Blue Ridge Summit: Tab Books, 1979.

[DIY Systems]
Lancaster, Don. The Cheap Video Cookbook.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1978.
256pp.

[DIY Systems]
Lancaster, Don. Don Lancaster's Micro Cookbook.
2 vols. I: Fundamentals; II: Machine Language Programming. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1982-1983.

[DIY Systems]
Lancaster, Don. TV Typewriter Cookbook.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Howard W. Sams, 1976.
256pp. 3rd printing: 1976. One of the seminal works of the home computer revolution. Contents (3rd printing): 1. Some Basics; 2. Integrated Circuits for TVT Use; 3. Memory; 4. System Timing - Calculations and Circuits; 5. Cursor and Update Circuits; 6. Keyboards and Encoders; 7. Serial Interface; 8. Television Interface; 9. Hard Copy and Color Graphics.

[DIY Systems]
Lancaster, Don. Son of Cheap Video.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Howard W. Sams, 1980.
223pp. Sequel to The Cheap Video Cookbook. Contents: 1. Scungy Video; 2. The Snuffler - Super Simple Transparency; 3. Custom Characters; 4. A Music Display; 5. 8080 Cheap Video - Heath H8 Hardware; 6. 8080 Cheap Video - Heath H8 Software; 7. Lower-Case Hardware for Your Apple II; 8. Lower-Case Software for Your Apple II; Appendix A. More Character Generator Details; Appendix B. Pinouts of Selected ICs; Appendix C. Printed Circuit Patterns.

[DIY Systems]
Libes, Sol, and Mark Garetz. Interfacing to S-100/IEEE 696 Microcomputers.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [c.1981].

[DIY Systems]
MCS BASIC-52 Reference Manual.
Santa Clara, California: Intel, 1986.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. Computer Music Projects.
BP173. London: Babani, 1985.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. Electronic Circuits for the Computer Control of Model Railways.
1987; London: Babani, 1989.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. Electronic Circuits for the Computer Control of Robots.
BP179. 1986; rep. London: Babani, 1994.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. Electronic Projects for Your PC.
BP320. London: Babani, 1992.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. How to Interface PCs.
London: Babani, 1999.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. Interfacing PC's and Compatibles.
London: Babani, 1992.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. An Introduction to Computer Communications.
London: Babani, 1986.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. An Introduction to Computer Peripherals.
BP170. London: Babani, 1985.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. Micro Interfacing Circuits Book 1.
BP130. London: Babani, [1984].

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A. Micro Interfacing Circuits Book 2.
BP131. 1984; rep. London: Babani, 1990.

[DIY Systems]
Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. Computer Hobbyist's Handbook.
BP251. London: Babani, May 1989.
Reprinted April 1990; Reprinted May 1992 (120pp). Contents (1992): 1. The Popular Microprocessors; 2. Interfaces; 3. Languages; 4. Numbering Systems; 5. Operating Systems; 6. Computer Graphics; 7. Lexicon; 8. MIDI Technicalities; Appendix A. ASCII Table; Appendix B. Epson Standard Printer Controls; Appendix C. Abbreviations; Appendix D. Support Chips; Appendix E. Decimal - Binary - Hex; Appendix F. The Standard Symbols for Use in Flow-Charts.

[DIY Systems]
Poe, Elmer C., and James C. Goodwin II. The S-100 and Other Micro Buses.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1979.
144pp. 2nd edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1981 (206pp).

[DIY Systems]
Prochnow, David. Experiments with EPROMS.
Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: Tab Books, 1988.
No. 2962. x, 230pp. Advanced Technology Series. Contents: 1. EPROM Technology; 2. Programmable Memory Structures; 3. Popular PROMs; 4. Popular EPROMs; 5. Popular EPROMs; 6. The Bit Smasher; 7. EPROgraMmer; 8. Programming an EPROM; 9. Erasing an EPROM; 10. Commercial Programmers and Erasers; 11. SAM Technology; [Appendices:] A. Building an EPROM Project; B. IC Data Sheets; C. Supply Source Centre.

[DIY Systems]
Rafiquzzaman, Mohamed. Microprocessors and Microcomputer-Based System Design.
Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press, 1990.
xvii, 1075pp. 2nd edition: Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press, 1995 ([14], 776pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Introduction to Microprocessors and Microcomputer-Based Applications; 2. Intel 8085; 3. Intel 8086; 4. Intel 80186/80286/80386; 5. Motorola MC68000; 6. Motorola MC68020; 7. Motorola MC68030/MC68040, Intel 80486 and Pentium Microprocessors; 8. RISC Microprocessors: Intel 80960, Motorola MC88100 and PowerPC; 9. Peripheral Interfacing; 10. Design Problems; [Appendices:] A. The Hewlett-Packard (HP) 64000; B. Motorola MC68000 and Support Chips - Data Sheets; C. Intel 8085, 8086, and Support Chips - Data Sheets; D. MC68000 Instruction Execution Times; E. 8086 Instruction Set Reference Data; F. Glossary/ASCII Codes.

[DIY Systems]
Safford, Edward L., Jr. The Complete Microcomputer Systems Handbook.
Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: Tab Books, 1979.
No. 1201. 322pp.

[DIY Systems]
Schmidt, Friedhelm. The SCSI Bus and IDE Interface: Protocols, Applications and Programming.
Harlow, Essex: Addison-Wesley, 1995.
ix, 301pp. With a 3.5" floppy disk. Translated from the German edition SCSI-Bus unde IDE-Schnittstelle by J. Michael Schultz. Preface dated February 1993. Reprinted: 1995 (twice). 2nd edition: Harlow, Essex: Addison-Wesley, 1998 (x, 396pp; with a 3.5" floppy disk). Contents (1st edition): [Part I. Introduction:] 1. Computers and Peripherals; 2. Traditional Peripheral Interfaces; 3. Computer Buses; [Part II. The IDE Interface:] 4. Background; 5. The Physical IDE Interface; 6. IDE Protocol; 7. The Model of an IDE Disk Drive; 8. IDE Commands; [Part III. The SCSI Bus:] 9. Background; 10. SCSI Hardware; 11. SCSI Bus Protocol; 12. SCSI Commands; 13. Direct Access Devices; 14. Tape Drives; 15. Printers; 16. Scanners; 17. Processor Devices; 18. Communications Devices; 19. Optical Storage and WORM Drives; 20. CD-ROM; 21. Medium-Changer Devices; 22. The SCSI Monitor Program; 23. Software Interfaces; 24. Test Equipment; 25. SCSI Protocol Chips; [Appendices:] A. SCSI Commands (By Opcode); B. SCSI Commands (Alphabetically); C. SCSI Sense Codes; D. The SCSI Bulletin Board; E. Source Code for SCANSCSI.PAS.

[DIY Systems]
Seyer, Martin D. RS-232 Made Easy: Connecting Computers, Printers, Terminals, and Modems.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall Inc., 1984.
xiii, 214pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991 (xii, 436pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. Introduction to RS-232; 2. Communication Jargon; 3. Asynchronous Modems and RS-232-C; 4. RS-232-C Operation in a Private-Line Environment; 5. Synchronous Environments; 6. Secondary Signals and Flow Control; 7. Cross Connections; 8. Interfacing Equipment; 9. Answers to Review Questions; Appendix A. EIA Standard RS-232-C; Appendix B. EIA Standard RS-449; Appendix C. Industrial Electronics Bulletin No. 12; Appendix D. RS-232 Circuit Summary with CCITT Equivalents; Appendix E. Tools of the Trade; Appendix F. RS-232 Pin Assignments for Computers and Peripherals; Appendix G. Interfacing Problems and Remedies.

[DIY Systems]
Stevens, W. Richard. TCP/IP Illustrated.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., 1994-1996.
3 vols. 1. The Protocols; 2. The Implementation; 3. TCP for Transactions, HTTP, NNTP, and the UNIX Domain Protocols. Volume 2 was co-authored with Gary R. Wright. Contents (vol. 1; xix, 576pp; 1994): 1. Introduction; 2. Link Layer; 3. IP: Internet Protocol; 4. ARP: Address Resolution Protocol; 5. RARP: Reverse Address Resolution Protocol; 6. ICMP: Internet Control Message Protocol; 7. Ping Program; 8. Traceroute Program; 9. IP Routing; 10. Dynamic Routing Protocols; 11. UDP: User Datagram Protocol; 12. Broadcasting and Multicasting; 13. IGMP: Internet Group Management Protocol; 14. DNS: The Domain Name System; 15. TFTP: Trivial File Transfer Protocol; 16. BOOTP: Bootstrap Protocol; 17. TCP: Transmission Control Protocol; 18. TCP Connection Establishment and Termination; 19. TCP Interactive Data Flow; 20. TCP Bulk Data Flow; 21. TCP Timeout and Retransmission; 22. TCP Persist Timer; 23. TCP Keepalive Timer; 24. TCP Futures and Performance; 25. SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol; 26. Telnet and Rlogin: Remote Login; 27. FTP: File Transfer Protocol; 28. SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol; 29. NFS: Network File System; 30. Other TCP/IP Applications; [Appendices:] A. The tcpdump Program; B. Computer Clocks; C. The sock Program; D. Solutions to Selected Exercises; E. Configurable Options (BSD/386 v.1.0; SunOS 4.1.3; System V Release 4; Solaris 2.2; AIX 3.2.2; 4.4BSD); F. Source Code Availability.

[DIY Systems]
Tracton, Ken. How to Build Your Own Working 16-Bit Microcomputer.
No. 1099; Blue Ridge Summit: Tab Books, [1979].

[DIY Systems]
Uffenbeck, John E. Microcomputers and Microprocessors. The 8080, 8085, and Z-80: Programming, Interfacing, and Troubleshooting.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1985.
xv, 670pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991 (xiv, 690pp). 3rd edition: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2000 (xix, 729pp).

[DIY Systems]
Ward, Brice. Computer Technician's Handbook.
No. 554; Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1971.
1st printing: March 1971; 2nd printing: November 1972; 3rd printing: May 1974 (475, [5]pp). Contents: [I. Techniques & Circuitry:] 1. Introduction to Computers; 2. Number Systems; 3. Coding Systems; 4. The Teletype; 5. Boolean Algebra; 6. Basic Computer Circuits; 7. Computer Blocks; 8. Decoding, Gating & Steering Arrays; 9. Counters, Shift Registers & Memories; 10. Adders; [II. Analysis of a Typical Small Computer:] 11. General Description of the PDC808; 12. Processor Instructions; 13. Input-Output Section; 14. I-O Interface Reference; [III. Maintenance:] 15. Introduction to Maintenance; 16. System & Functional Components; 17. Processor Operation; 18. Input-Output Operation; 19. Diagnostic Information.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Alderwick, Brian V. "TV to RGB Monitor Conversion."
Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1983. pp.62-64.
Constructional article including PCB layout. Adapting a Ferguson 14" Movie Star portable TV to an RGB monitor.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Allason, Julian. "Firmware: All Roads Lead to ROM."
Practical Computing May 1980. pp.98-100.
Advocates the use of ROM over disc storage.

[DIY Systems: ART]
An, Dr. Pei. "8031 & 80535 Single Board Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 1: April 1996. pp.44-54; Part 2: May 1996. pp.58-62; Part 3: June 1996. pp.40-43.
MCS-51 based SBC.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Atkins, C. P. "6802 Evaluation Board."
Electronics Today International May 1985. pp.27-32, 58.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. A 7-chip system: 6802, 2716 EPROM, 7400, two 6821 PIAs, and two TIL311 Hex displays.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Barker, Philip G. "Experiments with IROM and EPROM."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.37-39.
IROM are Instant Read Only Memory chips.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Barron, Richard. "PE Hobby Bus."
Practical Electronics Part 2: June 1986. pp.32-33.
Constructional article in several parts. 12 socket backplane for home conputers.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Bedford, Mike. "Foreign Ports."
Electronics Today International March 1987. pp.13-18.
Computer interfacing standards: Serial and parallel, RS422, RS423, RS449, 20mA current loop, Centronics, and IEEE-488.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Bedford, Mike, and Gordon Bennett. "ETI Stand-Alone EPROM Programmer."
Electronics Today International January 1989. pp.42-49, 55-56; February 1989. pp.46-51.
Constructional article with PCB foils and full firmware listing. Works with any computer that has an RS232 serial port. On-board firmware in a 2764 EPROM. An update of a design featured in the magazine in August to September 1983 (MkI) and May to August 1985 (Mk2).

[DIY Systems: ART]
Bedford, Mike. "PC Interfacing."
Electronics Today International June 1989. pp.13-20.
Detailed, technical feature. Covers the PC and AT buses.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Bedford, Mike. "EPROM Emulator."
Electronics Today International February 1990. pp.54-59, 62.
Constructional article with PCB foil. 32K card that will interface with 6502 and 6809 home computers.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Bedford, Mike. "The ETI SBC-09."
Electronics Today International January 1991. pp.46-51, 62; February 1991. pp.50-55; Correction: April 1991. p.57.
Constructional article with PCB foils. A general purpose 6809 microcontroller system with 2K or 8K RAM and 16K of EPROM.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Bird, O. S. "Versatile A to D."
Computing Today June 1981. pp.24-26.
Constructional article. 8-bit ADC based on the Ferranti ZN427 suitable for any VIA based micro. Designed by Ferranti Electronics. Originally intended as a PET joystick interface.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Böhling, H. -J. "80C32 BASIC Control Computer."
Elektor Electronics Part 1: Introduction and Circuit Descriptions. February 1998. pp.30-33; Part 2: Construction and Testing. March 1998. pp.40-43, 45.
Two-board design. Runs the MCS-51 BASIC interpreter. 32Kb SRAM, 32Kb EPROM for the 8Kb interpreter and extensions, and up to 16Kb of EPROM space for programs. Schematic and PCB. Software available separately.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Böhling, H. -J., and D. Wulf. "MCS BASIC-52 v.1.3. Rejuvenating a Popular Interpreter."
Elektor Electronics February 2001. pp.20-23.
The MCS BASIC-52 v.1.0 interpreter was originally developed by Intel in 1985 for the 8052-AH microcontroller. Intel has kindly released the interpreter as freeware, leading to on-going development.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Bricknell, Tony, and Maurice Hunt. "RS232 to 8-Bit Digital I/O Coverter Module."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine January 1996. pp.40-45.
PIC16C54-based design with sample programs given in BASIC.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Brighton, Mark. "Frame Store."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine I (CPU Card): Vol. 6, No. 23. June-August 1987. pp.10-15.
Constructional series. Part I describes the construction of the Z80B-based CPU card (6MHz, 64K or 256K RAM).

[DIY Systems: ART]
Brown, Peter R. "Introduction to the Seven-Chip Microcomputer."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.30-31.
Series. Z8671-based 7-chip SBC. Schematics. Uses a Z6132 4K RAM, 2716 2K ROM, 1488 and 1489 serial chips, 74LS04 hex inverter, and 74LS373 octal latch.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Buckin, Andrew. "Hard Disk Interface for the Printer Port."
Elektor Electronics January 2002. pp.12-17.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Burchell, Jonathan C. "Acoustic Modem."
Radio and Electronics World February 1983. pp.10-13.
Constructional article.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Campbell, Bob. "Z80 DRAM Board."
Electronics Today International March 1984. pp.45-48, 69.
Constructional article with a PCB foil pattern. 64K DRAM board for Z80 systems. Uses a 24S10 PROM and eight 4164-15 memory chips.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Campbell, Bob. "Digital Cassette Deck."
Electronics Today International Part 1: September 1984. pp.27-30.
2 part constructional article. Uses the Tanashin Electric TN-3600 cassette deck.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Cassera, Tony. "Interfacing Printers: Parallel Ports Mean Faster Data Transfer."
Practical Computing May 1980. pp.96-97.
Detailed explanation.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Chown, Pete. "Interfacing Dynamic RAM."
Electronics Today International November 1989. pp.28-29.
A general purpose interface for DRAMs. Includes a schematic.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Clements, A. "Keeping an Orderly House: Monitors for Microprocessors."
Personal Computer World November 1978. pp.60-65.
Monitor program design issues, particularly MIKBUG and FBUG.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Colton, Mark. "Punch Lines: Interfacing a Westrex Punch to a 6800 MPU System."
Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.59-61.
Constructional project, with a schematic. The Westrex is a model of paper tape punch.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Cox, Francis E. "Bus of the Century: The S-100 Bus."
Personal Computer World September 1978. pp.54-56.
A description of the S-100 bus.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Cottis, Bob, Dave Howland, and Pat Crowe. "E78. The Europa Bus. A Microprocessor Bus Specification for Eurocard."
Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 2. 1978. pp.69-72; Addenda: July 1978. p.76.
Description of the new bus standard.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Coutts, D. S. "PW Tele-Tennis/Football/Squash/Pelota."
Practical Wireless Vol. 53, No. 2, Issue 844, June 1977. pp.124-130.
Constructional article. A television games system using the General Instruments AY-3-8500 chip.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Croucher, Neville. "RS232 Relay Board."
Electronics Today International July 1989. pp.36-39.
Constructional article. 6 relays that can switch up to 10A at mains voltages.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Doherty, Tony. "4 Rail Micro Computer Power Supply."
Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1982. pp.42-44.
Constructional article.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Durant, Graeme. "Spectrum Co-Processor."
Electronics Today International February 1988. pp.24-29, 60-61; March 1988. pp.39-44, 51; April 1988. pp.43-47, 51; May 1988. pp.40-45.
Constructional article with PCB foils and software listing. The processor card has a 4MHz Z80A with its own operating system in EPROM. The memory card has 256K of paged DRAM. The third board is the interface. Although intended for the ZX Spectrum, the CPU and memory cards are 'general purpose' and can be used on any Z80 system.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Chewter, John. "Building a Hi-Res Graphics Home Computer."
Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1982. pp.37-40, 50-51.
Part 1. Includes the circuit diagram of the 6809 CPU card (effectively a SBC). A new design, 77-68 bus compatible. Expandable to include a RAM card, a cassette interface, and extendible video card (monochrome operation, or with the card fully populated, hi-res colour), ultimately running Flex-9 from 5.25" or 8" Floppy Disk Drives. Built boards were made available by 6809 specialists Stirling Microsystems, who later renamed it the Dennis Computer System.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Chewter, John. "High-Speed Cassette Interface."
Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1982. pp.22-26.
Construction and testing of the CPU card and cassette interface (300-2400 baud).

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Chewter, John. "The V.D.U. Card."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1983. pp.20-23.
Part 4. Description of the graphics board.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Chewter, John. "Video Board Stage II."
Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1983. pp.70-73.
Part 5. Further description of the graphics board and notes on the hardware.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Chewter, John. "High Resolution Graphics."
Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1983. pp.41-45, 91-93.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Chewter, John. "Software for the System."
Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1983. pp.91-92.
Part 7. With a demonstration program in T.S.C BASIC.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Evans, Gary. "Hi-Res Computer Project."
Electronics and Computing Monthly June 1983. pp.87-88.
Brief update.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Izod, Paul, and Alan Stirling. "Floppy Disc Controller."
Electronics and Computing Monthly July. pp.63-66.
WD2793-based. For up to 4 drives, SD or DD, 5.25" or 8" (with a 1MHz CPU, 8" drives are limited to SD).

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Izod, Paul, and Alan Stirling. "FLEX Explained."
Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1983. pp.44-46.
Describes the FLEX-9 OS with particular reference to the E&CM computer.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Izod, Paul, and Alan Stirling. "The Analogue Board."
Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1983. pp.66-69.
Description and circuit diagram.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Izod, Paul, and Alan Stirling. "The A/D Board. Part 2."
Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1983. pp.75-77.
Including corrections of errors in the November article.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly Hi-Res Computer.
Izod, Paul, and Alan Stirling. "On Screen Multimeter."
Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. pp.58-61.
Machine code listing. For the hi-res graphics and analogue boards.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly SAT-16 Computer.
"SAT-16."
Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1983. pp.30-33.
Part 1. Produced in conjunction with Satellite Services. 16-bit design using a 68000 CPU with a 68701 second processor to handle I/O. Uses the G64 bus standard. Sold built and as a kit by Satellite Services.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly SAT-16 Computer.
"SAT-16."
Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1984. pp.54-56.
Assembling the PCBs.

[DIY Systems: ART] Electronics and Computing Monthly SAT-16 Computer.
"SAT-16."
Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.56-59.
The MPU.

[DIY Systems: ART] ETI Cortex.
"16 Bit Computer."
Electronics Today International [Part 1.] November 1982. pp.24-31.
Constructional series. Kits were supplied by Powertran Cybernetics.

[DIY Systems: ART] ETI Cortex.
"Cortex Part 3."
Electronics Today International [Part 3.] January 1983. pp.42-43.
Constructional series.

[DIY Systems: ART] ETI Cortex.
"Cortex BASIC."
Electronics Today International [Part 4.] February 1983. pp.44-45.
Constructional series.

[DIY Systems: ART] ETI Cortex.
"Cortex Centronics Interface."
Electronics Today International Part 1: June 1984. pp.65-67; Part 2: August 1984. pp.23-24, 70.
Constructional article in 2 parts, with a PCB foil.

[DIY Systems: ART] ETI Cortex.
Roberts, Richard. "Parallel I/O for the Cortex."
Electronics Today International September 1985. pp.53-57.
Constructional article. A centronics port, two joystick ports, and 22 lines of programmable I/O.

[DIY Systems: ART] ETI Cortex.
Armstrong, Andy. "Cortex Video Fix."
Electronics Today International February 1986. pp.52-53.
Fixing a problem with the video output.

[DIY Systems: ART]
"ETI Microfile: Terminals."
Electronics Today International March 1977. pp.30-31.
Options for the hobbyist.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Eugeni, E. "RS232-to-RS485 Half-Duplex Adapter."
Elektor Electronics May 2002. pp.24-28.
PIC16C54-based design.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Goadby, David. "Putting Bits in their Place: A Simple 2708 Programmer."
Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.56-58; Corrections: September 1978. p.10.
Constructional project with a schematic. The 2708 is a 1K EPROM.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Godwin, Harold. "The Maplin Modem."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 1, No. 5. December 1982-February 1983. pp.2-6.
Constructional article. 300 baud. Uses the 4412VP and XR2211 chips.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "The 8031 Single Board Computer."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 19, No. 149. May 2000. pp.25-27; Part 2: Vol. 19, No. 150. June 2000. pp.41-45.
SBC design in at least 3 parts.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "8088 Interrupt Based Control Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 2: September 1995. pp.56-63, 70.
Constructional article. Part 2 includes the schematic, PCB and sample code.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. [8088 Interrupt Based Control Computer.] "Single Stepping the 8088 in Real Time."
Electronics Today International November 1995. pp.47-50.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "The ETI 80188 Single Board Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 1: January 1995. pp.20-25, 70.
Constructional series. Part 1 includes the schematic and PCB. A multitasking SBC. Uses an 8259 peripheral controller.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "Universal Infra-Red Printer Adaptor."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 18, No. 138. June 1999. pp.62-64.
Constructional article. IrDa 'lite' interface. Schematic and PCB layout. Uses a PIC16LF84 and HP HSDL1001 IR module.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Hampshire, Nick. "PE SBC-1 (HD63701V)."
Practical Electronics Part 1: June 1986. pp.36-38.
Constructional article in 4 parts. The 1 MHz Hitachi HD63701V microcontroller has 4K of on-chip EPROM, 192 bytes of RAM, with serial and parallel I/O. The instruction set is based upon that of the 6800. The circuit is designed to be built on a Eurocard with the HD63701V in 'expanded multiplexed' mode with an 8-line parallel port and two serial lines (using MC1488 and MC1489 ICs). The design uses four 8K x 8-bit memory chips, either HD6264 RAM or 2764 EPROM.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Harrison, Neil. "Showing Characters."
Personal Computer World August 1978. pp.31-34.
Memory-mapped TV display for a Z80 system, with a program listing.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Harvey, [Robert]. "Centronics Printer Buffer."
Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.16-18; May 1984. pp.30-32; Errors corrected (IC5 should be 74LS04; RESET pin should be pin 35; Pin marked AD0 should be pin 8; Pin marked AD1 should be pin 9): August 1984. p.74.
Z80-based printer buffer with 8K-64K DRAM and software in EPROM (hex dump given).

[DIY Systems: ART]
"HEBOT II."
Hobby Electronics November 1982. pp.9-16, 72.
The Hobby Electronics robot designed to be run by a ZX81. A full kit was offered by Powertran Cybernetics.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Homes, S. J. "Animation Graphics."
Radio and Electronics World January 1983. pp.59-65.
Constructional article. High-resolution colour graphics. Intended for the Nascom but easily adaptable for other Z80 micros. Uses the TMS9928A (525 lines, 60Hz) or TMS9929A (625 lines, 50Hz) chips. Can accomodate the earlier TMS9918 or TMS9918A chip. The board has provision for two AY8910 sound generators.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Hughes, M. J. "PW 'Easybuild' Video-Writer."
Practical Wireless Part 1: August 1976. pp.324-331.
Constructional article. An electronic typewriter that uses a TV as a display. Uses an RO-3-2513 character generator.

[DIY Systems: ART]
James, K. R. "A Mighty Micromite: A COSMAC Microprocessor Based System."
Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.22-25.
An introduction to the 1802 CPU.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Joostens, J. "Micro PLC System."
Elektor Electronics Part 1 (hardware): December 1995. pp.74-79; Part 2 (the industrial PLC): January 1996. pp.7-11.
3 parts. Constructional article. Based on an 87C750 chip, a control computer designed to run programmable logic controller (PLC) functions. Part 1 includes the schematic and PCB. Titles vary, part 2 entitled "Hands-On PLC Programming (Part 1)".

[DIY Systems: ART]
"Keypad Encoder IC with Serial Output."
Elektor Electronics July/August 2001. p.107.
Notes on the EDE1144, designed to interface 16-key or less keypads to a microcontroller or processor.

[DIY Systems: ART
Kitching, Alan. "TV-VDU Conversion."
Television March 1980. pp.248-250.
Constructional project with a schematic for a TTL-RGB convertor designed to be implemented within a colour TV chassis.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Kronis, Petros. "EPE Hybrid Computer."
Everyday Practical Electronics November 2002. pp.798-806; December 2002. pp.896-903.
Hybrid as in analogue and digital.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Lea, Martin. "Brew-It-Yourself."
Personal Computer World January 1980. pp.58-63.
Z80 SBC design with a circuit diagram.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Legrand, B., and D. Mautaulon. "Emulator for 27C256 EPROM with RS232 Control."
Elektor Electronics January 2001. pp.36-41.
PC emulator for the EPROMs most popular with hobbyists.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Lemmens, L. "2532/2732 EPROM Adapter."
Elektor Electronics December 2000. p.20.
A pin-swopping PCB design that permits a 2732 EPROM to be used as a replacement for a 2532 in older kit.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Lerche, David. "TV to RGB Conversion."
Electronics Today International October 1988. pp.40-43, 56.
Constructional article with PCB foils. Includes a circuit to improve the RGB output of an Acorn Electron.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Lorig, K. D. "64K on the 16K Dynamic RAM Card."
Elektor September 1983. pp.29-31.
Constructional article. Replacing the 16K 4116 chips with 64K 4164s on the 16K DRAM project described in Elektor April 1982. Stated to be 'from an idea by K. D. Lorig'.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Manison, K. "HE Microlog: The Return of the Analog Computer."
Hobby Electronics December 1982. pp.9-17, 87.
Constructional project.

[DIY Systems: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. Main Board.
Goodman, Dave. "Z80 CPU Module."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine: Project Book 15. Rayleigh, Essex: Maplin Electronic Supplies, 1985. pp.24-29.
Z80 or Z80A CPU. Up to 8Kb memory.

[DIY Systems: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. Keypad.
Dixey, Graham. "Keypad for the Z80."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine March 1987. pp.28-31.
Eight 7-segment displays.

[DIY Systems: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. Revised version.
Dixey, Graham, and the Maplin Development Team. "The Z80A Development System."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine October 1992. pp.56-68.
The revised version has a touch sensitive keyboard.

[DIY Systems: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. PC-Based Development System.
Abbott, Robin, and Maurice Hunt. "Z80 Development System."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine January 1996. pp.4-11.
Designed by Robin Abbott, Chris Barlow, and Maurice Hunt.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Marshall, Trevor. "CUTS Cassette Interface."
Electronics Today International November 1978. ['Computing Today' Supplement, bound within Electronics Today International, pp.15-18.]
Constructional article with PCB foil.

[DIY Systems: ART]
"'Matchbox' BASIC Computer."
Elektor Electronics Part 3: December 1995. pp.42-45.
3 parts. Constructional article. Based on an 87C51 chip, a derivative of the 8051. Software by Dr. M. Ohsmann.

[DIY Systems: ART]
McIvor, W. "The Hard Keyboard."
Personal Computer World September 1978. pp.46-47.
Constructional article. A self-debouncing keyboard that assembles a byte of data before setting the data ready flag. Intended to reduce the size of keyboard routines in monitors.

[DIY Systems: ART] Microbox II 6809-Based SBC.
[Mills, Gary, and Dave Rumball.] "6809-Based Microcomputer."
Electronics Today International Part 1 (by Gary Mills of Micro Concepts): December 1985. pp.27-29; Part 2 (by Dave Rumball): January 1986. pp.36-39; Part 3 (by Mills and Rumball): February 1986. pp.31-37, 58; Part 4(by Mills): March 1986. pp.47-49; Part 5 (by Mills): April 1986. pp.49-51.
Constructional series. 6809 CPU, 8K EPROM, 64K RAM (56-60K usable), Flex OS, 128K VRAM, RAMdisc, EPROMdisc, two parallel ports, two serial ports, WD1770 FDC.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Money, Steve A. "TV Games in Colour."
Television Part 1: July 1977. pp.461-463; Part 2: August 1977. pp.526-527.
Constructional article with schematic and PCB layout using the National Semiconductor MM57105 games chip, and the LM1889 video modulator.

[DIY Systems: ART] Nanocomp Microprocessor Trainer.
Barton, P. C. "Nanocomp to Teletypewriter Interface."
Electronics and Wireless World October 1983. pp.75-76.
With software for the 6502 version. The article concludes: 'Bob Coates described the 6502 Nanocomp microprocessor trainer in the January 1981 issue, pp.32-36, and the 6809 version in July 1981, pp.33-37. An eprom programmer for both versions was described in the January 1982 issue, pp.30-33, and interfaces for expansion in November of the same year, pp.32-34'.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Ogilvie, Daniel. "Digital Framestore."
Electronics Today International Part 1: December 1984. pp.61-65; Part 2: January 1985. pp.44-47; Part 3: February 1985. pp.55-58; Part 4: March 1985. pp.59-62, 65; Part 5: April 1985. pp.48-50, 68-69.
5 part constructional article to build a digital framestore based on 512K of DRAM and interface it to a micro. With a PCB foil pattern.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Ogilvie, Daniel. "Low Cost Framestore."
Electronics Today International Part 1: September 1986. pp.36-41; Part 2: October 1986. pp.48-50; Part 3: November 1986. pp.43-45, 60-61.
3 part constructional article to build a digital framestore. With a PCB foil pattern.

[DIY Systems: ART
Parr, Andrew. "Introduction to VDUs."
Television December 1979. pp.78-83.
A technical overview.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Parkin, L. G. "Step & Freeze Instructions with the Microstepper."
Practical Electronics April 1984. pp.18-25.
Single-step any microcomputer system.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Penfold, Robert. "Interface."
Everyday Electronics March 1992. pp.160-161.
Column. Using D/A converters.

[DIY Systems: ART] PhizzyB Computer.
Maxfield, Clive 'Max', Alvin Brown, and Alan Winstanley. "PhizzyB Computers."
Everyday Practical Electronics November 1998. pp.804-813; December 1998; January 1999. pp.48-55; February 1999; March 1999. pp.177-182, 184-189; April 1999. pp.274-282; May 1999. pp.356-363; June 1999. pp.450-455.
7 parts. PhizzyB SBC, simulator and PhizzyBot robot. Original hardware design by Andrew Ayre. Developed as a product by Maxfield & Montrose Interactive Inc.

[DIY Systems: ART]
"R&EW Data Brief: MC1377 Colour Signal Encoder."
Radio and Electronics World January 1984. pp.85-86.
Data file. Encodes RGB signals into composite video in either PAL or NTSC formats. Often paired with the MC1374 modulator.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Reelsen, H. "8032/8052 Single-Board Computer."
Elektor Electronics May 1991. pp.17-23.
The Mark II version of the design published in November 1987. Constructional article. Built on a single-sided Eurocard. Can use an 8032, 80C32, or 8052AH-BASIC microcontroller. 32K ROM, 32K RAM, on-board EPROM programmer, memory back-up battery. To 15MHz (8032 or 8052AH-BASIC) or 24MHz (80C32). Includes a schematic, PCB, and program to unload the BASIC interpreter from the 8052AH-BASIC, transfer it to EPROM, and run it with an 8032 or 80C32.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Rietjens, A. "Faster MCS52 Processor."
Elektor Electronics December 1996. p.62.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Allows a DS87C530 (running at up to 33MHz) to replace an 8031, 8032, 8051, or 8052 microcontroller.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Schwark, S. "IDE Hard Disk Interface for 8-Bit Controllers."
Elektor Electronics March 2001. pp.44-49.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Sear, Lionel. "A FAX Receiver."
Radio and Electronics World January 1984. pp.34-39.
Constructional article. A two-board design for processing weather FAX data and printing it on an Epson MX80 printer. One board handles demodulation, tone detection, logic, and timing. The second board is a dedicated Z80 SBC with 2K RAM and the program in a 2K ROM (using a 2716). Includes PCB foils.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Spence Jim. "Computer Controlled Stepper Motors."
Electronics Today International August 1994. pp.18-22, 69.
An application for the ETI FORTH Experimenter's Computer. The software is to be covered in the next month's article.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Stone, Richard. "6802 Development Board."
Everyday with Practical Electronics August 1994. pp.608-615.
Contructional article with schematic and PCB layout. 6802, 6522 VIA, 6551 ACIA, 8K ROM, 8K RAM.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Stuart, Ray. "Computer Terminal."
Practical Electronics I: February 1984. pp.16-21.
Constructional article. Baed on the Thomson SFF96364 CRTC chip. BBC Micro interface promised for part 2 of the article.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"System 68 is Here!"
Electronics Today International [Introduction.] March 1977. p.33.
Constructional series. System 68 is 6800 CPU-based, but with a modular CPU board allowing others to be used. 4K-64K memory, keyboard, and VDU interfaces.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"ASCII Keyboard."
Electronics Today International [Part 1.] April 1977. pp.25-30.
Constructional series.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"Mainframe PSU."
Electronics Today International [Part 2. By Jim Perry.] May 1977. pp.55-59.
Constructional series.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"Video Display Unit."
Electronics Today International [Parts 3-4. By John Miller-Kirkpatrick.] June 1977. pp.33-38; July 1977. pp.54-58.
Constructional series. These two VDU boards allow the system to use a normal TV as a VDU, or to connect it to other monitors.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"System Bus & VDU Interfacing."
Electronics Today International [Part 5. By John Miller-Kirkpatrick.] August 1977. pp.45-47.
Constructional series.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"6800 CPU Card."
Electronics Today International [Parts 6-7. By John Miller-Kirkpatrick.] September 1977. pp.22-26; October 1977. pp.63-68.
Constructional series.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"TTY Card."
Electronics Today International [Parts 8-9. By John Miller-Kirkpatrick.] November 1977. pp.45-50; December 1977. pp.59-62.
Constructional series. An optional I/O board with two UARTs and a 20mA loop interface. Part 9 (December) includes a circuit for a simple cassette interface.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"CUTS Card."
Electronics Today International [Parts 10-11. By John Miller-Kirkpatrick.] January 1978. pp.61-63; February 1978. pp.45-48.
Constructional series. An interface card for a Kansas City format cassette interface. General corrections for the series are given on p.48 of part 11.

[DIY Systems: ART] System 68.
"Software."
Electronics Today International [Part 12. By John Miller-Kirkpatrick.] March 1978. pp.59-61.
Constructional series. A complete listing of the ETIBUG2 PROM.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Trevennor, Alan. "Simple Z80 Single Stepper Circuit."
Practical Electronics December 1986. p.48.
Constructional article.

[DIY Systems: ART] Triton.
Hughes, Mike. "One Board Home Computer."
Electronics Today International November 1978. pp.16-33.
Constructional article with schematics for the Triton SBC sold by Transam.

[DIY Systems: ART] Triton.
Hughes, Mike. "Triton 8K EPROM Card."
Electronics Today International June 1979. pp.73-78, 117.
Constructional article with PCB foil.

[DIY Systems: ART]
"TV Games Unit."
Electronics Today International May 1977. pp.12-16.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. Based on the AY-3-8500. Four basic games with two more that can only be played with an additional rifle. A project for a rifle was published in the July 1977 issue.

[DIY Systems: ART]
[Tyler, Jon. "Typewriter Interface."] "Typewriter Interface Update."
Electronics Today International March 1984. pp.25-26.
Corrections to the constructional article in the October 1983 issue. The typewriter concerned is the Silver Reed EX42.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Tyler, Jon. "Keyboard Interface."
Electronics Today International September 1984. pp.24-26, 71.
Constructional article to allow the use of a Silver Reed EX42 typewriter as a computer keyboard. Uses a KR2376 keyboard encoder.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Vermeulen, H. "VDU Card."
Elektor. September 1983. pp.38-45.
Constructional project. General purpose VDU interface. Uses a 6845 VDU Controller, 2732 EPROM to hold the character data, and 2K VRAM (6116) for 80 x 24 text.

[DIY Systems: ART]
"VGA-to-BNC Adapter."
Elektor Electronics July/August 2001. pp.108-109.
To connect a VGA output to a monitor with three BNC inputs and composite synchronisation ('sync on green').

[DIY Systems: ART]
"Video Graphics: How Does a Video Card Work?"
Elektor September 1983. pp.18-21.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Vowles, Russel. "Smart Talker."
Electronics Today International January 1988. pp.39-45, 76.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. A speech synthesiser that connects to a variety of computers using an RS232 or RS423 serial interface.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Vowles, Russell. "The Ultimate Speech Synthesiser."
Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1984. pp.24-25; April 1984. pp.42-44.
Constructional article. Can be used by any computer with a centronics parallel port. Uses the SPO256-AL2 chip. Kit supplied by LB Electronics. BBC and Dragon test routines given.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Walker, Phil. "Designing Memory."
Electronics Today International February 1985. pp.18-21.
Using the examples of the 64K DRAM card (December 1984) and DRAM fix (January 1985) projects, Walker describes the process involved in obtaining a working design.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Warne, Alan. "RF/RGB TV Interface."
Radio and Electronics World June 1983. pp.8-11.
Constructional article. For the Ferguson TX9.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Warne, Alan. "RGB Interface for the Ferguson TX-90."
Radio and Electronics World January 1984. pp.46-49.
Constructional article. Converts a Ferguson 37140 TV, which uses the TX-90 chassis. Includes PCB foil.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Watford Electronics. "TV Games Rifle."
Electronics Today International June 1977. pp.20-22.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. Works with the TV Games Unit project published in the May 1977 issue.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Whewell, Leycester. "Multi-Standard Printer Buffer."
Electronics Today International November 1987. pp.43-48, 59.
Constructional article. 6803 CPU-based 64K or 256K printer buffer with Centronics and RS232 serial interfaces. With schematic, PCB foil, and firmware listing (to go on a 2764 or 27128 EPROM).

[DIY Systems: ART]
Whitlock, Richard. "STE Bus."
Practical Electronics Part 1: 'The Omnibus is Here!', December 1986. pp.38-41.
A standardised 8-bit bus.

[DIY Systems: ART]
Williams, John. "68705 EPROM Blower."
Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.61-63; May 1984. pp47-49.
Constructional article. EPROM blower based on the 68705 chip.

[DIY Systems: ART] Wireless World FORTH Computer.
Woodroffe, Brian. "FORTH Computer."
Wireless World Part 1 (CPU and memory): May 1983. pp.53-58; Part 2 (Circuit, video, and peripherals): June 1983. pp.55-58; Part 3 (Software, disk controller, and PSU): July 1983. pp.58-61; Part 4 (Construction tips): August 1983. pp.44-45; Part 5 (Disk drives, including the use of 8" drives): September 1983. pp.64-67.
5 parts. 6809-based, 1.5MHz clock, EF69364 display processor, 6850 CIA (for the RS232 interface), and a 6821 PIA.

[DIY Systems: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Burchell, Jonathan C. "Z-8 Program Development System."
Radio and Electronics World I: February 1982. pp.12-17; II: March 1982. pp.12-17; III: April 1982. pp.31-34.
Constructional article. Z8-based development system using the Z8671 microcontroller (a Z8601 masked by Zilog to contain a 2K BASIC interpreter). Includes 8K RAM, an on-board 2716/2732 EPROM programmer, 4K utility software in EPROM, 19k2 serial interface, and a cassette interface.

[DIY Systems: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Burchell, Jonathan C. "Autostarting the Z8 TBPDS."
Radio and Electronics World July 1982. pp.79-80.
Constructional article.

[DIY Systems: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Jasper, B. "Z8 Assembler in EPROM."
Radio and Electronics World December 1982. pp.64-69.

[DIY Systems: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Burchell, Jonathan C. "Minimum Chip Z8 System."
Radio and Electronics World January 1983. pp.10-13.
Constructional article. Designed to execute programs developed using the full development system.

[DIY Systems: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Hinder, Richard. "Z8 EXEC. An Operating System for the Z8 Microcomputer Board."
Radio and Electronics World May 1983. pp.30-33.
A command-line interpreter supplied in three EPROMs with 15 commands, 6 routines, and an interrupt-driven real time clock.

[DIY Systems: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Harris, Chris. "Z8 Backplane."
Radio and Electronics World July 1983. pp.43-45.
Constructional article.

[Language: General]
Hofeditz, Calvin A. Computer Programming Languages in Practice.
London: Heinemann, 1985.
xvi, 246pp. Made Simple Computer Books. Contents: 1. What Programming Is; 2. Components of a Programming Language; 3. BASIC - Beginner's All-Purpose Symbolic Instruction Code; 4. COBOL - Common Business Oriented Language; 5. Other Languages, Old and New.

[Language: General]
Juliff, Peter Laurence. Program Design. The Art of Structured Programming.
London: Interface, 1984.

[Language: General]
Marshall, Garry J. Computer Languages and Their Uses.
London: Granada, 1983.

[Language: General]
Perry, Greg. SAMS Teach Yourself Beginning Programming in 24 Hours.
Indianapolis, Indiana: SAMS, 1998.
xv, 492pp. 2nd edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: SAMS, 2002 (xiv, 479, with a CD-ROM containing Liberty BASIC 2.02 compiler and Java Forte compiler). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Start Programming Today; 2. Programming Fundamentals; 3. Stepping Up to Java; 4. Other Programming Languages (Visual BASIC; C; C++; HTML; JavaScript; Dynamic HTML; XML; .NET); 5. The Business of Programming; 6. Appendices.

[Language: General: ART] Herman, Gary. "Language in Control." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. Your Robot Supplement. pp.13-14.
Languages suitable for the control of robots.

[Language: General: ART] James, Mike. "Programming Languages." Computer Shopper December 2004. pp.235-238, 240.
Overview of: C# Express, DarkBASIC 1.13, Eclipse Project, EthosBASIC, Imagine Logo, JBuilder Foundation, Liberty BASIC, NetBeans, PureBASIC, Python, True BASIC Bronze, and Visual BASIC .NET Express.

[Language: BASEX]
Warme, Paul K. BASEX: A Simple Language and Compiler for 8080 Systems.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Books, 1979.
For the 8080 family (8080, Z80, 8085).

[Language: BASEX]
Warme, Paul K. My Micro Speaks BASEX (and Loves It).
Rochelle Park, New Jersey: Hayden Book Co., 1981.

[Language: BASIC: Manual]
Microsoft Corporation. MS-DOS Version 3.3; GW-BASIC Version 3.2.
[n.p.]: Microsoft Corporation for Hyundai, 1987.
590pp. [Part I: MS-DOS:] 1. More about Files and Directories; 2. About Commands; 3. MS-DOS Commands; 4. Batch Processing; 5. MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys; 6. The Line Editor (EDLIN); 7. Link: A Linker; 8. Debug; Appendix A. Instructions for Users with Single Floppy Disk Drive Systems; Appendix B. How to Configure Your System; Appendix C. Installable Device Drivers; Appendix D. Configuring Your Hard Disk (FDISK); Appendix E. How to Use Code Pages; Appendix F. MS-DOS Message Directory; Index; [Part II: GW-BASIC:] 1. Introduction; 2. Using the GW-BASIC Interpreter; 3. Writing Programs Using the GW-BASIC Editor; 4. Working with Files and Devices; 5. Using Advanced Features; 6. Language Reference; Appendix A. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix B. Error Codes and Error Messages; Appendix C. Mathematical Functions Not Intrinsic to GW-BASIC; Index. Document Nos. 410630013-330-R04-0787; 410130001-320-000-0286. Coded: E4009203802A.

[Language: BASIC]
Alcock, Donald Geoffrey. Illustrating BASIC (A Simple Programming Language).
Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, 1977.
Reprinted: 1988. Reprinted with corrections: 1978. Subsequent reprints: 1978, 1979 (twice), 1980, 1981 (3 times), 1982, 1983 (twice; second reprint: ix, 134pp; comb bound; preface dated January 1977). Contents (2nd 1983 reprint): 1. Components of the Language; 2. Input & Output, Expressions and Functions; 3. Control; 4. Arrays; 5. Matrices; 6. Complete Example Programs; 7. Commands and Signing On; 8. Files of Data; 9. Syntax.

[Language: BASIC]
Ault, Roz. BASIC Programming for Kids. BASIC Programming on Personal Computers by Apple, Atari, Commodore, Radio Shack, Texas Instruments, Timex Sinclair.
Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1983.

[Language: BASIC]
Axelson, Janet Louise. The Microcontroller Idea Book: Circuits, Programs and Applications Featuring the 8052-BASIC Microcontroller.
Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, 1994.

[Language: BASIC]
Chien, Chao C. Advanced Business BASIC for Microcomputers.
Homewood, Illinois: R. D. Irwin, 1985.

[Language: BASIC]
Compaq Computer Corporation. BASIC Version 3.2 Reference Guide.
3rd edition; [n.p.]: Compaq Computer Corporation, 1987.
3rd edition: February 1987. Ring bound, multi-paged. Binder has the title BASIC Version 3 Reference Guide. Assembly: 106653-001; Text: 106654-001; Binder: 106655-001. Contents: 1. Welcome to BASIC; 2. Getting Started and Using BASIC; 3. Reviewing and Practicing BASIC; 4. The BASIC Interpreter or What Makes BASIC Work; 5. Disk Files and How to Use Them; 6. Special Editing Keys Used in BASIC; 7. Constants, Variables, Expressions, and Operators; 8. Statements, Functions, Commands, and Variables Used in BASIC; Appendix A. Error Codes and Messages; Appendix B. Derived Mathematical Functions; Appendix C. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix D. Assembly Language (Machine Code) Subroutines; Appendix E. Converting Other BASIC Programs to BASIC as Developed by COMPAQ; Appendix F. RS-232 Communications; Appendix G. Hexadecimal Equivalents; Appendix H. Key Scan Codes (Standard Compaq Keyboard); Appendix I. Display Information.

[Language: BASIC]
Gosling, Peter E. Beginning BASIC.
London: Macmillan, 1977.
vi, 105pp. Second edition: London: Palgrave Macmillan, 1982 ([vi], 106pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. What is a Computer?; 2. Talking to a Computer; 3. Introduction to BASIC; 4. Teleprinter Algebra; 5. Printing Literals; 6. Conditional and Unconditional Jumps; 7. Commas and Semicolons; 8. FOR...NEXT Loops; 9. Lists and Arrays; 10. Function Statements; 11. REM Statements; 12. Saving and Deleting Programs; 13. Using the Paper-Tape Punch and Reader; 14. Specimen Programs; Summary of BASIC.

[Language: BASIC]
Gosling, Peter E. Program Your Microcomputer in BASIC.
London: Macmillan, 1981.
91pp. US edition: Beaverton, Oregon: Dilithium Press, 1981 (91pp). Reprinted: London: Macmillan, 1982; Reprinted: London: Macmillan, 1983 (91pp). Contents (1983 reprint): Introduction; Conversing with a Computer; Basic BASIC; Glossary of Terms; 1. Use of INPUT, LET, PRINT; 2. Mathematical Functions; 3. Literals and Use of Commas and Semi-Colons; 4. GOTO and IF...THEN...; 5. ON...GOTO...; 6. AND, OR and NOT; 7. FOR...NEXT Loops; 8. READ and DATA; 9. TAB, SPC and POS; 10. User-Defined Functions; 11. Lists; 12. Arrays; 13. Strings; 14. Subroutines; 15. Serial Files; 16. General; BASIC Commands; Bug-Hunting, or Why My Programs Never Work First Time; The Operating System.

[Language: BASIC]
Hartwig, Olaf. Atari ST. ST BASIC to C: Move Quickly Beyond the BASICS with the Powerful C Language.
Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, [1986].
Vol. 11 in the series. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1986 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany) and 1986 (Abacus). 2nd printing: May 1988 (231pp). Contents (2nd printing): 1. Development, Applications, and the C Language; 2. First Steps for (Former) BASIC Programmers; 3. The Basic Elements of C; 4. Screen Input/Output Operations; 5. Variable Types in C; 6. C Pointers; 7. Arithmetic Operators and Expressions; 8. Control Structures in C; 9. Common Mistakes of BASIC Programmers; 10. C Functions; 11. Structures; 12. An Overview of C; Appendices.

[Language: BASIC]
James, Mike. The Complete Programmer: A Guide to Better Programming in BASIC.
London: Granada, 1983.
viii, 149pp. US edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1984 (viii, 149pp).

[Language: BASIC]
Lundy, Thomas, and Rory O'Sullivan. Beginning Structured Programming in BASIC and COMAL.
Dublin: Gill and Macmillan, 1990.
318pp.

[Language: BASIC]
MCS BASIC-52 Reference Manual.
Santa Clara, California: Intel, 1986.

[Language: BASIC]
Osborne, Adam, Gordon Eubanks, Jr., and Martin McNiff. CBASIC User Guide.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1981.
viii, 215pp.

[Language: BASIC]
Prigmore, Clive. 30 Hour BASIC.
Cambridge: National Extension College, 1981.
248pp. Spiral bound. ZX81 adaptation by Richard Freeman and Robert Horvath (1982); ZX Spectrum adaptation by Paul Shreeve (1983).

[Language: BASIC]
Purdum, Jack Jay. BASIC-80 and CP/M.
New York: Macmillan; London: Collier Macmillan, [1983].

[Language: BASIC]
Wittig, Siegmar. Into BASIC.
[London]: Argus Specialist Publications, 1982.
3 parts. 128pp. Edited by Henry Budgett. Acknowledgements to German Translating Services and Tina Boylan. Stated to be 'Translated by Siegmar Wittig et al'. Issued over 3 months, perhaps as a free gift with a magazine.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Alexander, Mark. "NIBL - Tiny BASIC for National's SC/MP Kit. Complete Documentation and Annotated Source Code."
Dr. Dobb's Journal November/December 1976, Vol. 1, No. 10. pp.34-50 (pp.331-347 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Dickenson, John, Jerry Barber, John Teeter, Royce Eckard, and Eugene Fisher. "Lawrence Livermore Lab's 8080 BASIC. Includes Floating Point Package, User Documentation and Complete, Annotated Source."
Dr. Dobb's Journal January 1977, Vol. 2, No. 1. pp.8-62 (pp.18-72 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Greeb, Fred J. "Denver Tiny BASIC for 8080s. A 2nd Version that Includes 1-D Arrays."
Dr. Dobb's Journal March 1976, Vol. 1, No. 3. pp.20-30 (pp.75-85 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions given in a letter from Fred J. Greeb, Dr. Dobb's Journal September 1976, Vol. 1, No. 8. p.34 (p.261 of the annual volume).

[Language: BASIC: ART]
James, Mike. "Back to BASIC."
Computer Shopper September 2000, No. 151. pp.401-405.
Review of LibertyBASIC, PowerBASIC, QBASIC, TrueBASIC, VisualBASIC 6, VisualBASIC for Applications, VisualBASIC Script, and XBASIC.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
James, Mike. "Building BASIC. Part 4. Strings."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.53-56.
8 part series.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
James, Mike. "Building BASIC. Part 5. Functions and Subroutines."
Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1982. pp.65-66.
8 part series.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
James, Mike. "Building BASIC. Part 6. Logic."
Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1982. pp.61-63.
8 part series.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
James, Mike. "Building BASIC. Part 7. Advanced BASIC."
Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1982. pp.63-65.
8 part series.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
James, Mike. "Building BASIC. Part 8. Computers & Electronics."
Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1982. pp.62-64.
8 part series.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Mueller, Erik T. "MINOL - Tiny BASIC with Strings in 1.75K Bytes."
Dr. Dobb's Journal April 1976, Vol. 1, No. 4. pp.9-17 (pp.95-103 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions and corrections given in letters from Erik T. Mueller, Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1976, Vol. 1, No. 6. p.36 (p.184 of the annual volume); August 1976, Vol. 1, No. 7. p.32 (p.222 of the annual volume).

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Scott, Jeff. "An Introduction to Programming in BASIC."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 10, No. 42. February-March 1991. pp.58-63, 68-71.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Wang, Li-Chen. "Palo Alto Tiny BASIC."
Dr. Dobb's Journal May 1976, Vol. 1, No. 5. pp.12-25 (pp.129-142 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions given in a letter from Li-Chen Wang, Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1976, Vol. 1, No. 6. p.35 (p.183 of the annual volume).

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Wang, Li-Chen. "Palo Alto Tiny BASIC. Version Three."
PCC's Reference Book of Personal and Home Computing. Edited by Dwight McCabe. Menlo Park, California: People's Computer Company, July 1977. pp.58-88.
For the 8080 or Z80. Full listing.

[Language: BASIC: ART]
Whipple, Dick, and John Arnold. "Tiny BASIC, Extended Version."
Dr. Dobb's Journal January 1976, Vol. 1, No. 1. pp.14-17 (pp.18-21 of the annual volume); February 1976, Vol. 1, No. 2. pp.13-31 (pp.35-53 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions given in a letter from Charles Skeldon, Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1976, Vol. 1, No. 6. p.34 (p.182 of the annual volume). Additions given in a letter from The Penny Tiger, Dr. Dobb's Journal September 1976, Vol. 1, No. 8. p.30 (p.257 of the annual volume).

[Language: C/C++]
Barkakati, Nabajyoti. The Waite Group's QuickC Bible.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams, 1989.
xiv, 804pp

[Language: C/C++]
Barr, Michael. Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 1999.
xvii, 174pp. 2nd edition with the title Programming Embedded Systems with C and GNU Development Tools by Michael Barr and Anthony Massa: Sebastopol: O'Reilly, 2006 (xxi, 301pp).

[Language: C/C++]
Field, Simon, Kathleen Mandis, and Dave Myers. COMPUTE!'s ST Applications: Programming in C.
Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1986.
viii, 327pp.

[Language: C/C++]
Gifford, J. Daniel. QuickC Instant Reference.
San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1989.
xxi, 391pp. For v.2.0.

[Language: C/C++]
Hartwig, Olaf. Atari ST. ST BASIC to C: Move Quickly Beyond the BASICS with the Powerful C Language.
Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, [1986].
Vol. 11 in the series. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1986 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany) and 1986 (Abacus). 2nd printing: May 1988 (231pp). Contents (2nd printing): 1. Development, Applications, and the C Language; 2. First Steps for (Former) BASIC Programmers; 3. The Basic Elements of C; 4. Screen Input/Output Operations; 5. Variable Types in C; 6. C Pointers; 7. Arithmetic Operators and Expressions; 8. Control Structures in C; 9. Common Mistakes of BASIC Programmers; 10. C Functions; 11. Structures; 12. An Overview of C; Appendices.

[Language: C/C++]
Lawrence, David, and Mark England. The C Compendium.
London: Sunshine, 1985.
243pp.

[Language: C/C++]
McGrath, Mike. C Programming in Easy Steps.
Southam, Warwickshire: Computer Step, 2002.
192pp. Reprinted: 2004. Contents: 1. Introducing C; 2. Storing Data; 3. Setting Constant Values; 4. Performing Operations; 5. Making Statements; 6. Using Functions; 7. Working with Bits; 8. Pointing to Data; 9. Manipulating Strings; 10. Building Structures; 11. Reading & Writing Files; 12. Interesting Functions.

[Language: C/C++]
Mednieks, Zigurd R., and Terry M. Schilke. C Programming Techniques for the Macintosh.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1986.
xi, 322pp. Contents: [Part I. Tutorial on Macintosh Programming in C:] 1. Beginnings; 2. C and Other Languages; 3. Knowing C, Thinking C; 4. QuickDraw and Windows; 5. Revolutionary Software, Classical Microcomputer Hardware; 6. The Resource Compiler; 7. An Example: Internal Structure of a Macintosh Application; 8. An Example: Exploring the Mandelbrot Set; 9. Extending Our Grasp; 10. Debugging; [Part II. Reference Handbook:] QuickDraw; Event Manager; Window Manager; Dialog Manager; Memory Manager; Menu Manager; Control Manager; Text Edit; Standard File Package; File Manager; Font Manager; Print Manager; Resource Manager; Toolbox Utilities; Desk Manager; Scrap Manager; Segment Loader.

[Language: C/C++]
Schildt, Herbert. C Made Easy.
Berkeley, California: Osborne McGraw-Hill, 1985.
x, 292pp. Contents: 1. Introducing C; 2. General Overview of C; 3. Variables, Constants, Operators, and Expressions; 4. Program Control Statements; 5. Functions in Detail; 6. Input, Output, and Disk Files; 7. Pointers; 8. Arrays; 9. Structures, Unions, and User-Defined Types; 10. Writing a C Program; 11. Common Programming Errors; Appendix A. C Summary; Appendix B. Common C Library Functions.

[Language: C/C++]
Schildt, Herbert. ANSI C Made Easy.
Berkeley, California: Osborne McGraw-Hill, 1989.
x, 452pp. Preface dated December 1988. Contents: 1. Getting Acquainted with C; 2. An Overview of C; 3. Introducing Variables, Constants, and Operators; 4. Selection, Iteration, and Jump Statements; 5. Arrays and Strings; 6. Pointers; 7. Functions; 8. Console I/O; 9. File I/O; 10. Structures and Unions; 11. Advanced Data Types; 12. Advanced Operators; 13. The C Preprocessor; 14. Writing a C Program; 15. Common Errors; Appendix A. Some Common C Library Functions; Appendix B. C Keyword Summary; Appendix C. The goto.

[Language: C/C++]
Townsend, Carl. QuickC Programming for the IBM.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1988.
xii, 393pp. 2nd printing: 1988. Contents: [Part I: Overview of QuickC:] 1. Introduction to QuickC; 2. Getting Started; [Part II: The Language:] 3. Representing Data; 4. Basic Input and Output; 5. Arithmetic Operations; 6. Program Control: 'if' and 'Switch' Structures; 7. Program Control: Iteration Structures; 8. Using Functions and Macros; 9. Managing the Storage of Variables; 10. Arrays and Pointers; 11. Using Character Strings; 12. Using Data Structures; 13. Using Files and Other Input and Output; 14. Using Graphics; [Part III: Developing Programs with QuickC:] 15. Introduction to Structured Programming; 16. Developing with QuickC; 17. Managing Databases with QuickC; 18. High-Level Design: Menus; 19. Adding Database Records; 20. Editing and Deleting Records; 21. Reporting and Processing Programs; [Appendices:] A. Installation and Setup; B. QuickC Library Summary; C. ASCII Character Set; D. QuickC Operators; E. QuickC Data Types; F. QuickC Keywords; G. Resources; H. Tips for QuickC Users.

[Language: C/C++]
Wortman, Leon A., and Thomas O. SideBottom. The C Programming Tutor.
Bowie, Maryland: R. J. Brady Co., 1984.
xiv, 274pp. Preface dated November 1983. International edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall International, 1984 (xiv, 274pp). Contents: [Part 1. The Tutorial:] 1. Getting Started; 2. Interactive Programming; 3. Working with Numbers; 4. Numbers with Fractions; 5. Arrays and Input/Output to Strange Places; 6. Things Called Strings; 7. Paths and Pointers; 8. More Pointed Topics; [Part 2. Useful Programs:] 9. EPSET: A Printer Configurator; 10. TXTRDR1: Quantitative Analysis of Text; 11. TXTRDR2 and TXTRDR3: Qualitative Analysis of Text; 12. WFREQ: Analysis of Word Frequency; 13. XREF: C Program Cross Reference Listing; 14. Calls: C Program Call Chart Generator; Postlude: There's More To It!; Appendix A. Getting Started with Microcomputer C Compilers; Appendix B. ctype.h; Appendix C. ctype.c; Appendix D. math.h.

[Language: C/C++: ART]
King, Richard. "Aztec Language."
Personal Computer News No. 48. 11 February 1984. pp.53-54.
Review of the Aztec-C compiler (for the Apple, CP/M-80/86, MS-DOS, PC-DOS, and the Commodore 64).

[Language: COBOL]
Bookman, Harvey. COBOL/370: For VS COBOL and COBOL II Programmers.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1993.
xxi, 355pp. J. Ranade IBM series.

[Language: COBOL]
Cooper, James William, Nancy Beth Stern, and Robert Alan Stern. Programming in COBOL/400.
New York: Wiley, 1997.
xxi, 767pp. 2nd edition: New York: Wiley, 2002 (viii, 722pp).

[Language: COBOL]
Gelb, Neil G. Using COBOL in an MP/M System.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1983.
110pp. Illustrated by Ralph E. Lund, Jr.

[Language: COBOL]
Kirk, David Shelby. COBOL/370 for Power Programmers.
New York: Wiley, 1994.
xxvi, 384pp. The Wiley-QED IBM Mainframe series.

[Language: COBOL]
Lancaster, G. T. Programming in COBOL.
Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1972.
ix, 141pp. Reprinted: 1978. Contents (1978 reprint): 1. Why COBOL?; 2. COBOL Language and Structure; 3. Identfication and Environmental Divisions; 4. Procedure Division - Arithmetic Verbs; 5. Procedure Division - Move; Go to; Conditional Verbs; 6. Procedure Division - Open; Close; Read; Write; Accept; Display Verbs; 7. Procedure Division - Other Verbs; 8. Data Division I; 9. Data Division II; 10. Testing COBOL Source Programs; 11. Program Questions; Appendix: Reserved Words.

[Language: COBOL]
Le Bert, Joseph J., and James B. Massoni. Advanced Interactive COBOL for Micros: A Practical Approach.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1988.
xvii, 283pp.

[Language: COBOL]
Saxon, James Anthony. COBOL: A Self-Instructional Manual.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, [1963].
190pp. 2nd printing: 1964. 3rd printing: 1965. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1971 (xvii, 229pp).

[Language: COBOL]
Stang, Norman. COBOL for Micros.
London: Newnes Technical, 1983.
193pp.

[Language: COBOL]
Stern, Nancy Beth, and Robert Alan Stern. COBOL Programming.
New York: Wiley, 1970.
xi, 351pp. 2nd edition: New York: Wiley, 1975 (xii, 482pp). Later retitled Structured COBOL Programming.

[Language: COBOL]
Stern, Nancy Beth, and Robert Alan Stern. Structured COBOL Programming.
3rd edition; New York: Wiley, 1979.
Previously titled COBOL Programming. 4th edition: 1985; 5th edition: 1988; 6th edition: 1991; 7th edition: 1994; 8th edition: 1997 (with a 3.5" floppy disk); Year 2000 update edition: 1999 (with a 3.5" floppy disk); 9th edition: 2000 (with a 3.5" floppy disk). Later retitled COBOL for the 21st Century.

[Language: COBOL]
Stern, Nancy Beth, Robert Alan Stern, and James P. Ley. COBOL for the 21st Century.
10th edition; New York: Wiley, 2003.
With a CD-ROM. Previously Structured COBOL Programming by Stern and Stern.

[Language: COBOL]
Sullivan, Kevin. Practical COBOL for Microcomputers.
Wilmslow: Sigma, [c.1983].

[Language: COBOL]
United States of America, American National Standards Institute. American National Standard COBOL.
New York: ANSI, [c.1969].
Report No. X3.23-1968. Approved 23 August 1968. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication, 21.

[Language: COBOL]
United States of America, Short Range Task Force of the Conference on Data Systems Languages. Report to Conference on Data Systems Languages, including Initial Specifications for a Common Business oriented Language, COBOL, for Programming Electronic Digital Computers.
Washington: [US Government], 1960.

[Language: COBOL]
United States of America, Maintenance Committee of the Conference on Data Systems Languages. COBOL-61 Extended. Report to Conference on Data Systems Languages, Including Extended Specifications for a Common Business Oriented Language [COBOL] for Programming Electronic Digital Computers.
Washington: [US Government], 1962.

[Language: COBOL: ART]
McMillan, John. "COBOL Means Business."
Practical Computing May 1980. pp.86-88.
Overview.

[Language: COMAL]
Christensen, Borge R. Beginning COMAL.
Chichester: Ellis Horwood, 1982.
332pp.

[Language: COMAL]
Gratte, Ingvar. Starting with COMAL.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice/Hall International, 1985.
vii, 203pp.

[Language: COMAL]
Kelly, John J. Foundations in Computer Studies with COMAL.
Dublin: Educational Company, 1983.
viii, 305pp. 2nd edition: Dublin: Educational Company of Ireland, 1984.

[Language: COMAL]
Lindsay, Len. The COMAL Handbook.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Company, 1983.
xxiv, 310pp. 2nd edition (with 'Now for the Commodore 64' added to the title): Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Company, 1984 (xii, 467pp).

[Language: COMAL]
Lundy, Thomas, and Rory O'Sullivan. Beginning Structured Programming in BASIC and COMAL.
Dublin: Gill and Macmillan, 1990.
318pp.

[Language: FORTH]
Anderson, Anita, and Tracy Martin. Mastering FORTH.
Bowie, Maryland: Brady Communications Co., 1984.
vii, 216pp. FORTH-83 standard. Revised and expanded edition: New York: Brady, 1989 (246pp). Contents (1984 edition): 1. Introduction; 2. Definitions; 3. The Stack; 4. Stack Manipulation; 5. The Editor; 6. Variables, Constants, and Arrays; 7. Flow of Control; 8. Loops; 9. More on Numbers; 10. Strings; 11. Defining Words; 12. Compiler Words; 13. The Input Stream and Mass Storage; 14. Advanced Topics; Solutions to Exercises; Index to FORTH Words.

[Language: FORTH]
Brodie, Leo. Starting FORTH. An Introduction to the FORTH Language and Operating Systems for Beginners and Professionals.
2nd edition; Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1987].
Foreword by Charles H. Moore. First published [c.1981].

[Language: FORTH]
Brodie, Leo. Thinking FORTH. A Language and Philosophy for Solving Problems.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, [1984].

[Language: FORTH]
Johns, David. The Beginner's Guide to FORTH.
London: Interface, 1984.

[Language: FORTH]
Kail, Paul A. C. An Introduction to FORTH.
Southampton: Micro Books, 1984.
v, 122pp. Contents: 1. A Quick Look; 2. Defining New Words; 3. Variables; 4. IFs and ANDs; 5. Bigger Numbers; 6. More About the Stack; 7. Sound and Light; 8. Tapes and Disks; 9. Input and Output; 10. Vocabularies; 11. Other Ways of Defining Words; Appendix 1. Programs; Appendix 2. Summary of Word Definitions; Appendix 3. ASCII Codes.

[Language: FORTH]
Kail, Paul A. C. FORTH: A Complete Course in the FORTH Programming Language.
London: Kogan Page, 1989.

[Language: FORTH]
Rather, E., and Leo Brodie. Using FORTH.
Hermosa Beach: FORTH, 1980.
Edited by C. Rosenberg.

[Language: FORTH: ART]
Freestone, N. K. "FORTH Computes OK."
Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: September 1982. pp.22-24.
An overview.

[Language: FORTH: ART] Wireless World FORTH Computer.
Woodroffe, Brian. "FORTH Computer."
Wireless World Part 1 (CPU and memory): May 1983. pp.53-58; Part 2 (Circuit, video, and peripherals): June 1983. pp.55-58; Part 3 (Software, disk controller, and PSU): July 1983. pp.58-61; Part 4 (Construction tips): August 1983. pp.44-45; Part 5 (Disk drives, including the use of 8" drives): September 1983. pp.64-67.
5 parts. 6809-based, 1.5MHz clock, EF69364 display processor, 6850 CIA (for the RS232 interface), and a 6821 PIA.

[Language: FORTRAN]
Maisel, Herbert, and Donald L. Wright. Introduction to Electronic Digital Computers: With Emphasis on the System/360, FORTRAN IV, and PL/1.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1969.

[Language: FORTRAN]
Marshall, Garry J. FORTRAN for Micros.
London: Newnes Technical, 1983.

[Language: FORTRAN]
Page, Clive G. The Professional Programmers Guide to FORTRAN 77.
London: Pitman, 1988.
ix, 180pp. Contents: What is FORTRAN?; 2. Basic FORTRAN Concepts; 3. FORTRAN in Practice; 4. Program Structure and Layout; 5. Constants, Variables and Arrays; 6. Arithmetic; 7. Character Handling and Logic; 8. Control Statements; 9. Procedures; 10. Input/Output Facilities; 11. The DATA Statement; 12. Common Blocks; Appendix A. Obsolete and Deprecated Features; Appendix B. Summary of Subset Differences; Appendix C. List of Intrinsic Functions.

[Language: FORTRAN]
Scales, L. E. Standard ICL 1900, CDC 7600 and IBM 360/370 FORTRAN.
Liverpool: Univ. of Liverpool Computer Laboratory, 1976.
Laboratory Report, 001/3.

[Language: FORTRAN]
Shelley, John. Essentials of FORTRAN 77.
Chichester, West Sussex: John Wiley, 1984.
xiv, 204pp. 2nd edition: Chichester, West Sussex: John Wiley, 1989 (ix, 182pp; preface dated December 1988). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Fundamental Programming Principles; 2. Programming Concepts; 3. First Acquaintance with FORTRAN 77; 4. Free-Format READ and WRITE; 5. Arithmetic; 6. Decisions and Simple Repetition; 7. Subscripted Variables; 8. DO-Loops/Repetition; 9. FORMATted READ and WRITE; 10. File Handling; 11. Subroutines; 12. Functions-Intrinsic, Statement and Sub-Program; 13. Characters; 14. Further Input and Output Control; 15. Further Features; Appendix A. An Introduction to Program Design; Appendix B. Structured Programming; Appendix C. Answers to Selected Problems and Further Examples.

[Language: Java]
Barker, Jacquie. Beginning Java Objects: From Concepts to Code.
Berkeley, California: Apress, 2000.
xi, 665pp. UK edition: Birmingham: Wrox Press, 2000 (xi, 665pp). 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Apress, 2005 (xii, 916pp; cover states: 'Includes J2SE 5 coverage'). Contents (1st edition): 1. A Little Taste of Java; 2. Abstraction and Modeling; 3. Objects and Classes; 4. Object Interactions; 5. Relationships Between Objects; 6. Collections of Objects; 7. Some Final Concepts; 8. The Object Modeling Process in a Nutshell; 9. Formalizing Requirements through Use Cases; 10. Modeling the Static/Data Aspects of the System; 11. Modeling the Dynamic/Behavioral Aspects of the System; 12. Wrapping Up Our Modeling Efforts; 13. A Deeper Look at Java; 14. Transforming Your Model into Java Code; 15. Rounding Out Your Applications: Adding File Persistence; 16. Rounding Out Your Applications: Adding a Graphical User Interface; 17. Next Steps; Appendix A. Suggestions for Using this Book as a Textbook; Appendix B. Alternative Case Studies; Appendix C. Setting Up a Basic Object Modeling/Java Environment; Appendix D. SRS Source Code; Appendix E. Note to Experienced C++ Programmers; Appendix F. How Polymorphism Works.

[Language: Java]
Manning, Michelle M. Teach Yourself JBuilder in 14 Days.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams.net, 1997.
xxi, 542pp. Part No. JBC 1310WW21770. Borland JBuilder is an integrated development environment (IDE) for Java. Contents: 1. Introduction to JBuilder; 2. Java Basics; 3. Java Intermediate; 4. Java Advanced; 5. JBuilder IDE; 6. User Interface Design; 7. JavaBeans Component Library; 8. Applets, Applications, and Wizards; 9. Graphics, Fonts, and Multimedia; 10. Streams and I/O; 11. Compiling and Debugging; 12. Handling Events; 13. Exception Handling; 14. JBuilder Database Architecture; Appendix: Answers to Quiz Questions.

[Language: LISP: ART]
Liardet, Michael. "LISP."
Personal Computer World June 1982. pp.136-137.
An overview.

[Language: LOGO]
Allan, Boris. Building with LOGO on the Commodore 64. Creative Use of the LOGO Language.
London: Sunshine, 1984.
xii, 156pp. Contents: I: Introduction to LOGO; 1. Starting Out with LOGO; 2. Proceeding with LOGO; 3. Getting Used to LOGO; 4. Turtles Alive with LOGO; 5. Joyful Spritely LOGO; 6. Simultaneous Sprites in LOGO; II: Specific Applications: 7. Keyboard Control; 8. Names and Content; 9. Aspects of Graphical Design; 10. Simple Statistical Programming; 11. Tiny Routines; 12. Differential Drawing; 13. Spritely Icons.

[Language: LOGO]
Grant, Bob. The PCW LOGO Manual.
Wilmslow: Sigma, 1992.

[Language: LOGO]
Harvey, Brian. Computer Science Logo Style. Volume 1: Intermediate Programming.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1985.
xiv, 319pp. Contents: 1. Exploration; 2. Procedures; 3. Variables; 4. Predicates; 5.1. Recursion: Combining Method; 5.2. Recursion: Little People Method; 5.3. Recursion: Tracing Method; 5.4. Recursion: Leap of Faith Method; 6. Turtle Geometry; 7. Recursive Operations; 8. Planning; 9. Debugging; 10. Iteration, Control Structures, and Extensibility; 11. Nonlocal Exit; 12. Program as Data; 13. Demons; 14. Property Lists; 15. Data Files; Appendix A. Versions of Logo; Appendix B. Hints for Teachers.

[Language: LOGO]
Penfold, J. W. LOGO for Beginners.
London: Babani, 1988.

[Language: Modula-2]
Koffman, Elliot B. Problem Solving and Structured Programming in Modula-2.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1988.
xvi, 661, [89]pp.

[Language: Modula-2]
Mayer, Herbert G. Programming in Modula-2: The Art and the Craft.
New York: Macmillan; London: Collier Macmillan, 1988.
xvii, 334pp.

[Language: Modula-2]
Tremblay, Jean-Paul, John M. DeDourek, and David A. Daoust. Programming in Modula-2.
New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 1989.
xiii, 521pp.

[Language: Modula-2]
Wirth, Niklaus. Programming in Modula-2.
Berlin; New York: Springer-Verlag, 1982.
176pp. Preface dated February 1982. 2nd edition: Berlin; New York: Springer-Verlag, 1983 (176pp). 3rd edition: Berlin; New York: Springer-Verlag, 1985 (202pp; Preface dated September 1984). 4th edition: Berlin; New York: Springer-Verlag, 1988 (182pp; Preface dated July 1988). Contents (4th edition): 1. Introduction; 2. A First Example; 3. A Notation to Describe the Syntax of Modula; 4. Representation of Modula Programs; 5. Statements and Expressions; 6. Control Structures; 7. Elementary Data Types; 8. Constant and Variable Declarations; 9. The Data Structure Array; 10. Procedures; 11. The Concept of Locality; 12. Parameters; 13. Function Procedures; 14. Recursion; 15. Type Declarations; 16. Enumeration Types; 17. Subrange Types; 18. Set Types; 19. Record Types; 20. Records with Variant Parts; 21. Dynamic Structures and Pointers; 22. Procedure Types; 23. Modules; 24. Definition and Implementation Parts; 25. Program Decomposition into Modules; 26. Local Modules; 27. Sequential Input and Output; 28. Screen-Oriented Input and Output; 29. Low-Level Facilities; 30. Concurrent Processes and Coroutines; 31. Device Handling, Concurrency, and Interrupts; Report on the Programming Language Modula-2; Appendix 1. The Syntax of Modula-2; Appendix 2. Standard Utility Modules; Appendix 3. The ASCII Character Set; Appendix 4. Syntax Diagrams.

[Language: PASCAL]
Grogono, Peter. Programming in PASCAL.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1978.
vii, 359pp. Reprinted: Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1979 (vii, 359pp). Revised edition: Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1980 (ix, 363pp). 2nd edition: Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1984 (xi, 420pp); Reprinted with corrections: Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, December 1985 (xi, 420pp; Preface dated January 1984). Contents (December 1985 reprint of the 2nd edition): 1. Programming Concepts; 2. Data Expressions, and Assignments; 3. Decision and Repetition; 4. Procedures and Functions; 5. Variable Types; 6. Arrays and Records; 7. Files; 8. Dynamic Data Structures; 9. Advanced Topics; 10. Program Design; Remarks, Resources, and References; Appendix A. The Vocabulary of PASCAL; Appendix B. PASCAL Syntax Diagrams; Appendix C. PASCAL Portability and Implementation; Appendix D. Programming Conventions.

[Language: PASCAL]
Grogono, Peter. Programming in PASCAL, with PASCAL/1000.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1980.
xii, 379pp.

[Language: PASCAL]
Huggins, Eric. Mastering PASCAL Programming.
Basingstoke, Hampshire: Macmillan Education, 1983.
x, 269pp. Macmillan Master series. Reprinted: 1985; 1987; 1988; 1989; 1990; 1991. Contents (1991 reprint): 1. Know Your Computer; 2. Introduction to Programming in PASCAL; 3. Syntax, Output Format, and FOR Loops; 4. Precedence of Operations: More Loops; 5. Applications 1: Mathematics; 6. Types 'CHAR'. and 'BOOLEAN'. Boolean Operators; 7. Functions and Procedures; 8. External Files; 9. Arrays; 10. Applications 2: Sorting, Searching and Merging; 11. Programming Strategy; 12. Applications 3: Simulation; 13. Applications 4: Graphics; 14. Data Types; 15. Records; 16. Sets; 17. Not for Beginners; 18. Applications 5: Real-Time and Multi-Programming; 19. Mainly for Beginners; Appendix I. The PASCAL Reserved Words and Required Identifiers; Appendix II. Syntax Diagrams; Appendix III. Interactive Input; Appendix IV. A Subset of the ASCII Code.

[Language: PASCAL]
Lewis, Theodore Gyle. PASCAL Programming for the Apple.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1981.
vi, 234pp. Contents: 1. The French Connection (The System); 2. Walking the PASCAL Tree (The Tools); 3. The Shape of Things to Come; 4. PASCAL Spoken Here (The Novice); 5. Money, Money, Money! (Financial Applications); 6. For the Drow Pundit (Text Processing); 7. Programming in the Large; 8. Star-Spangled Graphics; 9. Making Music; 10. File Structures Supreme; 11. BASIC Versus PASCAL.

[Language: PASCAL]
Ruston, Jeremy. Learn PASCAL on Your BASIC Micro.
London: Interface, 1983.
Reprint: London: Interface, 1984 (185pp in various pagings).

[Language: PASCAL]
Ruston, Jeremy. PASCAL for Human Beings.
London: Interface, 1982.
82pp.

[Language: PASCAL: ART]
Davies, Gerry. "Parlez[-Vous] PASCAL."
Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 2: December 1984. pp.60-63; Part 3: January 1985. pp.37-40.
Series.

[Language: PASCAL: ART]
Denning, Adam. "PASCAL in Practice."
Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.56-57.
Acornsoft S-PASCAL for the BBC Micro and Computer One PASCAL for the Sinclair QL examined.

[Language: PILOT: ART]
[8080 PILOT] Starkweather, John A. "Guide to 8080 PILOT, Version 1.1."
Dr. Dobb's Journal April 1977, Vol. 2, No. 4. pp.17-29 (pp.173-185 of the annual volume).
Documentation.

[Language: PILOT: ART]
[8080 PILOT] Starkweather, John A. "Source Code for 8080 PILOT, Version 1.1."
Dr. Dobb's Journal May 1977, Vol. 2, No. 5. pp.18-33 (pp.216-231 of the annual volume).
Source code.

[Language: PL/I: ART]
Barker, Philip. "Programming with PL/I-80."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1983. pp.26-31; February 1983. pp.78-81.
2 parts. PL/I-80 being a microcomputer version of Programming Language One. The use of a PET for running PL/I is also described.

[Language: PROLOG]
Conlon, Tom. Learning Micro-PROLOG: A Problem-Solving Approach.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., 1985.
vi, 183pp. Preface dated September 1984. Reprinted: June 1986. The work uses 'Micro-PROLOG release 3.1 or higher'. A copy noted with a sheet pasted into the front: 'Addendum: As the UK edition of Start Problem-Solving with PROLOG is out of print, the US edition of this book is being supplied' (with alterations noted). UK edition (with the title Start Problem-Solving with PROLOG): Wokingham, Berkshire: Addison-Wesley, 1985 ([160]pp). Contents (US edition, 1986 reprint): 1. The Problem-Solving Machine; 2. Writing and Using Descriptions; 3. How PROLOG Solves Goals; 4. A Toolkit for Description; 5. Representing Objects; 6. A Framework for Problem-Solving; 7. Some Problems Solved; Answers to Exercises.

[Language: RPG]
Loschetter, Richard F. RPG for IBM Systems/360, 370 and System/3.
Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1975.

[Language: RPG]
Saxon, James Anthony. System 360/20 RPG programming: A Self-Instructional Manual.
Belmont, California: Dickenson Pub. Co., [1968].

[Language: Smalltalk]
Gray, Philip D., and Ramzan Mohamed. Smalltalk-80: A Practical Introduction.
Glasgow: Department of Computing Science, Univ. of Glasgow, 1987.
55pp. Departmental Research Report CSC/87/R14.

[Language: Smalltalk]
Gray, Philip D., and Ramzan Mohamed. Smalltalk-80: A Practical Introduction.
London: Pitman Publishing, 1990.
[12], 252pp. 'The book covers versions 2.1 to 2.5 of the ParcPlace Smalltalk-80 system. A majority of the exercises can also be executed using Apple Smalltalk version 0.4 and Digitalk Smalltalk/V Mac 1.0 and 1.1'. Contents: [Part I: The Language:] 1. Introduction; 2. Messages and Methods; 3. Basic Classes; 4. Building a Model: The Library Management System; 5. Interactive Applications; 6. Some Useful Classes; [Part II: The Interactive Programming Environment:] 7. The Smalltalk System; 8. Tools; [Appendices:] A. QuadEditor Source Listing; B. LMS Listing; C. ALMS Listing; D. Simple MVC Listing; E. ActionMenu Listing; F. Object Interfaces-Class Order; G. Choosing a System.

[Language: VRML]
Ames, Andrea L., David R. Nadeau, and John L. Moreland. The VRML Sourcebook.
New York; Chichester: John Wiley, 1996.
2nd edition retitled The VRML 2.0 Sourcebook. New York; Chichester: John Wiley, 1997. With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Bottomley, Gareth. Implementation of a Scripting Language for VRML Using Java.
Leeds: Univ. of Leeds School of Computer Studies, 1998.
Final year project.

[Language: VRML]
Carey, Rikk, and Gavin Bell. The Annotated VRML 2.0 Reference Manual.
Reading, Massachusetts; Harlow: Addison-Wesley, 1997.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Fox, David S., and Philip Shaddock. Web Publisher's Construction Kit with VRML/Live 3D. Creating 3D Web Worlds.
Corte Madera, California: Waite Group Press, 1996.
With CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Goralski, Walter, Matthew Poli, and Peter Vogel. VRML. Exploring Virtual Worlds on the Internet.
Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1996.
Covers VRML 1.1 and looks forward to VRML 2.0. With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Hartman, Jed, and Josie Wernecke. The VRML 2.0 Handbook. Building Moving Worlds on the Web.
Reading, Massachusetts; Harlow: Addison-Wesley, 1996.

[Language: VRML]
Hassinger, Sebastian, and Mike Erwin. 60 Minute Guide to VRML.
New York: John Wiley, 1995.

[Language: VRML]
Hassinger, Sebastian, Charlie Scott, and Ed Tittel. Building VRML Worlds.
Berkeley, California; London: Osborne McGraw-Hill, 1996.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Jamsa, Kris A., Phil Schmauder, and Nelson Yee. VRML Programmer's Library.
Las Vegas, Nevada: Jamsa Press, 1997.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Kay, David C., and Douglas J. Muder. VRML and 3D on the Web for Dummies.
New York: John Wiley, 1996.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Kennedy, Randall C. Instant VRML Worlds.
Emeryville, California: Ziff-Davis Press, 1996.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Lea, Rodger, Kouichi Matsuda, and Ken Miyashita. Java for 3D and VRML Worlds.
Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders, 1996.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Lemay, Laura, Justin Couch, and Kelly Murdock. Laura Lemay's Web Workshop: 3D Graphics and VRML 2.
Indianpolis, Indiana: Sams.net, 1996.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Marrin, Chris, and Bruce Campbell. Teach Yourself VRML 2 in 21 Days.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams.net, 1997.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Matsuba, Stephen, and Bernie Roehl. Using VRML. Special Edition.
Indianapolis: Que, 1996.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
McCarthy, Martin, and Alligator Descartes. Reality Architecture: Building 3D Worlds with Java and VRML.
New York; London: Prentice-Hall, 1998.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Moores, Richard. Creation of an On-Line Shoppping Environment Using VRML 2.0.
Leeds: Univ. of Leeds School of Computer Studies, 1998.
Final year project.

[Language: VRML]
Pesce, Mark. VRML. Browsing and Building Cyberspace.
Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders, 1995.
With a CD-ROM. Foreword by Tim Berners-Lee.

[Language: VRML]
[Proceedings VRML 95.] Symposium on the Virtual Reality Modeling Language, San Diego, California, December 14-15, 1995.
New York: Association for Computing Machinery, 1995.

[Language: VRML]
Proceedings VRML 97. Second Symposium on the Virtual Reality Modeling Language.
New York: Association for Computing Machinery, 1997.

[Language: VRML]
Proceedings VRML 98. Third Symposium on the Virtual Reality Modeling Lanuage, Monterey, California, February 16-19, 1998.
New York: Association for Computing Machinery, 1998.

[Language: VRML]
Proceedings VRML 99. Fourth Symposium on the Virtual Reality Modeling Lanuage, Paderborn, Germany, February 23-26, 1999.
New York: Association for Computing Machinery, 1999.

[Language: VRML]
Proceedings Web3D - VRML 2000. Fifth Symposium on the Virtual Reality Modeling Language, Monterey, California, February 21-24, 2000.
New York: Association for Computing Machinery, 2000.

[Language: VRML]
Roehl, Bernie, Justin Couch, Cindy Reed-Ballreich, Tim Rohaly, and Geoff Brown. Late Night VRML 2.0 with Java.
Emeryville, California: Ziff-Davis Press, 1997.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Smith, David, Richard Boyd, and Alan Scott. Virtus VRML Toolkit.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Hayden Books, 1995.
With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Soares, Nuno. Integration of Telepresence and VRML Models Across Computer Networks.
Leeds: Univ. of Leeds School of Computer Studies, 1998.
Final year project.

[Language: VRML]
Vacca, John R. VRML. Bringing Virtual Reality to the Internet.
Boston; London: Academic Press, 1996.
With a CD-ROM. Covers VRML 2.0. Second, revised edition published with the cover title VRML Clearly Explained. Boston; London: Academic Press, 1998. With a CD-ROM.

[Language: VRML]
Ward, Chris. Techniques for the Simplification of a 3D VRML Scene Composed of Textured Triangles.
Leeds: Univ. of Leeds School of Computer Studies, 1998.
Final year project.

[Language: VRML]
Williams, Andrew Richard. The Solar System. A VRML World.
Leeds: Univ. of Leeds School of Computer Studies, 1999.
Final year project.

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Advanced Micro Devices. Élan SC300 Highly Integrated, Low-Power, 32-Bit Microcontroller. Advance Information.
Sunnyvale, California: Advanced Micro Devices, 1996.
Rev. C: February 1996 (132pp; coded: Con-11M-3/96-0 18514C 2/96; Publication No. 18514).

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Advanced Micro Devices. Élan SC310 Microcontroller: Programmer's Reference Manual.
Sunnyvale, California: Advanced Micro Devices, 1996.
Rev. A: April 1996 (multi-paged; coded: Ban-5M-5/96-0 20665A). Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Power Management; 3. Memory Management; 4. PC/AT Peripheral Registers; 5. Configuration Registers; Appendix A. Configuration Index Register Reference; Appendix B. XT-Keyboard Interface.

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Advanced Micro Devices. Élan SC400 Single-Chip, Low-Power, PC/AT-Compatible Microcontroller. Advance Information.
Sunnyvale, California: Advanced Micro Devices, 1996.
Rev. A: October 1996 (115pp; coded: Con-7.5M-10/96-0 21028A; Publication No. 21028).

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Advanced Micro Devices. Élan SC410 Single-Chip PC/AT-Compatible Microcontroller. Advance Information.
Sunnyvale, California: Advanced Micro Devices, 1997.
Rev. A: February 1997 (14pp; coded: Doc-2.8M-3/97-0 21327A; Publication No. 21327).

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Microchip Technology. PICSTART Design Contest: Application Brief Notebook.
Chandler, Arizona: Microchip Technology Inc., 1993.
Multi-paged. Coded on rear: 'DS30229B'. Contents: 1. Introduction to Application Brief Notebook; 2. Communications Market Entries; 3. Consumer Market Entries; 4. Office Automation Market Entries; 5. Industrial Market Entries.

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Microchip Technology. PIC16/17 Microcontroller Data Book 1996/1997.
Chandler, Arizona: Microchip Technology Inc., 1996.
Multi-paged. Coded: '10/96 DS000158B'. Contents: 1. Introduction to Microchip Technology Inc.; 2. PIC12C5XX Microcontroller Product Specifications; 3. PIC14000 Microcontroller Product Specifications; 4. PIC16C5X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 5. Enhanced PIC16C5X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 6. PIC16C55X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 7. PIC16C62X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 8. PIC16C6XX Microcontroller Product Specifications; 9. PIC16C6X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 10. PIC16C7X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 11. PIC16C8XX/PIC16F8X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 12. PIC16C9XX Microcontroller Product Specifications; 13. PIC17C4X Microcontroller Product Specifications; 14. PIC17C752/756 Microcontroller Product Brief; 15. PIC16/17 Microcontroller Instruction Sets; 16. Development Systems and Software Support; 17. PIC16/17 Microcontroller Programming Specifications; 18. FlexROM Microcontroller Product Specifications; 19. Logic Products; 20. PIC16/17 Die Product Information; 21. Quality, Reliability and Endurance; 22. Packaging; 23. Office Locations.

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Microchip Technology. Microchip 1997 Technical Library.
Chandler, Arizona: Microchip Technology Inc., 1997.
CD-ROM containing technical data on the PIC16/17 8-bit MCUs and associated products. Runs under Adobe Acrobat 3.0 Reader (supplied on the disc). Stated to be: 'First Edition'.

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Microchip Technology. Microchip Technical Library CD-ROM.
Chandler, Arizona: Microchip Technology Inc., 2001.
Two CD-ROMs in a cardboard folder. Cover states: 'First Edition 2001'. Disc 1 contains a snapshot of the Microchip Technology website; Disc 2 contains application notes, development tools, and utilities. Requires a browser and Adobe Acrobat Reader.

[Microcontrollers: Manual]
Zilog. Zilog Z8 Microcontrollers for Computer Peripheral and Consumer Electronics Applications: Product Specifications Databook.
Campbell, California: Zilog Inc., [1994].
Multi-paged. Coded on inside cover: 'DC 8305-03'. Coded on rear: 'Q4/94 DC 8305-03'. Contents: 1. Z86B07 Z8 8-Bit CMOS MCU for Intelligent Battery Charging & Monitoring; 2. Z86C05/07 Z8 CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller; 3. Z86E07 Z8 CMOS OTP Microcontroller; 4. Z86C11 Z8 8-Bit Microcontroller; 5. Z86C12 Z8 In-Circuit Emulator Microcontroller; 6. Z86C21 Z8 CMOS 8K ROM Microcontroller; 7. Z86E21 Z8 CMOS 8K OTP Microcontroller; 8. Z86C61/62/96 CMOS Z8 Microcontroller; 9. Z86E61/63 16K/32K EPROM CMOS Z8 Microcontroller; 10. Z86C63/64 32K ROM Z8 CMOS Microcontroller; 11. Z86C91 CMOS Z8 ROMless Microcontroller; 12. Z86C93 CMOS Z8 Multiply/Divide Microcontroller; 13. Z86117/717 Z8 8-Bit CMOS 2K OTP/ROM Microcontroller; 14. Application Notes; 15. Support Products; S. Superintegration Products Guide; T. General Terms and Conditions of Sale; Z. Zilog's Sales Offices, Representatives & Distributors; L. Literature Guide and Third Party Support.

[Microcontrollers]
Adamson, Malcolm. Small Real-Time System Design: From Microcontrollers to RISC Processors.
Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1990.
191pp.

[Microcontrollers]
Axelson, Janet Louise. The Microcontroller Idea Book: Circuits, Programs and Applications Featuring the 8052-BASIC Microcontroller.
Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, 1994.

[Microcontrollers]
Ayala, Kenneth J. The 80251 Microcontroller.
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2000.
With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Ayala, Kenneth J. The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming and Applications.
Minneapolis/St. Paul: West, 1991.
With a floppy disk. 2nd edition: 1997, with a floppy disk.

[Microcontrollers]
Barr, Michael. Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 1999.

[Microcontrollers]
Bentham, Jeremy. TCP/IP Lean: Web Servers for Embedded Systems.
2nd edition; Lawrence, Kansas: CMP Books, 2002.
With a CD-ROM. 1st edition published in 2000 with a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Berger, Arnold S. Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools and Techniques.
Lawrence, Kansas: CMP Books, 2002.

[Microcontrollers]
Catsoulis, John. Designing Embedded Hardware.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 2002.

[Microcontrollers]
Clark, Dennis. Programming and Customizing the OOPic Microcontroller: The Official OOPic Handbook.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Dietsche, K.-H., and M. Ohsmann. MatchBox BASIC Computer: A Miniature Controller System.
Dorchester: Elektor Electronics, 1999.
274pp with a 3.5" floppy disk. Describes a microcontroller system built on a 65 x 45mm PCB, running MBL, a higher programming language derived from BASIC and Pascal. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The MatchBox BASIC Computer; 3. A Development System for the MatchBox; 4. MBL, the MatchBox Language; 5. Connecting Peripherals to the MatchBox; 6. Specialities of the 8051; 7. MatchBox BASIC Computer Applications; 8. Microcontroller Systems; 9. Appendix.

[Microcontrollers]
Doughman, Gordon. Programming the Motorola M68HC12 Family.
Poway, California: Annabooks, 2000.
576pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Edwards, Lewin A. R. W. Embedded System Design on a Shoestring: Achieving High Performance with a Limited Budget.
Amsterdam; Boston: Newnes, 2003.
ix, 232pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Edwards, J. Scott. Programming and Customizing the BASIC Stamp Computer.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998.
ix, 284pp. With a CD-ROM. 2nd edition: New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001 (x, 334pp; with a CD-ROM). Contents (1st edition): 1. Introduction; 2. Introducing the BASIC Stamp; 3. Electronic Foundations; 4. Building Electronic Circuits; 5. Getting Started with Stamps; 6. BASIC Stamp Boot Camp, Part 1; 7. BASIC Stamp Boot Camp, Part 2; 8. Magic Message Machine; 9. Intelligent Traffic Signal Simulation; 10. Robotic Bug with Whisker Sensors; 11. Time/Temperature Display; 12. Data-Logging Thermometer; 13. Worldwide Remote Control with C2TERM; 14. Short Range Sonar; 15. Network Terminal with Keypad and Display; [Appendices:] A. BASIC Stamp Quick Reference Guide; B. Numbering Systems, Integer Math, and Boolean Logic; C. Electronic Calculations and Stamp-Related Circuits; D. Bug-Hunting Guide; E. Sources for Electronic Components; F. Suggested Reading; G. Glossary.

[Microcontrollers]
Eisenreich, Dan, and Brian DeMuth. Designing Embedded Internet Devices: A Practical Guide to Hardware and Software Design Using the TINI Microcontroller.
Amsterdam; Boston, Massachusetts: Newnes, 2002.
xii, 582pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Haskell, Richard E. Design of Embedded Systems Using 68HC12/11 Microcontrollers.
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1999.
xix, 569pp. With a 3.5" floppy disk.

[Microcontrollers]
Hollabaugh, Craig. Embedded Linux: Hardware, Software, and Interfacing.
Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2002.
viii, 419pp.

[Microcontrollers]
Ibrahim, Dogan. Microcontroller Projects in C for the 8051.
Oxford; Boston, Massachusetts: Newnes, 2000.
viii, 178pp.

[Microcontrollers]
Jones, M. Tim. TCP/IP Application Layer Protocols for Embedded Systems.
Hingham, Massachusetts: Charles River Media, 2002.
xix, 460pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Karakehayov, Zdravko, Knud Smed Christensen, and Ole Winther. Embedded Systems Design with 8051 Microcontrollers: Hardware and Software.
New York: Marcel Dekker, 1999.
viii, 417pp. With a 3.5" floppy disk.

[Microcontrollers]
Li, Qing, and Caroline Yao. Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems.
San Francisco, California: CMP Books, 2003.
xii, 294pp.

[Microcontrollers]
M68HC11 Reference Manual.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1989.
Multi-paged. With a disk. Authorship attributed to James M. Sibigtroth. Revision 1: Phoenix, Arizona: Motorola, 1990 (multi-paged); Revision 3 (1991); Revision 4 (June 2001); Revision 5 (February 2002); Revision 6: Denver, Colorado: Motorola, April 2002 (647pp; M68HC11RM/D). Contents (Revision 6): 1. General Description; 2. Pins and Connections; 3. Configuration and Modes of Operation; 4. On-Chip Memory; 5. Resets and Interrupts; 6. Central Processor Unit; 7. Parallel Input/Output; 8. Synchronous Serial Peripheral Interface; 9. Asynchronous Serial Communications Interface; 10. Main Timer and Real-Time Interrupt; 11. Pulse Accumulator; 12. Analog-to-Digital Converter System; Appendix A. Instruction Set Details; Appendix B. Bootloader Listings.

[Microcontrollers]
MacKenzie, I. Scott. The 8051 Microcontroller.
New York: Merrill, 1992.
xv, 357pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1995 (xi, 356pp). 3rd edition: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1999 (x, 366pp). 4th edition (with Raphael Chung-Wei Phan): Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2007 (xiv, 537pp).

[Microcontrollers]
MCS BASIC-52 Reference Manual.
Santa Clara, California: Intel, 1986.
The 8052 has a built-in floating-point BASIC interpreter.

[Microcontrollers]
Peatman, John Burling. Design with PIC Microcontrollers.
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1997.

[Microcontrollers]
Peatman, John Burling. Embedded Design with the PIC18F452 Microcontroller.
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2002.
With a QwikFlash board.

[Microcontrollers]
Penfold, R. A. An Introduction to PIC Microcontrollers.
London: Babani, 1997.

[Microcontrollers]
Penfold, R. A. Practical PIC Microcontroller Projects.
BP444. London: Babani, 1999.
199pp. Circuit diagrams, component listings and software listings are given. Contents: 1. Test Gear; 2. Games and Novelties; 3. Miscellaneous Projects.

[Microcontrollers]
Predko, Myke. Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1999.

[Microcontrollers]
Simon, David E. An Embedded Software Primer.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1999.
With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Sridhar, T. Designing Embedded Communications Software.
San Francisco, California: CMP Books, 2003.

[Microcontrollers]
Stewart, James W. The 8051 Microcontroller: Hardware, Software, and Interfacing.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1993.
2nd edition, co-authored with Kai X. Miao: 1999, with 2 floppy disks.

[Microcontrollers]
Sutter, Ed. Embedded Systems Firmware Demystified: Building Embedded Systems from the Ground Up.
Lawrence, Kansas: CMP Books, 2002.
With a CD-ROM.

[Microcontrollers]
Yaghmour, Karim. Building Embedded Linux Systems.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 2003.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Abbott, Robin. "The ETI BASIC Microcontroller."
Electronics Today International Part 1: September 1995. pp.24-29; Part 2: October 1995. pp.24-30, 68; Part 3: November 1995. pp.22-30, 68.
Series of constructional articles. Uses PIC BASIC on 18-pin PIC microcontrollers. Free PCB given away with October 1995 issue, free 3.5" disk containing development software given away with November 1995 issue. Article titles vary, part 2: "ETI PIC BASIC Controller"; part 3: "BASIC for the PIC Microcontroller".

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Abbott, Robin. "Serial AVR Microcontroller Programmer."
Electronics Today International Vol. 27, No. 5. 24 April-21 May 1998. pp.17-23, 66.
Constructional article.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
An, Dr. Pei. "8031 & 80535 Single Board Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 1: April 1996. pp.44-54; Part 2: May 1996. pp.58-62; Part 3: June 1996. pp.40-43.
MCS-51 based SBC.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Atkins, C. P. "6802 Evaluation Board."
Electronics Today International May 1985. pp.27-32, 58.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. A 7-chip system: 6802, 2716 EPROM, 7400, two 6821 PIAs, and two TIL311 Hex displays.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Becker, John. "EPE PIC Tutorial."
Everyday Practical Electronics March 1998. Supplement, pp.1-16; April 1998. Supplement, pp.17-32; May 1998. Supplement, pp.33-48.
3 parts. Includes constructional details for a PIC16C84/PIC16F84 programmer.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Becker, John. "PIC to Printer Interface."
Everyday Practical Electronics July 2001. pp.484-491.
Demonstrates PIC control of Epson dot-matrix printers, and offers a long-term hard-copy data logger.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Becker, John. "PIC Toolkit Mk2."
Everyday Practical Electronics May 1999. pp.369-376; June 1999. pp.458-462.
Constructional article. 2 parts. An upgrade of the PIC16x84 Toolkit from Everyday Practical Electronics July 1998 to make it compatible with the '84 and '87 series PICs. PCB redesigned to accept both 18-pin '84s and 28/40-pin '87s.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Becker, John. "PIC16F87x Microcontrollers."
Everyday Practical Electronics April 1999. pp.257-259.
Review.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Becker, John. "PIC16F87x Mini Tutorial."
Everyday Practical Electronics October 1999. pp.742-748.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Becker, John. "PIC16x84 Toolkit."
Everyday Practical Electronics July 1998. pp.526-535.
Constructional project. Programmer for the PIC16C84 and PIC16F84 using TASM and MPASM. Updated version published in May-June 1999 issues.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Becker, John. "Using PICs and Keypads."
Everyday Practical Electronics January 2001. pp.28-31.
With notes on LCD displays.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Bedford, Mike. "Reduced Instruction Set Computers."
Electronics Today International December 1985. pp.22-26.
Descriptive article.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Bedford, Mike. "The ETI SBC-09."
Electronics Today International January 1991. pp.46-51, 62; February 1991. pp.50-55; Correction: April 1991. p.57.
Constructional article with PCB foils. A general purpose 6809 microcontroller system with 2K or 8K RAM and 16K of EPROM.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Berg, B. vom, and P. Groppe. "80C537 Microcontroller Board."
Elektor Electronics June 1997. pp.44-49.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Programs the 80C537 (an 8051 variant) microcontroller using a PC. Software was available separately.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Bishop, Owen. "The World of PLCs."
Everyday Practical Electronics July 2001. pp.504-509.
The use of Programmable Logic Controllers in industrial manufacture.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Böhling, H. -J. "80C32 BASIC Control Computer."
Elektor Electronics Part 1: Introduction and Circuit Descriptions. February 1998. pp.30-33; Part 2: Construction and Testing. March 1998. pp.40-43, 45.
Two-board design. Runs the MCS-51 BASIC interpreter. 32Kb SRAM, 32Kb EPROM for the 8Kb interpreter and extensions, and up to 16Kb of EPROM space for programs. Schematic and PCB. Software available separately.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Böhling, H. -J., and D. Wulf. "MCS BASIC-52 v.1.3. Rejuvenating a Popular Interpreter."
Elektor Electronics February 2001. pp.20-23.
The MCS BASIC-52 v.1.0 interpreter was originally developed by Intel in 1985 for the 8052-AH microcontroller. Intel has kindly released the interpreter as freeware, leading to on-going development.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Bricknell, Tony. "TMS77C82 Micro Controller."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 9, No. 39. August-September 1990. pp.56-61.
Review.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Brown, Peter R. "Introduction to the Seven-Chip Microcomputer."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.30-31.
Series. Z8671-based 7-chip SBC. Schematics. Uses a Z6132 4K RAM, 2716 2K ROM, 1488 and 1489 serial chips, 74LS04 hex inverter, and 74LS373 octal latch.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Burkhardt, K. "LCD Driver for BASIC Stamp II."
Elektor Electronics November 2000. pp.60-61.
SIPO driver allowing you to control an LCD using 4 leads.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Dietrich, J. "RS232 Interface for 68HC11."
Elektor Electronics February 1998. Extra Supplement pp.6-8.
A 68HC11 processor board was published in the April 1994 issue of Elektor magazine.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Dittmann, D. "Adaptor Board for 18-Pin PICs."
Elektor Electronics December 1997. pp.84-85.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Simulate an 18-pin PIC16C71 with a 28-pin PIC16C57.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
"DS5000 Soft Microcontroller from Dallas: 8051-Compatible."
Elektor Electronics January 1998. pp.46-47, 49.
Application note. No author cited.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Gale, Patrick. "Why You May Need to FLASH!"
Elektor Electronics June 1997. Microprocessors Supplement. pp.X-XI.
Description of FLASH Microcontrollers.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "The 8031 Single Board Computer."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 19, No. 149. May 2000. pp.25-27; Part 2: Vol. 19, No. 150. June 2000. pp.41-45.
SBC design in at least 3 parts.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "The ETI 80188 Single Board Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 1: January 1995. pp.20-25, 70.
Constructional article. Part 1 includes the schematic and PCB.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Gueulle, Patrick. "Mini PIC Programmer."
Elektor Electronics June 1997. Microprocessors Supplement. pp.XII-XIII.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. For the PIC16C84.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Hampshire, Nick. "PE SBC-1 (HD63701V)."
Practical Electronics Part 1: June 1986. pp.36-38.
Constructional article in 4 parts. The 1 MHz Hitachi HD63701V microcontroller has 4K of on-chip EPROM, 192 bytes of RAM, with serial and parallel I/O. The instruction set is based upon that of the 6800. The circuit is designed to be built on a Eurocard with the HD63701V in 'expanded multiplexed' mode with an 8-line parallel port and two serial lines (using MC1488 and MC1489 ICs). The design uses four 8K x 8-bit memory chips, either HD6264 RAM or 2764 EPROM.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Ilett, Julyan. "How To Use Intelligent LCDs."
Everyday Practical Electronics February 1997. pp.84-89; March 1997. pp.192-196.
2 parts.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Joostens, J. "Micro PLC System."
Elektor Electronics Part 1 (hardware): December 1995. pp.74-79; Part 2 (the industrial PLC): January 1996. pp.7-11.
3 parts. Constructional article. Based on an 87C750 chip, a control computer designed to run programmable logic controller (PLC) functions. Part 1 includes the schematic and PCB. Titles vary, part 2 entitled "Hands-On PLC Programming (Part 1)".

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Kainka, B. "89S8252 Flash Microcontroller Board."
Elektor Electronics December 2001. pp.54-60.
Used as the basis for a course on microcontrollers in Elektor. Capable of being programmed in BASIC and with 32Kb RAM, the board has many of the hallmarks of 1980s micros.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Kainka, B. "BASCOM-51: A New BASIC Compiler for the Elektor 89S8252 Flash Board."
Elektor Electronics May 2002. pp.20-22.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
"Keypad Encoder IC with Serial Output."
Elektor Electronics July/August 2001. p.107.
Notes on the EDE1144, designed to interface 16-key or less keypads to a microcontroller or processor.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Legrange, L. "PICXEX: An Operating System for PIC16C7x Processors."
Elektor Electronics May 1998. pp.56-57, 59.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Lemmens, L. "ST62 Programmer."
Elektor Electronics November 1996. pp.16-21, 23.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Programs ST621x, ST622a and ST626x microcontrollers using a PC. PD software was available separately.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Main, Jim. "PIC Micro-Probe."
Everyday Practical Electronics December 1999. pp.870-872.
Constructional project. Hardware PIC debugger.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
"'Matchbox' BASIC Computer."
Elektor Electronics Part 3: December 1995. pp.42-45.
3 parts. Constructional article. Based on an 87C51 chip, a derivative of the 8051. Software by Dr. M. Ohsmann.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Meikle, Colin. "8051-Based EEPROM Microcontrollers."
Everyday Practical Electronics June 1998. pp.426-430.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Meikle, Colin. "Atmel AT89C2051/1051 Programmer."
Everyday Practical Electronics June 1998. pp.432-438.
Constructional project.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Meikle, Colin. "Greenhouse Computer."
Everyday Practical Electronics July 1998. pp.492-499; August 1998. pp.610-613; September 1998. pp.680-685.
Constructional project. 3 parts. AT89C2051-based. Uses MPT1340 standard 418MHz RF modules for communicating with a PC.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Mroz, Roman. "Multi-Purpose LCD with 68HC11: Timer, Thermometer or Thermostat."
Elektor Electronics June 1997. Microprocessors Supplement. pp.IV-VIII.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. Uses a 16-character, 1-line LM16155 LCD module.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Ohsmann, M. "AVR-RISC Evaluation System."
Elektor Electronics Part 1: October 1998. Extra Supplement pp.6-9, 11.
2 parts. Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. 90S1200-based.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Reelsen, H. "8032/8052 Single-Board Computer."
Elektor Electronics May 1991. pp.17-23.
The Mark II version of the design published in November 1987. Constructional article. Built on a single-sided Eurocard. Can use an 8032, 80C32, or 8052AH-BASIC microcontroller. 32K ROM, 32K RAM, on-board EPROM programmer, memory back-up battery. To 15MHz (8032 or 8052AH-BASIC) or 24MHz (80C32). Includes a schematic, PCB, and program to unload the BASIC interpreter from the 8052AH-BASIC, transfer it to EPROM, and run it with an 8032 or 80C32.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Rietjens, A. "Faster MCS52 Processor."
Elektor Electronics December 1996. p.62.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Allows a DS87C530 (running at up to 33MHz) to replace an 8031, 8032, 8051, or 8052 microcontroller.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Roberts, Mike. "Driving Serial EEPROMs."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 17, No. 128. August 1998. pp.62-65.
With code for the PIC chips and the 24LC16.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Schroeder, W. "PIC & AVR Programmer."
Elektor Electronics June 1998. pp.26-31.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Windows 95-based software available separately. Programs PIC16C84, PIC16F84, AT90S1200, AT90S2313, AT90S4414, and AT90S8515 microcontrollers.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Schwark, S. "IDE Hard Disk Interface for 8-Bit Controllers."
Elektor Electronics March 2001. pp.44-49.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Source, U. R. "The Zilog Z-8: A PEEK at the New Single-Chip Microcomputer from Zilog."
Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1978, Vol. 3, No. 6. pp.28-30 (pp.267-269 of the annual volume).

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Stuart, Mark. "EPE Icebreaker."
Everyday Practical Electronics March 2000. pp.193-199.
Constructional project. Real-Time PIC In-Circuit Emulator. Works with Microchip's MPLAB software. PIC16F877/874 and PIC16F876/873.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
"Two-Way 20-to-40 Pin Adapter Board for 89C1051/2051."
Elektor Electronics December 1997. p.85.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Maps the pins of the 20-pin AT89C1051/2051 PDIP to the pins of the 40-pin 80C51 DIL. No author given.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Volpe, Prof. F. P., and B. Wegmann. "PIC17C Processor Board."
Elektor Electronics September 2000. pp.28-34.
PIC17C756 microcontroller based SBC. The PIC17C75x instruction set appears on pp.73-74 of the same issue.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Waddington, Stephen. "Microcontroller Development Using the Stamp: Architecture Fundamentals."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 17, No. 128. August 1998. pp.45-48; Part 2 (I/O features): Vol. 179, No. 129. September 1998. pp.44-48; Part 3 (application development): Vol. 17, No. 131. October 1998. pp.36-39.
3 part series.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Whitlock, Richard. "Single Chip Microcontroller."
Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: October 1983. pp.35-38; Part 2: November 1983. pp.28-30; Part 3: December 1983. pp.89-90.
Details (including a circuit diagram and PCB layout) of a programmable controller based on the Motorola 68705.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Wiles, Malcolm. "Floating Point Maths for PICs."
Everyday Practical Electronics November 2004. pp.810-812.
An introduction to Microchip's floating point maths routines for the PIC16F.

[Microcontrollers: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Burchell, Jonathan C. "Z-8 Program Development System."
Radio and Electronics World I: February 1982. pp.12-17; II: March 1982. pp.12-17; III: April 1982. pp.31-34.
Constructional article. Z8-based development system using the Z8671 microcontroller (a Z8601 masked by Zilog to contain a 2K BASIC interpreter). Includes 8K RAM, an on-board 2716/2732 EPROM programmer, 4K utility software in EPROM, 19k2 serial interface, and a cassette interface.

[Microcontrollers: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Burchell, Jonathan C. "Autostarting the Z8 TBPDS."
Radio and Electronics World July 1982. pp.79-80.
Constructional article.

[Microcontrollers: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Jasper, B. "Z8 Assembler in EPROM."
Radio and Electronics World December 1982. pp.64-69.

[Microcontrollers: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Burchell, Jonathan C. "Minimum Chip Z8 System."
Radio and Electronics World January 1983. pp.10-13.
Constructional article. Designed to execute programs developed using the full development system.

[Microcontrollers: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Hinder, Richard. "Z8 EXEC. An Operating System for the Z8 Microcomputer Board."
Radio and Electronics World May 1983. pp.30-33.
A command-line interpreter supplied in three EPROMs with 15 commands, 6 routines, and an interrupt-driven real time clock.

[Microcontrollers: ART] Z-8 Program Development System.
Harris, Chris. "Z8 Backplane."
Radio and Electronics World July 1983. pp.43-45.
Constructional article.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Zschocke, Bernard C. "Electronic Handyman: A Multi-Purpose RISC Microcontroller System."
Elektor Electronics Part 1: December 1997. pp.14-15, 17; Part 2: January 1998. pp.26-29.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. Incorporates an Atmel 90S1200 microcontroller.

[Microcontrollers: ART]
Zschocke, Bernard C. "Programmer for Electronic Handyman & AT90S1200: Hardware and PC Software for Programming Atmel RISCs."
Elektor Electronics December 1997. pp.26-29.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately.

[OS: General]
Barron, David William. Computer Operating Systems.
London: Chapman and Hall, 1971.
viii, 135pp. Reprinted: 1973; 1975; 1977. 2nd edition (with the title Computer Operating Systems for Micros, Minis and Mainframes): London: Chapman and Hall, 1984 (viii, 140pp).

[OS: General]
Blackburn, Lawrence, and Marcus Taylor. Introduction to Operating Systems.
London: Pitman, 1985.
vi, 90pp.

[OS: General]
Brown, Peter John. Writing Interactive Compilers and Interpreters.
Chichester: Wiley, 1979.
xvii, 265pp. Reprinted with corrections: 1980; 1981. Contents (1st edition): [1. Planning:] 1.1. Why Interactive?; 1.2. Planning Use of Resources; 1.3. Documentation; 1.4. Designing the Source Language and the User Interface; 1.5. Encoding the Compiler; [2. The Structure of a Compiler:] 2.1. Filling the Gaps; 2.2. Description of Terminology and Environment; 2.3. Source and Internal Languages; 2.4. Incremental Compiling; 2.5. Re-creating the Source Program; 2.6. Levels of Internal Language; 2.7. True Compilers; 2.8. Error Checking; 2.9. Error Messages; 2.10. Names, Scope, and Data Type; 2.11. Dictionaries and Tables; 2.12. Storage Management; 2.13. The Editor; 2.14. Input and Output; 2.15. Break-ins; 2.16. Summary of Design; [3. The Design of an Internal Language:] 3.1. Reverse Polish Notation; 3.2. Operators; 3.3. Encoding Reverse Polish; 3.4. A Brief Summary; [4. The Translator:] 4.1. Overall Translator Organization; 4.2. Lexical Analysis; 4.3. Grammars; 4.4. Using Grammars for Parsing; 4.5. Checking and Resolving Data Types; 4.6. Semantic Actions; [5. The Run-Time System:] 5.1. Error Detection and Diagnosis; 5.2. Executing Reverse Polish; 5.3. Allocating and Referencing User Variables; 5.4. Execution of Statements; 5.5. String Temporaries; [6. Other Modules:] 6.1. The Pre-run Module; 6.2. The Re-creator Module; 6.3. The Command Module; [7. Testing and Issuing:] 7.1. Testing the Compiler; 7.2. Issuing; [8. Some Advanced and Specialized Topics:] 8.1. Some Special Compilers; 8.2. Dynamic Compiling; Summary of the Deadly Sins.

[OS: General]
Colin, Andrew John Theodore. Introduction to Operating Systems.
London: Macdonald; New York: American Elsevier, 1971.
vii, 120pp. Computer Monographs, 17.

[OS: General]
Cuttle, Geoffrey, and Philip Bedford Robinson, eds. Executive Programs and Operating Systems.
London: Macdonald, 1970.
124pp. Reissue: London, Macdonald; New York, American Elsevier, 1970 ([10], 116pp; Computer Monographs, 10).

[OS: General]
Deitel, Harvey M. An Introduction to Operating Systems.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1983].
xxx, 673pp. Revised edition (cover states: 'Including case studies in: UNIX, VAX, CP/M, MVS, VM; with concurrent programming in Ada'): Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1984] (xxviii, 673pp). 2nd edition: Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1990 (xxvi, 853pp). 3rd edition (by Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, and David R. Choffnes with the title Operating Systems): Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2004 (lix, 1209pp).

[OS: General]
Gorman, Mary S., and S. Todd Stubbs. Introduction to Operating Systems: A Survey Course.
[Boston, Massachusetts]: South-Western Computer Education [Course Technology], 2000.
x, 254pp. Covers: MS-DOS, Windows, Mac OS, Linux, Windows NT, and Novell Netware.

[OS: General]
Holland, R. C. Microprocessors and their Operating Systems: A Comprehensive Guide to 8-, 16- and 32-Bit Hardware, Assembly Language and Computer Architecture.
Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1989.
viii, 186pp. Contents: 1. Microcomputer Principles; 2. Intel 8080/8085 Family (8-Bit); 3. Zilog Z80; 4. Motorola MC6800 Family (8-Bit); 5. MOS Technology MCS6500 Family (8-Bit); 6. Intel 8086/8088 Family (16-Bit); 7. Motorola MC68000 Family (16-Bit); 8. Zilog Z891 Family (16-Bit); 9. 32-Bit Microprocessors; 10. High-Level Languages; 11. The CP/M Operating System; 12. The PC-DOS (MS-DOS) Operating System; 13. The UNIX Operating System.

[OS: General]
Nutt, Gary J. Centralized and Distributed Operating Systems.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1991.
x, 418pp.

[OS: General]
Nutt, Gary J. Operating Systems: A Modern Perspective.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1997.
xxii, 630pp. 2nd edition: Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 2000 (xxvii, 611pp). 2nd edition, Lab update: Boston, Massachusetts: Addison Wesley, 2001 (xxvii, 679pp).

[OS: General]
Ritchie, Colin. Operating Systems. Incorporating UNIX and MS-DOS.
London: DP, 1992.
vii, 226pp. 2nd edition: London: DP, 1995 (viii, 232pp); 3rd edition (with the title Operating Systems. Incorporating Unix and Windows): London: Letts Educational, 1997 (xiv, 277pp); 4th edition: London: Continuum, 2003 (xiv, 279pp).

[OS: General]
Shay, William A. An Introduction to Operating Systems.
Glenview, Illinois: HarperCollinsCollege, 1992.
xi, 611pp.

[OS: General]
Silberschatz, Abraham, and James Lyle Peterson. Operating System Concepts.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1983.
548pp. Reprinted in a number of 'alternate' editions, recorded as: 1985 (2nd, xiv, 625pp, chapter on UNIX added); 1987 (2nd, reprinted); 1988 (Alternate edition, xiii, 573pp, this text 'reordered the presentation to discuss the process concept very early...and eventually replaced the second edition'); 1991 (3rd, xviii, 696pp, additional author: Peter Baer Galvin, case studies: 4.3BSD and Mach); 1994 (4th, xvi, 780pp); 1998 (5th, xvii, 888pp); 1999 (5th, reprinted); 2001 (Windows 2000 Supplement Chapter to Accompany Operating System Concepts, Fifth Edition, New York: Wiley, 2001, pp.805-849); New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2002 (6th, xxi, 887pp, additional author: Greg Gagne); New York: Wiley, 2003 (xix, 945pp, 'Windows XP Update'); New York: Wiley, 2003 (6th, xxi, 951pp, 'Windows XP Update'); 2003 (6th, 'with Java', xxiii, 952pp); Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, 2004 (6th, 'with Java', xxiii, 952pp, 'This text blends the material from the sixth edition of Operating System Concepts and the first edition of Applied Operating System Concepts'); Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, 2005 (7th, xxii, 921pp); Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, 2007 (7th, 'with Java', xxiv, 966pp). The 6th edition was also published in Italian, Sistemi Operativi: Concetti ed Esempi, Rome: Pearson Education Italia, 2002 (xxiii, 934pp). Publication dates for some editions are uncertain. The content of the work alters considerably across editions. Contents (3rd edition): [Part 1: Overview:] 1. Introduction; 2. Computer System Structures; 3. Operating System Structures; [Part 2: Process Management:] 4. Processes; 5. Process Coordination; 6. Deadlocks; [Part 3: Storage Management:] 7. Memory Management; 8. Virtual Memory; 9. Secondary Storage Management; [Part 4: Files and Protection:] 10. File Systems; 11. Protection; [Part 5:] 12. Distributed System Structures; 13. Distributed Coordination; 14. Distributed File Systems; [Part 6: Case Studies:] 15. The UNIX Operating System; 16. The Mach Operating System; 17. Historical Perspective.

[OS: General]
Switzer, Robert L. Operating Systems: A Practical Approach.
New York: Prentice-Hall, 1993.
xi, 463pp.

[OS: General]
Tanenbaum, Andrew S. Operating Systems: Design and Implementation.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1987.
xvi, 719pp. 2nd edition (additional author: Alfred Woodhull): Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1997 (xvii, 939pp; with a CD-ROM). 3rd edition: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2006 (xvii, 1054pp; with a CD-ROM). 'This book describes a small, but real UNIX-like operating system: MINIX. The book demonstrates how it works while illustrating the principles behind it.'

[OS: General]
Trevennor, Alan. Operating Systems: A User-Friendly Guide.
Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, [c.1984].
167pp. Primarily works from DEC OSs as examples. Covers minicomputers and microcomputers.

[OS: General]
Turner, Raymond W. Operating Systems: Design and Implementation.
New York: Macmillan; London: Collier-Macmillan, 1986.
xi, 258pp.

[OS General: ART]
Clements, A. "Keeping an Orderly House: Monitors for Microprocessors."
Personal Computer World November 1978. pp.60-65.
Monitor program design issues, particularly MIKBUG and FBUG.

[OS: General: ART]
Owen, William. "My Kingdom for an OS."
Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1985. pp.48-50.
Overview of operating system functions.

[OS: BeOS]
Brown, Martin C. BeOS: Porting UNIX Applications.
San Francisco: Morgan Kaufmann, 1998.

[OS: BeOS]
Giampaolo, Dominic. Practical File System Design with the Be File System.
San Francisco: Morgan Kaufmann, 1998.

[OS: BeOS]
Hacker, Scot, Henry Bortman, and Chris Herborth. The BeOS Bible.
Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1999.
xxvii, 916pp. Cover states: 'Covers version R4 of BeOS on Intel/PowerPC'. Contents: 1. The MediaOS; 2. Meet the System; 3. Installation; 4. Get Online Fast; 5. Files and the Tracker; 6. The Terminal; 7. Working with Queries; 8. Networking; 9. Preferences and Customization; 10. System Tools and Utilities; 11. Network Applications; 12. Productivity Applications; 13. Graphics Applications; 14. Media Applications; 15. Other Goodies; 16. Troubleshooting and Maintenance. Includes interviews with Jean-Louis Gassée, Peter Potrebic, Bob Herold, Pavel Cisler, Cyril Meurillon, George Hoffman, Russ McMahon, Hiroshi Lockheimer, Dominic Giampaolo, Pierre Raynaud-Richard, Jon Watte, and Tim Martin.

[OS: BeOS]
Sydow, Dan Parks. Programming the Be Operating System.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 1999.

[OS: CP/M]
Arnow, Murray. The Apple CP/M Book.
Glenview, Illinois: Scott, Foresman, [1985].

[OS: CP/M]
Barbier, Ken. CP/M Assembly Language Programming.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Barbier, Ken. CP/M Solutions.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.; London: Prentice-Hall, 1985.

[OS: CP/M]
Barbier, Ken. CP/M Techniques.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.; London: Prentice-Hall, [1984].

[OS: CP/M]
Bove, Tony, and Cheryl Rhodes. InfoWorld's Essential Guide to CP/M.
New York: Harper & Row, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Bove, Tony, and Cheryl Rhodes. The Users Guide to CP/M Systems.
New York: Baen Books, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Breder, Pavel. Power! A User-Orientated, Intelligent Front End for CP/M.
San Francisco, California: Computing, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Brigham, Bruce. CP/M Programmer's Encyclopedia.
Indianapolis: Que, [1984].

[OS: CP/M]
Brigham, Bruce, ed. CP/M Summary Guide for Version 1.4 and 2.0.
Glastonbury: Rosetta Stone, 1980.

[OS: CP/M]
Brookes, Graham R., G. A. Manson, and J. A. Thompson. CP/M 80 System Programming.
Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 1985.

[OS: CP/M]
Campbell, John Lloyd. CP/M Plus on the Amstrad PCW.
Oxford: New Tech, 1992.

[OS: CP/M]
Chan, Yuk Lun. "Local Area Network with Concurrent CP/M as the Host System."
PhD Thesis. Cardiff, 1988.

[OS: CP/M]
Clarke, Andrew R. M., and David Powys-Lybbe. The Amstrad CP/M Plus.
2nd edition; London: M.M.L. Systems, 1986.

[OS: CP/M]
Clarke, Andrew R. M., John Michael Eaton, and David Powys-Lybbe. CP/M: The Software Bus. A Programmer's Companion.
Wilmslow: Sigma Technical, [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Conn, Richard L. ZCPR3: The Libraries.
Palo Alto Hills, California: Echelon, 1985.
ZCPR (version 3) replaced CP/M's normal CCP (Console Command Processor). ZCPR stands for 'Z80 Command Processor Replacement'.

[OS: CP/M]
Conn, Richard L. ZCPR3: The Manual. The CP/M-80 Super Console Command Processor Replacement. Give Your 8-Bit CP/M System UNIX-Like Flexibility and Speed.
New York: New York Zoetrope, 1985.
351pp. ZCPR (version 3) replaced CP/M's normal CCP (Console Command Processor). ZCPR stands for 'Z80 Command Processor Replacement'.

[OS: CP/M]
Cortesi, David E. Inside Concurrent CP/M. A Guide for Users.
New York; London: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, [1984].

[OS: CP/M]
Cortesi, David E. Inside CP/M. A Guide for Users and Programmers with CP/M-86 and MP/M2.
New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, [1982].

[OS: CP/M]
Cortesi, David E. Inside CP/M-86. A Guide for Users.
New York; London: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Cortesi, David E. Inside CP/M-86 Plus. A Guide for Users.
New York; London: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, [1984].

[OS: CP/M]
Cortesi, David E. A Programmer's Notebook: Utilities for CP/M-80.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
The CP/M Software Library Catalogue.
[Dartford, Kent]: CP/M User Group UK, 1985.
[5], 78, [46]pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Dahmke, Mark. The Byte Guide to CP/M-86.
New York; London: McGraw-Hill, [1984].

[OS: CP/M]
Datapro/McGraw-Hill Guide to CP/M Software.
Delran, N.J.; New York: Datapro Research Corporation: McGraw-Hill, [1983].
2nd edition: [1985].

[OS: CP/M]
Dennon, Jack D. CP/M Revealed.
Rochelle Park, N.J.: Hayden, 1982.

[OS: CP/M]
Desaultels, Edouard J., Michael V. Laric, and M. Ronald Stiff. SuperCalc for CP/M Based Computers.
Dubuque, Iowa: William C. Brown, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Devoney, C. CP/M Word Processing.
Indianapolis: QUE Publishing Corporation, 1982.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. CP/M Interface Guide.
Revised edition; Pacific Grove, California: Digital Research, [1978].
38pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. CP/M System Alteration Guide.
Revised edition; Pacific Grove, California: Digital Research, [1978].
[47]pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. Programmer's Utilities Guide for the CP/M Family of Operating Systems.
Pacific Grove, California: Digital Research, 1982.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. CP/M 2.2 with GSX Graphics for the BBC Microcomputer with Z80 Second Processor.
3rd edition; Cambridge: Acorn Computers, 1983.
Cover title: CP/M Operating System Manual.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. Concurrent CP/M-86 Operating System Programmer's Utilities Guide.
Pacific Grove, California: Digital Research, March 1983.
Perfect bound. Multi-paged. Contents: 1. Introduction to ASM-86; 2. Elements of ASM-86 Assembly Language; 3. Assembler Directives; 4. The ASM-86 Instruction Set; 5. Code-Macro Facilities; 6. DDT-86; Appendices. Coded: 1034-3000.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. Concurrent CP/M Operating System Programmer's Reference Guide.
Pacific Grove, California: Digital Research, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. Concurrent CP/M Operating System User's Guide, Release 3.1.
Pacific Grove, California: Digital Research, January 1984.
Ring bound, in a slip-case. Multi-paged. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Getting Started; 3. Concurrent CP/M Command Summary; 4. ED, the Concurrent CP/M Context Editor; Appendices. Coded: 1034-2003.

[OS: CP/M]
Digital Research. The CP/M Software Finder.
Pacific Grove, California: Digital Research, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Disz, Terrence L. Fast Reference Guide to CP/M.
Hasbrouck Heights, N.J.: Hayden, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Dwyer, Thomas A., and Margot Critchfield. CP/M and the Personal Computer.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Dwyer, Thomas A., and Margot Critchfield. Pocket Guide to CP/M.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Fernandez, Judi N., and Ruth Ashley. CP/M for the IBM: Using CP/M-86.
New York; Chichester: Wiley, [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Fernandez, Judi N., and Ruth Ashley. Using CP/M.
New York: Wiley, [1980].

[OS: CP/M]
Frankel, Steven M. The Compleat Apple CP/M. For the Microsoft SoftCard, Microsoft Premium SoftCard IIe, ALS Z-Card II, ALS The CPM Card, PCPI APPLI-CARD, and Micropro StarCard.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Gelb, Neil G. Using COBOL in an MP/M System.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Good, Phillip I. A Critic's Guide to Software for CP/M Computers.
Radnor, Philadelphia: Chilton, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Gosling, Peter Edward. Using CP/M.
Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1985.

[OS: CP/M]
Halamka, John D. The Best of CP/M Software.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, [1984].

[OS: CP/M]
Hoenig, Alan. Wordstar for CP/M Based Computers.
Dubuque, Iowa: William C. Brown, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Hogan, Thom. Osborne CP/M User Guide.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [1981].
2nd edition: 1982; 3rd edition: 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Hughes, Lawrence E. System Programming Under CP/M-80.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
The Human Connection. Using CP/M on your Kaypro 10.
Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [1984].
The Human Connection is a firm.

[OS: CP/M]
Ingraham, Curtis A. CP/M Diskguide.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Jakes, Susan Eileen. "Esachem: A CP/M Based Interactive Computer Simulation of Searching Chemical Abstracts on ESA-IRS."
M.Sc. Thesis. University of Sheffield, Department of Information Studies, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Johnson-Laird, Andy. The Programmer's CP/M Handbook.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Kewney, Guy. How-To-Card for Aaargh!Star: The Easy Way to Recover CP/M Files 'Lost' in Memory.
London: Iansyst, [1983].
Folded sheet.

[OS: CP/M]
King, Gordon. Z-80 Assembler for CP/M.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Lee, John David. Wordstar and CP/M Made Easy.
Chichester; New York: Wiley, [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Libes, Sol, ed. Programmer's Guide to CP/M.
Morris Plains, N.J.: Microsystems Press, 1982.

[OS: CP/M]
Likens, Chris, and Rolland Love, comps. CP/M Software Directory.
New York: Bowker, 1984.
This may be a periodical publication.

[OS: CP/M]
Lindsay, Jon. CP/M-86 Assembly Language Programming.
New York: Brady Communications Co., 1986.

[OS: CP/M]
Lindsay, Jon. Introduction to CP/M Assembly Language.
2nd edition; [n.p.]: Executive Computer, 1983.
3rd edition: Hasbrouck Heights, N.J.: Hayden Book Co., 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
McBride, P. K. An Introduction to CP/M Plus on Amstrad Computers. Includes CP/M 2.2.
Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.

[OS: CP/M]
McCabe, Frank G. Micro-PROLOG: Programmer's Reference Manual. CP/M Version.
2nd edition; London: Logic Programming Associates Ltd., 1981.
70pp. 3rd edition (Micro-PROLOG 3.0) by Frank G. McCabe and K. L. Clark, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Miller, Alan R. The CP/M Plus Handbook.
Berkeley: Sybex, [1984].

[OS: CP/M]
Miller, Alan R. Mastering CP/M.
Berkeley: Sybex, [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Morrell, Barry, and Peter Whittle. CP/M 80 Programmer's Guide.
London: Macmillan, 1985.

[OS: CP/M]
Murtha, Stephen M., and Mitchell Waite. CP/M Primer.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, [1980].
2nd edition: 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Myaskovsky, Robert, ed. Index to CP/M Software.
3rd edition; Santa Monica, California: Small Systems Group, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Patten, Rob, and Paul Calandrino. Getting Started with CP/M.
Rochelle Park, N.J.: Hayden Book Co., 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Penfold, R. A. An Introduction to CP/M.
London: Babani, 1986.

[OS: CP/M]
Perry, James T., and Robert F. McJunkins. CP/M for the Kaypro. With an Introduction to dBASE II.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Perry, James T., and Robert F. McJunkins. A User-Friendly Guide to CP/M. With an Introduction to dBASE II.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., [1983].

[OS: CP/M]
Purdum, Jack Jay. BASIC-80 and CP/M.
New York: Macmillan; London: Collier Macmillan, 1983.
xiii, 220pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Sachs, Jonathan. The Osborne/McGraw-Hill CP/M-86 User's Guide.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1985.
viii, 568pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Amstrad CP/M Assembly Language.
London: Collins, 1986.
[160]pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Smith, Bruce. Introducing CP/M on the BBC Micro Z80 Second Processor.
London: Collins, 1985.
171pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Stultz, Russell Allen. The Illustrated CP/M-WordStar Dictionary. With MailMerge and SpellStar Operations.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1983.
x, 258pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Terry, N. S. A Distributed CP/M Filestore Using Non-CP/M Machines. Progress Report.
[Leeds]: Univ. of Leeds, Department of Computer Studies, 1984.
Technical Report, 186.

[OS: CP/M]
Townsend, Carl. CP/M Database Management Systems.
Beaverton, Oregon: Dilithium Press, 1983.
xii, 302pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Townsend, Carl. Exploring Word Processors. CP/M edition.
Beaverton, Oregon: Dilithium Press, 1984.
viii, 239pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Townsend, Carl. How to Get Started with CP/M (Control Program for Microcomputers).
Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: TAB Books, 1982.
127pp. Updated edition: Beaverton, Oregon: Dilithium Press, [1983] (158pp; copyright date '1981' but front cover states: 'Update! Includes new suppliers, manufacturers, and user groups', and dated [1983?] in the Library of Congress catalogue). Contents (Dilithium Press edition): 1. Who Needs an Operating System?; 2. CP/M Overview; 3. Shopping for CP/M Hardware; 4. Your First CP/M Session; 5. Files, Records, and Disks; 6. Using the Utilities; 7. Back-Up Procedures and Disk Care; 8. The Editor - Introduction; 9. Word Processing and Spoolers; 10. CP/M Compatible Programming Languages; [Appendices:] A. CP/M Memory Map; B. CP/M Hardware Suppliers; C. CP/M Software Suppliers; D. CP/M Diagnostics; E. CP/M User Groups; F. Glossary.

[OS: CP/M]
Townsend, Carl. Practical Guide to CP/M.
Beaverton, Oregon: Dilithium Press, 1983.
x, 224pp.

[OS: CP/M]
University of Glasgow. Computing Service. ECCE and SCREEN under CP/M.
Glasgow: University Computing Service, 1982.
User Guide, E3/1. ii, 37pp.

[OS: CP/M]
Vision Associates, ed. The CP/M Software Directory for Professional Microcomputers.
Cambridge: Cambridge Information and Research Services, [1983-1984].
Periodical. Annual.

[OS: CP/M]
Waite, Mitchell, and John Angermeyer. CP/M Bible. The Authoritative Reference Guide to CP/M.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1983.
429pp. Illustrated by T. R. Emrick.

[OS: CP/M]
Waite, Mitchell, and Robert Lafore. Soul of CP/M: How to Use the Hidden Power of Your CP/M System.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1983.

[OS: CP/M]
Weber, Jeffrey R. CP/M Simplified.
Cleveland, Ohio: Weber Systems, 1982.

[OS: CP/M]
Yeung, Bik-Chung. Programming the Z80 Under CP-M.
London: Butterworth, 1984.

[OS: CP/M]
Zaks, Rodnay. The CP/M Handbook with MP/M.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, [1980].

[OS: CP/M: ART]
Barker, Philip. "Introducing CP/M."
Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.22-28.
Thorough overview. Includes details of the implementation of CP/M on a PET using the Softbox.

[OS: DR/Novell/OpenDOS: ART]
Cruikshank, Alex. "Caldera OpenDOS 7.01."
PC Direct December 1997. p.553.
Review.

[OS: DR/Novell/OpenDOS: ART]
Holbrook, Matthew. "Operating Systems."
Computer Shopper December 1998, No. 130. pp.861-863.
Review of DR-DOS 7.02 for OEM PCs, the DR System Builder Kit, and DR WebSpyder 2.

[OS: DR/Novell/OpenDOS: ART]
Holbrook, Matthew. "Network Shopper: Paging DR-DOS."
Computer Shopper March 2000, No. 145. pp.601-602.
Background to the complex ownership of DR-DOS.

[OS: FLEX: ART]
Edward, T. E. "Lost Sector."
Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. pp.34-35.
Machine code listing. Disk recovery software for the FLEX OS.

[OS: FLEX: ART]
Izod, Paul, and Alan Stirling. "FLEX Explained."
Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1983. pp.44-46.
Describes the FLEX-9 OS with particular reference to the E&CM computer.

[OS: GEM]
Balma, Phillip, and William Fitler. Programmer's Guide to GEM.
Berkeley; London: Sybex, [1986].

[OS: GEM]
Digital Research. The GEM Software Directory.
Newbury, Berkshire: Digital Research, 1987.
Issued as an annual periodical.

[OS: GEM]
Guzaitis, Joe, Joe Byrd, and Phil Balma. The World of GEM.
Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [1987].

[OS: GEM]
Hall, Patrick J. Introduction to PC Computing: MS-DOS, GEM & BASIC on the PC200 & PC compatibles.
Wilmslow: Sigma, 1989.

[OS: GEM]
Howling, Barry, and Andrew Pepper. A Programmer's Guide to GEM on the IBM PC and Compatibles.
Wilmslow: Sigma, 1988.

[OS: GEM]
Lang, Kathy. Getting it Done with GEM.
London: Heinemann, 1986.

[OS: GEM]
Lang, Kathy. Using GEM on the Amstrad PC.
Barnet: Glentop, 1986.

[OS: GEM]
Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Working with Gem on the IBM PC.
London: Sunshine, 1986.

[OS: GEM]
Morris, Stephen. Presentation Graphics with GEM.
London: Heinemann, 1986.

[OS: GEM]
Penfold, J. W. A Concise Introduction to GEM.
London: Babani, 1989.

[OS: GEM]
Prochnow, Dave. The GEM Operating System Handbook.
Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1986.

[OS: GEM]
Szczepanowski, Norbert, and Bernd Gunther. Atari ST GEM Programmer's Reference: The Complete Guide to Programming the ST Using the Graphics Environment Manager.
Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, [c.1986-1987].
Vol. 3 in the series. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1985 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany) and 1986-1987 (Abacus). 4th printing: October 1988. Contents (4th printing): GEM Organization in the Atari ST; Programming with GEM; Inside GEM: The VDI; Inside GEM: The VDS; Overview of the VDI Functions; Overview of the AES Functions; 68000 Instructions. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk.

[OS: GEM: ART]
Lawrence, David, and Mark England. "The Gem in the Crown."
Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 7. 13-19 February 1986. pp.16-17.

[OS: GEM: ART]
Pennell, Andy. "A Jewel in the Crown."
Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 10. 7-13 March 1985. pp.14-15.
Review of Digital Research's Graphical Environment Manager (GEM) WIMP-based OS.

[OS: Linux]
DiBona, Chris, Sam Ockman, and Mark Stone, eds. Open Sources: Voices of the Open Source Revolution.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly Media Inc., January 1999.
viii, 272pp. Contents: 1. Introduction (Chris diBona, Sam Ockman, and Mark Stone); 2. A Brief History of Hackerdom (Eric S. Raymond); 3. Twenty Years of Berkeley Unix: From AT&T-Owned to Freely Redistributable (Marshall Kirk McKusick); 4. The Internet Engineering Task Force (Scott Bradner); 5. The GNU Operating System and the Free Software Movement (Richard Stallman); 6. Future of Cygnus Solutions: An Entrepreneur's Account (Michael Tiemann); 7. Software Engineering (Paul Vixie); 8. The Linux Edge (Linus Torvalds); 9. Giving It Away: How Red Hat Software Stumbled Across a New Economic Model and Helped Improve an Industry (Robert Young); 10. Diligence, Patience, and Humility (Larry Wall); 11. Open Source as a Business Strategy (Brian Behlendorf); 12. The Open Source Definition (Bruce Perens); 13. Hardware, Software, and Infoware (Tim O'Reilly); 14. Freeing the Source: The Story of Mozilla (Jim Hamerly, Tom Paquin, and Susan Walton); 15. The Revenge of the Hackers (Eric S. Raymond); Appendix A: The Tanenbaum-Torvalds Debate; Appendix B: The Open Source Definition, Version 1.0.

[OS: Linux]
DiBona, Chris, Danese Cooper, and Mark Stone, eds. Open Sources 2.0.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly Media Inc., October 2005.
xl, 445pp. Contents: Foreword: Source is Everything (Kim Polese); I: Open Source: Competition and Evolution; 1. The Mozilla Project: Past and Future (Mitchell Baker); 2. Open Source and Proprietary Software Development (Chris DiBona); 3. A Tale of Two Standards (Jeremy Allison); 4. Open Source and Security (Ben Laurie); 5. Dual Licensing (Michael Olson); 6. Open Source and the Commoditization of Software (Ian Murdock); 7. Open Source and the Commodity Urge: Disruptive Models for a Disruptive Development Process (Matthew N. Asay); 8. Under the Hood: Open Source and Open Standards Business Models in Context (Stephen R. Walli); 9. Open Source and the Small Entrepreneur (Russ Nelson); 10. Why Open Source Needs Copyright Politics (Wendy Seltzer); 11. Libre Software in Europe (Jesus M. Gonzalez-Barahona and Gregorio Robles); 12. OSS in India (Alolita Sharma and Robert Adkins); 13. When China Dances with OSS (Boon-Lock Yen, Louisa Liu, and Sunil Saxena); 14. How Much Freedom Do You Want? (Bruno Souza); II: Beyond Open Source: Collaboration and Community; 15. Making a New World (Doc Searls); 16. The Open Source Paradigm Shift (Tim O'Reilly); 17. Extending Open Source Principles Beyond Software Development (Pamela Jones); 18. Open Source Biology (Andrew Hessel); 19. Everything is Known (Eugene Kim); 20. The Early History of Nupedia and Wikipedia: A Memoir (Larry Sanger); 21. Open Beyond Software (Sonali K. Shah); 22. Patterns of Governance in Open Source (Steven Weber); 23. Communicating Many to Many (Jeff Bates and Mark Stone); Appendix A: The Open Source Definition; Appendix B: Referenced Open Source Licenses; Appendix C: Columns from Slashdot.

[OS: Linux]
Gropp, William, Ewing Lusk, and Thomas Sterling. Beowulf Cluster Computing with Linux.
2nd edition; Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2003.

[OS: Linux]
Hollabaugh, Craig. Embedded Linux: Hardware, Software, and Interfacing.
Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2002.

[OS: Linux]
Linux Answers.
Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [November 1999-].
Periodical. Issue 1: November 1999. Sold with a covermounted CD-ROM.

[OS: Linux]
Linux Journal: The Monthly Magazine of the Linux Community.
Seattle, Washington: Specialized Systems Consultants, [March 1994-].
Periodical. Monthly. Founded by Phil Hughes.

[OS: Linux]
Linux Magazine.
Macclesfield, Cheshire: Linux New Media, [October 2000-].
Periodical. Issue 1: October 2000. Launch editor: Julian Moss. Sold with a covermounted CD-ROM.

[OS: Linux]
Love, Robert. Linux Kernel Development: A Practical Guide to the Design and Implementation of the Linux Kernel.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams; London: Pearson Education, 2003.

[OS: Linux]
Moody, Glyn. Rebel Code: Inside Linux and the Open Source Revolution.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: Perseus Publishing, January 2001.
viii, 334pp. London; New York: Allen Lane, 2001 (viii, 334pp). New York: Basic Books, 2002 (x, 342pp). London: Penguin, 2002 (viii, 343pp). Contents (Perseus Publishing edition): 1. The Coolest Year; 2. The New GNU Thing; 3. A Minor Rebellion; 4. Factor X; 5. Patching Up; 6. Root then Boot; 7. Linus 2.0; 8. Learning from Berkeley; 9. The Art of Code; 10. Low-Down in the Valley; 11. Free the Lizard; 12. A Foothold; 13. Alliances and IPOs; 14. Open for Business; 15. Trolls Versus Gnomes; 16. Lies, Damned Lies, and Benchmarks; 17. Tomorrow's Hothouse; 18. Beyond the Market.

[OS: Linux]
Raymond, Eric S. The Cathedral and the Bazaar. Musings on Linux and Open Source by an Accidental Revolutionary.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: O'Reilly, 1999.
Revised edition: Cambridge, Massachusetts: O'Reilly, 2001.

[OS: Linux]
Rubini, Alessandro. Linux Device Drivers.
Cambridge: O'Reilly, 1998.
2nd edition (to v.2.4 of the kernel) by Alessandro Rubini and Jonathan Corbet, Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 2001; 3rd edition (to v.2.6.10 of the kernel) by Alessandro Rubini, Jonathan Corbet, and Greg Kroah-Hartman, Beijing; Cambridge: O'Reilly, 2005.

[OS: Linux]
Strobel, Stefan, and Thomas Uhl. Linux: Unleashing the Workstation in your PC.
3rd edition; New York: Springer, 1997.
Translated by Robert Bach & Aileen Derieg. 1st English edition published in 1994, 2nd in 1996. Original German title: Linux: vom PC zur Workstation.

[OS: Linux]
Williams, Sam. Free as in Freedom. Richard Stallman's Crusade for Free Software.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 2002.
xii, 225pp. Contents: 1. For Want of a Printer; 2. 2001: A Hacker Odyssey; 3. A Portrait of the Hacker as a Young Man; 4. Impeach God; 5. Small Puddle of Freedom; 6. The Emacs Commune; 7. A Stark Moral Choice; 8. St. Ignucius; 9. The GNU General Public License; 10. GNU/Linux; 11. Open Source; 12. A Brief Journey Through Hacker Hell; 13. Continuing the Fight; Epilogue: Crushing Loneliness; [Appendices:] A. Terminology; B. Hack, Hackers, and Hacking; C. GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL).

[OS: Linux]
Yaghmour, Karim. Building Embedded Linux Systems.
Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 2003.

[OS: Linux: ART]
Fairhead, Harry. "Wizard of OS."
Computer Shopper January 2000, No. 143. pp.581-583.
Review of Caldera Linux.

[OS: MINIX]
Tanenbaum, Andrew S. Operating Systems: Design and Implementation.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1987.
xvi, 719pp. 2nd edition (additional author: Alfred Woodhull): Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1997 (xvii, 939pp; with a CD-ROM). 3rd edition: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2006 (xvii, 1054pp; with a CD-ROM). 'This book describes a small, but real UNIX-like operating system: MINIX. The book demonstrates how it works while illustrating the principles behind it.'

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS: Manual]
Compaq Computer Corporation. MS-DOS Version 3.2 Reference Guide.
[n.p.]: Compaq Computer Corporation, 1987.
1st edition: February 1987. Ring bound, multi-paged. Binder has the title MS-DOS Version 3 Reference Guide. Assembly: 106650-001; Text: 106651-001; Binder: 106652-001. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Files and File Structure; 3. Command Structure; 4. Commands; 5. Configuration Commands; 6. DISKINIT; 7. FDISK; 8. TAPE; 9. CMPQADAP; 10. EDLIN; 11. LINK; 12. DEBUG; Appendix A. Error Messages; Appendix B. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix C. File Attributes.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS: Manual]
Microsoft Corporation. MS-DOS Version 3.3; GW-BASIC Version 3.2.
[n.p.]: Microsoft Corporation for Hyundai, 1987.
590pp. [Part I: MS-DOS:] 1. More about Files and Directories; 2. About Commands; 3. MS-DOS Commands; 4. Batch Processing; 5. MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys; 6. The Line Editor (EDLIN); 7. Link: A Linker; 8. Debug; Appendix A. Instructions for Users with Single Floppy Disk Drive Systems; Appendix B. How to Configure Your System; Appendix C. Installable Device Drivers; Appendix D. Configuring Your Hard Disk (FDISK); Appendix E. How to Use Code Pages; Appendix F. MS-DOS Message Directory; Index; [Part II: GW-BASIC:] 1. Introduction; 2. Using the GW-BASIC Interpreter; 3. Writing Programs Using the GW-BASIC Editor; 4. Working with Files and Devices; 5. Using Advanced Features; 6. Language Reference; Appendix A. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix B. Error Codes and Error Messages; Appendix C. Mathematical Functions Not Intrinsic to GW-BASIC; Index. Document Nos. 410630013-330-R04-0787; 410130001-320-000-0286. Coded: E4009203802A.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS: Manual]
Seiko Epson Corporation. Epson DOS 4 ...Getting More.
Suwa, Japan: Seiko Epson Corporation, 1989.
Spiral bound manual for MS-DOS 4 running on Epson PCs. 350pp. Text has the printed [date] '1.20.89' on the rear cover. Other codes: '89.08-10A [G-01]' (rear cover) and 'Y19199100701' [final '01' smaller] (front cover).

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS: Manual]
Seiko Epson Corporation. Epson DOS 4 ...In Action.
Suwa, Japan: Seiko Epson Corporation, 1989.
Spiral bound introduction to Epson PCs running MS-DOS 4. 66pp. Text has the printed [date] '1.20.89' on the rear cover. Other codes: '89.08-10A [G-01]' (rear cover) and 'Y19199100601' [final '01' smaller] (front cover).

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Cooper, Jim. Using MS-DOS 6.22. Special Edition.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Que, 2002.
xxix, 1022pp. Given as the 3rd edition (in a series with varying titles).

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Duncan, Ray. Advanced MS-DOS Programming: The Microsoft Guide for Assembly Language and C Programmers.
Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, 1988.
xii, 468pp. ISBN 0-914845-77-2 Copyright 1986 Ray Duncan; '1988' in LoC cataloguing data (QA76.76.O63 D857 1988 005.4'46 88-1251). A companion disk was available. Contents: 1. Genealogy of MS-DOS; 2. MS-DOS in Operation; 3. Programming for the MS-DOS Environment; 4. Using the MS-DOS Programming Tools; 5. Programming the Character Devices; 6. MS-DOS File and Record Manipulation; 7. Directories, Sub-Directories, and Volume Labels; 8. MS-DOS Disk Internals; 9. Memory Allocation; 10. The MS-DOS EXEC Function; 11. MS-DOS Interrupt Handlers; 12. Installable Device Drivers; 13. Writing MS-DOS Filters; MS-DOS Programming Reference; IBM PC BIOS Reference; Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification Reference.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Hall, Patrick J. Introduction to PC Computing: MS-DOS, GEM & BASIC on the PC200 & PC compatibles.
Wilmslow: Sigma, 1989.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Kamin, Jonathan, et al. Using MS-DOS 6. Special Edition.
Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1993.
xxv, 1172pp.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Kantaris, Noel. A Concise Introduction to MS-DOS.
BP232. 1987; rev. London: Babani, 1993.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
King, Richard Allen. The IBM PC-DOS Handbook.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1983.
xx, 296pp. 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1987 (xxiv, 340pp). 3rd edition: San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1988 (xxx, 359pp).

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
King, Richard Allen. The MS-DOS Handbook.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1985.
xxi, 319pp. 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1986 (xxii, 339pp). 3rd edition: San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1988 (xxx, 362pp; Acknowledgments dated December 1987; Coverage to MS-DOS v.3.3). Contents (3rd edition): [Part I: The Programmer's Handbook:] 1. MS-DOS - A First View; 2. Files in MS-DOS; 3. Disks in MS-DOS; 4. MS-DOS and the Keyboard; 5. Output to Display Monitors; 6. The Serial and Parallel Ports; 7. Dates and Times in MS-DOS; 8. Error-Handling and Memory-Resident Programs; 9. Networking with MS-DOS; [Part II: The User's Handbook:] 10. MS-DOS - A User's First View; 11. A Quick Look at EDLIN; 12. Your MS-DOS Files; 13. Configuring the System; 14. Batch Operations; 15. The Monochrome and Color/Graphics Screen; 16. Using the Serial Port; 17. The Delights of DEBUG; [Appendices:] A. MS-DOS, PC-DOS, and Compatibility; B. The Different MS-DOS Version Numbers; C. Function Call Summaries; D. Interrupt Vectors; E. Memory Maps; F. Address Conversion Tables; G. MS-DOS Command Summary - All Versions; H. MS-DOS Versions 3.2 and 3.3: New Features and Options.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Good House-Keeping in PC-DOS.
London: Sunshine, 1986.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Minasi, Mark, Bill Camarda, David J. Stang, and Kris Ashton. Inside MS-DOS 6.
Carmel, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1993.
xviii, 1266pp. With a 3.5" or 5.25" disk. 2nd edition (Inside MS-DOS 6.2): Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1993 (33, 1557pp; With a 3.5" disk). 3rd edition (Inside MS-DOS 6.22): Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1993 (xxviii, 1576pp; With a 3.5" disk).

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Podanoffsky, Michael. Dissecting DOS: A Code-Level Look at the DOS Operating System.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1995.
x, 502pp. Includes the complete source code for the DOS work-alike operating system RxDOS, illustrating how MS-DOS works. 3.5" disk included. Contents: 1. The Structure of DOS; 2. How DOS Starts Up; 3. The DOS File Functions; 4. Reading and Writing Disks; 5. File Management; 6. Process Management; 7. Memory Management; 8. Command.Com.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Simrin, Steven. MS-DOS Bible.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1985.
xi, 385pp. Title then changes to The Waite Group's MS-DOS Bible. 2nd edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1988 (xviii, 522pp). 3rd edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1989 (xxi, 630pp; Coverage to MS-DOS and PC-DOS v.4.01). 4th edition: Carmel, Indiana: Sams, 1991 (xxxvii, 718pp). Contents (3rd edition): [Part 1: Information Jump Table]; [Part 2: MS-DOS Tutorials:] 1. Starting MS-DOS; 2. MS-DOS Files; 3. Directories, Paths, and Trees; 4. MS-DOS Batch Files; 5. Configuring Your System; 6. Redirection, Filters, and Pipes; 7. The DOSSHELL Interface; 8. EDLIN, the MS-DOS Text Editor; 9. Extended Keyboard and Display Control; 10. Disk Structure and Management; 11. Memory Structure and Management; 12. Expanded Memory; 13. Terminate and Stay Resident Programs; 14. MS-DOS Device Drivers; 15. DEBUG; 16. LINK; [Part 3: MS-DOS Commands]; [Part 4: Appendices:] A. MS-DOS Interrupts and Function Calls; B. Some Undocumented Features of MS-DOS; C. Practical Batch Files; D. Code Pages and Code Page Switching; E. An Assembly Language Primer; F. ASCII Cross-Reference Tables.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Underdahl, Brian. Upgrading to MS-DOS 5.
Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1991.
xii, 388pp. Contents: Introduction; 1. Introducing DOS 5; 2. Upgrading to DOS 5; 3. Customizing Memory Usage with DOS 5; 4. Configuring DOS 5; 5. Interfacing with the DOS 5 Shell; 6. Using DOS Macros; 7. Preparing, Protecting, and Repairing Disks; 8. Managing Directories and Files; 9. Maintaining Disk and File Integrity; 10. Using Additional New and Enhanced Commands; 11. EDIT: Using the Full-Screen Editor; 12. QBasic: A Revised BASIC; Command Reference.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Underdahl, Brian. Upgrading to MS-DOS 6.
Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1993.
xiii, 258pp. A revision of Upgrading to MS-DOS 5. (1991).

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Villani, Pat. FreeDOS Kernel.
[n.p.]: Miller Freeman, 1996.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Wyatt, Allen L., Sr., W. Edward Tiley, and Jon Paisley. Using MS-DOS 6.2. Special Edition.
Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1993.
xx, 1115pp. 10th printing: 1996. Contents: [1. DOS Fundamentals:] 1. DOS and the Personal Computer; 2. Starting DOS; 3. Using DOS Commands; 4. Using the DOS Shell; [2. Files and Directories:] 5. Understanding Files and Directories; 6. Understanding Disks and Disk Drives; 7. Preparing and Maintaining Disks; 8. Working with Files; 9. Managing Your Files; 10. Protecting Your Data; 11. Emergency Procedures; [3. Controlling DOS:] 12. Working with System Information; 13. Controlling Your Environment; 14. Controlling Devices; [4. Maximizing DOS:] 15. Using the DOS Editor; 16. Understanding Batch Files; 17. Mastering Doskey and Macros; 18. Configuring Your Computer; 19. Getting the Most from Your Hard Drive; [5. Customizing DOS:] 20. Understanding ANSI.SYS; 21. Understanding the International Features of DOS; Command Reference; [Appendices:] A. Files Supplied with MS-DOS 6; B. DOS Environment Variables; C. DOS Messages; D. DOS and DOS Utility Programs, Keyboard Commands; E. ASCII and Extended ASCII Codes; F. ANSI Control Codes; G. International Country Codes.

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS]
Wyatt, Allen L., Sr., et al. Using MS-DOS 6.22. Special Edition.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Que, 2000.
xxviii, 1106pp. With a CD-ROM. Given as the 2nd edition (in a series with varying titles).

[OS: MS-DOS/PC-DOS: ART]
Hulmes, Gordon. "The Basics of DOS."
Micro Mart 18-24 November 2004, No. 826. pp.76-78.
Overview.

[OS: OS/2]
McClure, Rhyder, and William H. Zack. Fast Access OS/2 Version 1.2.
New York; London: Brady, 1990.
ix, 309pp. Contents: [Part I. Using OS/2:] 1. Installing OS/2; 2. Introduction to the OS/2 Presentation Manager; 3. Printing and Printer Management; 4. The OS/2 File System; 5. Using the System Editor; 6. Using Multiple OS/2 Sessions; 7. Automatically Starting Programs; [Part II. The Most Important OS/2 Commands:] 8. Why Only the Most Important Commands?; 9. The Commands; [Part III. Putting It All To Work:] 10. Input/Output Redirection and Appending Files; 11. Command File Programming; 12. Communicating With You; 13. Changing the Flow of Command Execution; 14. Conditional Command Line Execution; 15. Passing Parameters to Commands; 16. Controlling the OS/2 Command Environment; Appendix A. Other OS/2 Commands; Appendix B. The OS/2 Command Menus.

[OS: OS/2]
Reich, David E. Designing OS/2 Applications.
New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1993.
xxix, 300pp. Foreword by Lee Reiswig. Contents: [Section I: Why OS/2?:] 1. OS/2 as an End-User Platform; 2. Why Program for OS/2?; 3. OS/2 as a Development Platform; [Section II: Overall Application Design:] 4. Good Programs Have Good Up-Front Design; 5. OS/2 Kernel Architecture; 6. Presentation Manager, Graphics, and the User Interface; 7. Features for Your Application; 8. Application Structure; [Section III: Use Building Blocks or Your App Will Crumble:] 9. Block Design and Architecture; 10. Designing the User Interface; 11. Where's the Beef?; [Section IV: Making It Happen:] 12. The Development Environment; 13. Prototyping the User Interface; 14. Building the Core Function; 15. Using Advanced Functions; 16. Non-English Language Support; [Section V: Performance:] 17. Base Tuning; 18. Visual Tuning; [Section VI: Testing and Code Change:] 19. Testing Methodology; 20. Code Change; [Section VII: Installation Programs:] 21. Designing the Installation Program; Summary and Conclusion.

[OS: OS/2]
Robbins, Judd. Essential OS/2 For New OS/2 Users.
San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1988.
xxiv, 367pp. For Version 1.0 Standard Edition. 2nd edition: San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1989 (xxviii, 445pp). Contents (1st edition): [Part 1. Getting Started:] 1. The Multitasking World of OS/2; 2. Installing and Starting Up OS/2; 3. Running DOS Programs in OS/2; [Part 2. Using OS/2:] 4. Comparing OS/2 to DOS; 5. The OS/2 Command Reference; 6. Using Commands at the OS/2 Prompt; [Part 3. Advanced OS/2 Techniques:] 7. File Editing in OS/2; 8. The Power of OS/2 Batch Files; 9. Customizing Your OS/2 System; 10. Introduction to Programming in OS/2; [Appendices:] A. Glossary; B. Partitioning Your Hard Disk; C. OS/2 Command Exit Codes; D. OS/2 System Service Calls.

[OS: OS9]
Brocklehurst, G. S. "A UNIX-like shell for OS9."
M.Sc. Thesis. UMIST, 1984.

[OS: OS9: ART]
Graham, Michael. "OS9 Startup."
Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. p.43.
Customising the OS9 system disk.

[OS: OS9: ART]
James, Mike. "OS9: Multi-Tasking for the Common Man."
Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.45-48.
OS9 on the Dragon 64.

[OS: RIMOS: ART]
Agoston, Max K. "A Microprocessor Operating System: The Kernel."
Dr. Dobb's Journal September 1977, Vol. 2, No. 8. pp.20-40 (pp.346-366 of the annual volume).
Includes source code. 'This article describes in detail the kernel for a real-time interactive multiprocess operating system (RIMOS for short). RIMOS was intended to extend the Intel MDS system and because of this the kernel subroutines make use of Intel's ISIS. (The Intel monitor was used only at the start to load ISIS.) However, the source code that will be listed later is basically usable on any computer using the Intel 8080 microprocessor, except that one would have to write a file system and make some simple changes to eliminate reference to ISIS.'

[OS: RISC OS: Manual]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS Programmers Reference Manual.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1989.
4 vols. and an additional volume of Indices.

[OS: RISC OS: Manual]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS 3 Programmers Reference Manual.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1992.
4 vols. and an additional volume of Indices. Vol. 1: xii, 948pp. Vol. 2: viii, 746pp. Vol. 3: viii, 848pp. Vol. 4: viii, 576pp. Indices: viii, 102pp.

[OS: RISC OS: Manual]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS 3 Style Guide.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1993.
viii, 130pp. With a disk.

[OS: RISC OS: Manual]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS 3 Programmers Reference Manual. Volume 5. Supplement for Version 3.5.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1994.
xiv, 302pp. With a disk. The separate volume of indices was republished to cover all five volumes, including the supplement: [Cambridge]: Acorn, 1994 (x, 110pp).

[OS: RISC OS]
Fox, Martyn. First Steps in Programming Acorn RISC OS Computers.
Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Press, 1993.
252pp.

[OS: RISC OS]
Ginns, Mike. Archimedes Assembly Language: The Complete Programming Course.
Manchester: Dabs Press, May 1988.
2nd edition: Manchester: Dabs Press, 1989 (368pp); 3rd impression: Manchester: Dabs Press, October 1991. 2nd edition stated to cover the RISC OS. Contents (2nd edition, 3rd impression): 1. Introduction; 2. An Overview of the ARM; 3. Internal Architecture; 4. The BASIC Assembler; 5. The ARM Instruction Set; 6. Data Processing: Format; 7. Shift Instructions; 8. Processing Instructions; 9. Register R15; 10. Data Transfer; 11. Branches and SWI; 12. Stacks and LDM/STM; 13. The BASIC Assembler 2; 14. Techniques & Debugging; 15. Interrupts and Events; 16. Vectors; 17. OS SWI Routines; 18. The WIMP Environment; 19. Managing Fonts; 20. Templates and Input/Output; 21. Manipulating Strings; 22. Functions, Operators; 23. Control Statements and Loops; 24. Graphics Templates; 25. RISC OS Specific; Appendices.

[OS: RISC OS]
Van Someren, Alex, and Carol Atack. The ARM RISC Chip: A Programmer's Guide.
Wokingham, Berkshire: Addison-Wesley, [c.1993-1994].
xviii, 346pp.

[OS: RISC OS]
Van Someren, Alex, and Nic Van Someren. Archimedes Operating System: A User's Guide.
Manchester: Dabs Press, 1988.
320pp. 2nd printing: Manchester: Dabs Press, February 1990 (320pp). Another edition or printing: Manchester: Dabs Press, 1991 (320pp). A disk (ADFS 640K) was produced to accompany the book, and an 8pp manual was supplied with it (First edition: February 1989). Contents (2nd printing): 1. RISC Technology; 2. The ARM Instruction Set; 3. The BASIC V Assembler; 4. The Operating System; 5. Command Line Interpreter; 6. OS_CLI Related SWIs; 7. Filing Systems; 8. The FileSwitch Module; 9. Filing System SWIs; 10. Modules; 11. Writing Modules; 12. Writing Applications; 13. The Window Manager; 14. The Font Manager; 15. Sound Introduction; 16. Sound Star Commands; 17. Sound SWI Calls; 18. The Voice Generator; 19. Character Input/Output; 20. Vectors; 21. Interrupts and Events; 22. Conversion SWIs; 23. Miscellaneous SWIs; 24. The ARM Chip Set; 25. Floating Point Model; Appendices.

[OS: UNIX]
Ashley, Ruth, and Judi N. Fernandez. Teach Yourself UNIX.
Portland, Oregon: MIS Press, 1989.
xiii, 333pp. Contents: 1. Getting Started with UNIX; 2. UNIX Directories and Files; 3. UNIX Security and Access; 4. UNIX Communications; 5. Additional UNIX Commands and Techniques; 6. Using Expressions and Patterns; 7. Using the vi Editor; 8. Modifying vi Files; 9. Text Formatting with nroff; 10. Programming the Bourne Shell; 11. Programming the C Shell; 12. Basic C Programming Tools under UNIX; 13. UNIX System Administration.

[OS: UNIX]
Wilson, James. Berkeley UNIX: A Simple and Comprehensive Guide.
New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1991.
vi, 234pp. Contents: [Part I. Basic UNIX Commands:] 1. Getting In and Out of the System; 2. File and Directory Commands; 3. Editing Files; 4. C Shell Interface; 5. Miscellaneous UNIX Commands; 6. UNIX Filters; 7. Communication and File-Archiving Commands; 8. Hidden Files; [Part II. Shell Programming:] 9. C and Bourne Shell Programming; [Part III. Applications Programming in the C Programming Language with UNIX:] 10. Makefiles: Software Engineering; 11. Handling Errors; 12. File-System Calls; 13. Forks: Creating Multiple Processes; 14. Executing Commands from a Program; 15. Pipes; 16. Signals: Interrupts; 17. Interprocess Communication: Sockets; 18. Screen Manipulation: Curses; [Part IV. Miscellaneous UNIX Topics:] 19. Document Preparation; 20. System Management.

[OS: Windows 3.x: Manual]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Microsoft Windows Version 3.1.
[n.p.]: THStyme, [1992].
xxxvi, 407pp. 'THStyme' appears on the cover. The latest copyright date in the text is 1992. Internal title: Microsoft Windows User's Guide for the Microsoft Windows Operating System Version 3.1. Coded: '008.87205.ENG/'. Contents: Welcome; Setting Up Windows; New in This Version; 1. Windows Basics; 2. Application Basics; 3. Program Manager; 4. File Manager; 5. Control Panel; 6. Print Manager; 7. Non-Windows Applications; 8. PIF Editor; 9. Write; 10. Paintbrush; 11. Terminal; 12. Additional Accessories; 13. Integrating Your Windows Applications; 14. Optimizing Windows; 15. Maintaining Windows with Setup; Appendix A. Windows and Networks; Appendix B. Keyboard Shortcuts.

[OS: Windows 3.x]
Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows 3.1.
Carmel, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1992.
xx, 545pp.

[OS: Windows 3.x]
Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows for Workgroups.
Carmel, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1992.
xxiii, 735pp.

[OS: Windows 3.x]
Boyce, Jim, Bruce Hallberg, and Forrest Houlette. Inside Windows 3.11. Platinum Edition.
Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1994.
xxx, 1029pp. With a CD-ROM. Contents: [Part 1. Understanding Windows:] 1. Configuring Windows; 2. Navigating in Windows; 3. Managing Files; 4. Working with Fonts; 5. Printing in Windows; 6. Customizing Windows; [Part 2. Optimizing Windows:] 7. Enhancing Windows Performance; 8. Enhancing Windows Video; 9. Optimizing Memory; 10. Input Devices: Keyboards and Mice; 11. Optimizing Data Storage Space; 12. Troubleshooting Windows; 13. Preventing and Overcoming Viruses; 14. Using Windows on a Notebook PC; [Part 3. Putting Windows to Work:] 15. Integrating Windows and DOS; 16. Inside Windows Graphics; 17. Scanning, OCR, and Windows; 18. Communicating Through Windows; 19. Using and Building Windows Help; 20. Automating Tasks with Macros and Scripts; [Part 4. Integrating Applications:] 21. Exchanging Data Using the Clipboard; 22. Introducing Object Linking and Embedding; 23. Using OLE 2; 24. Inside Dynamic Data Exchange; 25. Data Exchange with DOS Applications; [Part 5. Networking and Windows:] 26. Understanding Networks and Workgroups; 27. Understanding Windows NT; 28. Sharing Resources in Windows; 29. Using Microsoft Mail and Fax; 30. Using Schedule+; 31. Integrating Windows and Novell NetWare; 32. Using Multiple Protocols; 33. Using Remote Access Services; [Part 6. Applying Multimedia:] 35. Working with Multimedia in Windows; 36. Using Multimedia Audio; 37. Using Multimedia Video.

[OS: Windows 3.x: ART]
Gann, Roger. "How to Upgrade and Update Windows 3.x."
What Personal Computer Issue 98. September 1997. pp.55-57.
Includes information on Win32s, Point to Point Server Update, CD Audio Driver, Video for Windows, Miscellaneous Windows Files, Speaker Driver, Serial.386, Network Updates, OLE, Calculator, Fax, 3.1 to 3.11, TCP/IP (TCP32B.EXE), and Internet Explorer 3.02a.

[OS: Windows 95: Manual]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Introducing Microsoft Windows 95. For Distribution with a New PC Only.
[Redmond, Washington]: Microsoft Corporation, 1995.
G, xv, 95pp. Manual for the OEM edition of Windows95. Document No. 000-61171. Also coded: '6478-01'. Certificate of Authenticity (coded: X03-32822) with product key attached to the front cover. The first 7 pages (A-G) are end-user license agreements. Contents: [1.] Welcome; [2.] The Basics; [3.] Beyond the Basics; [4.] Introducing Networks; [5.] The Possibilities; [6.] Appendices.

[OS: Windows 95]
Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows 95.
Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1995.
xxix, 1083pp. With a CD-ROM.

[OS: Windows 95]
Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows 95. Deluxe Edition.
Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1996.
xxx, 1228pp. With a CD-ROM.

[OS: Windows 95]
King, Adrian. Inside Windows 95.
Inside Windows 95. Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, 1994.
xxix, 476pp.

[OS: Windows 95: ART]
Stephens, Paul, Simon Williams, Mary Branscombe, Chris Bidmead, and Huw Collingbourne. "Windows 95."
PC Plus October 1995, No. 108. pp.259-290.
Review of Windows 95 in a series of articles.

[OS: Windows 98: Manual]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Getting Started: Windows98 Second Edition.
[Redmond, Washington]: Microsoft Corporation, 1999.
viii, 117, [8]pp. Manual for the OEM edition of Windows98se. Document No. 0499. Part No. X04-02589. Front cover coded: 'X04-15747'. Certificate of Authenticity with product key on the front cover. Contents: 1. Welcome; 2. Installing Windows 98; 3. Using Your Desktop; 4. Customizing Your Desktop; 5. Using the Internet; 6. Advanced Issues; Appendix A. Using a Mouse; Appendix B. Accessibility for People with Disabilities.

[OS: Windows 98]
Boyce, Jim. Inside Windows 98.
Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1996.
xxx, 928pp.

[OS: Windows NT]
Nutt, Gary J. Operating System Projects Using Windows NT.
Reading, Massachusetts; Harlow: Addison-Wesley, 1999.

[OS: Windows 2000: Manual]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Quick Start Guide. For Distribution Only with a New PC.
[Redmond, Washington]: Microsoft Corporation, 2000.
Manual for the OEM edition of Windows 2000. 36pp. 'Printed in Germany', 'By G362-11', 'FDRX05-77656/0201'. Coded on rear: '0500 Part No. X05-77656', 'HB 2835'. CD attached in a pouch with a red label stating 'Includes Service Pack 1', label coded 'LA 8760'. Certificate of Authenticity with product key on a label to be removed and stuck on the PC by the manufacturer. Contents: [1.] Setting Up Windows 2000 Professional; [2.] Creating Your User Account; [3.] Configuring Your Computer; [4.] More Information About Windows 2000 Professional; [5.] If You're Upgrading from Windows NT 4.0 to Windows 2000 Professional.

[OS: Windows 2000]
Cowart, Robert, and Brian Knittel. Using Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Special Edition.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Que, 2000.
xxi, [5], 1506pp. First printing: February 2000. Contents: 1. Introducing Windows 2000 Professional; 2. The Design and Architecture of Windows 2000 Professional; 3. Getting Your Hardware and Software Ready for Windows 2000; 4. Installing Windows 2000; 5. Using the Windows 2000 Interface; 6. Organizing Your Work; 7. Using the Simple Supplied Applications; 8. Sharing Data Between Applications; 9. Printing and Faxing with Windows 2000; 10. Font Management; 11. Internet and TCP/IP Connection Options; 12. World Wide Web; 13. Email; 14. Newsgroups; 15. Using NetMeeting; 16. Internet Diagnosis Tools; 17. Going Public: Creating Web Pages; 18. Using Internet Information Services to Host a Web Site; 19. Overview of Windows 2000 Networking; 20. Planning Your Windows 2000 Pro Network; 21. Instant Networking; 22. Using a Windows 2000 Network; 23. Windows Unplugged: Remote and Mobile Networking; 24. Connecting Your LAN to the Internet; 25. Networking Mix and Match; 26. Network Security; 27. Troubleshooting Your Network; 28. Tweaking the GUI; 29. Customizing via Control Panel Applets; 30. Maintaining and Optimizing System Performance; 31. System Management and Configuration Tools; 32. Managing Users; 33. Managing the Hard Disk; 34. OS Mix and Match; 35. The Registry; 36. Windows Script Host. With a CD-ROM.

[OS: X Window System]
Johnson, Eric F., and Kevin Reichard. X Window Applications Programming.
Portland, Oregon: Management Information Source, 1989.
xxii, 562pp. A companion disk was available. 2nd edition: New York: MIS Press, 1992 (xxxi, 564pp). Contents (1st edition): Introduction; [Section I. Learning X Programming:] 1. Building a First X Program; 2. Drawing with X; 3. Using Color; 4. Using Text; 5. Events; 6. Keyboard Events; 7. Rubber-Band Lines; 8. X Standards and Interacting with the Window Managers; [Section II. Building an X Window System Application:] 9. Introducing the Draw Application: A User's Guide; 10. Multiple-Window Applications; 11. Event Processing in the Draw Application; 12. Pop-Up Windows and Dialog Boxes; 13. The Draw Application Source Code; 14. Enhancing the Draw Application; [Section III. X Toolkits:] 15. An Introduction to X Toolkits; [Appendices:] A. The X Color Data Base; B. X Event Types and Structures; C. The Graphics Context; D. Some Sample X Client Programs; E. How to Order X Window; F. For More Information on X Window.

[Processor: General]
Barron, David William. Assemblers and Loaders.
London: Macdonald; New York, American Elsevier, 1969.
61pp. Computer Monographs, 6. 3rd impression: London: Macdonald; New York, American Elsevier, 1971 (61pp); 2nd edition: London: Macdonald and Co., 1972 (x, 90pp); 3rd edition: London: Macdonald and Jane's, 1978 (xi, 100pp).

[Processor: General]
Cannon, Don L., and Gerald Luecke. Understanding Microprocessors.
Fort Worth, Texas: Radio Shack, 1979.
62-2017. Multi-paged (stated to be 288pp on rear cover). Developed by the Texas Instruments Learning Centre, Dallas, Texas. Contents: 1. The World of Digital Electronics; 2. Basic Concepts in Microcomputer Systems; 3. How Digital Integrated Circuits Provide the Functions; 4. Fundamentals of Microcomputer System Operation; 5. A System Application with SAM; 6. Programming Concepts; 7. An 8-Bit Microprocessor Application; 8. A 16-Bit Microprocessor Application.

[Processor: General]
Malone, Michael Shawn. The Microprocessor: A Biography.
Santa Clara, California: TELOS, 1995.
xiv, 333pp. Preface dated June 1995. Contents: 1. A Calculating Risk: Inventing the First Microprocessors; 2. A Revolution in Miniature: The Importance of the Microprocessor; 3. Fire, Water, Earth and Air: Fabricating the Microprocessor; 4. The Cities of the Planar: How the Microprocessor Works; 5. History I: Beginnings: The First Decade; 6. History II: The PC Era: The Second Decade; 7. History III: Break-Out: The Third Decade; 8. The Future: Dreams of Light: The Microprocessor in the 21st Century.

[Processor: General]
Rafiquzzaman, Mohamed. Microprocessors and Microcomputer-Based System Design.
Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press, 1990.
xvii, 1075pp. 2nd edition: Boca Raton, Florida: CRC Press, 1995 ([14], 776pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Introduction to Microprocessors and Microcomputer-Based Applications; 2. Intel 8085; 3. Intel 8086; 4. Intel 80186/80286/80386; 5. Motorola MC68000; 6. Motorola MC68020; 7. Motorola MC68030/MC68040, Intel 80486 and Pentium Microprocessors; 8. RISC Microprocessors: Intel 80960, Motorola MC88100 and PowerPC; 9. Peripheral Interfacing; 10. Design Problems; [Appendices:] A. The Hewlett-Packard (HP) 64000; B. Motorola MC68000 and Support Chips - Data Sheets; C. Intel 8085, 8086, and Support Chips - Data Sheets; D. MC68000 Instruction Execution Times; E. 8086 Instruction Set Reference Data; F. Glossary/ASCII Codes.

[Processor: General]
Rafiquzzaman, Mohamed. Microprocessors and Microcomputer Development Systems: Designing Microprocessor-Based Systems.
New York: Harper & Row, 1984.
xv, 679pp.

[Processor: General]
Rao, Guthikonda V. Microprocessors and Microcomputer Systems.
New York; London: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1978.
xvii, 269pp. 2nd edition: 1982 (xv, 581pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. Introduction to Microprocessors and Microcomputer Systems; 2. Large-Scale Integration (LSI); 3. Solid-State LSI Memories; 4. Mass-Memory Libraries for Microcomputer Systems; 5. Memory Transfer via Internal Registers; 6. Input/Output Interface; 7. LSI Microprocessors and Single-Chip Microcomputers; 8. Software and Firmware; 9. Reference Data on the Microprocessors and Microcomputer Systems (Tabular Format); 10. Microprocessor-Associated Hardware; 11. Applications of Microprocessors; 12. Displays: Solid-State, Gas-Discharge, and CRT; 13. Reliability of MSI/LSI Microprocessors; 14. Conclusion. The 2nd edition has an additional chapter inserted as chapter 12: Personal Computing, chapters 12-14 becoming 13-15.

[Processor: General: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Understanding Microprocessors. Part 7. Assembling a Program."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.33-36.
8 part series.

[Processor: General: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Understanding Microprocessors. Part 8. System Testing."
Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1982. pp.57-58.
8 part series.

[Processor: Various]
Holland, R. C. Microprocessors and their Operating Systems: A Comprehensive Guide to 8-, 16- and 32-Bit Hardware, Assembly Language and Computer Architecture.
Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1989.
viii, 186pp. Contents: 1. Microcomputer Principles; 2. Intel 8080/8085 Family (8-Bit); 3. Zilog Z80; 4. Motorola MC6800 Family (8-Bit); 5. MOS Technology MCS6500 Family (8-Bit); 6. Intel 8086/8088 Family (16-Bit); 7. Motorola MC68000 Family (16-Bit); 8. Zilog Z891 Family (16-Bit); 9. 32-Bit Microprocessors; 10. High-Level Languages; 11. The CP/M Operating System; 12. The PC-DOS (MS-DOS) Operating System; 13. The UNIX Operating System.

[Processor: Various]
Hogenboom, P. Microprocessor Data Book.
Brentford, Middlesex: Elektor Electronics, 1988.
336pp. Contains data sheets on the following processors: 6800, 6802, 6808, 6809, 68000, 68008, 68010, 68012, 68020, 68030, 6500 series, 8080, 8085, 8086, 80186, 80188, 80286, 80386, Z80, Z8000, Z80000, 1802, 1805, 1806, 32008, 32016, 32032, 32332, 32532, Clipper module, 29000, T212, T414, T800, V60, 86010.

[Processor: Various]
Uffenbeck, John E. Microcomputers and Microprocessors. The 8080, 8085, and Z-80: Programming, Interfacing, and Troubleshooting.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1985.
xv, 670pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991 (xiv, 690pp). 3rd edition: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2000 (xix, 729pp).

[Processor: Various: ART]
George, Trevor. "16-Bit Microprocessors."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.22-24.
Covers the Zilog Z8001, National Semiconductor NS16032, Intel 8086, Texas Instruments TMS9900, General Instruments CP1600, and Motorola 68000.

[Processor: Z80]
[Manual] Z80 Family Data Book.
Campbell, California: Zilog Inc., 1989.

[Processor: Z80]
[Manual] Z80 Microprocessor Family: Discrete Devices and Embedded Controllers.
Campbell, California: Zilog Inc., 1995.
Multi-paged. DB95Z800101. Databook for the Z80 processor and support chips. Covers: Z8400/C00; Z8410/C10; Z8420/C20; Z8430/C30; Z8440/C40; Z8470; Z84C90; Z84015/C15. Contents: [1.] Discrete Z80 Family; [2.] Embedded Controllers; [3.] Application Notes and Technical Articles; [4.] Additional Information.

[Processor: Z80]
Barden, William T., Jr. Z-80 Microcomputer Design Projects.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1980.
208pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Barden, William T., Jr. The Z-80 Microcomputer Handbook.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1978.
304pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Barrow, David. Assembler Routines for the Z-80.
London: Century Communications, 1985.
vii, 192pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Carr, Joseph J. Z80 Users Manual.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Company, 1980.
ix, 326pp. Contents: 1. Z80 Architecture; 2. Z80 Pinouts; 3. Z80 Family Support Chips; 4. Z80 Timing and Interface Control Signals; 5. Z80 Addressing Modes; 6. The Z80 Instruction Set (General); 7. Z80 Flags; 8. Interfacing Memory to the Z80; 9. Z80 I/O; 10. Interfacing Peripherals; 11. Interrupts; 12. Servicing Interrupts; 13. Arithmetic Operations; 14. Logic Operations; 15. Miscellaneous Z80 Information; 16. Z8 and Z8000 Machines; 17. The Z80 Instruction Set.

[Processor: Z80]
Ciarcia, Steve. Build Your Own Z80 Computer. Design Guidelines and Application Notes.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Books, 1981.
ix, 332pp. A McGraw-Hill publication. The classic work.

[Processor: Z80]
Gaonkar, Ramesh S. The Z80 Microprocessor: Architecture, Interfacing, Programming, and Design.
Columbus, Ohio: Merrill, 1988.
xvi, 656pp. 2nd edition: 1993 (xviii, 700pp); Reprinted: 1995; 3rd edition: 2001 (xiv, 738pp). Contents (2nd edition): Part I: Microprocessor Architecture and Interfacing; 1. Microprocessors, Microcomputers, and Assembly Language; 2. Microprocessor-Based System: MPU, Memory, and I/O; 3. Z80 Microprocessor Architecture; 4. Memory Interfacing; 5. Interfacing I/O Devices; Part II: Assembly Language Programming: The Z80; 6. Introduction to Z80 Assembly Language Programming; 7. Software Development Systems and Assemblers; 8. Introduction to Z80 Instructions and Programming Techniques; 9. Logic and Bit Manipulation Instructions; 10. Stacks and Subroutines; 11. Application Programs and Software Design; Part III: Interfacing Peripherals, Programmable I/O Devices, Applications, and Design; 12. Interrupts; 13.Programmable Interface Devices; 14. Programmable Timers and Counters; 15. Serial I/O and Data Communication; 16. Advanced Topics in Memory and DMA Concepts; 17. Designing Microprocessor-Based Products; 18. Trends in Microprocessor Technology; Appendix A. Z80 Instruction Set; Appendix B. Number Systems; Appendix C. ASCII Codes; Appendix D. Logic Devices: Preferred Symbols and Pin Configuration of Selected Devices; Appendix E. Data Converters; Appendix F. Z80 Instructional Summary.

[Processor: Z80]
Hopton, Johnny. Z80 Instant Programs: Machine Code Routines for Nascom and other Z80 Computer Systems.
Wolverhampton: Sigma Technical Press, 1979.
x, 180pp. 2nd revised edition: Wilmslow: Sigma Technical, 1982 (xi, 186pp).

[Processor: Z80]
King, Gordon. Z-80 Assembler for CP/M.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.
218pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Leventhal, Lance A. Z80 Assembly Language Programming.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1979.
Multi-paged. Contents: 1. Introduction to Assembly Language Programming; 2. Assemblers; 3. The Z80 Assembly Language Instruction Set; 4. Simple Programs; 5. Simple Program Loops; 6. Character-Coded Data; 7. Code Conversion; 8. Arithmetic Problems; 9. Tables and Lists; 10. Subroutines; 11. Input/Output; 12. Interrupts; 13. Problem Definition and Program Design; 14. Debugging and Testing; 15. Documentation and Resdesign; 16. Sample Projects.

[Processor: Z80]
Nichols, Joseph C., Elizabeth Agnew Nichols, and Peter R. Rony. Z-80 Microprocessor: Programming and Interfacing. Book 1.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1979.
302pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Nichols, Joseph C., Elizabeth Agnew Nichols, and Peter R. Rony. Z-80 Microprocessor: Programming and Interfacing. Book 2.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1980.
494pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Nichols, Joseph C., Elizabeth Agnew Nichols, and Keith R. Musson. Z-80 Microprocessor Advanced Interfacing with Applications in Data Communications.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1983.
347pp. A continuation of the previous two titles.

[Processor: Z80]
Nitschke, William. Advanced Z80 Machine Code Programming.
London: Interface, 1985.
viii, 342pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Overaa, Paul Andreas. Teach Yourself Assembler Z-80.
London: Century Communications, 1984.
235pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Z80 Machine Code.
London: Babani, November 1984.
BP152. 134pp. Reprinted: June 1986. Contents: 1. The Microprocessor; 2. Addressing Modes; 3. The Instruction Set; 4. Storing and Execution; 5. Example Programs; 6. Input/Output.

[Processor: Z80]
Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Z-80 Assembly Language Programming.
London: Newnes Technical, 1983.
122pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Steele, Peter W., and Ivan Tomek. Z80 Assembly Language Programming.
Rockville, Maryland: Computer Science Press, 1987.
ix, 308pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Tully, Alan. Z80 Reference Guide.
[Richmond]: Melbourne House, 1984.

[Processor: Z80]
Uffenbeck, John E. Microcomputers and Microprocessors. The 8080, 8085, and Z-80: Programming, Interfacing, and Troubleshooting.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1985.
xv, 670pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991 (xiv, 690pp). 3rd edition: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2000 (xix, 729pp).

[Processor: Z80]
Yeung, Bik-Cheung. Programming the Z80 Under CP/M.
London; Boston: Butterworths, 1984.
x, 192pp.

[Processor: Z80]
Zaks, Rodnay. Programming the Z80.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1979.
624pp. 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1980 (624pp). 3rd edition: San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1982 (624pp). Contents (3rd edition): 1. Basic Concepts; 2. Z80 Hardware Organization; 3. Basic Programming Techniques; 4. The Z80 Instruction Set; 5. Addressing Techniques; 6. Input/Output Techniques; 7. Input/Output Devices; 8. Application Examples; 9. Data Structures; 10. Program Development; 11. Conclusion; Appendices.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Brighton, Mark. "Frame Store."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine I (CPU Card): Vol. 6, No. 23. June-August 1987. pp.10-15.
Constructional series. Part I describes the construction of the Z80B-based CPU card (6MHz, 64K or 256K RAM).

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Campbell, Bob. "Z80 DRAM Board."
Electronics Today International March 1984. pp.45-48, 69.
Constructional article with a PCB foil pattern. 64K DRAM board for Z80 systems. Uses a 24S10 PROM and eight 4164-15 memory chips.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Durant, Graeme. "Spectrum Co-Processor."
Electronics Today International February 1988. pp.24-29, 60-61; March 1988. pp.39-44, 51; April 1988. pp.43-47, 51; May 1988. pp.40-45.
Constructional article with PCB foils and software listing. The processor card has a 4MHz Z80A with its own operating system in EPROM. The memory card has 256K of paged DRAM. The third board is the interface. Although intended for the ZX Spectrum, the CPU and memory cards are 'general purpose' and can be used on any Z80 system.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Harrison, Neil. "The Elegant MINMON."
Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 1. 1978. pp.26-27.
256 byte monitor program for the Z80 in assembler.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Harrison, Neil. "A Guided Tour of the Z80."
Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.48-51.
An overview of the chip.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Harrison, Neil. "Showing Characters."
Personal Computer World August 1978. pp.31-34.
Memory-mapped TV display for a Z80 system, with a program listing.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Harrison, Neil. "Binary Finery: Extensions to the MINMON."
Personal Computer World October 1978. pp.44-47.
Extending MINMON beyond 256 bytes.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Homes, S. J. "Animation Graphics."
Radio and Electronics World January 1983. pp.59-65.
Constructional article. High-resolution colour graphics. Intended for the Nascom but easily adaptable for other Z80 micros. Uses the TMS9928A (525 lines, 60Hz) or TMS9929A (625 lines, 50Hz) chips. Can accomodate the earlier TMS9918 or TMS9918A chip. The board has provision for two AY8910 sound generators.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Lea, Martin. "Brew-It-Yourself."
Personal Computer World January 1980. pp.58-63.
Z80 SBC design with a circuit diagram.

[Processor: Z80: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. Main Board.
Goodman, Dave. "Z80 CPU Module."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine: Project Book 15. Rayleigh, Essex: Maplin Electronic Supplies, 1985. pp.24-29.
Z80 or Z80A CPU. Up to 8Kb memory.

[Processor: Z80: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. Keypad.
Dixey, Graham. "Keypad for the Z80."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine March 1987. pp.28-31.
Eight 7-segment displays.

[Processor: Z80: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. Revised version.
Dixey, Graham, and the Maplin Development Team. "The Z80A Development System."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine October 1992. pp.56-68.
The revised version has a touch sensitive keyboard.

[Processor: Z80: ART] Maplin Z80 SBC. PC-Based Development System.
Abbott, Robin, and Maurice Hunt. "Z80 Development System."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine January 1996. pp.4-11.
Designed by Robin Abbott, Chris Barlow, and Maurice Hunt.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 2. Using MENTA."
Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1982. pp.33-36.
Using the MENTA Z80 programmer.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 3. Addressing Methods."
Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.42-45.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 4. Accumulator Operations I."
Electronics and Computing Monthly September 1982. pp.27-30.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 5. Accumulator Operations II."
Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1982. pp.32-35.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 6. The Other Registers."
Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1982. pp.42-43, 46-47.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 8. Stack Operation and Calls."
Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1983. pp.50-53.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 9. Designing Z-80 Programs."
Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1983. pp.28-30.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Trevennor, Alan. "Simple Z80 Single Stepper Circuit."
Practical Electronics December 1986. p.48.
Constructional article.

[Processor: Z80: ART]
Wang, Li-Chen. "Palo Alto Tiny BASIC. Version Three."
PCC's Reference Book of Personal and Home Computing. Edited by Dwight McCabe. Menlo Park, California: People's Computer Company, July 1977. pp.58-88.
For the 8080 or Z80. Full listing.

[Processor: NSC800: ART]
Coles, R. W. "PE Micro-File Filesheet 15: NSC800."
Practical Electronics May 1984. Supplement: pp.15/1-15/3.
Between pp.34-35.

[Processor: CDP1802: ART]
James, K. R. "A Mighty Micromite: A COSMAC Microprocessor Based System."
Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.22-25.
An introduction to the 1802 CPU.

[Processor: 6502]
Barrow, David. Assembler Routines for the 6502.
London: Century Communications, 1985.

[Processor: 6502] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 1.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1980.
148pp. Contents: 1. Getting Acquainted with the 'Junior Computer'; 2. The Binary Number System; 3. Programming; 4. A Simple Beginning; Appendix 1. Instruction Codes in Numerical Order; Appendix 2. Instruction Listing; Appendix 3. Hex Dump of the Monitor Program; Appendix 4. Pin Assignment of the Connectors.

[Processor: 6502] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 2.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1981.
212pp. Contents: 5. The Editor and the Assembler; 6. The Peripheral Interface Adapter or PIA; 7. The Monitor Program; 8. The Editor Program; 9. The Assembler Program; Appendix 1. The Program Listing of the EPROM; Appendix 2. Listings of the Programs used in Chapters 5 and 6.

[Processor: 6502] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 3.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1981.
199pp. Contents: 10. Junior Grow Up: From Single Board to Double-Decker 'Sandwich'; 11. The Cassette Interface: A Magnetic Memory; 12. Adding Peripherals to the Junior Computer; Appendix 1. The Main Board Plus a Single RAM/EPROM Card; Appendix 2: Using the PIA RAM with the Original Monitor Routine; Appendix 3. The Vectors and Bus Board Memory; Appendix 4. The Hex Dump for the Tape Monitor (TM) Program; Appendix 5. The Hex Dump for the Printer Monitor (PM) Program; Appendix 6. RAM Test Program; Appendix 7. ASCII Character Codes.

[Processor: 6502] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 4.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1982.
221pp. Contents: 13. Editing and Assembling; 14. 1.2K Bytes of PM Software; 15. The PME Software; 16. The Cassette Software; Appendix 1. The Complete Listing of the PME System Program; Appendix 2. The Hex Dump of the PME System Program; Appendix 3. The Complete Listings of the Tape Monitor and Printer Monitor System Programs; Appendix 4. Working in Decimal; Appendix 5. BASIC on the Junior Computer.

[Processor: 6502] The Elektor Junior Computer.
Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: VIA6522.
Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1983.

[Processor: 6502]
Overaa, Paul Andreas. Teach Yourself Assembler 6502.
London: Century Communications, 1985.

[Processor: 6502]
Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to 6502 Machine Code.
BP147. 1984; rep. London: Babani, 1989.

[Processor: 6502]
Tully, Alan. 6502 Reference Guide.
[Richmond]: Melbourne House, 1985.

[Processor: 6502]
Zaks, Rodnay. Advanced 6502 Programming.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, [c.1982].

[Processor: 6502]
Zaks, Rodnay. Programming the 6502.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, [c.1978].
3rd (1980); 4th (1983). 6502 series, vol. 1.

[Processor: 6502]
Zaks, Rodnay. 6502 Applications.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, [c.1979].
6502 series, vol. 3.

[Processor: 6502]
Zaks, Rodnay. 6502 Games.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1980.
6502 series, vol. 4.

[Processor: 6502: ART]
Dixey, Graham. "Machine Code Programming with the 6502. Part 1."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 7. June-August 1983. pp.6-7, 13.

[Processor: 6502: ART]
Dixey, Graham. "Machine Code Programming with the 6502. Part 3."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 9. December 1983-February 1984. pp.39-40.

[Processor: 6502: ART]
Dixey, Graham. "Machine Code Programming with the 6502. Part 4."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 10. March-May 1984. pp.26-28.

[Processor: 6502: ART]
Dixey, Graham. "Machine Code Programming with the 6502. Part 5."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 11. June-August 1984. pp.48-50.

[Processor: 6502: ART]
Dixey, Graham. "Machine Code Programming with the 6502. Part 6."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 12. September-November 1984. pp.25-27.
The 6522 VIA.

[Processor: 6502: ART]
Dixey, Graham. "Machine Code Programming with the 6502. Part 7."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 4, No. 14. March-May 1985. pp.13-15.
The stack.

[Processor: 6502: ART]
Stephenson, A. P. "6502 Programming Course."
Computing Today June 1981. pp.33-35.
One of a series of articles.

[Processor: 6800]
Clements, Alan. Microcomputer Design and Construction: Building Your Own System with the Motorola 6800.
Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1982].

[Processor: 6800]
Emmerichs, Jack. Tiny Assembler 6800, Version 3.1: Design and Implementation of a Microprocessor Self Assembler.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Publications, 1978.
Version 3.0 was described in the April and May 1977 issues of Byte magazine. Enhancements were outlined in the September 1977 issue.

[Processor: 6800]
Grappel, Robert D., and Jack E. Hemenway. LINK68: An M6800 Linking Loader.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Publications, 1978.

[Processor: 6800]
Grappel, Robert D., and Jack E. Hemenway. Tracer: A 6800 Debugging Program.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Publications, 1978.
Cover title: 6800 Tracer: An Aid to 6800 Program Debugging..

[Processor: 6800]
Hemenway, Jack E. RA6800ML: An M6800 Relocatable Macro Assembler.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Publications, 1978.

[Processor: 6800]
Peters, Don. MONDEB: An Advanced M6800 Monitor Debugger.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Publications, 1978.

[Processor: 6800]
Staugaard, Andrew C., Jr. How to Program and Interface the 6800.
Indianapolis: Sams, 1980.

[Processor: 6800: ART]
Baunach, S. C. "An Example of an M6800-Based GPIB Interface."
Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1977, Vol. 2, No. 6. pp.31-55 (pp.271-295 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing. The GPIB interface is also known as the IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus.

[Processor: 6800: ART]
Colton, Mark. "Punch Lines: Interfacing a Westrex Punch to a 6800 MPU System."
Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.59-61.
Constructional project, with a schematic. The Westrex is a model of paper tape punch.

[Processor: 6800 Family]
Bear Microcomputer Systems. 77-68: The Construction of a Simple Computer using a 6800 Microprocessor.
n.p.: Bear Microcomputer Systems, 1977.

[Processor: 6800 Family]
Simpson, Robert J., and Trevor J. Terrell. Introduction to 6800/6802 Microprocessor Systems: Hardware, Software and Experimentation.
London: Newnes, 1982.

[Processor: 6800 Family]
Staugaard, Andrew C., Jr. 6801, 68701 & 6803 Microcomputer Programming & Interfacing.
Indianapolis: Sams, [c.1980].

[Processor: 6800 Family: ART]
Atkins, C. P. "6802 Evaluation Board."
Electronics Today International May 1985. pp.27-32, 58.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. A 7-chip system: 6802, 2716 EPROM, 7400, two 6821 PIAs, and two TIL311 Hex displays.

[Processor: 6800 Family: ART]
Chewter, John. "Data."
Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.69-70.
The Hitachi HD6801, HD6803 (ROMless 6801), HD6301V (enhanced CMOS 6801), and HD6301X (6301V with 48 I/O lines).

[Processor: 6800 Family: ART]
Stone, Richard. "6802 Development Board."
Everyday with Practical Electronics August 1994. pp.608-615.
Contructional article with schematic and PCB layout. 6802, 6522 VIA, 6551 ACIA, 8K ROM, 8K RAM.

[Processor: 6809]
Barrow, David. 6809 Machine Code Programming.
London: Granada, 1984.

[Processor: 6809]
James, Mike. The 6809 Companion.
London: Babani, 1982.

[Processor: 6809]
Leventhal, Lance A. 6809 Assembly Language Programming.
Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [c.1981].

[Processor: 6809]
Leventhal, Lance A., and Sally Cordes. Assembly Language Subroutines for the 6809.
London: McGraw-Hill, [c.1989].

[Processor: 6809]
Staugaard, Andrew C., Jr. 6809 Microcomputer Programming and Interfacing, with Experiments.
Indianapolis: Sams, [c.1981].

[Processor: 6809]
Warren, Carl D. The MC6809 Cookbook.
Blue Ridge Summit: Tab Books, 1980.

[Processor: 6809]
Zaks, Rodnay, and William Labiak. Programming the 6809.
Berkeley: Sybex, 1982.

[Processor: 6809]
Bedford, Mike. "The ETI SBC-09."
Electronics Today International January 1991. pp.46-51, 62; February 1991. pp.50-55; Correction: April 1991. p.57.
Constructional article with PCB foils. A general purpose 6809 microcontroller system with 2K or 8K RAM and 16K of EPROM.

[Processor: 6809: ART] Wireless World FORTH Computer.
Woodroffe, Brian. "FORTH Computer."
Wireless World Part 1 (CPU and memory): May 1983. pp.53-58; Part 2 (Circuit, video, and peripherals): June 1983. pp.55-58; Part 3 (Software, disk controller, and PSU): July 1983. pp.58-61; Part 4 (Construction tips): August 1983. pp.44-45; Part 5 (Disk drives, including the use of 8" drives): September 1983. pp.64-67.
5 parts. 6809-based, 1.5MHz clock, EF69364 display processor, 6850 CIA (for the RS232 interface), and a 6821 PIA.

[Processor: Z8000]
[Manual] Z8000 CPU Technical Manual.
n.p.: Zilog Inc., 1983.
Chinese edition published Beijing, 1984.

[Processor: Z8000]
[Manual] Z8000 CPU User's Reference Manual.
Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1982].

[Processor: Z8000]
[Manual] Z8000 PLZ/ASM: Assembly Language Programming Manual.
Cupertino, California: Zilog, 1979.
Revision A.

[Processor: Z8000]
Coffron, James W. Using and Troubleshooting the Z8000.
Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., [c.1982].

[Processor: Z8000]
Fawcett, Bradly K. The Z8000 Microprocessor: A Design Handbook.
Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1982].

[Processor: Z8000]
Leventhal, Lance A., Chuck Collins, and Adam Osborne. Z8000 Assembly Language Programming.
Berkeley: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1980.

[Processor: Z8000]
Mateosian, Richard. Programming the Z8000.
Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1980.
xii, 297pp.

[Processor: Z8000]
Moore, Martin L. The Z8000 Handbook.
Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1982].

Note. Although technically microcontrollers, the 8031, 8032, 8051, and 8052 chips are commonly used in SBC projects, and are consequently included here.

[Processor: 8031/8032: ART]
An, Dr. Pei. "8031 & 80535 Single Board Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 1: April 1996. pp.44-54; Part 2: May 1996. pp.58-62; Part 3: June 1996. pp.40-43.
MCS-51 based SBC.

[Processor: 8031/8032: ART]
Böhling, H. -J. "80C32 BASIC Control Computer."
Elektor Electronics Part 1: Introduction and Circuit Descriptions. February 1998. pp.30-33; Part 2: Construction and Testing. March 1998. pp.40-43, 45.
Two-board design. Runs the MCS-51 BASIC interpreter. 32Kb SRAM, 32Kb EPROM for the 8Kb interpreter and extensions, and up to 16Kb of EPROM space for programs. Schematic and PCB. Software available separately.

[Processor: 8031/8032: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "The 8031 Single Board Computer."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 19, No. 149. May 2000. pp.25-27; Part 2: Vol. 19, No. 150. June 2000. pp.41-45.
SBC design in at least 3 parts.

[Processor: 8031/8032: ART]
Reelsen, H. "8032/8052 Single-Board Computer."
Elektor Electronics May 1991. pp.17-23.
The Mark II version of the design published in November 1987. Constructional article. Built on a single-sided Eurocard. Can use an 8032, 80C32, or 8052AH-BASIC microcontroller. 32K ROM, 32K RAM, on-board EPROM programmer, memory back-up battery. To 15MHz (8032 or 8052AH-BASIC) or 24MHz (80C32). Includes a schematic, PCB, and program to unload the BASIC interpreter from the 8052AH-BASIC, transfer it to EPROM, and run it with an 8032 or 80C32.

[Processor: 8031/8032: ART]
Rietjens, A. "Faster MCS52 Processor."
Elektor Electronics December 1996. p.62.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Allows a DS87C530 (running at up to 33MHz) to replace an 8031, 8032, 8051, or 8052 microcontroller.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
[Manual] MCS BASIC-52 Reference Manual.
Santa Clara, California: Intel, 1986.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
Axelson, Janet Louise. The Microcontroller Idea Book: Circuits, Programs and Applications Featuring the 8052-BASIC Microcontroller.
Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, 1994.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
Ayala, Kenneth J. The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming and Applications.
Minneapolis/St. Paul: West, 1991.
With a floppy disk. 2nd edition: 1997, with a floppy disk.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
Dietsche, K.-H., and M. Ohsmann. MatchBox BASIC Computer: A Miniature Controller System.
Dorchester: Elektor Electronics, 1999.
274pp with a 3.5" floppy disk. Describes a microcontroller system built on a 65 x 45mm PCB, running MBL, a higher programming language derived from BASIC and Pascal. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The MatchBox BASIC Computer; 3. A Development System for the MatchBox; 4. MBL, the MatchBox Language; 5. Connecting Peripherals to the MatchBox; 6. Specialities of the 8051; 7. MatchBox BASIC Computer Applications; 8. Microcontroller Systems; 9. Appendix.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
Ibrahim, Dogan. Microcontroller Projects in C for the 8051.
Oxford; Boston: Newnes, 2000.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
Karakehayov, Zdravko, Knud Smed Christensen, and Ole Winther. Embedded Systems Design with 8051 Microcontrollers: Hardware and Software.
New York: Marcel Dekker, 1999.
With a 3.5" floppy disk.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
MacKenzie, I. Scott. The 8051 Microcontroller.
New York: Merrill, 1992.
2nd edition: 1995; 3rd edition: 1999.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
Predko, Myke. Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1999.

[Processor: 8051/8052]
Stewart, James W. The 8051 Microcontroller: Hardware, Software, and Interfacing.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1993.
2nd edition, co-authored with Kai X. Miao: 1999, with 2 floppy disks.

[Processor: 8051/8052: ART]
Berg, B. vom, and P. Groppe. "80C537 Microcontroller Board."
Elektor Electronics June 1997. pp.44-49.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Programs the 80C537 (an 8051 variant) microcontroller using a PC. Software was available separately.

[Processor: 8051/8052: ART]
Bohling, H. -J., and D. Wulf. "MCS BASIC-52 v.1.3. Rejuvenating a Popular Interpreter."
Elektor Electronics February 2001. pp.20-23.
The MCS BASIC-52 v.1.0 interpreter was originally developed by Intel in 1985 for the 8052-AH microcontroller. Intel has kindly released the interpreter as freeware, leading to on-going development.

[Processor: 8051/8052: ART]
"'Matchbox' BASIC Computer."
Elektor Electronics Part 3: December 1995. pp.42-45.
3 parts. Constructional article. Based on an 87C51 chip, a derivative of the 8051. Software by Dr. M. Ohsmann.

[Processor: 8051/8052: ART]
Meikle, Colin. "8051-Based EEPROM Microcontrollers."
Everyday Practical Electronics June 1998. pp.426-430.

[Processor: 8051/8052: ART]
Reelsen, H. "8032/8052 Single-Board Computer."
Elektor Electronics May 1991. pp.17-23.
The Mark II version of the design published in November 1987. Constructional article. Built on a single-sided Eurocard. Can use an 8032, 80C32, or 8052AH-BASIC microcontroller. 32K ROM, 32K RAM, on-board EPROM programmer, memory back-up battery. To 15MHz (8032 or 8052AH-BASIC) or 24MHz (80C32). Includes a schematic, PCB, and program to unload the BASIC interpreter from the 8052AH-BASIC, transfer it to EPROM, and run it with an 8032 or 80C32.

[Processor: 8051/8052: ART]
Rietjens, A. "Faster MCS52 Processor."
Elektor Electronics December 1996. p.62.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Allows a DS87C530 (running at up to 33MHz) to replace an 8031, 8032, 8051, or 8052 microcontroller.

[Processor: 8080]
Dirksen, A. J. Microcomputers: What They Are and How To Put Them to Productive Use.
Slough: W. Foulsham, 1982.
231pp. Translated from the Dutch (1978). Published in the USA as TAB Book No. 1406, Blue Ridge Summit: TAB, 1982 (231pp). Based on the 8080 processor. A detailed examination including a circuit for a Hex microtrainer. Contents (Foulsham edition): 1. What is a Computer?; 2. What is a Microcomputer?; 3. The Microcomputer in General; 4. How Does a Computer Compute?; 5. Circuitry in a Computer; 6. Main Memory; 7. Simple Programming; 8. CPU Architecture-1; 9. CPU Architecture-2; 10. Microcomputer Architecture; 11. Description of the Instructions; 12. Syntax and Subroutines; 13. Addressing Techniques; 14. Flowcharts; 15. From Task to Solution; 16. Sample Programs; 17. Traffic Lights; 18. System Software; 19. Development Systems; 20. Peripheral Equipment; 21. I/O Interfacing; Appendix A. 8080 Instruction Set; Appendix B. 8080 Instruction Timing.

[Processor: 8080]
Titus, Christopher A., and Jonathan A. Titus. DBUG: An 8080 Interpretive Debugger. A Program for Entering, Debugging and Storing Assembly Language Programs.
Derby, Connecticut; E. & L. Instruments, 1977.
[98]pp. Later issued with the imprint: Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, 1978. 104pp.

[Processor: 8080]
Uffenbeck, John E. Microcomputers and Microprocessors. The 8080, 8085, and Z-80: Programming, Interfacing, and Troubleshooting.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1985.
xv, 670pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991 (xiv, 690pp). 3rd edition: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2000 (xix, 729pp).

[Processor: 8080]
Warme, Paul K. BASEX: A Simple Language and Compiler for 8080 Systems.
Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Books, 1979.
For the 8080 family (8080, Z80, 8085).

[Processor: 8080: ART]
[8080 PILOT] Starkweather, John A. "Guide to 8080 PILOT, Version 1.1."
Dr. Dobb's Journal April 1977, Vol. 2, No. 4. pp.17-29 (pp.173-185 of the annual volume).
Documentation.

[Processor: 8080: ART]
[8080 PILOT] Starkweather, John A. "Source Code for 8080 PILOT, Version 1.1."
Dr. Dobb's Journal May 1977, Vol. 2, No. 5. pp.18-33 (pp.216-231 of the annual volume).
Source code.

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Agoston, Max K. "A Microprocessor Operating System: The Kernel."
Dr. Dobb's Journal September 1977, Vol. 2, No. 8. pp.20-40 (pp.346-366 of the annual volume).
Includes source code. 'This article describes in detail the kernel for a real-time interactive multiprocess operating system (RIMOS for short). RIMOS was intended to extend the Intel MDS system and because of this the kernel subroutines make use of Intel's ISIS. (The Intel monitor was used only at the start to load ISIS.) However, the source code that will be listed later is basically usable on any computer using the Intel 8080 microprocessor, except that one would have to write a file system and make some simple changes to eliminate reference to ISIS.'

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Berg, Margaret. "8080 Debug Routine."
Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.52-53.
Listing.

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Christensen, Ward. "An 8080 Disassembler."
Dr. Dobb's Journal February 1977, Vol. 2, No. 2. pp.30-43 (pp.100-113 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing.

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Dickenson, John, Jerry Barber, John Teeter, Royce Eckard, and Eugene Fisher. "Lawrence Livermore Lab's 8080 BASIC. Includes Floating Point Package, User Documentation and Complete, Annotated Source."
Dr. Dobb's Journal January 1977, Vol. 2, No. 1. pp.8-62 (pp.18-72 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing.

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Greeb, Fred J. "Denver Tiny BASIC for 8080s. A 2nd Version that Includes 1-D Arrays."
Dr. Dobb's Journal March 1976, Vol. 1, No. 3. pp.20-30 (pp.75-85 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions given in a letter from Fred J. Greeb, Dr. Dobb's Journal September 1976, Vol. 1, No. 8. p.34 (p.261 of the annual volume).

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Mueller, Erik T. "MINOL - Tiny BASIC with Strings in 1.75K Bytes."
Dr. Dobb's Journal April 1976, Vol. 1, No. 4. pp.9-17 (pp.95-103 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions and corrections given in a letter from Erik T. Mueller, Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1976, Vol. 1, No. 6. p.36 (p.184 of the annual volume). Additions and corrections given in letters from Erik T. Mueller, Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1976, Vol. 1, No. 6. p.36 (p.184 of the annual volume); August 1976, Vol. 1, No. 7. p.32 (p.222 of the annual volume).

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Pack, Charlie. "System Monitor for 8080-Based Microcomputers."
Dr. Dobb's Journal April 1976, Vol. 1, No. 4. pp.18-32 (pp.104-118 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing.

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Wang, Li-Chen. "Palo Alto Tiny BASIC."
Dr. Dobb's Journal May 1976, Vol. 1, No. 5. pp.12-25 (pp.129-142 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions given in a letter from Li-Chen Wang, Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1976, Vol. 1, No. 6. p.35 (p.183 of the annual volume).

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Wang, Li-Chen. "Palo Alto Tiny BASIC. Version Three."
PCC's Reference Book of Personal and Home Computing. Edited by Dwight McCabe. Menlo Park, California: People's Computer Company, July 1977. pp.58-88.
For the 8080 or Z80. Full listing.

[Processor: 8080: ART]
Whipple, Dick, and John Arnold. "Tiny BASIC, Extended Version."
Dr. Dobb's Journal January 1976, Vol. 1, No. 1. pp.14-17 (pp.18-21 of the annual volume); February 1976, Vol. 1, No. 2. pp.13-31 (pp.35-53 of the annual volume).
For the 8080. Includes program listing. Additions given in a letter from Charles Skeldon, Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1976, Vol. 1, No. 6. p.34 (p.182 of the annual volume). Additions given in a letter from The Penny Tiger, Dr. Dobb's Journal September 1976, Vol. 1, No. 8. p.30 (p.257 of the annual volume).

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Ayala, Kenneth J. The 8086 Microprocessor: Programming and Interfacing the PC.
Minneapolis/St. Paul: West, 1995.
With a floppy disk.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Brunning, Peter E. Experimenting with PC Computers: A Beginner's Introduction to the Design of Simple Electronic Circuits, Writing of Assembly Language Programmes, and Interfacing to a PC Computer.
Clacton-on-Sea, Essex: Brunning Software, 1996.
300pp. Spiral bound. With a disk containing BrunWord MCA assembler. Contents: 1. Introduction and Software Installation; 2. What is Computer Control?; 3. Simple Digital to Analogue Converter; 4. Three Bit Digital to Analogue Converter; 5. Measuring the Performance; 6. Using a Ladder Network; 7. Analogue to Digital Converter; 8. Creating Simple Computer Graphs; 9. Successive Approximation A/D Converter; 10. Dynamic Temperature Measurements; 11. Plotting Temperature Measurements; 12. Using Screen Mode 12h; 13. Using a Thermocouple; 14. Working with Audio Waves; 15. Analysing Audio Waves; 16. Fourier Analysis; [Appendices:] A. Components and Tools Required; B. The 8086 Registers; C. The 8086 Instruction Set; D. Software Interrupts; E. Logic Circuit Parameters.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Detmer, Richard C. Introduction to 80x86 Assembly Language and Computer Architecture.
Boston: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2001.
With a CD-ROM.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Erskine, Robert. Assembly Language for the 8086 and 8088.
London: Pitman, 1985.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Erskine, Robert. Assembly Language for the 80286.
London: Pitman, 1985.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Fulcher, John. An Introduction to Microcomputer Systems. Architecture and Interfacing.
1989; Sydney: Addison-Wesley, 1994.
Designed for undergraduates. Examples use the 8086 and 68000 processors.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Fuller, Walter. Build Your Own Microcomputer Based on the Intel 8088.
Albany, New York: Delmar, 1995.
ix, 193pp. Contents: 1. The Voltage Regulator Circuit; 2. The Power Bus; 3. Wire-Wrap Technique and Practice; 4. The 8088 Clock Circuit; 5. The 8088 Microprocessor Installation; 6. The Memory Circuit; 7. The Programmable Timer Circuit; 8. The 8255A Parallel I/O Port; 9. The 8259 Interrupt Controller; 10. The Serial I/O Circuit; 11. The Monitor Program; 12. Simple Parallel I/O Using the 8255A; 13. Exploring Interrupts; 14. The Polled Centronix [sic] Printer Interface; 15. The Interrupt Driven Centronix [sic] Interface; 16. The Interrupt Driven Serial I/O Circuit; 17. Analog-to-Digital Conversion; Appendix A. Parts List for the Microcomputer; Appendix B. Programming Features of the Monitor Program; Appendix C. How to Write and Assembly Language Program for the Microcomputer.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Irvine, Kip R. Assembly Language for Intel-Based Computers.
4th edition; Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 2002.
With a CD-ROM containing Microsoft Macro Assembler versions 6.11 and 6.15, an evaluation copy of TextPad 4.5.0 editor, a macro library, and the book's source code. 2nd edition c.1993; 3rd edition c.1999, with a 3.5" floppy disk.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86]
Uffenbeck, John E. The 8086/8088 Family: Design, Programming, and Interfacing.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1987.
2nd (1998) and 3rd (2002) editions retitled: The 80x86 Family: Design, Programming, and Interfacing.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86: ART]
Davy, Bill. "Advanced Intelligence."
Personal Computer World September 1978. pp.39-40.
A review of the 8086.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "8088 Interrupt Based Control Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 2: September 1995. pp.56-63, 70.
Constructional article. Part 2 includes the schematic, PCB and sample code.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. [8088 Interrupt Based Control Computer.] "Single Stepping the 8088 in Real Time."
Electronics Today International November 1995. pp.47-50.

[Processor: 8086/8088/x86: ART]
Grodzik, Richard. "The ETI 80188 Single Board Computer."
Electronics Today International Part 1: January 1995. pp.20-25, 70.
Constructional article. Part 1 includes the schematic and PCB.

[Processor: TMS9900: ART]
Coles, R. W. "PE Micro-File Filesheet 7. 9900."
Practical Electronics Vol. 19, No. 6. June 1983. pp.7/1-7/4.
Data and notes on the TI TMS9900, the first 16-bit microprocessor, unveiled in 1976.

[Processor: 68000]
Antonakos, James L. The 68000 Microprocessor: Hardware and Software Principles and Applications.
4th edition; Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, [c.1999].
With floppy disk. 3rd edition (c.1996).

[Processor: 68000]
Barrow, David. 68000 Machine Code Programming.
London: Collins, 1985.

[Processor: 68000]
Barry, Ambrose. 68000 Assembly Language Programming and Interfacing: A Unique Approach for the Beginner.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Regents/Prentice-Hall, 1992.

[Processor: 68000]
Brey, Barry B. The Motorola Microprocessor Family: 68000, 68008, 68010, 68020, 68030, and 68040. Programming and Interfacing with Applications.
Fort Worth: Saunders, 1992.

[Processor: 68000]
Clements, Alan. 68000 Sourcebook.
London; New York: McGraw-Hill, [c.1990].

[Processor: 68000]
Erskine, Robert. Assembly Language for the 68000 Series.
London: Pitman, 1984.

[Processor: 68000]
Fleetwood, Lionel. 68000 User Guide.
Wilmslow: Sigma Press, 1985.

[Processor: 68000]
Ford, William, and William R. Topp. Assembly Language and Systems Programming for the M68000 Family.
[Lexington, Massachusetts]: [D. C. Heath], [1988].
2nd edition: Lexington, Massachusetts: D. C. Heath, 1992 (xxiii, 890, 244pp); Reprinted: Sudbury, Massachusetts: Jones and Bartlett, 1997 (xxiii, 890, 244pp, covers the 68000, 68020, 68030 and 68040). Contents (1997 reprint): 1. Introduction; 2. Representation of Data; 3. Machine Organization and Programming; 4. Assembly Language Programming; 5. Introduction to Branching; 6. Arrays and Stacks; 7. Subroutines; 8. Extended Arithmetic on the MC68000; 9. Character Handling; 10. High-Level Language Run-Time Environment; 11. Data Structures; 12. Communication Interface Programming; 13. Exception Processing; 14. Peripheral Device Interrupts; 15. Advanced MC68000 System Topics; Appendix A. M68000 Family of Integer Instructions; Appendix B. M68000 Family of Supervisor (Privileged) Instructions; Appendix C. Coprocessor Instructions; Appendix D. Input/Output Libraries; Appendix E. Condition Code Computations; Appendix F. ASCII Code Chart.

[Processor: 68000]
Frizell, Anne. Teach Yourself 68000 Assembly Language Programming.
London: Interface, [c.1987].

[Processor: 68000]
Fulcher, John. An Introduction to Microcomputer Systems. Architecture and Interfacing.
1989; Sydney: Addison-Wesley, 1994.
Designed for undergraduates. Examples use the 8086 and 68000 processors.

[Processor: 68000]
Jaulent, Patrick. The 68000: Hardware and Software.
Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1985.
Translated by M. J. Stewart.

[Processor: 68000]
King, Tim, and Brian Knight. Programming the M68000.
London: Addison-Wesley, 1983.
Small Computer series. 154pp. Preface dated March 1983. 2nd edition: Wokingham: Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co., 1987 (ix, 277pp); Reprint: [n.p.]: Prentice Hall College Division, 1987 (277pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. Introduction; 2. Assembler Syntax and Addressing Modes; 3. Moving and Comparing Data; 4. Stacks and Subroutines; 5. Arithmetic; 6. Logical Operations; 7. Exception Handling; 8. A Complete Example: A Monitor; Appendix.

[Processor: 68000]
Leventhal, Lance A., Gerry Kane, and Doug Hawkins 68000 Assembly Language Programming.
2nd edition; Berkeley: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [c.1986].
First published in 1981.

[Processor: 68000]
Miller, Michael A. The 68000 Microprocessor: Architecture, Programming, and Applications.
Columbus, Ohio; London: Merrill, 1988.
xiv, 513pp. 2nd edition (with the amended title: The 68000 Microprocessor Family: Architecture, Programming, and Applications): New York: Merrill; Oxford: Maxwell Macmillan International, 1992 (xix, 569pp).

[Processor: 68000]
Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to 68000 Assembly Language.
BP184. London: Babani, 1986.
Reprinted: London: Babani, 1994.

[Processor: 68000]
Scanlon, Leo J. The 68000: Principles and Programming.
Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1981.
238pp.

[Processor: 68000]
Triebel, Walter A., and Avtar Singh. The 68000 and 68020 Microprocessors: Architecture, Software, and Interfacing Techniques.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, 1991.

[Processor: 68000]
Wilcox, Alan D. 68000 Microcomputer Systems: Designing and Troubleshooting.
London: Prentice-Hall, 1987.

[Processor: 68000]
Woolcock, Richard, and Anthony Burkitt. 68000 Reference Guide.
[n.p.]: Melbourne House, 1986.

[Processor: RISC: Manual]
VLSI Technology, Inc., Application Specific Logic Products Division. Acorn RISC machine (ARM) Family Data Manual.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; London: Prentice-Hall International, 1990.
Multi-paged.

[Processor: RISC]
Furber, Stephen Bo. ARM System Architecture.
Harlow; Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1996.
xvi, 416pp. 2nd edition (with the amended title ARM System-on-Chip Architecture): Harlow; New York: Addison-Wesley, 2000 (xii, 419pp).

[Processor: RISC]
Ginns, Mike. Archimedes Assembly Language: The Complete Programming Course.
Manchester: Dabs Press, May 1988.
2nd edition: Manchester: Dabs Press, 1989 (368pp); 3rd impression: Manchester: Dabs Press, October 1991. 2nd edition stated to cover the RISC OS. Contents (2nd edition, 3rd impression): 1. Introduction; 2. An Overview of the ARM; 3. Internal Architecture; 4. The BASIC Assembler; 5. The ARM Instruction Set; 6. Data Processing: Format; 7. Shift Instructions; 8. Processing Instructions; 9. Register R15; 10. Data Transfer; 11. Branches and SWI; 12. Stacks and LDM/STM; 13. The BASIC Assembler 2; 14. Techniques & Debugging; 15. Interrupts and Events; 16. Vectors; 17. OS SWI Routines; 18. The WIMP Environment; 19. Managing Fonts; 20. Templates and Input/Output; 21. Manipulating Strings; 22. Functions, Operators; 23. Control Statements and Loops; 24. Graphics Templates; 25. RISC OS Specific; Appendices.

[Processor: RISC]
Jagger, Dave, ed. ARM Architecture Reference Manual.
London; New York: Prentice Hall, 1996.
Multi-paged. Document No. ARM DDI 0100B. 2nd edition (edited by David Seal): Harlow: Addison-Wesley, 2001 (Document No. ARM DDI 0100E; multi-paged).

[Processor: RISC]
Sloss, Andrew N., Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, and John Rayfield. ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software.
Amsterdam: Elsevier; Boston: Morgan Kaufman, 2004.

[Processor: RISC]
Van Someren, Alex, and Carol Atack. The ARM RISC Chip: A Programmer's Guide.
Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, [c.1993-1994].

[Processor: RISC]
Van Someren, Alex, and Nic Van Someren. Archimedes Operating System: A User's Guide.
Manchester: Dabs Press, 1988.
320pp. 2nd printing: Manchester: Dabs Press, February 1990 (320pp). Another edition or printing: Manchester: Dabs Press, 1991 (320pp). A disk (ADFS 640K) was produced to accompany the book, and an 8pp manual was supplied with it (First edition: February 1989). Contents (2nd printing): 1. RISC Technology; 2. The ARM Instruction Set; 3. The BASIC V Assembler; 4. The Operating System; 5. Command Line Interpreter; 6. OS_CLI Related SWIs; 7. Filing Systems; 8. The FileSwitch Module; 9. Filing System SWIs; 10. Modules; 11. Writing Modules; 12. Writing Applications; 13. The Window Manager; 14. The Font Manager; 15. Sound Introduction; 16. Sound Star Commands; 17. Sound SWI Calls; 18. The Voice Generator; 19. Character Input/Output; 20. Vectors; 21. Interrupts and Events; 22. Conversion SWIs; 23. Miscellaneous SWIs; 24. The ARM Chip Set; 25. Floating Point Model; Appendices.

[Processor: RISC: ART]
Bedford, Mike. "Reduced Instruction Set Computers."
Electronics Today International December 1985. pp.22-26.
Descriptive article.

[Processor: Transputer]
[Manual] Transputer Applications Notebook: Architecture and Software.
[Almondsbury, Bristol]: [INMOS], [19--].
INMOS Databook Series.

[Processor: Transputer]
[Manual] Transputer Applications Notebook: Systems and Performance.
Almondsbury, Bristol: INMOS, June 1989.
xiv, 298pp. INMOS Databook Series. Document No. 72-TRN-205-00. Contents: 1. INMOS: An Overview; [Hardware:] 2. Designing with the IMS T414 and IMS T800 Memory Interface; 3. Connecting INMOS Links; 4. IMS B003 Design of a Multi-Transputer Board; 5. Using Transputers from EPROM; [Systems:] 6. Designs and Applications for the IMS C004; 7. Module Motherboard Architecture; 8. Dual Inline Transputer Modules (TRAMs); [Software:] 9. Program Design for Concurrent Systems; 10. Exploring Multiple Transputer Arrays; 11. Extraordinary Use of Transputer Links; 12. Analysing Transputer Networks; 13. Loading Transputer Networks; [Applications:] 14. A Transputer Based Radio-Navigation System; 15. The Transputer Based Navigation System - Testing Embedded Systems; 16. A Transputer Based Distributed Graphics Display; [Performance:] 17. Lies, Damned Lies, and Benchmarks; 18. Performance Maximisation.

[Processor: Transputer]
[Manual] The Transputer Databook.
Almondsbury, Bristol: INMOS, 1988.
477pp. INMOS Databook Series. 2nd edition: Almondsbury, Bristol: INMOS, 1989 (582pp; Document No. 72-TRN-203-01). Contents (2nd edition): 1. INMOS; 2. Transputer Architecture; 3. Transputer Overview; 4. IMS T805 Engineering Data; 5. IMS T801 Engineering Data; 6. IMS T800 Engineering Data; 7. IMS T425 Engineering Data; 8. IMS T414 Engineering Data; 9. IMS T222 Engineering Data; 10. IMS T225 Preview; 11. IMS M212 Preview; 12. IMS C004 Engineering Data; 13. IMS C011 Engineering Data; 14. IMS C012 Engineering Data; Appendix A. Quality and Reliability; Appendix B. Index.

[Processor: Transputer]
[Manual] Transputer Support Databook: Development and Sub-Systems.
[Almondsbury, Bristol]: [INMOS], [19--].
INMOS Databook Series.

[Processor: Transputer]
Transputer Development System.
New York; London: Prentice-Hall, 1988.
xx, 491pp.

[Processor: Transputer]
Transputer Instruction Set: A Compiler Writer's Guide.
New York; London: Prentice-Hall, 1988.
vii, 167pp.

[Processor: Transputer]
Transputer Reference Manual.
Almondsbury, Bristol: INMOS, 1985.
Multi-paged.

[Processor: Transputer]
Transputer Reference Manual.
New York: Prentice-Hall, 1988.
xv, 346pp.

[Processor: Transputer]
Transputer Technical Notes.
New York; London: Prentice-Hall, 1989.
xiv, 246pp.

[Processor: Transputer]
Feng, M. D., and Chung-Kwong Yuen. A Transputer-Based Parallel Lisp Implementation.
DISCS Publication, TRA7/91. Kent Ridge, Singapore: Department of Information Systems and Computer Science, National University of Singapore, 1991.

[Processor: Transputer]
Forster, Peter. A Transputer-Based Autonomous Mobile Robot.
DAI Technical Paper, 6. Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh, Dept. of Artificial Intelligence, [c.1991].
The robot is called 'Ben Hope'.

[Processor: Transputer]
Graham, Ian, and Tim King. The Transputer Handbook.
London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1990].

[Processor: Transputer]
Harp, Gordon, ed. Transputer Applications.
London: Pitman, 1989.

[Processor: Transputer]
Hinton, Jeremy, and Alan Pinder. Transputer Hardware and System Design.
New York; London: Prentice-Hall, 1993.

[Processor: Transputer]
Molina, Alfonso H. The Transputer Constituency: Building up UK/European Capabilities in Information Technologies.
[Edinburgh]: Research Centre for Social Sciences, University of Edinburgh, 1989.

[Processor: Transputer]
Mudi, Harold. Transputer Controlled Robot Arm.
n.p.: n.p., 1993.

[Processor: Transputer]
Race, Philip J. A Transputer Based Teletext to Speech Convertor.
n.p.: n.p., 1988.

[Processor: Transputer]
Roberts, John. Transputer Assembly Language Programming.
New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, [c.1992].

[Processor: Transputer]
Transputer Consortium. Transputer Applications.
n.p.: The Consortium, [1992].

[Processor: Transputer: ART]
Barwise, Mike. "The Transputer."
Electronics Today International March 1987. pp.23-25.
Descriptive article.

[Processor: Transputer: ART]
Coles, R. W. "The Transputer: A Component for the Fifth Generation."
Practical Electronics April 1984. pp.26-31.

[Processor: Transputer: ART]
Denning, Adam. "Transputer Trial."
Your Computer June 1987. pp.40-41.
Review of the Kuma K-Max Transputer Development System for the Atari ST.

[Robotics]
Arkin, Ronald C. Behavior-Based Robotics.
Cambridge, Massachusett: MIT Press, 1998.
xiv, 491pp.

[Robotics]
Arrick, Roger. Robot Building for Dummies.
New York; Chichester: Wiley, 2003.
xviii, 359pp.

[Robotics]
Baum, Dave, Michael Gasperi, Ralph Hempel, and Luis Villa. Extreme Mindstorms: An Advanced Guide to Lego Mindstorms.
Berkeley, California: Apress, 2000.
xii, 347pp.

[Robotics]
Branwyn, Gareth. Absolute Beginner's Guide to Building Robots.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Que, 2004.
xvi, 366pp.

[Robotics]
Bräunl, Thomas. Embedded Robotics: Mobile Robot Design and Applications with Embedded Systems.
Berlin; New York: Springer, 2003.
xiii, 434pp. 2nd edition: Berlin: Springer, 2006 (xiii, 458pp).

[Robotics]
Clark, Dennis, and Michael Owings. Building Robot Drive Trains.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xvi, 400pp.

[Robotics]
Clark, William. Make and Program Your Own Robots for the Sinclair Spectrum.
London: Hutchinson, 1985.
48pp. Uses Lego and the Datel Robotek interface (a circuit diagram for it is given). Contents: [1.] About this Book; [2.] Linking Up Robots To Your Computer; [3.] Programming and Robot Control; [4.] Wiring and Electrical Details; [5.] Using LEGO; [6.] Projects: Walking Android; Whirly Turtle; Lift Operator; Card Reader; Mini-Arm; Plotter; Maxi-Arm; [7.] Useful Addresses and Information.

[Robotics]
Cook, David. Robot Building for Beginners.
Berkeley, California: Apress, 2002.
xv, 568pp.

[Robotics]
Cook, David. Intermediate Robot Building.
Berkeley, California: Apress, 2004.
xxii, 442pp.

[Robotics]
Dudek, Gregory, and Michael Richard MacLean Jenkin. Computational Principles of Mobile Robotics.
Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, 2000.
xii, 280pp.

[Robotics]
Everett, H. R. Sensors for Mobile Robots: Theory and Application.
Wellesley, Massachusetts: A. K. Peters, 1995.
xiv, 528pp.

[Robotics]
George, Frank Honywill. The Anatomy of Business: An Introduction to Business Cybernetics and Executive Information Systems.
London: Associated Business Programmes, 1974.
ix, 158pp. US edition: New York: Wiley [1974] (ix, 158pp).

[Robotics]
George, Frank Honywill. Automation, Cybernetics, and Society.
London: L. Hill, 1959.
283pp. US edition: New York: Philosophical Library, [1959] (283pp).

[Robotics]
George, Frank Honywill. The Foundations of Cybernetics.
London: Gordon and Breach, 1977.
xiv, 286pp.

[Robotics]
George, Frank Honywill. Philosophical Foundations of Cybernetics.
Tunbridge Wells: Abacus Press, 1979.
ix, 157pp. Cybernetics and Systems series, 1.

[Robotics]
George, Frank Honywill, and John Davison Humphries, eds. The Robots are Coming.
Manchester: NCC Publications, 1974.
186pp. National Computing Centre, Computers and People series. Foreword by Isaac Asimov.

[Robotics]
Gibilisco, Stan, ed. Concise Encyclopedia of Robotics.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xiii, 365pp.

[Robotics]
Hannold, Chris. Combat Robot Weapons.
New York: McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics, 2003.
208pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Robotics]
Hannold, Chris. Combat Robots Complete: Everything You Need to Build, Compete, and Win.
New York: McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics, 2003.
xix, 311pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Robotics]
Hrynkiw, Dave, and Mark W. Tilden. JunkBots, Bugbots, and Bots on Wheels: Building Simple Robots With BEAM Technology.
New York: McGraw-Hill/Osborne, 2002.
xxiv, 374pp.

[Robotics]
Iovine, John. Robots, Androids, and Animatrons: 12 Incredible Projects You Can Build.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998.
xviii, 270pp. 2nd edition: New York: McGraw-Hill, 2002 (xix, 332pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. In the Beginning; 2. Artificial Life and Artificial Intelligence; 3. Power; 4. Movement and Drive Systems; 5. Sensors; 6. Intelligence; 7. Speech-Controlled Mobile Robot; 8. Neural Nets, Nervous Nets, and Subsumption Architecture; 9. Telepresence Robots; 10. Mobile Platforms; 11. Walker Robots; 12. Solar Ball Robot; 13. Underwater Bots; 14. Aerobots; 15. Robotic Arm; 16. Android Hand.

[Robotics]
Iovine, John. PIC Robotics: A Beginner's Guide to Robotics Projects Using the PIC Micro.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004.
xi, 274pp.

[Robotics]
Jones, Joseph L., and Anita M. Flynn. Mobile Robots: Inspiration to Implementation.
Wellesley, Massachusetts: A. K. Peters, 1993.
xvii, 349pp. 2nd edition (with an additional co-author (Bruce A. Seiger) and a CD-ROM): Natick, Massachusetts: A. K. Peters, 1999 (xxii, 457pp).

[Robotics]
Jones, Joseph L., and Daniel Roth. Robot Programming: A Practical Guide to Behavior-Based Robotics.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004.
xxvi, 293pp.

[Robotics]
Lerner, Aleksandr Yakovlevich. Fundamentals of Cybernetics.
London: Chapman and Hall, 1972.
x, 294pp. Translated by Eugene Gros. Edited by Frank Honywill George. Original title: Nachala Kibernetiki. Another edition: New York: Plenum Publishing Corp., 1975 (xii, 294pp).

[Robotics]
McComb, Gordon. Constructing Robot Bases.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004.
xviii, 350pp.

[Robotics]
McComb, Gordon. Robot Builder's Bonanza: 99 Inexpensive Robotics Projects.
Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1987.
ix, 326pp. 2nd edition: New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001 (xiii, 753pp). 3rd edition (with an additional co-author, Myke Predko): New York: McGraw-Hill, 2006 (xxxi, 733pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. The Robot Experimenter; 2. Anatomy of a Robot; 3. Tools and Supplies; 4. Buying Parts; 5. Robots of Plastic; 6. Building a Basic Wooden Platform; 7. Building a Metal Platform; 8. Converting Toys into Working Robots; 9. All About Batteries; 10. Build an Experimenter's Power Supply; 11. Build a Battery Recharger; 12. Choosing the Right Motor for the Job; 13. Robot Locomotion with DC Motors; 14. Robot Locomotion with Stepper Motors; 15. Build a Roverbot; 16. Build a Six-Legged Walking Robot; 17. Advanced Locomotion Systems; 18. An Overview of Arm Systems; 19. Build a Revolute Coordinate Arm; 20. Build a Polar Coordinate Arm; 21. Experimenting with Gripper Designs; 22. Adding the Sense of Touch; 23. Adding a Mouth to Your Robot; 24. Build a Music and Sound Effects Generator; 25. Sound Detection; 26. Robotic Eyes; 27. Fire Detection Systems; 28. Collision Avoidance and Detection; 29. Navigating Through Space; 30. Remote Control Systems; 31. Computer Control Via Printer Port; 32. Build a Robot Interface Card; 33. Adding an On-Board Computer; [Appendices:] A. Sources; B. Further Reading; C. Interfacing Logic Families and ICs; D. Drill Bit and Bolt Chart.

[Robotics]
McComb, Gordon. Robot Builder's Sourcebook: Over 2,500 Sources for Robot Parts.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xvii, 711pp.

[Robotics]
Mukhar, Kevin, and Dave Johnson. The Ultimate Palm Robot.
New York: McGraw-Hill/Osborne, 2003.
xv, 285pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Robotics]
Practical Robotics.
London: ECC Publications, [1984].
Periodical. Bi-monthly. First issue: May-June 1984.

[Robotics]
Predko, Michael [ie. Myke]. 123 Robotics Experiments for the Evil Genius.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004.
ix, 355pp.

[Robotics]
Predko, Michael [ie. Myke]. Programming Robot Controllers.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xx, 456pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Robotics]
Sandhu, Harprit. An Introduction to Robotics.
Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire: Nexus Special Interests, 1997.
v, 198pp. Companion disks were available from the author (IBM PC and Apple). Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. History and Future; 3. The Modern Robot; 4. Mobile Robots; 5. Running Motors; 6. Encoders and Amplifiers; 7. Sensors, Input and Output; 8. Computer and Software; 9. A Robot Control Language; 10. Robotic Vision - An Introduction; 11. Selecting a Suitable Robot Design for Building; 12. Skills, Tools, Time and Materials; 13. Making the Walking Robot; 14. RoboWalk - A Language for a Walking Robot; [Appendices:] 1. A Short Glossary of Robotic Terms; 2. Table of ASCII Values; 3. Scott Edwards Controller Information; 4. Information on Software Diskettes; 5. Drawings and Construction Notes; 6. Component Supplier Information.

[Robotics]
Sandin, Paul E. Robot Mechanisms and Mechanical Devices Illustrated.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xxxv, 299pp.

[Robotics]
Wilcher, Don. Lego Mindstorms Interfacing.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xviii, 395pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Robotics]
Williams, Douglas H. PDA Robotics: Using Your Personal Digital Assistant to Control Your Robot.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xix, 232pp.

[Robotics]
Williams, Karl P. Amphibionics: Build Your Own Biologically Inspired Reptilian Robot.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xvii, 363pp.

[Robotics]
Williams, Karl P. Build Your Own Humanoid Robots: 6 Amazing & Affordable Projects.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004.
xi, 211pp.

[Robotics]
Williams, Karl P. Insectronics: Build Your Own Walking Robot.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
xiv, 272pp.

[Robotics]
Wise, Edwin. Applied Robotics.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Prompt Publications, 1999.
xiv, 311pp. With a CD-ROM.

[Robotics]
Wise, Edwin. Applied Robotics II.
Clifton Park, New York: Thomson/Delmar Learning, 2003.
xvi, 344pp.

[Robotics: ART]
Your Robot.
Daventry, Northampton; [later] London: EMAP, [1984].
Periodical. Winter 1984 issue notes the title to be new, quarterly, and given away free with Electronics and Computing Monthly. Vol. 1, No. 3 (April 1984) issue, 16pp, in the April 1984 issue of E&CM. Vol. 1, No. 4 (May 1984) issue, 16pp, in the May 1984 issue, etc. By the July 1984 issue of E&CM, the Your Robot supplement was not seperately paginated.

[Robotics: ART]
Alexander, Ken. "Prism's Movits."
Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. Your Robot Supplement. p.8.
Review of the Movit robots from Prism Consumer Products.

[Robotics: ART]
Becker, Richard. "PE Micrograsp."
Practical Electronics I: December 1982. pp.30-35; II: January 1983. pp.44-48.
Constructional series in 2 parts describing the ZX81-based Micrograsp robot arm sold by PowerTran Cybernetics, from whom kits could be purchased.

[Robotics: ART]
Becker, Richard, Tim Orr, and Richard Monkhouse. "PE Robots."
Practical Electronics II: December 1981. pp.42-47; III: January 1982. pp.64-71; IV: February 1982. pp.52-58; V: March 1982. pp.56-59; VI: April 1982. pp.46-51.
Constructional series in 6 parts describing the M101, P101, and S101 robots sold by PowerTran Cybernetics, from whom kits could be purchased.

[Robotics: ART]
Billingsley, John. "Off Your Trolley! Your Own Robot to Build Yourself for Under £15?"
Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 11. 14-20 March 1985. pp.14-15, 17-18.
The PCW Buggy, constructional details with program listings for the Commodore 64, BBC Micro, ZX81, and ZX Spectrum. Kits were sold by Greenweld.

[Robotics: ART]
Bishop, Owen. "Smart Karts."
Everyday Practical Electronics I: Basic Construction, October 2004. pp.724-732; II: On Manoeuvres and Software Development, November 2004. pp.814-820.
Constructional article. PIC16F84-based mobile buggy.

[Robotics: ART]
Buckley, David. "Zeaker Micro-Robot."
Practical Electronics I: Vol. 19, No. 5. May 1983. pp.42-47; II: Vol. 19, No. 6. June 1983. pp.36-41.
Constructional article. ZX81-controlled robot. Kits and assembled Zeakers were sold by Colne Robotics. Suitable for any micro with an 8-bit bi-directional port. Colne supplied an interface for ZX81 and ZX Spectrum users. The article described interfacing and controlling Zeaker using a ZX81.

[Robotics: ART]
Clark, Nigel. "Robots: Take me to your Micro."
Your Computer March 1985. pp.52-53, 55.
Overview of available robots.

[Robotics: ART]
Dawson, John. "Robot Kits."
Your Computer January 1986. pp.68-69, 71.
Review of the Milton Bradley Robotix kits. Includes interfacing information for the BBC Micro.

[Robotics: ART]
Fairhead, Harry, and Janet Swift. "Pull the Other LEGO."
Computer Shopper November 1998, No. 129. pp.746-749.
Review of the LEGO Invention System.

[Robotics: ART]
Forrester, Eddie, and Robin Moorshead. "Trundle: The Channel Four Robot."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 4, No. 14. March-May 1985. pp.16-25.
ZX81-based robot. Consists of the interface, the CMOS low power 2K memory expansion, the sensor board, and the motor/chassis unit. A kit was sold by Maplin Electronic Supplies. Channel Four is a national UK TV station.

[Robotics: ART]
Hampshire, Nick. "The Robobugs of MIT."
Electronics Today International December 1996. pp.9-10, 12, 14.

[Robotics: ART]
Hampshire, Nick. "Servos are Inexpensive and Easy to Build."
Practical Computing. June 1980. pp.96-97.
Computer-controlled servos for robotics.

[Robotics: ART]
"HEBOT II."
Hobby Electronics November 1982. pp.9-16, 72.
The Hobby Electronics robot, with a ZX81 interface. A full kit was offered by PowerTran Cybernetics.

[Robotics: ART]
Hoffman, Eric. "Big Trak Gets Brains on Board."
Practical Robotics Part 1: September/October 1984. pp. 39-45, 48-50.
Constructional project to control a Big Trak with a Z-8671 microcontroller. Big Trak has a TMS1000, 1K ROM, 128 bytes RAM and 24 I/O lines.

[Robotics: ART]
James, Sam, and Harry Fairhead. "Roboshop."
Computer Shopper I: September 1997, No. 115. pp.779-781, 783-784; II: October 1997, No. 116. pp.819-821; III: November 1997, No. 117. pp.891-894; IV: December 1997, No. 118. pp.877-879.
The 'Build Your Own Robot' series, based on a BASIC Stamp. Articles with the title "Roboshop 2", "Roboshop 3" etc.

[Robotics: ART]
James, Sam, and Harry Fairhead. "Our Friends Electric."
Computer Shopper V: February 1998, No. 120. pp.850-853; VI: April 1998, No. 122. pp.823-826.
Both articles with this title, and concerning the ShopperBot, based on the Stamp II. No articles in Nos. 119 and 121 (January and March 1998).

[Robotics: ART]
King, D. S. "Motors Explained."
Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.68-69. In the Your Robot Supplement.
Part of a series.

[Robotics: ART]
King, D. S. "Motors Made Simple."
Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. p.58. In the Your Robot Supplement.
Final instalment in a series.

[Robotics: ART]
Peterson, M. "The Biological Basis of Robotics: Pattern Recognition and Neural Networks."
Practical Electronics June 1986. pp.46-49.

[Robotics: ART]
Pickard, Alan. "Practical Robotics Techniques. Part 1: An Introduction to Control by Experiment."
Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 10, No. 42. February-March 1991. pp.16-18.
Primarily based around the BBC Micro.

[Robotics: ART]
"Robots. Special Supplement."
Everyday Practical Electronics October 2004. 8pp. Between pp.708-709.
Overview of products and suppliers.

[Robotics: ART]
[Sargeant], Richard. "Bigger Buggy Building."
Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.72-75. In the Your Robot Supplement.
Adding sensors and an extra interface board to the Hardy Buggy featured in the November 1984 issue.

[Robotics: ART]
[Sargeant], Richard. "Build Your Own Low Cost Robots."
Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. p.71. In the Your Robot Supplement.
First in a series of articles. Using LEGO.

[Robotics: ART]
[Sargeant], Richard. "Building a Low-Cost Turtle."
Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.62-64. In the Your Robot Supplement.

[Robotics: ART]
[Sargeant], Richard. "DIY Robot Wall Builder."
Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.52-56. In the Your Robot Supplement.
Constructional article. Uses LEGO.

[Robotics: ART]
Sargeant, Richard. "Low Cost Robot Building: Getting a Grip."
Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1985. pp.56-58.
Series. Robot limbs.

[Robotics: ART] Witkowski, Mark. "Robotics." Practical Computing Part 4 (Communication is Problem in Programmed Control): May 1980. pp.90-94.
Series.

[Robotics: ART]"Zero 2." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 4, No. 14. March-May 1985. pp.36-38.
Review of the Zero 2 turtle robot kit sold by Maplin Electronic Supplies.

General Works from 1970

Magazines with PC in the title, but with general news or features are included here. PC-software specific magazines are only listed in the IBM PC section.

8Bit. Ely, Cambridgeshire, [1993-].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issue 18: October-December 1997.

Ahl, David H., ed. 101 BASIC Computer Games. Maynard, Massachusetts: Digital Equipment Corporation, 1973.
249pp.

All Micro Magazine. New Romney, Kent: Steam Computer Society, [199-].
Bi-Monthly. 'For users of the Einstein and other golden oldies micros'. Issue 69, March-April 1994 (20pp).

Allan, Roy A. A Bibliography of the Personal Computer: The Books and Periodical Articles. London, Ontario: Allan Publishing, 2005.
83pp.

Anderson, Phil. Computers and the Radio Amateur. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, 1982.
xii, 208pp. Projects use the TRS-80.

Anderson, Ronald Gordon. Microcomputing. Plymouth: Macdonald and Evans, 1982.
xii, 108pp. The M&E Handbook Series. 2nd edition: Plymouth: Macdonald and Evans; Philadelphia, Pennsylvania: International Ideas, 1984 (xiv, 210pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. Profile of Microcomputers; 2. Operating a Microcomputer; 3. Concepts of Programming for Microcomputing; 4. Programming Microcomputers; 5. Arithmetic by Microcomputer; 6. Demonstration Programs.

Annino, Raymond, and Richard D. Driver. Scientific and Engineering Applications with Personal Computers. A Software Approach with Examples for the Apple-, IBM-PC-, and CP/M-Based Microcomputer Systems. New York; Chichester: Wiley, 1986.
xx, 577pp.

Arcade. Bath, Avon: Future, [December 1998-].
Periodical. Issues seen: 1 (December 1998).

Aspray, William, ed. Computing before Computers. Ames: Iowa State Univ. Press, 1990.
[ix], 266pp.

Augarten, Stan. Bit by Bit: An Illustrated History of Computers. New York: Ticknor & Fields, 1984.
324pp. Paperback edition: London; Boston; Sydney: Unwin Paperbacks, 1984 (322pp). Hardback edition: London: George Allen & Unwin, 1985 (324pp). Contents (1985 edition): 1. The First Mechanical Calculators; 2. The Engines of Charles Babbage; 3. The Bridge Between Two Centuries; 4. The Invention of ENIAC; 5. The Stored-Program Computer; 6. The Rise of IBM; 7. The Whirlwind Project; 8. The Integrated Circuit; 9. The Personal Computer; Epilogue: The Lesson of History; Appendix: The FBI Dossier of John William Mauchly; Chronology of the History of Computers.

Bagnall, Brian. On The Edge: The Spectacular Rise and Fall of Commodore. Winnipeg, Manitoba: Variant Press, 2005.
ix, 561pp. Contents: Introduction; Prolog: The Rise of Commodore; 1. MOS Technology - 1974 to 1976; 2. The Acquisition - 1975 to 1976; 3. The PET - 1976 to 1977; 4. Releasing the PET - 1977 to 1978; 5. The Trinity - 1977-1979; 6. Business is War - 1979 to 1980; 7. The Color Computers - 1979 to 1980; 8. The VIC-20 - 1980; 9. Computers for the Masses - 1981; 10. The Race to a Million - 1981 to 1983; 11. The Secret Project - 1981; 12. The Commodore 64 - 1982; 13. Selling the Revolution - 1982; 14. Commodore Mania - 1983; 15. TED - 1983; 16. Dismissing the Founder - 1984; 17. The Sequel - 1984; 18. Brawling for the C128 - 1984 to 1985; 19. The Savior of Commodore - 1982 to 1985; 20. The Amiga - 1985 to 1986; 21. Dropping the Ball - 1985 to 1987; 22. The New Amigas - 1986 to 1987; 23. A Radical New Direction - 1988 to 1992; 24. The Fall of Commodore - 1992 to 1994; Epilogue.

Barden, William T., Jr. Guidebook to Small Computers. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1980.
127pp.

Barden, William T., Jr. How to Buy and Use Minicomputers and Microcomputers. Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams, 1977.

Barden, William T., Jr. How to Program Microcomputers. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1977.
256pp.

Barden, William T., Jr. Microcomputer Math.2nd edition; Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1982.
128pp.

Barden, William T., Jr. Microcomputers for Business Applications. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1979.
256pp.

Barron, David William. Assemblers and Loaders. London: Macdonald; New York: American Elsevier, 1969.
61pp. Computer Monographs, 6. 2nd edition: London: Macdonald; New York: American Elsevier, 1972 (x, 90pp). 3rd edition: London: Macdonald and Jane's; New York: Elsevier North-Holland, 1978 (xi, 100pp).

Barron, David William, and Judith Mary Bishop. Advanced Programming. A Practical Course. Chichester: Wiley, 1984.
xii, 277pp.

Beech, Graham. Computer Based Learning: Practical Methods for Microcomputers. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1983.

Berners-Lee, Tim, and Mark Fischetti. Weaving the Web. The Original Design and Ultimate Destiny of the World Wide Web by its Inventor. San Francisco, California: HarperSanFrancisco, 1999.
xi, 226pp. London: Orion Business, 1999 (xi, 244pp). Reprinted: 1999; 2000. New York: HarperCollins Publishers, 2000 (ix, 246pp). London: Texere, 2000 (256pp). Contents (Orion Business, 2000 edition): 1. Enquire Within Upon Everything; 2. Tangles, Links and Webs; 3. info.cern.ch; 4. Protocols: Simple Rules for Global Systems; 5. Going Global; 6. Browsing; 7. Changes; 8. Consortium; 9. Competition and Consensus; 10. Web of People; 11. Privacy; 12. Mind to Mind; 13. Machines and the Web; 14. Weaving the Web.

Bird, Peter John. LEO: The First Business Computer. Wokingham, Berkshire: Hasler Publishing, 1994.
vii, 272pp. LEO was created by J. Lyons & Company to manage their company affairs. Contents: 1. Company Origins; 2. Clerical Efficiency Endeavours; 3. Computer Construction Begins; 4. Full Computer Manufacture; 5. Further Automation Improvements; 6. End of an Era - A New Beginning; [Appendices:] 1. Program Actions on the LEO I Computer; 2. LEO II Features at February 1958; 3. LEO I and II Summary of Machine Test Programs; 4. LEO II Prices Quoted to NRDC in January 1959; 5. The First Clerical Jobs: LEO I and II; 6. Sales of LEO II Computers; 7. Program Actions on the LEO III Computer; 8. Components Required to Manufacture a LEO III; 9. Sales of LEO III Computers; 10. Standard Utility Software Supplied with LEO III; 11. Sales of Autolector (Document Reader); 12. Sales of Xeronic Printers; 13. How LEO I Worked - A Semi-Technical Description; 14. Summary of LEO Characteristics.

Bischoff, David. WarGames. New York: Dell, 1983.
Based on the original screenplay written by Lawrence Lasker and Walter F. Parkes. UK edition: Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1983. French adaptation by Jackie Landreaux-Valabrègue; Illustrated by Nadine Forster; Paris: Hachette, [c.1983].

Bishop, Owen Neville. Simple Interfacing Projects. London: Granada, 1983.
168pp.

Blanchet, Michael. How to Beat Atari, Intellivision, and Other Home Video Games. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1982.
128pp. Illustrated by R. B. Backhaus.

Bleackley, Beverley J., and Jean LaPrairie. Entering the Computer Age. The Computer Industry in Canada, the First Thirty Years. Agincourt, Canada: Datacrown and the Book Society of Canada, [1982].
x, 161pp.

Bott, Frank. Professional Issues in Information Technology. Swindon: British Computer Society, 2005.
xxi, 242pp.

Bott, Frank, et al. Professional Issues in Software Engineering. London: Pitman, 1991.
[240]pp; 2nd impression: London: UCL Press, 1994 (224pp); 2nd edition: London: UCL Press, 1995 (xvi, 304pp; Authors of this edition: Frank Bott, Allison Coleman, Jack Eaton, and Diane Rowland; Contents: 1. The Engineering Profession; 2. The Structure of Organizations; 3. Finance and Accounting; 4. Anatomy of a Software House; 5. Computer Contracts; 6. Intellectual Property Rights; 7. The Framework of Employee Relations Law and Changing Management Practices; 8. Human Resource Management and Software Engineering; 9. Health and Safety at Work; 10. Software Safety: Liability and Practice; 11. Computer Misuse and the Criminal Law; 12. Data Protection); 3rd edition: London: Taylor & Francis, 2001 (xvi, 364pp).

Bradbeer, Robin. The Personal Computer Book. Bradford, West Yorkshire: Input Two-Nine, 1980.
[6], 220pp 2nd edition: Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1981 ([220]pp). Another '2nd' edition: Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1982 (240pp). 3rd edition (with the title Robin Bradbeer's Personal Computer Book): Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1984 (280pp).

Bradbeer, Robin, et al. Choosing and Using a Business Microcomputer. Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1982.
172pp.

Bradbeer, Robin, Peter De Bono, and Peter Laurie. The Beginner's Guide to Computers. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., 1982.
208pp. Additional material and editing by Susan Curran, David Allen, BBC.

Bradley, Alan C. Peripherals for Computer Systems. Basingstoke, Hampshire: Macmillan Education, 1991.
ix, 226pp. Preface dated February 1990. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Input/Output Peripherals; 3. Storage Peripherals; 4. Hardware and Software Support.

Bronson, Po. The Nudist on the Late Shift and Other True Tales of Silicon Valley. New York: Random House, 1999.
xxxv, 248pp. London: Secker & Warburg, 1999 (xxxv, 288pp). London: Vintage, 2000 (xxxv, 252pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. The Newcomers; 2. The IPO; 3. The Entrepreneur; 4. The Programmers; 5. The Salespeople; 6. The Futurist; 7. The Dropout; 8. Is the "Revolution!" Over?

Budnick, Ken. Paperbyte Bar Code Loader. [Peterborough, New Hampshire]: Byte Publications, 1977.
The decoding algorithm designed by Budnick of Micro-Scan Associates for Byte Publications, to enable program listings to be printed as bar codes in Paperbyte books. The general algorithm is described along with assembler for 6502, 6800, and 8080 processors.

Burks, Alice R., and Arthur W. Burks. The First Electronic Computer. The Atanasoff Story. 1988; Ann Arbor: Univ. of Michigan Press, 1992.

Business 2.0. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [2000-].
UK edition. Periodical. Monthly. 'Premiere issue' has the cover date June 2000.

BYTE: The Small Systems Journal. Peterborough, New Hampshire: BYTE Publications; Highstown, New Jersey: McGraw-Hill, September 1975-July 1998 (Vol. 23, No. 7).
Periodical. Monthly. US and regionalised versions. The September 1995 issue (Vol. 20, No. 9) was a special issue celebrating twenty years of publishing. Some covermounted CD-ROMs were issued with the title 'Explore Byte': Volume 3, Fall [Autumn] 1997; Volume 4, Winter 1997-1998.

Cailliau, Robert, and James Gillies. How the Web was Born. The Story of the World Wide Web. Oxford: Oxford Univ. Press, 2000.

Caminer, David. LEO: The Incredible Story of the World's First Business Computer. New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 1998.
xxiv, 392pp.

Campbell, Keith. The Computer and Video Games Book of Adventure. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1983].
Foreword by Scott Adams. With listings for the BBC Micro, Commodore 64, and ZX Spectrum.

Campbell-Kelly, Martin. From Airline Reservations to Sonic the Hedgehog: A History of the Software Industry. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2003.

Carlton, Jim. Apple: The Inside Story of Intrigue, Egomania, and Business Blunders. New York: Times Business, 1997.
xiii, 463pp. Foreword by Guy Kawasaki. Paperback edition: New York: HarperBusiness, 1998 (xiii, 465pp). Revised edition: London: Random House Business Books, 1999 (xiii, 469pp). Contents (1997 edition): 1. In the Beginning; 2. The Glory Years; 3. The Licensing Debate; 4. A 'Noble Village'; 5. An Engineering Morass; 6. The Fall of Jean-Louis Gassée; 7. Crossing a Canyon; 8. Looking for Another Way Out; 9. Sculley's Waterloo; 10. A New Sheriff in Town; 11. The March to PowerPC; 12. From Power Mac to the Cliff; 13. The Wreck of the Diesel; 14. Spindler's Last Stand; 15. Mission: Impossible; 16. NeXT: A Founder's Return; Epilogue.

Carton, Sean. The Dot.Bomb Survival Guide: Surviving (and Thriving) in the Dot.Com Implosion. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2002.

Cassidy, John. Dot.Con: The Greatest Story Ever Sold. New York: HarperCollins, 2002.
Paperback edition with the title Dot.Con: How America Lost its Mind and its Money in the Internet Era, New York: HarperCollins (Perennial), 2003.

Cater, John P. Electronically Hearing: Computer Speech Recognition. Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, 1984.

Cater, John P. Electronically Speaking: Computer Speech Generation. Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, 1983.

CD Powerplay. Macclesfield, Cheshire: IDG Media, [1995-1996].
Periodical. A slim magazine-style guide accompanying a CD-ROM. Issue 5: September/October 1995; 6: November 1995; 7: December 1995; 8: Christmas Special 1995; 9: January 1996; then monthly to 12: April 1996. Name changed to PC Powerplay with issue 13 (May 1996).

CD-ROM Magazine. London: Dennis, [May 1994-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issues 1 (May 1994) and 2 (August 1994) were given away free with other magazines. Issue 3 was the first to be available only by purchase. Launch editor: Guy Sneesby. Vol. 1 runs to issue 14. Vol. 2 begins with the October 1995 issue.

Cellan-Jones, Rory. Dot.Bomb: The Rise and Fall of Dot.Com Britain. London: Aurum, 2001.
Revised and updated edition published in 2003.

Ceruzzi, Paul E. A History of Modern Computing. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1998.
x, 398pp. 3rd printing: 1999; 2nd edition: 2003 (xi, 445pp). Contents (1st edition, 3rd printing): Introduction: Defining 'Computer'; 1. The Advent of Commercial Computing, 1945-1956; 2. Computing Comes of Age, 1956-1964; 3. The Early History of Software, 1952-1968; 4. From Mainframe to Minicomputer, 1959-1969; 5. The Go-Go Years and the System/360, 1961-1975; 6. The Chip and its Impact, 1965-1975; 7. The Personal Computer, 1972-1977; 8. Augmenting Human Intellect, 1975-1985; 9. Workstations, UNIX, and the Net, 1981-1995; Conclusion: The Digitization of the World Picture. The 2nd editon has an additional chapter: 10. Internet Time, 1995-2001.

CGI. London: Media Directories International, [February/March 1996-].
Periodical. Originally bi-monthly. Issue 1: February/March 1996 (as Computer Generated Imaging).

Children's Computing. Bicester, Oxfordshire: Children's Computing Ltd., [1994-].
Periodical. Issues seen: 7: June 1995; 8: July/August 1995.

[Children's Computing.] Family Summer Challenge. Bicester, Oxfordshire: Children's Computing Ltd., 1995.
July/August 1995 supplement. 16pp.

The Chip Shop: BASICODE 2. London: Broadcasting Support Services for The Chip Shop, BBC Radio 4, January 1984.
47pp. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. How to use BASICODE-2; 3. BASICODE-The Specifications; 4. BASICODE-2 Protocol; 5. Apple II & IIe; 6. BBC (A & B); 7. Commodore Computers; 8. Sharp MZ80A; 9. Sinclair ZX81; 10. Tandy TRS-80 & VideoGenie; 11. The Future. BASICODE was developed by Hobbyscoop, a weekly Dutch radio programme broadcast by Nederlanse Omroep Stichting (NOS) the Dutch domestic service. Using a simple interface, micros could receive software transmitted in radio broadcasts. A kit of parts for the BASICODE 2 interface could be obtained from Broadcasting Support Services for £3.95.

Chposky, James, and Ted Leonsis. Blue Magic: The People, Power and Politics Behind the IBM Personal Computer. London: Grafton Books, 1989.
xi, 228pp.

Clough, Bryan, and Paul Mungo. Approaching Zero: Data Crime and the Computer Underworld. New York: Random House, 1992.
UK edition: London: Faber and Faber, 1992.

Communications 2000: The Magazine for British Telecom's Online Users. London: Goldlink Magazines, 1989.
Periodical. Issue 1: September/October 1989. Launch editor: Surya Lovejoy.

CompuServe. Introductory Membership to the World's Most Comprehensive Computerised Information Service. One Month Free Membership Plus a Credit to Explore Extended and Premium Services. Bristol: CompuServe, May 1994.
40pp introduction to the service. Rear cover has: 'CS-1579 (05/94)'.

Computer Act!ve. London: VNU Business Publications, [1998-].
Periodical. Fortnighly. Issues seen: 1: 26 February-11 March 1998.

Computer and Software Retailing. London: Argus Specialist Publications, 1984-[1985].
Periodical. Weekly. Trade magazine.

Computer and Video Games. London; Peterborough: EMAP, [1981-].
Periodical. Monthly. Gaming magazine. Issue 3: January 1982.

Computer Answers. London: VNU Business Publications, [1983-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 11: December 1983.

Computer Arts. Bath, Avon: Future, [1996-].
Periodical. Issue 2: July/August 1996 (editor: Mark Higham). Bi-monthly until issue 8 (July/August 1997), monthly from issue 9 (September 1997). Sporadic anomalous issues (ie. 13: Winter 1997).

[Computer Arts] Computer Arts. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement. Free with issue 43 of MacFormat, November 1996. 32pp.

[Computer Arts] Showing Off! Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1997.
Supplement. July/August 1997. 32pp.

[Computer Arts] Computer Arts. Issue 17.5. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1998.
Supplement. 32pp. With a variant of the cover of issue 17 (April 1998). Issue 18 (May 1998) is advertised in this sampler as forthcoming, due to be published on 23 April.

[Computer Arts] 1998 Graduate Showcase. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1998.
Supplement. 1998. 32pp. Editor: Robin Abbott.

[Computer Arts] Photoshop Special. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1998.
Supplement. June 1998. 32pp. Editor: Robin Abbott.

Computer Buyer. [Issue 52:] London: Dennis Publishing, September 1995.
Periodical. Monthly.

[Computer Buyer] Step-By-Step Pocket Expert No. 1: Choose the Perfect PC. London: IDG Communications, 1997.
Free with issue 77 of Computer Buyer. 32pp excluding the covers.

The Computer Fair. 23-25 April 1982. Earls Court, London. Exhibition Guide. [Sutton, Surrey?]: [IPC Exhibitions?], [1982].
Sponsored by Practical Computing and Your Computer. 28pp excluding the covers. Price: 50p.

The Computer Fair. Earls Court, London. 16-19 June 1983. Exhibition Guide. [Sutton, Surrey]: [Reed Exhibitions], [1983].
Sponsored by Practical Computing and Your Computer. 40pp. Price: 80p.

Computer Gaming World. London: Ziff-Davis, [January 1997-].
Periodical. Issue 1: January 1997 (editor-in-chief: David Kelly); 2: March 1997; 4: May 1997. Renamed: PC Gaming World from issue 7 (August 1997).

ComputerLife. London: Ziff-Davis, [May 1995-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: May 1995 (editor: Rob Beattie). Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period). Latest issue seen: 19 (November 1996).

[ComputerLife] Complete Guide to the Internet. More than 400 Great Sites to Visit! London: Ziff-Davis, 1995.
Free with the July 1995 issue. 100pp. By Steve Browne.

[ComputerLife] 40 Unbelievable Upgrades. London: Ziff-Davis, 1995.
Free with the October 1995 issue. 100pp. By Alistair Dabbs.

[ComputerLife] Over 1200 Great Internet Sites for You! London: Ziff-Davis, 1995.
Free with the January 1996 issue. 100pp. By Marcus Austin.

Computer Music. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [October 1998-].
Periodical. Issue 1: October 1998. Launch editor: Andy Jones.

Computer Publishing. Bath: Future Publishing, 1999.
16pp free 'taster'. Issue 1 due on sale on 11 October 1999. To be published monthly. Taster sample edited by Nick Veitch.

Computer Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, [March 1988-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[Computer Shopper.] What Can a Computer Do For You? London: Dennis Publishing, 1994.
Free. 64pp excluding wrappers.

[Computer Shopper.] The Computer Shopper Guide to CompuServe and the Internet. London: Dennis Publishing, [1995-1996].
Free. 72pp excluding wrappers. By Sue Schofield. Copyright date given as '1995/1996'.

[Computer Shopper.] How to Buy the Perfect... London: Dennis Publishing, 1996.
Free. 72pp excluding wrappers.

[Computer Shopper.] 1996 Computer Shopper Buyer's Bible. London: Dennis Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 104. 72pp excluding wrappers.

[Computer Shopper.] Computer Shopper Buying Guide: Why You Need a Personal Computer. London: Dennis Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 106. 72pp excluding the wrappers. Authors: Jeremy Spencer, Graeme Kidd, and Chris Lang.

[Computer Shopper.] Your Guide to AOL, the Internet, and More. London: Dennis Publishing, 1997.
Free with issue 109. 68pp excluding wrappers. By Ric Shepheard.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1997.
Free with issue 115 (September 1997). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] The Perfect Home Software Guide. London: Dennis Publishing, 1997.
Free with issue 118. [2], 25, [1]pp. Sponsored by Microsoft and copyright Microsoft.

[Computer Shopper.] Your Guide to Buying a Personal Computer: How to Get More Kit for Your Cash! London: Dennis Publishing, 1997.
Free with issue 119. 72pp excluding wrappers.

[Computer Shopper.] Computer Shopper 10th Anniversary Supplement. London: Dennis Publishing, 1998.
Free with issue 121. 64pp.

[Computer Shopper.] The Complete Xmas '98 Buying Guide. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 131 (January 1999). 68pp excluding wrappers. Authors: Kay Ewbank, Mike James, and Janet Swift.

[Computer Shopper.] Mobile Shopper. Your Complete Guide to Portable Power. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 132 (February 1999). 68pp excluding wrappers. Authors: Kay Ewbank, Mike James, and Janet Swift.

[Computer Shopper.] Complete Business Buying Guide 99. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 134 (April 1999). [2], 50pp. Authors: Kay Ewbank, Mike James, and Janet Swift.

[Computer Shopper.] Portable Shopper. Your Complete Pocket Guide to Mobile Solutions. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 138 (August 1999). 68pp excluding wrappers. Authors: Kay Ewbank, Mike James, and Janet Swift.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 139 (September 1999). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 140 (October 1999). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 141 (November 1999). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 142 (December 1999). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Games Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 143 (January 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Free with issue 143 (January 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 144 (February 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 145 (March 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 146 (April 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Games Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 147 (May 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 147 (May 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 148 (June 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 149 (July 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 150 (August 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 151 (September 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 152 (October 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 153 (November 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 154 (December 2000). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Free with issue 155 (January 2001). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2001.
Free with issue 156 (February 2001). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2001.
Free with issue 157 (March 2001). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2001.
Free with issue 158 (April 2001). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Internet Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 2001.
Free with issue 161 (July 2001). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Mobile Shopper. Your Complete Guide to Portable Power. London: Dennis Publishing, 2001.
Free with issue 161 (July 2001). 68pp. Authors: Kay Ewbank, Mike James, and Janet Swift.

[Computer Shopper.] How to... Get the Most from Your PC. 21 Inspirational Ideas to Get You Started. London: Dennis Publishing, 2001.
Free with issue 167 (January 2002). 68pp. Authors: Kay Ewbank, Mike James, and Janet Swift.

[Computer Shopper.] Ultimate How To... 50 Step-By-Step Workshops That Get Results. Volume 1. London: Dennis Publishing, 2003.
Free with issue 192 (February 2004). 68pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Ultimate How To... 50 Step-By-Step Workshops That Get Results. Volume 3. Spring 2005. London: Dennis Publishing, 2005.
Free with issue 204. 68pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Ultimate How To... 50 Step-By-Step Workshops That Get Results. Volume 4. Summer 2005. London: Dennis Publishing, 2005.
Free with issue 209 (July 2005). 68pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Upgrade Shopper: Your Practical Guide to Upgrading. Step-By-Step Guides. No. 1. London: Dennis Publishing, 2005.
Free with issue 212 (October 2005). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Upgrade Shopper: Your Practical Guide to Upgrading. Step-By-Step Guides. No. 2. London: Dennis Publishing, 2005.
Free with issue 213 (November 2005). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Upgrade Shopper: Your Practical Guide to Upgrading. Step-By-Step Guides. No. 3. London: Dennis Publishing, 2005.
Free with issue 214 (December 2005). 36pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Ultimate How To... 50 Step-By-Step Workshops That Get Results. Volume 5. London: Dennis Publishing, 2006.
Free with issue 216 (February 2006). 68pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Ultimate How To... 50 Step-By-Step Workshops That Get Results. Volume 6. London: Dennis Publishing, 2006.
Free with issue 222 (August 2006). 68pp.

[Computer Shopper.] Ultimate How To... 50 Step-By-Step Workshops That Get Results. Volume 7. London: Dennis Publishing, 2007.
Free with issue 228 (February 2007). 68pp.

Computer Shopper [US Edition.] New York: ZD Inc., [1980-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue seen: Vol. 20, No. 12; Issue 249 (December 2000).

Computer Video. London: WV Publications, [May/June 1997-].
Periodical. Issue 1: May/June 1997. Launch editor: Bob Crabtree.

Computer Weekly. Sutton, Surrey: Reed Business Information, [1966-2007-].
Periodical. Weekly.

[Computer Weekly.] Get Certified and Get Ahead. An Extract. [n.p.]: [n.p.], [199-].
'Free to readers of Computer Weekly'. [40]pp excluding wrappers. By Anne Martinez.

Computers & Electronics. Los Angeles, California: Ziff-Davis, (Vol. 20, No. 11) November 1982-April 1985 (Vol. 23, No. 4).
American periodical. Monthly. A continuation of Popular Electronics magazine which concluded with Vol. 20, No. 10 (October 1982).

Computing Age. London: EMAP, [October 1985-1986].
Periodical. Monthly. Continues Electronics and Computing Monthly.

Computing Today. London: Modmags, [1978-1985].
Periodical. Monthly. Issues 1-4 issued as a supplement within Electronics Today International (Issue 1 in the November 1978 issue). Also known as Computing Today International.

Computing Today. Ramsgate, Kent: Nexos, [March 1995-].
Periodical. Issue 1: March 1995. Launch editor: Richard Williams.

Connect. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [July 1997-].
Periodical. Issue 1: July 1997 (placed on sale on 29 May; editor: Simon Crook). Initially supplied with a covermount CD-ROM. Debut issue CD-ROM coded: CON/00/6/97. A 'Tasty Taster CD' (May 1997) was given away free with .net magazine and is coded: CON/00/5/97. Stated to be the magazine formerly known as The .net Directory.

Connecting Microvitec CUB Monitors to Amiga's, Atari ST's, Acorn Archimedes etc. [n.p.]: Meedmore Ltd., [1991].
Stack Technical Reference May 1991. Sheet No. 20. [2]pp.

The Corporate Software Guide. Feltham: Corporate Software Ltd., [1994].
Periodical. Continuation of The International Software Guide. Issues recorded: No. 11 (1994).

Creative Computing. Morristown, New Jersey: Creative Computing Press, (Vol. 1, No. 1) November/December 1974-December 1985 (Vol. 11, No. 12).
Periodical. Initially bi-monthly. Monthly from 1979.

[Creative Computing] The Best of Creative Computing. Volume 1. Morristown, New Jersey: Creative Computing Press, January 1976.
Edited by David H. Arl. 2nd edition: Morristown, New Jersey: Creative Computing Press, 1977 (ix, 326)pp.

[Creative Computing] The Best of Creative Computing. Volume 2. Morristown, New Jersey: Creative Computing Press, [1979].
xii, 323pp. Edited by David H. Arl.

[Creative Computing] The Best of Creative Computing. Volume 3. Morristown, New Jersey: Creative Computing Press, [1980].
viii, 323pp. Edited by David H. Ahl and Burchenal Green.

Crevier, Daniel. AI: The Tumultuous History of the Search for Artificial Intelligence. New York: BasicBooks, 1993.
xiv, 386pp. Contents: Introduction: Probing the Mystery of Human Intelligence; 1. Engineering Intelligence: Computers and Programming; 2. The First AI Program: Defining the Field; 3. The Dawn of the Golden Years: 1956-63; 4. The Conquest of Micro Worlds: 1963-70; 5. Clouds on the AI Horizon; 6. The Tree of Knowledge; 7. Coming of Age; 8. The Rollercoaster of the 1980s; 9. Game Playing: Checkmate for Machines?; 10. Souls of Silicon; 11. How Many Bulldozers for an Ant Colony?; 12. The Silicon Challengers in Our Future.

Cringely, Robert X. Accidental Empires. How the Boys of Silicon Valley Make Their Millions, Battle Foreign Competition, and Still Can't Get a Date. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley; London: Viking, 1992.
Reprinted: London: Penguin, 1993. 2nd revised edition: New York: Harper Business; London: Penguin, 1996 (to accompany the TV series based upon it, Triumph of the Nerds broadcast on Channel 4 in the UK).

Cringely, Robert X. Triumph of the Nerds. Oregon Public Broadcasting and John Gau Productions for PBS and Channel 4, in association with RM Associates and Pacific Mountain Network, 1996. Three one-hour programmes on two videocassettes with an additional 20 minutes of footage. Written and presented by Robert X. Cringely. Series director: Paul Sen. Series producers: John Gau and Stephen Segaller. VHS PAL: VSL0144. Derived from Accidental Empires.

Crookall, Philip. Programming for Real Beginners. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [1983].
82pp.

Crookall, Philip. Programming for Real Beginners. Stage 2. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [1983].
80pp.

Curran, Ste. Game Plan: Great Designs that Changed the Face of Computer Gaming. Mies, Switzerland: RotoVision, 2004.
160pp. Contents: Introduction; 1. Populous; 2. Street Fighter II; 3. Super Mario 64; 4. Broken Sword: The Shadow of the Templars; 5. Tomb Raider; 6. Gran Turismo; 7. Half-Life; 8. Metal Gear Solid; 9. EverQuest; 10. The Sims.

Cusumano, Michael A., and David B. Yoffie. Competing on Internet Time. Lessons from Netscape and its Battle with Microsoft. New York: Free Press, 1998.
xvi, 361pp. Revised edition: New York; London: Touchstone, 2000.

Cusumano, Michael A., and Richard W. Selby. Microsoft Secrets. How the World's Most Powerful Software Company Creates Technology, Shapes Markets, and Manages People. New York: Free Press, 1995.
UK edition: London: HarperCollins, 1996. Revised paperback edition: New York: Simon and Schuster, 1998.

CyberSoft Abingdon, Oxfordshire: CyberSoft Publishing, [November 1995-].
Periodical. Issue seen: 1: November 1995, subtitled 'The only magazine for CyberKids'. A covermounted CD-ROM entitled 'CyberSoft Demo Disc' has been noted with the text 'Issue 1, November 1995', and so presumably it is the disk supplied with the first issue. The Read Me file states: Sampler Disc 2, 10 April 1995. The disc was created using Macromedia Director 4.04 for Windows.

Dacom Systems Ltd. 2424 MNP Modem. User Guide. Milton Keynes: Dacom Systems Ltd., [198-].
vi, 136pp. Spiral bound. First leaf notes a change of address 'from the Summer of 1989'. Doc. No. 17-065. Internal title page: DACOM 2424 MNP Modem Instruction Manual (Doc No 17-065 Rev 2.0). Contents (Rev 2.0): [1. Introduction:] 1. Preview; 2. Getting Started; 3. Status Indicator Lamps; 4. Modem Commands; 5. The S Registers; 6. Result Messages; [2. Tutorial:] 7. General Operation; 8. Synchronous Applications; 9. Diagnostic Commands; 10. MNP Reliable Link; [3. Appendices:] A. RS-232-C Serial Interface; B. ASCII Character Table; C. Glossary; D. Specifications; E. BABT User Instructions; F. Figures; British Telecom New Plan Sockets.

Daines, Derrick. 26 BASIC Programs for Your Micro. London: Newnes Technical, 1982.
124pp. Written in SWTP BASIC. American edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, [1983] (174pp).

Data/Fax/Voice Modem Operation Manual. [n.p.]: [n.p.], [199-].
Thorough 40pp guide to modem operations presumably to accompany OEM modems (internal ISA bus and external). Code on rear: 712-0003-003. Contents: 1. Command Summary; 2. S-Register Summary; 3. Result Codes Summary; 4. Specification of Modem; 5. Trouble Shooting; 6. FCC Requirements. Supplied with a loose sheet: 'Installation Procedure for Fax Modem (CD Version)', 2pp, code on rear: 712-0000-013 (RW). The sheet covers Windows95 installation (including OSR editions) for Rockwell chipset modems, hence the 'RW' in the code. Sheet contents: 1. Hardware Installation; 2. Software Installation.

Deutschman, Alan. The Second Coming of Steve Jobs. New York: Broadway Books, 2000.
321pp. Preface dated February 2000. Contents: 1. Next; 2. Pixar; 3. Crises; 4. Comeback; 5. Apple; 6. Being Steve.

Devine, Kieran, and Francis John Smith. QUILL: An On-Line Text Retrieval System. [Belfast]: [Queen's Univ. of Belfast], [c.1983].
Spiral bound.

Devlin, Keith J. Microchip Mathematics. Number Theory for Computer Users. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [1984].

DiBona, Chris, Sam Ockman, and Mark Stone, eds. Open Sources: Voices of the Open Source Revolution. Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly Media Inc., January 1999.
viii, 272pp. Contents: 1. Introduction (Chris diBona, Sam Ockman, and Mark Stone); 2. A Brief History of Hackerdom (Eric S. Raymond); 3. Twenty Years of Berkeley Unix: From AT&T-Owned to Freely Redistributable (Marshall Kirk McKusick); 4. The Internet Engineering Task Force (Scott Bradner); 5. The GNU Operating System and the Free Software Movement (Richard Stallman); 6. Future of Cygnus Solutions: An Entrepreneur's Account (Michael Tiemann); 7. Software Engineering (Paul Vixie); 8. The Linux Edge (Linus Torvalds); 9. Giving It Away: How Red Hat Software Stumbled Across a New Economic Model and Helped Improve an Industry (Robert Young); 10. Diligence, Patience, and Humility (Larry Wall); 11. Open Source as a Business Strategy (Brian Behlendorf); 12. The Open Source Definition (Bruce Perens); 13. Hardware, Software, and Infoware (Tim O'Reilly); 14. Freeing the Source: The Story of Mozilla (Jim Hamerly, Tom Paquin, and Susan Walton); 15. The Revenge of the Hackers (Eric S. Raymond); Appendix A: The Tanenbaum-Torvalds Debate; Appendix B: The Open Source Definition, Version 1.0.

DiBona, Chris, Danese Cooper, and Mark Stone, eds. Open Sources 2.0. Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly Media Inc., October 2005.
xl, 445pp. Contents: Foreword: Source is Everything (Kim Polese); I: Open Source: Competition and Evolution; 1. The Mozilla Project: Past and Future (Mitchell Baker); 2. Open Source and Proprietary Software Development (Chris DiBona); 3. A Tale of Two Standards (Jeremy Allison); 4. Open Source and Security (Ben Laurie); 5. Dual Licensing (Michael Olson); 6. Open Source and the Commoditization of Software (Ian Murdock); 7. Open Source and the Commodity Urge: Disruptive Models for a Disruptive Development Process (Matthew N. Asay); 8. Under the Hood: Open Source and Open Standards Business Models in Context (Stephen R. Walli); 9. Open Source and the Small Entrepreneur (Russ Nelson); 10. Why Open Source Needs Copyright Politics (Wendy Seltzer); 11. Libre Software in Europe (Jesus M. Gonzalez-Barahona and Gregorio Robles); 12. OSS in India (Alolita Sharma and Robert Adkins); 13. When China Dances with OSS (Boon-Lock Yen, Louisa Liu, and Sunil Saxena); 14. How Much Freedom Do You Want? (Bruno Souza); II: Beyond Open Source: Collaboration and Community; 15. Making a New World (Doc Searls); 16. The Open Source Paradigm Shift (Tim O'Reilly); 17. Extending Open Source Principles Beyond Software Development (Pamela Jones); 18. Open Source Biology (Andrew Hessel); 19. Everything is Known (Eugene Kim); 20. The Early History of Nupedia and Wikipedia: A Memoir (Larry Sanger); 21. Open Beyond Software (Sonali K. Shah); 22. Patterns of Governance in Open Source (Steven Weber); 23. Communicating Many to Many (Jeff Bates and Mark Stone); Appendix A: The Open Source Definition; Appendix B: Referenced Open Source Licenses; Appendix C: Columns from Slashdot.

Digit. London: IDG, [May/June 1998-].
Periodical. Bi-monthly. Issue 1: May/June 1998 (editor-in-chief: Simon Jary). Later monthly. Cross-platform. Covermounted CD-ROMs have the title CDigit. Issues seen: 1.

Digital PhotoFX. Peterborough: EMAP Apex Publications, [1998-].
Periodical. Issues seen: Special Reprint Issue No. 1. 68pp. Editor: Pete Bargh. A condensed version of the first issue. Undated, but subscription offer closes 31 December 1998.

DV: Digital Video Magazine. London: IDG, [May 1996-].
Periodical. Issue 1: May 1996 (28pp, £2.75). Launch editor: Vic Lennard.

Dirksen, A. J. Microcomputers: What They Are and How To Put Them to Productive Use. Slough: W. Foulsham, 1982.
231pp. Translated from the Dutch (1978). American edition: No. 1406; Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1982 (231pp). Based on the 8080 processor. A detailed examination including a circuit for a Hex microtrainer. Contents (Foulsham edition): 1. What is a Computer?; 2. What is a Microcomputer?; 3. The Microcomputer in General; 4. How Does a Computer Compute?; 5. Circuitry in a Computer; 6. Main Memory; 7. Simple Programming; 8. CPU Architecture-1; 9. CPU Architecture-2; 10. Microcomputer Architecture; 11. Description of the Instructions; 12. Syntax and Subroutines; 13. Addressing Techniques; 14. Flowcharts; 15. From Task to Solution; 16. Sample Programs; 17. Traffic Lights; 18. System Software; 19. Development Systems; 20. Peripheral Equipment; 21. I/O Interfacing; Appendix A. 8080 Instruction Set; Appendix B. 8080 Instruction Timing.

Dr. Dobb's Journal of Computer Calisthenics & Orthodontia: Running Light Without Overbyte. A Reference Journal for Users of Home Computers. Menlo Park, California: People's Computer Company; [Later:] Redwood City, California: M. & T. Pub.; [Later:] San Mateo, California: Miller Freeman; [Later:] San Francisco, California: CMP Media Inc., [January 1976-].
Periodical. Monthly (initially ten issues per annum). Title varies. Typically known as Dr. Dobb's Journal. Annual cumulations published.

[Dr. Dobb's Journal] Dr. Dobb's Journal of Computer Calisthenics & Orthodontia: Running Light Without Overbyte. A Reference Journal for Users of Home Computers. Volume 1. Menlo Park, California: People's Computer Company, 1977.
359pp. Vol. 1, Nos. 1-10. Edited by Jim C. Warren, Jr. Preface dated 21 January 1977.

[Dr. Dobb's Journal] Dr. Dobb's Journal of Computer Calisthenics & Orthodontia: Running Light Without Overbyte. A Reference Journal for Users of Home Computers. Volume 2. Rochelle Park, New Jersey: Hayden Book Company, 1980.
480pp. Vol. 2, Nos. 1-10. Edited by Tom Williams.

[Dr. Dobb's Journal] Dr. Dobb's Journal of Computer Calisthenics & Orthodontia: Running Light Without Overbyte. A Reference Journal for Users of Home Computers. Volume 3. Rochelle Park, New Jersey: Hayden Book Company, 1980.
479pp. Vol. 3, Nos. 1-10. Edited by Tom Williams.

DVD-ROM Drive Unit. DVD1240E. SR-8586-B/SR-8586-C. Safety Instruction Manual. [n.p.]: [n.p.], [199-].
Folded sheet. Multi-lingual (English, German and French). Printed in Japan. Coded: 'LMQT00400'. The OEM drive designated 'SR-8586' was manufactured by Panasonic and marketed as the DVD1240E by Creative [Labs] although no manufacturer or reseller is noted on the sheet.

e.business. London: Crimson Publishing, [1999-2001-].
Periodical. Monthly. Latest issue seen: 16: March 2001. Editor for at least issues 9-16, Stuart Derrick.

Edstrom, Jennifer, and Marlin Eller. Barbarians Led by Bill Gates. Microsoft from the Inside: How the World's Richest Corporation Wields its Power. New York: Henry Holt, 1998.
xiv, 256pp. 1. The Road Behind; 2. The Making of the Microsoft Marketing Machine; 3. Be Like the Mac; 4. Death March; 5. Anything for IBM; 6. The Clandestine Effort; 7. Bad Marriages End in Divorce; 8. Pen Ultimate Warfare; 9. Go-Ing Down; 10. Meet the Jetsons; 11. High Road to Memphis - Low Road to MSN; 12. Dodging Bullets; 13. Windows 95 - Power in Numbers; 14. Continual Chaos; Epilogue.

Educational Computing. London: EMAP, [1980-1989].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: February 1980.

Eglash, Joanne. How to Write a .Com Business Plan: The Internet Entrepreneur's Guide to Everything You Need to Know About Business Plans and Financing Options. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001.
ix, 191pp. Contents: [Part 1: The Plan:] 1. Introduction; 2. Executive Summary; 3. Mission Statement and Company Description; 4. The Management; 5. The Competition; 6. Your Market and Customer; 7. Products and Services; 8. Marketing and Sales; 9. Operations; 10. Financial Projections and Financial Management Plan: Going for the Gold (and Green); 11. Final Flourishes; 12. Sample Business Plans; [Part 2: The Directory].

Electro-Media. London: CMP London, [1986].
Annual periodical, published in 1986 in association with Kodak Ltd., Motion Picture & Television Division. Continuation of The Electronic Media Directory and New Media Handbook: The Complete Guide to the UK Electronic Media Industry.

Electronic Entertainment. San Mateo, California: IDG Communications, [1994-].
Periodical. Monthly.

The Electronic Media Directory and New Media Handbook: The Complete Guide to the UK Electronic Media Industry. Dunstable, Bedfordshire: WOAC, [1984-1985].
Annual periodical, published in 1984 and 1985. Continued as Electro-Media.

Electronics and Computing Monthly. Daventry, Northampton; London (from June 1983): EMAP, 1981-1985.
Periodical. Monthly. Vol. 2, No.9 incorrectly numbered Vol. 3, No. 9. Continued as Computing Age.

Electronics: The Maplin Magazine. Westcliff-on-Sea, Essex: Maplin Publications, [1981-].
Periodical. Initially quarterly, later monthly. First issue: December 1981-February 1982. Maplin were an electronic components supplier.

Elkan, David. A Guide to Playing The Hobbit. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1984.
A guide to the adventure game produced by Melbourne House, initially on the ZX Spectrum, based on the book by J. R. R. Tolkien.

Emmerichs, Jack. Superwumpus. Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Publications, 1978.
6800 assembler and BASIC listings.

EQ8. London: Dennis Publishing, [1995-1996].
'The Magazine on a Disc'. A CD-ROM based magazine, the title being a contraction of 'equate'. Issues 1 and 2 have copyright dates of 1995; Issues 3-8 have copyright dates of 1996. Discs 1 and 2 produced by Dennis Publishing and Noho Digital; Discs 6-8 produced by Dennis Publishing and developed by Studio Fish. Issues 3-8 stated to be for PC and Mac.

Evans, Christopher. The Mighty Micro: The Impact of the Computer Revolution. London: Victor Gollancz, September 1979.
255pp. The author died in October 1979. 2nd Gollancz impression: 'before publication'. 3rd Gollancz impression: November 1979. 4th and 5th Gollancz impressions: December 1979. Another edition: Dunton Green: Coronet, 1979 (255pp). 6th Gollancz impression: January 1980. Another edition (with the title Mighty Micro: The Impact of the Micro-Chip Revolution): London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1980. Another edition (with the title Mighty Micro: The Impact of the Micro-Chip Revolution): Sevenoaks, Kent: Coronet, 1980 (255pp). 2nd edition (with the original title The Mighty Micro: The Impact of the Computer Revolution and a foreword by Robin Webster): London: Gollancz, 1982 ([vi], 255pp). Reprint of the 2nd edition: 1983. Contents (6th impression (1980) of the 1st Gollancz edition): Introduction: The Computer Revolution; [Part 1: The Past:] 1. The Weavers of Numbers; 2. Computers go to Work; [Part 2: The Present:] 3. The Revolution Begins; 4. The Springs of Growth; [Part 3: The Short-Term Future: 1979-1983:] 5. Of Gadgets and Gimmicks; 6. Political, Economic and Social Consequences; [Part 4: The Middle-Term Future: 1983-1990:] 7. Into the Exponential; 8. The Death of the Printed Word; 9. The Decline of the Professions; 10. Of Money and Crime; 11. Of Work and Robots; [Part 5: Interlude: On Intelligent Machines:] 12. The Nature of Intelligence; 13. Can a Machine Think?; 14. Towards the Ultra-Intelligent Machine; [Part 6: The Long-Term Future: 1991-2000:] 15. The Evolution of the Intelligent Machine; 16. Political and Social Issues; 17. Scientific and Psychological Issues; 18. Bizarre Issues; Epilogue: Into the Unknown.

Explain IT. Great Doddington, Northants: SS Consultants, [October 1996-].
Periodical. Bi-monthly. Issue 1: October 1996. Issue 2: Christmas 1996. 'Presented by Crown Computer Products' (a UK computer retailer, Bascrown Ltd., trading as Crown Computer Products).

Fellows, James W. All About Computer-Aided Design and Manufacture. A Guide for Executives and Managers. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1983.

Ferry, Georgina. A Computer Called LEO. Lyons Teashops and the World's First Office Computer. London: Fourth Estate, 2003.
xi, 220pp. Reprinted: London: HarperPerennial, 2004 (xi, 220pp). Contents: 1. A Mission to Manage; 2. The Electronic Brain; 3. Made in Britain; 4. A Computer for Lyons; 5. LEO Goes to Work; 6. In Business; 7. LEO's Last Roar.

FileMaker User Group. FileMaker Views. Oxford: FileMaker User Group, [1991-1992].
Periodical. Issues seen: I, 3 (Summer 1992, 16pp); I, 4 (Autumn 1992, 20pp); II, 1 (Winter 1992, 20pp). Newsletter of the user group supporting FileMaker, the database program produced by Claris.

Forster, Winnie. Game.Machines. The Encyclopedia of Consoles, Handhelds and Home Computers 1972-2005. Utting, Germany: Gameplan, 2005.
224pp. Translated by Rafael Dyll; Localised by David McCarthy. Beautifully illustrated. Underestimates the number of games produced for the popular machines. Contents: 1. First Era: Birth of Electronic Games. Mainframes, Arcades, and TV Games; 2. Second Era: Videogame Crash and Home Computer Success Story; 3. Third Era: 16-Bit; 4. Fourth Era: Rendered Crazy; 5. Fifth Era: The 21st Century: Caught in the Net of Gaming; Appendix. Technical Data.

Foster, Caxton Croxford. Content Addressable Parallel Processors. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1976.
xiii, 233pp.

Foster, Caxton Croxford. Cryptanalysis for Microcomputers. Rochelle Park, New Jersey: Hayden Book Co., 1982.
333pp.

Foster, Caxton Croxford. Real Time Programming: Neglected Topics. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1981.
xv, 190pp.

Foster, Caxton Croxford. A Simulated Associative Memory. Amherst: Computer Science Department, 1970.
11pp. TN/cs 23.

Foster, Caxton Croxford. Computer Architecture. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1970
xiv, 225pp. 2nd edition: New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1976 (xvii, 300pp). 3rd edition (with a co-author, Thea Iberall): New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1985 (xx, 386pp).

Freedman, David H., and Charles C. Mann. At Large. The Strange Case of the World's Biggest Internet Invasion. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1997.
315pp. Contents: 1. Busy Signals; 2. Crazy House; 3. Crashing the Shuttle; 4. SU-QVT; 5. Apocalypse Now; 6. The Hacker Ethos; 7. The Tale of the Tape; 8. Infomaster; 9. The Dot Zone; 10. @Large; 11. Intel Inside; 12. The Never-Ending Story; 13. Hong Kong Heist; 14. Breaking the Backbone; 15. Hard Case; Epilogue.

Freestone, Nigel. Databases for Fun and Profit. London: Granada, 1983.
viii, 133pp.

Freiberger, Paul, and Michael Swaine. Fire in the Valley. The Making of the Personal Computer. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1984.
xiii, 288pp. 2nd edition: New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 2000 (xxv, 463pp, with [64]pp of plates). A 'collector's edition' of the 2nd edition was also released in 2000 with a CD-ROM. Contents (2nd edition): 1. Tinder for the Fire; 2. The Voyage to Altair; 3. The Miracle Makers; 4. Homebrew; 5. The Genie in the Box; 6. Retailing the Revolution; 7. American Pie; 8. The Gate Comes Down; 9. Fire and Ashes; 10. Wealth and War; Epilogue: After the Revolution.

GamePro. San Mateo, California: IDG Communications, [1989-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[games.] Retro Micro Games Action: The Best of 24 Issues of games Retro. Vol. 1. Bournemouth: Highbury Entertainment, 2005.
Reprinted and anthologised from the 'Retro' column of games magazine. 260pp. £9.99.

Games Computing. London: Argus Specialist Publications, [1984].
Periodical. Monthly. Known issue: May 1984.

George, Frank Honywill. After 1984: Prospects for a Better World. Tunbridge Wells: Abacus, 1984.

George, Frank Honywill. Computers, Science and Society. London: Pemberton, 1970.
Based on the Charles Beard memorial lectures, Ruskin College, Oxford, 1965. Introduction by David John Stewart.

George, Frank Honywill. Machine Takeover: The Growing Threat to Human Freedom in a Computer-Controlled Society. Oxford: Pergamon, 1977.
Pergamon International Library.

George, Frank Honywill, and Pronob A. Sarkar. Practical Database for Major Mini and Micro Computers. Gerrards Cross, Buckinghamshire: Chiltern Educational & T-S Services, 1981.

Gerrard, Mike. The Adventurer's Notebook. London: Duckworth, 1984.
Spiral bound.

Gifford, Clive. Using a Modem with Your Computer. London: Interface, 1986.

Gifford, Clive. Using Computers in Education. London: Interface, 1985.

Goldberg, Adele, ed. A History of Personal Workstations. New York: ACM Press, 1988.
Revised versions of papers presented at the ACM Conference on the History of Personal Workstations, 9-10 January, 1986, Palo Alto, California.

Grace, Mike. Home Applications on Your Micro. Practical Ideas for Home Users. London: Sunshine Books, 1984.

Green, Danny, ed. Business Guide to Communications Systems. London: Pitman, 1987.
x, 230pp. An edited and updated compilation of recent articles from the magazine Communications. Contents: A. Data Communications; B. Local Area Networks; C. Network Management; D. Call Logging; E. PABXs and Keyphones; F. Mobile Voice; G. Modems; H. Computer Communications; I. Value-Added Networks; J. Financial Services; K. Text and Image; L. Fax; M. Conferencing.

Grossman, Wendy M. Net.Wars. New York: New York Univ. Press, 1998.

Grossman, Wendy M., ed. Remembering the Future. The Personal Computer World Interviews. London: Springer, 1996.
Interviews from Personal Computer World magazine.

Hafner, Katie, and Matthew Lyon. Where Wizards Stay Up Late: The Origins of the Internet. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1996.
304pp. Contents: 1. The Fastest Million Dollars; 2. A Block Here, Some Stones There; 3. The Third University; 4. Head Down in the Bits; 5. Do It To It Truett; 6. Hacking Away and Hollering; 7. E-Mail; 8. A Rocket on Our Hands. Paperback edition: New York; London: Touchstone, 1998 (304pp); New Edition: London: Pocket Books, 2003 (307pp). Translated into French by Georges Loudière as Les Sorciers du Net. Paris: Calmann-Lévy, [1999] (346pp).

Hafner, Katie, and John Markoff. Cyberpunk. Outlaws and Hackers on the Computer Frontier. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1991.
UK edition: London: Fourth Estate, 1991; London: Corgi, 1993; Revised edition: New York; London: Touchstone, 1995.

Hammond, Ray. The Writer and the Word Processor. A Guide for Authors, Journalists, Poets and Playwrights. London: Coronet, 1984.

Handley, Mark, and Jon Crowcroft. The World Wide Web: Beneath the Surf. London: UCL Press, 1995.
ix, 198pp. Contents: 1. The Information Highstreet - Introduction; 2. Information - Are You Being Served?; 3. The World Wide Web; 4. Client Programs; 5. Serving Information to the Web; 6. Academic Examples of WWW Servers; 7. Commercial Web Servers; 8. Servers Galore; 9. Problems with WWW; 10. Where is WWW Heading?; [Appendices:] A. HTML Grammar; B. Uniform Resource Locators (URLs); C. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP); D. Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME); E. URLs Cited.

Harding, A. J. Writing Software for Profit. London: Virgin, 1984.

Hartnell, Tim. The Big Fat Book of Computer Games. London: Interface, 1984.

Hartnell, Tim. Creating Adventure Games on Your Computer. New York: Ballantine Books, 1984.
xii, 196pp.

Hartnell, Tim. Creating Simulation Games on Your Computer. New York: Ballantine Books, 1986.
xii, 324pp.

Hartnell, Tim. Desktop Publishing. London: Interface, 1987.

Hartnell, Tim. The Easy Way to Program Your New Computer. London: Interface, 1984.

Hartnell, Tim. Exploring Artificial Intelligence on Your Microcomputer. London: Interface, 1984.
x, 357pp.

Hartnell, Tim. Exploring Expert Systems on Your Microcomputer. London: Interface, 1985.

Hartnell, Tim. The Personal Computer Guide. London: Virgin Books, 1982.
2nd edition updated by Stephen Pugsley: London: Virgin, 1983.

Hartnell, Tim. Replicating Reality - Exploring Computer Simulations. London: Interface, 1985.

Hartnell, Tim. Tim Hartnell's Giant Book of Computer Games. London: Interface Publications, 1983.
Another edition: Oxford: Fontana/Collins, 1983.

Hartnell, Tim. Tim Hartnell's Second Giant Book of Computer Games. New York: Ballantine Books, 1985.
437pp.

Hartnell, Tim, and Stan Veit. The Complete Buyer's Guide to Personal Computers.Toronto; New York: Bantam Books, 1983.
xii, 388pp.

Helms, Harry L., Jr. Introduction to Microcomputers for the Ham Shack. Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, 1979.
Amateur radio and computing.

Hertzfeld, Andy. Revolution in the Valley: The Insanely Great Story of How the Mac was Made. Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, December 2004.
xxiv, 291pp. Hertzfeld was co-creator of the Apple Macintosh. Foreward by Steve Wozniak.

Herz, Jessie Cameron. Joystick Nation: How Videogames ate our Quarters, Won our Hearts, and Rewired our Minds. Boston, Massachusetts: Little, Brown, 1997.
230pp. Contents: 1. Primitive Blips; 2. A Natural History of Videogames; 3. The Madonna/Whore Complex of Consumer Electronics; 4. A la Recherche du Arcades Perdu; 5. The Classics; 6. Why Doom Rules; 7. Virtual Construction Workers; 8. Ditties of the Apocalypse; 9. Cartridge Wars; 10. Videogame Porn; 11. Mario über Alles; 12. Having a Wonderful Time...Wish I Were Here; 13. Superhero Sushi; 14. Boys Versus Girls; 15. Mortal Kombat; 16. The Military-Entertainment Complex; 17. Sim Society.

Higgo, John, David Hobbs, Wally Milner, Martin Perkins, David Tall, Joe Watson, and William Wynne Willson. 132 Short Programs for the Mathematics Classroom. Leckhampton, Cheltenham: Stanley Thornes, 1985.
ix, 194pp. Spiral-bound. 'A set of short programs for use in schools, written for the Mathematical Association Sub-Committee on Microcomputers in Mathematics Teaching'. A disk containing the programs was available for the BBC Micro, but the programs are in BASIC with versions included for the ZX Spectrum and 380Z when graphics are used. Contents: 1. Number; 2. Sequences and Series; 3. Geometry; 4. Algebra; 5. Statistics and Probability; 6. Calculus; 7. Miscellany.

Hiltzik, Michael A. Dealers of Lightning: Xerox PARC and the Dawn of the Computer Age. New York: HarperBusiness, 1999.
xxviii, 448pp. Paperback edition: New York: HarperCollins, 2000 (xxviii, 448pp). London: Orion Business, 2000 (xxviii, 448pp). Contents (London, 2000 edition): Introduction: The Time Machine; [Part I. Prodigies:] 1. The Impresario; 2. McColough's Folly; 3. The House on Porter Drive; 4. Utopia; 5. Berkeley's Second System; 6. "Not Your Normal Person"; 7. The Clone; 8. The Future Invented; [Part II. Inventors:] 9. The Refugee; 10. Beating the Dealer; 11. Spacewar; 12. Thacker's Bet; 13. The Bobbsey Twins Build a Network; 14. What You See Is What You Get; 15. On the Lunatic Fringe; 16. The Pariahs; 17. The Big Machine; [Part III. Messengers:] 18. Futures Day; 19. Future Plus One; 20. The Worm that Ate the Internet; 21. The Silicon Revolution; 22. The Crisis of Biggerism; 23. Steve Jobs Gets His Show and Tell; 24. Supernova; 25. Blindsided; 26. Exit the Impresario; Epilogue: Did Xerox Blow It?

Hole, David R. Practical Uses for the Microcomputer in the Home. London: Interface, 1983.
x, 102pp.

Home Computing Weekly. [1983-1985].
Periodical. Weekly.

Hope, Mary H. Micros for Children with Special Needs. London: Souvenir Press, 1987.
237pp. Human Horizons series. Preface dated April 1987. Contents: [1. Background:] 1. What Micros Can and Cannot Do; 2. Can You Use Micros with Pre-School Children?; 3. The Starting Point Must be the Problem or Need; 4. How are Micros Being Used in Schools?; 5. Linking the Work at Home with that at School; [2. Practicalities:] 6. Some Ways of Using Micros to Help with Particular Difficulties; 7. Choosing Hardware and Software; [3. Issues:] 8. Some Issues and Questions; [4. Resources:] 9. Where to get Help and Advice.

Horenstein, Henry, and Eliot Tarlin. ComputerWise. An Introduction to Understanding, Using and Buying a Personal Computer. New York: Vintage, 1983.
193pp. UK edition (with the title The Business Computer Guide. An Introduction to Understanding, Using and Buying a Personal Computer): London: Joseph & Sunshine, 1984 (195pp).

Howe, Jim A. M. Using Computers in Special Education. Edinburgh: Edinburgh Univ., 1980.
4pp. University of Edinburgh Department of Artificial Intelligence Research Paper, No. 148.

Idrees, Muhammad. Design and Management of Distributed Data Processing: A Practitioner's Approach. Manchester: National Computing Centre, 1989.
[360]pp. Another edition: Manchester; Oxford: NCC Blackwell, 1990 ([24], 272pp; Acknowledgements dated November 1988). Contents (1990 edition): 1. What, Why and Where of a DDP System; 2. DDP Systems Node; 3. Data Transmission Over a Data Link; 4. Computer Networking; 5. An Overview of Transmission Facilities; 6. Physical Elements of Communication Subsystem; 7. Local Area Networks; 8. Life Cycle for DDP System Development; 9. Design Objectives and System Selection; 10. DDP System Design Methodology; 11. Management of DDP Systems; 12. Description of a DDP System.

Input. London: Marshall Cavendish, [1984-1985].
Weekly partwork. 52 parts. Continuously paginated. Four binders were available, each holding 13 issues of 32pp each.

Interactive Wave. Paris: LVI-Presse, 1996.
CD-ROM based magazine sold in a card folder, distributed in the UK by Future Publishing, Bath, Avon. Issue 1 sold for £9.99. PC/Macintosh compatible. Also given as i-wave.

The International Software Guide. Brentford: International Software, [1986-1993].
Periodical. Twice a year by No. 7. Continued as The Corporate Software Guide (No. 11; 1994). Issues recorded (as 'editions'): No. 1 (1986); No. 2 (1987); No. 5 (1989; ix, 451pp); No. 7 (xxvi, 644pp).

Internet Advisor. London: VNU Business Publications, [Summer 1996-].
Periodical. Issue 1: Summer 1996. Launch editor: Ben Tisdall. Aimed at business people.

Internet and Comms Today. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, [1994-December 1995].
Periodical. Issue 14: December 1995. Continued as Internet Today from issue 15.

Internet Business. Hove, East Sussex: Internet Business World, [January 1997-].

Issue 1: January 1997. Launch editor: Tim Wilson.

Internet Magazine. London: EMAP, [1994-2000-].
Periodical. Monthly. Latest issue seen: 62 (January 2000).

[Internet Magazine.] Hosting: A Complete Guide to Finding the Very Best Home for Your Web Site. London: EMAP, 2000.
Free with issue 62 (January 2000). 36pp. By Gail Robinson.

Internet Money. Clifton, Bristol: Nick Moss, [1999].
Periodical. Issues seen: 2 (editor: Donna Constable, copyright date: 1999, with a cover-mounted CD-ROM).

Internet Today. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, [January 1996-1997-].
Periodical. Monthly. Begins with issue 15 (January 1996). Latest issue seen: 30: April 1997. Editors: 19, 21: (Geoffrey Harris, managing editor); 23-30 (Richard Baguley). Previously Internet and Comms Today.

[Internet Today.] Hot Webs: A Guide to the Cream of the World Wide Web. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, [199-].
Free with an issue of Internet Today. 32pp.

Internet Works. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [December 1997-2001-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: December 1997 (with a CD-ROM cover disc; editor: Marcus Austin). Latest issue seen: 47 (August 2001).

Internet World. London: VNU Business Publications, [Autumn 1996-].
Periodical. Launch issue: Autumn 1996, 'November 1996' on spine (editor: Ben Tisdall); Issue 1 (December 1996) on sale 28 November 1996; Issue 2 (March 1997) on sale 7 February 1997. Generally monthly although a July/August 1997 issue seen. Issue numbering not used after issue 2. Latest issue seen: November 1997 (editor: Ken Young).

James, Hazel, ed. Home Software: The Complete Buyers' Guide. London: HCP Hutchinson Computer, 1984.
A Which Micro? & Software Review publication.

James, Mike. The Complete Programmer: A Guide to Better Programming in BASIC. London: Granada, 1983.
viii, 149pp. US edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1984 (viii, 149pp).

Jones, Richard M., ed. The Good Hardware Guide. Watford, Hertfordshire: Absolute Research, 1991.
Loose leaf. Paperback edition (286pp): London: Kogan Page, 1991. Senior researcher: Peter Sarson. Contributing reviewers: Steve Gold and Steve Mansfield.

Jones, Richard M., ed. The Good Software Guide for IBM PCs and Compatibles. Watford, Hertfordshire: Absolute Research, 1989.
[500]pp. 2nd edition: London: Kogan Page, 1990 (342pp); 3rd edition: London: Kogan Page, 1991 (342pp).

Juliff, Peter Laurence. Program Design: The Art of Structured Programming. London: Interface, 1984.
vii, 247pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1986 (vii, 308pp). 3rd edition: New York: Prentice Hall, 1990 (x, 340pp). 4th edition: New Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India, 2000 (x, 228pp).

Kantaris, Noel, and Patrick F. Howden. The Universal Equation Solver: A Simple, New Method for Microcomputers. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1983.
ix, 196pp. General work with listings for Apple and BBC computers.

Kantaris, Noel, and Phil R. M. Oliver. First Bytes. London: Babani, 1997.
1st edition: July 1997 (84pp). A promotional sampler containing content from a number of Babani books. Contents: 1. Windows 95 One Step at a Time; 2. Windows 95 Explained; 3. MS-Word 97 Explained; 4. MS-Access 97 One Step at a Time; 5. MS-Excel 97 Explained; 6. MS-Office 97 Explained; 7. MS-Works for Windows 95 Explained; 8. Using MS-Explorer on the Internet; 9. Using Netscape on the Internet.

Kaplan, David A. The Silicon Boys and their Valley of Dreams.358pp. The 'silicon boys' are listed on the rear cover as: Jerry Yang, John Doerr, Marc Andreessen, Bill Gates, Jim Clark, and Steve Jobs. New York: William Morrow, 1999.
Contents: Prologue: Woodside 94062; 1. Dreams; 2. Genesis; 3. Belief; 4. Prophets; 5. Oz; 6. Money; 7. Profits; 8. Mozilla; 9. Godzilla; 10. Yahoo; Epilogue: Lincolnville 04849.

Kaspersky, Kris. Hacker Disassembling Uncovered: Powerful Techniques to Safeguard your Programming. Wayne, Pennsylvania: A-List Publishing, 2003.

Kidder, Tracy. The Soul of a New Machine. Boston: Little, Brown, 1981.
293pp. Thorndike, Maine: Thorndike Press, 1981 (471pp; Large print edition). New York: Avon, 1982 (293pp). London: Allen Lane, 1982 (254pp). Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1983; 1987. New York: Modern Library, 1997 (xii, [4], 384pp; With a new introduction by the author). Boston, Massachusetts: Little, Brown, 2000 (293pp). Pulitzer Prize-winning classic. Kidder describes the creation of a new computer by a team of engineers at Data General.

Kline, Raymond M. Digital Computer Design. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1977.
xii, 429pp. Prentice-Hall Computer Applications in Electrical Engineering series.

Kline, Raymond M. Structured Digital Design: Including MSI/LSI Components and Microprocessors. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1983.
Prentice-Hall Computer Applications in Electrical Engineering series.

Klitzner, Carol, and Herbert Klitzner. Help Your Child Succeed with a Computer. Choosing and Using the Right Computer for Your Child. New York: Simon and Schuster, [c.1984].

Knight, Timothy Orr. The World Connection. Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, [c.1983].

Know Your Net. United Kingdom: Digital Equipment Corporation, 1996.
Spiral bound. 68pp. Part number: ED-H010B-95 200.0. Written, designed, and produced by The Red Group, Banbury.

Kosniowski, Czes. Fun Mathematics on Your Microcomputer. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, 1983.
Reprinted: 1983 (195pp; comb bound). Contents (1983 reprint): [1.] Start Here, An Introduction; [2.] And So On ... Forever, About Sequences and Series; [3.] Up and Down, Round and Round, About Functions, Graphs, and Polar Coordinates; [4.] 5 Miles North, 4 Miles East, About Geometry; [5.] Stretching and Shrinking, About Matrices; [6.] Playing the Game, About Games of Strategy; [7.] Rearranging Things, About Groups; [8.] Wait, About the Theory of Queues or Lines; [9.] Pretty Pictures, About Functions of Two Variables; [10.] On the Move, About Differential Equations; [11.] Appendix - Converting Your Program, Notes to Help You Convert the Programs.

Krantzler, Mel, and Patricia Biondi Krantzler. Down and Out in Silicon Valley: The High Cost of the High-Tech Dream. Amherst, New York: Prometheus Books, 2002.

Kuo, J. David. Dot.Bomb: My Days and Nights at an Internet Goliath. Boston; London: Little, Brown, 2001.
The rise and fall of Value America.

[La Cie.] La Cie Hardware Installation Manual. [n.p.]: La Cie, [May 1998].
Hardware guide to a range of peripherals produced by La Cie. 141pp. In English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish. Code on rear cover: 'NTHARD5L 9805'.

Laing, Gordon. Digital Retro: The Evolution and Design of the Personal Computer. Lewes, East Sussex: Ilex, 2004.
192pp. Coffee table-style guide to 40 early micros.

Lally, Elaine. At Home with Computers. Oxford: Berg, 2002.

Lavington, Simon Hugh. Early British Computers: The Story of Vintage Computers and the People Who Built Them. Manchester: Manchester Univ. Press, 1980.

Lavington, Simon Hugh. A History of Manchester Computers. Manchester: NCC Publications, 1975.

Lavington, Simon Hugh. "Manchester Computer Architectures, 1948-1975." IEEE Annals of the History of Computing, Vol. 15, No. 3, 1993, pp.44-54.
Reprinted: [Essex]: Univ. of Essex, Department of Computer Science, 1993.

Lavington, Simon Hugh. The Pegasus Story: A History of a Vintage British Computer. London: Science Museum, 2000.

Levy, Steven. Crypto: How the Code Rebels Beat the Government, Saving Privacy in the Digital Age. New York: Viking, 2001.
viii, 356pp. Preface dated September 2000. UK edition (with the title Crypto: Secrecy and Privacy in the New Code War): London: Allen Lane, 2001 (viii, 356pp). Contents (UK edition): [1.] The Loner; [2.] The Standard; [3.] Public Key; [4.] Prime Time; [5.] Selling Crypto; [6.] Patents and Keys; [7.] Crypto Anarchy; [8.] The Clipper Chip; [9.] Slouching Toward Crypto; [10.] Epilogue: The Open Secret.

Levy, Steven. Hackers. Heroes of the Computer Revolution. Garden City, New York: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1984.
xv, 458pp. Inspirational study of the development of computing from the 1950s. US-centric. New York: Dell, 1994 (455pp). Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin, 1994. Reprinted (with an updated afterword): New York: Penguin, 2001 (xv, 455pp). Reprinted: 2002.

Levy, Steven. Insanely Great. The Life and Times of Macintosh. The Computer that Changed Everything. New York: Viking, 1994.
x, 292pp. Reprinted (with minor revisions and an afterword): Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1995 (vi, 312pp). New York: Penguin Books, 2000 (vi, 328pp).

Linux Answers. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [November 1999-].
Periodical. Issue 1: November 1999. Sold with a covermounted CD-ROM.

Linux Journal: The Monthly Magazine of the Linux Community. Seattle, Washington: Specialized Systems Consultants, [March 1994-].
Periodical. Monthly. Founded by Phil Hughes.

Linux Magazine. Macclesfield, Cheshire: Linux New Media, [October 2000-].
Periodical. Issue 1: October 2000. Launch editor: Julian Moss. Sold with a covermounted CD-ROM.

Linzmayer, Owen W. Apple Confidential. The Real Story of Apple Computer, Inc. San Francisco, California: No Starch Press, 1999.
268pp. 2nd edition (with the title Apple Confidential 2.0: The Definitive History of the World's Most Colorful Company): San Francisco, California: No Starch Press, 2004 (x, 323pp).

Linzmayer, Owen W. The Mac Bathroom Reader. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1994.
xii, 306pp. Historical trivia relating to Apple Computers.

Littman, Jonathan. The Fugitive Game: Online with Kevin Mitnick. The Inside Story of the Great Cyberchase. Boston, Massachusetts: Little, Brown, 1996.
x, 383pp. Preface dated 18 October 1995. Paperback edition: Boston, Massachusetts: Little, Brown, 1997 (x, 397pp).

Littman, Jonathan. The Watchman: The Twisted Life and Crimes of Serial Hacker Kevin Poulsen. Boston, Massachusetts: Little, Brown, 1997.
289pp. Contents: Dungeon Master; WarGames; Play a Game?; Network News; Good Fellas; Top Secret; Identity Crisis; Command Control; Corporate Headquarters; Watchman; The Anti-Hacker; The Storage Locker; The Bust; Blindfolded; The Meeting; The Wiretap Machine; Home Shopping; Risky Business; Controlled Detonation; Classified; Tap Dancing; Kevin's Court; Grand Jury; Happy Birthday; The Indictment; Blonds Have More Fun; The Giveaway; The Stakeout; The Chase; Unsolved Mysteries; Musical Chairs; The Office; Houdini; Epilogue; Author's Note.

Load Runner London: ECC Publications, [1983].
Periodical (comic). Fortnightly. Issue 10: 27 October-9 November 1983. An issue 13 is known.

Lundstrom, David E. A Few Good Men from Univac. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1987.
xii, 227pp. MIT Press series in the History of Computing. Reprinted: Bridgewater, New Jersey: Replica Books, 1997 (xii, 227pp).

Malmsten, Ernst, Erik Portanger, and Charles Drazin. Boo Hoo: A Dot.Com Story from Concept to Catastrophe. London: Random House Business, 2001.
ix, 386pp. The story of boo.com.

Malone, Michael Shawn. Infinite Loop. How the World's Most Insanely Great Computer Company Went Insane. New York: Doubleday, 1999.
viii, 597pp. UK edition: London: Aurum Press, 1999. Reprinted: 2000. A history of Apple Computers. Contents (New York edition): 1. Roots; 2. Seed; 3. Sprout; 4. Sapling; 5. Blossoms; 6. Bearing Fruit; 7. Early Harvest; 8. Blight; 9. Stump; 10. Green Shoots.

Malone, Michael Shawn. The Microprocessor: A Biography. Santa Clara, California: TELOS, 1995.
xiv, 333pp. Preface dated June 1995. Contents: 1. A Calculating Risk: Inventing the First Microprocessors; 2. A Revolution in Miniature: The Importance of the Microprocessor; 3. Fire, Water, Earth and Air: Fabricating the Microprocessor; 4. The Cities of the Planar: How the Microprocessor Works; 5. History I: Beginnings: The First Decade; 6. History II: The PC Era: The Second Decade; 7. History III: Break-Out: The Third Decade; 8. The Future: Dreams of Light: The Microprocessor in the 21st Century.

Management Computing. Sutton, Surrey: Reed Business Publishing, {Vol. 13, No. 10) October 1990-February 1991 (Vol. 14, No. 2).
Periodical. Monthly. Continuation of Practical Computing.

Markoff, John. What the Dormouse Said. How the Sixties Counterculture Shaped the Personal Computer Industry. New York: Viking, 2005.
xxiii, 310pp. Contents: 1. The Prophet and the True Believers; 2. Augmentation; 3. Red-Diaper Baby; 4. Free U; 5. Dealing Lightning; 6. Scholars and Barbarians; 7. Momentum; 8. Borrowing Fire from the Gods.

Marshall, Garry J. Computer Languages and Their Uses. London: Granada, 1983.

Marshall, Garry J. Microcomputer Puzzles. London: Collins, 1985.

Marshall, Garry J. Programming with Graphics. London: Granada, 1983.

Maté, George. Engineering Micro Application. E.M.A. Progress Files. An Overview of Industrial Engineering Application Software and References on CP/M and PC DOS Microcomputers. Sunbury: E.I.T. Services, 1984.
Spiral bound.

Maxfield, Clive Richard. Bebop to the Boolean Boogie: An Unconventional Guide to Electronics Fundamentals, Components, and Processes. Eagle Rock, Virginia: LLH Technology Publishing, 1995.
xxxi, 471pp. Contents: 1. Analog Versus Digital; 2. Atoms, Molecules, and Crystals; 3. Conductors and Insulators; Voltage, Current, Resistance, Capacitance, and Inductance; 4. Semiconductors: Diodes and Transistors; 5. Primitive Logic Functions; 6. Using Transistors to Build Primitive Logic Functions; 7. Alternative Numbering Systems; 8. Binary Arithmetic; 9. Boolean Algebra; 10. Karnaugh Maps; 11. Using Primitive Logic Functions to Build More Complex Functions; 12. State Diagrams, State Tables, and State Machines; 13. Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog; 14. Integrated Circuits (ICs); 15. Memory ICs; 16. Programmable ICs; 17. Application-Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs); 18. Circuit Boards (PWBs and DWBs); 19. Hybrids; 20. Multichip Modules (MCMs); 21. Alternative and Future Technologies; Appendix A: Assertion-Level Logic; Appendix B: Positive Logic Versus Negtive Logic; Appendix C: Reed-Müller Logic; Appendix D: Gray Codes; Appendix E: A Reed-Müller Extraction Utility; Appendix F: Linear Feedback Shift Registers (LFSRs); Appendix G: Pass-Transistor Logic; Appendix H: No-Holds-Barred Seafood Gumbo.

Maximum. [n.p.]: [n.p.], [1995].
Periodical. Video game magazine covering Sega Saturn, Sony PlayStation, PC, Neo Geo CD, Arcade, and 3DO. No publisher information noted in issue 1. Issue 2 promised in 'mid-November'. Issue 1 includes an advert for the first issue of EMAP's PlayStation Plus which was due out on 22 September 1995. Only issue 1 seen.

Maxtor. DiamondMax Hard Drive Installation Sheet. [n.p.]: Maxtor Corporation, 1999.
Folded sheet. Part No. 1417/A. Contents: 1. Before You Begin; 2. General Requirements; 3. Hard Drive Identification; 4. Mounting Drive in System; 5. Attaching IDE Interface and Power Cables; 6. Attaching System Cables; 7. System Setup; 8. Hard Drive Preparation; 9. System Hangs During Boot.

McCabe, Dwight, ed. PCC's Reference Book of Personal and Home Computing. Menlo Park, California: People's Computer Company, July 1977.
248pp. Contents: [1.] An Elementary Introduction to Home Computers for the Complete and Absolute Novice. Excerpted from the Byte Shopper; [2.] A Simple Glossary: Or How to Translate Computer Talk into Near-English. Excerpted from the Byte Shopper; [3.] An Overview: Personal and Hobby Computing. By Jim Warren; [4.] Computer Languages and Personal Computers. By Jef Raskin; [5.] Why I Hate my Computer when it Speaks in BASIC. By James W. Garson; [6.] Free Software? Or, Support Your Local Software Vendor. By Tom Pittman; [7.] Palo Alto Tiny BASIC. Version Three. By Li-Chen Wang; [8.] How to Buy a Personal Computer and get the Right Thing or: You're Really Buying Software. By Jef Raskin; [9.] The Future of Personal Computers. By Theodor H. Nelson; [10.] The Household Pet Robot. By Robert Rossum; [11.] A General Bibliography; [12.] A Computer Music Bibliography; [13.] Professional Societies; [14.] Clubs and Newsletters; [15.] Magazines; [16.] An Index of Articles in the Major Hobbyist Magazines; [17.] Stores; [18.] Companies; [19.] Index of Advertisers; [20.] Advertisements.

McLeod, Rosetta. Learning with Adventure Programs. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1984].

[Melbourne House.] Melbourne House Books and Software Catalogue. Richmond: Melbourne House, [198-].
24pp.

Micro Adventurer. London: Sunshine Books, November 1983-February 1985.
Periodical. Monthly. Adventure games.

Micro Computer Mart. Later: Micro Mart. Birmingham: Trinity Publications, 1985-2006; London: Dennis Publishing, 2006-.
Periodical. Originally fortnightly, weekly from 1991. Issue 364 (16 November 1995) was a 10th anniversary special issue.

[Micro Computer Mart.] Micro Computer Mart 500 Supplement. Birmingham: Trinity Publications, 1997.
Free with issue 500. 64pp.

Microcomputer Printout. London: Printout Publications, [1981-1984].

Periodical. Monthly. Previously called Printout.

Mims, Forrest M., III. Understanding Digital Computers: A Self-Learning Programmed Text that will Teach you the Basics for the Microcomputer Revolution. Texas: Radio Shack, 1978.
62-2027. 160pp. 4th printing: 1980 (160pp; spiral bound). 2nd edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1987 (317pp). Contents (4th printing, 1980): 1. What's a Computer?; 2. Number Systems; 3. Binary Logic; 4. Combinational Logic; 5. Sequential Logic; 6. Arithmetic Logic; 7. Memories; 8. Computer Organization; 9. Computer Peripherals; 10. Computer Programming; A Quick Reference Glossary of Computer Buzzwords.

Moody, Glyn. Rebel Code: Inside Linux and the Open Source Revolution. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Perseus Publishing, January 2001.
viii, 334pp. London; New York: Allen Lane, 2001 (viii, 334pp). New York: Basic Books, 2002 (x, 342pp). London: Penguin, 2002 (viii, 343pp). Contents (Perseus Publishing edition): 1. The Coolest Year; 2. The New GNU Thing; 3. A Minor Rebellion; 4. Factor X; 5. Patching Up; 6. Root then Boot; 7. Linus 2.0; 8. Learning from Berkeley; 9. The Art of Code; 10. Low-Down in the Valley; 11. Free the Lizard; 12. A Foothold; 13. Alliances and IPOs; 14. Open for Business; 15. Trolls Versus Gnomes; 16. Lies, Damned Lies, and Benchmarks; 17. Tomorrow's Hothouse; 18. Beyond the Market.

Morgan, Christopher P., ed. The Byte Book of Computer Music. Peterborough, New Hampshire: Byte Books, 1979.

Murray, Charles J. The Supermen: The Story of Seymour Cray and the Technical Wizards behind the Supercomputer. New York: John Wiley, 1997.
vii, 232pp. Contents: Prologue: At the Crossroads; 1. The Codebreakers; 2. The Incubator; 3. Seymour; 4. Engineers' Paradise; 5. The Hog Trough; 6. The CRAY-1; 7. The Cray Way; 8. The New Genius; 9. Shakeout.

Murray, Janet Horowitz. Hamlet on the Holodeck: The Future of Narrative in Cyberspace. New York: Free Press, 1997.
xii, 324pp. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1998 (xii, 324pp). Reprinted: 1999. Contents (1997 edition): Introduction: A Book Lover Longs for Cyberdrama; [Part I. A New Medium for Storytelling:] 1. Lord Burleigh's Kiss; 2. Harbingers of the Holodeck; 3. From Additive to Expressive Form; [Part II. The Aesthetics of the Medium:] 4. Immersion; 5. Agency; 6. Transformation; [Part III. Procedural Authorship:] 7. The Cyberbard and the Multiform Plot; 8. Eliza's Daughters; 9. Digital TV and the Emerging Formats of Cyberdrama; 10. Hamlet on the Holodeck?

Naylor, Chris. Programs that Write Programs. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1983.
vi, 220pp.

Nelson, Andrew. Creating Adventure Programs on Your Computer. London: Interface, 1983.
xii, 236pp. Foreword by Tim Hartnell.

.net. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [December 1994-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1 (December 1994; editor: Matt Bielby) published on 26 October 1994. An Issue Zero 32pp 'taster' (cover-dated November 1994) was given away free with copies of PC Format and MacFormat.

[.net] The .net Directory. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. April 1995. 48pp.

[.net] Longhurst, Richard. The Bible: The Plain English Guide to Getting on the Net. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. October 1995. Free with issue 11.

[.net] The 100 Best Web Sites. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. December 1995. 32pp. Free with issue 13. Produced in association with Bogomip.

[.net] How to Make Light of HTML: The Plain English Guide to Creating Your Own Web Site. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. January 1996. 100pp. Free with issue 14.

[.net] The .net Guide to CompuServe. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1995].
Magazine format. Includes an advertisement for Issue 15 of .net, which is stated to have been on sale from 4 January 1996.

[.net] The Internet Dictionary. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement. May 1996. 100pp.

[.net] The Beginner's Guide to the Internet. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement. 1996. 32pp. Free with .net. Produced in association with Yell.

[.net] The Best of the Web 1997. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1997.
Supplement. 1997. 32pp. Free with .net. Produced in association with Yell and The Computer Channel.

[.net] Make the Most of the Internet: Essential Tips for Getting More from Your Time On-Line! Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1997.
Supplement. December 1997. 100pp. Free with issue 39.

[.net] The .net Essential Guide to On-Line Gaming. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1999.
Supplement. January 1999. 32pp. Free with issue 53.

[.net] The .net Essential Guide to On-Line Shopping. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1999.
Supplement. Spring 1999. 32pp. Free with issue 57.

[.net] .net and peoplesound.com Present the Ultimate Guide to the Music of the Future... MP3. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1999.
Supplement. January 2000. 32pp. Free with issue 66.

The .net Directory. Bath, Avon: Future, [August 1995-].
Periodical. 1: August 1995; 2: October/November 1995; 3: January 1996; 4- (undated). Issue 10 known. Half the width of a typical magazine. Re-titled and published in a normal magazine format as Connect (Issue 1: July 1997).

[The .net Directory.] .net Directory CD. Bath, Avon: Future, [January 1996].
Denominated as a 'Special Edition' of the magazine on CD-ROM accompanied by a half-width 8pp guide.

NetGamer. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, [1997-].
Periodical. Eventually monthly. Issue dates given as 2: 17 July 1997; 3: 4 September 1997; 4: 10 October 1997; 5: 13 November 1997; 6: 18 December 1997. Sold initially with a covermounted CD-ROM. Issues seen: 1-5, all edited by Geoff Spick.

NetUser. Bournemouth, Paragon Publishing: [1995-1997-].
Periodical. Launch issue: Spring 1995; Issue 2: June/July 1995; Issue 3: September 1995, then mainly monthly. Issue 15: September/October 1996. Issues seen to 22: April 1997. Editors: 1: Nick Merritt; 2-3: Sean Clarke; 4-8: Gary Fenton; 9-15: Chris Marke; 16-22: Ian Lynch.

Object Expert. Newdigate, Surrey: SIGS, [November/December 1995-].
Periodical. Issue 1: November/December 1995 (editor: John Daniels).

O'Hara, Rob. Commodork: Sordid Tales from a BBS Junkie. [Morrisville, North Carolina]: Lulu.com, 2006.
168pp.

Oric User Monthly with Alternative Micros. [n.p.]: Robert Cook; Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire: Dave Dick, September 1987-September 1999 (No. 145).
Periodical. Monthly. Edited by Robert Cook (Nos. 1-34); by Dave Dick (Nos. 35-145). An index was maintained monthly, and printed to order.

Osborne, Adam, and John Dvorak. Hypergrowth: The Rise and Fall of Osborne Computer Corporation. Berkeley, California: Idthekkethan Publishing Co., 1984.

[Packet SwitchStream] Gladman, Peter, ed. Packet SwitchStream: A Basic Guide and Directory. London: Packet SwitchStream, [August 1983].
'Produced by Yellow Pages' (presumably for British Telecom National Networks). Rear cover gives: 'PH:3395(8/83)'. 52pp with a pouch at the rear containing forms to submit to access the service and to subscribe to publications, a table of charges (2pp), and details of 'The Packet NETMUX' (2pp).

[Packet SwitchStream] Lane, John E. The Packet SwitchStream Service: A User's Guide. Manchester: NCC Publications, 1985.
Another edition published in 1987.

[Packet SwitchStream] Packet SwitchStream: First Steps in Packet Switching. London: Packet SwitchStream, [May 1983].
Available from PSS Customer Service Group. Rear cover gives: 'PH 2828(5.83)' and 'British Telecom National Networks'. 52pp excluding the covers.

[Packet SwitchStream] Packet SwitchStream Technical Guide. London: Packet SwitchStream National Sales Office, [1983-].
British Telecom Technical Guide 17. Loose-leaf. Sometimes listed as a periodical. Updated as required.

Parents & Computers. Macclesfield: IDG Media, [Autumn 1995-1997-].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issue 1: Autumn 1995 (editor: Pam Turnbull). A Summer 1997 issue was produced with a next issue due on 20 October 1997. This was the November 1997 issue, and the first monthly edition, the magazine being revamped under a new editor, Tony Jackson. Latest issue seen: December 1997.

PC Attack. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [May 1995-].
Periodical. Monthly. With a CD-ROM cover disk. Issue 1: May 1995 (editor: Jon Smith). Issues seen: 1-4, 6(October 1995, editor: Garrick Webster).

PC Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, [-1998-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1995.
Supplement. Free with the September 1995 issue of PC Direct. 88pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1996.
Supplement. Free with the August 1996 issue of PC Direct. 78pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Supplement. Free with the February 1997 issue of PC Direct. 134pp.

[PC Direct] The Ultimate Buyer's Guide. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Supplement. Free with the March 1997 issue of PC Direct. 100pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Supplement. Free with the August 1997 issue of PC Direct. 102pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Supplement. Free with the February 1998 issue of PC Direct. 94pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Supplement. Free with the August 1998 issue of PC Direct. 68pp.

PC Football. London: IDG Media, [1996].
Periodical format, perhaps only one issue published. IDG Collector's Series, 1. Supplied with a free Euro '96 wallchart.

PC Format. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1991-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue seen: 46 (July 1995). Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period).

[PC Format] Best of British: The Movers and Shakers of the UK Games Scene. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1995].
Supplement. 32pp. Edited by Mark Ramshaw. Undated, but most likely free with issue 46 (July 1995). Articles on: Bullfrog (Peter Molyneux); Rowan Software (Rod Hyde); DMA Design (David Jones); The Bitmap Brothers (Eric Matthews); Geoff Crammond; Argonaut (Jez San); Sensible Software (Jon Hare); Probe Entertainment (Fergus McGovern); Tony Crowther (co-founder of Gremlin); Revolution (Charles Cecil); Mythos Games (Julian Gollop); Dimension Creative Design (Kev Bulmer); Software Refinery (Ian Martin); David Braben (co-author of Elite).

PC Gaming World. London: Ziff-Davis, [1997-].
Periodical. Previously Computer Gaming World (Issues 1-6). First issue with this title, issue 7 (August 1997).

PC Guide. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [July 1995-1996].
Periodical. Monthly. A 16pp Issue 0 'taster' (June 1995) was issued as a supplement and given away for free with another magazine. Issue 1 (July) was published on 8 June 1995 (editor: Mark Higham). Latest issue seen: 8 (February 1996).

[PC Guide] Choosing a PC. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. Free with issue 3 of PC Guide (September 1995). 100pp. By William Poel.

[PC Guide] Get the Most out of Your Home PC. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement. Free with the January 1996 issue of PC Guide. 100pp. Extracts from the new PC Guide book by Mark Higham and Paul Pettengale.

PC Home. Macclesfield, Cheshire: IDG Media, [1992-].
Periodical. Monthly. Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period). Issue 33 (May/June 1995) was a single issue to accomodate preparations for a relaunch.

PC Magazine. London: Ziff-Davis, [1992-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Mobile Computing. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the March 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Windows NT 4.0. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the April 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Building Your Own Network. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the July 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Servers. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the August 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Display Technologies. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the September 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to IT Desktop Management. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the October 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Upgrading Your PC. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the December 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Clustering. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Free with the January 1998 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine.] Gadgets: The Ultimate Guide. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Free with the March 1998 issue. 68pp.

[PC Magazine.] Getting the Best out of Office 97. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Free with the May 1998 issue. 68pp.

PC Plus. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [199-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[PC Plus] Keeping Your PC Virus-Free. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Free with issue 106 (August 1995).

[PC Plus] Getting Started with Visual Basic 4. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with the January 1996 issue. 100pp.

[PC Plus] All You Need to Know About Buying a PC. New 1996 Edition. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 113 (March 1996). 100pp. By William Poel.

[PC Plus] The Best of... Multimedia. How to Upgrade, Plus All the Best CD-ROM Software. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 114 (April 1996). 100pp. By Peter Comeau, Jon Smith, Matthew Richards, Rachel Harrison, and Dave Pearman.

[PC Plus] Getting Started with Micrografx Windows Draw! Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 121. 100pp.

[PC Plus] The Networking Guide for Today's Growing Business. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1997.
Free with issue 131. 28pp.

PC Power. Bournemouth, Dorset: Paragon Publishing, [January 1994-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: January 1994. Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period). Issue seen: 20 (August 1995).

[PC Power.] PC Power Platinum. Bournemouth, Dorset: Paragon Publishing, [1995-].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issue 2 advertised as going on sale in November 1995 (possibly 'Platinum Sports Vol. 2'); Issue 3: 1996; Issue 4 advertised as going on sale in May 1996.

[PC Power] Get Yourself Connected: The Complete Guide to the Internet! Bournemouth, Dorset: Paragon Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. Free an issue of PC Power. 68pp. By Darren Irvine and John Kennedy.

PC Powerplay. Macclesfield, Cheshire: IDG Media, [Issue 13: May 1996-].
Periodical. A slim magazine-style guide accompanying a CD-ROM. Originally called CD Powerplay, the name changed at issue 13. Latest issue seen: 14 (June 1996; 20pp).

PC Pro. London: Dennis Publishing, [1994-].
Periodical. Monthly.

PC Review. London: EMAP Images, [1991-1995-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue seen: 45: July 1995.

PC Sports. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1995-].
Periodical. Issue 1: Summer 1995; 2: Winter 1995. Issues seen: 1-2 (editor: Chris Buxton). With a free CD-ROM.

Penfold, J. W. How to Get Your Computer Programs Running. London: Babani, 1985.

Penfold, R. A. An Introduction to Computer Communications. London: Babani, 1986.

Penfold, R. A. An Introduction to Computer Peripherals. BP170. London: Babani, 1985.

Penfold, R. A. Micro Interfacing Circuits Book 1. BP130. London: Babani, [1984].

Penfold, R. A. Micro Interfacing Circuits Book 2. BP131. 1984; rep. London: Babani, 1990.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. Computer Hobbyist's Handbook. BP251. London: Babani, May 1989.
Reprinted April 1990; Reprinted May 1992 (120pp). Contents (1992): 1. The Popular Microprocessors; 2. Interfaces; 3. Languages; 4. Numbering Systems; 5. Operating Systems; 6. Computer Graphics; 7. Lexicon; 8. MIDI Technicalities; Appendix A. ASCII Table; Appendix B. Epson Standard Printer Controls; Appendix C. Abbreviations; Appendix D. Support Chips; Appendix E. Decimal - Binary - Hex; Appendix F. The Standard Symbols for Use in Flow-Charts.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Desktop Publishing. London: Babani, 1991.

Personal Computer Games. London: VNU, Summer 1983-February 1985.
Periodical. Quarterly, bi-monthly, then monthly.

Personal Computer News. London: VNU, 11-18 March 1983-1985.
Periodical. Weekly.

Personal Computer World. London: Intra Press, 1978-1986; VNU Business Publications, [1986-].
Periodical. Originally intended to be bi-monthly (in Vol. 1, No. 1) but stated to be monthly from Vol. 1, No. 2. Vol. 1, No. 3 was the first issue with a cover date (July 1978, on sale from 15 June). Launch publisher: A. Zgorelec. Launch editor: Meyer N. Solomon. Launch issue cover stated: 'Europe's first magazine for personal computers for home and business use', and was first placed on sale at the Microsystems '78 exhibition, West Centre Hotel. The May 1998 issue (Vol. 21, No. 5) had a 64pp supplement celebrating 20 years of publication.

[Personal Computer World] Guide to Getting Online. London: VNU Business Publications, 1996.
Supplement in association with CompuServe. January 1996. 16pp.

Personal Computing Today. London: Argus Specialist Publications, [August 1982-].
Periodical. Monthly. First issue: August 1982.

Pimentel, Ken, and Kevin Teixeira. Virtual Reality: Through the New Looking Glass. New York: Intel/Windcrest/McGraw-Hill, 1993.
xvii, 301pp. Foreword by Gordon E. Moore, Chairman, Intel Corporation. 2nd edition: New York: Intel/McGraw-Hill, 1995 (xxvi, 438pp). Contents (1st edition): [Part 1. Stepping Through the New Looking Glass:] 1. The Disappearing Computer; 2. The Evolution of Cyberspace; 3. Pioneers in Cyberspace; 4. Cyberspace for Sale; [Part 2. 21st Century Tools:] 5. Reality Engines; 6. Virtual-World Building Blocks; 7. Desktop VR; 8. Gloves, Goggles, & Wands; [Part 3. Brave New Worlds:] 9. Designing Virtual Worlds; 10. Business Enters the Cyberage; 11. Medical Applications; 12. Entertainment; 13. Art in VR; 14. The Next Generation; [Appendices:] A. Product Resource Guide; B. Company and Institution Guide; C. Sample Source Code.

Platinum Sports. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, [1995].
Periodical. Possibly in the PC Power Platinum series. Internally states that the sequel would be published 'next year'. The CD-ROM cover disc instructions note that 'sport is the name of the game this month'. Issues seen: 'Volume 2' (editor: Damian Butt, 100pp).

Popular Computing Weekly. London: Sunshine Publications, 28 October 1982-1990 (No. 415, 14-20 June).
Periodical. Weekly. Initially with volumes/part numbers, these vanish with only dates given, and then numerical issue numbers are used (1989-1990). Issues from I, 1 to I, 28 have colour covers. Launch editor: Duncan Scot. 1985 index in Vol. 5, No. 10, 6-12 March 1986, pp.23-26.

Popular Electronics. New York: Ziff-Davis, October 1954-December 1971.
American periodical. Monthly. Vols. 1-35.

Popular Electronics. New York: Ziff-Davis, January 1972-October 1982 (Vol. 20, No. 10).
American periodical. Monthly. Vol. 1, No. 1 to Vol. 20, No. 10. Vol. 20, No. 11 (November 1982) was published with the new title of Computers & Electronics.

Poulton, Adrian S. Microcomputer Speech Synthesis and Recognition. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Technical Press, [1983].
vii, 194pp.

Practical Computing. Sutton, Surrey: IPC; Sutton, Surrey: Reed Business Publishing, 1978-September 1990 (Vol. 13, No. 9).
Periodical. Monthly. Continued by Management Computing.

Practical Internet. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, 1997.
Periodical. Issue 1 editor: Geoff Harris. Issue 2 advertised to be on sale on 8 May 1997.

Practical Web Pages: The Easy Way to Build a Web Site. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [July 2000-].
Periocal. Issue 1: July 2000, with a cover-mounted CD-ROM. Title changed to Practical Web Design: Helping You Build Better Web Sites.

Princeton Graphic Systems. LM-301 Monitor. Operations Manual. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton Graphic Systems, [n.d.].
Folded card. 15" monochrome monitor.

Printout. Newbury, Berkshire: Printout Publications, [1979-1980].

Periodical. Monthly. Continued as Microcomputer Printout.

Pritchard, Alan. A Guide to Computer Literature: An Introductory Survey of the Sources of Information. London: Clive Bingley, 1969.
130pp. 2nd edition: London: Clive Bingley, 1972 (194pp). 2nd edition published simultaneously in the US by Linnet Books, an imprint of Shoe String Press, Inc., Hamden, Connecticut. Contents (2nd edition): 1. Computer Literature; 2. The Cost of Information in Computing; 3. Periodicals in Information Transfer; 4. Academic Periodicals; 5. Commercial Periodicals; 6. News and Special Periodicals; 7. Research Reports and Government Publications; 8. Trade Literature; 9. Theses; 10. Patents; 11. Conferences; 12. Translations; 13. Abstracts and Indexes in Information Transfer; 14. Computer Abstracts and Indexes; 15. Books and Handbooks; 16. Annual Reviews; 17. Bibliographies; 18. Glossaries and Dictionaries; 19. Standards; 20. Directories and Company Data; 21. Hardware Information Sources; 22. Software Information Sources; 23. Installations and Industry Statistics; 24. Biographical Data; 25. Libraries and Organisations; 26. Library and Union Catalogues; Appendix: List of Serials Containing Approximately 50 per Cent of References in 1966.

Public Domain and Shareware Library. Software Reference Guide. Crowborough, Sussex: PDSL, [19--].
Periodical. Updates to the Shareware Encyclopaedia 'Major Issues'. Each 'Update Issue' appears to consist of four supplements. Update Issue 22 Supplement 1 notes 'Our 14th Year'.

Pugh, Emerson William. Memories that Shaped an Industry: Decisions Leading to IBM System 360. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT, 1984.
MIT Press series in the History of Computing.

Quittner, Joshua, and Michelle Slatalla. Masters of Deception. The Gang that Ruled Cyberspace. New York: HarperCollins, 1994.
225pp. UK edition: London: Vintage, 1995 (225pp). New York: HarperPerennial, 1996 (225pp).

Quittner, Joshua, and Michelle Slatalla. Speeding the Net. The Inside Story of Netscape and How it Changed the World. New York: Atlantic Monthly Press, 1998.
323pp. UK edition: London: Orion Business, 1998 (323pp). Contents (1st edition): Prologue; 1. Birth of a Browser; 2. Start-Up; 3. Barksdale Builds a Business; 4. The Giant Strikes Back.

Ranade, Jay, and Alan Nash, eds. The Best of Byte. Two Decades on the Leading Edge. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1994.

Rank Radio International Ltd. The Service Engineers Guide to Teletext. Ware, Hertfordshire: Rank Radio International, 1978.
Includes circuit diagrams.

Raymond, Eric S. The Cathedral and the Bazaar. Musings on Linux and Open Source by an Accidental Revolutionary. Cambridge, Massachusetts: O'Reilly, 1999.
Revised edition: Cambridge, Massachusetts: O'Reilly, 2001.

Retro Gamer. Macclesfield: Live Publishing, [2004-2005]; Bournemouth, Dorset: Imagine Publishing, [2005-].
Periodical. Monthly. The original magazine collapsed. The title was then revived. Issues 1-12 (vol. 1, 1-12); Issues 13-18 (vol. 2, 1-6); Issues from 19 (vol. 2, 7) entitled 'Load' 19, etc. Cover CDs: Vol. 2, Issue 1: 'Amiga Forever'; Vol. 2, Issue 2: 'The Ur-Quan Masters'; Vol. 2, Issue 3: '105 Essential Emulators'; Vol. 2, Issue 4 (not stated on casing): 'The Elder Scrolls: Arena'; Vol. 2, Issue 5: 'The Ultimate 2D Shoot-Em-Up Collection'; Vol. 2, Issue 6: 'The Last Ninja Trilogy'. The first 30 issues were released on a DVD in 2007.

Retro Gamer Anthology. Macclesfield: Live Publishing, [December] 2004.
164pp. New content with revised and expanded articles from previous issues.

Rickitt Educational Media. Educational Software Yearbook 1996. Langport Somerset: REM, 1995.
132pp commercial catalogue of Acorn, Mac, and PC software.

Rogers, Everett Mitchell, and Judith K. Larsen. Silicon Valley Fever. Growth of High-Technology Culture. New York: Basic Books, 1984.
x, 302pp. UK edition: London: George Allen and Unwin, 1985 (x, 302pp). Chinese edition (with the title Kuei Gu Re): [Beijing]: Zhongguo you yi chu ban gong si, 1986 (364pp). Contents (UK 1985 edition): [Part I. Beginnings:] 1. The Apple Story; 2. The Rise of Silicon Valley; [Part II. The Culture of High Technology:] 3. Catching the Silicon Valley Fever; 4. Venture Capital; 5. Networks; 6. Winning at the Game: Intel; 7. Losing: Companies That Don't Make It; 8. Working; 9. Lifestyles; 10. Goodies; 11. Problems in Paradise; [Part III. The Tomorrow of Silicon Valley:] 12. Growing Competition: The Japanese; 13. The Spread of 'Silicon Valleys'; 14. The Impact of Silicon Valley.

Rose, Mike. Creating Political and Military Simulation Games on Your Micro. London: Interface, 1985.
viii, 187pp.

Samish, Francis. Choosing a Microcomputer. London: Granada, 1983.
viii, 140pp.

Samish, Francis. Choosing a Word Processor. London: Granada, 1984.
vii, 182pp.

Samsung. Samsung SyncMaster 3Ne Color Display Unit. User's Manual. [n.p.]: [Samsung], [199-].

Multi-paged in English, French, Spanish, and German. For models CQB4147 and CQB4147L of the 14" colour monitor (maximum resolution: 1024 x 768). Printed in the UK. Code: BH68-60087A. Contents: [1.] Introduction; [2.] FCC, IC and Safety Information; [3.] Operating Guide; [4.] Specifications; Appendix.

Sattler, Michael. Internet TV with CU-SeeMe. Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams.net, 1995.
xiii, 300pp. Contents: 1. Introduction to Internet Videoconferencing and CU-SeeMe; 2. Typical CU-SeeMe Usage; 3. The Internet; 4. Hardware; 5. Software; 6. CU-SeeMe User's Guide; 7. Reflector Operator's Guide; 8. History, Culture, and Usage; 9. Other Videoconferencing Technologies; 10. What the Future Holds in Store; [Appendices:] A. Troubleshooting Q&A; B. Reflectors Around the World; C. Glossary; D. Bibliography.

Scambray, Joel, Stuart McClure, and George Kurtz. Hacking Exposed: Network Security Secrets & Solutions. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [1999].
484pp. 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 2001 (xxix, 703pp); 3rd edition: Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 2001 (xxviii, 729pp); 4th edition: Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [2003] (xxiv, 737pp); 5th edition: Emeryville, California: McGraw-Hill/Osborne, 2005 (xxiii, 692pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Footprinting; 2. Scanning; 3. Enumeration; 4. Hacking Windows 95/98 and ME; 5. Hacking Windows NT; 6. Hacking Windows 2000; 7. Novell NetWare Hacking; 8. Hacking UNIX; 9. Dial-Up, PBX, Voicemail, and VPN Hacking; 10. Network Devices; 11. Firewalls; 12. Denial of Service (DoS) Attacks; 13. Remote Control Insecurities; 14. Advanced Techniques; 15. Web Hacking; 16. Hacking the Internet User; Appendix A: Ports; Appendix B: Top 14 Security Vulnerabilities; Appendix C: About the Companion Website.

Schatt, Stanley. Linking LANs: A Micro Manager's Guide. Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: Windcrest/McGraw-Hill, 1991.
xviii, 298pp. 3rd printing: 1991. 2nd edition: New York: McGraw Hill, 1995 (xiii, 287pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. LAN Hardware Basics; 2. LAN Software Basics; 3. Unlocking Network Protocol Mysteries; 4. Ethernet and the Token Bus; 5. Token Ring Network and FDDI; 6. The Nonstandard Apple Networks and Arcnet Standards; 7. Local Bridges; 8. Local Routers and Brouters; 9. Wide Area Networks; 10. ISDN; 11. Gateways to the Mainframe World; 12. Major Systems Integration Issues; Appendix: Seminars on LANs, Internetworking, and Enterprise Networks.

Seyer, Martin D. RS-232 Made Easy: Connecting Computers, Printers, Terminals, and Modems. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall Inc., 1984.
xiii, 214pp. 2nd edition: Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991 (xii, 436pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. Introduction to RS-232; 2. Communication Jargon; 3. Asynchronous Modems and RS-232-C; 4. RS-232-C Operation in a Private-Line Environment; 5. Synchronous Environments; 6. Secondary Signals and Flow Control; 7. Cross Connections; 8. Interfacing Equipment; 9. Answers to Review Questions; Appendix A. EIA Standard RS-232-C; Appendix B. EIA Standard RS-449; Appendix C. Industrial Electronics Bulletin No. 12; Appendix D. RS-232 Circuit Summary with CCITT Equivalents; Appendix E. Tools of the Trade; Appendix F. RS-232 Pin Assignments for Computers and Peripherals; Appendix G. Interfacing Problems and Remedies.

The Silicon Valley Phenomenon. Documentary film produced by PC Magazine in association with NetEvents. Interviews and narration by Manek Dubash, Editor-in-Chief, PC Magazine. Directed and produced by Mark A. Fox. Duration 1hr 18mins. Released on the covermounted DVD-ROM accompanying the November 2000 issue of PC Magazine.

Simmons, John Richardson Mainwaring. Leo and the Managers. London: Macdonald, 1962.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Desktop Publishing on a Shoestring. Oxford: BSP Professional Books, 1988.
v, 138pp. Preface dated September 1988. Contents: 1. What is Desktop Publishing?; 2. Getting Started; 3. More Text Techniques; 4. Starting with Graphics; 5. Advanced Techniques; 6. Final Words; Appendix A. Fleet Street Editor and Machines; Appendix B. Some Useful Addresses; Appendix C. Laser Printers and Page-Description Languages.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Microcomputers and Programming. Gravesend: Dickson Price, 1983.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Microprocessors. London: Keith Dickson, 1981.

Sklyarov, Dmitry. Hidden Keys to Software Break-Ins and Unauthorized Entry. Wayne, Pennsylvania: A-List Publishing, 2004.

Smith, Douglas K., and Robert C. Alexander. Fumbling the Future. How Xerox Invented, then Ignored the First Personal Computer. New York: William Morrow, 1988.
274pp. Paperback edition: New York: toExcel, 1999 (274pp). Contents (1999 edition): [1.] The Commercial; [2.] Marketing: The Architecture of Information; [3.] Research: The Creation of the Alto; [4.] Finance: The Rejection of the Alto; [5.] Marketing: The Reaffirmation of the Copier; [6.] Research: The Harvest of Isolation; Epilogue.

Smith, Raoul, ed. The Facts on File Dictionary of Artifical Intelligence. New York; Oxford: Facts on File Publications, 1989.
211pp. Later published in paperback as: Collins Dictionary of Artificial Intelligence., London; Glasgow: Collins, 1990.

Smith, Raoul, ed. Collins Dictionary of Artificial Intelligence. London; Glasgow: Collins, 1990.

374pp. First published in hardback as: The Facts on File Dictionary of Artifical Intelligence, New York; Oxford: Facts on File Publications, 1989.

The Software Directory. Cartmel, Cumbria: CTD Ltd., [1996-].
Periodical. National Launch Issue: May/June 1996. A Pilot Issue had been published prior to this.

Softwords: The Journal of the Microcomputer Software Club. Oxford: Microcomputer Software Club, [c.1982].
Periodical. Known: Issues 1-2. Issue 2 has 32pp. Free membership, the newsletter containing reviews of software that was available to members at a discount. Operated by Yewacre Ltd.

Sports Fan. London: EMAP Images, [c.1997-1998].
Periodical. 'No. 1' only seen, undated, but a competition closing date of 30 January 1998. 24pp. Written by Shaun White. Possibly given away free with a computer magazine. Reviews of sports games for computers and consoles.

The Source. America's Information Utility. McLean, Virginia: Source Telecomputing Corporation, 1983.
8pp publicity leaflet for the electronic information service. Code on front cover: 0004-4. The same code appears on a 'rates and fees' sheet correct as of 1 October 1983. Source Telecomputing Corp. was a subsidiary of The Reader's Digest Association. The service was offered in participation with Control Data Corporation.

Stallman, Richard M. Free Software, Free Society. Selected Essays of Richard M. Stallman. Boston, Massachusetts: GNU Press, 2002.
220pp. Introduction by Lawrence Lessig. Edited by Joshua Gay.

Stallman, Richard M. No Sir, No Monopoly! Free Software, A Perspective. Hyderabad, India: Prajasakti Book House, 2002.
86pp.

Standage, Tom. The Victorian Internet: The Remarkable Story of the Telegraph and the Nineteenth Century's On-Line Pioneers. New York: Walker and Co., 1998.
ix, 227pp. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1998 (216pp). London: Phoenix, 1998 (216pp). London: Phoenix, 1999 (216pp). New York: Berkley Books, 1999 (ix, 227pp). Contents (New York, 1998 edition): 1. The Mother of all Networks; 2. Strange, Fierce Fire; 3. Electric Skeptics; 4. The Thrill Electric; 5. Wiring the World; 6. Steam-Powered Messages; 7. Codes, Hackers, and Cheats; 8. Love Over the Wires; 9. War and Peace in the Global Village; 10. Information Overload; 11. Decline and Fall; 12. The Legacy of the Telegraph.

Stein, Dorothy. Ada: A Life and a Legacy. Cambridge, Massachusetts; London: MIT Press, [1985].
xix, 321pp. MIT Press series in the History of Computing. Biography of Ada, Countess of Lovelace (1815-1852).

Sterling, Bruce. The Hacker Crackdown: Law and Disorder on the Electronic Frontier. New York: Bantam Books, 1992.
xiv, 328pp. UK edition: London: Viking, 1993 (xiv, 328pp). Paperback edition: Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1994 (xiv, 328pp). Print on demand edition produced by Indypublish.com, McLean, Virginia.

Stern, Nancy Beth. From ENIAC to UNIVAC: Appraisal of the Eckert-Mauchly Computers. Bedford, Massachusetts: Digital Press, 1981.
ix, 286pp. Digital Press History of Computing series.

Stewart, Ian. Computers in a Nutshell. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [1984].
115pp.

Stoll, Clifford. The Cuckoo's Egg: Tracking a Spy Through the Maze of Computer Espionage. New York: Doubleday, 1989.
vi, 326pp. UK edition: London: Bodley Head, 1990 (vi, 326pp). Paperback edition: London: Pan, 1991 (393, [1]pp). New York: Pocket Books, 2000 (vi, 402pp). New York: Pocket Books, 2005 (viii, 399pp). An abridged audio-book version was published: New York: Bantam Audio, 1990 (2 cassettes; 3hrs; read by the author).

Stone, Florence M. The Oracle of Oracle: The Story of Volatile CEO Larry Ellison and the Strategies Behind his Company's Phenomenal Success. New York; London: AMACOM (American Management Association), 2002.
xiv, 226pp.

Stross, Randall E. eBoys: The First Inside Account of Venture Capitalists at Work. The True Story of the Six Tall Men Who Backed eBay, Webvan, and Other Billion-Dollar Start-Ups. New York: Crown Business, 2000.
xxii, 327pp. London: Texere, 2000 (xxii, 327pp). New York; London: Texere, 2002 (xxii, 325pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. The Right Answer; 2. Good People; 3. Go Big or Go Home; 4. Accidents Happen; 5. Don't Get Screwed; 6. Room at the Top; 7. Privileged; 8. Name Your Price; 9. World Class; 10. All e-, All the Time; 11. Buds; 12. The Art of the Deal; 13. Getting Out; 14. Techniqued; 15. Go Fast or Go Home; 16. One Monkey Don't Make No Show; 17. Off the Dole; 18. Communist Capitalism; 19. "R" Toys Us?; 20. Crash; 21. Hoover Dam; 22. Built to Win.

Summer, Claire, and Walter A. Levy, eds. The Affordable Computer. Microcomputer Applications in Business and Industry. New York: AMACOM (American Management Association), [1979].
vi, 179pp.

Swisher, Kara, and Lisa Dickey. There Must Be a Pony in Here Somewhere: The AOL Time Warner Debacle and the Quest for a Digital Future. New York: Crown Business, 2003.

Taggart, Ralph E. Weather Satellite Handbook. [Peterborough, New Hampshire]: [73 Inc.], 1976.
2nd edition: Peterborough, New Hampshire: 73 Inc., 1979 (62pp). 3rd edition (with the title The New Weather Satellite Handbook): Peterborough, New Hampshire: Wayne Green Inc., 1981 (132pp). 4th edition (reverting to the original title): [Newington, Connecticut]: American Radio Relay League, 1990 (multi-paged; Preface dated January 1990). Reprinted: 1991. 5th edition: [Newington, Connecticut]: American Radio Relay League, 1994 (multi-paged). Reprinted: 1996. Contents (4th edition): 1. Operational Satellite Systems; 2. Weather-Satellite Antenna Systems; 3. Weather-Satellite Receivers; 4. Video Formats and Display Systems; 5. The WSH Microcontroller; 6. Scan-Converter Display Board; 7. Scan-Converter and Computer Interfacing; 8. Satellite Tracking; 9. Station Operations; 10. Advanced Applications; Appendix I. Parts and Equipment Suppliers; Appendix II. Scan-Converter Parts List; Appendix III. WSH1700 BASIC Program Listing.

TeleLink. Stockport: Database Publications, [1984-1985].

Periodical. Issue 2: January/February 1985.

Temple, Kelly, Peter Shaw, and Roger Munford. Capital Radio's Book of Computers and Simple Programming. London: Interface, 1984.

Total Internet. Newton Abbot, Devon: Rapide Publishing, [December 1996-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1 undated, published c.November 1996 (editor: Chris Marke). January [1997; No. 2] issue advertised for sale on 27 December in issue 1; February [1997; No. 3] issue advertised for sale on 31 January in issue 2. Issues seen: 1-2.

Tracton, Ken. 57 Practical Programs and Games in BASIC. No. 1000; Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [1978].
204pp.

Tracton, Ken. 24 Tested, Ready-to-Run Game Programs in BASIC. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [1978].
251pp.

UKdirectory. Winchester, Hampshire; [Later:] Eastleigh, Hampshire: UKdirectory Ltd., [199-].
Periodical. Directory of British websites. Issue 3: Spring 1998; Issue 7: April/May 1999; Issue 14: May 2000.

Ultimate Player. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, [1996].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issues seen: 1 (Copyright date 1996; 'Next issue not on sale until Summer 1996').

US Robotics. The Sportster Guide. Connecting Your PC to the World. Wokingham, Berkshire: US Robotics, 1996.
40pp. Preface by Emma Forbes. Published by The Edge Partnership Publications. Probably given away as a free supplement with either .net or The .net Directory, both magazines being advertised inside the back cover.

Viewdata in Local Government. London: Information Technology Division, Department of Trade and Industry, [c.1984-1985].

VisiCorp. User Support Plan. San Jose, California: VisiCorp, 1982.
Fan-fold leaflet. Coded: 50001-1011 2/83. Bound with a copy of the literature accompanying the Apple IIe version of the program.

[VisiCorp.] DIF Technical Specification. Newton Lower Falls, Massachusetts: DIF Clearinghouse, 1983.
Copyright Software Arts Products Corp. 1983. Cover has: DIF Clearinghouse, P.O. Box 638, Newton Lower Falls, MA 02162. DIF is the format for data interchange developed by Software Arts Products Corp. 23pp. Dated Friday 28 January 1983. Coded: SAM-115C. Coded on rear: 50001-9010. Bound with a copy of the literature accompanying the Apple IIe version of VisiCorp's VisiCalc.

[VisiCorp.] The VisiSeries from VisiCorp. San Jose, California: VisiCorp, 1982.
[16]pp leaflet. Coded: 990052 12/82. Advertising software for the Apple II, Apple III, IBM PC, and DEC Professional Series (325 and 350).

Waldrop, M. Mitchell. The Dream Machine: J. C. R. Licklider and the Revolution That Made Computing Personal. New York: Viking, 2001.
502pp. UK paperback edition: Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 2002 (502pp). Contents: Prologue: Tracy's Dad; 1. Missouri Boys; 2. The Last Transition; 3. New Kinds of People; 4. The Freedom to Make Mistakes; 5. The Tale of the Fig Tree and the Wasp; 6. The Phenomena Surrounding Computers; 7. The Intergalactic Network; 8. Living in the Future; 9. Lick's Kids.

Walker, John. The Which? Software Guide. John Walker's Personal Assessment of Over 1000 Programs for Home Computers. London: Consumers' Association; Hodder and Stoughton, 1984.

Wallace, James, and Jim Erickson. Hard Drive: Bill Gates and the Making of the Microsoft Empire. New York: Wiley, 1992.
v, 426pp. New York: HarperBusiness, 1993 (v, 426pp; preface dated February 1992). Revised edition: Chichester: Wiley, 1993 (v, 458pp). Contents HarperBusiness 1993 edition): Prologue; 1. The Early Years; 2. "It's Going to Happen"; 3. The Microkids; 4. Hitching a Ride with Big Blue; 5. Growing Pains; 6. King of the Hill.

Ward, Brice. Computer Technician's Handbook. No. 554; Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1971.
1st printing: March 1971; 2nd printing: November 1972; 3rd printing: May 1974 (475, [5]pp). Contents: [I. Techniques & Circuitry:] 1. Introduction to Computers; 2. Number Systems; 3. Coding Systems; 4. The Teletype; 5. Boolean Algebra; 6. Basic Computer Circuits; 7. Computer Blocks; 8. Decoding, Gating & Steering Arrays; 9. Counters, Shift Registers & Memories; 10. Adders; [II. Analysis of a Typical Small Computer:] 11. General Description of the PDC808; 12. Processor Instructions; 13. Input-Output Section; 14. I-O Interface Reference; [III. Maintenance:] 15. Introduction to Maintenance; 16. System & Functional Components; 17. Processor Operation; 18. Input-Output Operation; 19. Diagnostic Information.

WarGames. MGM, 1983. 108 mins. Colour. Screenplay by Lawrence Lasker and Walter F. Parkes. Produced by Leonard Goldberg. Directed by John Badham. Music by Arthur B. Rubinstein. Matthew Broderick (David Lightman), Dabney Coleman (McKittrick), John Wood (Falken), Barry Corbin (General Beringer), and Ally Sheedy (Jennifer). VHS videocassette: MGM Movie Time 15928S. DVD: MGM Movie Time 15928DVDZ1. VFC 15390. Rated PG.

The Web. London: IDG Media, [November 1995-].
Periodical. Launch editor: Tony Leah; Issues 2-6 editor: Stevie Kennedy; Issues 7-8 editor: Adam Phillips. Issues seen: 2: January 1996; 3: February 1996; 4: March 1996; 5: April 1996; 6: May/June 1996; 7: July/August 1996 with a cover-mounted CD-ROM; 8: September/October 1996 'Relaunch issue'.

[The Web.] The Web Guide to Everything Educational. London: IDG Media, 1996.
Free with issue 4 (March 1996). 48pp excluding wrappers. By Pam Turnbull.

Webspace. London: Forme Digital Media, 1999.
Periodical. Issue seen: August 1999 (group managing editor: Katherine Morris).

What Micro? London: VNU Business Publications, [1982-19--].
Periodical. Monthly. Continued as What PC?.

Wh@t Net? London: WV Publications, [199-].
Periodical. Issue 2: Summer 1995.

What Personal Computer? London: EMAP, [June/July 1989-].
Periodical. Issue 1: June/July 1989 (cover states: 'Display until July 16'). Launch editor: Rob Beattie.

Which Micro? & Software Review. Peterborough: Business and Computer Publications, [May/June 1982-December 1984].
Periodical. Bi-monthly to September/October 1982 issue, monthly from November 1982.

Wilkes, Maurice Vincent. Memoirs of a Computer Pioneer. Cambridge, Massachusetts; London: MIT Press, 1985.
viii, 240pp. MIT Press series in the History of Computing.

Wilkes, Maurice Vincent, and R. M. Needham. The Cambridge CAP Computer and its Operating System. New York; Oxford: North Holland Inc., 1979.
x, 165pp.P> Williams, Sam. Free as in Freedom. Richard Stallman's Crusade for Free Software. Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 2002.
xii, 225pp. Contents: 1. For Want of a Printer; 2. 2001: A Hacker Odyssey; 3. A Portrait of the Hacker as a Young Man; 4. Impeach God; 5. Small Puddle of Freedom; 6. The Emacs Commune; 7. A Stark Moral Choice; 8. St. Ignucius; 9. The GNU General Public License; 10. GNU/Linux; 11. Open Source; 12. A Brief Journey Through Hacker Hell; 13. Continuing the Fight; Epilogue: Crushing Loneliness; [Appendices:] A. Terminology; B. Hack, Hackers, and Hacking; C. GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL).

Wilson, Mike. The Difference Between God and Larry Ellison. Inside Oracle Corporation. New York: William Morrow, 1997.
385pp. The 'difference' noted on the cover as being that God doesn't think he is Larry Ellison (CEO of Oracle).

Wired. [UK edition.] London: Wired Ventures, April 1995-.
Periodical. Monthly. Month of 'premiere' edition from page footers.

Wired. [US edition.] San Francisco: Wired, March/April 1993-.
Periodical. First 4 issues bi-monthly; monthly from November 1993 (issue 5).

Worden, Paul. Winning at the Races Using Your Computer. London: Interface, 1985.

The World Wide Web Directory. Bournemouth: Paragon, [Spring 1996-1997].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issues seen: 1 (Spring 1996)-5 (Summer 1997). Editors: 1-2 (Chris Marke); 3-5 (Ian Lynch).

Wozniak, Steve, and Gina Smith. iWoz. Computer Geek to Cult Icon: Getting to the Core of Apple's Inventor. London: Headline, 2006.
313pp. American edition published by W. W. Norton. Contents: 1. Our Gang: The Electronics Kids; 2. The Logic Game; 3. Learning by Accident; 4. The 'Ethical' TV Jammer; 5. Cream Soda Days; 6. Phreaking for Real; 7. Escapades with Steve; 8. HP and Moonlighting as a Crazy Polack; 9. Wild Projects; 10. My Big Idea; 11. The Apple I; 12. Our Very Own Company; 13. The Apple II; 14. The Biggest IPO Since Ford; 15. The Woz Plan; 16. Crash Landing; 17. Have I Mentioned I Have the Voice of an Angel?; 18. Leaving Apple, Moving to Cloud Nine; 19. The Mad Hatter; 20. Rules to Live By.

Young, Jeffrey S. Steve Jobs: The Journey is the Reward. Glenview, Illinois: Scott, Foresman, 1988.
UK edition: Barnet: Glentop Press, 1989.

Your Computer. Sutton, Surrey: IPC, 1981-1988.
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 3: October 1981. Index: February 1985, pp.135-138; March 1985, p.130 (in two parts, by Simon Rollins).

Zimmerman, Steven M., and Leo M. Conrad. Understanding and Using Microcomputers. St. Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Co., 1986.
2nd edition: St. Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Co., 1988 (xxvi, 371pp). 3rd edition: St. Paul, Minnesota: West Publishing Co., 1991 (xxv, 436pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Microcomputers; 2. Hardware of Microcomputers; 3. Operating Systems; 4. Word Processing; 5. Electronic Spreadsheets; 6. Data Base; 7. Graphics; 8. Microcomputer Communications; 9. Communications with Central Computers; 10. Local Area Networks; 11. The Integration of Operations and Data Files; 12. How To Select Software and Microcomputers; Appendix A. The History of Microcomputers Time Line; Appendix B. Types of Index Organization; Appendix C. Cases; Appendix D. The Importance of Software Documentation.

[ART] "8-Bit-'em-Ups." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.54-57.
Beat-'em-Up games on 8-bit micros.

[ART] [Adams, Douglas.] "Adams' Apples." Your Computer June 1987. pp.28-29, 31-32.
Interview with Douglas Adams.

[ART] Adams, Douglas. "What Do We Have To Lose?" Wired [UK edition.] Vol. 1, No. 1. April 1995. p.114.
On the future of magazines in an online world.

[ART] Adamson, Ian, Richard Kennedy, and Freda Trovato. "Knight-Clubbing." Your Computer January 1986. pp.50-53.
Feature on Sir Clive Sinclair.

[ART] Alderwick, Brian V. "TV to RGB Monitor Conversion." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1983. pp.62-64.
Constructional article including PCB layout. Adapting a Ferguson 14" Movie Star portable TV to an RGB monitor.

[ART] Alexander, Ken. "Joysticks." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1983. pp.52-55.

[ART] Allason, Julian. "Firmware: All Roads Lead to ROM." Practical Computing May 1980. pp.98-100.
Advocates the use of ROM over disc storage.

[ART] Allen, T. J. "Computing and Deafness." Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.74-75.
An early article highlighting the possible benefits that computing could offer those with disabilites. The author is given as 'T. D. Allen' in the contents.

[ART] Anderson, John. "Company Profile: Technos." Retro Gamer No. 20. pp.68-73.

[ART] Ash, Neville. "Writing Software: Will it Make You Rich?" Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. pp.64-65, 84-87.
Includes a 'software house rundown' with notes from software houses on their criteria for selling software, royalties etc.

[ART] Banahan, Mike. "Getting It Together." Personal Computer World Part 1: August 1978. pp.39-40; Part 2: September 1978. pp.32-34; Part 3: October 1978. pp.55-59; Part 4: November 1978. pp.27-29.
A series of articles on assembly language.

[ART] Barker, Philip G. "Computer Interfaces for Slide Projectors." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1982. pp.18-22, 34.
Constructional article.

[ART] Barker, Philip G. "Data Transfer Between Micros." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1982. pp.21-25, 46-49.
Described using PETs and SC/MPs as examples.

[ART] Barker, Philip G. "Programming a Hand Print Terminal." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1982. pp.17-20, 67.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "Reduced Instruction Set Computers." Electronics Today International December 1985. pp.22-26.
Descriptive article.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "Foreign Ports." Electronics Today International March 1987. pp.13-18.
Computer interfacing standards: Serial and parallel, RS422, RS423, RS449, 20mA current loop, Centronics, and IEEE-488.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "EPROM Technology." Electronics Today International December 1988. pp.12-15.
Technical overview.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "Antique Computers Reborn." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 19, No. 150. June 2000. pp.48-52.

[ART] Bell, M. J. "Machine Code." Computing Today Part 3: June 1980. pp.17-19.
Series on machine code programming. Part 3: 'System monitors are vital to the programmer, and they can save a lot of work too'.

[ART] Bennett, Bob. "Machine Code Programming." Electronics Today International Part: March 1984. pp.30-32.
Series.

[ART] "A Bigger Brother." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. p.22.
Review of the Brother EP-44 printer/typewriter.

[ART] Bond, Paul. "Beyond's Supersecrets." Your Computer October 1985. pp.44-45.
Feature on Beyond (software house).

[ART] Bond, Phil. "Master Pieces." Your Computer January 1986. pp.44-45.
Feature on Mastertronics (software house).

[ART] Brain, David. "Inside the 7910 Single Chip FSK Modem." Radio and Electronics World May 1983. pp.23-25.

[ART] Brew, Simon. "The Classic Game: 'Flood'." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.78-79.

[ART] Budgett, Henry. "Programming Standards." Computing Today June 1981. pp.45-46.
A formalised way of displaying graphics characters in listings.

[ART] Burchell, Jonathan C. "Acoustic Modem." Radio and Electronics World February 1983. pp.10-13.
Constructional article.

[ART] Campbell, Bob. "Z80 DRAM Board." Electronics Today International March 1984. pp.45-48, 69.
Constructional article with a PCB foil pattern. 64K DRAM board for Z80 systems. Uses a 24S10 PROM and eight 4164-15 memory chips.

[ART] Campbell, Bob. "Digital Cassette Deck." Electronics Today International Part 1: September 1984. pp.27-30.
2 part constructional article. Uses the Tanashin Electric TN-3600 cassette deck.

[ART] Campbell, Ian. "Digital Speech Systems." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1983. pp.24-26.
Speech chips including the allophone-based SPO0256.

[ART] Campbell, Ian. "Digital Speech Systems." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1983. pp.83-86.
Examination of National's Digitalker and the techniques of Linear Predictive Coding.

[ART] Carroll, Martyn. "The Complete Lowdown: Freescape." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.24-29.
Freescape was a 3D gaming engine for 8-bit micros.

[ART] Carroll, Martyn. "The Complete Lowdown: Magic Knight." Retro Gamer No. 27. pp.72-75.
Game character created by David Jones.

[ART] Carroll, Martyn. "The Making of 'Aliens'." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.74-77.

[ART] Carroll, Martyn. "The Making of 'Another World'." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.34-37.

[ART] Carroll, Martyn. "The Making of 'Turbo Esprit'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.84-87.

[ART] Cassera, Tony. "Interfacing Printers: Parallel Ports Mean Faster Data Transfer." Practical Computing May 1980. pp.96-97.
Detailed explanation.

[ART] Chappell, Paul. "Data Encryption." Electronics Today International September 1985. pp.30-33.
An overview.

[ART] Cheeseman, Gavin. "SPO256 Speech Synthesiser." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 9, No. 36. February-March 1990. pp.48-52; Correction in Vol. 9, No. 39. August-September 1990. p.1 (replace protection diode D1 with a link if insufficient voltage causes problems).
Constructional article.

[ART] Chewter, John. "Developments in Speech Synthesis." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1982. pp.29-32.
Series. Analysis of techniques and constructional project: a speech encoder.

[ART] Chewter, John. "Digital Speech." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.36-39, 45.
Series. Using the speech encoder published in February 1982 with an Acorn Atom.

[ART] Clarkson, Douglas. "Electromagnetism and Man." Electronics Today International December 1991. pp.52-56.
The effects of electromagnetic radiation on human beings.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Alien 3'." Retro Gamer No. 29. pp.40-41.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Canon Fodder'." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.28-29.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Captain Blood'." Retro Gamer No. 38. pp.86-87.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Castle Adventure'." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.58-59.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Donkey Kong Country." Retro Gamer No. 34. pp.24-25.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Dynamite Headdy'." Retro Gamer No. 29. pp.20-22.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Feud'." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.82-83.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Get Dexter'." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.34-35.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'The Great Escape'." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.32-33.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Knight Lore'." Retro Gamer No. 20. pp.74-77.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Metro-Cross'." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.62-63.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Punch-Out!!'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.38-39.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Quest for the Rings'." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.34-35.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'The Revenge of Shinobi'." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.66-67.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Shufflepuck Cafe'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.66-67.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Silent Hill'." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.42-43.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Street Fighter II: The World Warrior'." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.70-71.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Super Mario Land." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.38-39.

[ART] "The Classic Game: 'Zillion'." Retro Gamer No. 34. pp.42-43.

[ART] "Company Profile: Data East." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.52-57.
Known as DECO in Japan.

[ART] "Company Profile: The Bitmap Brothers." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.42-47.

[ART] "Company Profile: US Gold." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.66-71.

[ART] "The Complete Lowdown: 'Leisure Suit Larry'." Retro Gamer No. 19. pp.54-59.

[ART] "Components for Computing." Hobby Electronics Part 1 (I/O ports and the 8255): December 1982. pp.46-48.
A series of articles.

[ART] Cottis, Bob, Dave Howland, and Pat Crowe. "E78. The Europa Bus. A Microprocessor Bus Specification for Eurocard." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 2. 1978. pp.69-72; Addenda: July 1978. p.76.
Description of the new bus standard.

[ART] Crookes, David. "The Classic Game: 'Dizzy'." Retro Gamer No. 19. pp.24-27.

[ART] Crookes, David. "Company Profile: Core Design." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.70-75.

[ART] Crookes, David. "Company Profile: Zenobi Software." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.30-36.

[ART] Crookes, David. "The Complete Lowdown: 'Lara Croft: Tomb Raider'." Retro Gamer No. 20. pp.40-47.

[ART] Crookes, David. "Developer Lookback: Being Sensible." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.36-41.
Sensible Software.

[ART] Crookes, David. "Developer Lookback: Coding Back the Years." Retro Gamer No. 29. pp.60-69.
Richard and David Darling of Codemasters.

[ART] Crookes, David. "Developer Lookback: The Wizards of Oz." Retro Gamer Part 1: No. 36. pp.42-47.
2 parts. Melbourne House.

[ART] Crookes, David. "The Making of 'Last Ninja'." Retro Gamer No. 34. pp.18-23.

[ART] Crookes, David. "The Making of 'Prince of Persia'." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.18-23.

[ART] Crossley, Rob. "The Making of 'Blast Corps'." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.86-89.

[ART] Curley, Dan. "The Classic Game: 'Flashback'." Retro Gamer No. 20. pp.36-39.

[ART] Cuthbertson, Paul. "Analogue Computer." Electronics Today International July 1988. pp.38-42, 59; August 1988. pp.28-32, 53.
Constructional article with a PCB foil.

[ART] Cuthbertson, Paul. "The Forgotten Computer." Electronics Today International June 1988. pp.10-15.
A feature on analogue computers.

[ART] Daines, Derrick R. "Computing in the Primary School." Personal Computer World October 1978. pp.22-23.
The introduction of computers into a primary school. The author was Deputy Head of Carsic Primary School, Sutton-in-Ashfield.

[ART] Dance, Brian. "Bubble Memories." Computing Today June 1981. pp.53-56.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "The Classic Game: 'Simon the Sorcerer'." Retro Gamer No. 19. pp.64-67.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "The Classic Game: 'Speedball 2: Brutal Deluxe'." Retro Gamer No. 20. pp.58-61.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "Company Profile: Sega Technical Institute." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.28-33.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "The Complete Lowdown: 'Worms'." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.70-75.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "The Making of 'Last Hope'." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.66-69.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "The Making of 'Sam & Max Hit the Road'." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.32-35.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "The Making of 'Smash TV'." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.60-63.

[ART] "Death of the Cassette?" Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. pp.76-78.
The supply of computer software by PRESTEL (Micronet 800), Teletext (Ceefax and Oracle), and via cable (the Games Network).

[ART] Denning, Adam. "Introducing 6502 and Z80 Vectors." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: December 1983. pp.71-73.
2 parts.

[ART] "Desert Island Disks: Bob Polaro." Retro Gamer No. 27. pp.84-87.

[ART] "Desert Island Disks: Eugene Jarvis." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.78-81.

[ART] "Desert Island Disks: Gary Liddon." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.78-81.

[ART] "Desert Island Disks: Pickford Brothers." Retro Gamer Part 1: No. 19. pp.80-84; Part 2: No. 20. pp.80-83.
John and Ste Pickford.

[ART] "Developer Lookback: Magnetic Fields." Retro Gamer No. 19. pp.68-72.
Shaun Southern and Andrew Morris.

[ART] "Developer Lookback: A Rare Breed." Retro Gamer No. 20. pp.26-33.
Chris and Tim Stamper of Ultimate and Rare.

[ART] Dick, James. "Multiprogramming." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: February 1984. pp.65-66; Part 2 with the title "Multiprocessing." April 1984. pp.50-51.
2 part series.

[ART] Dick, James. "Optimal Coding. Part 2." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1983. pp.80-81.
Pre-coding and the application of the principles of optimal coding.

[ART] "Digital Cameras: How Do They Work?" Elektor Electronics October 1998. pp.22-26.
By the magazine's editorial staff.

[ART] Dixey, Graham. "Computers in the Real World." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1 (introduction): Vol. 8, No. 33. August-September 1989. pp.60-63; Part 2 (interacting with the outside world): Vol. 8, No. 34. October-November 1989. pp.58-62; Part 4 (communication with peripherals, polling and interrupts): Vol. 9, No. 36. February-March 1990. pp.67-71, 75; Part 5 (serial communication): Vol. 9, No. 37. April-May 1990. pp.34-38; Part 7 (magnetic recording: tape and disk): Vol. 9, No. 39. August-September 1990. pp.1(correction to part 8), 25-29.
Series.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Andy Walker." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.54-58.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Ed Logg." Retro Gamer No. 29. pp.76-80.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Nick Pelling." Retro Gamer No. 26. pp.82-85.
Pelling used the pseudonym Orlando M. Pilchard.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Owen Rubin." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.76-80.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Steve Ellis." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.72-75.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Steve Wright." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.84-87.
The programmer, not the radio DJ.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Stuart Fotheringham." Retro Gamer No. 34. pp.78-81.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "Desert Island Disks: Vicky Carne." Retro Gamer No. 12. pp.41-43.
Founder of Mosaic Publishing.

[ART] Drury, Paul. "The Making of 'Goldeneye'." Retro Gamer No. 38. pp.28-33.

[ART] Easson, D. Roy. "Microcomputer Organ Interface and Music Editor." Wireless World June 1983. pp.63-66.
Designed for a Nascom 2. Can be adapted to work with any Z80-based micro with two parallel ports.

[ART] Edwards, T. E. "Centronics to RS232 Converter." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.40-41.
Constructional article.

[ART] Edwards, William, and Watford Electronics. "Ultimum Computer Interface. Part 7." Practical Electronics Vol. 19, No. 5. May 1983. pp.70-73.
Constructional article. 9 channel sound card with amplification. Uses three AY-3-8910 sound chips, an 8255 PPI and an LM386.

[ART] Edwards, William, and Watford Electronics. "Ultimum Computer Interface. Part 8." Practical Electronics Vol. 19, No. 6. June 1983. pp.68-74 (series update notes on p.57).
Constructional article. The port card (two parallel and one serial) with a real-time clock. Uses a 58174 real-time clock chip, a 6551 ACIA for the serial port, and an 8255 PPI for the parallel ports.

[ART] Elmer-Dewitt, Philip. "The Amazing Video Game Boom." Time International Vol. 142, No. 13, 27 September 1993. pp.52-58.

[ART] Elmer-Dewitt, Philip. "Battle for the Soul of the Internet." Time International Vol. 144, No. 4, 25 July 1994. pp.50-56.
The Internet makes the cover of Time magazine.

[ART] Erskine, Christina. "The Bank Buster." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 10. 7-13 March 1985. p.10.
Interview with David Crane of Activision.

[ART] Erskine, Christina. "First off the Mark." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 14. 4-10 April 1985. p.17.
Interview with Sara Galbraith of First Publishing.

[ART] Evans. Gary. "Copyright Law in Confusion." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.12-13.
Software copyright problems.

[ART] Everiss, Bruce. "ROM with a View." Your Computer December 1986. pp.66-67.
An overview of CD-ROM drives with photos of the Hitachi CDR1500S, CDR2500 and CDR2500S models.

[ART] "Extending This Mortal Coil." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. pp.18-20.
Maintenance and reliability issues with microcomputers.

[ART] Finlay, Eric. "The Micro Muse." Personal Computer World November 1978. pp.13-14.
Computer poetry.

[ART] Fisher, Andrew. "Developer Lookback: Gremlins in the Machine." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.22-29.
Gremlin Graphics.

[ART] Fisher, Andrew. "The Making of 'Armalyte'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.78-81.

[ART] Flint, Ernest. "PC Engines - From 4004 to Pentium III." Everyday Practical Electronics May 1999. pp.338-342.

[ART] Fox, Barry. "Colossus Recreated." Everyday Practical Electronics August 1997. pp.540-544.
.

[ART] Fox, Barry. "Consumer Electronics Show-Chicago." Everyday with Practical Electronics September 1993. pp.654-657.
Show report.

[ART] Freestone, N. K. "Understanding Data Structures. Part 1." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: May 1982. pp.53-55; Part 2: June 1982; Part 3: July 1982. pp.25-27.
Series.

[ART] Furminger, Mike. "Speech Recognition Systems." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1983. pp.56-58.
Includes a circuit diagram of an MF10 based filter. Listing for the Commodore PET included, but a general article.

[ART] Gambotto-Burke, Alexander. "The Making of 'Quake'." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.62-65.

[ART] Gerrard, Mike. "Tiger's Tale." Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. p.79.
On the setting-up of Tiger Software by Mark Tyson and Lorraine Brewis. In the 'Dragon Tales' column.

[ART] Giesberts, T. "Fibre Optic Data Communications: RS232 Interface with Fibre Optic Links." Elektor Electronics May 1998. pp.52-53, 55.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given.

[ART] Godwin, Harold. "The Maplin Modem." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 1, No. 5. December 1982-February 1983. pp.2-6.
Constructional article. 300 baud. Uses the 4412VP and XR2211 chips.

[ART] Graaf, B. de. "Small VGA-Tester." Elektor Electronics September 1998. Extra Supplement pp.14-16.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Classic Game: 'Spy vs Spy'." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.42-43.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Alter Ego'." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.60-63.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Archon'." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.36-39.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Barbarian' and 'Barbarian II'." Retro Gamer No. 38. pp.40-45.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Boulder Dash'." Retro Gamer No. 27. pp.24-27.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Cauldron' and 'Cauldron II'." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.48-51.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Kikstart II'." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.50-51.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Miner 2049er'." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.36-39.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'Pitfall'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.62-65.

[ART] Grannell, Craig. "The Making of 'The Way of the Exploding Fist'." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.60-65.

[ART] Gregory, Liz. "Do it on a Disk Drive." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.74-77.
General guide with a list of current models.

[ART] Gregory, Liz. "Modem Matters." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. pp.52-54.
Survey of available models.

[ART] Grodzik, Richard. "VGA Monitor Tester." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 18, No. 136. April 1999. pp.32-35.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB layout. Uses a PIC16C84, program listing given.

[ART] Harrison, Harry. [pseud., Henry Maxwell Dempsey.] "The Mystery of the Lost Computer." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 2. 1978. pp.28-29.
Autobiographical article by the SF writer describing his use of analogue computers for targeting during WWII.

[ART] Hartley, James. "Make it Live." Your Computer January 1986. pp.92-94.
Controlling six characters in an adventure game. With a BASIC listing.

[ART] Harvey, Phillip. "Print Big: Epson MX Range Enhanced." Personal Computer World November 1983. pp.194-197.
Machine code printer driver for Z80-based micros.

[ART] Hayman, Martin. "Sharper Competitibe Edge for Computerised Estate Agency." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.76-78.
Study of Microbase, an estate agents' computer package developed by Colin Yarwood and Chris Murphy.

[ART] Herman, Gary. "CD-ROMs: The Future of Mass Storage?" Electronics Today International October 1986. pp.22-25.

[ART] Hickman, Ian. "Program Conditioner." Practical Electronics Vol. 19, No. 6. June 1983. pp.20-24.
Constructional article. Filter for improving the reliability of program storage on cassette. Uses a TL084 op-amp. Circuit consists of a selectable high-pass filter, an adjustable all-pass filter, an output stage providing clipping and shaping, and an audio stage driving a monitor loudspeaker. Includes waveform details associated with cassette tape recording.

[ART] Hughes, John. "Micro in Control." Everyday Electronics Part 4: Vol. 19, No. 3. March 1990. pp.172-176; Part 5: Vol. 19, No. 4. April 1990. pp.242-245; Part 12: Vol. 19, No. 11. November 1990. pp.723-727.
12-part series.

[ART] "IC Reliability." Electronics Today International January 1985. pp.23-24.

[ART] "In the Chair with Ralph Baer." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.78-81.
Baer invented the home videogame.

[ART] "In the Chair with Stephen Robertson." Retro Gamer No. 20. pp.64-67.
Robertson was a 'loading screen' designer.

[ART] "In the Chair with Tim Schaffer." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.40-43.

[ART] Jackson, James O. "Vid Kids Everywhere." Time International Vol. 142, No. 13, 27 September 1993. p.59.
Popular concerns about the impact of video games upon children.

[ART] Jago, Francis. "The Leading Edge." Your Computer December 1986. pp.84-85.
Article on software house CRL (Computer Rentals Ltd).

[ART] James, Mike. "Computer Creators: Hiroshi Yamauchi." Computer Shopper August 1995, No. 90. pp.615-616.
Profile of Yamauchi, who took Nintendo into the consumer technology market.

[ART] James, Mike. "Micro Graphics Techniques. Part 2." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1983. pp.67-69.
Internal animation and controlling motion.

[ART] James, Mike. "Micro Graphics Techniques. Part 3." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1983. pp.35-38.
Steering sprites and the creation of backgrounds and large objects.

[ART] James, Mike. "Micrographic Techniques." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1984. pp.49-51.
Using geometry.

[ART] James, Mike. "Micrographic Techniques." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1984. pp.42-44.
Using matrix transformations.

[ART] James, Mike. "Micrographics Techniques." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.33-35.
Extending the concept of UDGs, windowing, and clipping.

[ART] James, Mike. "[Micrographics Techniques.] The Third Dimension." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. pp.42-45.
Exploring 3D graphics.

[ART] James, Mike. "[Micrographics Techniques.] 3D Stereo Vision." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.28-31.
With a corrected 'Listing 1' for the BBC Micro of a program from the June article in the series.

[ART] James, Mike. "[Micrographics Techniques.] The Last Word." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.47-49.
Stated to be the final instalment in the micrographics series.

[ART] James, Mike. "Program Control." Computer Shopper March 1999, No. 133. pp.673-678.
Overview of dial-up networking protocols.

[ART] James, Mike. "Program Control: Pop Culture." Computer Shopper March 2000, No. 145. pp.605-610.
A Pop-3 Control described.

[ART] James, W. N. "3D Noughts and Crosses in 2K." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.102-103.
BASIC listing.

[ART] Janda, David. "Monitors go Cheap." Personal Computer News No. 48. 11 February 1984. p.20.
Review of the Electrohome (JVC) ECM1302-1X and ECM1302-2X 14" colour monitors.

[ART] Jones, Darran. "Bloodsimple: The History of Mortal Kombat." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.26-33.

[ART] Jones, Meirion. "Into the Arcades." Your Computer February 1985. pp.54-55.
Round-up of arcade games and technology.

[ART] Joostens, J. "Data Acquisition by Modem." Elektor Electronics March 1998. Extra Supplement pp.6-11.
Constructional article. 89C52-based design. Works with ANSI and VT102 terminal programs. 2400 and 9600 baud. Password protection. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately.

[ART] Josephs, Mark. "Representing Game Positions." Practical Computing January 1981. p.106.
Digital representations of gaming positions so that they may be evaluated by algorithms.

[ART] Krouwel, Andy. "Clearly Minter." Retro Gamer No. 12. pp.60-67.
Retrospective on Jeff Minter.

[ART] Laurie, Peter. "Thinking Big in a World Where Smallness Matters." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.68-74.
Silicon chip developments.

[ART] Lee, John, and Timothy Lee. "Using Hamming Distance as a Basis for Self-Correcting Code." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.104-105.

[ART] Letcher, Piers. "Wheels in Motion." Personal Computer News [Cover:] No. 45. 21 January 1984. (p.1 has incorrectly, No. 44, 7-14 January 1984). p.38.
Review of the Turbo 20 daisy-wheel printer from OEM Peripherals.

[ART] Levy, David. "PCW Microcomputer Chess Championship." Personal Computer World November 1978. pp.15-17.
A report on the first microcomputer chess championship to be held in Europe, at the PCW, West Centre Hotel, London. A similar event had been held earlier in the year in California.

[ART] Liardet, Mike. "Lotus 1-2-3." Personal Computer World November 1983. pp.132-135.
Review.

[ART] Luke, Peter. "Interactive Video." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.46-49.
Overview of interactive video and LaserVision.

[ART] Magnusson, Magnus. "Computing for Everybody." Personal Computer World August 1978. pp.58-60.
The possible uses of computers in everyday life.

[ART] "The Making of 'Banjo Kazooie'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.18-25.

[ART] "The Making of 'Creatures'." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.72-75.

[ART] "The Making of 'Earthworm Jim'." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.30-33.

[ART] "The Making of 'Head Over Heels'." Retro Gamer No. 34. pp.74-77.

[ART] "The Making of 'Impossible Mission'." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.60-63.

[ART] "The Making of 'International Karate' and 'IK+'." Retro Gamer No. 26. pp.42-47.

[ART] "The Making of 'Quazatron'." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.72-75.

[ART] "The Making of 'Samurai Warrior: The Battles of Usagi Yojimbo'." Retro Gamer No. 29. pp.16-19.

[ART] "The Making of 'Wipeout'." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.78-81.

[ART] Marshall, G. J. "Execution Speed is Crucial for Realistic Mobile Displays." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.96-100.
Moving displays on memory-mapped screens. The listings are for the PET but the technqiues are generic.

[ART] Matthews, Peter. "Telechirics." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. Your Robot Supplement. pp.12-13.
The remote control of systems by a human operator (now called 'telepresence').

[ART] Maxfield, Clive 'Max', and Alvin Brown. "Technology Timelines. Part 4 - Computing 1900-1999." Everyday Practical Electronics May 2000. pp.350-357.

[ART] May, Janet. "Allophone Speech Synthesis Technique." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 2, No. 6. March-May 1983. pp.4-7.

[ART] McDonald, Mike. "VisiCalc." Practical Computing. June 1980. pp.64-67.
Review.

[ART] McFerran, Damien. "The Future is Dead: The Rise and Fall of Virtuality." Retro Gamer No. 38. pp.72-79.

[ART] McFerran, Damien. "The Making of 'Castlevania: Symphony of the Night'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.48-53.

[ART] McFerran, Damien. "The Making of 'Dungeon Master'." Retro Gamer No. 34. pp.30-33.

[ART] McFerran, Damien. "The Making of 'Starfox'." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.26-30.

[ART] McFerran, Damien. "The Making of 'The Immortal'." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.48-51.

[ART] McFerran, Damien. "The Spirit of the Mad Gamer." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.56-61.
A retrospective upon Computer and Video Games magazine (1981-2004).

[ART] Mellor, Robert. "The Making of 'Batman: The Movie'." Retro Gamer No. 41. pp.64-67.

[ART] Mellor, Robert. "The Making of 'Lazy Jones'." Retro Gamer No. 29. pp.72-75.

[ART] Miles, Barry. "Print at a Low Price." Personal Computer News Vol. 1, No. 17. 30 June-6 July 1983. pp.34-35.
Review of the Juki 6100 daisy-wheel printer.

[ART] Miles, Rob. "Reactobot and Virtual Reality." Everyday Practical Electronics June 1997. pp.416-418.
University of Hull research into virtual reality.

[ART] "Modern Modem Technology" Elektor Electronics January 1998. pp.32-35, 37.
Detailed description by the magazine's editorial staff.

[ART]
"The Modern Printer Port: IEEE-1284 is Quickly Gaining Ground."
Elektor Electronics April 1998. Extra Supplement pp.12-16.
Detailed analysis of the parallel port specification established in March 1994. No author cited.

[ART] Moseley, Robin C. "A Comparison of Bar Code Encoding Schemes." Byte [US edition.] Vol. 4, No. 4, April 1979. pp.50, 52.
Compares: Format 1, Format 2, Format 3, FM/PE, NRZI, SNRZI, MFM, GCR, and ZM.

[ART] Muir, A. "Repairing the Damage." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 18. 1-7 May 1986. pp.12-13.
Repairing joysticks.

[ART] "New High-Speed CMOS Logic." Elektor. September 1983. pp.32-37.
An explanation of HCMOS chips.

[ART] "No Ordinary Type." Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. p.41.
Review of the Brother EP-22 printer, incorporating a keyboard, 16 character LCD screen, and text processor.

[ART] Ogilvie, Daniel. "Digital Framestore." Electronics Today International Part 3: February 1985. pp.55-58; Part 4: March 1985. pp.59-62, 65.
4 part constructional article to build a digital framestore based on 512K of DRAM and interface it to a micro. With PCB foil pattern.

[ART] Owen, William. "All About Bubbles." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.34-36.
On magnetic bubble memory.

[ART] Owen, William. "My Kingdom for an OS." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1985. pp.48-50.
Overview of operating system functions.

[ART] Paczuska, Anna. "Women and IT." Electronics Today International November 1985. pp.25-27.
On the shortage of women in IT.

[ART] Paddon, Lee. "Budget Printers." Your Computer January 1986. pp.30-31.
An overview.

[ART] Parr, Andrew. "Introduction to VDUs." Television December 1979. pp.78-83.
A technical overview.

[ART] Peckett, David S. "Machine Code: Conditional Jumps and Registers Under Review." Practical Computing May 1980. pp.102-106.

[ART] Peckett, David S. "Machine Code: Address Modes - Vital Topic which Repays Close Study." Practical Computing June 1980. pp.98-99, 101, 103-105.

[ART] Peckett, David S. "Machine Code: What Happens During an Interrupt?" Practical Computing January 1981. pp.129-135.

[ART] Peckett, David S. "Flexible Storage." Computing Today June 1981. pp.59-61.
Review of the Aculab Floppy Tape System for the TRS-80 Models I and III and the Video Genie.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Computadrum." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 12. September-November 1984. pp.20-24.
Constructional article. 6 channel drum synthesiser. A kit was sold by Maplin Electronic Supplies. Connections noted for Atari, Commodore, BBC, and MTX micros.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Electronics March 1992. pp.160-161.
Column. Using D/A converters.

[ART] Pipe, Martin. "Plug into PCMCIA Versatility." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 14, No. 94. October 1995. pp.63-67, 72.

[ART] Plant, Malcolm. "Computer Remote Control." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1983. pp.40-43, 50-51.
Constructional article. IR interfacing with micros. Includes a listing for the ZX81, circuit diagrams, and stripboard layout.

[ART] Plant, Malcolm. "Power Control for Micros." Electronics and Computing Monthly Article: June 1983. pp.39-43; PCB foil patterns: July 1983. p.36.
Constructional article. Three control units: a relay driver unit for on-off control of power to an electrical load; a digital-to-analogue converter unit for smooth power control of lamps and DC motors; and a stepper motor controller unit.

[ART] Poole, Ian. "IEEE-488 Explained." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 14, No. 93. September 1995. pp.59-62.

[ART] Poole, Ian. "RS-232 Explained." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 14, No. 95. November 1995. pp.67-71.

[ART] Pritchard, Joe. "Meeting the Real World." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.68-70.
Analogue/digital conversion issues.

[ART] Pritchard, Joe. "Overcoming PCI: Personal Computer Interference." Radio Today Vol. 18, No. 6. June 2000. pp.22-24.

[ART] "Programme Loading Meter." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1982. p.63.
Constructional article.

[ART] Raven, D. "A Technical Insight into Video Games; How 'Pong' Works." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1983. pp.37-40, 55.

[ART] Reith, Graham. "EPROMs Versus Logic." Electronics Today International January 1995. pp.34-36.
Using EPROMs to replace complex logic circuitry. Part of a series of articles.

[ART] "The Re-Making of 'Streets of Rage'." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.34-37.

[ART] "Review of the Year." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 1. 26 December 1985-2 January 1986. pp.12-14.

[ART] "REWTEL: A New PRESTEL Like Service from Radio and Electronics World." Radio and Electronics World July 1982. pp.19-20.
300 or 1200/75 baud.

[ART] Richards, Des. "300 Baud Full-Duplex Modem." Wireless World Part 1: July 1983. pp.33-35; Part 2: August 1983. pp.46-48.
2 part constructional article. Direct-coupled (ie. not acoustic) modem. Uses the Reticon R5631 (two ten-pole switched-capacitor band-pass filters), XR2207 (FSK modulator) and XR2211 PLL.

[ART] Robinson, Alan. "The MIDI Interface." Electronics Today International January 1987. pp.17-21; February 1987. pp.31-34.
Technical overview.

[ART] Rutherford, Mike. "Digital TV and MPEG2." Everyday Practical Electronics April 1997. pp.250-255.

[ART] Ryder, A. D. "Joystick Control." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1983. p.58.
Constructional article. Circuit diagram for connecting a joystick potentiometer to any computer having a minimum of four I/O lines.

[ART] Sacks, Tony. "Music Micro, Please." Your Computer October 1985. pp.38-41.
Review of music-making peripherals and software.

[ART] Sanders, Mike. "Computers." Practical Electronics Part 2: March 1990. pp.41-44.
Series. General introduction.

[ART] Sargeant, [Richard]. "Mastering MIDI." Your Computer March 1986. pp.54-55.
Writing code for the Musical Instrument Digital Interface.

[ART] Sargeant, Richard, and Robert Harvey. "EPROM Simulator-Aid to M/C Development." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.28-31.
Constructional article. 4K EPROM simulator using standard logic and memory chips.

[ART] Sedacca, Boris. "PCW Small Business Case Study." Personal Computer World October 1978. pp.48-50.
The use of an Altair 8800B system by Brian Crank Associates.

[ART] Segre, Nicole. "Camel Train to Fame." Your Computer March 1986. pp.34-35.
Interview with Jeff Minter.

[ART] "Sheer Art Attack." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.66-71.
Interview with Oliver Frey whose artwork featured in many 1980s computer magazines.

[ART] Shenton, Chuck. "Floppy Turnover." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.51-53.
Turning a single-sided floppy disk into a double-sided floppy disk.

[ART] Sherlock, Ian. "Graphics Processors." Electronics Today International April 1987. pp.15-20.

[ART] Simpson, Alan. "Buildings Get Smart!" Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 9, No. 37. April-May 1990. pp.72-74.
Technology in the workplace.

[ART] Simpson, Alan. "New French Revolution Gathers Pace." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 8, No. 34. October-November 1989. pp.48-50.
Feature on Minitel terminals used for France Telecom's Teletel service.

[ART] Smit, P. "How Do I Set Up a Network?" Elektor Electronics March 1998. Extra Supplement pp.2-5, 11.
Detailed description of ethernet networking.

[ART] Smith, Sean. "The Evolution of 'Football Management'." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.32-37.

[ART] Smith, Sean. "The Making of Sid Meier's 'Pirates'." Retro Gamer No. 38. pp.58-61.

[ART] Smith, Sean. "Company Profile: Sonic Team." Retro Gamer No. 26. pp.24-29.

[ART] Soderstrom, Randy. "Life Can Be Easy." Byte [US edition.] Vol. 4, No. 4, April 1979. pp.166-168.
Listing. 'Life' in about 220 bytes for 8080-based systems.

[ART] "The Sony Elcaset." Electronics Today International March 1977. pp.26-28.
A review of Sony's Elcaset tape format, and of the Sony EL-7 cassette deck (with the RM-30 wired remote control). An EL-5 deck was also sold, with fewer features. The format was technically good, but failed in the marketplace.

[ART] Spanner. "The Making of 'Breakout'." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.52-55.
Steve Wozniak designed the hardware for Atari to implement Nolan Bushnell's game concept.

[ART] Spanner. "The Making of 'It Came from the Desert'." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.44-48.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "Before they were Famous." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.26-29.
Matthew Smith; Martyn Brown; Will Wright; Jon Ritman; Eugene Jarvis; Don Priestley; Dave Reidy; Archer Maclean; John Pickford; the Oliver twins; Chris and Tim Stamper.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "Before they were Famous." Retro Gamer No. 35. pp.74-77.
Yuji Naka; Hideo Kojima; Satoshi Tajiri; Koji Igarashi; Yak; Yuji Horii; Satoru Iwata; Hironobu Sakagushi; Shinji Mikami; Eiji Aonuma; Sid Meier.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "The Classic Game: '3D Monster Maze'." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.54-55.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "The Classic Game: 'Super Metroid'." Retro Gamer No. 19. pp.48-51.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "Company Profile: Tec Toy." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.50-53.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "In the Chair with William 'Trip' M. Hawkins III." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.60-65.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "John Szczepaniak's Gaming Illuminati." Retro Gamer Part 1: No. 34. pp.36-41; Part 2: No. 35. pp.54-59.
Underground videogames societies and collectors.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "The Making of Zelda: 'Wands of Gamelon' & 'Link: Faces of Evil'." Retro Gamer No. 27. pp.52-57.

[ART] Taylor, Graham. "Gandalf Meets Aphrodite." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 8. 20-26 February 1986. pp.9-10.
The MicroGnome BBS.

[ART] Taylor, Graham. "The Legend Continues." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 2, No. 50. 15-21 December 1983. pp.16-17.
The background to the creation of Valhalla by Legend Software.

[ART] "Telsoft." Your Computer February 1985, p.93 (BBC/Spectrum); March 1985, p.97 (BBC/Spectrum); April 1985, p.113 (BBC/Spectrum); October 1985, pp.94-95 (BBC/C64/Spectrum); November 1985, pp.102-103 (BBC/C64/Spectrum); January 1986, pp.72-73 (BBC/C64/Spectrum).
Listings of machine code programs for accessing Your Computer's Telsoft service (to download software via a modem).

[ART] Tooley, Michael, and David Whitfield. "Monitors for Home Computers." Practical Electronics I: February 1984. pp.44-47.
A buyer's guide noting 30 monitors appears on pp.48-49 of the February 1984 issue.

[ART] Tooley, Mike. "Company Profile: ID Software." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.80-85.

[ART] Tooley, Mike. "The Complete Lowdown: 'Phantasy Star Online'." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.52-59.

[ART] Tooley, Mike. "Developer Lookback: SNK." Retro Gamer Part 1: No. 38. pp.34-39; Part 2: No. 39; Part 3: No. 40. pp.66-71.

[ART] "A Tribute to Keith Campbell (1940-2006)." Retro Gamer No. 36. p.98.

[ART] "Two-Minute Profile: Jonathan Cauldwell." Retro Gamer No. 19. p.100.

[ART] "Two-Minute Profile: Paul Andrews." Retro Gamer No. 20. p.96.

[ART] "Two-Minute Profile: Simon Ullyatt." Retro Gamer No. 22. p.94.

[ART] [Tyler, Jon. "Typewriter Interface."] "Typewriter Interface Update." Electronics Today International March 1984. pp.25-26.
Corrections to the constructional article in the October 1983 issue. The typewriter concerned is the Silver Reed EX42.

[ART] Tyler, Jon. "Keyboard Interface." Electronics Today International September 1984. pp.24-26, 71.
Constructional article to allow the use of a Silver Reed EX42 typewriter as a computer keyboard. Uses a KR2376 keyboard encoder.

[ART] Vaughan, Derek. "Barred for Life." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 9, No. 37. April-May 1990. pp.51-52, 55.
Barcodes and EPOS systems.

[ART] "Video Graphics: How Does a Video Card Work?" Elektor September 1983. pp.18-21.

[ART] Walker, Phil. "Designing Memory." Electronics Today International February 1985. pp.18-21.
Using the examples of the 64K DRAM card (December 1984) and DRAM fix (January 1985) projects, Walker describes the process involved in obtaining a working design.

[ART] Wallin, David. "Calling America - On the Cheap." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 19. 8-14 May 1986. p.28.
Description of the Packet SwitchStream system (PSS).

[ART] Warne, Alan. "RGB Interface for the Ferguson TX-90." Radio and Electronics World January 1984. pp.46-49.
Constructional article. Converts a Ferguson 37140 TV, which uses the TX-90 chassis. Includes PCB foil.

[ART] Webster, Robin, and Leslie Miner. "Focus on Visi On." Personal Computer World November 1983. pp.202-207.
Review of VisiCorp's Visi On software system (Visi On Calc, Visi On Graph, and Visi On Word).

[ART] Whitehead, Dan. "In the Chair with Mel Croucher." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.92-95.

[ART] Whitlock, Richard. "STE Bus." Practical Electronics Part 1: 'The Omnibus is Here!', December 1986. pp.38-41.
A standardised 8-bit bus.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "Developer Lookback: LucasArts." Retro Gamer Part 1: No. 27. pp.32-39; Part 2: No. 28. pp.20-25.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "The Making of 'Chuckie Egg'." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.88-91.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "The Making of 'Dragon's Lair'." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.54-57.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "The Making of 'Exile'." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.30-34.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "The Making of 'Pinball Dreams'." Retro Gamer No. 26. pp.58-61.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "The Making of 'Superfrog'." Retro Gamer No. 38. pp.82-85.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "The Making of 'The Secret of Monkey Island'." Retro Gamer No. 34. pp.58-61.

[ART] Wild, Kim. "Super Sonic." Retro Gamer No. 26. pp.32-39.
A retrospective on Sonic the Hedgehog (1991-2006).

[ART] Wilkes, Maurice Vincent. "Computers before Silicon: Design Decisions on EDSAC." IEE Review Vol. 36, No. 11. (1990). pp.429-431.

[ART] Williams, Anthony. "Field Programmable Gate Arrays." Electronics Today International August 1991. pp.51-53.
A feature on Xilinx FPGAs.

[ART] Worlock, Peter. "A Flawless Performace." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 20. 15-21 May 1986. p.12.
Review of the Centronics GLP II printer.

[ART] Wrightson, Kendall. "Music Hardware." Your Computer September 1984. pp.65-68.


Early Computers by Manufacturer

Bendix

Machines: G-15 (about $50k in 1959).

British Tabulating Machine Co. Ltd.

In 1958 BTM (the British Tabulating Machine Co. Ltd., formed 1904) merged with Powers-Samas to form ICT: International Computers and Tabulators. Machines: 1200; 1201; Diana; HEC.

Burroughs

Sold by the ElectroData Division of the Burroughs Corporation. Machines: B205 ($150k-$350k in 1959); B220 ($250k-$1m in 1959); B6500; B6700.

CDC

Machines: 7600.

Scales, L. E. Standard ICL 1900, CDC 7600 and IBM 360/370 FORTRAN. Liverpool: Univ. of Liverpool Computer Laboratory, 1976.
Laboratory Report, 001/3.

Computer Automation

Machines: PDC808.

Ward, Brice. Computer Technician's Handbook. No. 554; Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1971.
1st printing: March 1971; 2nd printing: November 1972; 3rd printing: May 1974 (475, [5]pp). Contents: [I. Techniques & Circuitry:] 1. Introduction to Computers; 2. Number Systems; 3. Coding Systems; 4. The Teletype; 5. Boolean Algebra; 6. Basic Computer Circuits; 7. Computer Blocks; 8. Decoding, Gating & Steering Arrays; 9. Counters, Shift Registers & Memories; 10. Adders; [II. Analysis of a Typical Small Computer:] 11. General Description of the PDC808; 12. Processor Instructions; 13. Input-Output Section; 14. I-O Interface Reference; [III. Maintenance:] 15. Introduction to Maintenance; 16. System & Functional Components; 17. Processor Operation; 18. Input-Output Operation; 19. Diagnostic Information.

Data General

Machines: Eclipse S/100; Eclipse S/200; Nova; Nova 2; Nova 2-10; Nova 800; Nova 800 Jumbo; Nova 820; Nova 840; Nova 1200; Nova 1200 Jumbo; Nova 1210; Nova 1220; Supernova; Supernova SC.

[Manual: Hardware]
Data General. How to Use the Nova Computers.
Southboro, Massachusetts: Data General, 1971.
By William English. Coded: DG NM-5 (205pp in various pagings). Other editions: Southboro, Massachusetts: Data General, 1972 (coded: DG NM-6; 241pp in various pagings); Southboro, Massachusetts: Data General, 1974 (coded: DG NM-6; 242pp in various pagings). Copy examined: Southboro, Massachusetts: Data General, February 1974 (multi-paged; Rev.07; coded: 015-000009-07; on rear: '50M © October 1972'; 'A System Reference Manual for the Nova, Supernova, Nova 1200 Series, Nova 800 Series, Supernova SC'). Contents (February 1974 edition): 1. Introduction; 2. Central Processor; 3. Basic I/O Equipment; 4. Magentic Tape; 5. Discs; 6. Analog Conversion Equipment; 7. Data Communications; Appendices.

[Manual: Software]
Data General. Introduction to Programming the Nova Computers. Users Manual.
[Southboro, Massachusetts]: Data General, 1972.
Publication code: 093-000067-01. [Stanford University Catalogue.]

[Manual: Software]
Data General. Fortran IV. User's Manual.
[Southboro, Massachusetts]: Data General, 1973.
Publication code: 093-000053-06. [Stanford University Catalogue, subject given as 'Nova Computers'.]

Kidder, Tracy. The Soul of a New Machine. Boston: Little, Brown, 1981.
293pp. Thorndike, Maine: Thorndike Press, 1981 (471pp; Large print edition). New York: Avon, 1982 (293pp). London: Allen Lane, 1982 (254pp). Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1983; 1987. New York: Modern Library, 1997 (xii, [4], 384pp; With a new introduction by the author). Boston, Massachusetts: Little, Brown, 2000 (293pp). Pulitzer Prize-winning classic. Kidder describes the creation of a new computer by a team of engineers at Data General.

Program: Assembler (for the Nova Supernova Systems). [Southboro, Massachusetts]: Data General, 1969.
Publication code: 093-000017-02. [Stanford University Catalogue.]

Program: Single User BASIC (for the Nova Supernova Systems). [Southboro, Massachusetts]: Data General, 1970.
Publication code: 093-000042-01. [Stanford University Catalogue.]

DEC

Digital Equipment Corporation founded in 1957 by Ken Olson and Harlan Anderson. Machines: LINC-8 (Laboratory INstrumentation Computer; Commercial version of a design produced by Wesley Clark and Charles Molnar at Lincoln Labs., March 1962); PDP-1 (Programmable Data Processor; 1960; 50 built); PDP-4 (1962; 45 built); PDP-5 (1963; 1000 built); PDP-6 (1964; 23 built); PDP-7 (1965; 120 built); PDP-8 (1965; c.50,000 built); PDP-8/A; PDP-8/E (20 card slots; linear power supply); PDP-8/F (10 card slots; switching power supply); PDP-8I (First TTL version of the PDP-8 family); PDP-8/M (OEM model of the 8/F); PDP-9 (1966; 445 built); PDP-10 (1967; c.700 built; also known as the DECSYSTEM-20); PDP-11 (1970; >600,000 built); PDP-12 (1969; 725 built); PDP-15 (1970; 790 built); VAX-11 (Virtual Address eXtension). [Source: PDP-8 FAQ.]

PDP-11 range: PDP-11/05 (for OEM use); PDP-11/10 (for end-users in labs and education); PDP-11/20 (the original PDP-11); PDP-11/40 (up to 256K RAM); PDP-11/45 (up to 256K RAM); LSI-11 (single board system with 8K RAM); LSI-11/2 (an LSI-11 with no RAM); PDP-11/03 (boxed version of the LSI-11, with a PSU and serial port. A modern alternative to the PDP-11/05 and PDP-11/10).

[Manual]
Introduction to Programming: PDP-8 Family Computers.
Maynard: Digital Equipment Corp., 1968.
Small Computer Handbook series. Prepared by the Software Writing Group, Programming Department, Digital Equipment Corporation.

[Manual]
PDP-8/E, PDP-8/M & PDP-8/F Small Computer Handbook.
Maynard: Digital Equipment Corp., 1970.
PDP-8 Handbook series. Prepared by the Software Documentation Programming Department, Digital Equipment Corporation.

Struble, George W. Business Information Processing with BASIC: Workbook PDP-11. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1980.

[ART] Lord, Mike. "In Praise of the PDP-11." Personal Computer World Part 1: July 1978. pp.26-28; Part 2: September 1978. pp.35-38.
A description of the PDP-11.

Elliott

Machines: 152 (1947); 153 (1947); 401 (1953); 402 (1955); 402F (1957); 403 (also known as the WREDAC; 1955) ; 405 (1956); 502 (1962); 503 (1963); 802 (1958); 803 (Models A, B, C); 903 (1965); 920M (1967); 4120 (1965); 4130 (1966); ARCH 2020 (1970); ARCH 2030 (1970); Eccles (1953); MCS 920B (1965); Nicholas (1952).

English Electric

In 1969 ICT and English Electric merged to form ICL. The ICL Archive (based upon the collection originally held in the ICL Company Musem, Stevenage) is held by the Science Museum, London. Machines: Deuce (1955); Deuce 2 (1955); Deuce 2a (1957); KDF6 (1963); KDF7 (1965); KDF8 (1964); KDF9 (1963); KDN2 (1962); KDP10 (1962; RCA 501); System 4/10 (1967); System 4/30 (1967); System 4/50; System 4/70 (1967).

[Manual: KDF9]
An English Electric-Leo-Marconi Mini Manual.
Kidsgrove, Stoke-on-Trent, Staffordshire: English-Electric-Leo-Marconi Computers, [196-].
Spiral-bound.

[Manual: KDF9]
KDF9 ALGOL Programming.
[Oxford]: Oxford Univ. Computing Laboratory, January 1964.
[2], iv, 131, [1], v-ix, [3]pp. Appears to be a reprint of a work originally published: Kidsgrove, Stoke-on-Trent, Staffordshire: English Electric-Leo Computers Ltd., [19--]. The title-page appears to be an altered copy of the original. The date appears in the same fount as 'Copied with the kind permission of' (which is above the original imprint details). Other codes on the title-page: 'Publication 1002' and '500663'. A mimeographed sheet, folded twice and slipped in, has the title Errors in 'KDF9 ALGOL Programming' Manual (1pp). This sheet has a watermark with 'B&A' within a circular frame containing the text: 'Business Aids' (above) 'Mechanised' (below).

Cheney, A. G. An Experiment in Selective Dissemination of Information of Plasma Physics Literature Using a KDF9 Computer: Final Report for Period March 1967 to December 1969. Abingdon: UKAE Research Group, Culham Laboratory, 1971.
25ff. OSTI Report, 5094. Report to OSTI on Project S1/27/09.

Dickie, Eleanor A. "A Suite of Programs for Textual Analysis of the KDF9 Computer." M.Sc. Thesis. Glasgow Univ., 1969.

Doherty, G. The KDF9 programme EDIT1. London: [Sold by] HMSO, [1965].
12pp. Dated July 1965. Placed on sale: 21 December 1965. Sold but not published by the HMSO. United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority AEEW M604.

Hadfield, M. KDF9 Programs for Creep Laboratory Data Processing. Liverpool: Univ. of Liverpool, Department of Mechanical Engineering, 1971.

Hadfield, M. Supplement to Manual: KDF9 Programs for Creep Laboratory Data Processing. Liverpool: Univ. of Liverpool, Department of Mechanical Engineering, 1972.

Halsall, M. J. Additional Edit Facilities Available on a KDF9 Version of WIMS D. [n.p.]: Atomic Energy Establishment, 1980.
United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority AEEW M856.

Hickman, Dorothy. "A Review of Simulation Languages Based on Algol; Together with a Proposed Simulation Language for the KDF9 Computer." M.Sc. Thesis. Liverpool Univ., 1965.

Morrison, Ronald. "Enhanced Graphical Output Facilities for the KDF9 Computer." M.Sc. Thesis. Glasgow Univ., 1971.

Wilson, John Morven. "Multi-Access Remote Job Entry for KDF9." M.Sc. Thesis. Glasgow Univ., 1970.

[ART] Davis, G. M. "The English Electric KDF9 Computer System.", Computer Bulletin December 1960, pp.119-120.

ETL

The Electrotechnical Laboratory of the Ministry of Industrial Science and Technology, Tokyo produced the ETL Mark I as a prototype in 1952, and the ETL Mark II in 1955 using electro-mechanical relays.

Goto, Mochinori, Yasuo Komamiya, Ryouta Suekane, Masahide Takagi, and Shigeru Kuwabara. Theory and Structure of the Automatic Relay Computer E.T.L. Mark II. Tokyo: Electrotechnical Laboratory, 1956.
Published in September 1956.

Ferranti

Machines: 1600D (1973); Mark 1 (1951; Originally by Manchester University; 2 sold, 1 exported); Mark 1* (1953; 7 sold, 2 exported); Apollo; Argus (1958); Argus 200 (1969); Argus 300 (1969); Argus 500 (1970); Argus 600 (1970); Argus 600-2 (1972); Argus 700; Atlas 1 (1962; Originally by Manchester Univ.); Atlas 2 (1964); Mercury (1957; 19 sold, 6 exported); Nimrod; Orion 1 (1963); Orion 2 (1964); Pegasus 1 (1956; 26 sold, 3 exported); Pegasus 2 (1959; 12 sold, 1 exported); Perseus (1959; 2 sold, 2 exported); Poseidon; Sirius (1960); Ferranti-Packard FP6000 (1963; Canadian machine).

[Manual: Atlas]
Features of the Ferranti Atlas Computer.
[n.p.]: [Ferranti Ltd.], 1961.

[Manual: Atlas]
Ferranti Atlas and Orion Computers: Model 'S' Flexowriter.
[Manchester]: [Ferranti, Computer Department], [n.d.].
List CS 366.

[Manual: Mercury]
Ferranti Mercury Computer Programming Manual.
London: London Computer Centre, [1957].
Issue 1.

[Manual: Mercury]
Ferranti Mercury Computer: Programmes Available in the Interchange Scheme.
London: 1958.

[Manual: Mercury]
Ferranti Mercury Computer Programmers' Handbook.
London: London Computer Centre, [n.d.].
List CS 225.

[Manual: Mercury]
Ferranti Mercury Computer Programmers' Handbook.
Manchester; London: Ferranti Ltd., 1960.
List CS 225A.

[Manual: Mercury]
Ferranti Mercury Computer. Input Routine.
London: Ferranti Ltd., [1960].
British Library copy reproduced from manuscript.

[Manual: Mercury]
Ferranti Mercury Computer. Autocode Library Specifications.
London: Ferranti Ltd., [1961].

[Manual: Mercury]
Ferranti Mercury Computer. Library Specifications.
London: Ferranti Ltd., [1961]. Vol. 1.

[Manual: Nimrod]
Faster than Thought. The Ferranti Nimrod Digital Computer. A Brief Survey of the Field of Digital Computing with Specific Reference to the Ferranti Nimrod Computer.
Hollinwood, Lancashire: Ferranti Ltd., 1951.

[Manual: Orion]
The Structure of the Ferranti Orion Computer.
London: Ferranti Ltd., 1961.
Computer System Profiles, 2.

[Manual: Orion]
Ferranti Atlas and Orion Computers: Model 'S' Flexowriter.
[Manchester]: [Ferranti, Computer Department], [n.d.].
List CS 366.

[Manual: Pegasus]
Ferranti Pegasus Computer: Programming Manual.
Manchester: Ferranti, Computer Department, 1955.
Issue 1.

[Manual: Pegasus]
Ferranti Pegasus Computer: Library Specifications.
London: [Ferranti Ltd.], 1956-1962. 2 vols.
Loose leaf; Vol. I has Errata List 3 inserted.

[Manual: Pegasus]
A Description of the Ferranti Pegasus Computer, with Magnetic Tape Equipment.
2nd edition; Hollinwood, Lancashire: Ferranti Ltd., 1958.

[Manual: Pegasus]
The Ferranti Pegasus Data-Processing System.
Manchester: Ferranti, Computer Department, 1958.

[Manual: Pegasus]
Ferranti Pegasus Computer: The Pegasus Autocode.
Manchester: Ferranti, Computer Department, [c.1958-1959].
List CS 217A.

[Manual: Pegasus]
Ferranti Pegasus Computer.
London: [Ferranti Ltd.], [1960-1961]. 2 vols.

[Manual: Pegasus]
Ferranti Pegasus Computer. Library Programmes. Vol. 1.
London: [Ferranti Ltd.], [1961].

[Manual: Pegasus]
The Pegasus Programming Manual.
London: Ferranti Ltd., 1962.
List CS 333. [8], 319pp. By G. E. Felton. With a frontispiece and 16 further photographic plates. Originally written for the Pegasus 1, the book was adapted to include coverage for the Pegasus 2 by Mrs. Mary Blyton. Contents: 1. Introduction - Digital Computers; 2. Pegasus; 3. The Order-Code; 4. Some Simple Programmes; 5. Modification; 6. Input and Output; 7. The Initial Orders; 8. Assembly; 9. Some Programming Techniques; 10. Magnetic Tape; 11. Punched Cards and Line Printers; Appendix 1. The Pegasus Order-Code; Appendix 2. The Lesser Library; Appendix 3. Special Register 53 - Creed 3000 Punch; Appendix 4. A Guide to the Timing of Programmes; Appendix 5. Abbreviations and Symbols; Appendix 6. Entries to Initial Order Routines; Appendix 7. Index to the Library.

Aspinall, David. "Some Aspects of the Design and Construction of ATLAS, a High Speed Parallel Digital Computing Machine." Ph.D. Thesis. Univ. of Manchester, 1961.

Ferranti Ltd. The Application of a Ferranti Orion Data Processing Installation to the Remechanisation of the Ordinary Branch Central Recording System of the Prudential Assurance Company Limited. [n.p.]: Ferranti Ltd., December 1959.

Ferranti Ltd. Ferranti Pegasus [Computer]: A Description of a Programme for the Stressing of Multiple-Anchor 3-Dimensional Pipework Systems. London: [Ferranti Ltd.], 1959.
Copy at Trinity College, Dublin.

Ferranti Ltd. Ferranti Sirius Computer. Pipe System Analysis and Stressing. London: [Ferranti Ltd.], 1962.

Ferranti Ltd. Yesterday and Today. A Brief Story of the Ferranti Organisation. Hollinwood, Lancashire: Ferranti Ltd., 1957.

Hassitt, A. Programme for Solving the Multigroup Neutron Diffusion Equations in Two Space Dimensions on the Ferranti Mercury Computer. London: H.M.S.O., 1958.
AERE [Atomic Energy Research Establishment] T/R 2487. Sold but not published by H.M.S.O.

Kilburn, Tom. "From Cathode Ray Tube to Ferranti Mark I." Resurrection: The Bulletin of the Computer Conservation Society, Vol. 1, No. 2, 1990, pp.16-20.

Lamb, John. "The Mighty Giant that Shouldered Britain's Hopes: Ferranti's 1958 Atlas Mainframe." Computing, 12 May 1988, pp.22-23.

Lavington, Simon Hugh. The Pegasus Story: A History of a Vintage British Computer. London: Science Museum, 2000.

Reader, K. Pegasus Computer Program-Sensitivity Analysis of Solutions Produced by the Ferranti Linear Programming Routines. London: British Iron and Steel Research Association, 1964.
British Library copy reproduced from typewriting.

Stinson, Iain. The Story of ATLAS: A Computer. Llandudno: Richard Williams and Partners, [c.1972-1973].

General Electric

General Electric took over Bull and Olivetti in 1964. In April 1970, General Electric sold its computing department to Honeywell.

GE-115 (originally the Olivetti Gamma 115).

GE-200 series: GE-215 (a scaled-down version of the GE-225); GE-225 (1960; derived from the GE-312 and GE-412; designed for business applications; used a GECOM compiler (a COBOL dialect with many ALGOL features), TABSOL (a language based on decision tables), WIZ (an algebraic compiler), FORTRAN II, GAP (a translator for IBM 650 and LGP30) and a Report Generator); GE-235 (a revision of the GE-225, three times faster, developed 1962, delivered 1964); GE-265 (1965; a GE-235 processor and a Datanet-30 communication processor upon which the first commercial time-sharing system ran using the DTSS operating system, later renamed Mark I).

GE-312 (process control computer).

GE-400 series: GE-412 (process control computer); GE-415; GE-425; GE-435.

GE-600 series (symmetric multi-processing systems running GECOS-II and GECOS-III): GE-625; GE-635; GE-655 (1967).

Hewlett-Packard (Palo Alto, California)

Machines: 2000 Series: 2000; 2000A Time Sharing System; 2100; 2100A; 2100S; 2105A; 2108A; 2114; 2114A (16-bit; 4k-8K RAM; 48Kg); 2114B; 2114C; 2115A (16-bit; 4K-8K RAM; 29.5Kg); 2115B; 2116B (16-bit; 8K-32K RAM; 104Kg); 2116C.

[Manual]
A Pocket Guide to Hewlett-Packard Computers.
Palo Alto, California: Hewlett-Packard, [1969].
Multi-paged. Date at base of spine. Code: 5950-8313. Covers the 2114A, 2115A, and 2116B. Contents: Specifications and Basic Operation Manual; Assembler Reference Manual; Basic Control System Reference Manual; FORTRAN Reference Manual; Program Library Reference Manual; BASIC Language Reference Manual.

IBM

Machines: 4Pi/CP (1966); 4Pi/EP (1966); 4Pi/TC (1967); 305 RAMAC (1957); 360/20 (1966); 360/25 (1968); 360/30 (1965); 360/40 (1965); 360/44 (1966); 360/50 (1965); 360/65 (1966); 360/67 (1966); 360/75 (1965); 360/90 (1967); 370/115 (1973); 370/145; 370/155-II; 370/158; 370/165-II; 370/168; 370/195; 604 (1953); 607 (1950); 608 (1957); 609 (1957); 610 Autopoint (1954); 650 (1954); 701 (1953); 702 (1954); 704 (1955); 705 Model 1 (1956); 705 Model 2 (1957); 709 (1958); 801 (1979); 1130 (1965); 1401 (1960); 1401-H (1967); 1410 (1961); 1440 (1963); 1460 (1963); 1620 (1960); 1620 MOD II (1962); 1710 (1962); 1720 (1962); 1800 (1966); 3031 (1977); 3032 (1977); 3033 (1977); 3081; 3083; 3084; 3090; 4300 (1979); 4331; 4341; 4361; 4381 (1983); 5100 (1975); 7010 (1963); 7030 (Stretch; 1961); 7040 (1963); 7044 (1963); 7070 (1960); 7072 (1962); 7074 (1961); 7080 (1961); 7090 (1959); 7094 (1962); 7094 II (1964); 7700 (1964); 7750 (1963); 9370; CPC (1949); Gemini Guidance Computer (1963; IBM/NASA); SAGE (1957); Series/1 Model 3 (1977); Series/1 Model 5 (1977); SSEC (1949); System/3 (1970); System/3 Model 6 (1970); System/3 Model 8 (1974); System/3 Model 10 (1970); System/3 Model 15 (1975); System 23 Datamaster (1979; VDU, 2 FDDs, and keyboard all built-in to a desktop unit); System 32 (1975); System 34 (1977); System 36 (1981); System 38 (1983).

[Manual: 370]
IBM System/370: Principles of Operation.
10th edition; Poughkeepsie, New York: International Business Machines Corporation, 1983.
GA22-7000-9. 11th edition: 1987, GA22-7000-10.

[Manual: 7090]
Reference Manual: IBM 7090 Data Processing System.
4th edition; New York: International Business Machines Corporation, 1962.
Previous edition: 1961.

[Manual: 7090]
IBM 7090/7094 Programming Systems. FORTRAN IV Language.
Revised edition; New York: International Business Machines Corporation, 1964.
IBM Systems Reference Library. C28-6274-3. Previous edition: 1963.

[Manual: 7094]
IBM 7090/7094 Programming Systems. FORTRAN IV Language.
Revised edition; New York: International Business Machines Corporation, 1964.
IBM Systems Reference Library. C28-6274-3. Previous edition: 1963.

Abel, Peter. Programming Assembler Language. Reston, Va.: Reston Pub. Co., [c.1979].
For the IBM 360/370. 2nd edition: 1984; 3rd edition: Programming Assembler Language: IBM 370 Series Architecture and Assembly Language, Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1989.

Allen, F. R. Zadoc: A Two Group, Two Dimensional Fuel Management Programme for IBM 7090 or Stretch. London: H.M.S.O., [1965].
AEEW R425. Sold but not published by H.M.S.O.

Alpiar, R. Methuselah I: A Universal Assessment Programme for Liquid Moderated Reactor Cells, using IBM 7090 or Stretch Computers. London: H.M.S.O., May 1963 [ie. April 1964].
AEEW R135. Sold but not published by H.M.S.O.

Asta, Frank A. IBM 370 Assembly Language for DOS and OS: Understanding Software and Hardware Systems. Menlo Park, California: Benjamin/Cummings, [c.1988].

Batten, William T. Understanding the IBM 360 and 370 Computers. With Machine Language Programming. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, [1974].

Bookman, Harvey. COBOL/370: For VS COBOL and COBOL II Programmers. New York: McGraw-Hill, [c.1993].
J. Ranade IBM series.

Brearley, Harrington Cooper. Introduction to Assembler Language Programming for the IBM system/360-/370. New York: Macmillan; London: Collier Macmillan, 1974.

Bromage, Gordon E. The Cowan-Zealot Suite of Computer Programs for Atomic Structure: Introductory Guide and Documentation with Specific Information for use on the S.R.C.'s IBM 360/195 Computer. Abingdon: Appleton Laboratory, 1978.

Carrano, Frank M. Assembler Language Programming for the IBM 370. Menlo Park, California: Benjamin/Cummings, [c.1988].

Chatterley, F. J. A General-Purpose Multiple Regression Programme for the IBM 7090. London: H.M.S.O., 1966.
TRG Report 1198(W). Sold but not published by H.M.S.O.

Collopy, David M. Assembler Language for the IBM System 370: A Modular Approach. Danvers, Massachusetts: Boyd & Fraser, [c.1994].

Cooper, Brian Edward. Statistical Fortran Programs: IBM 7090, IBM 7030, ICT-Atlas. Chilton, Berkshire: Atlas Computer Laboratory, 1965.
ACL/R 2.

Coschi, G., et al. WATCOM APL Users' Guide: For the IBM 370 with VM/SP CMS. Waterloo, Ontario: WATCOM Publications, 1983.

Crigger, F. W., et al. WATCOM BASIC Users' Guide: For the IBM 370 with VM/SP CMS. Waterloo, Ontario: WATCOM Publications, 1983.

Dirksen, P. H., and J. W. Welch. WATCOM COBOL Users' Guide: For the IBM 370 with VM/SP CMS. Waterloo, Ontario: WATCOM Publications, 1983.

Dirksen, P. H., and J. W. Welch. WATCOM FORTRAN Users' Guide: For the IBM 370 with VM/SP CMS. Waterloo, Ontario: WATCOM Publications, 1983.

Fox, W. T. FORTRAN and FAP Program for Calculating and Plotting Time-Trend Curves using an IBM 7090 or 7094/1401. [Kansas: Kansas Univ. State Geological Survey], 1964.

Gately, P., et al. The Calculation of Group Averaged Neutron Cross Sections: The Development of Galaxy 3 Facilities in S2 (Fortran) Language for the IBM 7030 (STRETCH) Computer During 1965. London: H.M.S.O., [1966].
AWRE Report O-103/65. Sold but not published by H.M.S.O.

Gibson, Mary Elizabeth. "Cataloguing the Ross Archives at the London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine using a Famulus Package on an IBM 360 Computer." MLS Thesis. Loughborough Univ. of Technology, 1980.

Graham, J. W., and J. B. Schueler. WATCOM Editor Users' Guide: For the IBM 370 with VM/SP CMS. Waterloo, Ontario: WATCOM Publications, 1983.

Gratton, C. P., and P. E. Smith. G.M.S.I.: A Generalised Multigroup System of Calculations Using the IBM 7030 (Stretch) Computer. London: H.M.S.O., [1965].
AEEW M458. Sold but not published by H.M.S.O.

Green, C. The IBM 7090 Programmes[:] Perseus, Ariadne and Cerberus. London: H.M.S.O., [1964].
AEEW R390. Sold but not published by H.M.S.O.

Gruenberger, Fred Joseph, and Daniel Delbert McCracken. Introduction to Electronic Computers: Problem Solving with the IBM 1620. New York: Wiley, [1963].
A Rand Corporation research study.

Hall, Peter L., and D. K. Ross. QUELDA: A Quasi-Elastic Neutron Scattering Data Analysis Programme Available on the Rutherford Laboratory IBM 360 System. [Birmingham]: Univ. of Birmingham Department of Physics, [1978].

Harrison, G. M. Library Software Package - Macros and I/O Micros: For use on IBM 360/370 Compatible Systems. [London]: [British Library, 1974].
G. M. Harrison was the senior programmer.

Harrison, G. M. Library Software Package - Module 1: For IBM 360/370 Compatible Systems. [London]: [British Library, 1973].
G. M. Harrison was the senior programmer.

Harrison, G. M. Library Software Package - Module 2: For IBM 360/370 Compatible Systems. [London]: [British Library, 1973].
G. M. Harrison was the senior programmer.

Harrison, G. M. Library Software Package - Module 4: For IBM 360/370 Compatible Systems. [London]: [British Library, 1974].
G. M. Harrison was the senior programmer.

Hebditch, David L. Teleprocessing Monitor Packages for IBM 370. Manchester: NCC Publications, 1978.

Kacmar, Charles J. IBM 370 Assembly Language with ASSIST, Structured Concepts, and Advanced Topics. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, [c.1988].

Kennedy, James H. IBM 1401 Computer Produced and Maintained Weapon Data Subject Authority Document. Livermore, California: Univ. of California, Lawrence Radiation Laboratory, 1964.
UCRL-7554, Mathematics and Computers, UC-32, TID-4500 (26th edition).

Kennedy, James H. IBM 1401 Computer Produced and Maintained Keyword-Plus-Title (KWPT) Index for Reports, Photographs, and Specifications. Livermore, California: Univ. of California, Lawrence Radiation Laboratory, 1964.
UCRL-7556, Mathematics and Computers, UC-32, TID-4500 (26th edition).

Kirk, David Shelby. COBOL/370 for Power Programmers. New York: Wiley, 1994.
The Wiley-QED IBM Mainframe series.

Knowles, K. J. Small Angle Neutron Scattering Analysis Programs on the Rutherford Laboratory IBM 360/195 Computers. Chilton: Science Research Council Rutherford and Appleton Laboratories, 1980.

Kudlick, Michael. Assembly Language Programming for the IBM Systems 360 and 370. Dubuque, Iowa: W. C. Brown, 1980.
2nd edition: Assembly Language Programming for the IBM Systems 360 and 370 for OS and DOS, 1983; 3rd edition: Assembly Language Programming for the IBM System 370 and Compatible Computers, [c.1988].

Kuo, Shan Sun. Assembler Language for FORTRAN, COBOL and PL/I Programmers: IBM 370-360. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1974.

Laurie, Edward J. Computers and How They Work: IBM 1620, IBM 1401, IBM 650. Cincinnati: South-Western Publishing, 1963.

Leben, Joe, and Jim Arnold. IBM CPU and Storage Architecture: System/370-Mode and 370/XA-Mode Processors. New York: Wiley, [c.1984].
Data Processing Training series.

Leben, Joe, and Jim Arnold. IBM I/O Architecture and Virtual Storage Concepts: System/370-Mode and 370/XA-Mode Processors. New York: Wiley, [c.1984].
Data Processing Training series.

Lindsay-Scott, A. "Performance Analysis of IBM OS/370 Systems from Accounting Data." MSc Thesis. Imperial College, London, 1974.

Loschetter, Richard F. RPG for IBM Systems/360, /370 and System/3. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1975.

Loudon, Thomas Victor. Analysis of Geological Data using ROKDOC, a Fortran IV Package for the IBM 360/65 Computer. London: H.M.S.O., 1974.
Institute of Geological Sciences Reports, 74-1.

Maisel, Herbert, and Donald L. Wright. Introduction to Electronic Digital Computers: With Emphasis on the System/360, FORTRAN IV, and PL/1. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1969.

McCracken, Daniel Delbert. A Guide to IBM 1401 Programming. New York: Wiley, 1961.

Moor, Ian W. "An Investigation into the Implementation of the MU5 Target Machine Language on an IBM System/370." MSc Thesis. Imperial College, London, 1978.

Nicaise, Keith H. IBM System/370 Assembler Language Programming. Blue Ridge Summit: TAB Books, [c.1990].

Pugh, Emerson William. Memories that Shaped an Industry: Decisions Leading to IBM System 360. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT, 1984.
MIT Press series in the History of Computing.

Rattenbury, Judith. Introduction to the IBM 360 Computer and OS/JCL (Job Control Language). Ann Arbor: Institute for Social Research, 1971.
Publications of the Institute for Social Research, University of Michigan. Survey Research Center series. Revised edition: 1974.

Rudd, Walter Greyson. Assembly Language Programming and the IBM 360 and 370 Computers. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1976.
Prentice-Hall series in Automatic Computation.

Saxon, James Anthony. Programming the IBM 7090: A Self-Instructional Programmed Manual. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1963.

Saxon, James Anthony. System 360/20 RPG programming: A Self-Instructional Manual. Belmont, California: Dickenson Pub. Co., [1968].

Saxon, James Anthony, Herman S. Englander, and William R. Englander. System 360 Programming: A Self-Instructional Manual. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, [1968].

Saxon, James Anthony, and William S. Plette. Programming the IBM 1401: A Self-Instructional Programmed Manual. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1962.

Scales, L. E. Standard ICL 1900, CDC 7600 and IBM 360/370 FORTRAN. Liverpool: Univ. of Liverpool Computer Laboratory, 1976.
Laboratory Report, 001/3.

Sherman, Philip Martin. Programming and Coding the IBM 709-7090-7094 Computers. New York: Wiley, 1963.

Stern, Nancy Beth, Alden Sager, and Robert Alan Stern. 370/360 Assembler Language Programming. New York: Wiley, 1979.
Revised as Assembler Language Programming for IBM and IBM-Compatible Computers. New York: Wiley, [c.1986].

Stoddard, Spotswood D. Principles of Assembler Language Programming for the IBM 370. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1985.

Struble, George W. Assembler Language Programming: The I.B.M. System/360. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1969].
2nd edition: Assembler Language Programming: The IBM System 360 and 370, 1975; 3rd edition: Assembler Language Programming: The IBM System/370 Family, 1984.

Taylor, Alan, ed. The IBM 370 papers, 1971-1980: IBM's Internal 'Grey Book' Reports to Top Management, as Revealed in Federal Court. With Companion Commentary by Alan Taylor. Framingham, Massachusetts: A. Taylor & Associates, [c.1973]. 4 vols.
I: System 370/135; II: System 370/145; III: System 370/155; IV: System 370/165.

Wilson, Stephen. Diagrammatic Many-Body Perturbation Expansion for Atoms and Molecules: Implementation on the IBM 370/165 Computer at the Daresbury Laboratory. Daresbury: Daresbury Laboratory, 1978.
Technical Memorandum DL/SRF/TM.

ICL

In 1958 BTM (the British Tabulating Machine Co. Ltd., formed 1904) merged with Powers-Samas to form ICT: International Computers and Tabulators. In 1969 ICT and English Electric merged to form ICL. The ICL Archive (based upon the collection originally held in the ICL Company Musem, Stevenage) is held by the Science Museum, London. Machines: 2903 (1973); 2904; 2950 (1978); 2953; 2957; 2960 (1975); 2966; 2970 (1974); 2980 (1975); Atlas 10/25; DAP (1979); DAPs (1987; ICL AMT); DRS20; ME29 Model 33; ME29 Model 37; ME29 Model 45; ME29 Model 54; miniDAP (1985); Series 39 Level 30; Series 39 Level 89; System 4; System 25.

Scales, L. E. Standard ICL 1900, CDC 7600 and IBM 360/370 FORTRAN. Liverpool: Univ. of Liverpool Computer Laboratory, 1976.
Laboratory Report, 001/3.

ICT

In 1958 BTM (the British Tabulating Machine Co. Ltd., formed 1904) merged with Powers-Samas to form ICT: International Computers and Tabulators. In 1969 ICT and English Electric merged to form ICL. Machines: 1101 (1960); 1300 (1962); 1301 (1962); 1500 (1962; RCA 301); 1900 (1964); 1901 (1966); 1901A (1968); 1902 (1965); 1902A (1968); 1903 (1965); 1903A (1968); 1904E (1965); 1904F (1965); 1905 (1965); 1905E (1964); 1905F (1964); 1906 (1967); 1906A (1969); 1906E (1966); 1906F (1966); 1907 (1967); 1907E (1966); 1907F (1966); 1908A (1969); 1909 (1965).

J. Lyons

LEO was created by J. Lyons & Company to manage their company affairs. Machines: LEO (Lyons Electronic Office; 1951; 2K 17-bit words); LEO II (1957; 8K 19-bit words); LEO IIc (8K 19-bit words); LEO III (1962; 64K 21-bit words); LEO 326 (1965; 64K 21-bit words; Faster than LEO 360); LEO 360 (1965; 64K 21-bit words; Faster than LEO III).

Bird, Peter John. LEO: The First Business Computer. Wokingham, Berkshire: Hasler Publishing, 1994.
vii, 272pp. Contents: 1. Company Origins; 2. Clerical Efficiency Endeavours; 3. Computer Construction Begins; 4. Full Computer Manufacture; 5. Further Automation Improvements; 6. End of an Era - A New Beginning; [Appendices:] 1. Program Actions on the LEO I Computer; 2. LEO II Features at February 1958; 3. LEO I and II Summary of Machine Test Programs; 4. LEO II Prices Quoted to NRDC in January 1959; 5. The First Clerical Jobs: LEO I and II; 6. Sales of LEO II Computers; 7. Program Actions on the LEO III Computer; 8. Components Required to Manufacture a LEO III; 9. Sales of LEO III Computers; 10. Standard Utility Software Supplied with LEO III; 11. Sales of Autolector (Document Reader); 12. Sales of Xeronic Printers; 13. How LEO I Worked - A Semi-Technical Description; 14. Summary of LEO Characteristics.

Caminer, David. LEO: The Incredible Story of the World's First Business Computer. New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 1998.
xxiv, 392pp.

Ferry, Georgina. A Computer Called LEO. Lyons Teashops and the World's First Office Computer. London: Fourth Estate, 2003.
xi, 220pp. Reprinted: London: HarperPerennial, 2004 (xi, 220pp). Contents: 1. A Mission to Manage; 2. The Electronic Brain; 3. Made in Britain; 4. A Computer for Lyons; 5. LEO Goes to Work; 6. In Business; 7. LEO's Last Roar.

Simmons, John Richardson Mainwaring. Leo and the Managers. London: Macdonald, 1962.

NCR (National Cash Register Co., Dayton, Ohio)

Originally the National Manufacturing Co., becoming the National Cash Register Co. in 1884. NCR acquired Computer Research Corporation (CRC), of Hawthorne, California, in 1952, establishing an Electronics Division the following year. Purchased by AT&T in 1991 (for $7.4bn) NCR became an independent company again in 1997. Machines: 102-A (1955-1956); 102D; 280 (1972); 299 (1974); 303; 304 (1958-1959); 315 (1960-1961); 390 (1960); 615 Century series (1968). NCR's first all integrated circuit computer was the Century 100 (1968).

[Manual]
Model 102-A General Purpose Computer. Operation and Maintenance Manual.
2 vols. Dayton, Ohio: National Cash Register Co., 1956.
Loose-leaf. Black 3-ring binder. Multi-paged. Vol. I: xvi, I-16, II-4, III-14, IV-60, V-38, VI-52, A-12, B-8, C-2, D-4, E-30, F-16, G-4, H-6, I-9.

Philco

Machines: Transac C-3000; Transac S-2000 ($1m+ in 1959).

Raytheon

Machines: 250 (1960); 404; 440 (1964); 520 (1965); 703 (1967); 704 (1969); 706 (1969); RAC-230 (1967); RAC-250 (1967); RAC-251 (1970); RAYDAC (1953); RDS-500 (1974).

Scott, Otto J. The Creative Ordeal: The Story of Raytheon. New York: Atheneum, 1974.

Raytheon 704 Computer User's Manual. Santa Ana, California: Raytheon Computer, 1970.
SP-351A. August 1970. Sectional pagination.

RCA

Machines: 110 (1961); 200 Series (1969); 300 (1960); 301 (1961; ICT 1500); 501 (1959, selling for $500k-$2m; English Electric KDP10); 601 (1961); 1301; 3301 (1964); BIZMAC I (1955); BIZMAC II (1955); CDP 1800 (1975); COSMAC 1801 (1974); SCP-234 (1972); Spectra 70/15 (1965); Spectra 70/25 (1965); Spectra 70/35 (1966); Spectra 70/45 (1966); Spectra 70/46 (1968); Spectra 70/55 (1966); Spectra 70/60 (1970); Spectra 70/61 (1971); VIC-36A (1967).

Saxon, James Anthony. Programming the RCA301: A Self-Instructional Programmed Manual. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, 1965.

Royal McBee

Machines: LGP-30 ($50k in 1959).

Stantec (Standard Telephones and Cables Ltd.)

Stantec ZEBRA: Valve (1957) and transistor (c.1964) versions. Programmed in Normal Code and Simple Code. The ZEBRA (Zeer Eenvoudig Binair Reken Apparaat) was designed by W. L. Van der Poel for the Dutch PTT but produced by Stantec in Newport, Monmouthshire, Wales. The first machine was delivered in 1957. One remains at the TechniekMuseum Delft, part of Delft University. The descriptive advertising sheet states that the machine had a 33 bit word length, an 8192 word magnetic drum storage unit spinning at 6000rpm, a maximum access time of 10ms, output to punch-tape or a printer, and had a monitoring CRT to display the contents of four stores at any time. It required a 3kVA power supply. It was made up of 3 parts: The Computer Cubicles housed the store, arithmetic and control units, as well as monitor and test equipment; The Control Desk had the I/O equipment and operating controls; The Power Cubicle contained the power supply unit. The electronic design was modular, so units could be removed for testing, replacements being slotted in.

Stantec Zebra Electronic Digital Computer [Newport, Monmouthshire]: [Standard Telephones and Cables Ltd.], [1958].
Single advertising sheet printed in peach, black, and white. 204 x 254mm. Coded: 'L/101', 'Ed.1/1' on the recto, and '8570' on the verso. Gives the address an address for Stantec's Information Processing Division as Corporation Road, Newport, Monmouthshire. The recto has a 200 x 140mm monochrome photograph of two women operating one of the machines.

[ART] Ord-Smith, R. J. "The Stantec-Zebra and its Interpretation." Annual Review in Automatic Programming. 1960. Vol. 1, pp.146-168.

[ART] Van der Poel, W. L. "The Simple Code for Zebra." P.T.T.-Bedrijf Deel. August 1959. Vol. 9, No. 2.

Thompson-Ramo-Wooldridge Products Co.

Machines: RW 300 ($100k-$200k in 1959).

UNIVAC

The UNIVAC name was owned by the Eckert-Mauchly Computer Corporation, Remington Rand Corporation, Sperry Rand Corporation, Sperry Corporation, and Unisys Corporation. Machines: UNIVAC I; UNIVAC 1100; 1100/80; 1101; 1103; 1103A; 1105; 1107; 1108; 1110; LARC; UNIVAC File Computer System; UNIVAC Solid-State Computer.

Gray, Julia H. Inte: A UNIVAC 1108/1110 Program for Numerical Integration with Rigorous Error Estimation. [Wisconsin]: Univ. of Wisconsin, Madison, Mathematics Research Center, 1975.

Gregory, A. S. Description of the Univac Version of APTLFT-FMILL Surface Milling Program in APT 4Q65 Univac Release. East Kilbride: National Engineering Laboratory, 1969.
NEL Report 415.

Gregory, A. S. NEL Version of APTLFT-FMILL for a Univac 1108 Computer. East Kilbride: National Engineering Laboratory, 1969.
NEL Report 420.

Kelly, John C., and Gary P. Route. UNIVAC 1108 Exec Level 32R2 Performance Handbook. Washington, D. C.: National Bureau of Standards, 1978.
Special Publication, National Bureau of Standards, 500-34. Computer Science and Technology series.

Lobley, A. P. J., and R. F. Templeman. Software Package for Simultaneous Access to Plotting Facilities on UNIVAC 1108. Wallingford: Institute of Hydrology, 1978.
Institute of Hydrology Report 54.

Lundstrom, David E. A Few Good Men from Univac. Cambridge, Massachusetts: MIT Press, 1987.
MIT Press series in the History of Computing. Reprinted: Bridgewater, N.J.: Replica Books, 1997.

Mohr, J. M., Ashok Kumar Agrawala, and J. F. Flannagan. A Guide to Major Job Accounting Systems: The Logger System of the UNIVAC 1100 Series Operating System. Washington, D. C.: Government Printing Office, 1978.
Computer Science and Technology series. Sponsored by the National Bureau of Standards Institute for Computer Science and Technology.

Saxon, James Anthony, and Richard W. Senseman. Programming and Wiring the UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor: A Self-Instructional Programmed Manual. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.: Prentice-Hall, [c.1964].

Soukup, J. A Computer Program for Finding a General Distribution Function of Several Sets of Random Aata (UNIVAC 1108 - Calcomp 663 - Fortran V). [Ottawa]: Dept. of Energy, Mines and Resources, [1971].
Papers of the Geological Survey of Canada, 71-20.

Stern, Nancy Beth. From ENIAC to UNIVAC: Appraisal of the Eckert-Mauchly Computers. Bedford, Massachusetts: Digital Press, 1981.
Digital Press History of Computing series.

Warner, Jeffrey. Fortran 4 Program for Construction of PI Diagrams with the Univac 1108 Computer. [Kansas: Kansas Univ. State Geological Survey], 1969.
Computer Contributions, Kansas State Geological Survey, 33.

[ART] Gray, George. "Engineering Research Associates and the Atlas Computer (UNIVAC 1101)." Unisys History Newsletter, Vol. 3, No. 3, June 1999.

Varian Data Machines (Irvine, California).

Irvine, California. Machines: 520/i (1968); 610 (1964); 611 (1965); 612 (1965); 620 (1965); 620/i (1969; 16-bit; 4K-32K RAM; 35lbs); 622/i (18-bit); 629/L; V-70 (1975); V-72; V-73 (1972); V-74; V-75 (1975).

[Manual]
Varian Data 620/i Computer Manual.
Irvine, California: Varian Data Machines, [1968].
viii, 314pp. Bulletin No. 605-A. Coded: '4/68 50'. Contents: 1. Summary of the Features of the Varian Data 620/i; 2. System Description; 3. Operational Instructions; 4. Input/Output Operation; 5. Control Console Operation; 6. Data 620/i Input/Output System; 7. Direct-Memory-Access-and-Interrupt Control; 8. I/O Cable Interface Characteristics; 9. Options; 10. Data 620/i Assembly System; 11. Data 620/i Subroutines; 12. FORTRAN; Appendices.


Modern Computers

77-68

Bear Microcomputer Systems (1977). 6800 or 6809 based SBC sold board-by-board in the United Kingdom by Stirling Microsystems of London.

Bear Microcomputer Systems. 77-68: The Construction of a Simple Computer using a 6800 Microprocessor. [n.p.]: Bear Microcomputer Systems, 1977.

[ART] Moore, Tim. "A Mighty Micromite: The 77-68, a Simple Start to a Large System." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 1. 1978. pp.16-18.
A description of the system, with a components list and a circuit diagram.

Acorn (General and Unspecified)

Acorn Computers was founded in 1978 by Chris Curry and Herman Hauser. Addresses: Fulbourn Road, Cherry Hinton, Cambridge; Newmarket Road, Cambridge.

Dawkins, Christopher. The Econet Micro Guide. London: Longman, 1985.

[ART] "Acorn Computer Special Feature." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.57-59, 62-63.

[ART] Armstrong, Helen. "Red Curry." Electronics Today International July 1987. pp.26-27.
An interview with Chris Curry.

[ART] Cohen, Colin. "Acorn's Sparkjet gets in the Print." Personal Computer News [Cover:] No. 45. 21 January 1984. (p.1 has incorrectly, No. 44, 7-14 January 1984). p.37.
Review of the Acorn Sparkjet JP101 printer.

Acorn System

System 1 is 6502-based with 1K RAM and 512 bytes PROM containing the system monitor on a Eurocard. A second Eurocard plugs above this to give a 25-key Hex keyboard, 8 digit 7-segment LED display and CUTS cassette interface. Optional Eurocards: 8K+8K Static RAM and EPROM; Colour PRESTEL compatible VDU interface; Versatile interface (serial, parallel etc); Dual mini-floppy controller; PROM/EPROM programmer; A/D and D/A interface (12-bit); Printer interface; Laboratory interface; 6809 CPU card; Professional keyboard; AIM65 Bus interface adaptor; PAL encoder.

System 2 uses the Eurocard bus within a 19" frame. 6502 CPU, 1K RAM, I/O chip, parallel ASCII keyboard interface, 2K ROM. Cards offer output to a TV (colour or mono) using Teletext characters, 4K-8K RAM, BASIC ROM and floating point ROM.

System 3 has a card frame, backplane, and 4 sockets, 6502, memory mapped VDU interface, 8K RAM, floppy disk module, DOS ROM, and resident 4K BASIC. A 100K FDD is mounted in a 5.25" module.

System 4 is housed in a double-height rack taking up to 14 Eurocards. The basic system has 2 FDDs, 6502, VDU card, 16K RAM, disk controller, and DOS.

System 5 is housed in a 4U 19" card frame with 7 Eurocard slots. One or two FDDs are accomodated offering 100K-800K storage.

Software for the Acorn System series included a 4K BASIC, 4K Floating Point Extension to BASIC, 2K ONLI Extension to BASIC for real time operation, 2K Cassette Operating System (supporting the VDU, keyboard, and a parallel interface), 4K DOS (also supporting the VDU, keyboard, and a parallel interface), 4K ADE assembler, disassembler, and text editor, 6K LISP Interpreter, 2.5K Screen Editor, and Pascal on disk or ROM.

Acorn Atom

Hartnell, Tim, ed. 39 Tested Programs for the Acorn Atom: The Best of Interface. London: Interface, 1982.
48pp.

Interface London: Users Clubs, [1980-].
Periodical. Magazine of the National ZX80 and ZX81 Users' Group and the Independent Acorn Atom Users' Group. Monthly. Vol. 2, Issue 2: October 1981 (20pp A4).

Johnson-Davies, David. Practical Programs for the BBC Computer and Acorn Atom. Wilmslow: Sigma, [c.1982].

[Lord, Mike.] The Acorn Atom Magic Book. Basildon: Timedata Ltd., 1981.
80pp.

Phipps, John. Atom Business. Epsom, Surrey: Phipps Associates, 1981.
Spiral bound.

Sharples, Trevor, and Tim Hartnell. Getting Acquainted with your Acorn Atom. London: Database Consultancy, 1981.
Another edition: [London]: Interface, [1981].

[ART] Chewter, John. "Digital Speech." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.36-39, 45.
Series. Using the speech encoder published in February 1982 with an Acorn Atom.

[ART] Dennis, Mike. "Acorn Atom." Personal Computer World July 1980. pp.48-52.
Review.

[ART] Edwards, Timothy. "24 Tune-Atom-Doorbell." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1982. pp.51-52.
Constructional article. Interfacing the TMS1000N 24-tune doorbell IC to an Atom.

[ART] Edwards, Timothy. "Atomic Frequency Meter." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.50-52.
Constructional article. Measuring frequencies from 10Hz to 400kHz with an accuracy of better than 0.03%.

[ART] Edwards, Timothy. "Interfacing the Atom to a Commodore Printer." Electronics and Computing Monthly September 1982. pp.50-51.
Interfacing a Commodore (IEEE-488) printer to the Atom.

[ART] Edwards, Timothy. "Printerfacing the Atom." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1982. pp.59-60.
Interfacing an Atom to any printer, serial or parallel.

[ART] Stevenson, J. R., and J. C. Rockett. "Inside the Atom." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: 'Pirating and Protection': April 1983. pp.78-80.
The first of 2 articles on program protection.

[ART] "Using Atom with BBC BASIC." Personal Computing Monthly October 1982. pp.54-57.
A review of BBC BASIC on the Acorn Atom (a hardware upgrade, the board replacing three chips in the Atom and containing a 4K OS ROM, 16K BASIC ROM, 2K RAM, two empty 4K ROM sockets and 9 TTL chips).

Acorn BBC Micro

The BBC Micro was initially sold as a Model A and Model B (32K RAM). In 1985 the BBC B+ was released with 64K RAM. An industrial version was produced as the EuroBEEB, and is listed under Control Universal Systems who produced it.

[Manual: Hardware]
[British Broadcasting Corporation.] British Broadcasting Corporation Microcomputer System User Guide.
London: British Broadcasting Corporation, [1984].
By John Coll. Edited by David Allen. Spiral bound. 519pp. 2pp addendum slip (Addendum 1) bound in at front dated 31.5.83; 2pp errata slip (Issue no. 1) bound in at front dated May 1984 and coded 'Part no 403000 ERRATA 1'. A provisional edition marked 'Temporary Copy' was initially issued with an admission that it contained errors. First published in 1982. The US edition was produced in 2 parts, in ring binders. Contents (1984 edition): [Introduction:] 1. Getting Going; [Giving the Computer Instructions - Part I:] 2. Commands; 3. An Introduction to Variables; 4. Writing a Simple Program; 5. Recording Programs on Cassette; 6. Some Sample Programs; [Giving the Computer Instructions - Part II:] 7. AUTO, DELETE, REM and RENUMBER; 8. Introducing Graphics; 9. More on Variables - String, Real & Integer. ASCII Codes, CHR$ and ASC; 10. PRINT and Formatting. Cursor Control; 11. INPUT; 12. GET and INKEY; 13. TIME and Random Numbers; [Structure in BASIC:] 14. REPEAT...UNTIL, TRUE and FALSE; 15. FOR...NEXT; 16. IF...THEN...ELSE; 17. PROCEDURES; 18. FUNCTIONS; 19. GOSUB; 20. GOTO, ON GOTO and ON GOSUB; [Giving the Computer Instructions - Part III:] 21. Yet More Variables - Arrays; 22. READ, DATA and RESTORE; 23. Integer Handling; 24. String Handling; 25. Programming the User Defined Functions Keys; 26. Operator Precedence; 27. Error Handling; 28. Use of Teletext mode (MODE 7); 29. Advanced Graphics: (Logical, Inverse, Actual Colours), PLOT, GCOL, Animated Graphics, User Definable Characters; 30. Sound; 31. File Handling; 32. Speeding Up Programs and Saving Memory Space; [Reference Section:] 33. BASIC Keywords Alphabetical Summary; 34. VDU Drivers; 35. Cassette Files; 36. Changing Filing Systems; 37. Merging BASIC Programs; 38. Using Printers; 39. Indirection Operators; 40. HIMEM, LOMEM, TOP and PAGE; 41. Operating System Statements (* Commands); 42. *FX Calls and OSBYTE Calls; 43. Assembly Language; 44. Analgoue Input and User Input-Output Ports; 45. Expanding the System; 46. Error Messages; 47. Minimum Abbreviations; 48. Appendix: ASCII Teletext Codes; ASCII Codes and Shapes (MODES 0 to 6); ASCII (MODES 0 to 6) Displayed Character Set; ASCII Hexadecimal Codes; Text Planning Sheet; Graphics Planning Sheets; Keyboard Codes; Board Layout; External Connections; Memory Maps; Memory Map Assignments; Circuit Layouts; VDU Code Summary; 6502 Instruction Set; FX Call Summary; Operating System Call Summary.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Acorn Computers.] Acorn Computer Data Recorder Operating Instructions.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, 1984.
[2], 9, [1]pp. Part no. ALF03/M Issue 1. First published 1984. Manual for the ALF03 Data Recorder. Works with C15 to C60 cassettes. Supplied with a mains adaptor, a 7-pin DIN to 7-pin DIN cable, and this manual. For the BBC Micro and Electron.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Acorn Computers.] BBC BASIC (Z80) for the British Broadcasting Corporation Microcomputer Plus Z80 Second Processor Running CP/M.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, 1984.
Cover title: Z80 BBC BASIC User Guide..

[Manual: Hardware]
[Acorn Computers.] Guarantee.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, [1985].
2pp card. Coded: 2201,152 Iss. 1 September 1985.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Economatics.] BBC Buggy Guide.
Handsworth, Sheffield: Economatics, 1985.
77pp. Sprial bound. Produced by BBC Publications, London for Economatics. Written by Andrew Hopkins. Edited by Meyer N. Solomon. Manual for the BBC Buggy which was produced as a kit by Economatics (Education) Ltd., Sheffield. This book is a technology volume of the BBC Computer Literacy Project. Software was supplied with the Guide on cassette for the BBC Micro and for the Sinclair ZX Spectrum.

[Manual: OS]
[Acorn Computers.] BBC Microcomputer System Disc System User Guide.
London: British Broadcasting Corporation, 1982.
Manual for the BBC Micro FDD filing system. 87pp. Spiral bound. Stylised yellow and green cover. By Brian J. Ward. The 2nd edition of this text may be the 'Issue 2' noted below. Contents: 1. What is a Disc System?; 2. Getting Going; 3. Discs; 4. Disc Files; 5. The Filing System Commands; 6. The Filing System Utilities; 7. Random Access Files; 8. Using the Filing System in Assembler; 9. Changing Filing Systems; 10. Error Messages; 11. Technical Information; 12. Filing System Command Summary.

[Manual: OS]
[Acorn Computers.] British Broadcasting Corporation Microcomputer System Disc Filing System User Guide.
[Issue 2.] Cambridge: Acorn Computers, July 1983.
Manual for the BBC Micro FDD filing system. 93pp. Spiral bound. Pictorial cover. Part No. 403700. This 'Issue 2' text states that the it was first published in 1983, although the 1982 text listed above may be 'Issue 1'. Copy seen includes an 8pp 'Addendum 1' supplied as a loose insert, dated March 1985 and coded '0403 700 Issue 2 Addendum 1 (0403 703)'. It details 'the differences between the Acorn 1770 Disc Filing System (DFS) and DFS 1.20 as described in the Disc Filing System User Guide Issue 2'. It covers the Acorn 1770 DFS (DFS 2.10). DFS 1.20 (and earlier) worked with an 8271 disc controller. DFS 2.10 works with the Acorn 1770 disc controller. Programs and ROMs that directly access an 8271 disc controller will not work with the DFS 2.10 disc system. Contents: 1. What is a Disc System?; 2. Getting Going; 3. Discs; 4. Disc Files; 5. The BREAK Key; 6. The Filing System Commands; 7. The Filing System Utilities; 8. Random Access Files; 9. Using the Filing System in Assembler; 10. Changing Filing Systems; 11. Error Messages; 12. Technical Information; 13. Filing System Command Summary.

[Manual: OS]
[Acornsoft.] Acornsoft Microtext for the BBC Microcomputer.
Cambridge: Acornsoft, 1983.
121pp. Microtext, a programming language and development system, was designed by the National Physical Laboratory. Coded SBD13 on rear. Contents: 1. What is Microtext?; 2. About this Manual; 3. Starting Microtext; 4. Creating Your First Program; 5. Using Microtext; 6. Text Creation and Editing; 7. Response Matching and Branching; 8. Using Variables; 9. Summary Items; 10. Testing and Running Modules; 11. Module Portability; Appendix A. Using the BBC Operating System; Appendix B. Command Mode Commands; Appendix C. Run-Time Commands; Appendix D. Error Messages.

[Manual: OS]
[Acorn Computers.] CP/M 2.2 with GSX Graphics for the BBC Microcomputer with Z80 Second Processor.
3rd edition; Cambridge: Acorn Computers, 1983.
By Digital Research. Cover title: CP/M Operating System Manual.

[Manual: OS]
[Acorn Computers.] Acorn Computer Winchester Disc Filing System User Guide.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, July 1984.
122pp. Spiral bound. Manual for the BBC HDD and the ADFS (advanced disk filing system) ROM. Part no. 427000. Issue 1, July 1984. 'Acorn Computer' appears at the start of the title on the TP as a label, stuck on. Intended to operate with a 10.3Mb HDD. Contents: 1. What is a Disc System?; 2. Getting Started; 3. The Winchester Disc; 4. The Filing System; 5. The Filing System Commands; 6. File Handling Using BASIC; 7. File Handling Using Assembly Language; 8. Changing Filing Systems; 9. The Filing System Utilities; 10. Error Messages; 11. Technical Information; 12. Filing System Command Summary; Appendix A. Fitting the ADFS ROM.

[Manual: OS]
[Acorn Computers.] The DNFS Instruction Booklet.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, July 1984.
[4], 10, [2]pp. Part no. 403990. Issue 1, July 1984. Booklet for the 'disk or network filing system' ROM. Includes instructions on removing the DFS (DFS 0.90) and NFS (NFS 3.34) ROMs, and replacing them with the DNFS (©Acorn 00201666-01) ROM. The DNFS ROM incorporated DFS 1.20 and NFS 3.60. Contents: 1. Language and Filing System ROMs; 2. Inserting the DNFS ROM; 3. Differences Between DFS/NFS and DNFS; 4. Keyboard Option Switches.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Watford Electronics.] 32K RAM Card for BBC Micro.
Watford, Hertfordshire: Watford Electronics, [198-].
[6], 27pp. Spiral bound. ROM software and manual copyright Ian Smith/Watford Electronics, 1984. The prelims contain notes on the Model B, Model B Plus, Master 128K and Master Compact. Contents: 1. Installation; 2. Operation; 3. Technical Software Information; 4. Technical Hardware Information; 5. Error Messages. Loose insert which may or may not belong: a single photocopied sheet printed on one side, 'Addendum for 32K Shadow RAM Board Version 2.40' coded: 'SJ/PC/Fin/ShdRAM24'.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Watford Electronics.] ROM/RAM for the BBC Micro.
Watford, Hertfordshire: Watford Electronics, [198-].
[18]pp. Spiral bound. The prelims contain notes on the Model B, Model B Plus, Master 128K and Master Compact. Software copyright Watford Electronics/Ian Smith, 1985; Silicon Filing System (SFS) copyright Watford Electronics/Andy Bray, 1985.

[Manual: OS]
[Watford Electronics.] Disc Filing System Manual for BBC Micro.
Watford, Hertfordshire: Watford Electronics, June 1983.
5th edition: Watford, Hertfordshire: Watford Electronics, February 1988 (115pp; spiral bound). By Matthew Rapier. Manual for the Watford Electronics DFS and DDFS for the BBC Micro. The DFS was written by Andrew Bray. The 5th edition includes notes on versions 1.43, 1.44, 1.53, and DDFS 1.54T, with 4pp of ROM Fitting Instructions included between pp.4-5 for the Model B, Model B Plus, Master 128K and Master Compact. Contents (5th edition): 1. Why Discs?; 2. Getting Going; 3. Indispensable Commands; 4. Useful Commands; 5. Floppy Discs; 6. Text Filing; 7. Commands; 8. Using the Filing System from Assembler; 9. Technical Information; 10. Using the Disc Sector Editor; 11. Error Messages; 12. Command Summary; 13. Index.

Alcock, Donald Geoffrey. Illustrating BBC BASIC. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, 1986.
Spiral bound.

Allan, Boris. Functional Forth for the BBC Computer. Understand Your Computer Through Forth. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Allan, Boris. Graphic Art for the BBC Computer. Turtle Graphics and Art. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Amos, Roger, and Martin Cock. Computer Projects for Railway Modellers. Wellingborough: Patrick Stephens, 1987.
96pp. For the ZX Spectrum and BBC Micro. Contents: 1. Sequential Display (Timetable) Generator; 2. Variable-Speed Clock; 3. Sound Effects Generator; 4. Layout Mimic Diagram; 5. Progressive Cab Control; 6. Track-to-Computer Interface; 7. A User Port for the Spectrum; 8. Digital-to-Analogue Controller; 9. Turnout (Point) Control Interface; Appendix 1. Useful Electronic Circuitry (Controller; Train Detectors; Turnout Control; Electrical Indication of Turnout Settings); Appendix 2. Internal Workings of Microcomputers; Appendix 3. The BBC Micro's User Port.

Angell, Ian O., and Brian J. Jones. Advanced Graphics with the BBC Model B Microcomputer. London: Macmillan, 1984.

Atherton, Roy. Structured Programming with BBC BASIC. Chichester, West Sussex: Ellis Horwood, 1983.
207pp.

Bagnall, Robert David. BBC Micro Disk Drives. Tunbridge Wells: Micro Press, 1985.

Bains, Geoff. The Better Guide to the BBC Micro. London: Zomba Books, 1984.

Bains, Geoff. Practical Interfacing with the BBC Micro. London: Chapman and Hall, 1986.

Bannister, Brian Roy, and Michael Whitehead. Interfacing the BBC Microcomputer. London: Macmillan, 1985.

Bateson, Spencer, and Ian Thomas. The Penguin BBC B Compendium. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1985.

Bayley, Bruce. Building Blocks for BBC Games. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1984].

BEEBUG Newsletter. St. Albans, Hertfordshire:, Independent National User Group for the BBC Microcomputer, April 1982-December 1982/January 1983.
Periodical. Vol. 1, Nos. 1-8. Continued by BEEBUG.

BEEBUG. London: BEEBUG, (Vol. 1, No. 9) February 1983-April 1994 (Vol. 12, No. 10).
Periodical. Continues BEEBUG Newsletter.

Billingsley, John. DIY Robotics and Sensors with the BBC Computer. Practical Projects for Control Applications. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Birnbaum, Ian. Assembly Language Programming for the BBC Microcomputer. London: Macmillan, 1982.
[10], 305pp. Reprinted with corrections: 1982. Reprinted: 1983 (twice; 2nd reprint: [10], 305pp; Preface dated May 1982). 2nd edition: London: Macmillan, 1984. Reprinted: 1987 (xi, 321pp). Two cassettes were available containing the programs from the book and additional programs not found in the book. Contents (second 1983 reprint): 1. Preliminary Ideas; 2. Assignments; 3. Addition and Subtraction; 4. Decision-Making in Assembly Language; 5. Loop Structure in Assembly Language; 6. Indexed Addressing; 7. Indirect Indexed Addressing; 8. Multiplication and Division; 9. The Stack: Subroutines and Interrupts; 10. Some Utility Programs; [Appendices:] 1. 6502 Instruction Set; 2. Full Block Diagram of 6502 Architecture; 3. Indexed Indirect Addressing; 4. Floating Point Representation; 5. Flowchart Symbols and Conventions Used in this Book; 6. Linking Programs on the BBC Computer; 7. The User Port; 8. Some Important Zero Page Locations; 9. Operating System Differences.

Bishop, Owen Neville. Easy Add-On Projects for Commodore 64, VIC 20, BBC Micro and Acorn Electron. London: Babani, 1985.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Practical Programs for the BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1984.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Take Off With the Electron and BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1984.
144pp.

Brain, Keith Roger, and Steven Brain. Artificial Intelligence on the BBC and Electron: Make Your Micro Think. London: Sunshine, 1984.
viii, 136pp.

Bray, Andrew C., Adrian C. Dickens, and Mark A. Holmes. The Advanced User Guide for the BBC Micro. Cambridge: Cambridge Microcomputer Centre, August 1983.
2nd Edition: September 1983. 3rd edition: Cambridge: Cambridge Microcomputer Centre, November 1983 (510pp, spiral bound). Contents (3rd edition, OS 1.20, Issue 4 board): 1. Introduction for Those New to Machine Code; 2. Operating System Commands; Assembly Language Programming: 3. The BASIC Assembler; 4. Machine Code Arithmetic; 5. Addressing Modes; 6. The Assembler Mnemonics; Operating System Interfaces: 7. Operating System Calls; 8. *FX/OSBYTE Calls; 9. OSWORD Calls; 10. Vectors; 11. Memory Usage; 12. Events; 13. Interrupts; 14. RS423; 15. Paged ROMs; 16. Filing Systems; Hardware: 17. An Introduction to the Hardware; 18. The Video Circuit (6845); 19. The Video ULA; 20. The Serial Interface; 21. The Paged ROM Select Register; 22. Programming the 6522 VIA; 23. The System 6522, Including Sound and Speech; 24. The User 6522; 25. Disc and Econet Interfaces; 26. The Analogue-to-Digital Converter; 27. The Tube; 28. The 1MHz Bus; Appendices: A. *FX/OSBYTE Call Index; B. Operating System Calls Summary; C. Table of Key Numbers; D. VDU Codes; E. PLOT Number Summary; F. Screen Mode Layouts; G. US MOS Differences; H. Disc Upgrade; I. Circuit Board Links; J. Keyboard Circuit Diagram; K. Main Circuit Diagram.

Campbell, Keith. The Computer and Video Games Book of Adventure. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1983].
138pp. Foreword by Scott Adams. With listings for the BBC Micro, Commodore 64, and ZX Spectrum.

Citron, Judith. Computing Without Programming: A Guide to Software Packages on the BBC Microcomputer. London: Chapman and Hall, 1987.
x, 267pp. Contents: 1. How to Use this Book; 2. Why Word Processors?; 3. Wordwise Plus; 4. Edword2; 5. Compendium of Word Processing Ideas; 6. The Two Word Processors Compared; 7. Why Databases?; 8. Quest; 9. Masterfile II; 10. A Compendium of Database Ideas; 11. The Two Databases Compared; 12. Why Spreadsheets?; 13. Quickcalc; 14. Ultracalc 2; 15. Compendium of Spreadsheet Ideas; 16. The Two Spreadsheets Compared.

Coats, Robert B. BBC BASIC. London: Edward Arnold, 1983.
vi, 250pp. Preface dated March 1983. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Variables; 3. What is a Program?; 4. Input and Output; 5. Looking After Your Programs; 6. Editing; 7. REPEAT Loops; 8. FOR Loops; 9. Random Numbers; 10. The IF Command; 11. Arrays; 12. Example Program I; 13. Developing a Program; 14. Nested Loops; 15. Strings; 16. More About Input; 17. Sorting and Searching; 18. Grouped Conditions; 19. More About Output; 20. Numbers; 21. Standard Functions; 22. Timing; 23. Graphics and Colour; 24. Sound; 25. Subroutines; 26. Procedures; 27. Example Program II; 28. Data Files; 29. Testing and Debugging; 30. Example Program III; 31. Odds and Ends; [Appendices:] A. Answers; B. Summary of BASIC; C. Project.

Coats, Robert B. Introducing BBC BASIC. London: Edward Arnold, 1984.
iv, 122pp.

Coleman, Michael. Disk Programming Techniques for the BBC Microcomputer. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice/Hall International, 1984.
xxiii, 244pp. Contents: [Section I, Programming Techniques:] 1. Basic Principles; 2. Getting Started; 3. Getting Organised; 4. Getting Rid; 5. Serial Data Files; 6. Random Access Files Part 1; 7. Diagnostic Aids; 8. Executive Files and Libraries; 9. Random Access Files Part 2; 10. Getting the (Error) Message; 11. Alternative Disk Filing Systems (Amcom DFS; Watford DFS); [Section II, The Case Studies (7 examples of disk use)]; Appendix. Note: 'A disk containing the seven case-study programs' was available separately. It included a 'full 65000-byte database, containing details of articles on the BBC Microcomputer'.

Cownie, John. Creative Graphics on the BBC Microcomputer. Cambridge: Acornsoft, 1982.
108pp.

Cryer, Neil, and Pat Cryer. BASIC Programming on the BBC Microcomputer. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, [1982].

Cryer, Neil, Pat Cryer, and Andrew Cryer. Graphics on the BBC Microcomputer. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice/Hall International, 1983.
x, 227pp. Published in association with Acornsoft. Preface dated September 1983. Contents: 0. Introduction; 1. Fundamentals of Graphics; 2. Colouring Displays; 3. Drawing Simple Shapes; 4. Programming Your Own Characters; 5. Animating Displays; 6. Drawing Three Dimensional Ripple Surfaces; 7. Adding Perspective; 8. Extending BBC BASIC for Graphics; 9. Drawing Graphs; 10. Getting the Best Straight Line; 11. Displaying Shapes of Functions; 12. Drawing Histograms; 13. Drawing Pie Charts; 14. Displaying Statistics; 15. Using Teletext Graphics; Appendix 1. Listings for the Procedures; Appendix 2. How the Procedures Work; Appendix 3. The ASCII Codes.

Daines, Derrick. BBC Micro Programs in BASIC. London: Newnes, 1984.

Dane, P. N. Learning to Use the BBC Microcomputer. Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, [c.1982].

De Havas, Tom, and Peter Holmes. Beginners Assembly Language for the BBC. Barnet: Glentop, 1983.
Dr. Watson Computer Learning series.

Deeson, Eric. BBC Micro in Education. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1983.

Deeson, Eric. Easy Programming for the BBC Micro. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1982-1983].

Dunn, Seamus, and Valerie Morgan. The BBC Microcomputer for Beginners. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, [c.1983].

Erskine, Robert, Humphrey Walwyn, Paul Stanley, and Michael Bews. Sixty Programs for the BBC Micro. London: Pan, 1983.

Ferguson, John Douglas, and Tony Shaw. Assembly Language Programming on the BBC Micro. London: Addison-Wesley, [c.1983].

Forsyth, Richard, and Chris Naylor. The Hitch-Hiker's Guide to Artificial Intelligence. BBC BASIC Version. London: Chapman and Hall, 1985.

Freeman, Richard T. Beyond BASIC. 6502 Assembly Language on the British Broadcasting Corporation Microcomputer. London: British Broadcasting Corporation, 1983.
Spiral bound.

Gatenby, James. An Introduction to Data Handling in BBC BASIC. London: Edward Arnold, 1987.

Gibbs, S., and Aileen Gibbs. Mastering Music. Programming Sound on the BBC Model B Micro. London: British Broadcasting Corporation, 1985.
Spiral bound.

Gollner, Alex. Games for Your BBC Micro. London: Virgin Books, 1983.

Gordon, John. 100 Programs for the BBC Microcomputer. Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall/Acornsoft, [c.1983].

Graham, Carl, and Nick Hampshire. BBC Programs. Volume 1. London: Duckworth, 1984.
Programs by Carl Graham. Edited by Nick Hampshire.

Graves, Richard Perceval, and David Graves. A Beginner's Guide to the BBC Micro. London: Kingfisher, 1984.

Griffiths, Jonathan. Creative Assembler. How to Write Arcade Games for the BBC Microcomputer Model B and Acorn Electron. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1984.

Haines, Gavin. BBC Micro and Electron Book. London: McGraw-Hill, 1985.
xi, 327pp. Contents: [Part I: System Facilities:] 1. Introduction; 2. Operating System Differences; 3. The Keyboard; 4. Typing in Programs; 5. Running Programs on Cassette; 6. Using Cassettes; 7. Using the Function Keys; 8. Your Workspace; [Part II: The Complete Programmer:] 9. How to Write a BASIC Program; 10. Writing Successful Games; 11. Commands Dealing with BASIC Workspace; 12. Dealing with Keyboard Input; 13. Dealing with Data and Flow of Control; 14. Texts and Strings; 15. Maths Functions; 16. Graphics and Screen MODEs; 17. Text and Graphics Windows; 18. Sound; 19. File Handling; 20. Disk Considerations; 21. Read/Write File Example; 22. Error Handling; 23. Machine Operating System Commands; [Part III: Selected Topics:] 24. Solving Cassette Problems; 25. Dealing with Error Messages; 26. After-Sales Queries; 27. Buying Equipment; 28. Disk Systems; 29. Disk Hints; 30. Copying Cassettes; 31. Relocating Programs for Disk; 32. Binary and Hexadecimal; 33. Using the ASCII Set; 34. Introduction to the 6502; 35. Machine Code Hints; 36. Using the Assembler; 37. Changing Vectors; 38. Vector Formulae; 39. Writing Advanced Software; 40. Printers and Word Processing; 41. PRESTEL and Teletext; 42. Networks; [Part IV: Reference:] 43. Special Effects: *FX Calls; 44. Page Zero Locations; 45. Main Memory Map; 46. Intrinsic Subroutines; [Part V: Appendices:] A. The ASCII Chart and Usage; B. Error Codes and Error Messages; C. Tokens for Keywords; D. EPSON Control Codes; E. Connectors; F. Cassette Specifications; G. Getting a Better Picture; H. Fitting the Disk Upgrade; I. Fitting Second Processors; J. Useful Addresses; K. Programs Available on Tape; L. References and Suggested Reading.

Harding, Robert D. Graphs and Charts on the BBC Microcomputer. Cambridge: Acornsoft, 1982.
Spiral bound.

Harston, Jonathan G. Harston Advanced Disk Filing System Reference Manual. 2nd edition; Walkley, Sheffield: J. G. Harston, [c.1995-1996].
98pp spiral bound manual and software on 3.5" and 5.25" disks.

Hartnell, Tim. Exploring Artificial Intelligence on Your BBC Micro. London: Interface, 1985.

Hartnell, Tim. Let Your BBC Micro Teach you to Program. London: Interface, 1982.

Hartnell, Tim, and Alex Gollner. Getting Started on Your BBC Micro. London: Futura, 1983.

Hartnell, Tim, and Ian Hutt. Giant Book of Games for Your BBC Micro. London: Fontana, 1984.

Hartnell, Tim, and Jeremy Ruston. The Book of Listings. Fun Programs for the BBC Microcomputer. London: British Broadcasting Corporation, 1982.
Spiral bound.

Hartnell, Tim, S. M. Gee, and Mike James. Games BBC Computers Play. London: Interface, 1983.

Hicks, Henry E. Practical Programming in BBC BASIC. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, [1985].

Hutt, Ian. 40 Best Machine Code Routines for the BBC Micro. London: Interface, 1985.

Inglis, Jonathan. Simple Words and Word Games. Programs for the BBC Micro and Electron Computers. London: Granada, 1984.

Isaaman, Dan. Computer Games to Play and Write for Use with ZX-Spectrum, BBC, Electron, VIC and Dragon Computers. [London]: Sparrow, 1983.
126pp.

James, Mike. The BBC Micro. An Expert Guide. London: Granada, 1983.

James, Mike, and S. M. Gee. Advanced Programming for the BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1984.

James, Mike, S. M. Gee, and Kay Ewbank. 21 Games for the BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1983.

Johnson, Robert, Cameron Procter, and Andrew Reglinski. Interfacing and Control on the BBC Micro. Cambridge: National Extension College, 1984.

Johnson-Davies, David. Practical Programs for the BBC Computer and Acorn Atom. Wilmslow: Sigma, [c.1982].

Jones, Paul, Nigel Peters, and Michael Noels. Getting Started in Sound and Graphics on the BBC Micro. Stockport: Database Publications, 1985.

Kosniowski, Czes. Essential Maths on the BBC and Electron Computers. Basic Routines for Programming. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Latham, Tony. The BBC Microcomputer Disk Companion. London: Prentice/Hall International, 1983.
vi, 186pp. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Disk Handling; 3. Disk Filing System Commands; 4. File Handling; 5. Operating System Commands; 6. File Program Examples; 7. Useful Programs; 8. Technical Details.

Ludinski, Geneviève. Brainteasers for the BBC and Electron Computers. Programs to Puzzle and Amuse. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix Publishing, [c.1983-1984].

McGregor, James J., and Alan H. Watt. Advanced Programming Techniques for the BBC Micro. London: Addison-Wesley, 1983.
376pp. A companion cassette was available from the publishers. Contents: 1. Programming Style for BBC BASIC; 2. Logical Processing of Colour and Interactive Graphics; 3. Three-Dimensional Graphics; 4. Animation Techniques; 5. Advanced Use of Sound; 6. Storing, Sorting, Searching, and Indexing; 7. Introduction to Recursion; 8. Board Games and Game Trees; 9. Difficult Board Games - The Beginnings of Artificial Intelligence; 10. Language Processors - A LOGO Interpreter; [Appendices:] 1. Summary of Mode and Colour Facilities; 2. Bits, Bytes, and Hex; 3. Characters, ASCII Codes, Control Codes and Teletext Codes; 4. Matrix Notation and Multiplication; 5. The Viewing Transformation.

McGregor, James J., and Alan H. Watt. The Art of Microcomputer Graphics for the BBC Micro/Electron. Wokingham: Addison Wesley, 1984.

McGregor, James J., and Alan H. Watt. The BBC Micro Book. BASIC, Sound and Graphics. London: Addison Wesley, 1983.
Companion cassette produced.

McGregor, James J., and Alan H. Watt. Graphics Programming on Your BBC Micro. London: Corgi/Addison Wesley, 1984.

Millington, Jon. Fifty Programs in BBC BASIC. For Learning and Leisure. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1985.

Money, Steve A. BBC Micro Graphics and Sound. London: Granada, 1983.

Murphy, T. J. E. A Concise Introduction to the Language of BBC BASIC. BP149. London: Babani, 1984.

Murray, Ian. Assembly Programming Made Easy for the BBC Micro. London: Century Communications, 1984.

Murray, Ian. 35 Educational Programs for the BBC Micro. London: Century, 1983.

Napier, Robert G. Networking with the BBC Microcomputer. Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1984].

Nunns, Thomas. Sensing and Control Projects for the BBC. Southampton: Microbooks, 1984.
81pp. Contents: 1. Analogue to Digital Converter Projects; A to D Interface; Testing the Interface, Measuring Light Levels; Using Two LDRs to Measure Time; Using Two LDRs to Count; Using a Thermistor to Measure Temperature; 'Seesaw' - A Game Using a Tilt Switch; A Drawing Aid Using Two Pots; 2. User Port Projects; User Port Interface; Testing the Interface, Lighting an LED; Traffic Lights; Controlling a Vehicle; Computer Controlled Slot Car Racing; Appendices.

Opie, Colin N. Interfacing the BBC Microcomputer. London: McGraw-Hill, 1984.
x, 195pp. Preface dated October 1983. Contents: [Part 1: Basic Concepts:] 1. Fundamental Input and Output; 2. Digital Circuits and Microcomputers; 3. BBC Microcomputer Input/Output; [Part 2: Programming the Hardware:] 4. The User Port; 5. Analogue, Button, and Light-Pen Inputs; 6. Serial RRS423 and Parallel Printer Ports; 7. The 1MHz Bus; [Part 3: The Motherboard Design and Associated Boards:] 8. The Motherboard Design; 9. Using the User Port; 10. Analogue Port Applications; 11. A Light Pen; 12. 1MHz Bus Examples; [Appendices:] A. Memory Map of the BBC Microcomputer; B. BBC Interface Technical Specifications; C. 6502 Instructions and BBC Assembler Notes; D. Suppliers and Information Centres; E. Programs Available on Tape; F. Printed Circuit Board Patterns and Layouts.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Programming the BBC Model B Micro. London: Babani, 1984.

Pharo, Colin. The Advanced Disk User Guide for the BBC Micro. Cambridge: Cambridge Microcomputer Centre, 1985.
446pp.

Plumbley, Mark D. The BASIC ROM User Guide for the BBC Microcomputer and Acorn Electron. Cambridge: Adder Publishing, August 1984.
359pp. Contents: [The Operation of BASIC:] 1. The 6502 Microprocessor; 2. The BASIC System; 3. Memory Use; 4. Expression Evaluation; 5. Program Control Mechanisms; 6. Assembling and Disassembling; [Enhancing BASIC:] 7. Adding New Commands; 8. Overlaying Procedures; 9. Trapping Other Errors; 10. ROM Routines; 11. Errors and Error Recover; Appendices; Bibliography; Glossary; Index.

Rogers, Tim D., and Chris Callender. 36 Challenging Games for the BBC Micro. London: Interface, 1983.

Ruston, Jeremy. The BBC Micro Compendium. London: Interface, 1983.

Ruston, Jeremy. The BBC Micro Revealed. London: Interface, 1982.

Ruston, Jeremy. Jeremy Ruston's Advanced Programming Guide to the BBC Micro. London: Interface, 1984.

Ruston, Jeremy. The Ruston BASIC Compiler. BBC Micro Instant Machine Code. London: Interface Publications, 1982.
81pp manual to accompany the compiler.

Scriven, John, and Patrick Hall. Programming for Education on the BBC Computer. A Handbook for Primary Education. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Seth, Jim. Problem Solving Workcards for Use with Microcomputers for BBC, ZX81 & Spectrum. Derby: Association of Teachers of Mathematics, 1983.

Shaw, Peter, and Stuart McCrae. Creating Adventures on Your BBC Micro. London: Interface, 1985.

Simon. Quality Programs for the BBC Micro. Tunbridge Wells: Micro Press, 1983.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Disk Systems for the BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1984.
viii, 115pp. Reprinted: 1984. Contents: 1. About Disks and Disk Systems; 2. The Disk Filing System; 3. Digging Deeper; 4. Machine Code and Other Bytes; 5. Text Files and Their Problems; 6. Disk Utilities and How to Use Them; 7. BASIC Filing Techniques; 8. DFS Commands.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing the BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1983.

Smalley, Brian. BBC Computer Magic. Your First Programming Book. London: Foulsham, [c.1984].

Smit, Rudolf. BBC Software Projects. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1984].

Smith, Bruce. Advanced Sideways RAM User Guide for the Master and BBC Computers. Revised edition; n.p.: Victory Publishing, 1987.

Smith, Bruce. BBC Micro Assembler Workshop. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1984].

Smith, Bruce. BBC Micro Assembly Language. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1983.

Smith, Bruce. The BBC Micro Machine Code Portfolio. 75 Expert Routines. London: Granada, 1984.

Smith, Bruce. The BBC Micro ROM Book: Sideways ROMs and RAMs. London: Collins, 1985.
viii, 279, [1]pp. Preface dated December 1984. A disk of the programs from the book was available, 40 track or 80 track. Another edition: London: Collins, 1985 (ix, 256pp). Another edition: London: Collins, 1986. Contents (1985, 279pp edition): 1. The ROM Paging System; 2. Paged ROMs; 3. Service ROMs; 4. Language ROMs; 5. The ROM Filing System; 6. ROM Vectors; 7. The TOOLKIT Interpreter; 8. Breaking In; 9. Home Brew; 10. ROM and Board; 11. Blow Your Own; 12. BASIC Toolkits; 13. Extra, Extra!; Appendix A. Converting BASIC I to BASIC II; Appendix B. ROM Book Programs in Bar Code Form; Appendix C. Useful Addresses.

Smith, Bruce. Introducing CP/M on the BBC Micro Z80 Second Processor. London: Collins, 1985.

Smith, David. BBC BASIC for Beginners. Leighton Buzzard, Bedfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.

Smith, David. Mysteries of Disk Drives and DFS Revealed for the BBC Micro. Watford Electronics, 1984.

Stephenson, Alfred Phillip. Discovering BBC Micro Machine Code. How to get more Speed and Power. London: Granada, 1983.
Reprinted: 1983; 1984 (3 times); London: Collins Professional and Technical Books, 1985 (155pp). Contents (1985 Collins reprint): 1. Introducing the Assembler; 2. Number Representation; 3. Registers, Transfers and Arithmetic; 4. Branching, Comparisons and Subroutines; 5. Indexed Addressing and ROM Subroutines; 6. Logical Instructions and BCD Format; 7. Programming Guidelines; Appendices.

Stephenson, Alfred Phillip., and Derek John Stephenson. Exploiting BBC BASIC. London: Newnes Technical, 1983.

Stephenson, Alfred Phillip., and Derek John Stephenson. Filing Systems and Databases for the BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1984.

Stewart, Ian. Gateway to Computing with the BBC Micro. 2 vols; Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1984].

Telford, Joe H. BBC Micro Advanced Programming. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.; London: Prentice-Hall, 1985.

Telford, Joe H. Practical Hardware Projects for the BBC Micro. London: Century Communications, 1985.
158pp. Contains 33 projects. Introduction dated February 1985. Contents: 1. Tools and Techniques; 2. The Electronic Components; 3. Programming the I/O; 4. Analogue Projects 1; 5. Analogue Projects 2; 6. Paddles and Joysticks; 7. User Port Projects 1: Input; 8. User Port Projects 2: Output; 9. User Port Projects 3: Further I/O; 10. Controlling Motors; 11. Feedback from the Buggy; 12. Upgrading the BBC Micro; Appendix 1. Suppliers' Names and Addresses; Appendix 2. External +5v PSU.

Thomas, Alan. Further Programming for the BBC Micro. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1983.

Thomas, Annabel. The Usborne First Guide to the BBC Micro. London: Usborne, 1984.
Edited by Helen Davies; illustrated by Graham Round; additional illustrations by Mark Longsworth and Graham Smith; BBC consultants, Chris Coulson and Les Howarth.

Thomasson, Don. BBC Hardware Projects. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1984].

Thomasson, Don. Guide to the BBC ROMs. Richmond: Melbourne House, 1984.
231pp. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Initialisation; 3. Interrupts; 4. The OSBYTE and OSWORD Calls; 5. Input and Output; 6. Buffers; 7. Keyboard; 8. Command Line Interpreter; 9. VDU Control; 10. Save and Load; 11. The Sound System; 12. Files; 13. The BASIC Interpreter; Appendices; Disassembler and Sort Programs; Index.

Thorpe, Don. Using the BBC Micro in Education. London: Interface, 1984.

Townsend, Brian J. File Handling on the BBC Microcomputer. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1985.
With software on cassette.

Vine, Jeremy. On the Road to Artifical Intelligence: BBC micro. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.

Watt, Ian. Creating Adventure Programs on the BBC Micro. London: Interface, [c.1983].

Waugh, Ian. Making Music on the BBC Computer. A Musician's Guide to Programming. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Williams, Peter, ed. Programming the BBC Micro. London: Newnes Technical, 1983.

Williams, Simon. The BBC Micro and the Small Business. London: British Broadcasting Corporation, 1985.

[ART] Alderwick, Brian V., and Peter W. G. Simpson. "BBC Printer Buffer." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.42-45; February 1985. pp.30-32.
2 parts. Article and machine code listing. Turns a bank of sideways RAM into a printer buffer.

[ART] Alderwick, Brian V., and Peter W. G. Simpson. "Improve Your VIEW." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: July 1984. pp.58-61; Part 2: August 1984. pp.62-64.
Amending the VIEW word processor with alternate printer drivers etc. Publication of the assembly language routine in part 2 prevented by Acornsoft on grounds of copyright (they were due to bring out their own printer driver generator shortly after the publication of the magazine).

[ART] Alderwick, Brian V., and Peter W. G. Simpson. "Memex." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: May 1984. pp.16-18; Part 2: August 1984. pp.44-45.
Constructional article. Adding 20K RAM to a BBC Model B. Part 2 states that Cambridge Computer Consultants had blocked the publication of the remainder of the article, as it would infringe upon patents they had applied for relating to their Aries board. The second part consequently describes how Aries software can be used with the hardware previously described.

[ART] Allen, Dr. A. R. "The BBC Micro and the Light Fantastic: Optical Interference Patterns Displayed using the BBC Micro." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1983. pp.34-36.
With a circuit and software listing.

[ART] Allen, Alastair. "The BBC Micro as a Chart Recorder." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1983. pp.34-36.

[ART] Andrews, P. "Disc Overlays." Your Computer March 1985. pp.106-108.
Listing. Using disk space as paged memory for program modules.

[ART] Ashby, Philip. "EX42 Interface for the BBC 'B'." Electronics Today International August 1985. pp.41-44, 57.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. Connects a Silver Reed EX42 daisywheel typewriter to a BBC Micro. Includes software listing.

[ART] Bancroft, Ralph. "Elite." Personal Computer News No. 820. 13 October 1984. p.47.
Review Elite by Ian Bell and David Braben.

[ART] Batty, Mike. "On the Terraces." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 2, No. 45. 10-16 November 1983. pp.26-27.
Part of a series. Listing demonstrating how to create a streetscape.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Automatic Measurement of Resonance in an Air Column." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1983. pp.14-16.
With a circuit diagram and a listing.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "BBC Interfacing Techniques: The Operation of Shift Registers." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.38-40.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "The BBC Micro and Fourier Synthesis." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1983. pp.28-30.
With a listing.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "The BBC Micro as an Event Timer." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1983. pp.23-25.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Counting & Timing." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.57-60.
6522 features.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Counting Micro Seconds." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.28-30.
Using the 16-bit counter/timers of the 6522 VIA.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Frequency Measurement." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1982. pp.68-71.
Using the 6522 VIA as an auto-ranging frequency meter, 8Hz-480kHz, with a circuit for an interface taking a signal between 1mV and 10V and converting it to a square wave pulse with TTL voltage levels to apply directly to the VIA.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "High Speed Beeb Interface." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.64-65.
Series. Software to use enhanced ports with modifications to allow the frequency meter program from Electronics and Computing Monthly September 1984 work with the higher speed interface.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "High Speed I/O." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.16-18.
Interface the BBC Micro using the full 2MHz clock speed of the 6502 CPU.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Interfacing the BBC Micro. Part 1." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1982. pp.14-16.
Series. Details of the BBC's ports.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Interfacing the BBC Micro. Part 3. Simple Digital Input-Output." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1982. pp.44-46.
Series.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Keeping Track of Slot Car Racers." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1985. pp.34-36.
Constructional article with software. Timing slot car races.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Revealing the BBC Micros Built-In Modem." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. pp.34-36.
Using the cassette and RS423 ports for basic modem functionality.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "The Versatile VIA." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.51-54.
Part of a series. The counter-timers.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "Waveform Synthesis." Electronics and Computing Monthly September 1982. pp.44-48, 63.
Generating waveforms. With circuits and listings.

[ART] Bowerman, Chris. "BBC Graphics." Your Computer April 1985. pp.90-92.
Listing. Graphics in Modes 3, 6, and 7.

[ART] Bush, D. "Tech Tips: Buffer Amplifier for the BBC Microcomputer." Electronics Today International December 1985. p.54.
A reader's design with a schematic.

[ART] Cant, Chris. "Printspooler." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1984. pp.46-48; April 1984. pp.47-48.
Machine code listing. Background printing with parallel-port printers.

[ART] Connor, Gareth. "Circuits on the Small Screen." Electronics Today International March 1987. pp.28-30.
Review of PCB design packages: Diagram (£25, Pineapple Software); Analyser II (£130, Number One Systems); PCB Plotting (£20, Vinderen Associates); PCB (£85, Pineapple Software).

[ART] Dawson, John. "BBC ADE and BCPL." Your Computer March 1985. pp.85-86.
Review of ADE macro assembler from System, Sheffield, and BCPL from Acornsoft.

[ART] Dawson, John. "Plotmate Plotting Pen." Your Computer October 1985. pp.75, 77-78.
Analysis of the operation of the Plotmate plotter, and of the operation of plotters in general.

[ART] Dawson, John. "Robot Kits." Your Computer January 1986. pp.68-69, 71.
Review of the Milton Bradley Robotix kits. Includes interfacing information for the BBC Micro.

[ART] Dawson, John. "VIEW and SCRIBE." Your Computer February 1985. pp.50-51.
Review of the word processors VIEW (Acornsoft) and SCRIBE (Bucon Ltd., Swansea).

[ART] Denning, Adam. "BBC Random Access." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.54-55.
Series. Random access filing on the BBC.

[ART] Denning, Adam. "BCPL on the BBC Micro." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1984. pp.30-32.
Review of the Acornsoft package.

[ART] Denning, Adam. "Graphics Designer." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.28-31; Letter with corrections: May 1984. p.13.
Listing. Viewdata (Mode 7) page designer. Denning was the technical and software editor of the Micronet 800 service on PRESTEL.

[ART] Denning, Adam. "Making the Right Connections." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1985. pp.24-26.
Constructional article. Networking a Sinclair ZX Spectrum with Interface 1, Sinclair QL and BBC Micro using serial connections.

[ART] Denning, Adam. "PASCAL in Practice." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.56-57.
Acornsoft S-PASCAL for the BBC Micro and Computer One PASCAL for the Sinclair QL examined.

[ART] Denning, Adam. "Random Access." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.80-81.
Random access files on disk systems.

[ART] Fojut, Vincent. "6502 Microcontroller." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.24-25.
Review of the Nikram 65C02 controller.

[ART] Furminger, Michael. "BBC Weather Satellite Display." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1983. pp.20-25.
Constructional article. Designed to work with a modified Ambit NBFM kit 96640 receiver and crossed dipole to retrieve NOAA6 and NOAA7 weather satellite images on 137 MHz.

[ART] Gillon, Chester. "File Reader." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 19. 8-14 May 1986. p.27.
Listing. Universal file reader.

[ART] Green, Andy. "Breaking the Price Barrier - The £40 Modem." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1985. pp.15-18.
Constructional article. Adapting the second-hand Display Electronics 2B modem to work with the BBC Micro.

[ART] Green, Andy. "Speedy BBC EPROM Blower." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.17-20; February 1985. pp.52-53.
Constructional article. 2 parts. Circuit diagram, PCB layout, and software. Generates a 21v programming pulse from the BBC's 5v rail. Programs 2764 and 27128 chips. The parts list contains many errors. The values shown on the circuit diagram are correct.

[ART] Green, David. "The Ikon HOBBIT." Electronics and Computing Monthly June 1983. pp.52-53.
Review.

[ART] Griffejoen, Tom. "Extra Colours." Your Computer February 1985. pp.129-130.
Listing. Obtaining 10 colours out of 36 in four colour modes, and 3 out of 36 in two colour modes. Will not work in modes 2 and 5.

[ART] Hine, Richard. "Keyboard for Your BBC." Your Computer September 1984. pp.70-72.
Construction details and software for a synth-style keyboard.

[ART] Homer, Andrew. "80 Column View." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 18. 1-7 May 1986. p.31.
Listing. Print preview in 80 columns for VIEW files. Requires a disc drive.

[ART] Hoskins, David. "BBC English." Your Computer January 1986. pp.84-85.
Producing speech in software using phonemes. By the author of Speech! (Superior Software).

[ART] James, Mike. "Battle of the Second Processors." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: March 1984. pp.18-20.

[ART] James, Mike. "The BBC Assembler." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1983. pp.21-24.
The BBC's built-in assembler and how to use it.

[ART] James, Mike. "The BBC MOS." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1983. pp.50-52.
How it works.

[ART] James, Mike. "Beeb Upgrading: Unicorn Second Processor." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1984. pp.50-51.
Review of the Torch Unicorn system for running Unix on a 68000 second processor with 256K RAM.

[ART] James, Mike. "The Diagram Diagnosed." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 2: May 1985. p.58.
2 parts. Description of the BBC Micro's circuit diagram.

[ART] Jones, Terry. "BBC Memory Expansion." Electronics and Computing Monthly Decembr 1984. pp.66-67.
Comparison of the Raven Expansion Board and the Watford Memory Expansion System.

[ART] King, Richard. "Fire up the Beeb." Personal Computer News No. 67. 30 June 1984. pp.28-29, 33-34.
Review of the Torch Unicorn system for running Unix on a 68000 second processor with 256K RAM.

[ART] Kirsch, Robert. "Motherboard for the BBC Micro." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 11. June-August 1984. pp.27-28, 53.
Constructional article.

[ART] Knaggs, David. "Experimental Science with the BBC Micro." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 2: February 1984. pp.72-74.
2 parts.

[ART] Landsberg, Dr. B. M. "Extending the BBC's Sound Command - What the Manual Doesn't Tell You." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1983. pp.23-25.

[ART] Latham, Tony. "BBC Text Handling." Personal Computing Monthly October 1982. pp.77-80.
Article with a listing. Manipulating text.

[ART] Miller, Peter. "Tapping 'Phones with Beasty." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. Your Robot Supplement. p.11.
Using the Commotion Beasty to dial a phone number.

[ART] Naylor, B. A., and D. W. Boyce. "Superfile." Your Computer February 1985. pp.111, 113-114.
Listing. Database program.

[ART] Noble, Cy. "Play It Again, Sam." Popular Computing Weekly Part 3: Vol. 4, No. 47. 21-27 November 1985. p.31.
3 parts. Listing. Music composition on the BBC Model B.

[ART] Oakey, Steve. "Skywave's Multi-FORTH." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.33-34.
Review.

[ART] Owen, William. "Ultradrive." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. p.27.
Review of the Ikon Ultradrive. Looped microcassette tape drive. About 35K per loop.

[ART] Parker, Tim. "16K Sideways RAM." Electronic Projects Book 1. Wimborne, Dorset: Wimborne Publishing with Magenta Electronics, 1989. pp.28-30.
Uses two 6264 8K SRAM chips. Installs into a spare ROM socket inside the BBC Micro. Allows you to develop software in RAM before blowing it into an EPROM.

[ART] Penfold, Robert A. "BBC MIDI Interface." Electronic Projects Book 1. Wimborne, Dorset: Wimborne Publishing with Magenta Electronics, 1989. pp.109-113.
Uses a 6850 ACIA chip.

[ART] Penfold, Robert A. "BBC Sequencer Interface." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1 (hardware): July 1983. pp.53-56; Part 2 (software): August 1983. p.50.
Allows the BBC Micro to control any synthesiser with a standard one volt per octave control voltage input, plus a 5 volt positive gate/trigger input (eg. the SCI Pro One). Uses a ZN4267E D/A converter.

[ART] Penfold, Robert A. "Beeb Micro." Everyday Electronics Vol. 19, No. 3. March 1990. pp.200-201.
Regular series. Audio output and noise with a circuit diagram of a noise gate.

[ART] Penfold, Robert A. "Beeb Micro." Everyday Electronics Vol. 19, No. 4. April 1990. pp.266-267.
Regular series. Computers and amateur radio.

[ART] Penfold, Robert A. "Beeb Micro." Everyday Electronics Vol. 19, No. 11. November 1990. pp.720-721.
Regular series. Includes a program to translate lines typed-in into morse. The final article in the series, which was replaced by the "Interface" column, concentrating on the IBM PC.

[ART] Penfold, Robert A. "Lie Detector Interface." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1983. pp.19-22.
Constructional article. Uses a VA10665 thermistor to detect a drop in temperature in the fingers, supposedly indicative of stress (due to reduced blood circulation to the extremities).

[ART] Penney, Richard. "Beeb-Scope." Electronics Today International March 1988. pp.26-32, 52; Corrections: August 1988. p.56.
Constructional article with PCB foil and software listing. Turn the BBC Micro into a low-frequency four-channel oscilloscope via the 1MHz bus.

[ART] Pickard, Alan. "Practical Robotics Techniques. Part 1: An Introduction to Control by Experiment." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 10, No. 42. February-March 1991. pp.16-18.
Primarily based around the BBC Micro.

[ART] Pilkington, J. "DIY Plotter." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: May 1985. pp.56-57.
Constructional article. At least 2 parts.

[ART] "RAM in Your ROM Socket." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1984. pp.56-58.
Instructions and software to use a 6116 2K CMOS RAM chip in the BBC's sideways ROM area.

[ART] Sargeant, Richard. "Shape Cutter." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.76-77.
Constructional article. Using the Commotion Beasty to cut shapes with a hot wire.

[ART] Sillett, Matthew J. "Picasso's Paintbrush." Your Computer February 1985. pp.130-131.
Listing. Drawing program (text originally published in the January issue without the listing).

[ART] Simpson, Peter, and Brian Alderwick. "EPROM Programmer for the BBC Micro." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: October 1983. pp.25-28; Part 2: November 1983. pp.37-40.
Constructional article with software. Burns 8K 2764 and 16K 27128 EPROMs.

[ART] Simpson, Peter, and Brian Alderwick. "Paged ROM for the BBC Micro." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: February 1984. pp.16-19; Part 2: March 1984. pp.66-68.
Constructional article. Extension board with seven additional ROM sockets. PCB foil layout, circuit diagram, and software.

[ART] Simpson, Peter, and Brian Alderwick. "Sideways RAM Board for the BBC Micro." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1983. pp.18-20.
Constructional article. Uses one to eight 6116 chips. Includes a PCB foil pattern. See letter from Peter Simpson in the March 1984 issue, p.69, noting a minor fix for some RAM chips.

[ART] Stuart, Mark. "Speech Synthesiser for the BBC Micro." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1984. pp.60-63; March 1984. p.34.
Constructional article. Includes a PCB foil pattern. Uses the SPO256-AL2. Includes an optional on-board EPROM. Kit supplied by Magenta Electronics.

[ART] Stuart, Mark. "Stepping Motors." Electronic Projects Book 1. Wimborne, Dorset: Wimborne Publishing with Magenta Electronics, 1989. pp.45-49.
With an SAA1027-based interface circuit and program for the BBC Micro.

[ART] Stuart, Mark. "Versatile BBC Computer Interface." Everyday Electronics March 1992. pp.176-179.
Constructional article. 8 output lines and 8 programmable input/output lines using the user port and printer port.

[ART] Stuart, Ray. "BBC Microforum." Practical Electronics June 1986. pp.40-41.
Series. Break key inhibit and enhanced light-pen.

[ART] Stuart, Ray. "Computer Terminal." Practical Electronics I: February 1984. pp.16-21.
Constructional article. Baed on the Thomson SFF96364 CRTC chip. BBC Micro interface promised for part 2 of the article.

[ART] Temple, Jonathan. "Compression." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 12. 20-26 March 1986. pp.26-27.
Listing. Graphics compression for the BBC Micro and Electron.

[ART] Tye, R. G. "BBC Digitiser." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: August 1983. pp.39-41.
Constructional article.

[ART] "VIEW Printer Driver Generator." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. p.64.
Review of Acornsoft's disk/cassette addition to their ROM-based word processor, which was originally released with limited printer support.

[ART] Walker, John, and J. Whetton. "Datapad." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.22-24.
Constructional article. A numeric keypad on the BBC Micro.

[ART] Wallin, David. "Become a Sysop with Communitel." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 20. 15-21 May 1986. p.35.
Review of the Communitel BBS software package for the BBC Micro.

[ART] Whitehead, Philip. "Music while you Work." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 10. 7-13 March 1985. pp.38-39.
Listing. Producing background music on the BBC Model B.

[ART] Williams, Mike. "Increase Your Word Power." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. pp.14-15.
Listing. Using the concept of the tachistoscope to improve speed reading abilities.

[ART] Williams, Mike. "Port Master." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.16-18.
Listing. Using a control interface without configuring the VIA's data direction register.

[ART] Williams, Mike. "Simu-LEDs." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.20-21.
Listing. Visual display of user port operation.

[ART] Williams, Mike. "The Volt Viewer." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.14-17.
Monitor voltages in real-time at the ADC inputs of the BBC Micro.

[ART] Woolf, Simon. "Pikchachanja." Your Computer October 1985. pp.84-85.
Listing. Animation package morphing shapes in 18 frames.

[ART] Yau, John. "BBC Micro MIDI Interface." Electronics Today International April 1987. pp.42-46, 56.
Constructional article with a PCB foil. Uses the 1MHz bus.

[ART] Yau, John. "Video Printer." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 2: May 1985. pp.38-41.
Video digitiser. Series of at least 3 parts.

Acorn Electron

6502-based, 32K RAM, 32K ROM. Built-in Acorn BASIC. Custom ULA chip handling sound, 1200 baud cassette interfacing, video and other functions. 7 graphics modes (0-6). Drops the 6845 video generator, Teletext graphics mode 7, 300 baud cassette support, built-in ROM sockets, and many of the I/O ports from the BBC Micro to reduce cost.

[Manual]
Acorn Computer Data Recorder Operating Instructions.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, 1984.
[2], 9, [1]pp. Part no. ALF03/M Issue 1. First published 1984. Manual for the ALF03 Data Recorder. Works with C15 to C60 cassettes. Supplied with a mains adaptor, a 7-pin DIN to 7-pin DIN cable, and this manual. For the BBC Micro and Electron.

Allan, Boris. Graphic Art for the Electron Computer. Turtle Graphics and Art. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Angell, Ian O., and Brian J. Jones. Advanced Graphics with the Acorn Electron. London: Macmillan, [c.1984].

Birnbaum, Ian. Assembly Language Programming for the Acorn Electron. London: Macmillan, 1984.

Bishop, Owen Neville. Easy Add-On Projects for Commodore 64, VIC 20, BBC Micro and Acorn Electron. London: Babani, 1985.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Practical Programs for the Electron. London: Granada, 1984.
165pp. Listings. Contents: Key Points; 1. Space Plan; 2. Budget; 3. Phone Call Coster; 4. Info File; 5. Supersound; 6. Index; 7. Cashflow; 8. Pie Chart; 9. Characters; 10. Stock Take; 11. Gottit!; 12. Compare It; 13. Twister; 14. What Next?

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Take Off With the Electron and BBC Micro. London: Granada, 1984.
144pp.

Brain, Keith Roger, and Steven Brain. Artificial Intelligence on the BBC and Electron: Make Your Micro Think. London: Sunshine, 1984.
viii, 136pp.

Cavalier-Smith, Neal. Dynamic Games for Your Electron. London: Interface, 1984.
viii, 168pp.

Cryer, Neil, and Pat Cryer. The Acorn Guide to the Electron. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1983.
Penguin Acorn Computer Library series.

Deeson, Eric. Easy Programming for the Electron. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.
164pp.

Ferguson, John Douglas, and Tony Shaw. Assembly Language Programming on the Electron. London: Addison-Wesley, 1983.
197pp.

Ferguson, John Douglas, John Gordon, Louie Macari, Ian McLean, Simon Rushbrook Williams, and Anthony Shaw. Programming the Electron. London: Newnes Technical, 1984.
148pp. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Practice in Programming; 3. Program Development; 4. Graphics; 5. Words; 6. Numbers; 7. Sound; 8. Bits and Bytes; 9. Assembly Language; 10. Interfacing - Time and Space; 11. File Handling; [Appendices:] A. BBC Microcomputer Specifications; B. Error Messages and Error Codes; C. ASCII Codes; D. 6502 Instruction Set.

Griffiths, Jonathan. Creative Assembler. How to Write Arcade Games for the BBC Microcomputer Model B and Acorn Electron. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1984.
191pp.

Haines, Gavin. BBC Micro and Electron Book. London: McGraw-Hill, 1985.
xi, 327pp. Contents: [Part I: System Facilities:] 1. Introduction; 2. Operating System Differences; 3. The Keyboard; 4. Typing in Programs; 5. Running Programs on Cassette; 6. Using Cassettes; 7. Using the Function Keys; 8. Your Workspace; [Part II: The Complete Programmer:] 9. How to Write a BASIC Program; 10. Writing Successful Games; 11. Commands Dealing with BASIC Workspace; 12. Dealing with Keyboard Input; 13. Dealing with Data and Flow of Control; 14. Texts and Strings; 15. Maths Functions; 16. Graphics and Screen MODEs; 17. Text and Graphics Windows; 18. Sound; 19. File Handling; 20. Disk Considerations; 21. Read/Write File Example; 22. Error Handling; 23. Machine Operating System Commands; [Part III: Selected Topics:] 24. Solving Cassette Problems; 25. Dealing with Error Messages; 26. After-Sales Queries; 27. Buying Equipment; 28. Disk Systems; 29. Disk Hints; 30. Copying Cassettes; 31. Relocating Programs for Disk; 32. Binary and Hexadecimal; 33. Using the ASCII Set; 34. Introduction to the 6502; 35. Machine Code Hints; 36. Using the Assembler; 37. Changing Vectors; 38. Vector Formulae; 39. Writing Advanced Software; 40. Printers and Word Processing; 41. PRESTEL and Teletext; 42. Networks; [Part IV: Reference:] 43. Special Effects: *FX Calls; 44. Page Zero Locations; 45. Main Memory Map; 46. Intrinsic Subroutines; [Part V: Appendices:] A. The ASCII Chart and Usage; B. Error Codes and Error Messages; C. Tokens for Keywords; D. EPSON Control Codes; E. Connectors; F. Cassette Specifications; G. Getting a Better Picture; H. Fitting the Disk Upgrade; I. Fitting Second Processors; J. Useful Addresses; K. Programs Available on Tape; L. References and Suggested Reading.

Hall, Patrick, and John Scriven. Programming for Education on the Electron Computer: A Handbook for Primary Education. London: Sunshine, 1984.
vii, 209pp.

Inglis, Jonathan. Simple Words and Word Games. Programs for the BBC Micro and Electron Computers. London: Granada, 1984.

Isaaman, Dan. Computer Games to Play and Write for Use with ZX-Spectrum, BBC, Electron, VIC and Dragon Computers. [London]: Sparrow, 1983.
126pp.

James, Mike, and S. M. Gee. Advanced Programming for the Electron. London: Granada, 1984.
viii, 192pp. Distributed in the US by Sheridan House. Contents: 1. Advanced Programming; 2. Program Structure; 3. Using Procedures and Functions; 4. Structured Assembler; 5. Structuring Data; 6. File Storage; 7. Making Programs Work; 8. A Spelling Checker; 9. An Execution Tracer; 10. The MOS - A Soft Machine; 11. Project - A 6502 Disassembler; 12. Bits, Binary and Boolean Logic; Further Reading.

James, Mike, S. M. Gee, and Kay Ewbank. 21 Games for the Electron. London: Granada, 1984.
145pp. 21 listings.

Kosniowski, Czes. Essential Maths on the BBC and Electron Computers. Basic Routines for Programming. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Ludinski, Geneviève. Brainteasers for the BBC and Electron Computers. Programs to Puzzle and Amuse. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix Publishing, [c.1983-1984].

McGregor, James J., and Alan H. Watt. The Art of Microcomputer Graphics for the BBC Micro/Electron. Wokingham: Addison Wesley, 1984.

Money, Steve A. Electron Graphics and Sound. London: Granada, 1984.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Programming the Acorn Electron. London: Babani, 1984.
134pp.

Plumbley, Mark D. The BASIC ROM User Guide for the BBC Microcomputer and Acorn Electron. Cambridge: Adder, 1984.
359pp. First published August 1984. Contents: [The Operation of BASIC:] 1. The 6502 Microprocessor; 2. The BASIC System; 3. Memory Use; 4. Expression Evaluation; 5. Program Control Mechanisms; 6. Assembling and Disassembling; [Enhancing BASIC:] 7. Adding New Commands; 8. Overlaying Procedures; 9. Trapping Other Errors; 10. ROM Routines; 11. Errors and Error Recover; Appendices; Bibliography; Glossary; Index.

Scriven, John. The Working Electron. A Library of Practical Programs. London: Sunshine, 1984.
vii, 177pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Electron Machine Code for Beginners. London: Granada, 1984.
viii, 156pp.

Smith, Bruce. Electron Assembly Language. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.
200pp. Shiva's Friendly Micro series. Preface dated September 1983. A companion cassette was available from the publishers. Contents: Why Assembler Language?; 2. Numbers; 3. It All Adds Up!; 4. It's Logical; 5. The Registers; 6. The Mnemonic Assembler I; 7. Status Symbols; 8. Addressing Modes I; 9. Bits and Bytes; 10. Arithmetic in Assembler; 11. Addressing Modes II; 12. Stacks of Fun; 13. Looping; 14. The Mnemonic Assembler II; 15. Subroutines and Jumps; 16. Shifts and Rotates; 17. Multiplication and Division; 18. Assembly Types; 19. A Passing Call; 20. Speeding Up and Slowing Down; 21. The MOS; 22. Interrupts and Breaks; 23. Prepacked Utilities; [Appendices:] 1. ASCII Codes; 2. The 6502; 3. BASIC in Assembler; 4. The Instruction Set; 5. Instruction Cycle Times; 6. The Electron's Memory Map; 7. 6502 Opcodes; 8. Electron Utilities Tape.

Yazdani, Masoud. Start Programming with the Electron. London: Addison-Wesley, 1983.
iv, 140pp. Contents: 1. Introducing the Acorn Electron; 2. Writing a Song; 3. Talking to Turtle; 4. Playing with Numbers; 5. Structured Problem Solving; 6. Helping Turtle in a Maze; 7. Input and Output; 8. Collections of Objects; 9. Have a Chat with your Micro; 10. Sounding Out your Electron; 11. Pretty Pictures; 12. Computer Games; Program Listings.

[ART] Griffejoen, Tom. "Extra Colours." Your Computer February 1985. pp.129-130.
Listing. Obtaining 10 colours out of 36 in four colour modes, and 3 out of 36 in two colour modes. Will not work in modes 2 and 5.

[ART] James, Mike. "The Electron." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1983. pp.21-23.
Review.

[ART] Lerche, David. "TV to RGB Conversion." Electronics Today International October 1988. pp.40-43, 56.
Constructional article with PCB foils. Includes a circuit to improve the RGB output of an Acorn Electron.

[ART] Penfold, R. A. "Electron A/D Converter." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1983. pp.40-43.
Constructional article. 4 channel A/D converter with a couple of digital inputs. Includes a PCB foil pattern and Electron edge connector notes.

[ART] Penfold, R. A. "Electron RS423 Interface." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: February 1984. pp.45-47; Part 2: March 1984. p.50.
Constructional article. 300 baud by default. May be changed to 75 baud under software control. Uses a 6850 ACIA. PCB foil given.

[ART] Temple, Jonathan. "Compression." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 12. 20-26 March 1986. pp.26-27.
Listing. Graphics compression for the BBC Micro and Electron.

[ART] Wike, John. "Electron Second Processor." Electronics Today International June 1985. pp.32-37, 55; July 1985. pp.43-47.
Constructional article in 2 parts, with a PCB foil. Adding a 6502 second processor to an Electron, making 30K RAM available to BASIC (60K to machine code), and increasing processing speed by up to three times. Includes a full software listing.

[ART] Wike, John. "Electron Speaker." Electronics Today International November 1984. pp.57-60, 82.
Constructional article with a PCB foil pattern. An allophonic speech synthesiser for the Electron using a General Instruments SP0256-AL2 speech processor.

Acorn Master.

The BBC Master was an enchanced version of the BBC Model B with a 2MHz 65C12 CPU and 128Kb RAM. The Master 512 was a Master 128 with 512Kb-1Mb RAM and an internal 80186 processor. The Master Turbo was a Master 128 with a 65C02 second processor. A Master Compact was also briefly released with a 3.5" FDD and no cassette interface. A version of the Master was used to create data for the BBC's Domesday project. These machines were enhanced with a 65C102 co-processor, a Genlock video overlay card, and a SCSI interface card for controlling an adapted laserdisc unit. They had a red label with the white text: 'British Broadcasting Corporation. Property of BBC Enterprises Ltd. Domesday System. Return to BBC Enterprises Ltd, 80 Wood Lane, London W12 0TT' and a code number in black marker. They ran VFS (Videodisc Filing System) v.1.7.

[Manual]
The BBC Microcomputer System. Master Series. Welcome Guide.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, January 1986.
[6], 249pp. Spiral bound. Issue 1 (January 1986; [6], 249pp); Issue 2 (March 1986; [6], 252pp). Part No. 0443,000. Contents: Foreword; Introduction; 1. Getting Started; 2. The BASIC Language; 3. Introducing VIEW; 4. Introducing ViewSheet; 5. Filing Systems; 6. The Editor; 7. The Terminal Emulator; 8. Expanding the System; Appendices.

[Manual]
Master Series Welcome Guide - Addendum Leaf.
[Cambridge]: [Acorn Computers], December 1985.
4pp sheet slipped into Issue 1 of the Welcome Guide, coded: Part No. 443,007, Issue No. 2 Date: 20 December 1985.

[Manual]
The BBC Microcomputer System. Master Series. Reference Manual - Part 1.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, March 1986.
Multi-paged. Spiral bound. Issue 1 (March 1986). Part No. 0443,001. Contents: A. System Overview; B. The Machine Operating System (MOS); C. MOS Commands; D. Using MOS Routines; E. The VDU Driver; F. Hardware and Memory Usage; G. Filing Systems; H. The Cassette Filing System (CFS); I. The ROM Filing System (RFS); J. The Disc Filing System (DFS and ADFS).

[Manual]
The BBC Microcomputer System. Master Series. Reference Manual - Part 2.
Cambridge: Acorn Computers, January 1986.
Multi-paged. Spiral bound. Issue 1 (January 1986). Part No. 0443,002. Contents: K. BBC BASIC; L. BASIC Keywords; M. BASIC Error Messages; N. BASIC Technical Information; O. The BBC BASIC Assembler; P. Assembler Keywords; Q. Assembler Errors; R. The System Editor - EDIT; S. The EDIT Text Formatter; T. System Editor/Formatter Error Messages; U. The TERMINAL Emulator.

The Advanced Reference Manual for the BBC Master 128 Microcomputer. Watford: Watford Electronics, [c.1988].
Spiral bound.

Ferguson, Iain, Gerry H. Hones, and Peter Neville Richards. The GeoBase Handbook for the BBC Master Microcomputer. Cambridge: Longman Logotron, 1990.

Gordon, John, and Ian McLean. The BBC Master 128 for High-Flyers. Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1986].

Smith, Bruce. Advanced Sideways RAM User Guide for the Master and BBC Computers. Revised edition; n.p.: Victory Publishing, 1987.

[ART] "The Master 128." Your Computer March 1986. pp.66-67.
Review.

[ART] Worlock, Peter. "Peter Worlock Previews a Master Series - Acorn's New Generation of BBC Machines Offering Power, But at a Price." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 3. 16-22 January 1986. pp.10-11.
Preview.

Acorn ABC Series

A 1985 range of business computers that do not appear to have entered full mass production. ABC Personal Assistant: built into the mono monitor housing, with an attached keyboard; ABC-110: built into the monitor housing, with an attached keyboard, Z80 CPU, 65C02 co-processor, 32K ROM, 5.25" FDD, 10Mb HDD, colour, hi-res graphics, text, teletext mode, BBC BASIC, built-in PSU; ABC-210: built into the monitor housing, with an attached keyboard, NMS32016 CPU, 65C02 co-processor, 32K ROM, 512K-1Mb RAM, 5.25" FDD, HDD, colour, hi-res graphics, text, teletext mode, BBC BASIC, built-in PSU; ABC-310: built into the monitor housing, with an attached keyboard, PLCC 80286 CPU, 65C02 co-processor, 32K ROM, 1Mb RAM, 5.25" FDD, 10Mb HDD, colour, hi-res graphics, text, teletext mode, DR-DOS, BBC MOS, GEM-86, built-in PSU; Cambridge Workstation (a variant of the ABC-210 with 4Mb RAM, 20Mb HDD).

Acorn Archimedes, ARM, RiscPC, and RISC OS

The ARM Development System was a second processor for the BBC Master. In 1987 the Acorn Archimedes was launched as the first RISC-based microcomputer with the A305, A310, and A440. The R140 was an adapted A440 running UNIX. Next to launch was the A3000 in an Amiga-style case. The A410/1 was released alongside a rebadged A440/1 and an A420/1. R225 and R260 UNIX machines followed with a RISC OS version denominated the A540. The A5000 was launched in 1991. The following year a portable version was released as the A4. Next the A3010 and A3020 upgraded the basic A3000 design. The A4000 was released as a mid-range machine. A5000NS machines had either Econet or Ethernet networking. The first second-generation RISC computer was the RiscPC600 in 1994, sporting the new 'slice' case design. Next came the RiscPC700. The A7000 was launched as a replacement for the A4000. In 1997, an A7000+ was released. Phoebe, a StrongARM RISC PC, was due for release in September 1998. On September 17th 1998 the plug was pulled. The RISC OS lived on and a range of machines were built to run it. Acorn became Element 14, finally vanishing on 24th November 2000, when it was acquired by Broadvision. [Source: Condensed from Robert McMordie's 'Technical History of Acorn Computers' (online).]

[Manual: Hardware]
VLSI Technology, Inc., Application Specific Logic Products Division. Acorn RISC machine (ARM) Family Data Manual.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall; London: Prentice-Hall International, 1990.
Multi-paged.

[Manual: OS]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS Programmers Reference Manual.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1989.
4 vols. and an additional volume of Indices.

[Manual: OS]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS 3 Programmers Reference Manual.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1992.
4 vols. and an additional volume of Indices. Vol. 1: xii, 948pp. Vol. 2: viii, 746pp. Vol. 3: viii, 848pp. Vol. 4: viii, 576pp. Indices: viii, 102pp.

[Manual: OS]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS 3 Style Guide.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1993.
viii, 130pp. With a disk.

[Manual: OS]
Acorn Computers Ltd. RISC OS 3 Programmers Reference Manual. Volume 5. Supplement for Version 3.5.
[Cambridge]: Acorn, 1994.
xiv, 302pp. With a disk. The separate volume of indices was republished to cover all five volumes, including the supplement: [Cambridge]: Acorn, 1994 (x, 110pp).

Blunt, Terry. Archimedes Game Maker's Manual. Wilmslow: Sigma Press, 1992.
viii, 275pp.

Fox, Martyn. First Steps in Programming Acorn RISC OS Computers. Wilmslow: Sigma Press, 1993.
252pp.

Furber, Stephen Bo. ARM System Architecture. Harlow; Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1996.
xvi, 416pp. 2nd edition (with the amended title ARM System-on-Chip Architecture): Harlow; New York: Addison-Wesley, 2000 (xii, 419pp).

Ginns, Mike. Archimedes Assembly Language: The Complete Programming Course. Manchester: Dabs Press, May 1988.
2nd edition: Manchester: Dabs Press, 1989 (368pp); 3rd impression: Manchester: Dabs Press, October 1991. 2nd edition stated to cover the RISC OS. Contents (2nd edition, 3rd impression): 1. Introduction; 2. An Overview of the ARM; 3. Internal Architecture; 4. The BASIC Assembler; 5. The ARM Instruction Set; 6. Data Processing: Format; 7. Shift Instructions; 8. Processing Instructions; 9. Register R15; 10. Data Transfer; 11. Branches and SWI; 12. Stacks and LDM/STM; 13. The BASIC Assembler 2; 14. Techniques & Debugging; 15. Interrupts and Events; 16. Vectors; 17. OS SWI Routines; 18. The WIMP Environment; 19. Managing Fonts; 20. Templates and Input/Output; 21. Manipulating Strings; 22. Functions, Operators; 23. Control Statements and Loops; 24. Graphics Templates; 25. RISC OS Specific; Appendices.

Jagger, Dave, ed. ARM Architecture Reference Manual. London; New York: Prentice Hall, 1996.
Multi-paged. Document No. ARM DDI 0100B. 2nd edition (edited by David Seal): Harlow: Addison-Wesley, 2001 (Document No. ARM DDI 0100E; multi-paged).

Sloss, Andrew N., Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, and John Rayfield. ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software. Amsterdam: Elsevier; Boston: Morgan Kaufman, 2004.

Van Someren, Alex, and Carol Atack. The ARM RISC Chip: A Programmer's Guide. Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, [c.1993-1994].

Van Someren, Alex, and Nic Van Someren. Archimedes Operating System: A User's Guide. Manchester: Dabs Press, 1988.
320pp. 2nd printing: Manchester: Dabs Press, February 1990 (320pp). Another edition or printing: Manchester: Dabs Press, 1991 (320pp). A disk (ADFS 640K) was produced to accompany the book, and an 8pp manual was supplied with it (First edition: February 1989). Contents (2nd printing): 1. RISC Technology; 2. The ARM Instruction Set; 3. The BASIC V Assembler; 4. The Operating System; 5. Command Line Interpreter; 6. OS_CLI Related SWIs; 7. Filing Systems; 8. The FileSwitch Module; 9. Filing System SWIs; 10. Modules; 11. Writing Modules; 12. Writing Applications; 13. The Window Manager; 14. The Font Manager; 15. Sound Introduction; 16. Sound Star Commands; 17. Sound SWI Calls; 18. The Voice Generator; 19. Character Input/Output; 20. Vectors; 21. Interrupts and Events; 22. Conversion SWIs; 23. Miscellaneous SWIs; 24. The ARM Chip Set; 25. Floating Point Model; Appendices.

ACT Sirius 1

Morris, Stephen. Introducing Psion Xchange Software on the ACT Sirius. London: Duckworth, 1985.
Xchange is a Works package for the Sirius comprising Abacus, Archive, Easel, and Quill.

Morris, Stephen. Using Abacus on the ACT Sirius. London: Duckworth, 1985.
Cover title omits 'ACT'. Abacus is the spreadsheet program in Psion's Xchange package.

Morris, Stephen. Using Archive on the ACT Sirius. London: Duckworth, 1985.
Archive is the database program in Psion's Xchange package.

Morris, Stephen. Using Easel on the ACT Sirius. London: Duckworth, 1985.
Easel is the drawing program in Psion's Xchange package.

Morris, Stephen. Using Quill on the ACT Sirius. London: Duckworth, 1985.
Quill is the word processor in Psion's Xchange package.

[ART] Osborne, A. D. "Sirius Graphics." Personal Computer World September 1983. pp.218-219.
Review of the Magus Computer Systems Hi-Res Graphics board for the ACT Sirius/Victor 9000.

[ART] "Serious Sirius." Which Micro? & Software Review July/August 1982. pp.67, 69.
Review of the ACT Sirius 1.

Advance 86

IBM compatible. 4.77MHz 8086 CPU. 64K ROM, 128K-256K RAM, additional 16K video, 84-key keyboard, BASIC, TV, RGB, composite colour or mono output, 80 x 25 or 40 x 25 text, 320 x 200 or 640 x 200 graphics, 16 colours, 10 programmable keys, cassette recorder port, light pen port, joystick port, Centronics i/f, internal speaker, 8087 FPU optional. Model A: basic unit; Model B includes the Advance Expansion Box containing: 2 x 360K 5.25" FDDs. Designed by Advanced Technology UK Ltd., manufactured by Ferranti, Oldham.

AIM 65

Produced by Rockwell, AIM stood for Advanced Interface Module. Unboxed SBC: 6502 CPU, 8K Monitor ROM, 1K-4K RAM. On-board 20-character printer and display with a 54-key keyboard attached by a ribbon cable. Interfaces for a teletype, 2 cassettes, the system bus and a VIA (serial, two parallel, two 16-bit counters).

Leventhal, Lance A. Microcomputer Experimentation with the AIM 65. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1987.

AlphaSmart Pro

Laptop with a full-size QWERTY keyboard, 4-line 40 character LCD display, 128K RAM (64pp text), and runs for 60-120 hours on 2 AA alkaline batteries. When connected to a Mac or PC, operates as a keyboard, with one key data transfer (as if the text was being typed in). W30cm x D20.4cm x H4.2cm. Weight: 0.91Kg. External mains adaptor supplied.

Altair 8800

8080-based. Programmed by key switches, LEDs for display. Could be purchased as a kit or ready-built from MITS Inc., 6328 Linn N.E., Albuquerque, New Mexico 87108.

[ART] Roberts, H. Edward, and William Yates. "Altair 8800: The Most Powerful Minicomputer Project Ever Presented - Can Be Built for Under $400." Popular Electronics Part 1: January 1975. pp.33-38; Part 2: [February 1975].

Altair Attaché

Built-in keyboard, PSU, and 10 S-100 slots. 2MHz 8080A, 16K SRAM and 16K DRAM boards available. Three versions of BASIC: 8K, Extended (16K), or MITS300-5A (24K). Turnkey Monitor Board has 1K RAM and four 1702 (256 bytes) PROMS. Alternative multi-boot loader available for booting from cassette. Standard cassette and Pertec FD512 8" SS SD FDD (310K).

[ART] Healey, Martin. "The Attaché." Personal Computer World February 1979. pp.29-32.
Review.

Amstrad (General and Unspecified)

Address: Amstrad Consumer Electronics Plc., Brentwood House, 169 Kings Road, Brentwood, Essex.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. The Amstrad Companion. London: Sunshine, 1986.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Practical Amstrad Wordprocessing. London: Sunshine, 1986.

[ART] Crookes, David. "Company Profile: Amsoft." Retro Gamer No. 19. pp.32-35.

Amstrad CPC

CPC 464: 4MHz Z80A, 32K ROM, 64K RAM, 16 colours, 80 x 25 text, 640 x 200 graphics, built-in keyboard, built-in cassette recorder; CPC 6128: 4MHz Z80A, 48K ROM, 128K RAM, 16 colours, 80 x 25 text, 640 x 200 graphics, built-in keyboard, built-in 3" FDD.

[Manual: Hardware]
Amstrad CPC464, CPC6128, GT65, CTM644, MP3, CT1, Ammendment Service Manual.
Harlow, Essex: Amstrad, n.d.
36 fold-out sheets with schematics, service information and PCB layouts.

[Manual: Hardware]
Amstrad CPC 464 User Instructions.
Brentwood, Essex: AMSOFT, 1984.
Internal title: CPC464 Colour Personal Computer 64k. 2nd edition: Autumn 1984 (multi-paged). Spiral bound. Compiled by William Poel, Roland Perry, Ivor Spital, and R. J. Watkins. Contents (2nd edition): About This User Guide; Beginners' Foundation Course; 1. Starters; 2. Cassette Datacorder; 3. BASIC Primer; 4. Variables, Operators, and Data; 5. Graphics Primer; 6. Sound Primer; 7. Printers and Joysticks; 8. Concise Reference Guide to Amstrad BASIC; 9. Further Programming Information; 10. Interrupt Features; Appendices.

[Manual: Hardware]
CPC 6128 User Instructions.
Brentwood, Essex: Amstrad Plc., 1985.
Compiled by Ivor Spital. Written by Ivor Spital, Roland Perry, William Poel, and Cliff Lawson. 4th edition: 1987 (spiral bound; multi-paged; coded on the rear: 'JAABPCA01E'). Contents (4th edition): 1. Foundation Course; 2. Beyond Foundations; 3. Complete List of Amstrad CPC6128 BASIC Keywords; 4. Using Discs and Cassettes; 5. AMSDOS and CP/M; 6. Introduction to LOGO; 7. For Your Reference; 8. More About the Bank Manager; 9. At Your Leisure; Appendices.

[Manual: OS]
Amstrad BASIC: The Complete Technical Specification.
[Brentwood, Essex]: AMSOFT, 1984.

[Manual: OS]
CPC 464 Firmware: ROM Routines and Explanations.
Brentwood, Essex: AMSOFT, 1984.
By Bruce Godden.

[Manual: OS]
DDI-1 Firmware: An Appendix to SOFT158, Describing the CPC464 Disc Interface ROM Routines and Explanations.
Brentwood, Essex: AMSOFT, 1984.
By P. Overell.

[Manual: OS]
The Digital Research CP/M Plus Manual for Amstrad PCW8256 and Amstrad CPC6128.
2nd edition; London: Heinemann, 1986.
By Digital Research, Inc. and Amstrad Consumer Electronics plc. Revised edition published in 1987. Originally published: Monterey, California: Digital Research, 1983.

[Manual: OS]
Operating Amstrad CP/M 2.2.
[Brentwood, Essex]: AMSOFT, 1985.
Multi-paged. Comb bound. Soft 06016. By Boris Allan. Edited by Sally Tyler. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. What is CP/M; 3. Discs and Drives; 4. The Parts of CP/M; 5. Files and Things; 6. Changing the System; 7. The Editor; 8. Assemble and Submit; Appendix. An Amstrad CP/M Inventory.

[Manual: Software]
AMSOFT. Guide to LOGO.
[Brentwood, Essex]: AMSOFT, 1985.
Soft 160. By Boris Allan.

[Manual: Software]
David Computer Software. Invoice Control.
Stockport: David Computer Software, [198-].
Single sheet printed as 2pp. Instructions for software available for the Amstrad CPC464, Sharp MZ-700 and Sharp MZ-80A/K.

Allan, Boris. The Amstrad 464 and 664. London: Pitman, 1985.
vi, 128pp.

Allan, Boris. The Amstrad 464, 664 and 6128. London: Pitman, 1985.
113pp.

Amstrad Action. Somerton, Somerset; Bath: Future Publishing, 1985-[1995].
Periodical. Monthly.

Amstrad Computer User. Brentwood: Avralite, January 1986-April 1990.
Periodical. Continues Amstrad CPC 464 User.

Amstrad CPC464 User. Brentwood: Avralite, [1984]-1985.
Periodical. Six issues yearly, later monthly. Continued by Amstrad Computer User.

Amtix! Monthly Software Review for the Amstrad Computers. Ludlow: Newsfield, October 1985-April 1987.
Periodical. Monthly. Incorporated into Computing with the Amstrad CPC.

Apps, Vince. 40 Educational Games for the Amstrad. London: Granada, 1984.
196pp.

Bergin, Kevin, and Andrew Lacey. Amstrad Games Book: CPC 464 & CPC 664. [Richmond]: Melbourne House, 1985.

Bishop, Owen Neville. Easy Add-On Projects for Amstrad CPC 464, 664, 6128 and MSX Computers. London: Babani, 1985.
BP171. 192pp. Reprinted: 1986.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Practical Programs for the Amstrad CPC464. London: Collins, 1985.
[11], 172pp.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Wargaming on the Amstrad CPC464, 664 & 6128. London: Argus, 1986.
186pp.

Bradbury, Andrew John. Adventure Games for the Amstrad CPC464. London: Collins, 1985.
232pp.

Braga, John. Amstrad Explored: A Guide to the Amstrad CPC464. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1984.
[4], 190pp.

Clarke, Andrew R. M., and David Powys-Lybbe. The Amstrad CP/M Plus. London: M.M.L. Systems, 1986.

Colwill, Steve W. Games and Graphics Programming on the Amstrad CPC 464, 664 and 6128. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro, 1985.
224pp.

Computing with the Amstrad CPC: The Independent Magazine for Amstrad CPC Users. Stockport: Database Publications, 1984-August 1988 (Vol. 4, No. 8).
Periodical. Monthly. Continued by CPC Computing.

CPC Computing. Macclesfield: Database Publications, (Vol. 4, No. 9) September 1988-December 1988 (Vol. 4, No. 12).
Periodical. Continues Computing with the Amstrad CPC.

Dewhirst, John, and James Ryan. A Child's Guide to the Amstrad Micro. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press, 1984.
96pp.

Ellershaw, Derek, and Peter Schofield. Very Basic BASIC: The First 15 Hours on Your Amstrad CPC464. London: Century, 1985.
[12], 142pp.

Erskine, Robert, Humphrey Walwyn, Paul Stanley, Michael Bews, and Mitri Yazbek. Sixty Programs for the Amstrad CPC464. London: Pan, 1984.
303pp.

Fairbanks, Martin. The Amazing Amstrad Omnibus. London: Interface, 1985.
ix, 415pp.

Forsyth, Richard, and Chris Naylor. The Hitch-Hiker's Guide to Artificial Intelligence. Amstrad BASIC Version. London: Chapman and Hall, 1986.
vii, 261pp.

Gandoff, Martin, and Robin Kinge. An Amstrad CPC464 Compendium. Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, 1985.
168pp.

Gerrard, Peter. Exploring Adventures on the Amstrad CPC464. London: Duckworth, 1985.
viii, 244pp.

Gifford, Clive. The Amstrad Pentacle Adventure Creator. London: Interface, 1985.

Gifford, Clive. Dynamic Games for Your Amstrad. London: Interface, 1984.
viii, 210pp.

Gifford, Clive, and Tim Hartnell. The Amstrad Programmer's Guide. London: Pitman, 1985.
vi, 176pp.

Gifford, Clive, and Tim Hartnell. Mysterious Adventures for Your Amstrad. London: Virgin, 1985.
95pp.

Goode, Peter. The Amstrad Program Book. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix, 1984.
144pp.

Gray, Sean. Amstrad. Watson's Workbook, 2. Sound, Graphics & Data Handling. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.
190pp.

Gray, Sean, and Eddy Maddix. Amstrad. Watson's Workbook, 1. Starting BASIC for the Amstrad. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.
Multi-paged.

Gregory, Jim. Sensational Games for the Amstrad. London: Granada, 1984.
vii, 200pp.

Harrison, Mark. The Amstrad CPC-464 Advanced User Guide. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Press, 1984.
140pp. Reprinted: January 1985 (with corrections); Reprinted: April 1985. 140pp. Contents (April 1985): 1. Amstrad & Beyond: An Introduction; 2. Strings and Character Manipulation; 3. Simple Input/Output Techniques; 4. Computers, Numbers and Mathematics; 5. The Amstrad Memory Map; 6. Time, Clocks and Interrupts; 7. Data Structures; 8. Data Processing; 9. Amstrad Graphics; 10. Sound and Synthesis; Appendix A. ASCII Character Set; Appendix B. Key Handler Codes; Appendix C. Colour Codes; Appendix D. Error Codes. The Preface is written by William Poel of AMSOFT.

Hartnell, Tim. Astounding Arcade Games for the Amstrad. London: Interface, 1984.
32pp. Tim Hartnell's Computer Kwik-Bytes, 3.

Herbertson, Tim. Amstrad Assembly Language Course. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.
Multi-paged. Dr. Watson series. Supplied with a disk containing (amongst other software) a Z80 assembler. Software by Graham Rounce. Package badged Honeyfold Software.

Hook, Keith. Advanced Programming Techniques on the Amstrad CPC 464. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix Publishing Association, 1985.

Hurley, Richard G., and David D. Virgo. Computer Challenges for the Amstrad. London: Duckworth, 1985.
212pp.

Hurley, Richard G., and David D. Virgo. An Educational Database for the Amstrad. London: Duckworth, 1985.
193pp.

Inglis, Jonathan. Amstrad CPC 464. London: Granada, 1985.
64pp. Beginners' Micro Guides series. Illustrations by Elaine Mills and Janos Marffy. Photography by Mark Gatehouse.

Jackson, Peter, and Peter Goode. Business Programming on Your Amstrad CPC 464. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix, 1985.

James, Mike, and S. M. Gee. Amstrad Communications: CPC & PCW Ranges. London: Argus Books, 1986.
132pp.

James, Wynford. BASIC Programming on the Amstrad. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro, 1984.
v, 229pp. Reprinted (with the title BASIC Programming on the Amstrad Computers CPC 464, 664 and 6128): 1985.

James, Wynford. Graphics Programming Techniques on the Amstrad CPC 464. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro, 1985.
161pp.

Kalisky, Itzhak, and Dani Kedem. Amstrad 464 & 664. Watson's Notes. Unit 1: First Steps in BASIC. Barnet: Glentop, 1985.
95pp.

Kalisky, Itzhak, and Dani Kedem. Amstrad 464, 664 & 6128. Watson's Notes. Unit 2: Exploring BASIC. Barnet: Glentop, 1985.
83pp.

Kalisky, Itzhak, and Dani Kedem. Amstrad 464, 664 & 6128. Watson's Notes. Unit 3: Computer Games. Barnet: Glentop, 1985.
75pp.

Kramer, Steve. Machine Code for Beginners on the Amstrad. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro Press, 1984.
vi, 189pp. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. What is Machine Code and Why Use It?; 3. First Concepts; 4. Flow Charts; 5. Simple Machine Code Instructions; 6. Simple Maths; 7. Flags, Conditions and Decision Making; 8. Logical Operations; 9. Using the Machine Stack; 10. Using Instructions that Work on a Single Bit; 11. Rotates and Shifts, Multiplication and Division; 12. Automated Moves and Searches; 13. Communicating with the Outside World; 14. Other Instructions, Indexed Addressing with the IX and IY Registers; 15. Programming Hints, and Using the Firmware; [Appendices:] A. The Z80 Instruction Set; B. Hex Loader; C. Hex to Decimal Conversions MSB; D. Hex to Decimal Conversions LSB and Binary Nibbles; E. Twos Complement Conversions; F. Screen Map and Bit Map for Pixels; G. Useful Call Addresses.

Lawrence, David. Amstrad Advanced Programming Techniques. London: Sunshine, 1985.
153pp.

Lawrence, David, and Simon Lane. The Working Amstrad. A Library of Practical Subroutines and Programs. London: Sunshine, 1984.
viii, 216pp.

Marshall, Gary J. Applications for the Amstrad CPC464 and 664. London: Argus, 1985.

McBride, P. K. An Introduction to CP/M Plus on Amstrad Computers. Includes CP/M 2.2. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.

McLean, Ian, and John Gordon. 100 Programs for the Amstrad 464, 664 and 6128. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, 1985.
x, 228pp.

Meadows, Richard Guy. Programming the Amstrad CPC464. Eastbourne: Cassell, 1985.
152pp.

Naylor, Jeff, and Diane Rogers. Master Machine Code on your Amstrad CPC 464 & 664. London: Scot, 1985.
vi, 146pp.

Noble, Tony. Amstrad CPC-464 Learning Programs. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1985.
216pp.

Penfold, J. W. Using Your Amstrad CPC Disc Drives. London: Babani, 1986.
BP189. 85pp.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Programming the Amstrad CPC464. London: Babani, 1984.
125pp.

Personal Computer World Magazine. PCW Games Collection for the Amstrad. London: Century Communications, 1985.
110pp.

Pritchard, Joe. Ready Made Machine Language Routines for the Amstrad CPC464/CPC664. Richmond: Melbourne House, 1985.
179pp. Contents: 1. Machine Language on the Amstrad; 2. Text Output Routines; 3. Graphics Routines; 4. Scrolling the Screen; 5. More Screen Routines; 6. Keyboard Operations; 7. Sound Routines; 8. Cassette Handling Routines; 9. BASIC and Machine Code; Appendix 1. Control Code Effects; Appendix 2. Instructions and Op-Codes; Appendix 3. Flag Operation Summary.

Procter, Jennifer, and Cameron Procter. Introducing the Amstrad CPC 664. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro, 1985.
225pp.

Ransom, Robert. Amstrad Graphics: The Advanced User Guide. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1985.
229pp.

Raven, Stephen. Structured Programming on the Amstrad CPC 464, 664 and 6128. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro, 1985.
151pp.

Simister, William. How to Write Amstrad CPC464 Games Programs. London: Babani, 1985.
134pp.

Simister, William. How to Write Word-Game Programs for the Amstrad CPC464, 664 and 6128. London: Babani, 1985.
102pp.

Simister, William. Simple Applications of the Amstrad CPCs for Writers. London: Babani, 1987.
79pp.

Sims, Martin. Practical LOGO for the Amstrad CPC 6128, PCW 8256 and PCW 8512. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.
160pp.

Sims, Martin. Using DR LOGO on the Amstrad. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.
Multi-paged.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Advanced Amstrad CPC 6128 Computing. [London]: Collins, 1986.
vi, 170pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Amstrad Computing. London: Granada, 1984.
viii, 208pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. The Amstrad CPC464 Disc System Including CP/M and Printers. London: Collins, 1985.
viii, 120pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Amstrad CPC 664 Computing. London: Collins, 1985.
v, 336pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Amstrad CPC464 Machine Code. London: Collins, 1985.
v, 192pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Amstrad CP/M Assembly Language. London: Collins, 1986.
160pp.

Skinner, Bryan. The Amstrad Programmer's Guide. London: Duckworth, 1985.
212pp.

Stephenson, A. P., and Derek John Stephenson. Assembly Language Programming for the Amstrad CPC 464/664/6128. London: Argus Books, 1986.

Stephenson, A. P., and Derek John Stephenson. Filing Systems and Databases for the Amstrad CPC464. London: Collins, 1985.
vii, 160pp.

Stewart, Ian. Gateway to Computing with the Amstrad CPC464. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1985.
2 vols. I: vi, 104pp; II: viii, 115pp.

Thomasson, Don. Amstrad CPC464 Whole Memory Guide. Richmond: Melbourne House, 1985.

Thomasson, Don. Ins and Outs of the Amstrad CPC464. [n.p.]: Melbourne House, 1984.

Trevennor, Alan. Understanding and Expanding your Amstrad CPC 464, 664 and 6128. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1986.
viii, 322pp.

Vincent, Scott, and Clive Gifford. Machine Code Routines for your Amstrad. London: Virgin, 1985.
96pp.

Vincent, Scott, and Clive Gifford. Mastering Machine Code on your Amstrad 464/664/6128. London: Interface, 1986.
viii, 263pp.

Vine, Jeremy. Bells and Whistles on the Amstrad. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.
86pp.

Vine, Jeremy. On the Road to Artificial Intelligence: Amstrad. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.
viii, 102pp.

Walker, Jack, ed. Amstrad Magic: Your First Programming Book. London: Foulsham, 1985.
96pp.

Walker, Jack. My Amstrad CPC 464 and Me. London: Duckworth, 1985.
94pp.

Waugh, Ian. Making Music on the Amstrad CPC 464 & 664. London: Scot, 1985.

Way, Edward. Games for Your Amstrad. London: Virgin, 1984.
122pp.

Webb, Steve. Practical Amstrad Machine Code Programming. London: Virgin, 1985.
121pp.

[ART] Beesley, Simon. "Amstrad's 6128 Battering Ram." Your Computer September 1985. pp.40-42.
Review of the CPC 6128.

[ART] Cadge, Brian. "Character Expansion." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 21. 22-28 May 1986. pp.22-23.
Machine code listing. Increasing text size using two new BASIC commands.

[ART] Cadge, Brian. "Double-Dealing." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 11. 14-20 March 1985. pp.32-33.
Machine code listing. Background printing.

[ART] Cadge, Brian. "Random Access." Popular Computing Weekly Part 1: Vol. 5, No. 3. 16-22 January 1986. pp.20-21.
Listing. Random access to discs from BASIC.

[ART] Cadge, Brian. "Speech Generator." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 47. 21-27 November 1985. p.27.
Listing. Software speech synthesis.

[ART] Denham, K. H. "Handy Hints on Amstrad." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 21. 22-28 May 1986. p.32.
Two short listings to determine whether a disk drive is attached, and whether a printer is online.

[ART] Durst, John. "Printing Modes." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 7. 13-19 February 1986. p.22.
Part of a series. Listing. Enhances hard copy on the 464.

[ART] Evans, Gary. "Hi-Fi to Hi-Res." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. p.12.
Preview of the Amstrad CPC464.

[ART] Hardcastle, Paul. "Amstrad Sampler." Electronics Today International September 1987. pp.41-46, 59-60.
Constructional project with PCB foils and software listing.

[ART] James, Simon. "Get Things Moving." Your Computer February 1985. pp.73-74.
Producing animation with the INK command.

[ART] Mostowyj, Michael. "Amstrad Extra Power." Your Computer October 1985. p.50.
Listing. Adds 21 extra commands to Amstrad BASIC.

[ART] Payne, Stephen. "Drums." Your Computer February 1985. p.134.
Listing. Plays a drum rhythm.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Amstrad A/D Convertor." Electronics and Computing Monthly December 1984. pp.42-44.
Constructional article. Uses the 7581 IC.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Amstrad CPC464 Fact Sheet." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.46-47.
Ports, pin-outs, and memory map detailed.

[ART] Probert, Kevin. "Amstrad Disassembler." Your Computer April 1985. pp.120-121, 123.
Listing. May be located anywhere in memory and under 2K.

[ART] Riley, D. P. "Monitor." Your Computer April 1985. p.134.
Listing. Machine code monitor written in BASIC.

[ART] Scott, Alastair. "Trace Routine." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 19. 8-14 May 1986. p.27.
Machine code listing. A better Trace command.

[ART] Shedden, D. G. "Disc Utility on Amstrad." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 20. 15-21 May 1986. p.33.
Disk indexing and loading routine.

[ART] Whalley, Carl. "Infinite Colours." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 12. 20-26 March 1986. p.22.
Listing. New colours for the Amstrad from 27 primaries, interlacing pixels in a crosshatch pattern.

Amstrad PCW, PcW, PC, and PPC series

PCW8256; PCW8512; PCW9256; PCW9512; PCW9512+; PCW10; PC16; PC1512; PC16409; PPC512; PPC640.

The PCW8256 to PCW10 line were nicknamed 'Joyce'. The PCW16 had a new OS called 'Anne' produced by Creative Technology. PCW models have a 3" FDD, PcW models have a 3.5" FDD. The PCW8256 (256K RAM, 1 FDD) and PCW8512 (512K RAM, 2 FDDs) were sold as word processors but ran BASIC, DR-LOGO, CP/M Plus, and GSX and were used as general purpose computers. The mainboard and (3" 360K DS) FDDs were built into the side of the 13" green screen 90 x 32 VDU. The machines were supplied with a 90 CPS dot-matrix printer in a bundle. The PCW9512 (1987) was an 8512 with a paper-white monochrome display and a 720K 3" FDD. It was supplied with a daisy-wheel printer. The PcW9256 (1991) had 256K RAM and a 3.5" FDD. The PcW9512+ (1991) was a 9512 with a 720K 3.5" FDD. The PcW10 (1993) had 512K and a 3.5" FDD. The PcW16 (1995) had 1Mb DRAM, 1Mb Flash RAM (OS and files), a 1.44Mb DOS compatible 3.5" FDD and ran the Rosanne GUI on a 640 x 480 monochrome paperwhite screen powered by a Z80 at 16MHz. It also had a lot of bugs and rapidly vanished. The PC1512 (512K RAM) and PC1640 (640K RAM) are lower-cost PCs with a bundle of software and hardware enhancements. The PPC512 and PPC640 are portables with 8MHz 8086 CPUs, 8087 maths co-processor socket, one or two 720K 3.5" FDDs, and 640 x 200 LCD screens supporting CGA, MDA, and text modes. The PPC512 has 512K RAM. The PPC640 has 640K RAM, and an internal modem (V21, V22, V22bis, V23, and V24, ie. 300-2400 baud with 1200/75). Both portable machines come with MS-DOS 3.3.

[Manual]
The Digital Research CP/M Plus Manual for Amstrad PCW8256 and Amstrad CPC6128.
2nd edition; London: Heinemann, 1986.
By Digital Research, Inc. and Amstrad Consumer Electronics plc. Revised edition published in 1987. Originally published: Monterey, California: Digital Research, 1983.

[Manual]
Amstrad Personal Computer Word Processor PCW8256. Book 1. The PCW8256 User Guide and Guide to Locomotive Software's LocoScript.
Brentwood, Essex: AMSOFT, 1985.

[Manual]
Amstrad Personal Computer Word Processor PCW8256. Book 2. Mallard BASIC Manual.
Brentwood, Essex: AMSOFT, 1985.

[Manual]
Weidenauer, Bill. Amstrad Personal Computer PC 1512 Technical Reference Manual.
Brentwood, Essex: Amstrad, 1986.
Spiral bound.

[Manual]
Weidenauer, Bill. Amstrad Personal Computer PC 1640 Technical Reference Manual.
Brentwood, Essex: Amstrad, 1987.

[Manual]
Amstrad PPC512S/512D, PPC640S/640D Personal Portable Computer Service Manual.
Brentwood, Essex: Amstrad, n.d.
Full schematics, PCB layouts, parts lists, and service information.

[Manual: OS]
Locomotive Software. Introduction to Mallard BASIC.
[1st edition.] Dorking, Surrey: Locomotive Software Ltd., 1985.
283pp. By Chris Hall and Ed Phipps.

[Manual: OS]
Locomotive Software. Mallard BASIC: Introduction and Reference.
[2nd edition.] Dorking, Surrey: Locomotive Software Ltd., 1987.
434pp. By Locomotive Software and Ed Phipps Documentation Services. Cover title: Mallard BASIC for the Amstrad PCW Range. Reprinted: 1988. Reprinted (with corrections): Dorking, Surrey: Locomotive Software Ltd., May 1989 (434pp; cover title: Mallard BASIC for the Amstrad PCW8256/8512 and PCW9512; spiral bound). Contents (May 1989 reprint of the 2nd edition): [Part I. Introduction:] 1. Starting with BASIC; 2. Starting Programming with BASIC; 3. Real Programming; 4. Building Larger Programs; 5. Manipulating Information; 6. Using Discs for Information Storage; 7. Keyed Access Files for Data Bases; 8. Machine Level Operations; [Part II. Reference:] 1. Introduction; 2. The Elements of BASIC; 3. Direct and Program Mode; 4. The Line Editor and Simple Line Input; 5. Overview of Commands and Functions; 6. Introduction to Printing; 7. Control of Ouput Devices; 8. Introduction to File Handling; 9. Keyed File Handling and Multiuser File Handling; 10. The Commands and Built In Functions; [Appendices:] I: Initialising BASIC; II. Error Numbers and Messages; III. External Routines; IV. BASIC Keywords; V. Hints on the Use of Jetsam and Multiuser Facilities; VI. Installation of BASIC; VII. The Command Editor; VIII. ASCII Character Set; IX. Trignometrical Functions; X. Binary Floating Point.

[Manual: Software]
Locomotive Software. LocoScript 2: Locomotive Software's Word Processor for the Amstrad PCW 8256 and 8512: User Guide.
Dorking, Surrey: Locomotive Software Ltd., [198-].
By Jean Gilmour. 2nd edition: Dorking, Surrey: Locomotive Software Ltd., [198-]. Reprint, with corrections: Dorking: Locomotive Software Ltd., 1989.

[Manual: Software]
Locomotive Software. LocoScript 2 on the Amstrad PCW 9512: The Definitive User Guide.
Dorking, Surrey: Locomotive Software Ltd., 1991.
By Jean Gilmour. With a floppy disk. Spiral bound.

8000 Plus. Somerton, Somerset: Future Publishing, [October 1986-1991].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: October 1986. Concluded with issue 63. Continued by PCW Plus (issue 64).

Amstrad PCW Magazine. Stockport: Avralite, [August 1987-1990].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: August 1987.

Atherton, F. John. The Amstrad PCW Series. Manchester: Dabs Press, [1992].

Campbell, John Lloyd. CP/M Plus on the Amstrad PCW. Oxford: New Tech, 1992.

Campbell, John Lloyd, and Marion Pye. Exploiting the Amstrad PCW9512. Oxford: Heinemann Newtech, 1991.

Carey, R. E. How to Recycle the Multistrike Printer Ribbons Used with Your Amstrad PCW 9512 - and Save Money. [London]: [Rusticus], 1991.
29pp.

Clarke, Andrew R. M., and David Powys-Lybbe. The Amstrad CP/M Plus. 2nd edition; London: M.M.L. Systems, 1986.

The Disc Drive: The South Essex PCW Club Magazine, for All PCW Users. [South Essex]: South Essex PCW Club, [1994-1997].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issue 16: Winter 1997.

Drake, Ken. Computer Programs for the Family Historian on Amstrad PCW Computers. Birmingham: Birmingham and Midland Society for Genealogy and Heraldry, 1996.

Fairbanks, Martin. The Amstrad PC Users Omnibus. London: Interface, 1987.

Gilmore, Robert. Picture Processing on the Amstrad PCW 8256/8512. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1991.

Grant, Bob. The PCW LOGO Manual. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1992.

Hawgood, David. Amstrad PCW8256 and PCW8512. London: Pitman, 1986.
A guide to wordprocessing.

Hughes, John Malcolm. All-In-One Business Computing: Amstrad PCW and Mini Office Professional. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1988.

Hughes, John Malcolm. The Complete Guide to LocoScript and the Amstrad PCW. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1992.
226pp.

Hughes, John Malcolm. Mastering the Amstrad PCW 8256/8512: Word Processing and Personal Computing. Wilmslow: Sigma, [1986].

James, Ian B. Amstrad PCW 8256/8512: More Than Just a Wordprocessor. Cambridge: Cambridge Microcomputer Centre, 1986.

James, Mike. Using Data Communications on the Amstrad PC1512/1640. London: Heinemann Professional, 1988.
[175]pp.

James, Mike, and S. M. Gee. Amstrad Communications: CPC & PCW Ranges. London: Argus Books, [1986].
132pp.

Keys, Michael. PCW Machine Code. Boston Spa: Spa Associates, 1988.
174pp. 2nd edition: Boston Spa: Spa Associates, 1989. 3rd edition: Boston Spa: Spa Associates, 1990 (174pp; spiral bound).

Keys, Michael. PCW Super Code. Boston Spa: Spa Associates, 1990.
215pp. Spiral bound. Intended as a sequel to PCW Machine Code.

Lang, Kathy. Business Presentation Graphics on the Amstrad PC. Barnet: Glentop, 1986.
213pp.

Lang, Kathy. Using GEM on the Amstrad PC. Barnet: Glentop, 1986.

Lowe, Betty. Amstrad PCW 8256 and 8512: Word Processing with LocoScript. Ormskirk: Sanda, 1986.
Cloth or spiral bound.

LocoScript User. Swanley, Kent: [n.p.], [February 1995-May 1995].
Periodical. Continues PCW User.

Macara, Daphne. Learning to Love Your Amstrad: Word Processing on the Amstrad PCW. West Molesey: Pandor House, [1990].

Macara, Daphne. Your Friendly Amstrad: Word processing on the Amstrad PCW 8256 and PCW 8512. West Molesey: Pandor House, [1990].

Maddix, Eddy. GEM Paint on the Amstrad PC. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1987.

McBride, P. K. Choosing and Using CP/M Business Software for Amstrad Computers. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.

McBride, P. K. Choosing and Using CP/M Software on the Amstrad PCW8256/8512. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1987.

McBride, P. K. An Introduction to CP/M Plus on Amstrad Computers. Includes CP/M 2.2. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.

Milan, Michael. Desktop Publishing with the Amstrad PCW. Manchester: NCC Publications, 1987.

Morris, Stephen. Using GEM Paint on the Amstrad PC 1512/1640. London: Newtech Books, 1986.
2nd edition: London: Heinemann, 1987.

PCW Plus. Somerton, Somerset: Future Publishing, [January 1992-1997].
Periodical. Monthly. Begins with issue 64: January 1992. Continues 8000 Plus: The Magazine for the Amstrad PCW 8256, 8512 (issues 1-63).

PCW Today. Middlesbrough: PCW Today, [1996].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issue 4: Winter 1996.

PCW User. London: Headway Home and Law, [June 1992-January 1995].
Periodical. Monthly. Continues Amstrad PCW Magazine. Continued by LocoScript User.

Peel, Kathleen. The Amstrad PC Programmer's Reference Guide. Barnet: Glentop, 1987.
Spiral bound.

Penfold, J. W. An Introduction to BASIC 2 on the Amstrad PCs. London: Babani, 1988.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to the Amstrad PCs. London: Babani, 1987.

Rogers, Susan V. Easily into LocoScript for the Amstrad PCW8256/8512. Basingstoke: Macmillan Education, 1988.
Spiral bound. With a floppy disk.

Rogers, Susan V. Looking into LocoScript 2 for the Amstrad PCW 9512, PCW 8256 and PCW 8512. [London]: Prentice-Hall, 1988.

Rogers, Susan V. Looking into WordStar 1512 (WordStar Express) for the Amstrad PC Range of Computers and all Compatibles. [London]: Prentice-Hall, 1989.

Sims, Martin. Practical LOGO for the Amstrad CPC 6128, PCW 8256 and PCW 8512. [Barnet, Hertfordshire]: Glentop, 1986.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. The Amstrad PC Hard Disk Guide. London: BSP Professional, 1988.
[160]pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Advanced LocoScript on the Amstrad PCW Computers. Barnet: Glentop, 1987.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Communications with the Amstrad PC. [n.p.]: BSP Professional, 1988.
[160]pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. LocoScript 2. London: BSP Professional, 1987.
2nd edition: 1990. Title variants between reprintings.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Pocket Wordstar on the Amstrad PCW 8256/8512. Barnet: Glentop, 1987.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Using Amstrad CP/M Business Software. London: Collins Professional and Technical, 1986.

Thomasson, Don. The User's Guide to the Amstrad PCW 8256/8512. Hampton Wick: Melbourne House, 1986.

White, Estelle. An Introduction to Multiplan (For Use with the Amstrad PCW 8256 Computer). Ormskirk: Sanda, 1987.
Spiral bound.

Your Amstrad PCW. London: Focus Magazines, [1987-1989].
Periodical.

[ART] Bennett, Bill. "Word Champion? Amstrad PCW 8256." Your Computer October 1985. pp.46-48.
Review.

[ART] Crookes, David. "PCW Power." Retro Gamer No. 12. pp.34-39.
Retrospective.

[ART] Peel, Katherine D. "GEM on the 1512." Your Computer December 1986. pp.36-37.

[ART] Sharpe, Jason. "Amstrad PCW 8-Channel A/D Converter." Everyday with Practical Electronics Part 2: September 1993. pp.692-697.
Constructional article in at least 3 parts.

Amstrad NC100 Notepad

Gerhardi, Vic, and Dave Hampson. Amstrad NC100 Magic. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1993.
x, 344pp. Edited by Gill Gerhardi.

Hall, Patrick. How to Program the Amstrad NC100 Notepad. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1993.
viii, 251pp.

Nixon, Robin, and Chris Nixon. The Amstrad Notepad Advanced User Guide. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Press, 1993.
vii, 253pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Getting the Most from the Amstrad NC100 Notepad Computer. Manchester: Dabs Press, [1992].
292pp.

Apollo Workstations

Apollo workstations originally ran the DOMAIN/OS, a BSD-UNIX derivative. Hewlett-Packard purchased the company and ported HP-UX to them. The Leicester Polytechnic network ran the AEGIS OS and AUX (UNIX). Models known: DN100; DN300; DN320; DN330; DN400; DN420; DN460; DN550; DN560; DN570; DN580; DN590; DN600; DN660; DN660A; DN2500; DN3000; DN3010; DN3010A; DN3040; DN3500; DN3550; DN4000; DN4500; DN5500; DN10000; DSP80; DSP80A; DSP90; DSP160. 'DN' (Disked Node or Diskless Node), 'DSP' (Disk Server Processor). The DN10000 had four 18MHz PRISM (A88K) processors. The remainder had 68k CPUs.

Bradly, D. P. Apollo Domain Operation Guide. Leicester: Leicester Polytechnic Computer Centre, 1986.
IN-41. February 1986. 44pp. Coded: R2433. Contents: 1. System Overview; 2. UNIX on the Apollo; 3. General Operational Requirements; 4. Inclusion of Additional Nodes; 5. Usercode Administration; 6. Backup Procedures; 7. Network Maintenance; 8. Printer/Plotter Control; 9. Application Software; 10. Documentation; Appendix A. Startup Files; Appendix B. Startup_Login File; Appendix C. Printer Configuration File; Appendix D. Directory List; Appendix E. ACL Initialisation Files; Appendix F. UNIX Login Procedure File; Appendix G. Usercode Creation Procedure File; Appendix H. Backup Procedure Files; Appendix I. Summary of AEGIS Commands.

Apple (General and Unspecified)

Apple Computers was founded on 1 April 1976 in California by Steve Jobs, Steve Wozniak, and Ronald Wayne. It was incorporated on 3 January 1977 (without Wayne, who sold his share back to Jobs and Wozniak). Addresses: 10260 Bandley Drive, Cupertino, California.

Carlton, Jim. Apple: The Inside Story of Intrigue, Egomania, and Business Blunders. New York: Times Business, 1997.
xiii, 463pp. Foreword by Guy Kawasaki. Paperback edition: New York: HarperBusiness, 1998 (xiii, 465pp). Revised edition: London: Random House Business Books, 1999 (xiii, 469pp). Contents (1997 edition): 1. In the Beginning; 2. The Glory Years; 3. The Licensing Debate; 4. A 'Noble Village'; 5. An Engineering Morass; 6. The Fall of Jean-Louis Gassée; 7. Crossing a Canyon; 8. Looking for Another Way Out; 9. Sculley's Waterloo; 10. A New Sheriff in Town; 11. The March to PowerPC; 12. From Power Mac to the Cliff; 13. The Wreck of the Diesel; 14. Spindler's Last Stand; 15. Mission: Impossible; 16. NeXT: A Founder's Return; Epilogue.

Deutschman, Alan. The Second Coming of Steve Jobs. New York: Broadway Books, 2000.
321pp. Contents: 1. Next; 2. Pixar; 3. Crises; 4. Comeback; 5. Apple; 6. Being Steve. Preface dated February 2000.

Hertzfeld, Andy. Revolution in the Valley: The Insanely Great Story of How the Mac was Made. Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, December 2004.
xxiv, 291pp. Hertzfeld was co-creator of the Apple Macintosh. Foreward by Steve Wozniak.

Linzmayer, Owen W. Apple Confidential. The Real Story of Apple Computer, Inc. San Francisco, California: No Starch Press, 1999.
[8], 268pp. Revised with the title Apple Confidential 2.0: The Definitive History of the World's Most Colorful Company, San Francisco, California: No Starch Press, 2004 (x, 323pp).

Linzmayer, Owen W. The Mac Bathroom Reader. San Francisco: Sybex, 1994.
xii, 306pp. Historical trivia relating to Apple Computers.

Malone, Michael Shawn. Infinite Loop. How the World's Most Insanely Great Computer Company Went Insane. New York: Doubleday, 1999.
viii, 597pp. UK edition: London: Aurum Press, 1999. Reprinted: 2000. A history of Apple Computers. Contents (New York edition): 1. Roots; 2. Seed; 3. Sprout; 4. Sapling; 5. Blossoms; 6. Bearing Fruit; 7. Early Harvest; 8. Blight; 9. Stump; 10. Green Shoots.

Wozniak, Steve, and Gina Smith. iWoz. Computer Geek to Cult Icon: Getting to the Core of Apple's Inventor. New York: W. W. Norton & Co., 2006.
313pp. UK edition: London: Headline, 2006 (313pp). Contents (UK edition): 1. Our Gang: The Electronics Kids; 2. The Logic Game; 3. Learning by Accident; 4. The 'Ethical' TV Jammer; 5. Cream Soda Days; 6. Phreaking for Real; 7. Escapades with Steve; 8. HP and Moonlighting as a Crazy Polack; 9. Wild Projects; 10. My Big Idea; 11. The Apple I; 12. Our Very Own Company; 13. The Apple II; 14. The Biggest IPO Since Ford; 15. The Woz Plan; 16. Crash Landing; 17. Have I Mentioned I Have the Voice of an Angel?; 18. Leaving Apple, Moving to Cloud Nine; 19. The Mad Hatter; 20. Rules to Live By.

Young, Jeffrey S. Steve Jobs: The Journey is the Reward. Glenview, Illinois: Scott, Foresman, 1988.
440pp. Paperback edition: New York: Lynx Books, 1988 (467pp). UK edition: Barnet: Glentop Press, 1989 (454pp).

Apple I

The Apple I was developed in Steve Wozniak's bedroom at 11161 Crist Drive in Los Altos (the house number was later changed to 2066). It had a 1MHz 6502 CPU, 4K RAM (expandable by various means), worked with an ASCII keyboard, and had a 40 x 24 display output. The Apple I Operation Manual was written by Ronald Wayne.

Owad, Tom. Apple I Replica Creation: Back to the Garage. Rockland, Massachusetts: Syngress, 2005.
xxv, 333pp. Foreward by Steve Wozniak. With a CD-ROM (Macintosh). A guide to building the Replica 1 (designed by Vince Briel). Contents: 1. The History of the Apple I; 2. Tools and Materials; 3. Digital Logic; 4. Building the Replica; 5. Programming in BASIC; 6. Programming in Assembly; 7. Understanding the Apple I; Appendix A. ASCII Codes; Appendix B. Operation Codes and Status Register; Appendix C. OpCode Matrix; Appendix D. Instructions by Category; Appendix E. Hacking Macintosh; Appendix F. Electrical Engineering Basics.

[ART] Wozniak, Steve, and Allen Baum. "A 6502 Disassembler from Apple." Dr. Dobb's Journal September 1976, Vol. 1, No. 8. pp.22-25 (pp.249-252 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing and notes for use on non-Apple systems.

Apple II Series

The Apple II (1977) had a 1MHz 6502 CPU, 4K-64K RAM (adding 4K or 16K chips to increase the memory), internal keyboard and PSU, 6 colours at 280 x 192 hi-res, 16 colours at 40 x 48 low-res, 8 expansion slots, the first for ROM/RAM upgrades, and ports for composite video o/p, a cassette recorder, and game paddles. It ran Integer BASIC (by Steve Wozniak, resident in the ROM with an assembler and disassembler). Apple DOS 3.1 arrived in 1978 to support the 143K 5.25" Disk ][ FDD. The Apple II+ (1979) had 48K RAM minimum, and ran [Microsoft's] Applesoft BASIC (by Randy Wigginton). The Apple II Europlus had a mono PAL TV output. The Apple IIe (Enhanced) had a considerably revised circuit board and was released in January 1983 with 16K ROM, 64K RAM (expandable to 128K with the 80 column card), support for upper and lower case, DOS 3.3 or, later, ProDOS. In March 1985 the 65C02-based enhanced Apple IIe appeared with 32K ROM, 128K RAM, and 80 column text. The Apple IIe Extended was introduced in 1987 with an additional numeric keypad, a smaller 80 column card, and new memory chips.

The Apple IIc (April 1984) was a portable Apple II with a 1.4MHz 65C02 CPU, 128K-1Mb RAM, 2 serial ports, a mouse port, a FDD port, and a 9" green Flat Panel Display. It ran MouseWorks, a ProDOS GUI. The Apple IIc+ (1988) had an internal 800K 3.5" FDD, mini DIN-8 ports, and ran its 65C02 at 1MHz or 4MHz. Discontinued: November 1990.

The Apple IIGS (September 1986) had a 2.8MHz 65C816 16-bit CPU. It could be slowed to 1MHz for compatibility. 256K-8Mb RAM, 7 expansion ports, RAM card slot, modem port, printer port, ADB mouse port, AppleTalk support, 3.5" and 5.25" FDD ports, and an RGB monitor connector built-in. It could display 640 x 200 pixels at up to 16 dithered (4 true) colours, and 320 x 200 at 16 true colours. It ran ProDOS and GS/OS (a Mac OS style GUI). Three ROMs were used: 00 (128K ROM and 256K RAM), 01 (revision of 00), and 03 (256K ROM and 1Mb RAM). Discontinued: December 1992. [Source: Andy F. Mesa's applemuseum.bott.org]

A UK clone of the Apple II was licensed as the ITT 2020. Known unofficial clones released in the UK included the Base 64A (of Middle Eastern origin). The MicroProfessor MPF-II was stated to run 'most existing Apple II software'.

[Manual: Apple II]
Apple Computer, Inc. Apple II: The DOS Manual. Disk Operating System.
Cupertino, California: Apple Computer, [1981].
200pp. Spiral bound. Copyright dates of 1980 and 1981 given. Product codes: A2L0036; 030-0115-B. Contents: Preface; 1. Installation and Handling; 2. Getting Started; 3. Exercising Options; 4. Playing Safe; 5. More 'Housekeeping' Information; 6. Using Sequential Files; 7. Auto Apple; 8. Using Random-Access Files; 9. Using Machine Language Files; 10. Input, Output, and Chaining; Appendix A. File Types used with DOS Command; Appendix B. DOS Messages; Appendix C. Format of Diskette Information; Appendix D. Memory Usage; Appendix E. Entry Points and Schematics; Appendix F. Summary of DOS Commands; Appendix G. Summary of DOS Procedures; Appendix H. Updating DOS to 16 Sectors; Appendix I. Using the BASICS Diskette; Appendix J. Using the FID Program; Appendix K. Using the MUFFIN Program. The BASICS diskette can be used to boot 13-sector diskettes on a 16-sector system. Versions of DOS earlier than 3.3 are 13-sector DOS. FID stands for File Developer, being a program that allows the user to manage disk files and copy from one diskette to another with only one disk drive. The MUFFIN program converts 13 sector diskettes, and the programs they contain, to 16 sector.

[Manual: Apple IIe]
Apple II User Education Group. Apple IIe Technical Reference Manual.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1985.
xxxii, 409pp.

[Manual: Apple IIe]
Apple Computer, Inc. Apple IIe Technical Reference Manual.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, January 1987.
xxiv, 381pp. Coded on rear: '030-1194-B'. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Built-In I/O Devices; 3. Built-In I/O Firmware; 4. Memory Organization; 5. Using the Monitor; 6. Programming for Peripheral Cards; 7. Hardware Implementation; [Appendices:] A. The 65C02 Microprocessor; B. Directory of Built-In Subroutines; C. Apple II Family Differences; D. Operating Systems and Languages; E. Conversion Tables; F. Frequently Used Tables; G. Using an 80-Column Text Card; H. Programming with the Super Serial Card; I. International Versions; J. Monitor Firmware Listing.

[Manual: Apple IIc]
Apple Computer, Inc. Apple IIc Technical Reference Manual.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1986.
xxv, 543pp. Second printing: December 1987. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Memory Organization and Control; 3. Introduction to Apple IIc I/O; 4. Keyboard and Speaker; 5. Video Display Output; 6. Block Device I/O; 7. Serial I/O Port 1; 8. Serial I/O Port 2; 9. Mouse and Game Input; 10. Using the Monitor; 11. Hardware Implementation; [Appendices:] A. The 65C02 Microprocessor; B. Memory Map; C. Important Firmware Locations; D. Operating Systems and Languages; E. Interrupts; F. Apple II Series Differences; G. USA and International Models; H. Conversion Tables; I. Firmware Listings.

[Manual: Software]
VisiCorp. VisiCalc. Instantly Calculating 'Electronic Worksheet'. User's Guide for the Apple IIe Computer.
San Jose, California: VisiCorp, 1983.
Ring-bound in a slip-case, multi-paged (viii, 9, 90, 101, 13pp). Program copyright Software Arts Products Corp. 1979, 1981; Manual copyright VisiCorp 1983. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The VisiCalc Tutorial; 3. VisiCalc Command Reference. Coded: 12911-2210 3/83. Version 1.0 (no version given) of VisiCalc for the Apple IIe 64K was supplied on a 16 sector 5.25" floppy disk, coded: 12911-5510; Version 1.1 of VisiCalc for the Apple IIe 64K was supplied on a 16 sector 5.25" floppy disk, coded: 12911-5511.

[Manual: Software]
VisiCorp. VisiCalc for the Apple IIe Personal Computer.
San Jose, California: VisiCorp, 1983.
Fan-fold leaflet. Coded: 12911-3311 3/83.

[Manual: Software]
VisiCorp. The VisiCalc Command Structure Chart.
San Jose, California: VisiCorp, 1983.
Poster. Coded: Apple IIe. 12911-2210 3/83.

Arnow, Murray. The Apple CP/M Book. Glenview, Illinois: Scott, Foresman, [1985].
164pp.

Bailey, Harold J., and J. Edward Kerlin. Apple Graphics Activities Handbook. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice/Hall International, 1984.
422pp. Another edition: Bowie, Maryland: R. J. Brady Co., 1984 (422pp). Contents (Prentice/Hall edition): 1. Low Resolution Graphics; 2. High Resolution Graphics; 3. More Advanced Topics in Graphics; 4. Two-Dimensional Graphics; 5. Three-Dimensional Graphics; Appendices. A floppy disk was available from the publisher to accompany the book.

Bensan, Mustafa. Challenging Programs for Your Apple IIe. London: Interface, 1984.
viii, 237pp.

Blackwood, Brian D., and George H. Blackwood. Apple FORTRAN. Detailed Language Instructions Specifically for the Apple Computer. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1982.
236pp.

Cohen, Phil. The 3-D Animated Apple. Sydney; Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall of Australia, 1983.
vii, 198pp. UK edition: London: Interface, 1984 (viii, 198pp).

Cook, Rohan, and Tim Hartnell. How to Program the Apple. London: Interface, 1983.
x, 129pp.

DeVoney, Chris, and Thomas D. Perkins. Introducing the Apple IIc: Applications and Programming. Indianapolis, Indiana: Que Corp., [1984].
xii, 217pp.

Forsyth, Richard, and Chris Naylor. The Hitch-Hiker's Guide to Artificial Intelligence. Applesoft BASIC Version. London: Chapman and Hall/Methuen, 1985.
vii, 261pp.

Frankel, Steven M. The Compleat Apple CP/M. For the Microsoft SoftCard, Microsoft Premium SoftCard IIe, ALS Z-Card II, ALS The CPM Card, PCPI APPLI-CARD, and Micropro StarCard. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.
xvii, 233pp.

Gayler, Winston D. The Apple II Circuit Description. Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams, 1983.
172pp. Large format, spiral bound. 44 folded leaves of plates. Illustrated by D. B. Clemons.

Geenen, Donald J. Learning Apple FORTRAN. Rockville, Maryland: Computer Science Press, 1986.
xiii, 264pp.

Hallgren, Richard C. Interface Projects for the Apple II. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, [1982].
170pp.

Hartnell, Tim. Exploring Artificial Intelligence on Your Apple II. Toronto; New York: Bantam Books, 1985.
254pp.

Klitzner, Carol, and Matthew Plociak. Using VisiCalc. Getting Down to Business. New York; Chichester: Wiley, [1983].
vi, 277pp. With a disk. Two versions, one for the IBM PC, one for the Apple II/II+/IIe.

Lewis, Theodore Gyle. PASCAL Programming for the Apple. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1981.
vi, 234pp. Contents: 1. The French Connection (The System); 2. Walking the PASCAL Tree (The Tools); 3. The Shape of Things to Come; 4. PASCAL Spoken Here (The Novice); 5. Money, Money, Money! (Financial Applications); 6. For the Drow Pundit (Text Processing); 7. Programming in the Large; 8. Star-Spangled Graphics; 9. Making Music; 10. File Structures Supreme; 11. BASIC Versus PASCAL.

Lieberman, Philip. Introducing the Apple IIc. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1984.
400pp.

Meck, H. R. Numerical Analysis with the TI-99/4A, Commodore 64, Apple II Plus/IIe, TRS-80 Model I/III. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, 1984.
x, 205pp.

Mullish, Henry, and Dov Kruger. Programming the Apple IIc. New York: McGraw-Hill, [1985].
vii, 373pp.

Phillips, Gary, Joyce Conklin, and Donald J. Scellato. The Apple User's Encyclopedia (II, II+, IIe, and III). [Los Angeles, California]: Book Co., [1984].
466pp.

Poole, Lon, Martin McNiff, and Steven Cook. Apple II User's Guide. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1981.
xii, 385pp. 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1983 (x, 482pp); 3rd edition: Berkeley, California: Osborne McGraw-Hill, 1985 (xiii, 588pp). Contents (1st edition): 1. Presenting the Apple II; 2. How to Operate the Apple II; 3. Programming in BASIC; 4. Advanced BASIC Programming; 5. The Disk II; 6. Graphics and Sound; 7. Machine Language Monitor; 8. Compendium of BASIC Statements and Functions; Appendices: Derived Numeric Functions; Editing Commands; Error Messages; Intrinsic Subroutines; Useful PEEK and POKE Locations; BASIC Reserved Words; Memory Usage; Disk II Format; ASCII Character Codes and Applesoft Reserved Word Tokens; Hexadecimal-Decimal Integer Conversion Table; Bibliography; Screen Layout Forms.

ProDOS 8 Technical Reference Manual. Reading, Massachusetts; Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, [1987].
xvii, 186pp. With a 5.25" floppy disk. ProDOS 1.1.1 based Apple II required to use the disk.

Ross, Peter Malcolm. Introducing LOGO. For the Apple II Computer, Texas Instruments 99/4A and Tandy Color Computer. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1983.
249pp.

Uffenbeck, John E. Hardware Interfacing with the Apple II Plus. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1983.
x, 238pp.

Wagner-Dobler, Friedman. Introducing the Apple IIc. London: Pitman, 1984.
xii, 116pp.

Zimmerman, Steven M., Leo M. Conrad, and Donald R. Smith. Business Applications for the Apple II and IIe under CP/M. Bowie, Maryland: Brady; London: Prentice-Hall, [1985].
viii, 256pp.

[ART] Campbell, Richard. "Cross-Pollinating the Apple II." Byte [US edition.] Vol. 4, No. 4, April 1979. pp.20, 22, 24-25.
Constructional article. A serial port board using an Intel 8251, NS1488, and NS1489.

[ART] Coll, John, and Charles Sweeten. "Colour is an Apple II. PCW Review." Personal Computer World August 1978. pp.50-55.
Review.

[ART] Dobbs, Hugh. "Towards a COS for Apple II." Practical Computing. Part 1 (Towards a COS for Apple II): May 1980. pp.120-123; Part 2 (Apple COS and the Output Bug): June 1980. pp.122-125.
Series on creating a cassette operating system for the Apple II.

[ART] Hertzfeld, Andrew. "LAZARUS: A Program to Resurrect BASIC Programs on the Apple II." Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1978, Vol. 3, No. 6. pp.31-33 (pp.270-272 of the annual volume).

[ART] King, Richard. "Apple of Your Eye." Personal Computer News Vol. 1, No. 17. 30 June-6 July 1983. pp.38, 41.
Review of the Videx UltraTerm graphics card.

[ART] Skinner, Bryan. "Apple Super C." Personal Computer News No. 63. 2 June 1984. p.27.
Review of the Apple IIc portable.

[ART] Wozniak, Steve. "Renumbering and Appending BASIC Programs on the Apple II Computer." Dr. Dobb's Journal March 1978, Vol. 3, No. 3. pp.4-9 (pp.106-111 of the annual volume).
Includes program listing.

Apple III

Announced 19 May 1980. 2MHz 6502A CPU. Built-in keyboard and a Shugart 143K 5.25" FDD. Initial model had 128K RAM, 80 x 24 text, 560 x 192 hi-res mono, 2 serial ports, and 4 Apple II expansion slots. It ran Apple SOS 1.0 ('Sophisticated Operating System'). Inadequate space in the machines permitted no internal fan, they heated up, and the chips popped from their sockets (14,000 were replaced). A 5Mb ProFile HDD was made available later as an option. A revised model had 256K RAM and new motherboard sockets. The Apple III+ had 256k RAM, a new logic board, a working built-in clock, improved ports with standard connectors, easier card installation, and ran Apple SOS 1.3.

Adamis, Eddie. BASIC Keywords for the Apple III. New York; Chichester: Wiley, 1984.

Adamis, Eddie. Business BASIC for the Apple III. New York; Chichester: Wiley, 1984.

Lord, Kenniston W. Using Apple Business Computers. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1984.

Miastkowski, Stanley M. The Osborne/McGraw-Hill Guide to your Apple III. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1983.

Phillips, Gary, Joyce Conklin, and Donald J. Scellato. The Apple User's Encyclopedia (II, II+, IIe, and III). [Los Angeles, California]: Book Co., 1984.

Apple Macintosh

[Brochure: Hardware]
The Other Way to Get Things Done.
Uxbridge, Middlesex: Apple Computer UK Ltd., [1989].
By Rod Stone. Copyright © 1989 Apple Computer Inc. Printed in Belgium by nv Blondé sa. Photography by Lex van Pieterson. Designed by Studio Dumbar.

[Brochure: Hardware]
Macintosh Classic Personal Computer.
Uxbridge, Middlesex: Apple Computer UK Ltd., October 1990.
3 folding leaves. Coded: APP FSH 041.

[Brochure: Hardware]
The Apple Macintosh Family.
Uxbridge, Middlesex: Apple Computer UK Ltd., October 1990.
Coded: APP BRO 027. Includes: Classic; SE/30; LC; IIsi; IIci; IIfx; Portable.

[Brochure: Hardware]
Apple Product Range. Suggested Education Price List. October 1990.
Uxbridge, Middlesex: Apple Computer UK Ltd., October 1990.
[8]pp. Cheapest Macintosh system is the Classic 1/Fl (1Mb RAM, FDD) for £490. The most expensive is the IIfx HD 4/160 (4Mb RAM, FDD, 160Mb HDD) for £4403.

[Brochure: Software]
FileMaker Pro.
Uxbridge, Middlesex: Claris International, Inc., 1990.
2 folding leaves. Coded: B90215-007A. Distributed in the UK by Frontline Distribution, Basingstoke, Hampshire.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] Macintosh.
Cupertino, California: Apple Computer Inc., 1984.
165pp. Spiral bound. Apple Product No. M1500. Coded on rear: 030-0687-B. Contents: About this Manual; 1. Learning Macintosh; 2. Finding Out More About Macintosh; 3. Using the Finder; 4. Reference; 5. Adding to Your Macintosh System; 6. Taking Care of Your Macintosh; Appendix A. Optional Character Set; Appendix B. Macintosh Specification.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] Apple Service Technical Procedures. Macintosh Family.
[California: Apple Computers], [c.1987-1991-].
Ring-bound, pages issued as required. Vol. 1: SIMM Chart, Macintosh, Plus, SE, SE/30, Classic, Classic II; Vol. 2: LC, II, IIx, IIfx, IIci, IIcx, IIsi, Quadra 700, Quadra 900; Vol. 3: AppleColor High-Res RGB Monitor, 12" RGB Display, Two-Page Monochrome Monitor, Portrait Display, Portrait Display 'Series B', 21" Colour Display; Vol. 4: Hard Disk 20, ADB Input Devices, Apple PC 5.25" Drive, Tape Backup 40SC, AppleCD SC, AppleCD SC Plus, FDHD/SuperDrive, AppleFax Modem, Macintosh HDI-20, External 1.4Mb FDD, Apple Scanner, Apple OneScanner; Vol. 5: Portable, PowerBook 100, PowerBook 140, PowerBook 170.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] Macintosh Technology in the Common Hardware Reference Platform.
San Francisco, California: Morgan Kaufmann, 1995.
xxix, 224pp. Produced by the staff of Apple Developer Press, Cupertino, California. The 'writer' is given as George Towner. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The Mac I/O Chip; 3. Apple Desktop Bus Controller; 4. SCSI Support; 5. Descriptor-Based DMA; 6. Macintosh Serial Port; 7. Macintosh Toolbox ROM; 8. Open Firmware Requirements; 9. Mac OS NVRAM Requirements; 10. Macintosh Power Controls; Appendix A. List of Requirements; Appendix B. Developer Services and Programs; Bibliography.

[Manual: OS]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] Inside Macintosh: QuickTime.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, March 1993.
Multi-paged. Contents: Preface. About This Book; 1. Introduction to QuickTime; 2. Movie Toolbox; 3. Image Compression Manager; 4. Movie Resource Formats; Glossary; Index.

[Manual: OS]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] Inside Macintosh: QuickTime Components.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, May 1993.
Multi-paged. Contents: Preface. About This Book; 1. Overview; 2. Movie Controller Components; 3. Standard Image-Compression Dialog Components; 4. Image Compressor Components; 5. Sequence Grabber Components; 6. Sequence Grabber Channel Components; 7. Sequence Grabber Panel Components; 8. Video Digitizer Components; 9. Movie Data Exchange Components; 10. Derived Media Handler Components; 11. Clock Components; 12. Preview Components; Glossary; Index.

[Manual: OS]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] Inside Macintosh: AOCE Application Interfaces.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, June 1994.
Multi-paged. Contents: Preface. About This Book; 1. Introduction to the Apple Open Collaboration Environment; 2. AOCE Utilities; 3. Standard Mail Package; 4. Standard Catalog Package; 5. AOCE Templates; 6. Digital Signature Manager; 7. Interprogram Messaging Manager; 8. Catalog Manager; 9. Authentication Manager; Appendix. PowerTalk Built-In Templates; Glossary; Index.

[Manual: Software]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] AppleWorks 5 Installation Manual. Includes Information about New Features. For Mac OS.
Cupertino, California: Apple Computer, Inc., 1998.
Multi-paged. Coded: Z034-0656-A. Contents: Installing AppleWorks; 2. New Features in AppleWorks 5. Previously sold as ClarisWorks.

[Manual: Software]
[Apple Computer, Inc.] AppleWorks 5 User's Manual. Includes Instructions for Using Your Software. For Mac OS.
Cupertino, California: Apple Computer, Inc., 1998.
Multi-paged. Coded: Z034-0654-A. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Creating, Opening, and Printing Documents; 3. Basics; 4. Text (Word Processing); 5. Drawing; 6. Painting; 7. Spreadsheet; 8. Database; 9. Beyond the Basics; 10. Communications; 11. AppleWorks and the Internet. Previously sold as ClarisWorks.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Mustek.] Mustek A3 SP [Scanner] Installation Guide.
[n.p.]: Mustek Systems, [n.d.].
Multi-paged in English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Swedish, and Danish. For PCs and Macs. P/N: 82-051-00231.

[Manual: Software]
[Claris Corporation.] ClarisWorks [2.0] Handbook.
Santa Clara, California: Claris Corporation, 1993.
'2.0' does not appear on the cover. Multi-paged. Coded: Z93600-011A. Contents: 1. Introducing ClarisWorks; 2. ClarisWorks Basics; 3. Working with Text; 4. Working with Drawings; 5. Working with Paintings; 6. Working with Spreadsheets; 7. Working with Databases; 8. Beyond the Basics; 9. Working with Communications; Appendix A. Adjusting Memory; Appendix B. ClarisWorks Help Topics.

[Manual: Software]
[Claris Corporation.] ClarisWorks [2.1] Installation and New Features Guide.
Santa Clara, California: Claris Corporation, 1993.
'2.1' does not appear on the cover. Multi-paged. Coded: Z93608-004A. Contents: 1. Installing ClarisWorks; 2. Working with Mail; 3. Hyphenating Words.

[Manual: Software]
[Claris Corporation.] ClarisWorks [3.0] User's Guide.
Santa Clara, California: Claris Corporation, 1994.
'3.0' does not appear on the cover. Multi-paged. Coded: (Z93055-003C) Z92600-012C. Contents: 1. Introducing ClarisWorks; 2. ClarisWorks Basics; 3. Working with Text; 4. Working with Drawings; 5. Working with Paintings; 6. Working with Spreadsheets; 7. Working with Databases; 8. Beyond the Basics; 9. Working with Communications.

[Manual: Software]
[Claris Corporation.] ClarisWorks 4.0 User's Guide.
Santa Clara, California: Claris Corporation, 1995.
Multi-paged. Coded: Z95600-016B. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Creating, Opening, and Printing Documents; 3. Basics; 4. Text (Word Processing); 5. Drawing; 6. Painting; 7. Spreadsheet; 8. Database; 9. Beyond the Basics; 10. Communications. Version 5 of ClarisWorks was renamed AppleWorks.

[Manual: Software]
[STF Technologies.] FAXstf for the Macintosh. User's Guide.
Concordia, Missouri: STF Technologies, 1994.
By Don Reid. viii, 95pp. Contents: 1. Introducing FAXstf; 2. Software Components; 3. Installation; 4. Software Configuration; 5. Software Registration; 6. Sending a Fax; 7. Receiving a Fax; 8. Phonebooks; 9. Print Dialogs; 10. FaxManager; 11. QuickFax; 12. FaxStatus; 13. FaxMenu; 14. Advanced Features; [Appendices:] A. Shortcuts; B. Troubleshooting; C. FAXstf Feature Set; D. Technical Specs.

Apple Computer, Inc. PCI Product Directory for Power Macintosh. [Stockley Park, Uxbridge]: Apple Computers, July 1995.
Concertina brochure. Code: APP-BRO-103.

Apple Computer, Inc. Bring Home a Room Full of Software for Your Macintosh. [Stockley Park, Uxbridge]: Apple Computers, March 1996.
64pp. Guide to software and suppliers in the UK.

Apple Computer, Inc. No Ordinary Computer. No Ordinary Offer. [Stockley Park, Uxbridge]: Apple Computers, June 1996.
PowerBook 500 Series brochure featuring the 520c and 540c.

Brant, Bob. Build Your Own Macintosh and Save a Bundle. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Windcrest, 1991.
xviii, 221pp. 2nd edition: Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Windcrest, 1992 (xx, 353pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Why Build Your Own Macintosh; 2. How Much You Can Save; 3. Macintosh Logic Boards; 4. Memory and Upgrades; 5. Storage; 6. Monitors and Video Cards; 7. Chassis, Wiring, Keyboard, and Mouse; 8. Putting Together the Original Cat Mac; 9. New Desktop Cat Macs; 10. Upgrade Kits Make Building Easier; 11. Cat Mac Builder Alternatives; 12. The End of the Beginning.

Clarity Ltd. Clarify. Oundle, Peterborough: Clarity Ltd., [c.1991/2].
'Occasional newsletter' produced by Macintosh supplier, Clarity Ltd. Issues seen: 1 ([4]pp).

Commander, Jake. Macintosh Assembly Language Programming. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1985.

Connolly, Edward S., and Philip Lieberman. Introducing the Apple Macintosh. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1984.

Danuloff, Craig, and Deke McClelland. Encyclopedia Macintosh. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1990.
xxvii, 782pp. Published when System 6.0.3 was current. Contents: 1. System Software and Utilities; 2. Applications; 3. Hardware; 4. Resources; 5. Glossary.

Danuloff, Craig, and Deke McClelland. Encyclopedia Macintosh Software Instant Reference. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1990.
x, 243pp.

Duff, Charles. Introducing the Macintosh. New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 1984.

Foulk, Clinton R. MPW Assembly Language Programming for the Macintosh: A Structured Approach. Wilsonville, Oregon: Franklin, Beedle & Associates, 1995.
With a 3.5" floppy disk.

Foulk, Clinton R. Structured Programming in Macintosh Assembly Language. Wilsonville, Oregon: Franklin, Beedle & Associates, 1991.

Goldstein, Larry Joel, and David I. Schneider. Microsoft BASIC for the Macintosh. Bowie, Maryland: Brady Communications, 1985.

Harrington, Jan L. Fix Your Own Mac: Upgrading and Troubleshooting. New York: MIS Press, 1993.

Harrington, Jan L. Macintosh Assembly Language: An Introduction. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, 1986.

Hartnell, Tim, and Rohan Cook. Getting Started on Your Mac if You've Never Used a Computer Before. New York: Ballantine Books, 1985.
vii, 191pp.

Hertzfeld, Andy. Revolution in the Valley: The Insanely Great Story of How the Mac was Made. Sebastopol, California: O'Reilly, 2004.
xxiv, 291pp. Hertzfeld was co-creator of the Apple Macintosh. Foreward by Steve Wozniak.

Harvey, Greg. HyperTalk Instant Reference. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1988.
xix, 316pp. HyperTalk is the object-oriented programming language included in HyperCard. Contents: 1. Writing Scripts in HyperTalk; 2. The HyperTalk Commands; 3. The HyperTalk Functions; 4. Properties in HyperTalk; 5. Constants in HyperTalk.

Himes, Andrew, Craig Ragland, and Bill Appleton. Inside SuperCard: The Complete Guide for Macintosh Developers and Advanced Users. Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, 1990.
xiv, 623pp. 'Including version 1.5'. The two interviews and the case studies in the appendices are by Janice A. Bultmann. Contents: [Part 1. Welcome to SuperCard:] 1. SuperCard; 2. SuperCard Overview; [Part 2. Creating SuperCard Projects:] 3. SuperCard Building Blocks; 4. Runtime Editor; 5. Graphics, Buttons, and Fields; 6. The SuperCard Library; 7. Cursors, Icons, Menus, and More; 8. Colours and Inks; 9. Projects on Paper; 10. The SuperCard Advantage; 11. Stand-Alone Applications; [Part 3. The SuperCard Programming Language:] 12. SuperTalk; 13. Script Basics; 14. SuperTalk ScriptWriter; 15. A Matter of Values; 16. SuperTalk Messages; 17. Right Script, Right Place; 18. Objects and Properties; 19. Control Structures; 20. SuperTalk Navigator; 21. Windows, Backgrounds, and Cards; 22. Menu Management; 23. User Input; 24. Object Manipulation; 25. Graphics and Animation; 26. From Beeps to Bach; 27. Text and HyperText; 28. Dates and Times; 29. Mathematics; 30. SuperTalk Utilities; 31. File Management; 32. The SuperTalk ScriptTracer; 33. SuperCard 1.5; 34. SuperCard Stand-Alone Applications; 35. Converting a HyperTalk Script into a SuperTalk Script; [Appendices:] A. Interview with Bill Appleton, Creator of SuperCard; B. Interview with Charlie Jackson, President of Silicon Beach Software; C. Case Studies; D. SuperCard Opportunities.

Holtz, Frederick. Using and Programming the Macintosh. Including 32 Ready-to-Run Programs. Blue Ridge Summit, Pennsylvania: Tab Books, 1984.
No. 1840. ix, 243pp.

Kamins, Scot. Introduction to Macintosh BASIC. Hasbrouck Heights, New Jersey: Hayden Book Co., 1984.
xxiii, 357pp.

Kelby, Scott. Macintosh: The Naked Truth. Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders, 2002.
xiii, 219pp.

[Kingsway Computer Services.] Macintosh Shareware Catalogue. Sheffield: Kingsway Computer Services, [199-].
Periodical. Noted: Issue 5 (28pp) with the supplement 'Macintosh PD/Shareware Update Issue 5.1' (12pp) bound in. Undated, but an accompanying single sheet order form is date-coded 12-92.

Kronick, Scott. MPW and Assembly Language Programming for the Macintosh. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1987.
xi, 336pp.

Lee, Lisa. MacWEEK Upgrading and Repairing Your Mac. Indianapolis, Indiana: Hayden Books, 1995.
xxxi, 830pp. Cover states: 'Covers Power Macs & System 7.5.2'. Don Crabb Macintosh Library series. Contents: 1. When You Must Spend Money; 2. Understanding Your Mac; 3. Your System Software; 4. Understanding Your Mac Extras; 5. If It Ain't Broke, Do You Fix It?; 6. Hardware Upgrades; 7. Software Upgrades; 8. Modems, Printing, and Sound Upgrades; 9. Troubleshooting Hardware; 10. Troubleshooting Software; 11. Troubleshooting Printing, Networking, and Communications; 12. When to Replace the OS, Software, or Hardware; Appendix A. Error Codes and What They Really Mean; Appendix B. Ten Step Guides to Macintosh Maintenance; Appendix C. Apple Upgrade Index; Appendix D. System Enablers and System 7.5x; Appendix E. Virus Index; Appendix F. History of System Software; Appendix G. Macintosh Model Specifications; Appendix H. Glossary.

Levy, Steven. Insanely Great. The Life and Times of Macintosh. The Computer that Changed Everything. New York; London: Viking, 1994.
Reprinted with minor revisions: Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1995.

Little, Gary B. Mac Assembly Language: A Guide for Programmers. New York: Prentice Hall Press, 1986.

Mac Action London: IDG, [July 1995-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: July 1995. Launch editor: Vic Lennard. Macintosh games magazine.

MacFormat. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [199-].
Periodical.

[MacFormat] Into the Net: Everything You Need to Know About the Internet. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement to issue 23 of MacFormat, April 1995. 100pp. Compiled by Clive Parker. Contributions by Davey Winder and Sue Schofield.

[MacFormat] Bomb Buster Book: Your Complete Macintosh Troubleshooting Manual. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement to issue 29 of MacFormat, October 1995. 100pp. Compiled by Alex Summersby. Contributions by Stuart McHugh, Jim Chandler, Derek Smith, and Richard Hill.

[MacFormat] MacGamer. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Christmas 1995. Supplement to issue 32 of MacFormat. 32pp.

[MacFormat] The Alternative Mac Manual. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement to issue 33 of MacFormat, January 1996. 100pp. By Rod Lawton.

[MacFormat] The Really Useful DTP Book. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement to issue 35 of MacFormat, March 1996. 100pp. By Alistair Dabbs, Marcus Dyson, Tom Madden, Stuart McHugh, Derek Smith, and Alex Summersby.

[MacFormat] MacGamer. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement to issue 37 of MacFormat, May 1996. 32pp.

[MacFormat] Computer Arts. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement to issue 43 of MacFormat, November 1996. 32pp.

[MacFormat] MacGamer. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement to issue 45 of MacFormat, Christmas 1996. 32pp.

[MacFormat] Inside Your System Folder. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1997.
Supplement to issue 51 of MacFormat, June 1997. 100pp. By Alex Summersby, Dan Frakes, Philip Jones, and Lindsay Bruce.

[MacFormat] Xplora 1: Peter Gabriel's Secret World. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1998.
CD-ROM supplied free issue 64 (April 1998) of MacFormat. Produced by Real World MultiMedia Ltd. and Brilliant Media Inc. Coded: MF/62/4/98/A. Cased. Requires a Macintosh running System 7 or greater, HyperCard Player (included), QuickTime 1.61 or greater (1.61 included), Apple's Sound Manager 3.0 or greater (included), 3Mb free RAM (4Mb or more recommended), 256 colour display or greater.

[MacFormat] MacFormat Internet Connection Guide. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1999.
Supplement given away free with an issue of MacFormat. 32pp.

MacGamer. Bath, Avon: Future, [199-].
Periodical.

[MacGamer] MacGamer. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Christmas 1995. Supplement to issue 32 of MacFormat. 32pp.

[MacGamer] MacGamer. [Sampler.] Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement to issue 37 of MacFormat, May 1996. 32pp.

MacUser. London: Dennis Publishing, [1985-].
Periodical. Fortnightly. The issue dated 24 May 1996 included a free covermount CD-ROM 'OnCD 3' which contained a non-malicious virus and a US version of System 7.5.2 Update 2. A replacement was sent to subscribers, virus free and with the UK installer for the system update.

MacUser. Vol. 7, No. 1, 11 January 1991. London: Dennis Publishing, 1991.
"1991 Buyer's Guide Special."

MacUser. Vol. 8, No. 1, 10 January 1992. London: Dennis Publishing, 1992.
"1992 Buyer's Guide Special."

[MacUser] Mac Shopper. London: Dennis Publishing, 1992.
Supplement. No. 3. Spring 1992. 24pp. Priced at 95p, free with MacUser.

[MacUser] Networks: The Guide to Mac Connectivity. London: Dennis Publishing, 1992.
Supplement. September 1992. 24pp.

[MacUser] Macs in Education. London: Dennis Publishing, 1993.
Supplement. Spring 1993. 30pp.

[MacUser] Networks: The Guide to Mac Connectivity. London: Dennis Publishing, 1993.
Supplement. July 1993. 24pp.

[MacUser] AppleUser: Presenting the World of Apple Technology. London: Dennis Publishing, 1993.
Supplement. Winter 1993. 28pp.

[MacUser] MacUser Awards 1993. London: Dennis Publishing, 1993.
Supplement. December 1993. 40pp.

[MacUser] Networks: The Guide to Mac Connectivity. London: Dennis Publishing, 1994.
Supplement. 1994. 36pp. Cover text: 'Take the fast track to corporate networking'.

[MacUser] 100 Best CD-ROMs. London: Dennis Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. Spring 1995. 32pp.

[MacUser] Macs in Education. London: Dennis Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. Autumn 1995. 32pp.

[MacUser] Macs in Education. London: Dennis Publishing, 1996.
Supplement. Spring 1996. 32pp.

[MacUser] MacUser2. London: Dennis Publishing, [April 1996-].
Supplement issued to subscribers from April 1996. Originally A4, 4pp, by August 1997 reduced to a half-width A4 fold-out. August 1998 issue known.

[MacUser] Mac Sources. London: Dennis Publishing, 1997.
Supplement. Autumn 1997. 252pp.

[MacUser] MacUser Guides. 02. Prepress and Print: Getting the Best from Today's Technology. London: Dennis Publishing, 1998.
Supplement. 24pp.

[MacUser] Mac Sources. London: Dennis Publishing, 1998.
Supplement. Autumn 1998. 220pp.

[MacUser] Mac Sources. London: Dennis Publishing, 1999.
Supplement. Autumn 1999. 192pp.

[MacUser] MacUser Absolute Beginner's Guide. 3rd edition; London: Dennis Publishing, 1994.
Supplement. 3rd edition: 1994, 36pp, 'System 7.5 edition'.

[MacUser] MacUser's Essential Guide to Microsoft Office 2001. London: Dennis Publishing, 2000.
Supplement. [2000]. 20pp.

[Macworld] The Best of Macworld: Mac Secrets. New Edition. London: IDG Communications, 1994.
Free with an issue of Macworld. 64pp. By David Pogue and Joseph Schorr. An excerpt from Macworld Mac & Power Mac Secrets.

[Macworld] The Macworld Macintosh Hardware Guide 1995. London: IDG Communications, 1995.
Summer 1995. 128pp.

[Macworld] The Best of Macworld: Mac FAQs. London: IDG Communications, 1995.
Free with an issue of Macworld. 32pp excluding the wrappers. By David Pogue. An excerpt from Macworld Mac FAQs.

[Macworld] The Macworld Office. London: IDG Communications, 1997.
Free with the February 1997 issue of Macworld. 32pp. By David Pogue and Joseph Schorr.

[Macworld] Free! Photoshop 4.0 Tips. Foster City, California: IDG Books, 1997.
Free with an issue of Macworld. 36pp. An excerpt from Macworld Photoshop 4 Bible by Deke McClelland.

Mathews, Keith. Assembly Language Primer for the Macintosh. New York: New American Library, 1985.
xvi, 412pp.

McCallum-Varey, Alison. Master Your Macintosh Software. London: Sunshine, 1985.
[192]pp.

Mednieks, Zigurd R., and Terry M. Schilke. C Programming Techniques for the Macintosh. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1986.
xi, 322pp. Contents: [Part I. Tutorial on Macintosh Programming in C:] 1. Beginnings; 2. C and Other Languages; 3. Knowing C, Thinking C; 4. QuickDraw and Windows; 5. Revolutionary Software, Classical Microcomputer Hardware; 6. The Resource Compiler; 7. An Example: Internal Structure of a Macintosh Application; 8. An Example: Exploring the Mandelbrot Set; 9. Extending Our Grasp; 10. Debugging; [Part II. Reference Handbook:] QuickDraw; Event Manager; Window Manager; Dialog Manager; Memory Manager; Menu Manager; Control Manager; Text Edit; Standard File Package; File Manager; Font Manager; Print Manager; Resource Manager; Toolbox Utilities; Desk Manager; Scrap Manager; Segment Loader.

Nelson, Kay Yarborough. The Little System 7 Book. Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1991.
148pp. Contents: 1. What's New in System 7?; 2. The Finder and the Desktop; 3. Icons; 4. What Else is New?; 5. Starting Programs and Opening Documents; 6. Control Panels; 7. Fonts and Printing; 8. System Tools; 9. Netiquette; 10. Oh, No! (Troubleshooting); Appendix: Installing System 7.

Networks: The Guide to Mac Connectivity. The Link-Up: Apple, IBM and Beyond. London: Dennis Publishing, September 1992.
MacUser supplement. 24pp.

Networks: The Guide to Mac Connectivity. Hot Links: The Art of Apple Networking. London: Dennis Publishing, July 1993.
MacUser supplement. 32pp.

Networks: The Guide to Mac Connectivity. Take the Fast Track to Corporate Networking. London: Dennis Publishing, 1994.
MacUser supplement. 36pp.

Rosenzweig, Edwin, and Harland Harrison. Programming the 68000: Macintosh Assembly Language. Hasbrouck Heights, New Jersey: Hayden Book Co., 1986.
399pp.

Samish, Francis. Introducing Macintosh. London: Granada, 1984.
iv, 155pp. Contents: 1. What Makes Macintosh So Different?; 2. Starting to Use Macintosh and MacPaint; 3. Financial Planning with Microsoft's Multiplan; 4. Word Processing: The MacWrite Program; 5. Combining Text, Data and Illustrations; 6. Information Retrieval; 7. MacProject: Scheduling and Costing Made Easy; 8. Information from Other Computers: Macterminal; 9. What To Do In Case Of Trouble; 10. Programming with Macintosh - An Introduction; Appendix 1. Buying Applications Software; Appendix 2. Useful Software to Consider.

Weston, Dan. The Complete Book of Macintosh Assembly Language Programming. 2 vols. Glenview, Illinois; London: Scott, Foresman, 1986-1987.

Williams, Robin. The Little Mac Book. Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1990.
104pp; 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1991 (108pp); 3rd edition: Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1993 (330pp); 4th edition: Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1995 (xiv, 393pp); 5th edition: Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1998 (x, 369pp); 6th edition: Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1999 (445pp); 'Panther' edition: Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 2004 (xii, 196pp) [Mac OS X version 10.3 was called 'Panther']. Contents (3rd edition): 1. K's, Megs, and Disks; 2. Starting Up; 3. The Desktop and Finder; 4. The Mouse; 5. Menus; 6. Important Keys; 7. All Windows; 8. Desktop Windows; 9. Icons; 10. Folders; 11. Copying and Selecting; 12. Trash Can; 13. Opening Applications or Documents; 14. Typing; 15. Saving; 16. Printing; 17. Closing and Quitting; 18. Ejecting Disks; 19. Shutting Down; 20. System Folder; 21. Fonts; 22. Desk Accessories; 23. Apple Menu; 24. Control Panels; 25. Aliases; 26. Find File; 27. Simple Networking and Sharing; 28. Other Features; 29. Navigating; 30. Very Important Information; 31. Visual Clues; 32. A Few Extra Tips; 33. Aack!!! Help!; 34. The Performa; 35. At Ease; 36. Jargon; 37. Tutorial.

Williams, Robin, and Steve Broback. Beyond the Little Mac Book. Berkeley, California: Peachpit Press, 1997.
288pp.

Williams, Steve. Programming the Macintosh in Assembly Language. Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1986.
Author given erroneously on cover and spine as James W. Coffron.

[ART] Bassett, Caroline. "Another Classic." MacUser Vol. 7, No. 22, 1 November 1991. p.69.
Preview of the Classic II.

[ART] Bassett, Caroline. "Tower Blocks." MacUser Vol. 7, No. 22, 1 November 1991. pp.65-67.
Preview of the Quadra 700 and Quadra 900.

[ART] Caplin, Stephen. "Think Ink." MacUser Vol. 7, No. 22, 1 November 1991. pp.104-106, 109-111.
Review of inkjet printers: Apple StyleWriter; GCC WriteMove; HP DeskWriter; Kodak Diconix 150+.

[ART] Clarke, Nick. "Kai's Power Tools 1.0." MacUser Vol. 9, No. 10, 14 May 1993. p.30.
Review of the first release from Kai Krause's HSC Software.

[ART] Dyce, Richard. "Fat Mac." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 11, 29 May 1992. pp.50-52.
Review of the Quadra 950.

[ART] Dyce, Richard. "A Good Book." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 19, 18 September 1992. pp.50-51.
Review of the PowerBook 145.

[ART] Dyce, Richard. "Printing in Style." MacUser Vol. 7, No. 6, 22 March 1991. pp.51-54.
Review of the Apple StyleWriter and Apple Personal LaserWriter LS.

[ART] Grey, Nigel. "Personal Print." MacUser Vol. 9, No. 5, 5 March 1993. pp.56-58, 60, 62-65.
Review of low cost printers: Apple LaserWriter Select 300; Apple LaserWriter Select 310; Apple StyleWriter II; Citizen PN48; DEClaser 1152; GCC BLP Elite; GCC PLP II; GCC WriteMove II; HP DeskWriter 550C; HP DeskWriter C; Kodak Diconix 180si.

[ART] Jackson, Peter. "Macintosh Performa 630 Incorporates a Real PC." PC Magazine Vol. 4, No. 8, August 1995. p.51.
Review of the Performa 630 DOS Compatible.

[ART] Kriwaczek, Frank. "Lotus 1-2-3 for Macintosh." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 2, 24 January 1992. pp.23-24.
Review of the spreadsheet software.

[ART] Lemmens, L. "Mac-to-VGA Monitor Adapter." Elektor Electronics December 1997. p.77.
A description of how to connect a standard sub-D 15-way Macintosh monitor connector to a high-density sub-D 15-way VGA connector.

[ART] Oakley, Howard. "Vintage Macs." MacUser Vol. 9, No. 10, 14 May 1993. pp.47-52, 54.
Guide to upgrading earlier Macs. Covers: Plus; SE; SE/30; Classic; II; IIci; IIcx; IIfx; IIsi; IIvi; IIvx; IIx; LC; LCII; Quadra 700; Quadra 900; Portable; PB100; PB140; PB170.

[ART] Prochak, Michael. "Do You Dream in Colour?" MacUser Vol. 7, No. 3, 8 February 1991. pp.57-59.
Review of the Mac LC.

[ART] Prochak, Michael. "Second Base." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 19, 18 September 1992. pp.62-64.
Review of FileMaker Pro 2.0 database software.

[ART] Ransom, Rob. "A Mac for All Reasons." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 4, 21 February 1992. pp.50-54, 56-57.
Review of the Mac range: PB100; PB140; PB170; Classic; Classic II; LC; IIsi; IIci; Quadra 700; Quadra 900.

[ART] Ransom, Rob. "Power Computing." MacUser Vol. 7, No. 22, 1 November 1991. pp.59-62.
Review of the PowerBook 100, PowerBook 140, and PowerBook 170.

[ART] Ransom, Rob. "Radius Rocket 33." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 11, 29 May 1992. pp.29-302.
Review of the graphics accelerator card.

[ART] Tabet, Mark. "The Tower of Power." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 2, 24 January 1992. pp.54-56.
Review of the Quadra 900.

[ART] Vinson, Robin. "Speed Freaks." MacUser Vol. 7, No. 11, 31 May 1991. pp.48-52, 54-55.
Review of graphic accelerators: Apple 8·24GC; Radius DirectColor/GX; Radius QuickCAD; Radius QuickColor; Radius Rocket; RasterOps Accelerator; SuperMac ColorCard/24; SuperMac Spectrum PDQ.

[ART] Watson, Alex. "World Class Players." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 2, 24 January 1992. pp.46-48, 51-53.
Review of CD-ROM drives: Apple CDSC Plus; Axxyss Strategy 2000; Hitachi 1750S; NEC CDR 36; Pioneer DRM-610; Toshiba XM-3301B.

[ART] Weber, Jack. "Beagle's About." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 7, 3 April 1992. pp.82-83, 85-86.
Review of BeagleWorks.

[ART] Wheelwright, Geof. "Dream Machine." Your Computer March 1986. pp.80-81.
Review of the Mac Plus.

[ART] Whitfield, Nigel. "MachTen Unix." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 21, 16 October 1992. pp.32, 34.
Review of Tenon's implementation of BSD 4.3 Unix for the Mac.

[ART] Whitfield, Nigel. "When Worlds Collide." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 11, 29 May 1992. pp.54-56, 59-60.
File exchange between PCs and Macs. Covers: AccessPC; Chameleon; LapLink Mac; MacLink Plus/PC; MacPC Exchange; MicroPhone II; Orange Micro 386; SoftPC Classic; Vicom.

[ART] Wrigley, Ian. "6 New Macs." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 21, 16 October 1992. pp.50-51, 53-54, 56-57, 59-60.
Review of the IIvi; IIvx; PB160; PB180; Duo210; Duo230.

[ART] Wrigley, Ian. "The Mac LCII." MacUser Vol. 8, No. 7, 3 April 1992. pp.62-64.
Review.

Apricot

F1; F1E; F2; F10; FP1 (portable). The F1E: 5MHz 8086, 32K ROM, 256K RAM, 16 colours, 80 x 24 text, 640 x 256, parallel, serial, RGB, 3.5" FDD, MS-DOS and BBC BASIC programs.

[Manual]
Apricot: Technical Reference Manual.
Birmingham: Applied Computer Techniques, 1983.
Includes: Apricot ASM 86 macro assembler pocket reference (spiral bound) in front pocket; and circuit diagrams in back pocket.

Davison, Malcolm. The Apricot F. Series Companion. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1985.
250pp.

Lang, Kathy, and Terry Lang. Managing Your Business with the Apricot. London: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, [c.1985].

Archives I, II, and III

The Archives III is a Z80-based machine with 56K RAM running CP/M. Detached keyboard with WordStar nominated function keys. Console houses the main unit, 80 x 24 memory mapped green screen display, DS 790K Tandon FDD and Seagate 5M Mini-Winchester HDD. Main board and an S-100 backplane with 7 slots. The Archives I has a SS Tandon FDD, the Archives II a DS Tandon FDD.

[ART] Bidmead, Chris. "The Big Memory Machine: The Archives III." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1982. pp.26-29.
Review of the Archives III.

Atari (Consoles, General and Unspecified)

VCS 2600 console (1977): 1.19MHz 6507 CPU, 4K ROM, 128 bytes RAM. It sold poorly until Atari purchased exclusive rights from Taito for Space Invaders. The VCS cartridge was programmed by Rick Mauer; VCS 5200 console (1982): Analogue joystick. Early versions: 4 joystick ports and a joint RF/power unit. Later versions: 2 joystick ports and separate RF and power connections; VCS 7800 console (1986); Jaguar (1993).

[Brochure: VCS2600]
[Spectravideo International Ltd.] Spectravideo Video Game Cartridges for the Atari Video Game System. Catalog. Meet the Challenge. Vol. II. 11/83.
[n.p.]: Spectravideo International Ltd., 1983.
Fold-out pamphlet. Includes: Gangster Alley; Planet Patrol; Cross Force; Tape Worm; China Syndrome; The Challenge of Nexar; Master Builder; Glactic Tactic; Mangia'; QuickShot Joystick.

[Manual: VCS2600]
[Atari Inc.] Combat. Game Program Instructions.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1977.
[8]pp. Coded: C011402-01.

[Manual: VCS2600]
[Atari Inc.] CX2612: Street Racer. Game Program Instructions.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1977.
[12]pp. Coded: C011402-12 Rev. 5.

[Manual: VCS2600]
[Atari Inc.] CX2613: Adventure.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1980.
[40]pp. English; French; German; Italian; Spanish. Coded: C016973-13-REV. 1.

[Manual: VCS2600]
[Atari Inc.] CX2622: Breakout.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1978.
[40]pp. English; French; German; Italian; Spanish. Coded: C016973-22-REV. 1.

[Manual: VCS2600]
[Atari Inc.] CX2632: Space Invaders.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1980.
[48]pp. English; French; German; Italian; Spanish. Coded: C016973-32-REV. 1.

[Manual: VCS2600]
[Atari Inc.] CX2633: Night Driver.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1978.
[20]pp. English; French; German; Italian; Spanish. Coded: C016973-33-REV. 1.

[Manual: VCS2600]
[Atari Inc.] CX2649: Asteroids.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1979.
English; French; German; Italian; Spanish. Coded: C016973-49-REV. 1.

A.N.A.L.O.G. Atari 400/800 Magazine. Cherry Valley, Massachusetts: A.N.A.L.O.G. Magazine Corp., [January/February 1981-1988]; Beverly Hills, California: L. F. P. Inc., [1988-].

Periodical. Bi-Monthly. Later, monthly. Renamed A.N.A.L.O.G. Computing and A.N.A.L.O.G. Magazine. ST-Log begun as a supplement in 1985, spun-off as a separate publication and then re-merged. The title stands for Atari Newletter And Lots Of Games.

Atari User. Stockport: Database Publications, [May 1985-1988].
Periodical. Issue 1: May 1985.

Atari World. Cambridge: Specialist Magazines, [May 1995-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: May 1995. Two other titles, Atari Pro and ST Source were supplied free as part of the magazine. Launch editor: Vic Lennard.

Blanchet, Michael. How to Beat Atari, Intellivision, and Other Home Video Games. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1982.
128pp. Illustrated by R. B. Backhaus.

Katz, Arnie, Bill Kunkel, and Frank Tetro, Jr. The Player's Strategy Guide to Atari VCS Home Video Games. Including Activision, Tele-Arcade and Games by Appollo. With Strategy Tips from 'Video' Frank Tetro, Jr. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1982.
223pp.

New Atari User. Stafford: Page 6, 1989-[1993?].
Periodical. Six issues each year. Continued: Page 6: Atari Users' Magazine from issue 38.

Page 6: Atari Users' Magazine. Stafford: Page 6 Magazine, 1982-1989.
Periodical. Six issues each year. Continued by: New Atari User.

[ART] Latimer, Peter. "Project Stella." Retro Gamer No. 12. pp.24-32.
Brief history of the VCS2600. Interviews with David Crane and Kirk Israel.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "Retroinspection: Atari Jaguar." Retro Gamer No. 26. pp.48-57.

Atari 400, 800, 600XL, 800XL, 1200XL, 1400XL, 1450XL, 65XE, 130XE.

8-bit machines. 400 (1979): 1.79MHz 6502; 16K RAM; 1 cartridge port; touch-sensitive keyboard; 800 (1979): 1.79MHz 6502; 10K ROM; 8K-48K RAM (the first models released had 8K or 16K, later releases came with 48K); 2 cartridge ports; 320 x 192 graphics, 40 x 25 text; full-travel keyboard, RGB and composite video output; 600XL (1983): 1.79MHz 6502C CPU; 24K ROM; 16K RAM; 11 graphics modes, 128 colours from 256, 320 x 192 maximum, 5 text modes, 40 x 24 maximum; cartridge slot; expansion slot; TV output; 2 controller ports; serial; 800XL (1983): 64K RAM; 1200XL (1982): 64K RAM; limited sales due to compatibility issues; 1400XL (limited release): 800XL in a 1200XL case with minor additions (built-in modem and speech synthesiser); 1450XLD (limited release): 1400XL with additional features (built-in DS DD 256K FDD, space for another FDD/HDD); 65XE: minor remodelling/upgrade of the 800XL; 130XE: 128K RAM; Concept machines: 65XEM (musically enchanced); 65XEP (portable) were not released. The Atari XE Video Game System was a repackaged 65XE.

The source code for Atari BASIC was published by Wilkinson, O'Brien, and Laughton (1983).

[Manual]
Atari Home Computer System. Technical Reference Notes.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1982.
Includes: operating system user's manual, operating system source listing & hardware manual.

[Manual]
The Atari 1010 Program Recorder. Owner's Guide.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., 1982.
Back cover: 'CO61133 REV. A'. [16]pp including the covers.

Albrecht, Bob, LeRoy Finkel, and Jerald R. Brown. Atari BASIC. New York: Wiley, 1979.

Albrecht, Bob, LeRoy Finkel, and Jerald R. Brown. Atari BASIC. XL Edition. New York: J. Wiley, 1985.

Andrews, Kris Austen, Arlan Keith Andrews, Sr., and Joseph C. Giarratano. Timelost. Atari Version (400, 800 and 1200XL Models). Indianapolis: Que, 1983.
'Combines the comic strip adventures of a teen-age computer whiz, his little sister, and a friend from the future, who become lost in time and face dangerous adversaries, with programs for corresponding games to be played on the Atari computers.'

Banse, Timothy P. Home Applications and Games for the Atari Home Computers: For the Atari 400/800, 600XL, 800XL, 1200XL, 1400XL, and 1450XLD Home Computers. Boston: Little, Brown, 1983.

Beil, Donald H. The VisiCalc Book: Atari Edition. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1982.

Berenbon, Howard. Mostly BASIC: Applications for your Atari. 2 vols. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1983.

Bergin, Kevin. Atari 130XE Machine Language for the Absolute Beginner. [Richmond]: Melbourne House, 1985.

The Blue Book for the Atari Computer: The Complete 'Where to Find it' Book of Software, Hardware, and Accessories for the Atari 400, 800, and XL Series Computers. Chicago, Illinois: WIDL Video, 1983.

Boom, Michael. Understanding Atari Graphics. Sherman Oaks, California: Alfred Publishing Co., 1982.

Bridge, Tony. Atari Adventures. A Guide to Playing and Writing Adventures. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Bunn, Paul. Making the Most of your Atari. London: Interface, 1983.
Sometimes listed as Total Control: Making the Most of your Atari.

Coan, James S., and Richard Kushner. Basic Atari BASIC. Hasbrouck Heights, New Jersey: Hayden Book Co., 1984.

Compute!'s First Book of Atari Games. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Books, 1983.

Compute!'s First Book of Atari Graphics. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Books, 1982.

Conlan, Jim, and Tracy Deliman. Atari PILOT for Beginners. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1983.

Deeson, Eric. Easy Programming for the Atari Micros. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.

Hartnell, Tim, and Paul Bunn. Getting Started on Your Atari. London: Futura, 1984.

Heiserman, David L. Programmer's Reference Guide for the Atari 400/800 Computers. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1984.

Inman, Don, and Kurt Inman. The Atari Assembler. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1981.

I/O: The Quarterly Magazine of the Atari Home Computer Club. [Slough]: Atari (UK) Inc., [1982-].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issue 1: Winter 1982-1983.

Kedem, Dani, and Itzhak Kalisky. Atari. Watson's Notes. Unit 1: First Steps in BASIC. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.
73pp. Contents: 1. The Computer as a Typewriter; 2. The Atari as a Pocket Calculator; 3. Colours and Screens; 4. The First Program; 5. Producing Patterns; 6. Robert Does Gymnastics; 7. Robert the Robot; Summary: List of Terms Learnt in Unit 1; Answers; Appendix: Graphic Screens 0, 1 & 2.

Kedem, Dani, and Itzhak Kalisky. Atari. Watson's Notes. Unit 2: Exploring BASIC. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.
73pp. New edition: Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.

Kedem, Dani, and Itzhak Kalisky. Atari. Watson's Notes. Unit 3: Making BASIC Work. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.
72pp.

Kedem, Dani, and Itzhak Kalisky. Atari. Watson's Notes. Unit 4: Computer Games. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.
60pp.

Kedem, Dani, and Itzhak Kalisky. Atari. Watson's Notes. Unit 5: Creative Graphics. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.
72pp.

Kedem, Dani, and Itzhak Kalisky. Atari. Watson's Notes. Unit 6: Advanced Programming. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986.

Kohl, Herbert R., Ted Kahn, and Dale Disharoon. Atari PILOT Activities and Games. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1983.

Kohl, Herbert R., Ted Kahn, Len Lindsay, and Pat Cleland. Atari Games and Recreations. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1982.

Lamoitier, Jean-Pierre. BASIC Exercises for the Atari. Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1983.

Lampton, Christopher. Graphics and Animation on the Atari: 800, 400, 1200XL, 800XL, and 600XL. New York: F. Watts, 1986.

Levitan, Arlan R. The User's Guide to Atari 400, 800, 1200XL Computers, Software & Peripherals. New York: Beekman House, 1983.

Moore, Herb, Judy Lower, and Bob Albrecht. Atari Sound and Graphics. New York: Wiley, 1982.

North, Alan. 31 New Atari Computer Programs for Home, School, Office. Woodsboro, Maryland: ARCsoft Publishers, 1983.

North, Alan. 101 Atari Computer Programming Tips and Tricks.. Woodsboro, Maryland: ARCsoft Publishers, 1983.

Orkin, Michael, and Ed Bogas. Survival on Planet X with the Atari Home Computer. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.
Illustrated by William Luckey.

Passantino, Claire Bailey. Itty Bitty Bytes of Space for the Atari Computer. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.
Illustrated by Nancy Gurganus.

Passantino, Claire Bailey. Matilda, the Computer Cat, for the Atari Computer. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.
Illustrated by Nancy Gurganus.

Patchett, Craig, and Robin Sherer. Master Memory Map for the Atari. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.

Peckham, Herbert D., Wade Ellis, Jr., and Ed Lodi. Hands-On BASIC for the Atari 400/800/1200XL. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1983.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Programming the Atari 600/800XL. London: Babani, 1984.

Poole, Lon, Mary Borchers, and Steven Cook. Some Common BASIC Programs. Atari Edition. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1981.

Poole, Lon, Martin McNiff, and Steven Cook. Your Atari Computer: A Guide to Atari 400/800 Computers. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1982.
vi, 458pp.

Roberts, Sam D. Games for the Atari 400/800: Or How to Program Your Own Games. Holzkirchen, West Germany: W. Hofacker GmbH, 1982.

Roberts, Sam D. How to Program Your Atari in 6502 Machine Language: Introduction to Machine Language for the BASIC Programmer. Holzkirchen, West Germany: W. Hofacker GmbH, 1982.

Rugg, Tom, Phil Feldman, and Tim Barry. 32 BASIC Programs for the Atari Computer. Beaverton, Oregon: Dilithium Press, 1984.

Schreiber, Linda M. Atari Fun and Games: Discover New Heights in Game-Playing Excitement on any Atari: 400, 600, 800, and 1200 Systems, Including XE and XL Models! Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1985.

Schreiber, Linda M. Atari Programming with 55 Programs. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1982.

Severn, Darryl. Mastering the Atari 600XL, 800XL, 400, 800. London: Interface, 1984.
viii, 232pp.

Taylor, John. Atari 400/800 Diskguide. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1983.
64pp.

Weber, Jeffrey R., and Stephen J. Szczecinski. User's Handbook to the Atari 400/800 Computers. Cleveland, Ohio: Weber Systems, 1983.
319pp.

White, John. Writing Strategy Games on Your Atari Computer. Techniques for Intelligent Games. London: Sunshine, 1983.
v, 129pp.

Wilkinson, Bill, ed. Inside Atari DOS. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Books, 1982.
viii, 120pp.

Wilkinson, Bill, Kathleen O'Brien, and Paul Laughton. The Atari BASIC Source Book: A Complete Explanation of the Inside Workings of Atari BASIC, Along with the Original Source Code. For Intermediate and Advanced Programmers. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Books, 1983.
x, 299pp. Spiral bound. The authors produced Atari BASIC for Atari whilst working for Shepardson Microsystems. Contents: [Part 1. Inside Atari BASIC:] 1. Atari BASIC: A High-Level Language Translator; 2. Internal Design Overview; 3. Memory Usage; 4. Program Editor; 5. The Pre-Compiler; 6. Execution Overview; 7. Execute Compression; 8. Execution Boundary Conditions; 9. Program Flow Control Statements; 10. Tokenized Program Save and Load; 11. The LIST and ENTER Statements; 12. Atari Hardware Control Statements; 13. External Data I/O Statements; 14. Internal I/O Statements; 15. Miscellaneous Statements; 16. Initialization; [Part 2. Directly Accessing Atari BASIC:] 1. Hexadecimal Numbers; 2. PEEKing and POKEing; 3. Listing Variables in Use; 4. Variable Values; 5. Examining the Statement Table; 6. Viewing the Runtime Stack; 7. Fixed Tokens; 8. What Takes Precedence?; 9. Using What We Know; [Part 3. Atari BASIC Source Code:] Source Code Listing; [Appendices:] A. Macros in Source Code; B. The Bugs in Atari BASIC; C. Labels and Hexadecimal Addresses.

[ART] Barlow, Chris. "Light Pen." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 3, No. 12. September-November 1984. pp.38-40.
Constructional article. For the Atari, VIC 20 and Commodore 64. A kit was sold by Maplin Electronic Supplies.

[ART] Howarth, Les. "Atari Screen Action: Scoring on Your Atari." Personal Computer News Vol. 1, No. 17. 30 June-6 July 1983. pp.25, 27.
Using the GTIA chip.

[ART] Stewart, Ron. "Flipping the Pages." Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. p.80.
Creating graphics off-screen and then page-flipping.

[ART] Tebbutt, David. "Atari 400 & 800." Personal Computer World October 1980. pp.63-65, 69-71.
Review.

[ART] Wheelwright, Geof. "800 Revisited." Personal Computer News No. 48. 11 February 1984. p.38.
Review of the Atari 800XL.

Atari ST and STE Series

16-bit. Running TOS (Tramiel [or 'The'] Operating System), BOS (Business Operating System), and GEM GUI. 68000 CPU, WD1772 FDD controller, MFP 68901, two 6850 ACIAs, Yamaha YM-2149 sound chip, 6301 (keyboard and mouse) controller, four custom chips: GLUE, MMU, DMA, and SHIFTER, 25-pin centronics parallel port, 25-pin serial port, 13-pin RGB monitor port, 14-pin DIN external FDD port, 9-pin mouse port, 5-pin DIN MIDI port, 40-pin cartridge slot, 19-pin DMA port (intended for HDD, co-processors and networking). After 'ST', 'F' indicated a built-in FDD, 'M' a built-in modulator for TV output. 130ST and 260ST prototypes shelved. 520ST (1985): 68000 CPU; 16K-320K ROM; 512K RAM; External 349K SS 3.5" FDD; MIDI; 2 joystick ports; serial; parallel; 128K ROM cartridge port; built-in keyboard, mouse port. Early 520ST models had to boot from disks. 1040ST (1986): 68000 CPU; Built-in DS FDD; MegaST (1987): 2Mb or 4Mb RAM as standard; detached keyboard; Portable ST (1988): Known as the STacy; 640 x 400 LCD display; trackball; external AC adaptor or batteries; ST Book (1989): Smaller portable, few released; STylus (also known as the ST PAD) was an unreleased concept machine; 520STE (1989): Enhanced 520ST; 1040STE (1989): Enhanced 1040ST; MegaSTE (1991): Enhanced MegaST; 16MHz 68000 CPU; 4Mb standard RAM on SIMM; GEM 2.05/2.06; Internal FDD; Internal HDD; detached keyboard.

[Manual: OS]
Atari ST BASIC Sourcebook and Tutorial.
Sunnyvale, California: Atari Inc., [1987].
[8], 241pp. Contents: 1. Getting Started with ST BASIC; 2. Programming with ST BASIC; 3. ST BASIC Menus; Appendices. Back cover: 'CO26220 REV. A' above 'CO26166 1986 1 C C'. Publication date taken from the copyright statement.

[Manual: OS]
GFA BASIC Interpreter User Guide.
[-]: [-], [198-].
2nd edition: Barnet: Glentop, 1986 (293pp). Manual by Hendrika Hilchner. Software by Frank Ostrowski.

Braga, John. The Atari ST Explored. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1986.

Braun, Uwe, Stefan Dittrich, and Axel Schramm. ST Disk Drives: Inside and Out. Discover the Capabilities of Atari ST Disk Drives. Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, 1987.
Vol. 13 in the series. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1986 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany) and 1987 (Abacus). With an optional 3.5" floppy disk. 2nd printing: January 1988 (v, 391pp). Contents (2nd printing): 1. Files and Programs; 2. Data Structures; 3. The Disk Drives; 4. The SH204 Hard Disk; 5. The RAM Disk; 6. Programming a Disk Monitor; 7. Machine Language Utilities for BASIC.

Dittrich, Stefan. PEEKs & POKEs: Keys to Revealing the Secrets Hidden Within your Atari ST. Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, 1986.
v, 175pp. Vol. 8 in the series. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk. Internal title: 'Atari ST PEEKs & POKEs'. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1985 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany) and 1986 (Abacus). 1st edition: October 1986. Contents: 1. A Look Inside the ST; 2. Memory Structures; 3. Computer Mathematics; 4. The Operating System; 5. The Desktop; 6. Programming Languages; 7. BASIC Programming; Appendix A. Glossary; Appendix B. Important PEEKs and POKEs.

Field, Simon, Kathleen Mandis, and Dave Myers. COMPUTE!'s ST Applications: Programming in C. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, [1986].
viii, 327pp.

Flynn, Brian, and John J. Flynn. COMPUTE!'s ST Applications. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, [1986].
v, 365pp.

Gerits, Klaus, Lothar Englisch, and Rolf Bruckmann. Atari ST Anatomy: The Authoritative Insider's Guide. Pangbourne, Berkshire: First Publishing, 1986.
Cover title: The Anatomy of the Atari ST. iii, 446pp. Vol. 2 in the series. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1985 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany), 1985 (Abacus Software, Grand Rapids, Michigan), and 1986 (First Publishing). Contents: 1. The Integrated Circuits; 2. The Interfaces; 3. The ST Operating System; 4. Appendix. The System Fonts. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk.

Grohmann, Bernd, Petra Seidler, and Harald Slibar. Atari ST Machine Language: Complete Introduction to Machine/Assembly Language on the Atari ST. Pangbourne, Berkshire: First Publishing, 1986.
vi, 275pp. Vol. 5 in the series. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1985 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany; Abacus Software, Grand Rapids, Michigan) and 1986 (First Publishing). Preface dated August 1985. Contents: 1. Microcomputer Fundamentals; 2. Hardware Fundamentals; 3. The 68000 Processor; 4. Program and Memory Structures; 5. Operating System and Programs; 6. Fundamentals of Assembly Language Programming; 7. Programming Step by Step; 8. Solutions to Typical Problems. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk. Originally published as Das Maschinen Sprache Buch zum Atari ST.

Hartnell, Tim. Harnessing the Power of Your Atari ST. London: Interface, 1986.
x, 219pp.

Hartwig, Olaf. Atari ST. ST BASIC to C: Move Quickly Beyond the BASICS with the Powerful C Language. Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, [1986].
Vol. 11 in the series. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk. A Data Becker book. Copyright statements for 1986 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany) and 1986 (Abacus). 2nd printing: May 1988 (231pp). Contents (2nd printing): 1. Development, Applications, and the C Language; 2. First Steps for (Former) BASIC Programmers; 3. The Basic Elements of C; 4. Screen Input/Output Operations; 5. Variable Types in C; 6. C Pointers; 7. Arithmetic Operators and Expressions; 8. Control Structures in C; 9. Common Mistakes of BASIC Programmers; 10. C Functions; 11. Structures; 12. An Overview of C; Appendices.

Hill, Stephen. The Game Maker's Manual: Atari ST and STOS BASIC. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Press, 1990.
280pp.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Working with the Atari ST. London: Sunshine, 1985.
134pp.

Meadows, Dick. Using ST BASIC on the Atari ST. [-]: [-], 1986.
2nd edition: Barnet: Glentop, [1988] (x, 186pp). Atari ST series.

Pearson, Roger, and Sean Hodgson. Introducing Atari ST Machine Code. Hebden Bridge, Yorkshire: zzSoft, 1990.
x, 405pp. With a floppy disk.

Peel, Katherine D. The Concise Atari ST 68000 Programmer's Reference Guide. [-]: [-], 1986.
Revised edition: Barnet: Glentop, 1988 (Multi-paged).

Sims, Martin. Practical LOGO for the Atari ST. Barnet: Glentop, 1986.
168pp.

Sims, Martin. Using ST LOGO on the Atari. Barnet: Glentop, 1985.
Multi-paged (262pp). 2nd edition (with the title Using LOGO on the Atari ST): Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1986 (Multi-paged).

Szczepanowski, Norbert, and Bernd Gunther. Atari ST GEM Programmer's Reference: The Complete Guide to Programming the ST Using the Graphics Environment Manager. Pangbourne: First Publishing Ltd, 1986.
A Data Becker book. Another edition: Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, 1987 (v, 414pp; Vol. 3 in the series; A Data Becker book; Copyright statements for 1985 (Data Becker GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany) and 1986-1987 (Abacus); 4th printing: October 1988). Contents (4th printing, 1988): 1. GEM Organization in the Atari ST; 2. Programming with GEM; 3. Inside GEM: The VDI; 4. Inside GEM: The VDS; [Appendices:] A. Overview of the VDI Functions; B. Overview of the AES Functions; C. 68000 Instructions. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk.

Tyler, Andrew. Real-Time 3D Graphics for the Atari ST: A Practical Guide to 68000 Assembler Programming. London: Sigma, 1991.
[300]pp.

Vine, Jeremy. The Atari ST Companion. London: Sunshine, 1985.
144pp.

[ART] Denning, Adam. "Transputer Trial." Your Computer June 1987. pp.40-41.
Review of the Kuma K-Max Transputer Development System for the Atari ST.

[ART] Jones, Meirion. "Atari's Sprat to Catch the Mac." Your Computer April 1985. pp.54-55.
Jack Tramiel and a preview of the ST.

Atari TT030

1990. 32-bit 32MHz 68030; 68882 FPU; 512K ROM including TOS3 and GEM; 128K external ROM; Up to 26Mb RAM; VME Eurocard (3U) internal slot; serial; Local-Talk compatible LAN port; ST video modes with additional TT-low (320 x 480, 256 colours); TT-medium (640 x 480, 16 colours); TT-high (1280 x 960, mono); detachable keyboard; SCSI port for external HDD, CD-ROM; UNIX v4.x compatible OS.

Atari Falcon030

1992. 32-bit 16MHz 68030; 68881/2 socket; 512K ROM including TOS4 and GEM; External 128K ROM; 1M, 4M, or 14M RAM; 56001 DSP; Internal processor slot for 386/486 boards; SVGA graphics (640 x 480, 256 colours); True colour mode: 65536 colours from 262,144; 768 x 480 overscan mode; External SCSI-II; Local-Talk compatible LAN port; VGA, composite, RF, RGB connectors; stereo sound i/o; MultiTOS.

Atari Portfolio/DIP Pocket PC

The Atari Portfolio was originally developed in the UK by DIP (Distributed Information Processing, Guildford, Surrey) and was sold in the UK as the DIP Pocket PC (c.1989). PDA with a calculator-style QWERTY keyboard, 40 x 8-line LCD display which can act as a window on a virtual 80 x 25 display, and clamshell design. 256K RAM, 32K and 64K data cards. Stated to run for 40 hours on 3 AA alkaline batteries. Weight: 18oz. The DIP Pocket PC promised a high degree of PC compatibility, and included software in its ROM including an address book, a diary, a time manager, a calculator, a word processor, and a Lotus 123 compatible spreadsheet (called a 'worksheet').

Baron, Peter. Atari Portfolio/DIP Pocket PC Companion. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Press, [19--]
243pp. A companion disk was available from the publishers. Contents: 1. Opening your Portfolio; 2. Starting and Using the Portfolio's Disk Operating System; 3. The Address Book; 4. The Calculator; 5. The Diary; 6. The Editor; 7. Setup, Clipboard, Data and File Transfer; 8. The Worksheet; 9. Worksheet Practice; 10. Using Printers with the Portfolio; 11. Extra Software for the Portfolio; Appendix A. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix B. Error Messages.

Bandai WonderSwan console

WonderSwan (1999; mono screen); WonderSwan Color (2000; FSTN screen); WonderSwan Crystal (2002; TFT screen).

[ART] Wild, Kim. "Retroinspection: WonderSwan." Retro Gamer No. 36. pp.68-75.

BASF 7120

[ART] Dennis, Mike. "BASF 7120." Personal Computer World September 1980. pp.48-51, 53, 87 (text printed on the wrong page).
Review.

British Micro MIMI (British Micro, Watford)

MIMI 802G: Z80 CPU running SIMON (SImple MONitor) from EPROM and the OS/M 2.2 operating system (a CP/M 2.2 clone produced by Scifax Microsoftware). 4K ROM, 64K RAM, two 5.25" 320K FDDs, built-in keyboard. Text and graphics (512 x 256) modes. Composite video output, 25-way serial and parallel ports, 5-pin DIN socket for a light pen. Introduced: January 1982.

MIMI 802W: As above but with a 10Mb Winchester HDD replacing one of the FDDs.

[Manual]
BM MIMI 802G Desktop Microcomputer.
Watford, Hertfordshire: British Micro, 1982.
Loose leaf, pp.B1G-B24G (computer manual) and pp.A1-A58 ('OS/M Series 2-2 Operating System' manual). Three-ring binder is printed 'BM MIMI 800 series desktop microcomputers' (front) and 'BM system manual' (spine).

[ART] Brook, Deenagh. "True Brit." What Micro? February 1983. pp.79-81.
Review of the MIMI 802G.

Bywood Scrumpi 2 and Scrumpi 3 (Bywood Electronics, Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire)

SBC kits based on the SC/MP2 CPU. The basic Scrumpi 2B kit has 256 bytes RAM, the full Scrumpi 2F kit has an additional 512 byte PROM and 512 byte RAM. Scrumpi 3 has a keyboard, VDU interface, UART, 128 byte RAM, 1K PROM, and sockets for an additional 1K PROM and 1K RAM.

C9E

1.5MHz 68A09-based SBC. 64K RAM. Two ROMs, one containing BASIC, the other an assembler and the OS, called D9E. Five SS-50 expansion slots, cassette interface, video output, 32 x 16 text, 256 x 192 pixels. Produced by Adaptors Engineering, London.

[ART] Monkman, Francis. "C9E - Enigma Variations." Personal Computer News Vol. 1, No. 11. 20 May-26 May 1983. pp.42-43, 46-47.
Review.

Caltext Micro (Computer Ancillaries Ltd., Egham, Surrey)

Word processor. Two built-in FDDs (Winchester HDD option) and a built-in monitor. CP/M. Microcobol.

Camputers Lynx

4MHz Z80A-based micro. 16K ROM (48K RAM) or 24K ROM (96K or 128K RAM). 40/80 x 24 text, 512 x 480 or 256 x 248 graphics, 6845 CRT controller, 8 colours, sound, built-in keyboard. TV, RGB with Sync (colour), mono composite/light-pen, cassette, RS232 serial, extension bus, and PSU ports at the rear. External PSU: grey metal cased PUL21 (+5v at 2A, -5v at 25mA, +12v at 0.5A, 40w, 6-pin DIN). The 96K model had 37.5K free for Lynx BASIC programs and 23K free for data. The 96K extension ROM was a 2732. Rights purchased by Anston Technology when Camputers went bust, and then on to the National Lynx User Group. Lynx BASIC, largely by Davis Jansen, is probably unique in supporting floating-point line numbers.

[Manual]
Camputers Lynx User Manual.
Cambridge: Camputers, [198-].
By Sue Jansons. Spiral bound. 98pp. Contents: 1. Setting up the Computer; 2. The Keyboard; 3. The Computer as a Calculator; 4. Starting to Program; 5. Looping; 6. Making Decision; 7. More About Strings; 8. Editing; 9. Storing and Loading Programs; 10. More Variables; 11. Structuring Complex Programs; 12. Further Maths; 13. The Printer; 14. Graphics and Sound; 15. What is Machine Code?; 16. Machine Code; Appendix 1. Error Messages; Appendix 2. Shorthand; Appendix 3. ASCII Codes; Appendix 4. External Connections to the Lynx; Appendix 5. Summary of Lynx BASIC.

[Manual]
Camputers Lynx 96K User Manual.
[Cambridge]: [Camputers], [198-].
8pp. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The 96K Lynx Extension EPROM; 3. Changes in Version 2.0 BASIC ROM.

[Manual]
Camputers Lynx Cassette Operation with your Lynx.
[Cambridge]: [Camputers], [198-].
4pp.

[Manual]
[Camputers Lynx] Connections for RGB Cables for the Lynx.
[n.p.]: [n.p.], [198-].
Single sheet, blank on the verso. 'This applies to machines with serial numbers as follows: 48K/96K 011250 onwards; 128k'.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Lynx Computing. London: Granada, 1983.
viii, 148pp. Contents: 1. Setting Up; 2. Ins and Outs; 3. Counting, Listing and Looping; 4. Numbers and More Numbers; 5. Strings and Things; 6. Structures, Lists and Menus; 7. Number and String Lists; 8. Beginning Graphics and Sound; 9. Higher Resolution All Round; 10. More Sound and Some Afterthoughts; Appendix A. Cassette Loading Problems; Appendix B. ASCII Codes; Appendix C. Editing; Appendix D. Magazine and User Groups; Appendix E. Mystery Corner; Appendix F. Drawing Circles.

[ART] Kelly, David. "Lynx: Putting the Cat Among the Pigeons." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 1, No. 24. 30 September 1982. p.11.
Interview with John Shirreff and Davis Jansons, co-designers of the Lynx.

Canon

BX-3: 1MHz 6809 CPU, 4K ROM, 64K-128K RAM, built-in 28 character display panel, built-in 80 column printer, two built-in 320K 5.25" FDDs, built-in keyboard, 3 serial ports, 1 parallel port, 1 GP-IB port. MCX OS ('Media for Canon X Series'). Options: External dual 8" FDDs, 20Mb HDD, graphics card.

CX-1: 1MHz 6809 CPU, 4K ROM, 64K-128K RAM, built-in 12" green VDU (80 x 24; 300 x 260 optional graphics), two built-in 320K 5.25" FDDs, built-in keyboard, 3 serial ports, 1 parallel port, 1 GP-IB port. MCX OS ('Media for Canon X Series'). Options: External dual 8" FDDs, 20Mb HDD, graphics card.

Casio FX series

FX-850P: Calculator-format computer with a QWERTY keyboard, 8K-40K RAM, BASIC, 32 character, 2 line LCD display, 2 x CR2032 batteries (CR1220 for memory back-up). Power consumption: 0.4w. FA-6 Multi Purpose Interface Unit contains a serial port, parallel port, and cassette interface, and is powered by 4 AA batteries or a mains adaptor.

FX-9000P: Portable computer with a QWERTY keyboard, internal 5" VDU (32 x 16), 4 cartridge slots, 12K ROM (OS and CA-BASIC), 4K NMOS RAM, cassette interface. OP-1 expansion module allows the use of a mini printer. Cartridges: 4K CMOS RAM, 16K NMOS RAM, or 12K ROM.

[ART] Ball, Robert. "Casio FX-850P Personal Computer." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 8, No. 33. August-September 1989. pp.73-78.
Review.

[ART] Evans, Gary. "Casio FX-9000P Computer Review." Radio and Electronics World May 1982. pp.34-36.
Review.

[ART] Klein, G. "Casio Interface." Elektor Electronics December 1996. p.73.
Constructional article. Schematic given. PC interface for certain Casio organisers and PDAs with 3mm 0v/5v serial output sockets. The models with this port are not stated in the article.

CASU Super C (CASU Electronics Ltd., Ferndown, Northwood Hills, Middlesex)

S-100 based business computer.

[ART] Jackman, D. "A Computer that means Business." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 1. 1978. pp.29-32.
Review.

Chieftain (Smoke Signal Broadcasting, Westlake Village, California)

Chieftain I and II: Both are 2MHz 6800-based, 2K monitor, 32K-64K SRAM, 9 slot motherboard, 2 serial ports, and leather-grained cabinets. Chieftain I has two 5.25" FDDs, Chieftain II has two 8" FDDs.

Circuit Cellar MPX-16

5MHz 8088-based SBC, IBM PC compatible, optional 8087, 256K RAM, 2 serial, 3 parallel, CP/M-86 OS support in BIOS, 5.25" or 8" FDD support, 64K EPROM 24/28-pin sockets, 9 slots (5 sockets).

[ART] Ciarcia, Steven A. "Build the Circuit Cellar MPX-16 Computer System." Byte I: Vol. 7, No. 11. November 1982. pp.78-80, 82, 84-86, 88-92, 98, 100, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114.
Constructional article.

Comart

CP100 Series: 8086-based. Up to 1Mb RAM, up to 20Mb HDD, CP/M-86, MP/M-86, MS-DOS.

Commodore (General and Unspecified)

[Manual]
Commodore 1541-II Disk Drive User's Guide.
[West Chester, Pennsylvania]: [Commodore Business Machines, Inc.], [1986].
94pp. Contents: 1. Disk Drive; 2. Diskettes; 3. Directories; 4. Commands; 5. Sequential Data Files; 6. Relative Data Files; 7. Direct Access Commands; 8. Internal Disk Commands; 9. Machine Language Programs; Appendix A. Changing the Device Number; Appendix B. Error Messages; Appendix C. Diskette Formats; Appendix D. Disk Command Quick Reference Chart; Appendix E. Test/Demo Diskette. Copyright Commodore Electronics Ltd. Part No. 354139-01.

Bagnall, Brian. On The Edge: The Spectacular Rise and Fall of Commodore. Winnipeg, Manitoba: Variant Press, 2005.
ix, 561pp. Contents: Introduction; Prolog: The Rise of Commodore; 1. MOS Technology - 1974 to 1976; 2. The Acquisition - 1975 to 1976; 3. The PET - 1976 to 1977; 4. Releasing the PET - 1977 to 1978; 5. The Trinity - 1977-1979; 6. Business is War - 1979 to 1980; 7. The Color Computers - 1979 to 1980; 8. The VIC-20 - 1980; 9. Computers for the Masses - 1981; 10. The Race to a Million - 1981 to 1983; 11. The Secret Project - 1981; 12. The Commodore 64 - 1982; 13. Selling the Revolution - 1982; 14. Commodore Mania - 1983; 15. TED - 1983; 16. Dismissing the Founder - 1984; 17. The Sequel - 1984; 18. Brawling for the C128 - 1984 to 1985; 19. The Savior of Commodore - 1982 to 1985; 20. The Amiga - 1985 to 1986; 21. Dropping the Ball - 1985 to 1987; 22. The New Amigas - 1986 to 1987; 23. A Radical New Direction - 1988 to 1992; 24. The Fall of Commodore - 1992 to 1994; Epilogue.

Billingsley, John. DIY Robotics and Sensors on the Commodore Computer: Practical Projects for Control Application. London: Sunshine, 1984.
vi, 130pp.

Commodore Disk User. London: Argus Specialist Publications, November/December 1987-[1991].
Periodical. Six issues a year.

Commodore Horizons. The Independent Commodore Magazine. London: Sunshine, December 1983-[July 1985].
Periodical.

Commodore User. London: Paradox Group, 1983-[1989].
Periodical. Monthly. Absorbed Vic Computing in 1983. Introductory issue: June 1983.

Knott, Julie, and Dave Prochnow. Commodore Peripherals: A User's Guide. Greensboro, N.C.: COMPUTE!, [c.1984].

YC. Hemel Hempstead: Argus Specialist Publications, [1990-1991].
Periodical. Monthly. Continues Your Commodore.

Your Commodore. London: Argus Specialist Publications, [1984-1989].
Periodical. Monthly. Continued by YC.

Your Commodore Serious Users Guide. London: Argus Specialist Publications, [1987].
Periodical. Annual.

[ART] Buciak, Bohdan. "The Soft Side of Commodore? Gail Wellington: Up at the Sharp End." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.14, 17-18.
Profile of Gail Wellington, Software Products Manager, Commodore UK, Slough.

[ART] Buciak, Bohdan. "Stack in Profile." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.78-79.
Profile of Stack Computer Services, Liverpool (founded by Jeff Orr).

[ART] Erskine, Christina. "Amiga Stars at Commodore Show." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 20. 15-21 May 1986. pp.10-11.
Review of the Seventh Official Commodore Computer Show held at London's Novotel, 9-11 May 1986, where the Amiga was officially launched, despite being previewed at the Which Computer? show in January.

[ART] Hind, Mark. "Top Tips: Printer/Plotter." Your Computer March 1985. p.119.
Listing. Allows the Commodore 1520 printer/plotter to be addressed as device number 4.

[ART] Pinless, David. "The [Complete Beginners'] Guide to Assembly Language." Commodore User Part 4: "The 6502 Instruction Set in Full", Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. pp.32-33; Part 5: "The Instructions", Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.80, 83-84.

[ART] Potter, Simon. "Instant Attachment: How we got into Interpod." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.85-86.
Review of Oxford Computer Systems' Interpod IEEE/RS232 adaptor for the VIC and C64.

[ART] Todd, Mike. "Todd's Lore: These Delightful Characters." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.73-75.
Character sets with POKE and CHR$ codes for graphics and text modes.

[ART] Turpin, Jonathan. "Mixing Machine Code and BASIC." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. pp.27-28.

Commodore PET; CBM; CBM-II B Series

PET stands for Personal Electronic Transactor. CBM stands for Commodore Business Machine. 2000 series, 3000 series, 4000 series etc. The original PET was the 2001 with multicoloured 'chiclet' keyboard with calculator-like keys in non-staggered rows, built-in cassette recorder and display. Later 2001s had a full-size keyboard and no internal cassette recorder. 'Old ROMs' contain BASIC 1 (asterisks on boot screen); 'New ROMs' contain BASIC 2 (hashes on boot screen); the third generation of ROMs contained BASIC 4. On early PETs the command POKE 59458,62 will give you a faster PET at the expense of some screen stability. On later machines this won't work, merely distorting the screen, and it may damage the computer. There are a number of commands on the PET known as being the 'poke of death', POKE commands reputedly capable of killing a PET. This may have something to do with the popularity of the machines in schools, and the fertile imaginations of their younger users.

Original Model 2001 (4K, 1977); 2001-8 (8K RAM); 2001-16 (16K RAM); 2001-32 (32K RAM); 2000 series had 1MHz 6502, 14K ROM, 1K VRAM, built-in 9" mono screen (40 x 25 text), built-in cassette recorder (dropped from later models), IEEE-488 port, parallel port, user port, cassette port inside the case, running Commodore BASIC written by Microsoft. The 2001/B does not have graphics characters displayed on the front of the keys. The 2001/N does.

In later series, the internal cassette recorder was dropped, and PET became CBM. The machines still used a 1MHz 6502 CPU, but the ROMs were improved to give faster machines. 3000 series (Rebadged 2001 machines; 1979): 3008 (8K RAM); 3016 (16K RAM); 3032 (32K RAM); 4000 series (1980, BASIC 4, internal 9" green screen, 40 columns): 4016 (16K RAM); 4032 (32K RAM); FAT-40 machines are later 4000 series machines with 12" monitors; 8000 series (1981, internal 12" green screen, 80 columns): 8032 (32K RAM); 8064 (64K RAM); 8096 (96K RAM); 8296 (96K RAM); 8296D (built-in 8250 FDD added); 8296GD (hi-res graphics added).

The SuperPET SP9000 (Micro-Mainframe; MMF9000) was developed in conjunction with the Department of Computer Science of the University of Waterloo, Ontario, Canada, in 1981. It had both a 6502 and a 6809 CPUs (sharing memory), 48K ROM (kernel and Commodore BASIC), 96K RAM, built-in green screen (80 columns). An 8032 could be upgraded to a SuperPET.

The CBM-II P-Series ('P'-Personal) was scrapped, but the CBM-II B Series ('B'-Business) made it to market with a 1MHz 6509 CPU, 128K-1Mb RAM, up to two built-in 5.25" FDDs, and a built-in 12" 80-column colour monitor. Rights to these machines were ultimately handed over to the Chicago B128 Users Group, gratis, by Commodore.

Downey, James M., and Steven M. Rogers. PET Interfacing. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1981.
262pp. Blacksburg Continuing Education series.

Marshall, Garry J. Learning to Use the PET Computer. Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, [1982].
x, 87pp. A Read-Out Publication. Contents: 1. Introduction to the PET; 2. Using the PET; 3. Introduction to Programming; 4. Graphics; 5. Special Features of the PET.

Middleton, David, ed. The Best of Commodore PET Newsletter: A Compilation of the Articles from the First Two Volumes of the Commodore PET User Club Newsletter. Slough: Commodore Business Machines UK Ltd., 1980.

Osborne, Adam, Jim Strasma, and Ellen Strasma. PET Personal Computer Guide. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1982.
x, 530pp.

Osborne, Adam, Carroll S. Donahue, and Janice K. Enger. PET/CBM Personal Computer Guide. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1980.
xiii, 429pp. 2nd edition (Janice K. Enger no longer listed as a co-author): Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1980 (x, 500pp; Covers BASIC 4.0; DOS 2.1; DOS 2.5). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Introducing the CBM Computers; 2. Operating the CBM Computer; 3. Screen Editing; 4. Programming the CBM Computer; 5. Making the Most of the CBM Features; 6. Peripheral Devices: Tape Cassette Drives, Diskette Drives and the Printer; 7. System Information; 8. CBM BASIC; [Appendices:] A. CBM Character Codes; B. CBM Error Messages; C. BASIC Bibliography; D. CBM Newsletters and References; E. Conversion Tables; F. Revision Level 2 ROMs.

West, Raeto Collin. Programming the PET/CBM. London: Level, 1982.
iv, 503pp.

[ART] Barker, Philip G. "Data Transfer Between Micros." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1982. pp.21-25, 46-49.
Described using PETs and SC/MPs as examples.

[ART] Barker, Philip. "File Transfer on PET Terminal." Practical Computing February 1982. pp.156-161.
With listings. Part of a series on networking.

[ART] Bird, O. S. "Versatile A to D." Computing Today June 1981. pp.24-26.
Constructional article. 8-bit ADC based on the Ferranti ZN427 suitable for any VIA based micro. Designed by Ferranti Electronics. Originally intended as a PET joystick interface.

[ART] Calver, Peter. "CBM 8032." Personal Computer World September 1980. pp.84-85, 53 (text printed on the wrong page).
Review.

[ART] Coll, John. "PET 2001 Review." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 2. 1978. pp.44-45.
Review.

[ART] Elliott, R. I. "Plan for a Plotter." Personal Computer World November 1978. pp.49-51.
Interfacing a PET 2001 to a plotter via the User Port. With a schematic.

[ART] Evans, Gary, Graham Wideman, and Mark Czerwinski. "The CBM PET-Is It House Trained?" Electronics Today International April 1978. pp.13-17.
Review.

[ART] Marshall, G. J. "Execution Speed is Crucial for Realistic Mobile Displays." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.96-100.
Moving displays on memory-mapped screens. The listings are for the PET but the technqiues are generic.

[ART] Spencer, Kit. "Commodore's Approach to Computing." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 2. 1978. pp.32-34.
Commodore's design philosophy and development of the PET described by CBM UK's General Manager.

[ART] Tingey, Rex L. "How to Format Invoices and Letters Printed from Screen." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.86-91.
Listings for printing on the Commodore printer.

[ART] Trott, Andrew, and David Trott. "Speed and Clear Commands Combined in SCDS PetDOS." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.60-62.
Review of SCDS PetDOS.

Commodore VIC 20

6502 CPU, 5K RAM (3.6K available) expandable to 32K, built-in keyboard, cassette interface, serial port, external PSU and TV modulator. 6561 Visual Interface Chip controls the display (and the sound). Three display modes: text (23 lines x 22 characters), multi-colour (88 x 160), and hi-res (176 x 160).

[Manual]
VIC-20 Colour Computer. An Introduction to BASIC: Part 1. The Comprehensive Teach Yourself Programming Series for the VIC 20.
Slough, Berkshire: Commodore Home Computing Division, 1981.
By Andrew Colin. Spiral bound. Supplied boxed, with the software on two cassettes, and a flow-chart stencil. Contents: Introduction; Unit 1. Getting Started; Unit 2. The Keyboard; Unit 3. Pictures in Colour; Unit 4. Direct Commands; Unit 5. Stored Commands; Unit 6. Practical Aids; Unit 7. Controlled Loops; Unit 8. Tracing; Unit 9. Programmed Colour; Unit 10. Input of Data; Unit 11. Flow-Charts; Unit 12. Advanced Loop Control; Unit 13. Sounds; Unit 14. Data Reduction Programs; Unit 15. Computer Games; Afterword; Appendix A. Mathematical Aspects of VIC; Appendix B. Answers to Selected Problems; Appendix C. Common Errors.

Bergin, Kevin. VIC Games. London: Duckworth, 1984.
179pp. Duckworth Home Computing series.

Bishop, Owen Neville. Easy Add-On Projects for Commodore 64, VIC 20, BBC Micro and Acorn Electron. London: Babani, 1985.

Boek, Mathew. Dynamic Games for Your VIC 20. London: Interface, 1984.
viii, 120pp. Foreword by Tim Hartnell.

Campbell, Philip. Beyond Simple BASIC: Delving Deeper into Your VIC 20. London: Interface, 1984.
viii, 156pp.

Carter, Lionel R., and Eva Huzan. Learn Computer Programming with the Commodore VIC-20. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1982.
xii, 160pp. Teach Yourself Programming series.

Clark, William. Make and Program your own Robots. For the Commodore 64 and VIC 20. London: Hutchinson, 1985.
48pp. Devised and edited by Lionel Bender. Designed by Ben White.

Copeland, Paul. Using your VIC 20 as a Music Synthesizer. London: Interface, 1984.
vi, 217pp.

Downey, James M., Don Rindsberg, and William Isherwood. Easy Interfacing Projects for the VIC 20. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, [1984].
x, 164pp.

Gerrard, Peter, and Kevin Bergin. The Complete VIC ROM Disassembly. London: Duckworth, 1984.
157pp. Duckworth Home Computing series.

Hartnell, Tim. Getting Acquainted with Your VIC 20. [-]: [-], 1981.
2nd edition (with corrections and amendments): London: Interface, 1982 (131pp).

Hartnell, Tim. Symphony for a Melancholy Computer: VIC 20. London: Interface, 1982.
64pp. 2nd edition: London: Interface, 1982 (107pp).

Hartnell, Tim, and Mark Ramshaw. Getting Started on Your VIC 20. London: Futura, 1983.
ix, 193pp.

Hartnell, Tim, Roger Bush, and Robert Young. Giant Book of Games for Your VIC 20. London: Fontana, 1984.
284pp.

Heilborn, John, and Ran Talbott. VIC 20 User Guide. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [1983].
xi, 388pp.

Herriott, John. Mastering the VIC-20. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1983.
viii, 216pp.

Holmes, Peter. Beginners Assembly Language Programming for the VIC 20. [n.p.]: [n.p.], [198-].
Dr. Watson Computer Learning series. 4th edition: Barnet: Glentop, 1984 (multi-paged: vi, 194pp).

Isaaman, Dan. Computer Games to Play and Write for Use with ZX-Spectrum, BBC, Electron, VIC and Dragon Computers. [London]: Sparrow, 1983.
126pp.

Jones, Antonia Jane, Elizabeth Ann Coley, and David George John Cole. Mastering the VIC-20. Chichester, West Sussex: Ellis Horwood; New York: John Wiley, 1983.
177pp. Contents: 1. VIC BASIC; 2. Longer Programs; 3. VIC Structure; 4. Graphics; 5. Peripheral Devices; 6. Accessories; 7. System Architecture; 8. Introduction to Machine Code Programming; Appendix 1. Starship; Appendix 2. Hi-Resolution Routines; Appendix 3. Tables. Preface dated September 1982. A cassette and disk of the programs in the book was available from the publishers.

Lau, Tom. Putting Your VIC 20 to Work. [-]: [-], [1983].
Another edition: London: Interface, 1984 (vi, 169pp). Success in the Fast Lane series.

Librach, Hank. Getting the most from your VIC-20. New York: Micro Text Publications; London: Prentice-Hall International, [1983].
136pp.

Noble, Tony. The Last VIC-20 Book in the World? 23 Educational Listings. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Technical Press, [1983].
viii, 120pp.

Noble, Tony. The VIC-20 for Children. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Technical Press, 1983.
152pp.

Noble, Tony. The VIC-20 for Kids of All Ages. New York: Wiley, 1983.
153pp.

Ramshaw, Mark. Zap! Pow! Boom! Arcade Games for the VIC 20 Plus a Host of Other Great Games for Your VIC 20. London: Interface, 1982.
52pp.

Ramshaw, Mark, and Tim Hartnell. Zap! Pow! Boom! Arcade Games for the VIC 20. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1982.
iv, 156pp.

Sherer, Robin, and Craig Patchett. The Master Memory Map for the VIC 20. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing, 1984.
xix, 233pp. Edited by Steve Calwas and Sylvia I. Smith. Illustrated by Frank Hill.

Skier, Ken. Top-Down Assembly Language Programming for your VIC 20 and Commodore 64. New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 1984.
iv, 412pp.

Smith, Bruce. VIC 20 Machine Code. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [1984].
168pp. Shiva's Friendly Micro series.

Stanhope, Peter. The Incredibly Easy Way to Program Your VIC 20. From Print to Hi-Res Graphics. London: Interface, 1984.
vi, 181pp.

Ramshaw, Clifford. VIC Innovative Computing. Leighton Buzzard, Bedfordshire: Melbourne House, 1982.
151pp.

Vander Reyden, John, ed. VIC 20 Exposed. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.
166pp.

Vernon, Peter. Mastering the VIC 20. [Sydney]; Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall of Australia, 1983.
viii, 216pp.

West, Raeto Collin. Programming the VIC. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, [1984].
v, 602pp.

Wilkinson, Mark. Advanced Programming on the VIC 20. London: Interface, 1984.
95pp.

[ART] Ball, R. D. "MIDI Interfacing Techniques." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine March 1987. pp.2-8.
Constructional article. MIDI interface for the VIC 20 and C-64.

[ART] Barlow, Chris. "Light Pen." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 3, No. 12. September-November 1984. pp.38-40.
Constructional article. For the Atari, VIC 20 and Commodore 64. A kit was sold by Maplin Electronic Supplies.

[ART] Barlow, Chris. "The VIC 20 Colour Computer." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 1, No. 3. June-August 1982. pp.13-15.
Review.

[ART] Barton, Richard. "A Twin-Trace Scan for VIC 20." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1983. pp.84-85.
Constructional article. Circuit diagram and listing. Written for a VIC with a 3K Super Expander Cartridge to display 2 traces according to inputs on the analogue pins of the control port.

[ART] Bolton, David. "Using Cassette Files: Advanced Techniques." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. pp.35-36.

[ART] Brighton, Mark. "VIC 20 Extendiboard." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 9. December 1983-February 1984. pp.13-15.
Constructional article. 3 slots and an optional 3K RAM on board.

[ART] Brighton, Mark. "VIC 20 RS232 Interface." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 2, No. 7. June-August 1983. pp.2-5.
Constructional article.

[ART] Brighton, Mark. "VIC 20 Talk-Back." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 2, No. 6. March-May 1983. pp.2-3, 7.
Constructional article.

[ART] Durham, Chris. "Epson and VIC." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.31-32.
Listing. Downloading the VIC character set to an Epson FX-80 printer.

[ART] Gardiner, David. "Multitone." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. p.51.
Listing. Turns an unexpanded VIC into a 2-octave organ.

[ART] Grant, Ashley. "VIC-20 Computer Review." Radio and Electronics World April 1982. pp.42-43.
Review.

[ART] Grant, Ashley. "VIC-20 Expansion System Review." Radio and Electronics World April 1982. p.44.
Review of the Arfon Microelectronics expansion system.

[ART] Hunt, Richard. "FORTH and the VIC." Commodore User Part 1: "An Introduction", Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.35-36.

[ART] Mew, P. J. "Compactor." Your Computer April 1985. pp.108-109.
Listings. Data compression.

[ART] Newton, Arthur. "VIC 20 Review." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1982. pp.35-39, 41.
Review of the VIC 20 and the Arfon Expansion Unit.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "CBM64-VIC 20 Sequencer Interface." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine: Project Book 15. Rayleigh, Essex: Maplin Electronic Supplies, 1985. p.16.
Constructional article.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Souping Up the '64." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. pp.38-41.
Constructional article. Low-cost D/A converter. Can be used with the VIC 20.

[ART] Redmond, David. "Extended VIC BASIC." Your Computer March 1985. pp.98-100.
Listing. Adds 23 commands and 2 functions to VIC BASIC.

[ART] Reynolds, Jonathon. "More Complex Sound on the VIC." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.21, 23-24.
Listing. Giving the VIC an equivalent to the BBC Micro's SOUND command.

[ART] West, Rae. "Split the Vic's Screen." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. p.30.
Listing.

[ART] Wharton, T. S. "Utilities." Your Computer March 1985. p.128.
Listing. Three utilities in machine code: Cassette Motor Switch, Random Character Colour, and Clear Screen (which clears parts of the screen).

[ART] Withey, Sam. "Expanding the VIC 20 Part 1: 8K RAM Board, 8K ROM Board, Motherboard." Practical Electronics October 1983. pp.64-69.
Constructional article.

[ART] Withey, Sam. "Expanding the VIC 20 Part 2: LEDs and Switches Simulator." Practical Electronics November 1983. pp.56-59.
Constructional article.

[ART] Withey, Sam. "Expanding the VIC 20 Part 4: 8 Channel Mains Triac Driver Board." Practical Electronics January 1984. pp.36-40.
Constructional article.

[ART] Withey, Sam. "Expanding the VIC 20 Part 6: ADC/DAC Board." Practical Electronics April 1984. pp.46-53.
Constructional article.

[ART] Withey, Sam. "Expanding the VIC 20 Part 7: 2532 EPROM Programmer." Practical Electronics May 1984. pp.36-41.
Constructional article.

[ART] Wood, Michael. "All-Purpose Merge." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. p.25.
Listing. Machine code. For the VIC and C64.

Commodore 64 and 128

C128: 2MHz, 128K RAM (expandable to 256K or 640K), Commodore BASIC 7.0, 40/80 column text, CP/M 3.0, built-in keyboard. C64 mode, C128 mode, and CP/M mode. Built-in machine code monitor and BASIC 7.0.

[Manual]
Commodore 64 MicroComputer User Manual.
Corby, Northamptonshire: Commodore Business Machines, (UK) Ltd., 1984.
viii, 188pp. Contents: 1. Setting Up; 2. Getting Started; 3. Beginning BASIC; 4. Writing Simple Programs in BASIC; 5. Advanced BASIC; 6. Color and Graphics; 7. Introduction to Sprites; 8. Making Sound and Music; 9. Advanced Data Handling; [Appendices:] A. Expanding Your Commodore 64 Computer System; B. Description of DOS Error Messages; C. Commodore 64 BASIC; D. Abbreviations for BASIC Keywords; E. Screen Display Codes; F. ASCII & CHR$ Codes; G. Screen and Color Memory Maps; H. Deriving Mathematical Functions; I. Pinouts for INPUT/OUTPUT Devices; J. Programs to Try; K. Converting Standard BASIC Programs to Commodore 64 BASIC; L. Error Messages; M. Music Note Values; N. Bibliography; O. Sprite Register Map; P. 6566/6567 (VIC 11) Chip Register Map; Q. Commodore 64 Sound Control Settings; R. 6581 Sound Interface Device (SID) Chip Specifications; S. Disk and Printer Commands and Statements.

[Manual]
Commodore 64 Programmer's Reference Guide.
Indianapolis, Indiana: Commodore Business Machines and H. W. Sams, 1983.

[Manual]
Commodore 128 Personal Computer System Guide.
Holmes, Pennsylvania: Commodore Publications, [198-].
4th printing: November 1985 (406pp; spiral bound; coded on rear: 310638-01). Text by Larry Greenley, Norm McVey, Steve Finkel, Max Spolowich, Adam Tait, and Joyce Wetmore. Contents (4th printing): 1. Introduction; 2. Using C128 Mode; 3. Using C64 Mode; 4. Using CP/M Mode; 5. BASIC 7.0 Encyclopedia; [Appendices:] A. BASIC Language Error Messages; B. DOS Error Messages; C. Connectors/Ports for Peripheral Equipment; D. Screen Display Codes; E. ASCII and CHR$ Codes; F. Screen and Color Memory Maps; G. Derived Trignometric Functions; H. Memory Map; I. Control and Escape Codes; J. Machine Language Monitor; K. BASIC 7.0 Abbreviations; L. Disk Command Summary.

Allan, Boris. Building with LOGO on the Commodore 64. Creative Use of the LOGO Language. London: Sunshine, 1984.
xii, 156pp. Contents: I: Introduction to LOGO; 1. Starting Out with LOGO; 2. Proceeding with LOGO; 3. Getting Used to LOGO; 4. Turtles Alive with LOGO; 5. Joyful Spritely LOGO; 6. Simultaneous Sprites in LOGO; II: Specific Applications: 7. Keyboard Control; 8. Names and Content; 9. Aspects of Graphical Design; 10. Simple Statistical Programming; 11. Tiny Routines; 12. Differential Drawing; 13. Spritely Icons.

Allan, Boris. Commodore 64 Pocket Guide. London: Pitman, 1984.
ii, 61pp.

Allan, Boris. Graphic Art on the Commodore 64. Techniques for High Resolution Graphics. London: Sunshine, 1983.
v, 120pp. Reprinted: 1984.

Annalaro, John, and Bert Kersey. The Big Tip Book for the Commodore. Toronto; New York: Bantam Books, 1987.
ix, 175pp. The Library of Congress categorises this title for the C64 and C128.

Arnot, Tim. Commodore 64 Whole Memory Guide. Richmond: Melbourne House, 1985.

Barnett, Gregg, ed. Commodore 64 Games Book 2. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1984.
205pp.

Bateson, Spencer. The Complete Guide for the Commodore 64. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix Publishing Associates, 1984.
332pp.

Bayley, Bruce. Commodore 64 Exposed. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.
198pp.

Bergin, Kevin. Commodore 64 Games. London: Duckworth, 1984.
190pp.

Bergin, Kevin. Impossible Routines for the Commodore 64. London: Duckworth, 1984.
212pp.

Bishop, Owen Neville. Easy Add-On Projects for Commodore 64, VIC 20, BBC Micro and Acorn Electron. London: Babani, 1985.
192pp.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. The Commodore 64 Games Book: 21 Sensational Games. London: Granada, 1983.
132pp.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Commodore 64 Wargaming. London: Collins, 1985.
252pp.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. Software 64. Practical Programs for the Commodore 64. London: Granada, 1984.
137pp.

Boyde-Shaw, Brian. Commodore 64 Sound and Sprites. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1984.
xi, 135pp.

Brain, Keith Roger, and Steven Brain. Artificial Intelligence on the Commodore 64. Make Your Micro Think. London: Sunshine, 1984.
144pp.

Busch, David D. The Commodore 128 Subroutine Library. Toronto; New York: Bantam Books, 1986.
xv, 267pp.

Callender, Chris. Putting Your Commodore 64 to Work. London: Interface, 1983.
viii, 65pp. Reprinted: 1984. Spanish edition (64 Comodore: Aplicaciones Para la Casa y los Pequeños Negocios): Barcelona: Editorial Noray, 1984 (80pp). Finnish edition (Commodore 64 Ohjelmoinnin Opas: Hyötyohjelmat): [Espoo]: Amersoft, 1984 (76pp; translated by Petteri Bergius).

Campbell, Keith. The Computer and Video Games Book of Adventure. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.
138pp. Foreword by Scott Adams. With listings for the BBC Micro, Commodore 64, and ZX Spectrum.

Carter, Lionel R., and Eva Huzan. Teach Yourself Computer Programming with the Commodore 64. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1983.
xiv, 206pp.

Carter, Robert. Maths Tutor for the Commodore 64. London: Century Communications, 1984.
vi, 256pp.

Clark, William. Make and Program your own Robots. For the Commodore 64 and VIC 20. London: Hutchinson, 1985.
48pp. Devised and edited by Lionel Bender. Designed by Ben White.

Cochrane, John. Simulation Techniques on the Commodore 64. Practical Routines for Home and Business Use. London: Sunshine, 1984.
ix, 165pp.

Commodore Cracker. Ashford, Kent: Turner Magazines, [c.1994-c.1995].
Fanzine. Edited by Brian Turner. Issue 5, April 1995 (24pp).

Compute!'s Machine Language Games for the Commodore 64. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1986.
227pp.

Compute!'s Second Book of Commodore 128. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1986.
vi, 297pp.

Davis, Danny. Commodore 64 Machine Language for the Absolute Beginner. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1984.
194pp.

Ellershaw, Derek, and Peter Schofield. Very Basic BASIC. The First 15 Hours on Your Commodore 64. London: Century; Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1984.
[7], 120pp.

Falconer, Peter. Commodore 64 Sound and Graphics. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1984.
154, [3]pp.

Gasson, Gaelyne R. The Internet for Commodore C64/128 Users. Reynella, South Australia: VideoCam Services, [199-].
2nd edition: Reynella, South Australia: VideoCam Services, 1997 (297pp; with a 5.25" disk). 3rd edition; Reynella, South Australia: VideoCam Services, 1998.
3rd edition: Reynella, South Australia: VideoCam Services, 1998 ([12], 301, [3]pp; comb bound; supplied with a 5.25" disk containing Novaterm 9.6 Lite or (from July 2000) Novaterm 9.6; Preface dated July 1998). A guide to accessing the internet using VT100 or ANSI emulation. Contents: 1. Hardware Basics; 2. Terminal and Modem Basics; 3. Finding an Internet Provider; 4. Signing Up; 5. UNIX Shell Account Basics; 6. Welcome to the Internet; 7. Email; 8. Text Editor Commands; 9. Newsgroups; 10. Telnet and Other Utilities; 11. FTP and Archie; 12. World Wide Web; 13. Gopher; 14. IRC Internet Relay Chat; 15. Advanced Email; 16. Changing Your Environment; 17. Dealing with Files; 18. TCP/IP Connections; [Appendices:] 1. Glossary; 2. Internet and UNIX Commands; 3. Key Equivalents; 4. Source List; Commodore Resources, Commercial; Commodore Resources, On the Net.

George, Frank Honywill. Football Pools with the Commodore 64. London: Collins, 1985.

George, Frank Honywill. Horse Racing with the Commodore 64. London: Collins Professional & Technical, 1985.

Gerrard, Peter. Advanced BASIC and Machine Code for the 64. London: Duckworth, 1984.

Gerrard, Peter, and Kevin Bergin. The Complete Commodore 64 ROM Disassembly. London: Duckworth, 1984.

Gifford, Clive, and Robert Young. Creating Adventures on Your Commodore 64. London: Interface, [c.1984].

Grace, Mike. Commodore 64 Adventures. A Guide to Playing and Writing Adventures. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Greenshields, Mark. 40 Best Machine Code Routines for the 64. London: Duckworth, [c.1984].

Greenshields, Mark. Mastering Machine Code on Your Commodore 64. London: Interface, 1984.

Greenshields, Mark. Mastering the Commodore 64. London: Interface, 1984.

Hall, James. Business Applications for the Commodore 64. Techniques and Subroutines for Business Users. London: Sunshine, 1984.
vii, 200pp. Listings. Contents: 1. First Considerations in Programming; 2. Suboutines; 3. Business Accounts System; 4. Word Processing; 5. Equipment Inventory; 6. Society Mailing List; 7. Program Lister and Ancillary Program; [Appendices:] A. Compilers and Programming Aids; B. Subroutines Crib Sheet; C. ASCII Character Set.

Hartnell, Tim. Astounding Arcade Games for the Commodore 64. London: Interface, 1984.

Hartnell, Tim. Exploring Artificial Intelligence on Your Commodore 64. London: Interface, 1985.

Hartnell, Tim, Roger Bush, and Robert Young. Giant Book of Games for Your Commodore 64. London: Fontana, 1984.

Heilborn, John. Compute!'s Beginner's Guide to Commodore 64 Sound. Greensborough, N. C.: Compute!, [1984].
Spiral bound.

Heilborn, John. Your Commodore 128. A Guide to the Commodore 128 Computer. Berkeley, California: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [1986].

Iovine, John. Electronic Projects for your Commodore 64 and 128. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [c.1989].

Jenkins, Mark. Electronic Music on the Commodore 64. Sound, Software and Synthesizers. London: Sunshine, 1985.

Kosniowski, Czes. Mathematics on the Commodore 64. Essential Routines for Programming. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Laric, Michael V., and M. Ronald Stiff. Multiplan for the Commodore 64. Dubuque, Iowa: W. C. Brown, [c.1985].

Lawrence, David. Advanced Programming Techniques on the Commodore 64. Powerful Ideas and Applications. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Lawrence, David. The Working Commodore 64. A Library of Practical Subroutines and Programs. London: Sunshine, 1983.
137pp. US edition: Morris Plains, New Jersey: Creative Computing Press, 1984 (176pp).

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Beginning Machine Code on the Commodore 64. A Simple Introduction for Beginners. London: Sunshine, 1985.
vii, 181pp.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Commodore 64 Disk Companion. Essential Routines for Commodore Disk Users. London: Sunshine, 1984.
x, 150pp.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Commodore 64 Machine Code Master. A Library of Machine Code Routines. London: Sunshine, 1983.
191pp. Reprinted: 1984.

[Lawrence, David, and Mark England.] Machine Code Graphics and Sound for the Commodore 64. Easy to Load Routines and Ideas. London: Sunshine, 1984.
vii, 216pp. Contents: 1. Utility Routines; 2. Low Resolution Commands; 3. High Resolution Commands; 4. Sprite Commands; 5. Sound Commands; 6. The BASIC Extender; Appendix A. Hex Loader; Appendix B. Merge Program and Control Characters.

Leemon, Sheldon. Mapping the Commodore 64. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1984.
xii, 268pp.

Leemon, Sheldon. Mapping the Commodore 64 & 64C. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1987.
xii, 324pp.

Lindsay, Len. The COMAL Handbook: Now for the Commodore 64. Reston, Virginia: Reston, 1984.
xii, 467pp. Originally published in 1983 as the generic COMAL Handbook. The 1984 edition for the C64 is usually given as the 2nd edition.

Lindsay, Len. Commodore 64 Graphics with COMAL. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Company, 1985.
vii, 162pp.

Lyons, Leonard. The Commodore 64 Connection: A Guide to Going On-Line with the VICMODEM and AUTOMODEM, Smart Software, Electronic Bulletin Boards, an On-Line Shoppers Guide, CompuServe, the Commodore Information Network, the Source, and More. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1985.
xi, 237pp.

Marshall, Garry J. Learning to Use the Commodore 64. Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1983.
[98]pp.

Meck, H. R. Numerical Analysis with the TI-99/4A, Commodore 64, Apple II Plus/IIe, TRS-80 Model I/III. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, 1984.
x, 205pp.

Milewski, Richard A., and the Editors of InfoWorld. InfoWorld's Essential Guide to the Commodore 64. New York: Harper & Row, [c.1984].

Miller, Alan R. Mastering Disk Operations on the Commodore 128. Berkeley: Sybex, [c.1986].

Miller, David. Commodore 128 Data File Programming. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [c.1987].

Onosko, Tim. Commodore 64: Getting the Most from it. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.; London: Prentice-Hall International, 1983.

Pavelko, Paul, and Tim Kelly. Master Memory Map for the Commodore 64: A Guide to the Inner Working of the Commodore 64's Brain Cells. Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall International, [c.1983].

Phagan, R. Jesse, and William Spaulding. Learning Electronics: Theory and Experiments, with Computer-Aided Instruction for the Commodore 64/128. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: TAB Books, [c.1988].

Ramshaw, Clifford, and Mark Ramshaw. Commodore 64 Games Book. Cheddington: Melbourne House, 1983.

Rinder, Robert M. Cookbook of Creative Programs for the Commodore 64: Projects for Music, Animation, and Telecommunications. New York: New American Library, [c.1984].

Roberts, William A. Challenging Games for the Commodore 64. London: Interface, 1984.

Roper, Paul. Machine Code Games Routines for the Commodore 64. Essential Routines for Game Design. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Scriven, John, and Patrick Hall. Programming for Education on the Commodore 64. A Handbook for Primary Education. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Commodore 64 Computing. London: Granada, 1983.
viii, 133pp. Reprinted: 1983 (five times); 1984 (twice). Contents: 1. Preliminaries; 2. Beginning BASIC; 3. Processing; 4. Decisions and Loops; 5. Data Processing and Program Design; 6. Introducing Graphics; 7. Sprites and Colour; 8. Function Keys and the Sound Generator; 9. Sorting Out and Other Topics; 10. System Expansion and Advanced Features.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Commodore 64 Machine Code. London: Granada, 1984.

Skier, Ken. Top-Down Assembly Language Programming for your VIC 20 and Commodore 64. New York; London: McGraw-Hill, 1984.
iv, 412pp.

Smit, Rudolf. Commodore 64 Software Projects. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1984].

Smith, Bruce. Commodore 64 Assembler Workshop. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.
151pp.

Smith, Bruce. Commodore 64 Assembly Language. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.

Stephenson, A. P., and Derek John Stephenson. Filing Systems and Databases for the Commodore 64. London: Collins, 1985.

Stewart, Ian. Gateway to Computing with the Commodore 64. 2 vols; Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1984].

Stewart, Ian, and Robin Jones. Commodore 64 Machine Code. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1984].

Stewart, Ian, and Robin Jones. Easy Programming for the Commodore 64. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1983.

Symons, Ross. Your 64 MegaBASIC. Extended BASIC for the Commodore 64. London: Interface, 1985.
64pp.

Thomas, Barry. Supercharge Your Commodore 64. Ready-Made Machine Language Routines. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, [1984].

Vogel, James, and Nevin B. Scrimshaw. The Commodore 64 Music Book. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1983].

Waugh, Ian. Commodore 64 Music. Making Music with Your Micro. London: Sunshine, 1985.

West, Raeto Collin. Programming the Commodore 64: The Definitive Guide. Greensboro, N.C.: Compute! Publications, 1985.

White, John. Writing Strategy Games on Your Commodore 64. Techniques for Intelligent Games. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Woolford, Robert. Creating Arcade Games on the Commodore 64. London: Interface, 1985.

Young, Robert. How to Program the Commodore 64 if You've Never Programmed a Computer Before. London: Interface, 1983.
vi, 170pp. Another edition: London: Interface, 1984 (vi, 170pp); American edition (with Tim Hartnell listed as a co-author): New York: Ballantine Books, 1984 (114pp).

[ART] Aardt, Albert van. "Screen Dump." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. p.30.
Listing.

[ART] Allen, Mat. "Commodore 64." Retro Gamer No. 30. pp.18-27.
Retrospective.

[ART] Ash, Neville. "CodeWriter for the Commodore 64." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.62, 65, 67.
Review of Dynatech's program generator.

[ART] Baker, D. "Disc Monitor." Popular Computing Weekly Part 1: Vol. 5, No. 18. 1-7 May 1986. p.28; Part 2: Vol. 5, No. 19. 8-14 May 1986. pp.25-26.
Machine code listing. 2 parts. Floppy disc toolkit.

[ART] Ball, R. D. "MIDI Interfacing Techniques." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine March 1987. pp.2-8.
Constructional article. MIDI interface for the VIC 20 and C-64.

[ART] Barbour, Graham. "Musik 64." Your Computer September 1984. pp.80-82.
Sound on the 64.

[ART] Barlow, Chris. "Light Pen." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 1: Vol. 3, No. 12. September-November 1984. pp.38-40.
Constructional article. For the Atari, VIC 20 and Commodore 64. A kit was sold by Maplin Electronic Supplies.

[ART] Bennett, M. J. "Symbol Print." Your Computer April 1985. pp.137-138.
Listing. Makes CBM graphics characters easier to read in listings on an Epson RX-80. Reads from disc only.

[ART] Butterfield, Jim. "Commodore 64 Video: A Guided Tour." Commodore User Part 2: "Multi-Colour and Interrupts", Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. pp.39, 41; Part 3: "Sprites", Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.59, 61.

[ART] "Centronics with the '64." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. pp.60-61.
Constructional article. Centronics interface. The magazine had mislaid the name of the author.

[ART] Chatten, John. "Scrolling on CBM64." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 20. 15-21 May 1986. p.33.
Listing. Block scroll routine.

[ART] Davie, Peter. "Bongo Box." Electronics Today International December 1986. pp.43-46, 62.
Constructional article. A 4-channel drum synthesiser that can be used as a standalone unit or in conjunction with a C64.

[ART] Deghaye, Eric. "Extended BASIC." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 12. 20-26 March 1986. p.28.
Part of a series. Listing. A look-up table for new commands.

[ART] Durham, Chris. "Word Processing Road Test." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. pp.17-18, 20.
Review of Audiogenic's Wordcraft 40 (also called Wordcraft 64).

[ART] Durham, Chris. "Word Processing Road Test." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.46, 51, 53.
Review of Viza Software's Vizawrite 64.

[ART] Elliott, David. "Sprite Editor." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 5. February 1984. pp.68-70.
Listing.

[ART] Fisher, Andrew, and Mat Allen. "Plug and Play." Retro Gamer No. 12. pp.69-73.
C64 cartridges. Includes an interview with Paul Hughes.

[ART] Gerrard, Pete. "Spritely Features." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 2, No. 45. 10-16 November 1983. p.41.
Part of a series. Sprite graphics.

[ART] Goward, Philip J. "CBM Composer." Your Computer February 1985. pp.99-100.
Listing. Making music on the C64.

[ART] Harrison-Smith, Tony. "The 80-Column Problem." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 18. 1-7 May 1986. Supplement. pp.iv, vi.
Connecting monitors to the C128 to obtain an 80-column display (normally only available via the RGBI port).

[ART] Hatto, G. "Quickplot." Your Computer April 1985. pp.104-105.
Listing. Hi-res graphics from BASIC.

[ART] Hatts, Geoff. "Transdisc." Your Computer January 1986. pp.96-98.
Disk-to-disk transfer program: up to 58.4K (236 blocks).

[ART] Howard, D. J. "24 Hour Clock." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 3. 16-22 January 1986. p.18.
Listing. Machine code interrupt-driven clock routine.

[ART] James, Mike. "The Commodore 64." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1983. pp.81-83.
Review.

[ART] Light, D. W. "Flash Load on CBM 64." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 21. 22-28 May 1986. p.32.
Listing. Boot programs loaded from cassette, and produce flashing bands of colour during loading.

[ART] Mason, Robin A. "Character Designer." Your Computer January 1986. pp.113-114.
Listing. Assists in the design of new character sets.

[ART] Mason, Robin A. "SuperBASIC." Your Computer October 1985. pp.51-53.
Listing. Extends BASIC by copying the ROM to RAM, altering it, and switching to it.

[ART] McHale, John. "Artist." Your Computer February 1985. pp.131-132.
Listing. Drawing program.

[ART] McMahon, Ken. "Commodore 64 Split." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.72-74.
Using interrupts to split the C64's screen between two windows, one in text mode, one in multi-colour bit mapped mode.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "CBM 64 I/O Port." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.60-62.
Constructional article. Includes two 16-bit counter/timers. Attaches to the cartridge port. 6821-based.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "CBM64/VIC 20 Sequencer Interface." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine: Project Book 15. Rayleigh, Essex: Maplin Electronic Supplies, 1985. p.16.
Constructional article.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Souping Up the '64." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1984. pp.38-41.
Constructional article. Low-cost D/A converter. Can be used with the VIC 20.

[ART] Roberts, Mike. "Here's How to Make a New Resolution." Home Computing Weekly No. 28. 13-19 September 1983. p.25.
Listing. Using hi-res graphics from BASIC on a C64.

[ART] Scales, Ian. "Take-Away Micros." Personal Computer News [Cover:] No. 45. 21 January 1984. (p.1 has incorrectly, No. 44, 7-14 January 1984). pp.18-19, 21, 23.
Review of the Commodore SX64 (a luggable C64) and the Olivetti M10 portable. Includes notes on the Tandy Model 100 and NEC-8201A portables.

[ART] Sharma, Nalin. "CBM-64 Pikchachanja." Your Computer April 1985. pp.96-7.
Listing. Morphing routine.

[ART] Sharma, Nalin. "Smooth Scroll." Your Computer October 1985. pp.54-55.
Listing. Smooth scrolling.

[ART] Thomas, Gareth. "Sound Electronics." Popular Computing Weekly Part 1: Vol. 4, No. 14. 4-10 April 1985. pp.34-35.
Listing. Synthesiser utility program.

[ART] Wako, W. "Auto-Run." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 10. 6-12 March 1986. p.30.
Listing. Auto-running routine.

[ART] Wheelwright, Geof. "Commodore 128." Your Computer March 1986. pp.78-79.
Review.

[ART] Wood, Michael. "All-Purpose Merge." Commodore User Vol. 1, No. 4. January 1984. p.25.
Listing. Machine code. For the VIC and C64.

Commodore 16 and Plus/4

C16: 16K RAM, intended as a replacement for the VIC-20. Cartridge port, TV port, CBM monitor port, DIN-socket serial port, miniDIN cassette port, joystick ports, 40 x 25 text, hi-res graphics, colour, BASIC v.3.5 with the Tedmon monitor. Plus/4: 64K RAM, contains four applications built in to the firmware: a word processor, a spreadsheet, a database, and a graphics program. 7501 CPU, external PSU, serial port, cassette port, user port, cartridge port, 2 joystick ports, TV port, DIN-socket video port, 40 x 25 text, 320 x 200 hi-res, 16 colours, BASIC v.3.5 with the Tedmon monitor. No internal speaker: uses the TV's.

Finkel, Steve, et al. Commodore 16 User's Manual. Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, [c.1985].

Gerrard, Peter. Using the Commodore 16. London: Duckworth, 1986.

Gerrard, Peter, and Kevin Bergin. The Complete Commodore 16 ROM Disassembly. London: Duckworth, 1985.

Gregory, Jim. Commodore 16 Games Book. London: Collins, 1985.

Inglis, Jonathan. Commodore 16. London: Granada, 1985.
Beginners' Micro Guides series. Illustrations by Mike Atkinson and Janos Marffy. Photography by Mark Gatehouse.

Lawrence, David. The Working Commodore C16. Essential Routines and Applications. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Lloyd, Brian. The Commodore C16-Plus/4 Companion. A Beginners Guide. London: Sunshine, 1984.

McLean, Ian, and John Gordon. 100 Programs for the Commodore 16. Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1985].

Merten, Cyndie, and Sarah C. Meyer. Programmer's Reference Guide for the Commodore Plus/4. Glenview, Illinois: Scott, Foresman, [c.1986].

Meyer, Sarah C. The Commodore Plus/4 Book. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1984.

Penfold, R. A. An Introduction to Programming the Commodore 16 and Plus/4. BP158. London: Babani, 1985.

Stewart, Ian. Gateway to Computing with the Commodore 16. 2 vols; Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1984].

Stewart, Ian, and Robin Jones. Easy Programming: Commodore 16. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1984.
183pp. Contents: 1. Up and Running; 2. Which Key Does What?; 3. To Whet Your Appetite; 4. Direct Commands; 5. What is a Program?; 6. Over and Over Again; 7. Talk to the Outside World; 8. Think in Generalities; 9. Talk to the Computer; 10. Debugging I: Grammar It Ain't; 11. Ride off Madly in all Directions; 12. The Arcane Lore of Binary Numbers; 13. Meddling with the Memory; 14. Subroutines Can Save You Thinking; 15. Debugging II: Run and It Won't; 16. Things Using Strings; 17. Chop Them Into Bits; 18. ASCII Codes and Other Codes; 19. Screen and Colour Memory; 20. Get Everything Taped; 21. Debugging III: The Dry Run; 22. Chance and the Unpredictable; 23. Building Blocks for Pictures; 24. Push the Button; 25. I've Got a Little List; 26. Debugging IV: Traces and Profiles; 27. Lists and Searches; 28. High-Resolution Graphics; 29. Debugging V: Bugs Under the Rug; 30. Sound and Music; 31. Top-Down Program Design; 32. Move It!; 33. Debugging VI: Unavoidable Errors; 34. Exploit Files for Extra Memory.

Woolcock, Richard, and Cameron Duffy, eds. Commodore 16 Games Book. Richmond: Melbourne House, [c.1984].

[ART] Bennett, Bill. "Commodore 16." Your Computer October 1984. pp.54-55, 57.
Review.

[ART] Evans, Gary. "Plus4 Review." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1984. pp.75-77.
Review.

[ART] Moody, Glyn. "Plus 4." Your Computer October 1984. pp.52-54.
Review.

Commodore Amiga

Originally conceived by Jay Miner, creator of the Atari 800. The A1000 was released in 1985 (UK: 1986) with 8K ROM, 256K RAM (upgrades to 512K internally, and ultimately to 10Mb), internal 880K 3.5" FDD, and a 7.16MHz 68000 CPU. AmigaDOS was written by Metacomco. Early machines ran ABasiC. Later machines had Amiga BASIC by Microsoft. It was replaced by the A500 in April 1987. With 512K RAM and a 68000 CPU the A500 was still being manufactured in 1991. The A2000 was a 'big box' version of the A500 released in March 1987 but with 1Mb of RAM. There were a number of variants: the A2000A, A2000B (known in the UK as the B2000), A2000C, A2000HD, and A2500. The A3000 (1990) had a 68030 CPU and 1Mb RAM with four Zorro III slots, a video slot, and a CPU slot. Variants include the A3000T (tower configuration) and A3000UX running AMIX, a version of UNIX. The custom chips were called Super Denise (video), Fat Agnus (MMU), and Paula (audio and I/O). The A1500 was a UK-specific variant of the A2000 released in 1990 with 2 FDDs and 1Mb RAM. The A500 was replaced by the A500 Plus (68000, 1Mb RAM) in late 1991 when supplies of the original A500 dried up. The A600 replaced the A500 in 1992. It had a smaller case and a PCMCIA slot instead of the side expansion port, a 7.16MHz 68000 CPU, 512K ROM, 1Mb RAM (expandable to 2Mb, or 6Mb via the PCMCIA slot), internal 880K 3.5" FDD, and an optional hard drive (in the A600HD model). The custom chips were called Agnes (MMU), Daphne (video), and Portia (audio and I/O). The A4000-40 was launched in September 1992 with a 68040 CPU, 512K ROM, 6Mb RAM, FDD, HDD, four Zorro III slots, a CPU slot, and a video slot. The A4000-30 followed in March 1993 with a 68030 CPU. The A4000T was an A4000-40 variant in a tower case. The A1200 was launched in October 1992 with a 14.32MHz 68EC020 CPU, 512K ROM, 2Mb RAM and a PCMCIA slot. The A1200's internal FDD is a DD 880K 3.5" type. The case can accomodate an internal 2.5" HDD. The custom chips were named Alice (display controller), Lisa (graphics co-processor), Paula (audio and I/O), and Gayle (system address decoding and IDE). Escom purchased the brand and re-released the A1200. There are numerous third-party co-processor boards and tower cases designed for the A1200. The CD32 is a games console that could be turned into an A1200 compatible computer with the addition of a keyboard, disk drive, and SX1 module. [Sources: Various, including www.old-computers.com.] [Manual: Hardware]
A500 User's Manual. English.
[n.p.]: Commodore-Amiga Inc., 1987.
Multi-paged. Contents: 1. Introducing the Amiga 500; 2. Setting Up the Amiga 500; 3. Getting Started; 4. Using the Workbench; 5. Workbench Tools; 6. Using Preferences; 7. AmigaDOS and the CLI; 8. Adding to the Amiga; 9. Caring for the Amiga; Appendix A: Technical Reference; Appendix B: AmigaDOS Reference; Appendix C: Using the Amiga Keyboard; Appendix D: Printer Escape Codes; Appendix E: Amiga Bibliography; Appendix F: Amiga 500 Schematics. Coded: 319926-01 Rev. Nr. 1-2.

[Manual: Hardware]
User's Guide. A1200.
[n.p.]: Commodore Electronics, 1992.
Multi-paged. Produced by Ross Hippely, Wilson Harp, and Carina Ahren. Contents: 1. Quick Connect; 2. Getting Started; 3. Before Expanding Your System; 4. Using PCMCIA Cards; 5. Help With System Problems; Appendix A: Technical Specifications; Appendix B: Input/Output Connector Pin Assignments; Appendix C: Using Floppy Disks; Appendix D: Amiga Character Set. Coded: 371110-01.

[Manual: Hardware]
User's Guide. AGA Supplement. Multilingual Edition.
[n.p.]: Commodore Electronics, 1992.
89pp. In English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, and Portuguese. Produced by Ross Hippely. Coded: 371121-01.

[Manual: Hardware]
User's Guide. A1200 Floppy-Only System Addendum. Multilingual Edition.
[n.p.]: Commodore Electronics, 1993.
89pp. In English, German, French, Italian, and Spanish. Produced by Michele Surkin and Carina Ahren. Coded: 371130-01.

[Manual: Hardware]
Amiga Hardware Reference Manual.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1986].
xvi, 245, [64]pp. 2nd edition, revised and updated (covering the A500, A1000, and A2000, updated for OS v.1.3): [1989] (xvi, 383pp). 3rd edition (edited by Larry Greenley, Mark Green, and Dan Baker): Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1991] (xii, 465pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Introduction; 2. Coprocessor Hardware; 3. Playfield Hardware; 4. Sprite Hardware; 5. Audio Hardware; 6. Blitter Hardware; 7. System Control Hardware; 8. Interface Hardware; Appendix A. Register Summary - Alphabetical Order; Appendix B. Register Summary - Address Order; Appendix C. Custom Chip Pin Allocation List; Appendix D. System Memory Map; Appendix E. Interfaces; Appendix F. Complex Interface Adapters; Appendix G. AUTOCONFIG; Appendix H. Keyboard; Appendix I. External Disk Connector Interface Specification; Appendix J. Hardware Example Include File.

[Manual: OS]
Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual: Devices.
3rd edition; Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1991].
vi, 582pp. By Mark Ricci. 1st and 2nd editions published as 'Libraries and Devices', below.

[Manual: OS]
Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual: Exec.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1986.
xvi, 92, [173]pp. By Carl Sassenrath, Rob Peck, and Susan Deyl.

[Manual: OS]
Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual: Includes and Autodocs.
Revised and updated edition; Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [1989].
Multi-paged. Material written by Steve Beats; Manual compiled by Bryce Nesbitt. This manual corresponds to the v.1.3 system software release.

[Manual: OS]
Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual: Libraries.
3rd edition; Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, [c.1992].
vi, 967pp. Updated for Release 2 of the Amiga operating system and covers the newest Amiga computer systems including the A3000. 1st and 2nd editions published as 'Libraries and Devices', below.

[Manual: OS]
Amiga ROM Kernel Reference Manual: Libraries and Devices.
Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1986.
xvii, 497, [534]pp. By Robert A. Peck. 2nd edition (corresponding to the v.1.3 Commodore Amiga system software release) published [1990] (923, 10pp; Coded: 363099-01); 3rd edition published in two parts, Libraries [1992] and Devices [1991], listed separately (above).

[Manual: OS]
User's Guide. Workbench 3.0.
[n.p.]: Commodore Electronics, 1992.
Multi-paged. Produced by Kitsel Outlaw, Ross Hippely, Leslie Jones, and Barbara Siwirski. Contents: 1. Before You Start; 2. Basic Operations; 3. Fundamentals of the Workbench; 4. Workbench; 5. Preferences; 6. Localization; 7. CrossDOS; 8. Fonts; 9. Printers; 10. Other Workbench Programs; 11. ED Editor; Appendix A: Trouble Shooting; Appendix B: Screen Display Modes; Appendix C: Special Boot Options. Coded: 368914-01.

[Manual: Hardware]
Citizen. Easystart Software: Amiga.
Langley, Berkshire: Citizen Europe, 1993.
Multipaged. Manual for the EasyStart software for the Amiga distributed with the Citizen ABC-24 Colour 24-pin dot-matrix printer. Multilingual. Dated 11/93.

Abraham, Grote Gelfand. Amiga Disk Drives Inside and Out: The Most Thorough Coverage of Amiga Disk Drives Ever. Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus, 1988.
Vol. 9 in the series. A Data Becker Book. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk.

Amiga Format. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1989]-[199-].
Periodical. Monthly. Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period).

Amigactive. Bournemouth: Pinprint Publishing, [October 1999-].
Periodical. Monthly. Also known as Amiga Active. With a covermounted CD-ROM.

Berry, John Thomas. Inside the Amiga with C. Indianapolis, Indiana: Howard W. Sams, 1986.
x, 426pp. 2nd printing: 1987. 2nd edition (with the title The Waite Group's Inside the Amiga with C): Indianapolis, Indiana: Howard W. Sams, 1988 (x, 383pp). German edition (Amiga-Systemprogrammierung in C): Munich: Tewi, 1987 (vii, 454pp).

Commander, Jake. Amiga Assembly Language Programming. Blue Ridge, Philadelphia: Tab Books, 1987.
viii, 231pp.

Compute!'s First Book of Amiga. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, Inc., 1987.
v, 227pp.

Donald, Bill. The Amiga System: An Introduction. Worcester Park, Surrey: Precision Software, 1986.
210pp. Contents: 1. Hardware Overview: The Blitter and Co-Processor; 2. Playfields Hardware; 3. Sprite Hardware; 4. Audio Hardware; 5. Systems Control Hardware; 6. AmigaDOS Files and Devices; 7. ED and EDIT - The Editors; 8. Errors and User Commands; 9. Windows and Screens; 10. User Interaction; 11. Systems Software; 12. Graphics Support.

Hall, Patrick. Amiga Made Easy. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1992.
x, 238pp. Contents: 1. Introducing the Amiga; 2. The WIMP Environment; 3. Further Workbench Facilities; 4. Amiga Gamesmanship; 5. Creative Writing with the Amiga; 6. Designing a Spreadsheet; 7. Building a Database; 8. Programming Your Amiga; 9. Organising Program Structure; 10. Introducing Graphics and the Mouse; 11. Further Use of Chance; 12. Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning; 13. Aliens and Information; 14. Elementary Animation; 15. Aliens and Animation.

Hill, Stephen. Amiga Game Maker's Manual. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Press, 1992.
viii, 402pp.

Kerkloh, R., M. Tornsdorf, and B. Zoller. AmigaDOS Inside and Out: An In-Depth Guide to AmigaDOS and the AmigaDOS Shell. Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus, 1989.
Vol. 8 in the series. A Data Becker Book. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. The Amiga Handbook. London: Sunshine, 1986.
182pp.

Leemon, Sheldon. Inside Amiga Graphics. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1986.

Levitan, Arlan R., and Sheldon Leemon. Compute!'s AmigaDOS Reference Guide. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1986.
v, 231pp. 3rd edition: Radnor, Philadelphia: Compute! Books, 1989 (v, 280pp).

Regena, C. Elementary Amiga BASIC. Greensboro, North Carolina: Compute! Publications, 1986.
vii, 199pp.

Rugheimer, Hannes, and Christian Spanik. AmigaBASIC Inside and Out. A Complete Guide to Learning and Applying AmigaBASIC. Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus, [c.1986-1988].
v, 548pp. Vol. 2 in the series. A Data Becker Book. With an optional 3.5" floppy disk. Contents: 1. Making Things Move: Object Animation; 2. All Here in Black and White: Colors and Resolution; 3. Organizing Your Data: Diskettes and File Management; 4. A Picture's Worth a Thousand Bytes: Loading and Saving Graphics; 5. Getting it Organized: All About Data; 6. AmigaSpeak: Speech in BASIC; [Appendices:] A. Error and Help Messages; B. AmigaBASIC Reference Section; C. 'Error-Free' Listings; D. Programs from the BASICDemos Drawer; E. A Short Technical Dictionary.

[ART] "Amiga Supplement." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 9. 27 February-5 March 1986. pp.20-23.
Overview of the system and the graphics capability.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "Retroinspection: Amiga 1200." Retro Gamer No. 22. pp.46-53.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "Retroinspection: Amiga CD32." Retro Gamer No. 33. pp.18-23.

[ART] "The First Ten Years." Amiga Format No. 72. June 1995. pp.21-33.
Feature of four articles: "The People's Computer" by Nick Veitch; "From RAM Packs to Cyberstorm" by John Kennedy; "The History of Amiga Games" by Steve Bradley; "Look to the Future" by Nick Veitch.

[ART] Jenkins, Chris. "The Amiga 500." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 6, No. 20. 22-28 May 1987. pp.21-23.
Review.

Compaq PC Compatibles

Compaq Portable II: 286 luggable PC clone. Model 2 has 256K RAM (upgrade to 640K available) and two 5.25" FDDs, Model 4 has 640K RAM, a 5.25" FDD and a 20Mb HDD. The FDDs may be 360Kb DS DD 300rpm types, or 1.2Mb DS HD 360rpm types. 25-pin parallel port, 9-pin RS232C serial port, internal 9" CRT display, 2 built-in drives and an attached keyboard. 286 CPU operates at 6MHz in COM(mon) speed mode, 8MHz in HIG(h) speed mode (default), and toggles between 6MHz and 8MHz in FAS(t) speed mode. Supplied with a 'User Diagnostics' disk and a 'User Programs' disk. RAM can be extended using the 512/1536-Kbyte (0.5/1.0/1.5Mb extended RAM; attaches to the system board) and 512/2048-Kbyte (0.5/1.0/1.5/2.0Mb extended RAM; uses an expansion slot) boards. 512Kb memory kits expand the system memory and the extended RAM boards in half megabyte steps. MS-DOS 3 and BASIC 3 were sold as optional extras. An 8MHz 80287 co-processor could also be added. The Portable II is supplied with a 'Compaq Video Board', which can be replaced with the 'Compaq Enhanced Color Graphics Board'. This operates the internal VDU as normal, but will drive a 'Compaq Color Monitor', displaying 16 colours from a palette of 64. Weight: 11.6Kg (Model 2); 12Kg (Model 4).

[Manual: Hardware]
Compaq Computer Corporation. Compaq Portable II Operations Guide.
5th edition; [n.p.]: Compaq Computer Corporation, 1987.
1st: February 1986; 2nd: March 1986; 3rd: June 1986; 4th: November 1986; 5th: April 1987. Ring bound, multi-paged. Assembly: 104202-005; Text: 104204-005; Binder: 104203-005. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. An Overview for the 'First-Time' User; 3. Getting Started; 4. Program Diskettes; 5. Keyboard; 6. Moving Your Computer; 7. Options; 8. Installing Option Expansion Boards; 9. Installing Compaq Memory Options; Appendix A. Physical and Operating Specifications; Appendix B. Power-On Self-Test and User Diagnostics Error Codes; Appendix C. Glossary.

[Manual: Hardware]
Compaq Computer Corporation. [Compaq Portable II] Owner Registration Card
[n.p.]: [Compaq Computer Corporation], [1987].
Single orange sheet, folded, with the code 104205. Date from the copyright statement.

[Manual: Hardware]
Compaq Computer Corporation. [Compaq Portable II] Read This First
[n.p.]: [Compaq Computer Corporation], [198-].
Single sheet, printed only on the recto, with the code 104589-001.

[Manual: Hardware]
Compaq Computer Corporation. Compaq Disk Cache User's Guide.
2nd edition; [n.p.]: Compaq Computer Corporation, 1987.
2nd: May 1987. Pamphlet. Multi-paged. Contents: 1. Description of the Disk Cache Process; 2. Installing Disk Cache with the Installation Utility; 3. Installing Disk Cache without the Installation Utility; 4. Examples of Disk Cache Installation; 5. Using the Cache On/Off Utility; 6. Performance Considerations; 7. Error Messages.

[Manual: Hardware]
Compaq Computer Corporation. 180-Day Limited Warranty.
[n.p.]: [Compaq Computer Corporation], [198-].
Single sheet, printed only on the recto, with the code 100890.

[Manual: Software]
Compaq Computer Corporation. BASIC Version 3.2 Reference Guide.
3rd edition; [n.p.]: Compaq Computer Corporation, 1987.
3rd edition: February 1987. Ring bound, multi-paged. Binder has the title BASIC Version 3 Reference Guide. Assembly: 106653-001; Text: 106654-001; Binder: 106655-001. Contents: 1. Welcome to BASIC; 2. Getting Started and Using BASIC; 3. Reviewing and Practicing BASIC; 4. The BASIC Interpreter or What Makes BASIC Work; 5. Disk Files and How to Use Them; 6. Special Editing Keys Used in BASIC; 7. Constants, Variables, Expressions, and Operators; 8. Statements, Functions, Commands, and Variables Used in BASIC; Appendix A. Error Codes and Messages; Appendix B. Derived Mathematical Functions; Appendix C. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix D. Assembly Language (Machine Code) Subroutines; Appendix E. Converting Other BASIC Programs to BASIC as Developed by COMPAQ; Appendix F. RS-232 Communications; Appendix G. Hexadecimal Equivalents; Appendix H. Key Scan Codes (Standard Compaq Keyboard); Appendix I. Display Information.

[Manual: Software]
Compaq Computer Corporation. MS-DOS Version 3.2 Reference Guide.
[n.p.]: Compaq Computer Corporation, 1987.
1st edition: February 1987. Ring bound, multi-paged. Binder has the title MS-DOS Version 3 Reference Guide. Assembly: 106650-001; Text: 106651-001; Binder: 106652-001. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Files and File Structure; 3. Command Structure; 4. Commands; 5. Configuration Commands; 6. DISKINIT; 7. FDISK; 8. TAPE; 9. CMPQADAP; 10. EDLIN; 11. LINK; 12. DEBUG; Appendix A. Error Messages; Appendix B. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix C. File Attributes.

Compukit UK101

UK clone of the Ohio Scientific Superboard. 6502-based SBC. 2K Monitor ROM, 8K Microsoft BASIC ROM, 4K-20K RAM, 1K VRAM, TV port (46 x 16) [the line width can be set from 16 to 48, but at 48 the last two columns will usually by invisible and Compukit suggest using 46], cassette interface. Optional serial interface. Kit or assembled. In March 1979 Dr. Anthony Berk was asked by Compshop to design a kit similar to the Ohio Superboard which could be produced in the UK. He re-designed the hardware while Andy Fisher adapted the software. The first prototype was prepared in June 1979.

[Manual]
Compukit UK 101 Manual.
New Barnet: Compukit Ltd., [19--].
By Anthony A. Berk.

[ART] "6502 Special." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.119-120.
Listing. A fix for the FRE(X) garbage collection bug by Roger Cuthbert.

[ART] Arrowsmith, Joseph. "CEGMON PIA Logic Tester." Practical Electronics May 1984. pp.58-59.
Machine code listing in the 'Micro-Bus and Microprompt' column. A revision of a program given in the February 1981 issue.

[ART] Beckett, P. "Single Key BASIC." Computing Today June 1981. pp.21-22.
Listing.

[ART] Collins, Martin. "UK101 is Ideal for Hobbyist and Kit-Builder." Practical Computing May 1980. pp.58, 61, 63.
Review.

[ART] Tobin, N. J. "EPROM Programmer for UK101." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1982. pp.41-43, 52.
Constructional article. 6821-based 2716 programmer.

Control Universal Systems: CUBIT; EuroCUBE-65 (1983); EuroCUBE-09 (1983); EuroBEEB.

The CUBIT microcomputer was purchased board by board from Control Universal Ltd. of Cambridge to produce a 6502-based computer using the standard Acorn bus in a Eurorack. The CUBIT was a developed from the Rockwell AIM 65 to produce a system that could function as an SBC or be linked to Acorn Eurocards.

EuroCUBE-65 was a 6502-based Eurocard SBC compatible with the languages available for the BBC Micro, notably BBC BASIC. EuroCUBE-09 was a 6809-based version allowing FLEX to run on the CUBE Eurocard systems. EuroBEEB is an enhanced version of EuroCUBE-65 designed as a stripped-down, industrially presented version of the BBC Micro, lacking sound generation and speech synthesis. BEEBEX was an extension card permitting BBC Micros to interface to CUBE Eurocards.

Control Universal Ltd. Complete Catalogue Summer 1984. Cambridge: Control Universal Ltd., 1984.
Multi-paged.

COSMAC Elf

Single board microtrainer project that was first described by Joseph Weisbecker in the August 1976 issue of Popular Electronics. CDP1802-based with a CDP1861 'Pixie' video chip. Recreated as the COSMAC Elf 2000 by Spare Time Gizmos using a CDP1861 emulator daughtercard (STG1861).

[ART] James, K. R. "A Mighty Micromite: A COSMAC Microprocessor Based System." Personal Computer World July 1978. pp.22-25.
An introduction to the 1802 CPU.

Courier

Luggable. Launched in June 1982. Z80, 64K RAM, CP/M. Detachable keyboard. 9" green screen. 80 x 24. Two 3.5" 322K (formatted) FDDs with space for a third FDD. Optional 5M HDD. Under 20lbs.

Cray Computer Corporation; Cray Research; SRC Computers

CRAY-1; CRAY-1S; CRAY-2; CRAY-3; CRAY-4; CRAY C90; CRAY MP; CRAY T90 (1995); CRAY X-MP; CRAY Y-MP. Cray Computer Corporation closed in 1995. Silicon Graphics purchased Cray Research in 1996. 'SRC' stands for 'Seymour Roger Cray'. Seymour Cray died in 1996 from the injuries he sustained in a car crash.

Murray, Charles J. The Supermen: The Story of Seymour Cray and the Technical Wizards behind the Supercomputer. New York: John Wiley, 1997.
vii, 232pp. Contents: Prologue: At the Crossroads; 1. The Codebreakers; 2. The Incubator; 3. Seymour; 4. Engineers' Paradise; 5. The Hog Trough; 6. The CRAY-1; 7. The Cray Way; 8. The New Genius; 9. Shakeout.

[ART] Elzen, B., and D. Mackenzie. "The Charismatic Engineer. Seymour Cray and the Development of Supercomputing." Jaarboek voor de Geschiedenis van Bedrijf en Techniek. No. 8. 1991. pp.248-277.
Copy at the Science Museum Library, Imperial College.

Crofton 6800 Micro (Crofton Electronics Ltd., Twickenham, Middlesex)

Central Processor Board: 6800 CPU, 512 byte ROM, 256 byte RAM, ACIA; 2K+2K Memory Board: 2K ROM (Crofton 2K Tiny BASIC Interpreter ROM or a user's ROM), 2K RAM; 4K RAM Board; 16K RAM Board; PIO Boards. Supplied as a kit with an uncased keyboard. Options: Kansas City standard cassette interface board; PSU components for motherboard (+5V at 2A; -12V at 0.5A); Uncased 12" VDU.

Cromemco

C10 Personal Computer.

Cromemco SCC (Single Card Computer): 4MHz Z80A, up to 8K ROM, 1K SRAM, Z80 Monitor and 3K Control BASIC in 2 ROMs, serial i/f up to 76k8 baud, 3 parallel ports, S100 bus compatible.

Cromemco Z-2 Computer System: Z80, S100 Bus system.

DAI Personal Computer

8080A CPU. 48K RAM. 16 colours. 60 x 24 characters, 255 x 335 pixels, and a serial interface.

[ART] Eisenbach, Sue. "DAI Personal Computer." Personal Computer World October 1980. pp.72-73, 75-76.
Review.

DDE SPC/1

Dansk Data Elektronik sold in the UK through their subsidiary Digital Data Electronics. The SPC/1 used a 2MHz 8085A CPU (a 5MHz version was available) and came as a cased 13-slot motherboard, with 2 built-in SS SD 90K FDDs, an internal PSU and fan, 2 serial ports (printer and VDU terminal). It used a 100-pin bus (not S-100), a bootstrap loader in a 2708 PROM, an AR9511DC maths processor, an Intel FDU1791-A disk controller, and could handle up to three 5.25" or four 8" FDDs. It ran COMAL and MIKADOS.

[ART] Eisenbach, Sue. "The DDE SPC/1." Personal Computer World July 1980. pp.53-55, 113, 121.
Review.

Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC)

The PDP series are listed under Early Computers by Manufacturer, above.

DEC Rainbow 100: Could be upgraded to a 100+ with a 5Mb or 10Mb HDD and operating system kit.

DEC Rainbow 100+: 8088 and Z80 processors, 128K-896K RAM, Internal 10Mb HDD. Runs CP/M-80/86 and MS-DOS.

[ART] "DEC's Personal Trio." Which Micro? & Software Review July/August 1982. pp.48-49, 52.
Review of the DEC Rainbow 100, DEC Professional 325, and DEC Professional 350.

Dragon 32 and 64

Address: Dragon Data Ltd., Queensway, Swansea Industrial Estate, Swansea.

6809 CPU, 32K RAM, TV and colour monitor output, 2 joystick ports, Microsoft BASIC on ROM, cassette port, parallel printer port, cartridge slot.

The Dragon 32 runs its CPU at 0.89MHz. It can be overclocked to 1.7MHz from software using POKE 65495,0. Use POKE 65494,0 to return to normal. A proportion of later Dragon 32s cannot use this and it can damage components. POKE 65497,0 offers an even faster (and more dangerous) overclocking option that loses the screen display. Use only for arithmetical functions. To return to normal use POKE 65496,0. [Source: The Dragon Notebook edited by Ray Smith.]

The Dragon 64 first appeared at the PCW Show at the Barbican Centre, London, in 1983. Defaulting to 32K, the EXEC command releases the additional memory (around 40K is free). The new (grey) model also had an improved keyboard with auto-repeat keys and better keypress scanning, and a serial port.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Dragon Data.] Dragon 32 Additional Information.
Swansea: Dragon Data Ltd., 1982.
[4]pp. Brief notes including the memory map and printer port pin connections.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Dragon Data.] Dragon 32 Quick Reference Guide.
[Swansea]: Dragon Data Ltd., 1982.
Folded card. Contents: Mathematical and Logical Operators; Control Keys; BASIC Language Statements; Sound Generation Statements; Cassette Recorder Control Statements; Printer Control Statements; System Commands; Simple Variables; Array Variables; Special Characters; Error Codes; Graphics Statements; String Functions; Numeric Functions.

[Manual: OS]
[Dragon Data.] An Introduction to BASIC Programming Using the Dragon 32 Micro Computer.
[Swansea]: Dragon Data Ltd., 1982.
By Richard Wadman. ix, 162pp. Spiral bound. Contents: 1. Getting Started; 2. What's in a Name; 3. A Program at Last; 4. Good Housekeeping; 5. Going Places; 6. New Dimensions; 7. Getting the Point Across; 8. Moving to a Higher Plane; 9. Sounds Electric; 10. Further Hires Graphics; 11. The Finishing Touch; [Appendices:] A. ASCII Character Codes; B. Print and Graphic Screens; C. Error Codes; D. Trignometric Functions.

[Manual: Software]
[Dragon Data.] Dragon Special Selection 2.
Swansea: Dragon Data Ltd., 1982.
8pp. Software coded on front: A0501. Coded on rear: 54471. Warranty sticker on inside of rear wrapper. Contents: [1.] Introduction; [2.] Database; [3.] Dragon; [4.] Index; [5.] Music; [6.] Warranty Statement.

[Manual: Software]
[Computil.] The Tape Doctor for the Dragon 32.
Hinckley, Leicestershire: Computil, [198-].
[3], 20, [1]pp. Contents: [1.] General Description; [2.] Loading the Doctor; [3.] Screen Format; [4.] Single Key Commands; [5.] Getting Some Practice; [Appendices:] A. How Files are Stored; B. Description of 'Shopping'; C. Aligning the Cassette Recorder.

[Manual: Software]
[Nectarine Software.] Dragon Editext (Disk/Cassette Version).
Slough, Berkshire: W. Foulsham, 1983.
By A. Jones and S. Betts. 17pp.

[Manual: Software]
[Oasis Software.] Sprint BASIC Compiler for the Dragon 32.
Weston-super-Mare: Oasis Software, 1983.
By Dr. David Gray. Dated November 1983. Version 1.0. Contents: 1. Compilers and Interpreters; 2. Operating Instructions; 3. Details; 4. Problem Reporting; 5. Running the Demonstration Program; Appendix A. Compilation Error Codes; Appendix B. Execution Error Codes; Appendix C. OASIS BASIC Description; Appendix D. Differences from DRAGON BASIC; Appendix E. Choice of Cassette Recorder.

[Manual: Software]
[Oasis Software.] Sprint [BASIC Compiler for the Dragon 32. Version] 1.1 User Supplement.
Weston-super-Mare: Oasis Software, [After 1983].
14pp. Supplementary information for version 1.1.

[Manual: Software]
[Smithson Computing.] Welcome to Electronic Author.
Leeds: Smithson Computing, 1985.
23pp. By Wayne J. Smithson.

Bannister, David. Getting the Most from your Dragon 32. Harmondsworth, Middlesex: Penguin Books, 1983.
86pp. Contents: 1. Getting Started; 2. Writing Programs; 3. How the Computer Works Inside; 4. More About BASIC; 5. Practice Makes Perfect; 6. Graphics with the Dragon; 7. Sound on the Dragon; 8. Other Attachments; 9. Using Other Software; 10. Troubleshooting; Appendix A. BASIC Commands and Functions; Appendix B. Graphics Characters; Appendix C. Error Codes; Appendix D. Useful Magazines.

Bell, Bruce R. King. Arcade Games in BASIC for the Color Computer, Radio Shack TRS-80, TDP-100, Dragon. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., 1984.
viii, 132pp.

Brain, Keith Roger, and Steven Brain. Advanced Sound and Graphics for the Dragon Computer. Including Machine Code Subroutines. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Brain, Keith Roger, and Steven Brain. Artificial Intelligence on the Dragon Computer. Make Your Micro Think. London: Sunshine, 1984.

Brain, Keith Roger, and Steven Brain. Dragon 32 Games Master. Learn How to Write Your Own Top Level Games. London: Sunshine, 1983.
200pp. Introduction dated April 1983. Contents: Introduction; 1. Getting Started; 2. Making a Real Game; 3. More Precise Responses; 4. Making a Move; 5. Scrolling Along; 6. A-Maze Yourself; 7. More Adventurous; 8. Facing the Consequences; 9. Space-The Final Frontier; 10. Going into Business; 11. Finishing Touches.

Carter, Colin. Enter the Dragon. Leighton Buzzard, Bedfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.

Dragon User. The Independent Dragon Magazine. London: Sunshine, May 1983-March 1987.
Periodical. Monthly.

Erskine, Robert, Humphrey Walwyn, Paul Stanley, and Michael Bews. Sixty Programs for the Dragon 32. London: Pan, 1983.

Frost, Jean. Instant Arcade Games for the Dragon. London: Pan, 1983.

Gifford, Clive. Creating Adventure Games on Your Dragon 32. London: Interface, 1984.

Gifford, Clive. Making the Most of your Dragon 32. London: Interface, 1983.

Gifford, Clive, David Edwards, and Phillip Broughton. More Games for Your Dragon 32. London: Virgin, 1984.

Hartnell, Tim, and Robert Young. Getting Started on your Dragon 32. London: Futura, 1983.

Hartnell, Tim, et al. Giant Book of Games for Your Dragon. London: Fontana, 1984.

Isaaman, Dan. Computer Games to Play and Write for Use with ZX-Spectrum, BBC, Electron, VIC and Dragon Computers. [London]: Sparrow, 1983.
126pp.

James, Mike, S. M. Gee and Kay Ewbank. The Dragon 32 Book of Games. London: Granada, 1983.

Johnson, Justin, and Keith Davis. Using Floppy Disks with the Dragon Microcomputer. Guildford: Cumana, 1983.

Jones, Robin, and Eric Cowsill. Dragon Machine Code. Nantwich: Shiva, [1984].

Knight, George. Learning to Use the Dragon 32 Computer. Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1983.

Lafferty, Peter. Programming the Dragon 32. London: Newnes Technical, 1984.
252pp. Contents: 1. Introducing the Dragon; 2. Using Your Dragon; 3. Beginning BASIC; 4. BASIC Algebra; 5. Some Printing Tricks; 6. Putting Data In; 7. Going Places; 8. Making Decisions; 9. Looping the Loop; 10. Getting it Taped; 11. Some Functions; 12. Strings and String Functions; 13. Programs within Programs; 14. Lists and Arrays; 15. Developing and Debugging Programs; 16. The Sound of Music; 17. Simple Pictures, or Low-Resolution Graphics; 18. High-Resolution Graphics; 19. More Drawing and Painting; 20. More Animation; 21. Some Other Points; Appendix 1. Further Reading; Appendix 2. Useful Addresses; Appendix 3. Software Available for the Dragon 32; Appendix 4. Summary of Dragon BASIC.

Langdell, Tim. 35 Programs for the Dragon 32. London: Century, 1982.

Lawrence, David. The Working Dragon 32: A Library of Practical Subroutines and Programs. London: Sunshine, 1983.
158pp. Contents: Enter the Dragon; 1. Storing and Searching; 2. Managing Your Money; 3. Drawing on the Dragon; 4. Easy Education; 5. High Resolution Text; 6. Handy Programs; 7. Fun and Games; Postword.

Lloyd, Brian. The Dragon Trainer. A Handbook for Beginners. London: Sunshine, 1983.

Ludinski, Geneviève. Brainteasers for the Dragon 32. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix Publishing Associates, [c.1984-1985].

Murray, Ian, and Laurence Owen. Educational Programs for the Dragon 32. London: Century, 1983.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Programming the Dragon 32. London: Babani, 1983.

Phipps, John, and Trevor Toms. Load and Go with Your Dragon. Epsom: Phipps Associates, 1983.

Reyden, John Vander, ed. Dragon Machine Language for the Absolute Beginner. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.

Reyden, John Vander, ed. Dragon 32 Programmer's Reference Guide. Tring, Hertfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.
[8], 143, [10]pp. With contributions by Denver Jeans. Contents: 1. BASIC; 2. Graphics; 3. Sound; 4. Machine Code; 5. Peripherals; 6. Handy Routines and Tips.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. The Dragon 32 and How to Make the Most of It. London: Granada, [1983].

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing Dragon Machine Code. London: Granada, 1984.

Smeed, Duncan, and Ian Sommerville. Inside the Dragon. London: Addison-Wesley, 1983.
359pp. Preface dated August 1983. Cover design by David John Rowe. Includes data sheets of the MC6809E CPU, SN74LS783 SAM, MC6847 VDG, and MC6821 PIA. Contents: 1. Introducing the Dragon; 2. The Architecture of the M6809; 3. The M6809 Instruction Set; 4. Introducing Assembly Language; 5. From BASIC to Assembly Code; 6. Subroutines and Strings; 7. Graphics Programming; 8. Input/Output Programming; 9. Dragon Hints and Tips; [Appendices:] 1. MC6809E Data Sheet; 2. SN74LS783 Data Sheet; 3. MC6847 Data Sheet; 4. MC6821 Data Sheet; 5. The Dragon 64; 6. The ASCII Character Set; 7. Dragon-Specific Tables; 8. The Disk Operating System.

Software for the Dragon 32. London: Century Communications, 1983.
Best of Personal Computer World series.

Stewart, Ian, and Robin Jones. Easy Programming for the Dragon 32. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1983].

Stewart, Ian, and Robin Jones. Further Programming for the Dragon 32. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1983].

Valentine, Roger. Dragon Extravaganza: 50 Programs for the Dragon 32. Bognor Regis: V. & H. Computer Services, 1983.

Young, Robert, Roger Bush, Robert Shrimpton, and Alan Blackman. Dynamic Games for your Dragon 32. London: Interface, 1983.
Edited by Tim Hartnell.

[ART] Brain, Keith, and Steven Brain. "Sharps and Flats." Popular Computing Weekly Part 1: Vol. 2, No. 45. 10-16 November 1983. pp.21, 23.
2 parts. Listing of a graphic music editor extracted from the authors' Advanced Sound Graphics for the Dragon Computer.

[ART] Cadge, Brian. "Dragon's Shrinking Disks." Personal Computer News No. 48. 11 February 1984. pp.18-19.
Review of the Sony 368K (formatted, 80 tracks) 3.5" FDD (£52 for a box of ten blank disks), Premier Delta disk interface cartridge and Toolkit EPROM.

[ART] Francis, Lee. "Dragon + Flex: A Powerful Combination." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1984. pp.50-51.
Flex on the Dragon 64.

[ART] Gerrard, Mike. "Tiger's Tale." Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. p.79.
On the setting-up of Tiger Software by Mark Tyson and Lorraine Brewis. In the 'Dragon Tales' column.

[ART] Harmel, Bernard. "Dragon Files." Your Computer September 1984. pp.135-136, 138.
Listing. Database program in machine code.

[ART] James, Mike. "The Dragon." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1982. pp.42-43, 46.
Review.

[ART] James, Mike. "OS9: Multi-Tasking for the Common Man." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.45-48.
OS9 on the Dragon 64.

[ART] Jones, A. "Paint it Black." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 4, No. 10. 7-13 March 1985. pp.40-41.
Listing. Machine code screen dump routine for the Dragon 32 and the Tandy CGP-115 printer/plotter.

[ART] Jones, Huw. "Dragon EPROM Programmer." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 2: July 1984. pp.34-36.
Constructional article.

[ART] Jones, Huw. "Dragon Proto Board." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.22-23.
Schematic. To work with the EPROM programmer detailed in the previous issues.

[ART] Kimberley, N. "Hi-Res Dump." Your Computer April 1985. p.134.
Listing. Dumps the screen to a CGP-115 or MCP-40 printer.

[ART] "Large Scale Dragon." Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. p.31.
Review of the Dragon 64.

[ART] Luke, Peter. "Dragon Colour Killer." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. p.47.
Disabling the colour component of the composite output for a higher quality monochrome display. Useful if the Dragon is being used as a low-cost Flex or OS9 development system. The article advises the removing or disabling of the LM1889 video modulator IC.

[ART] Nanson, A. G. "Interfacing the Dragon 32 Microcomputer." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1983. pp.51, 54-55, 58-61.
Variety of practical and constructional details.

[ART] Oliver, A. D. "Catalogue." Your Computer March 1985. p.129.
Listing. Machine code routine to catalogue the programs stored on a cassette.

[ART] Walcot, Chris. "Dragon I/O Port." Electronics and Computing Monthly January 1985. pp.25-27.
Constructional article. 6821-based. Plugs into the ROM port. Additions published in the May issue (pp.46-47), below.

[ART] Walcot, Chris. "Relay Board & Optical Sensor." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. pp.46-47.
Constructional article. Additional features for the I/O port published in the January issue (pp.25-27), above.

[ART] Walton, Richard. "One Page at a Time." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 2, No. 50. 15-21 December 1983. pp.24-25.
Listing. Modified print routine for listing programs.

Dynabyte 'Building Controller' BASIC Controller

Single-board controller with BASIC. 2.5MHz Z80 CPU, 4K EPROM with programmer, 4K-16K RAM, 2 serial ports, 1 parallel input port and one parallel output port, 300 baud cassette interface, keyboard input port, 8 relays, 8 LEDs, 8-bit display port, composite video interface (64 x 16 characters).

EACA Genie (Video Genie System; Video Genie I and II; Colour Genie)

Produced by EACA International Ltd., 13 Chong Yip Street, 11th Floor, Eaca Industrial Building, Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong. Sold in the UK by Lowe Electronics, Bentley Bridge, Chesterfield Road, Matlock, Derbyshire. The original Video Genie was a clone of the Level II version of the Tandy TRS-80 assembled in Asia to reduce costs.

4K RAM (EG3004) or 16K RAM (EG3003). Z80 CPU. 12K Microsoft BASIC ROM. Video (2V peak to peak, negative sync) and TV output (32 or 64 characters per line, switchable using the external 'Video Cut' button). Built-in keyboard and cassette recorder, second cassette recorder interface, expansion bus interface. TRS-80 Level II BASIC compatible. Optional S-100 expansion box.

The Genie I was an enhanced version of the Video Genie System, having 1.5K ROM in addition to the original Microsoft 12K BASIC ROM. The additions comprise: keyboard and display functions, a renumber command, and a machine language monitor. The new ROM must be initialised.

The Colour Genie had 16K ROM with extended Microsoft Colour BASIC, 32K RAM, 320 x 200 screen display, 160 x 102 pixel addressable in 4 colours, 40 x 24 text, 16 colours (8 colours and 8 tints), 3-channel sound, sound output through TV or hi-fi, cartridge port, internal keyboard, joysticks.

[Manual]
Genie I: User's Manual.
[Kowloon, Hong Kong]: [EACA International], [c.1980].
4pp. Intended as a supplementary insert: 'Attach to Video Genie System user's manual'. Describes the addition of a 1.5K extension to the Microsoft 12K BASIC and how to initialise it. Printed note on sound output pasted on to p.2. Publishing data suggested from physical similarity to the BASIC Manual.

[Manual]
Video Genie System: BASIC Manual.
Kowloon, Hong Kong: EACA International, 1980.
82, [2]pp. Conents: 1. Active Commands; 2. Text Editing; 3. BASIC Programming Statements; 4. Processing Arrays; 5. String Handling; 6. Built-In Arithmetic Functions; 7. Graphics Features; 8. Special Features; Appendix A. Reserved Words; Appendix B. Error Codes; Appendix C. Control, Graphics, and ASCII Codes; Appendix D. Program Limits; Appendix E. Video Display Map.

[Manual]
Video Genie System: Programming for Beginners.
[Kowloon, Hong Kong]: [EACA International], [c.1980].
22pp. Publishing data suggested from physical similarity to the BASIC Manual. Contents: 1. Active Commands and Text Editing; 2. BASIC Programming; 3. More About Programming.

[Manual]
Video Genie System: User's Manual.
[Kowloon, Hong Kong]: [EACA International], [c.1980].
16pp. Printed note on sound output pasted on to p.2. Publishing data suggested from physical similarity to the BASIC Manual. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Power On Preparation; 3. Video Display Format; 4. Keyboard & Cassette; 5. Program Loading; 6. Program Saving; 7. Second Cassette Recorder; 8. System Reset; 9. Software; Appendix A. Technical Specifications; Appendix B. Memory Map & I/O Map; Appendix C. ASCII Table; Volume Adjustment for Improvement of Cassette Loading.

[Manual]
Deane, John, and Judy Deane. The Easy Way to Programming in BASIC Using the Video Genie System.
Matlock, Derbyshire: Lowe Electronics, 1980.
v, 85, [22]pp. Copyright 1980 by Dick Smith Electronics Pty. Ltd., New South Wales, Australia. Contents: 1. Can I Turn It On?; 2. Let's Say Hello; 3. Programming Already?; 4. It Really Works!; 5. Big Numbers; 6. Getting Complicated; 7. Decisions, Decisions!; 8. Question Time; 9. A Little Help; 10. Just A Calculator; 11. Program Saving; 12. Again & Again!; 13. Stop It!; 14. Laying It Out; 15. Inside Out; 16. Debug It!; 17. Editing; 18. Sub-Programs; 19. Fixed Data; 20. Compact Style; 21. The Game Generator; 22. Pictures; 23. Tables; 24. Did He Say 'Yes'; 25. Conditions; 26. Screen Control; 27. Changing Data; 28. Antibugging; 29. End; Glossary; Appendix A. Summary of BASIC; Appendix B. Errors; Appendix C. Answers to Exercises; Appendix D. Getting Started Before You Read Any Books!

[Manual]
Genie I Sound Driver Program; Genie I Sound Demonstration Program.
[n.p.]: [n.p.], [1981].
Single sheet, [2]pp. Coded: RS 14/11/81.

Chapman, Felix. Learning to Use the Colour Genie Computer. Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1983.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Mastering the Colour Genie. London: Granada, [c.1983].

[ART] "Genie II." Radio and Electronics World June 1982. p.44.
Review.

[ART] James, Mike. "The Colour Genie." Electronics and Computing Monthly September 1982. pp.16-18.
Review.

[ART] Kelly, David. "Colour Genie Upholds Evolutionary Theory." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 1, No. 26. 14 October 1982. pp.12-13, 22.
Review.

[ART] Lazzari, Jay. "Video Genie with 2K EPROM." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1982. p.23.
Constructional article.

[ART] Peckett, D. S. "Flexible Storage." Computing Today June 1981. pp.59-61.
Review of the Aculab Floppy Tape System for the TRS-80 Models I and III and the Video Genie.

[ART] Porter, David. "Q-Tek's Bionic ROM: Upgrading the Video Genie." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1982. p.79.
Review of Q-Tek Systems' Bionic ROM (resident above 3000H). Enable it with: SYSTEM/12288

Elan Enterprise 64 and 128

4MHz Z80A CPU, 32K ROM, 64K-128K RAM, 16K BASIC ROM cartridge. Two custom 68-pin chips, Nick (RAM manager and CRT controller) and Dave (sound and I/O). Structured IS-BASIC and built-in word processor. Jack sockets for audio, phono socket for TV output, 32-way DS cartridge connector (up to 64K), 14-way DS RGB and composite mono monitor output with stereo sound, 8-way DS serial, 14-way DS parallel, 2 12-way DS joystick ports, 66-way DS expansion connector, built-in 'Intelligent Net' networking capable of operating in the background. ROM-based DOS called EXOS (Enterprise Xpandable Operating System). Maximums of 80 x 25 text, 256 colours, and 672 x 512 hi-res. 22-bit address bus. Case designed by Geoff Hollington. Like the Memotech, a quality 8-bit machine introduced into a market destroying itself with excess price-competition.

[Manual]
Enterprise Programming Guide.
Version 2; [n.p.]: Enterprise Computers, 1984.
Spiral bound. 'Version 2': 229pp. Contents: Getting Acquainted; The Tutorial; Reference Section.

[Manual]
Enterprise Demonstration Manual.
[n.p.]: Enterprise Computers, 1984.
10pp. A guide to the demonstration cassette that accompanied each new machine.

[ART] Beverley, Paul. "An Enterprising Interface." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1985. pp.50-52.
Ports, use of a Microvitec colour monitor (by changing the links within the monitor), general details.

[ART] Paddon, Lee. "Enterprise Review." Your Computer February 1985. pp.46-48.
Review.

Elektor Junior Computer

Original a magazine article, a series of books were published. Elektor magazine supplied PCBs. 1MHz 6502, 1K ROM, 1K RAM, 6532 PIA, Hex keyboard, Hex display (6 seven-segment LEDs). An additional board offered more RAM and a cassette interface.

Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 1. Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1980.
148pp. Contents: 1. Getting Acquainted with the 'Junior Computer'; 2. The Binary Number System; 3. Programming; 4. A Simple Beginning; Appendix 1. Instruction Codes in Numerical Order; Appendix 2. Instruction Listing; Appendix 3. Hex Dump of the Monitor Program; Appendix 4. Pin Assignment of the Connectors.

Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 2. Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1981.
212pp. Contents: 5. The Editor and the Assembler; 6. The Peripheral Interface Adapter or PIA; 7. The Monitor Program; 8. The Editor Program; 9. The Assembler Program; Appendix 1. The Program Listing of the EPROM; Appendix 2. Listings of the Programs used in Chapters 5 and 6.

Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 3. Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1981.
199pp. Contents: 10. Junior Grow Up: From Single Board to Double-Decker 'Sandwich'; 11. The Cassette Interface: A Magnetic Memory; 12. Adding Peripherals to the Junior Computer; Appendix 1. The Main Board Plus a Single RAM/EPROM Card; Appendix 2: Using the PIA RAM with the Original Monitor Routine; Appendix 3. The Vectors and Bus Board Memory; Appendix 4. The Hex Dump for the Tape Monitor (TM) Program; Appendix 5. The Hex Dump for the Printer Monitor (PM) Program; Appendix 6. RAM Test Program; Appendix 7. ASCII Character Codes.

Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: The Practical Introduction to a Powerful System. Book 4. Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1982.
221pp. Contents: 13. Editing and Assembling; 14. 1.2K Bytes of PM Software; 15. The PME Software; 16. The Cassette Software; Appendix 1. The Complete Listing of the PME System Program; Appendix 2. The Hex Dump of the PME System Program; Appendix 3. The Complete Listings of the Tape Monitor and Printer Monitor System Programs; Appendix 4. Working in Decimal; Appendix 5. BASIC on the Junior Computer.

Nachtman, A., and G. H. Nachbar. The Elektor Junior Computer: VIA6522. Canterbury: Elektor Publishers, 1983.

Elektor MatchBox BASIC Computer

A microcontroller system built on a 65 x 45mm PCB using an 87C51 chip (a derivative of the the 8051), running MBL, a higher programming language derived from BASIC and Pascal. Software by Dr. M. Ohsmann.

Dietsche, K.-H., and M. Ohsmann. MatchBox BASIC Computer: A Miniature Controller System. Dorchester: Elektor Electronics, 1999.
274pp with a 3.5" floppy disk. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The MatchBox BASIC Computer; 3. A Development System for the MatchBox; 4. MBL, the MatchBox Language; 5. Connecting Peripherals to the MatchBox; 6. Specialities of the 8051; 7. MatchBox BASIC Computer Applications; 8. Microcontroller Systems; 9. Appendix.

[ART] "'Matchbox' BASIC Computer." Elektor Electronics Part 3: December 1995. pp.42-45.
3 parts. Constructional article.

Epson HX-20 and HX-40

Portables. HX-20: Two 6301 CPUs (master and slave), 20 column by 4 line (120 x 32) LCD display (part of a 255 character wide virtual screen), 50hrs NiCad battery life, mains adaptor permits overnight (8hrs) charging, built-in 5 x 7 dot-matrix printer (24 column), serial port, barcode reader port, Microsoft BASIC. Optional internal 1300 baud microcassette drive or ROM pack. Introduced 1982.

Ahl, David H. The Epson HX-20 Ideabook. Includes 50 Ready-to-Run Programs. Morris Plains, N.J.: Creative Computing Press, 1983.

Balkan, Eric. Using and Programming the Epson HX-20 Portable Computer. Wokingham, Berkshire: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1985.

Boon, Kasper. User's Guide to the Epson HX-20. Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, 1984.

Corlett, Stan, and John Cain. Getting Started with the Epson HX-20 Portable Computer. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Publishing Associates, 1983.

Hartnell, Tim. Making the Most of Your HX-20. London: Interface, 1983.

Zimmerman, Steven M., and Leo M. Conrad. Practical Programs for the Epson HX-20. Hasbrouck Heights, N.J.: Hayden Book Co., [1984].

Zimmerman, Steven M., and Leo M. Conrad. User's Guide to the Epson HX-20. Hasbrouck Heights, N.J.: Hayden Book Co., [1984].

[ART] James, Mike. "The Epson HX-20." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1983. pp.37-39, 75.
Review.

[ART] Lennox, Jim. "Little and Large." What Micro? February 1983. pp.71, 73-74.
Review.

[ART] Wald, Elizabeth. "Slipping Sideways." Personal Computer News No. 48. 11 February 1984. pp.25, 29-30.
Listing. Machine code routine to print sideways, 80 characters x 16 lines on the microprinter.

Epson PX-8 and PX-16

Portable. 64K-184K RAM. CP/M. Flip-up LCD display. A/D i/f, RS232C serial, bar code reader, expansion port. Weight: Under 4lbs. Introduced 1984.

Epson PCs

Seiko Epson Corporation. Epson DOS 4 ...Getting More. Suwa, Japan: Seiko Epson Corporation, 1989.
Spiral bound manual for MS-DOS 4 running on Epson PCs. 350pp. Text has the printed [date] '1.20.89' on the rear cover. Other codes: '89.08-10A [G-01]' (rear cover) and 'Y19199100701' [final '01' smaller] (front cover).

Seiko Epson Corporation. Epson DOS 4 ...In Action. Suwa, Japan: Seiko Epson Corporation, 1989.
Spiral bound introduction to Epson PCs running MS-DOS 4. 66pp. Text has the printed [date] '1.20.89' on the rear cover. Other codes: '89.08-10A [G-01]' (rear cover) and 'Y19199100601' [final '01' smaller] (front cover).

Epson Printers

The Epson Standard Code for Printers (ESC/P) became an industry standard during the era of dot-matrix printers. The control codes began with the ESC (escape) character, ASCII code 27, followed by a letter. A later variant, 'ESC/P 2', is backwards compatible but adds new control codes.

[Manual]
FX-800 and FX-1000 9-Pin Dot Matrix Printers User's Guide.
Nagano, Japan: Seiko Epson Corporation, 1987.
284pp. Spiral bound. Text copyright 1986. Front cover: Y44899102001. Rear cover has 'Printed in Japan 87.02-24'. Contents: Introducing the FX-800 and FX-1000 Printers; [Setting Up Your Printer:] Assembling the Printer; Switching On and Testing the Printer; Connecting to Your Computer; Making Adjustments and Testing the Printer; [Basic Everyday Use:] A Guided Tour of the Printer; Choosing and Loading Paper; Printing; Looking After the Printer; [Getting the Most from Your Printer:] Enhancing Your Printing; Introducing Software Commands; Working with Applications Programs; [Technical Information:] Technical Specification; Interface; Choosing and Setting Up Optional Interfaces; [Reference:] Solving Problems; Command Guide; Typestyle in Epson Mode; Programming Graphics and User-Defined Characters; Initialization; DIP Switch Settings; Optional Accessories; Code Tables; Command Summary by Command Name; Command Summary by Task.

Weber Systems, Inc. Epson Printer User's Handbook. New York: Ballantine Books, 1985.
299pp. Copyright date: 1984. UK edition: London: Century Communications, 1985 (303pp). Contents (UK edition): Preface to the UK Edition; Introduction; 1. Introduction to the Epson Printer; 2. Installing Epson Printers on Personal Computers; 3. Epson Printers with Widely-Used Applications Software Packages; 4. Overview of Printer Modes; 5. Pitch Modes; 6. Weight Modes; 7. Master Select Mode (FX Printers Only); 8. Print Enhancement and Miscellaneous Modes; 9. Line Spacing and Line Feeds; 10. Controlling Forms; 11. Formatting Output on the Page; 12. Example Combining Text Modes; 13. Selecting Modes Through DIP Switches; 14. Bit Image Graphics; 15. Examples Using Bit Image Graphics; 16. User-Defined Characters (FX Series Only); [Appendices:] A. ASCII Character Set for Epson Printers; B. Control Codes for Epson Printers; C. New Epson Printer Products (JX-80 and LQ-1500); D. Enhanced Quality from Epson Printers.

Equator

Z80 CPU, 64K RAM, dual FDDs, 12" screen, CP/M, TurboDOS OS (for up to four users). Distributed in the UK by Equinox, London.

Exidy Sorcerer

Micro. Z80 CPU. 12K ROM, 8K-32K RAM,. built-in 79-key keyboard with a numeric pad, dual cassette ports, serial and parallel ports, 64 x 30 display, 512 x 240 graphics, 128 graphic symbols in the character set, cartridge port for ROM PACs (Standard Altair 8K BASIC, Assembler, Editor, DOS). S-100 compatible (optional 6-slot S-100 expansion unit). Advertised in the UK with 32K RAM on board.

Rugg, Tom, Phil Feldman, and Kevin McCabe. 32 BASIC Programs for the Exidy Sorcerer. Beaverton, Oregon: Dilithium Press, [1981].

Explorer/85 (Newtronics Research and Development, USA)

3MHz 8085A CPU, S-100 bus system. Level A: 2K Monitor ROM, 256 bytes RAM, four 8-bits and one 6-bit I/O port, 14-bit clock/counter, RS232, cassette, and printer interfaces, alternative hex keyboard ROM available; Level B has the buffer, driver, and address decoder hardware for on-board expansion (levels D and E), and up to six S-100 boards; Level D: 4K RAM (8 x 2114); Level E: Sockets and a voltage regulator to enable 8K of 2716 EPROMs (or pin-compatible RAMs) to be installed. 8K Microsoft BASIC on ROM or cassette available. S-100 bus compatible. Compatible with the North Star DD FDD System. Sold as a kit or ready-built.

[ART] Sinfield, David. "Explorer 85." Computing Today June 1980. pp.34-36.
Review.

Ferranti Argus PPC

[ART] Hetherington, Tony. "Argus PPC." Personal Computer World November 1983. pp.136-139, 141.
Review.

Gemini Multiboard

80-Bus boards sold by Gemini Microcomputers of Amersham, Buckinghamshire.

Gemini Galaxy-1

Built around the Gemini Multiboards. Developed by John Marshall. Twin 4MHz Z80A CPUs: Z80-1 (64K DRAM, 2K phantom RAM), Z80-2 (2K monitor RAM, 2K workspace RAM, 2K screen RAM, 2K character generator ROM, 2K character generator RAM). 59 key keyboard, 80 x 25 video, 160 x 75 pixels, 2 x 400K DD 5.25" FDDs, RS232 interface, 1200 baud cassette interface, centronics parallel interface, light pen input. Runs CP/M 2.2, COMAL-80 BASIC, GEM-PEN, GEM-ZAP and GEM-DEBUG.

GRiD Compass

Portable. 8086 CPU, 8087 maths co-processor, 256K RAM, 384K bubble memory, internal modem, IEEE-4888 i/f, RS232C i/f, battery-powered real-time clock, flip-up electroluminescent display.

Grundy Newbrain

The Newbrain AD has a built-in single line display, the Newbrain A does not. Otherwise both models are the same: Z80A-based, 29K ROM, 32K RAM (capable of expansion to 2Mb).

Braga, John. The Newbrain Dissected: A Detailed Guide to the Grundy Newbrain Microcomputer. Revised edition; [n.p.]: Mid Anglia Consultants, 1983.

Pepper, Andrew, and Michelle Clark. Getting More from your Newbrain. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1983.

[ART] Kriwaczek, Paul. "Return of the Prodigal Son." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 1, No. 24. 30 September 1982. pp.12-13, 20.
Review of the Newbrain.

[ART] "New Newbrain." Which Micro? & Software Review July/August 1982. pp.44-46.
Review of the Newbrain after Grundy Business Systems bought it from Newbury Laboratories and relaunched it.

Heathkit (Heath Company, Benton Harbor, Michigan)

Computers supplied initially as kit by Heathkit, an electronic kit supplier. The same machines were sold ready-built, prefixed 'WH', rather than 'H' or 'Z'. In 1979 the Zenith Radio Company had bought-out Heath in an attempt to enter the personal computer business. Later Heathkit machines were badged Zenith Data Systems, the Heathkit H89 becoming the Zenith Data Systems Z89.

H-8 (1977): 8-bit, 4K RAM.

H-11A: 16-bit, based on the DEC PDP-11/03.

H-88: An H-89 without a FDD (see below).

H-89 'All-in-one' (1979), later renamed the Zenith Data Systems Z89: 2.048MHz Z80 CPU, 48K RAM (8K for systems ROM and RAM, 8K reserved), built-in 12" VDU (80 x 24 + 1 status line), 84-key keyboard, 9k6 serial port. Supplied with an HDOS disk (16K Benton Harbor BASIC, DBUG, EDIT, ASM). Microsoft BASIC 80 also available.

H-100 Series: Internal screen, keyboard, and FDDs.

ET-100 Learning Computer: 8088-based trainer, detached keyboard, 32K ROM (with a CP/M aseembler, screen editor and graphics debugger), 16K-64K RAM, cassette port, composite video port. The ETA-100 Accessory added more memory, I/O, disk drive and controller, and a video board. Sold as kits or ready-built. The EE-8088 Advanced Microprocessors Course was sold separately.

ZF-110: 8-bit/16-bit hybrid, 128K RAM, Dual FDDs.

ZF-120: 8-bit/16-bit hybrid, 128K RAM, Dual FDDs, built-in 12" green monitor.

Buss: The Independent Newsletter of Heath Co. Computers. Washington, D.C.: Buss, [c.1977-1982-?].
Periodical. Begun by Charles Floto, the name chosen when Heath won the right to use the first choice: HUG (Heath Users Group).

[ART] Harris, Ron. "Zenith Z89 Reviewed." Computing Today June 1980. pp.44-47.
Review.

Hewlett Packard HP75C Portable

HP75C: 48K ROM, 16K-24K RAM, 32 character LCD display (scrolling to 96 characters), ROM cartridge port. Weight: 26oz.

Hewlett Packard Series 80 Personal Computers

HP-85; HP-85B; HP-86A; HP-86B; HP-87XM. Business computers.

Hewlett Packard. Series 80 Personal Computers. Corvallis, Oregon: Hewlett Packard, [1983].
80pp guide to the range (July 1983). Rear cover: 5953-7853. 7/83.

Joshi, H. K. "Real-Time Signal Processing on the HP-85 Minicomputer." M.Sc. Thesis. UMIST, 1982.

Manning, Paul A. Control of the Nicolet 446b Spectrum Analyser via the IEEE-48 Bus Using an HP-85 Desk-Top Computer. Malvern: Royal Signals and Radar Establishment, 1982.
RSRE Memorandum, 3445. 6, [22]pp.

Phillips, G., C. Hogg, and F. D. Seymour. An Isotope Tracer Measurement System Incorporating the HP-85 Computer. Harwell: UKAEA Atomic Energy Research Establishment, 1983.
AERE Memorandum, 3291. ii, 5, [2]pp.

Sanchez, J. H. "Circuit Analysis Using the HP-85 Minicomputer." M.Sc. Thesis. UMIST, 1981.

Sham, W. K. "Real-Time Signal Analysis Using HP-85 Microcomputer." M.Sc. Thesis. UMIST, 1983.

[ART] Budgett, Henry. "HP85 Review." Computing Today June 1980. pp.50-54.
Review.

Hewlett Packard HP-150 (HP Touch)

8MHz 8088 CPU, 160K ROM, 256K-650K RAM, built-in 9" green screen monitor (80 x 24+3 text; 390 x 512 pixels), 2 expansion slots, 2 RS232C ports, IEEE-488 port, optional thermal printer. Separate dual FDD unit (2 x 256K 3.5" FDDs). 15Mb Winchester HDD option. MS-DOS 2.0. Microsoft BASIC.

[ART] Mitchell, George. "Hewlett-Packard's New Touch Screen Computer." Computers & Electronics December 1983. pp.56-58, 60, 62, 66.
Review.

Hytec Prelude

Z80-based business computers with built-in 12" screens running CP/M. The Prelude 10 has 16K RAM, the Prelude 15 and two models of the Prelude 20 have 192K RAM. Prelude 15 has a 5.25" FDD. The Prelude 20 has either two 5.25" FDDs or a 50Mb HDD. Produced by Hytec Microsystems, Oxford.

IBM PC

PC series: IBM PC (August 1981; 8088); PC XT (March 1983; 8088); PC XT/370 (October 1983; 8088, System/370 emulation); 3270PC (October 1983; 8088, 3270 terminal emulation); PCjr 'Peanut' (November 1983; 8088, 64K-128K RAM, 180K FDD, 2 cartridge ports, 2 joystick ports, serial port, UHF TV port, IBM (RGB) monitor port, composite monitor port, 20 x 25, 40 x 25, 90 x 25, and 640 x 200 hi-res, up to 16 colours, ROM and cartridge BASIC or PC-DOS 2.10, external keyboard); PC Portable (February 1984; 8088); PC AT (August 1984; 286); Convertible (April 1986; 8088 laptop); PC XT 286 (September 1986; 286).

PS/2 series: Models 25 (1987; 8086); 30 (1987; 8MHz 8086); 30-286 (AT bus; 10MHz 286); 50 (1987; MCA bus; 286); 50Z (1988; MCA bus; 286); 55SX (1989; MCA bus; 386SX); 60 (1987; MCA bus; 286); 70 (1988; MCA bus; 386); P70 (1989; MCA bus; 386 portable); 80 (1987; MCA bus; 386 tower). MCA stands for Micro Channel Architecture, a proprietary IBM bus intended to replace the ISA bus. The remainder of the industry went for the cheaper EISA bus and then PCI. MCA was fast, but proprietary and expensive.

IBM PC Clones. Note: Some machines have switchable speeds for compatibility (using a 'Turbo' button or a command in software). On 286 models, 8MHz was often a switchable compatibility option (for IBM's Token Ring card for example). On 386 models, a range of speeds was offered by a series of releases of CPUs of different speeds. Some models represent a range differentiated by a suffix denoting processor speed, drives, or mono/colour. Early models (8086 and 8088) were not always 100% IBM compatible.

IBM PC Clones (8086/8088): Amstrad 2086; Atari PC3 (4.77/8MHz); Mediatech Eagle 1600 (8086); Packard Bell PB8810 (4.77/10MHz); Samsung SPC3000 (4.77/8MHz); Toshiba T1200.

IBM PC Clones (286): Advent AT-12/16D (8/12MHz); Amstrad PC2286 (12MHz); Apricot Xen-S 286 (12MHz); AST Bravo/286 (8MHz); Atari PC4 (12MHz); Compaq DeskPro 286e (12MHz); Compaq SLT/286; Dell System 200 (12.5MHz); Dell System 220 (20MHz); Elonex PC286 (10/12MHz); Epson PC AX (12MHz); Future Computers FS60 (12MHz); IPC DTT (16MHz); Kaypro 286 (12MHz); Mitac MPS 2000V (12MHz); Olivetti M250 (8MHz); Olivetti M290 (12MHz); Opus PCIV 286 AT (12MHz); Packard Bell AT800 (12MHz); Philips NMS 9126 AT 286 (8MHz); Sanyo MBC17 Plus 5 (8MHz); Schneider AT 286 (12.5MHz); Schneider Portable AT (8MHz); Tandon PCA (8/12MHz); Tandy 3000NL (10MHz); Toshiba T3100E (12MHz); Tulip at Compact 2 (12MHz); Viglen VIG I; Viglen VIG II (8/12/16MHz); Walters AT (8MHz); Zenith Supersport 286.

IBM PC Clones (386): Amstrad PC2386; Atari PC5 (16MHz); Compaq DeskPro 386; Compaq Portable 386; Dell System 310 (20MHz); Dell System 325 (25MHz); Digital Matrix 386 (16/20MHz); LEO 386 (16/20/25MHz); Olivetti M380 (16/20/25MHz); Olivetti P500 (16MHz); Packard Bell PB386 (20/25MHz); Samsung MFC6000 (10MHz); Samsung MFC6500 (10MHz); Tandon PAC 386 (16/20/25/33MHz); Toshiba T5100; Toshiba T5200.

[Manual: Hardware]
[IBM.] IBM Personal Computer AT. Technical Reference.
Portsmouth, Hampshire: IBM United Kingdom, September 1985.
Ring bound, loose leaf, in a slip-case. Multi-paged. Contents: 1. System Board; 2. Coprocessor; 3. Power Supply; 4. Keyboard; 5. System BIOS; 6. Instruction Set; 7. Characters, Keystrokes, and Colors; 8. Communications; 9. IBM Personal Computer Compatibility. Coded: 6139362. The binder of the originally released set of leaves has 'Volume 1' on the spine. A 'Volume 2' binder would house additions. Substitute leaves were released to replace initial leaves. Although designed as direct replacements, these were often stored in the Volume 2 binder.

[Manual: Hardware]
[IBM.] IBM Personal Computer AT. Technical Reference.
Portsmouth, Hampshire: IBM United Kingdom, March 1986.
Revised edition. Ring bound, loose leaf, in a slip-case. Multi-paged. Contents: 1. System Board; 2. Coprocessor; 3. Power Supply; 4. Keyboard; 5. System BIOS; 6. Instruction Set; 7. Characters, Keystrokes, and Colors; 8. Communications; 9. IBM Personal Computer Compatibility. Coded: 6183355. The binder has 'Volume 2' on the spine. Appears to be made-up of substitute and additional leaves, preceded by additions (6280051; 6183310; 6183312). Although designed as direct replacements, these were often stored in the Volume 2 binder. Examined copy made up of the following leaves: i-xiv; 1. 1-2, 7-8, 19-24, 31-32, 41-46, 46.1-46.4, 47-48, 61-70, 97-118; 2. 3-4; 4. 1-82; 5. 1-196 (16-196 dated 15 November 1985); 9. 3-6, 19-20; Index. 1-12.

[Manual: Hardware]
[IBM.] [IBM Personal Computer AT. Technical Reference. Additions.]
IBM Personal Computer Hardware Reference Library. IBM Personal Computer AT 30MB Fixed Disk Drive. [Portsmouth, Hampshire]: [IBM United Kingdom], 15 August 1985.
Loose leaves: [2], iv, 28pp. Coded: 6280051.

[Manual: Hardware]
[IBM.] [IBM Personal Computer AT. Technical Reference. Additions.]
IBM Personal Computer Hardware Reference Library. IBM Personal Computer AT 512KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option. [Portsmouth, Hampshire]: [IBM United Kingdom], 18 March 1986.
Loose leaves: vi, 16pp. Coded: 6183310.

[Manual: Hardware]
[IBM.] [IBM Personal Computer AT. Technical Reference. Additions.]
IBM Personal Computer Hardware Reference Library. IBM Personal Computer AT 1282KB/640KB Memory Expansion Option. [Portsmouth, Hampshire]: [IBM United Kingdom], 18 March 1986.
Loose leaves: vi, 11pp. Coded: 6183312.

[Manual: Hardware]
[IBM.] IBM Personal System/2 Model 55 SX Quick Reference.
Armonk, New York: IBM, February 1989.
Multi-paged. Coded: 90X7609. 2nd edition: Portsmouth, Hampshire: IBM United Kingdom, May 1990 (Multi-paged; spiral-bound; coded: 70F7229). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Getting Started; 2. Installing Your Options; 3. Operating Your System; 4. Testing Your System; Appendix A. Hardware Reference; Appendix B. The Reference Diskette.

[Manual: OS]
[Compaq Computer Corporation.] MS-DOS Version 3.2 Reference Guide.
[n.p.]: Compaq Computer Corporation, 1987.
1st edition: February 1987. Ring bound, multi-paged. Binder has the title MS-DOS Version 3 Reference Guide. Assembly: 106650-001; Text: 106651-001; Binder: 106652-001. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Files and File Structure; 3. Command Structure; 4. Commands; 5. Configuration Commands; 6. DISKINIT; 7. FDISK; 8. TAPE; 9. CMPQADAP; 10. EDLIN; 11. LINK; 12. DEBUG; Appendix A. Error Messages; Appendix B. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix C. File Attributes.

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Microsoft GW-Basic Interpreter for the MS-DOS Operating System.
[n.p.]: Microsoft Corporation, 1979.

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Microsoft GW-BASIC Interpreter: User's Guide.
Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Corporation, 1987.

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] MS-DOS Version 3.3; GW-BASIC Version 3.2.
[n.p.]: Microsoft Corporation for Hyundai, 1987.
590pp. [Part I: MS-DOS:] 1. More about Files and Directories; 2. About Commands; 3. MS-DOS Commands; 4. Batch Processing; 5. MS-DOS Editing and Function Keys; 6. The Line Editor (EDLIN); 7. Link: A Linker; 8. Debug; Appendix A. Instructions for Users with Single Floppy Disk Drive Systems; Appendix B. How to Configure Your System; Appendix C. Installable Device Drivers; Appendix D. Configuring Your Hard Disk (FDISK); Appendix E. How to Use Code Pages; Appendix F. MS-DOS Message Directory; Index; [Part II: GW-BASIC:] 1. Introduction; 2. Using the GW-BASIC Interpreter; 3. Writing Programs Using the GW-BASIC Editor; 4. Working with Files and Devices; 5. Using Advanced Features; 6. Language Reference; Appendix A. ASCII Character Codes; Appendix B. Error Codes and Error Messages; Appendix C. Mathematical Functions Not Intrinsic to GW-BASIC; Index. Document Nos. 410630013-330-R04-0787; 410130001-320-000-0286. Coded: E4009203802A.

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Microsoft GW-BASIC: User's Guide and Reference.
Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, [c.1989].

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Microsoft Windows Version 3.1.
[n.p.]: THStyme, [1992].
xxxvi, 407pp. 'THStyme' appears on the cover. The latest copyright date in the text is 1992. Internal title: Microsoft Windows User's Guide for the Microsoft Windows Operating System Version 3.1. Coded: '008.87205.ENG/'. Contents: Welcome; Setting Up Windows; New in This Version; 1. Windows Basics; 2. Application Basics; 3. Program Manager; 4. File Manager; 5. Control Panel; 6. Print Manager; 7. Non-Windows Applications; 8. PIF Editor; 9. Write; 10. Paintbrush; 11. Terminal; 12. Additional Accessories; 13. Integrating Your Windows Applications; 14. Optimizing Windows; 15. Maintaining Windows with Setup; Appendix A. Windows and Networks; Appendix B. Keyboard Shortcuts.

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Introducing Microsoft Windows 95. For Distribution with a New PC Only.
[Redmond, Washington]: Microsoft Corporation, 1995.
G, xv, 95pp. Manual for the OEM edition of Windows95. Document No. 000-61171. Also coded: '6478-01'. Certificate of Authenticity (coded: X03-32822) with product key attached to the front cover. The first 7 pages (A-G) are end-user license agreements. Contents: [1.] Welcome; [2.] The Basics; [3.] Beyond the Basics; [4.] Introducing Networks; [5.] The Possibilities; [6.] Appendices.

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Getting Started: Windows98 Second Edition.
[Redmond, Washington]: Microsoft Corporation, 1999.
viii, 117, [8]pp. Manual for the OEM edition of Windows98se. Document No. 0499. Part No. X04-02589. Front cover coded: 'X04-15747'. Certificate of Authenticity with product key on the front cover. Contents: 1. Welcome; 2. Installing Windows 98; 3. Using Your Desktop; 4. Customizing Your Desktop; 5. Using the Internet; 6. Advanced Issues; Appendix A. Using a Mouse; Appendix B. Accessibility for People with Disabilities.

[Manual: OS]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Quick Start Guide. For Distribution Only with a New PC.
[Redmond, Washington]: Microsoft Corporation, 2000.
Manual for the OEM edition of Windows 2000. 36pp. 'Printed in Germany', 'By G362-11', 'FDRX05-77656/0201'. Coded on rear: '0500 Part No. X05-77656', 'HB 2835'. CD attached in a pouch with a red label stating 'Includes Service Pack 1', label coded 'LA 8760'. Certificate of Authenticity with product key on a label to be removed and stuck on the PC by the manufacturer. Contents: [1.] Setting Up Windows 2000 Professional; [2.] Creating Your User Account; [3.] Configuring Your Computer; [4.] More Information About Windows 2000 Professional; [5.] If You're Upgrading from Windows NT 4.0 to Windows 2000 Professional.

[Manual: OS]
[Seiko Epson Corporation.] Epson DOS 4 ...Getting More.
Suwa, Japan: Seiko Epson Corporation, 1989.
Spiral bound manual for MS-DOS 4 running on Epson PCs. 350pp. Text has the printed [date] '1.20.89' on the rear cover. Other codes: '89.08-10A [G-01]' (rear cover) and 'Y19199100701' [final '01' smaller] (front cover). Contents: Conventions in this Guide; About DOS 4; [Using DOS 4:] A Look at DOS 4 Commands; More About the Keyboard; Configuring the System; Using Devices; Using Batch Files; Using Diskette Drives Effectively; [DOS A-Z:] Entering DOS Commands; [Further Information:] Advanced Customizing; Using Code Pages; Commands that Support Errorlevels; Interpreting DOS Messages; The Keyboard Layouts.

[Manual: OS]
[Seiko Epson Corporation.] Epson DOS 4 ...In Action.
Suwa, Japan: Seiko Epson Corporation, 1989.
Spiral bound introduction to Epson PCs running MS-DOS 4. 66pp. Text has the printed [date] '1.20.89' on the rear cover. Other codes: '89.08-10A [G-01]' (rear cover) and 'Y19199100601' [final '01' smaller] (front cover). Contents: How to Use this Guide; Conventions in this Guide; [Getting Started:] Basic Concepts; A Guided Tour of DOS 4; Using Applications; Getting Help; [For Your Reference:] Day-to-Day Tasks; DOS Utilities; Getting the Most of DOS SHELL; DOS and Your Keyboard; [Further Information:] Changing How SHELL Works.

[Manual: Hardware]
32-Bit PCI-Bus 10/100Mbps ACPI Fast Ethernet Card. Quick Installation Guide.
[n.p.]: [n.p.], [n.d.].
Folded sheet. Presumably an OEM product. Coded after 'Specifications' list: 'Rev:D1-01'. Coded on the rear: 'P/N:6012+8139001'.

[Manual: Hardware]
56K [PCMCIA Card] Fax Modem. Quick Start Manual.
[n.p.]: [n.p.], [n.d.].
Multilingual folded sheet (5pp). Presumably an OEM product. Requires a Type II or Type III slot. Compliant with Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Coded: 1282041-0021.

[Manual: Hardware]
[ATI Technologies.] Getting Started. Graphics by ATI Rage 128.
[n.p.]: ATI Technologies, 2000.
67pp manual for ATI Rage 128-based graphics card, probably intended for OEM distribution. In English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, and Russian. Printed in Ireland. P/N: 117-40106-20.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Citizen Europe.] Easystart Software: Windows 3.1.
Langley, Berkshire: Citizen Europe, 1993.
14pp manual for the EasyStart software for Windows 3.1 distributed with the Citizen ABC-24 Colour 24-pin dot-matrix printer. Multilingual. Dated 11/93.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Conexant.] Quick Start Guide for ADSL-USB/2 (Conexant USB Modem).
[n.p.]: Conexant, [200-].
[1]p. Small card sheet. Part No. 506-40041-01.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Connectix Corporation.] Connectix QuickCam Hardware Installation.
San Mateo, California: Connectix Corporation, [1997].
Folded sheet in 5 languages. Part No. 1022-600-001.

[Manual: Hardware]
[ESS Technology, Inc.] ESS AudioDrive ES1868F [PnP Sound Card] User Manual.
[n.p.]: [ESS Technology, Inc.], February 1997.
8pp. Presumably an OEM manual. Coded: 'E-15-204 Version 1.1' on the cover. 'ES-1868F/ESS' (p.3) and 'ESS AudioDrive ES 1868' (p.4) may refer to the chipset. Contents: 1. Description; 2. Hardware Installation; 3. Software Installation (DOS; Windows 3.x; Windows 95).

[Manual: Hardware]
[Lite On.] E-IDE CD-RW Quick Installation Guide. [n.p.]: [Lite On], [200-].
Multilingual folded sheet. Presumably an OEM product. Coded: 'P/N:7819900107A'. Recommends the use of Nero 5.0 or higher, Adaptec Easy CD Creator 4.02D or higher, and states compliance with Windows 95/98/2000/NT 4.0.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Memorex.] Quick Start Guide.
[n.p.]: Memorex Products Europe, [n.d.].
Multilingual folded sheet. Part No. MXM005. Coded: QSGI.0101. For CD or DVD drives.

[Manual: Hardware]
MP-572 & MP-861-2 PCI 2 Port USB Card.
[n.p.]: [n.d.], [200-].
4pp. Folded paper sheet describing the insertion of and set-up of PCI USB cards under Windows 95 OSR2, 98SE, 2000, and XP. Presumably an OEM product, the codes coming from the chipsets (VIA VT83C572 and OPTi82C861). Contents: A. General; B. Features; C. System Requirements.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Mustek Systems.] Mustek A3 SP [Scanner] Installation Guide.
[n.p.]: Mustek Systems, [n.d.].
Multi-paged in English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Swedish, and Danish. For PCs and Macs. P/N: 82-051-00231.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Mustek Systems.] [Mustek A3 SP Scanner] Windows 98 Software Installation Addendum.
[n.p.]: Mustek Systems, [n.d.].
[12]pp in English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Swedish, and Danish. P/N: 82-051-00290.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Mustek Systems.] Mustek Be@rPaw 1200 Scanner Quick Guide.
[n.p.]: Mustek Systems, 2000.
Multi-paged in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Portuguese, Swedish, and Danish. P/N: 82-083-00020.

[Manual: Hardware]
[nVidia.] nVidia GeForce Series: FX5200/5600/5900; Ti4200/4400/4600; MX400/440/440SE; GEFORCE256/GEFORCE2/TNT2 Model 64 High Performance 3D Graphics Accelerator AGP 2x/4x/8x Installation Guide.
[n.p.]: nVidia, [n.d.].
[4]pp folded sheet coded TM3EVNVGF-1. Driver installation notes for Windows 9x/ME/2000/XP.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Samsung.] Digimax 800K Samsung Digital Camera.
[n.p.]: [Samsung], [n.d.].
Multipaged multi-lingual. Coded 6806-0824 on rear. With a slipped-in single sheet Additional Description, [1]p., coded R9012014.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Syntax.] Syntax Motherboard Manual: SV266A.
[n.p.]: [Syntax], 2002.
xx, 54pp. Multilingual specifications, but the remainder of the manual is in English. Version 1.0. Part No. 40-012-H41101. 462-pin Socket A motherboard: KT266A Northbridge, VT8235 Southbridge. FSB up to 133MHz. Contents: 1. Introducing the Mainboard; 2. Installing the Mainboard; 3. Using BIOS; 4. Using the Mainboard Software.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Taiwan MyComp Co.] AI5VG+ Pentium VP3/MVP3 Baby AT Motherboard User's Manual. Version 1.0E.
[n.p.]: [Taiwan MyComp Co.], [n.d.].
[2], ii, 59, [1]pp. Recorded as being sold as a TMC (Taiwan MyComp Co.) board. Internal note has a 'Ref. no.' of 'MVP3-1.00-001'. This note states that versions of this board with the Winbond W83194R-37 clock generator support 60MHz to 100MHz FSB whilst versions with the ICS 9148-58 clock generator support 66MHz to 100MHz FSB. A further note on p.2 states: The AI5VG+-66MHz has a VP3 (82C597AT) chipset with a maximum CPU bus speed of 66MHz whilst thee AI5VG+-100MHz has a MVP3 (82C598AT) chipset with a maximum CPU bus speed of 100MHz. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Specifications; 3. Hardware Description; 4. Hardware Settings; 5. Installation; 6. BIOS Configuration.

[Manual: Hardware]
[Trident.] Trident 32-Bit PCI VGA Display Card. PT-540. User's Manual.
[n.p.]: [Trident], [n.d.].
Folded paper. For the PT-540 VGA graphics card, based on the Trident TGUI9440AGi chipset. 1Mb or 2Mb VRAM.

[Manual: Software]
[Connectix Corporation.] Connectix VideoPhone. Software for Making Video Calls to Friends and Family. For Windows 95.
San Mateo, California: Connectix Corporation, 1997.
By Theresa Hammond and Peter Kosar. 32pp. Release 3.0, December 1997. Part No. 1011-734-001. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Getting Started; 3. Making a Video Call; 4. Adjusting the Settings.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] 123 Reference Manual. Release 2.
[Cambridge, Massachusetts]: [Lotus Development Corporation], [1985].
Second printing: Windsor, Berkshire: Lotus Development European Corporation, 1985 (vii, 350pp; Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals; Part No. 120202; Contents: 1. Basic Skills; 2. Commands; 3. Macros; 4. @Functions; 5. The PrintGraph Program; Appendix 1. Transferring Files; Appendix 2. Lotus International Character Set; Appendix 3. Printer Control Codes).

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] 123 Tutorial. Release 2.
[Cambridge, Massachusetts]: [Lotus Development Corporation], [1985].
Second printing: Cambridge, Massachusetts: Lotus Development Corporation, 1985 (iv, 172pp; Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals; Part No. 120221; Contents: 1. Beginning 1-2-3; 2. Building a 1-2-3 Worksheet; 3. Adding Worksheet Skills; 4. Printing Your Work; 5. Managing a Database; 6. Automating 1-2-3 with Macros).

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] 123 Getting Started. Release 2.01.
Windsor, Berkshire: Lotus Development European Corporation, 1986.
xi, 72pp. Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals. Part No. 66043. Printed in Ireland. Contents: 1. Installing 1-2-3; 2. Starting and Ending; 3. 1-2-3 and Your Computer; Appendix A. 1-2-3 and 3½" Media; Appendix B. Tips and Techniques for Upgrading from 1-2-3 Release 1A.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] 123 Quick Reference.
Windsor, Berkshire: Lotus Development European Corporation, 1985.
16pp. Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals. Part No. 33016. Printed in Ireland. Contents: [1.] @Functions; [2.] Macros; [3.] Names for Keys; [4.] 1-2-3 File Names; [5.] Label Alignments; [6.] Arithmetic and Logical Operators.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] 123 A Note to Hard Disk Users. Release 2.01.
Cambridge, Massachusetts: Lotus Development Corporation, [198-].
[4]pp. Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals. Part No. 33309.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] [Keyboard Guides.]
[Cambridge, Massachusetts]: [Lotus Development Corporation], [198-].
Two folded card sheets. Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals. One sheet is coded: 492201 and has 'Printed in Ireland'.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] Lotus Licence Agreement/Replacement Order Form. Including Lotus Distributor Fact Sheet
[Cambridge, Massachusetts]: [Lotus Development Corporation], 1987.
[24]pp. Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals. In 8 languages. The Lotus Distributor's Fact Sheet is dated June 1987.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] Lotus VIP Customer Registration (Incorporating Customer Assurance Plan).
Cambridge, Massachusetts: Lotus Development Corporation, [198-].
[4]pp. Card. Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals. Part No. 63061. With a 'Card B' for all countries except the UK (who should return 'Card A').

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] 123 New Utilities From Lotus.
[Cambridge, Massachusetts]: [Lotus Development Corporation], [198-].
[1]p. Handbill. Supplied in a slipcase with the software and other manuals. Part No. 66055. 'The following Lotus Utilities are now available' describing the 'Enhanced Translate Program' and the '1-2-3 Macro Converter Utility'.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] [Card Slipcase for Disks and Smaller Manuals.]
Windsor, Berkshire: Lotus Development European Corporation, [198-].
Part No. 61501.

[Manual: Software]
[Lotus Development Corporation.] [Board Slipcase for Disks and Manuals.]
[Cambridge, Massachusetts]: [Lotus Development Corporation], [198-].
Part No. 61516.

[Manual: Software]
[Microsoft Corporation.] Getting Results with Microsoft Office for Windows 95: Real World Solutions for the Work You Do.
Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Corporation, 1995.
xv, 611pp. Relates to Office v.7.0. Document No. 62167-0795; OEM Document No. 000-11315. Contents: 1. Your First Day at the Office; 2. Get Your Message Across: Letters, Mailings, and Other Business Communications; 3. In Triplicate: Printed and Online Business Forms; 4. Your Numbers Take Shape: Show Data in Charts and Maps; 5. Your Ideas Take the Stage: Create Informative and Entertaining Presentations; 6. Beyond the Card File: Keeping Track of Contacts; 7. Where Do You Need To Go Today? Schedule Appointments, Tasks, and Meetings Electronically; 8. Working with the Team: Exchange Information with Others Over a Network; 9. Budgeting with Microsoft Excel; 10. Track Inventory Your Way: Set Up a Custom Inventory System; 11. Prepare Customer Bids; 12. Find the Magic Numbers: Analyze and Report Sales Data; 13. Analyze Scientific and Engineering Data; 14. Order for the Court: Creating Legal Documents; 15. The Home Office; 16. Automate and Program Office: Delegate Your Most Tedious Work; Appendix. Accessibility for People with Disabilities.

[Manual: Software]
[Mustek Systems.] [Mustek Be@rPaw 1200 Scanner.] Addendum. Scanner Software Upgrade Addendum.
[n.p.]: Mustek Systems, [n.d.].
Folded sheet in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Portuguese, Swedish, and Danish. P/N: 82-083-00090.

Albrecht, Bob. Teach Yourself GW-BASIC. Berkeley; London: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [c.1990].

Albrecht, Bob, and Don Inman. GW-BASIC Made Easy. Berkeley; London: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [1989]

Albrecht, Bob, Wenden Wiegand, and Dean Brown. QuickBASIC Made Easy. Berkeley, California; London: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [1989].

Anderson, Don. FireWire System Architecture: IEEE 1394A. 2nd edition; Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1998.

Anderson, Don, and Dave Dzatko. Universal Serial Bus System Architecture. 2nd edition; Boston: Addison-Wesley, 2001.
With a CD-ROM.

Angell, Ian O. Advanced Graphics with the IBM Personal Computer. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1985.
With a disk.

Arnold, David O., and David E. Cortesi. Hey, Jr! Using IBM's Most Personal Computer. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, [1984].

Ashley, Ruth, and Judi N. Fernandez. GW-BASIC: Self-Teaching Guide. New York: Wiley, [c.1991].

Axelson, Janet Louise. Parallel Port Complete: Programming, Interfacing & Using the PC's Parallel Printer Port. Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, [1997].
With a 3.5" floppy disk.

Axelson, Janet Louise. Serial Port Complete: Programming and Circuits for RS-232 and RS-485 Links and Networks. Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, [1998].
With a 3.5" floppy disk.

Axelson, Janet Louise. USB Complete: Everything You Need to Develop Custom USB Peripherals. With Firmware Tips & Host Code in Visual Basic and Visual C++. 2nd edition; Madison, Wisconsin: Lakeview Research, 2001.
1st edition c.1999, with a CD-ROM.

Barkakati, Nabajyoti. The Waite Group's QuickC Bible. Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams, 1989.
xiv, 804pp

Bomanns, H. J. GW-BASIC: A Quick Program Reference Guide for IBM PC/XT/AT and Compatibles. Düsseldorf, West Germany: Data Becker; Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus Software, 1988.

Barry, John A., Frederic E. Davis, and Phillip Robinson. Desktop Publishing. IBM Edition. Homewood, Illinois: Dow Jones-Irwin, 1988.
x, 431pp. Contents: [Part 1. Desktop Publishing Overview:] 1. The Evolution of Desktop Publishing; 2. Desktop Publishing on the PC, PS/2, and Compatibles; 3. Publishing Categorized; [Part 2. The Tools of Desktop Publishing:] 4. The PC and PS/2 (and Compatibles); 5. PC and PS/2 Software; 6. Page Layout Software; 7. Page Description Languages; 8. Desktop Communication; 9. Output Devices; 10. Input Devices; [Part 3. The Process of Desktop Publishing:] 11. Gathering Your Materials; 12. Writing and Editing; 13. Design; 14. Printing; 15. Marketing and Distribution; [Part 4. The Realm of Desktop Publishing:] 16. Corporate Publishing; 17. Periodical Publishing; 18. Book Publishing; 19. Personal Publishing; Appendix A. Selected Bibliography; Appendix B. Grammar and Punctuation.

Bove, Tony, and Cheryl Rhodes. Desktop Publishing with PageMaker for the IBM PC AT, PS/2 & Compatibles. New York: Wiley, 1987.
xvii, 222pp. Revised edition (with the title Desktop Publishing with PageMaker 3.0: IBM PC AT, PS/2, and Compatibles): New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1989 (xvii, 249pp). Contents (1989 edition): 1. Preparing for Desktop Publishing; 2. A Newsletter Tutorial; 3. Business Reports and Manuals; 4. Graphic Design; 5. Tips and Techniques; [Appendices:] A. Word Processing Programs; B. Graphics Programs; C. Special Characters; D. Transferring Publication Files; E. References.

Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows 3.1. Carmel, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1992.
xx, 545pp.

Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows for Workgroups. Carmel, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1992.
xxiii, 735pp.

Boyce, Jim, Bruce Hallberg, and Forrest Houlette. Inside Windows 3.11. Platinum Edition. Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1994.
xxx, 1029pp. With a CD-ROM. Contents: [Part 1. Understanding Windows:] 1. Configuring Windows; 2. Navigating in Windows; 3. Managing Files; 4. Working with Fonts; 5. Printing in Windows; 6. Customizing Windows; [Part 2. Optimizing Windows:] 7. Enhancing Windows Performance; 8. Enhancing Windows Video; 9. Optimizing Memory; 10. Input Devices: Keyboards and Mice; 11. Optimizing Data Storage Space; 12. Troubleshooting Windows; 13. Preventing and Overcoming Viruses; 14. Using Windows on a Notebook PC; [Part 3. Putting Windows to Work:] 15. Integrating Windows and DOS; 16. Inside Windows Graphics; 17. Scanning, OCR, and Windows; 18. Communicating Through Windows; 19. Using and Building Windows Help; 20. Automating Tasks with Macros and Scripts; [Part 4. Integrating Applications:] 21. Exchanging Data Using the Clipboard; 22. Introducing Object Linking and Embedding; 23. Using OLE 2; 24. Inside Dynamic Data Exchange; 25. Data Exchange with DOS Applications; [Part 5. Networking and Windows:] 26. Understanding Networks and Workgroups; 27. Understanding Windows NT; 28. Sharing Resources in Windows; 29. Using Microsoft Mail and Fax; 30. Using Schedule+; 31. Integrating Windows and Novell NetWare; 32. Using Multiple Protocols; 33. Using Remote Access Services; [Part 6. Applying Multimedia:] 35. Working with Multimedia in Windows; 36. Using Multimedia Audio; 37. Using Multimedia Video.

Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows 95. Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1995.
xxix, 1083pp. With a CD-ROM.

Boyce, Jim, et al. Inside Windows 95. Deluxe Edition. Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1996.
xxx, 1228pp. With a CD-ROM.

Boyce, Jim. Inside Windows 98. Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1996.
xxx, 928pp.

Brunning, Peter E. Experimenting with PC Computers: A Beginner's Introduction to the Design of Simple Electronic Circuits, Writing of Assembly Language Programmes, and Interfacing to a PC Computer. Clacton-on-Sea, Essex: Brunning Software, 1996.
300pp. Spiral bound. With a disk containing BrunWord MCA assembler. Contents: 1. Introduction and Software Installation; 2. What is Computer Control?; 3. Simple Digital to Analogue Converter; 4. Three Bit Digital to Analogue Converter; 5. Measuring the Performance; 6. Using a Ladder Network; 7. Analogue to Digital Converter; 8. Creating Simple Computer Graphs; 9. Successive Approximation A/D Converter; 10. Dynamic Temperature Measurements; 11. Plotting Temperature Measurements; 12. Using Screen Mode 12h; 13. Using a Thermocouple; 14. Working with Audio Waves; 15. Analysing Audio Waves; 16. Fourier Analysis; [Appendices:] A. Components and Tools Required; B. The 8086 Registers; C. The 8086 Instruction Set; D. Software Interrupts; E. Logic Circuit Parameters.

Bunce, Roy. PC-Tech HD. Milton Abbas, Dorset: Park Gate Publishing, 1992.
31pp. Extensive technical data on hard drives available in 1992.

Bunce, Roy. PC-Tech Iffy. Milton Abbas, Dorset: Park Gate Publishing, 1993.
24pp. Contents: [1.] Introduction; [2.] Hard Drive Resuscitation; [3.] Main Board Repair; [4.] Keyboard; [5.] Memory; [6.] Case and Power Supply; [7.] Dirty Tricks.

CD Powerplay. Macclesfield, Cheshire: IDG Media, [1995-1996].
Periodical. A slim magazine-style guide accompanying a CD-ROM. Issue 5: September/October 1995; 6: November 1995; 7: December 1995; 8: Christmas Special 1995; 9: January 1996; then monthly to 12: April 1996. Name changed to PC Powerplay with issue 13 (May 1996).

[CD-ROM Series]. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, 1995-.
Periodical. A magazine series with various titles printed in a cycle and supplied with a covermounted CD-ROM. Includes: Games, PC Kids, PC Office, Multimedia Gold, Shareware Gold (15: 1996), Edutainment Gold (16: Winter 1996), Windows Gold (18: 1997).

Chien, Chao C. Programming the IBM Personal Computer: Assembly Language. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, [c.1984].

Chposky, James, and Ted Leonsis. Blue Magic: The People, Power and Politics Behind the IBM Personal Computer. London: Grafton Books, 1989.

Computer Gaming World. London: Ziff-Davis, [January 1997-].
Periodical. Issue 1: January 1997 (editor-in-chief: David Kelly); 2: March 1997; 4: May 1997. Renamed: PC Gaming World from issue 7 (August 1997).

Cooper, Jim. Using MS-DOS 6.22. Special Edition. Indianapolis, Indiana: Que, 2002.
xxix, 1022pp. Given as the 3rd edition (in a series with varying titles).

Cowart, Robert, and Brian Knittel. Using Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional. Special Edition. Indianapolis, Indiana: Que, 2000.
xxi, [5], 1506pp. First printing: February 2000. Contents: 1. Introducing Windows 2000 Professional; 2. The Design and Architecture of Windows 2000 Professional; 3. Getting Your Hardware and Software Ready for Windows 2000; 4. Installing Windows 2000; 5. Using the Windows 2000 Interface; 6. Organizing Your Work; 7. Using the Simple Supplied Applications; 8. Sharing Data Between Applications; 9. Printing and Faxing with Windows 2000; 10. Font Management; 11. Internet and TCP/IP Connection Options; 12. World Wide Web; 13. Email; 14. Newsgroups; 15. Using NetMeeting; 16. Internet Diagnosis Tools; 17. Going Public: Creating Web Pages; 18. Using Internet Information Services to Host a Web Site; 19. Overview of Windows 2000 Networking; 20. Planning Your Windows 2000 Pro Network; 21. Instant Networking; 22. Using a Windows 2000 Network; 23. Windows Unplugged: Remote and Mobile Networking; 24. Connecting Your LAN to the Internet; 25. Networking Mix and Match; 26. Network Security; 27. Troubleshooting Your Network; 28. Tweaking the GUI; 29. Customizing via Control Panel Applets; 30. Maintaining and Optimizing System Performance; 31. System Management and Configuration Tools; 32. Managing Users; 33. Managing the Hard Disk; 34. OS Mix and Match; 35. The Registry; 36. Windows Script Host. With a CD-ROM.

Cowart, Robert, and Steve Cummings. The ABC's of Ventura. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1989.
xxii, 390pp. For Version 2. Contents: 1. Computer Basics; 2. Ventura Basics; 3. Communicating with Ventura; 4. Saving Time with Ventura's Supplied Style Sheets; 5. Setting Up a Newsletter; 6. Formatting Your Text with Tags; 7. Using Ventura's Word Processor; 8. Bringing in Graphics from Other Programs; 9. Working with Ventura's Graphics Tools; 10. Creating Footnotes, Indexes, and Tables of Contents; 11. Adding Professional Effects with Ventura's Typography Features; 12. Tips on Creating More Documents: Posters, Letterheads, Programs, Envelopes, and Tables; 13. Working with Long Documents; 14. Using Other Programs with Ventura; Appendix: Installing Ventura.

Crider, Janet. Quick & Easy WordStar 2000: Step-By-Step Guide to Making WordStar 2000 Work For You! Includes the Best Applications and Methods. Tucson, Arizona: HP Books, 1985.
208pp. Contents: [Part I:] 1. Introducing WordStar 2000; 2. Getting Started with WordStar 2000; 3. Creating Documents & Stored Formats; 4. Basics of Editing; 5. Basics of Page Formatting; 6. Special Print Characteristics & Printing; [Part II. Applications of WordStar 2000:] 7. Typing Letters & Memos; 8. Generating Repetitious Documents; 9. Typing Outlines & Indented Text; 10. Writing a Research Paper; 11. Writing a Report; 12. Preparing Numeric Reports & Using Math; 13. Making Newsletters, Camera-Ready Copy & Multiple-Text Columns; 14. Using MailMerge: Master Documents & Data Files; 15. Using MailMerge: Advanced Features; [Part III. Using WordStar 2000 Plus:] 16. Using MailList to Prepare Data Files; 17. Using StarIndex; 18. Using TelMerge.

Detmer, Richard C. Introduction to 80x86 Assembly Language and Computer Architecture. Boston: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2001.
With a CD-ROM.

Duncan, Ray. Advanced MS-DOS Programming: The Microsoft Guide for Assembly Language and C Programmers. Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, 1988.
xii, 468pp. ISBN 0-914845-77-2 Copyright 1986 Ray Duncan; '1988' in LoC cataloguing data (QA76.76.O63 D857 1988 005.4'46 88-1251). A companion disk was available. Contents: 1. Genealogy of MS-DOS; 2. MS-DOS in Operation; 3. Programming for the MS-DOS Environment; 4. Using the MS-DOS Programming Tools; 5. Programming the Character Devices; 6. MS-DOS File and Record Manipulation; 7. Directories, Sub-Directories, and Volume Labels; 8. MS-DOS Disk Internals; 9. Memory Allocation; 10. The MS-DOS EXEC Function; 11. MS-DOS Interrupt Handlers; 12. Installable Device Drivers; 13. Writing MS-DOS Filters; MS-DOS Programming Reference; IBM PC BIOS Reference; Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification Reference.

Duncan, Ray. IBM ROM BIOS. Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press; Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1988.
125pp. Programmer's Quick Reference series.

Evertse, Jan C. Lotus and Microcomputers: A Practical Guide. Stellenbosch, South Africa: Helderberg, 1991.
145pp. Largely based on Lotus 2.0. Covers Lotus 2.2. Contents: 1. Short History of the Lotus Program; 2. The Spreadsheet; 3. The Lotus Screen; 4. How to Load and Use Lotus; 5. Basic Calculations and Commands; 6. The Appearance of a Spreadsheet; 7. Formulas and Functions; 8. Data Files and Lotus; 9. Graphs; 10. Moving Data Around; 11. Printouts with Lotus; 12. Function Keys and the Template; 13. Windows and Titles; 14. Sorting; 15. Transferring Data; 16. Changes to Lotus; 17. Protection of Data; 18. Advanced Commands; 19. Application: A Class List; 20. Two Business Applications; 21. Macros; 22. Quattro; 23. VP-Planner Plus; 24. Lotus 2.2; 25. Installing the Program; 26. A Refresher Course in DOS.

Fernandez, Judi N., and Ruth Ashley. CP/M for the IBM: Using CP/M-86. New York; Chichester: Wiley, [1983].

Forsyth, Richard, and Chris Naylor. The Hitch-Hiker's Guide to Artificial Intelligence. IBM PC BASIC Version. London: Chapman and Hall, 1986.

Frederick, Vivian, Phyllis Yasuda, Judy Yamada, and Ann Koda. Using Microsoft Works 3.0 for DOS. New York: Mitchell McGraw-Hill, 1994.
xiii, 297pp. Contents: 1. You, Your Computer, and Works 3.0; 2. Word Processing 1; 3. Word Processing 2; 4. Word Processing 3; 5. Word Processing 4; 6. Spreadsheet 1; 7. Spreadsheet 2; 8. Spreadsheet 3; 9. Spreadsheet 4; 10. Database 1; 11. Database 2; 12. Database 3; 13. Database 4; 14. Integration; Appendix A. Introducing the Computer; Appendix B. Communications; Command Summary.

Frederick, Vivian, Phyllis Yasuda, Judy Yamada, and Ann Koda. Using Microsoft Works 3.0 for Windows. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1994.
xiv, 317pp.

Gifford, J. Daniel. QuickC Instant Reference. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1989.
xxi, 391pp. For v.2.0.

Gook, Michael. PC Hardware Interfaces: A Developer's Reference. Wayne, Pennsylvania: A-List Publishing, 2004.

Hall, Patrick J. Introduction to PC computing: MS-DOS, GEM & BASIC on the PC200 & PC compatibles. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1989.

Hartnell, Tim. Exploring Artificial Intelligence on Your IBM PC. Toronto; New York: Bantam, 1986.
254pp.

Hartnell, Tim. How to Program the IBM PC if You've Never Programmed a Computer Before. London: Interface, 1983.
135pp. American edition (with the title How to Program Uour IBM PC if You've Never Programmed a Computer Before): New York: Ballantine Books, 1983 (101pp).

Hartnell, Tim. Tim Hartnell's Executive Games for the IBM PC and XT. New York: Ballantine Books, 1984.
304pp.

Heiser, Paul W. Mastering dBASE II the Easy Way. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1984.
vii, 227pp.

Hoskins, Jim. IBM Personal System/2: A Business Perspective. New York: J. Wiley, 1987.
xiii, 242pp. States on cover: 'Covers OS/2'. 2nd edition (title changes to IBM PS/2: A Business Perspective): New York: Wiley, 1989 (xv, 303pp). 3rd edition: New York: Wiley, 1990 (xviii, 340pp). 4th edition: New York: Wiley, 1991 (xvii, 333pp). 5th edition: New York: Wiley, 1992 (xviii, 299pp). 6th edition (title changes to IBM Personal Systems: A Business Perspective): New York: Wiley, 1993 (xx, 298pp). 7th edition: New York: Wiley, 1994 (xx, 313pp). 8th edition (title changes to IBM Personal Computers: A Business Perspective): New York: J. Wiley, 1995 (xvi, 318pp).

Howling, Barry, and Andrew Pepper. A Programmer's Guide to GEM on the IBM PC and Compatibles. Wilmslow: Sigma, 1988.

Inman, Don, and Bob Albrecht. The GW-BASIC Reference. Berkeley; London: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [c.1990].

Irvine, Kip R. Assembly Language for Intel-Based Computers. 4th edition; Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 2002.
With a CD-ROM containing Microsoft Macro Assembler versions 6.11 and 6.15, an evaluation copy of TextPad 4.5.0 editor, a macro library, and the book's source code. 2nd edition c.1993; 3rd edition c.1999, with a 3.5" floppy disk.

James, Mike. QBASIC: The Language of MS-DOS. Leyburn: I/O Press, 1992.

Jones, Richard M., ed. The Good Hardware Guide. Watford, Hertfordshire: Absolute Research, 1991.
Loose leaf. Paperback edition (286pp): London: Kogan Page, 1991. Senior researcher: Peter Sarson. Contributing reviewers: Steve Gold and Steve Mansfield.

Jones, Richard M., ed. The Good Software Guide for IBM PCs and Compatibles. Watford, Hertfordshire: Absolute Research, 1989.
2nd edition: London: Kogan Page, 1990 (342pp); 3rd edition: London: Kogan Page, 1991 (342pp).

Kamin, Jonathan, et al. Using MS-DOS 6. Special Edition. Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1993.
xxv, 1172pp.

Kampow, Frank, and Norbert Szczepanowski. GW-BASIC and PC BASIC Programming for Beginners. Grand Rapids, Michigan: Abacus, 1989.

Kantaris, Noel. A Concise Introduction to MS-DOS. BP232. 1987; rev. London: Babani, 1993.

Kantaris, Noel. Programming in QuickBASIC. BP284. 1990; rep. London: Babani, 1995.

King, Adrian. Inside Windows 95. Inside Windows 95. Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, 1994.
xxix, 476pp.

King, Richard Allen. The IBM PC-DOS Handbook. Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1983.
xx, 296pp. 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1987 (xxiv, 340pp). 3rd edition: San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1988 (xxx, 359pp).

King, Richard Allen. The MS-DOS Handbook. Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1985.
xxi, 319pp. 2nd edition: Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1986 (xxii, 339pp). 3rd edition: San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1988 (xxx, 362pp; Acknowledgments dated December 1987; Coverage to MS-DOS v.3.3). Contents (3rd edition): [Part I: The Programmer's Handbook:] 1. MS-DOS - A First View; 2. Files in MS-DOS; 3. Disks in MS-DOS; 4. MS-DOS and the Keyboard; 5. Output to Display Monitors; 6. The Serial and Parallel Ports; 7. Dates and Times in MS-DOS; 8. Error-Handling and Memory-Resident Programs; 9. Networking with MS-DOS; [Part II: The User's Handbook:] 10. MS-DOS - A User's First View; 11. A Quick Look at EDLIN; 12. Your MS-DOS Files; 13. Configuring the System; 14. Batch Operations; 15. The Monochrome and Color/Graphics Screen; 16. Using the Serial Port; 17. The Delights of DEBUG; [Appendices:] A. MS-DOS, PC-DOS, and Compatibility; B. The Different MS-DOS Version Numbers; C. Function Call Summaries; D. Interrupt Vectors; E. Memory Maps; F. Address Conversion Tables; G. MS-DOS Command Summary - All Versions; H. MS-DOS Versions 3.2 and 3.3: New Features and Options.

Klitzner, Carol, and Matthew Plociak. Using VisiCalc. Getting Down to Business. New York; Chichester: Wiley, [1983].
vi, 277pp. With a disk. Two versions, one for the IBM PC, one for the Apple II/II+/IIe.

Lasselle, Joan, and Carol Ramsey. The ABC's of IBM PCs. Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1984.
xi, 143pp. 2nd edition (with the title changed to The ABC's of IBM PCs and Compatibles): San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1988 (xvii, 167pp; 'For PC, XT, AT users'). 3rd edition: San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1991 (xxi, 226pp; 'Covers DOS 5, Shell, Windows 3.0 & Lotus 1-2-3'). Contents (3rd edition): [Part I: An Introduction to Your PC:] 1. Anatomy of Your PC; 2. Beginning with the Basics; [Part II: Using the DOS Command Line:] 3. Commands for Your PC; 4. All About Diskettes; 5. Building a Filing System; [Part III: Using Operating Environments:] 6. Using the DOS 5 Shell; 7. Windows 3.0 Work Session; [Part IV: Using Applications:] 8. Computer Applications: Tools for Your PC; 9. Application Work Session; [Part V: Beyond the Basics:] 10. Bells and Whistles: Optional Components; 11. Checklists: If Something Goes Wrong; [Appendices:] A. Putting It All Together; B. Glossary; C. Resources.

Lasselle, Joan, and Carol Ramsey. The ABC's of Your DOS PC. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1994.
xviii, 212pp.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Good House-Keeping in PC-DOS. London: Sunshine, 1986.

Lawrence, David, and Mark England. Working with GEM on the IBM PC. London: Sunshine, 1986.

Lima, Tony. dBASE II for Beginners. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1985.
xix, 234pp.

Lima, Tony. Mastering dBASE III in Less than a Day. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1986.
xvii, 270pp.

Lima, Tony. Developing dBASE IV Applications: Programming with the dBASE Template Language. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1989.
xi, 528pp.

Lima, Tony. Inside dBASE IV. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1989.
xvi, 370pp.

Maddison, Frances. PC-Tech Upgrade. Milton Abbas, Dorset: Park Gate Publishing, 1993.
24pp.

McBride, P. K. Programming in GW-BASIC. London: Heinemann, 1989.

Minasi, Mark, Bill Camarda, David J. Stang, and Kris Ashton. Inside MS-DOS 6. Carmel, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1993.
xviii, 1266pp. With a 3.5" or 5.25" disk. 2nd edition (Inside MS-DOS 6.2): Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1993 (33, 1557pp; With a 3.5" disk). 3rd edition (Inside MS-DOS 6.22): Indianapolis, Indiana: New Riders Publishing, 1993 (xxviii, 1576pp; With a 3.5" disk).

Mosher, Frederick E., and David I. Schneider. Using Turbo BASIC. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [c.1987-1988].

Norton, Peter. The Peter Norton Programmer's Guide to the IBM PC. Bellevue, Washington: Microsoft Corporation, 1985.
xii, 426pp. 2nd edition (with Richard Wilton, re-titled The New Peter Norton Programmer's Guide to the IBM PC & PS/2): Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, 1988 (xi, 511pp). 3rd edition (with Richard Wilton and Peter G. Aitken, re-titled The Peter Norton PC Programmer's Bible: The Ultimate Reference to the IBM PC and Compatible Hardware and Systems Software): Redmond, Washington: Microsoft Press, 1993 (xiii, 615pp). Contents (2nd edition): 1. Anatomy of the PCs and PS/2s; 2. The Ins and Outs; 3. The ROM Software; 4. Video Basics; 5. Disk Basics; 6. Keyboard Basics; 7. Clocks, Timers, and Sound Generation; 8. ROM BIOS Basics; 9. ROM BIOS Video Services; 10. ROM BIOS Disk Services; 11. ROM BIOS Keyboard Services; 12. Miscellaneous Services; 13. ROM BIOS Services Summary; 14. DOS Basics; 15. DOS Interrupts; 16. DOS Functions: Version 1; 17. DOS Functions: Version 2.0 and Later; 18. DOS Functions Summary; 19. Program Building; 20. Programming Languages; [Appendices:] A. Installable Device Drivers; B. Hexadecimal Arithmetic; C. About Characters; D. DOS Version 4.

Nutt, Gary J. Operating System Projects Using Windows NT. Reading, Massachusetts; Harlow: Addison-Wesley, 1999.

Oliver, Phil R. M., and Noel Kantaris. WordPerfect 6 Explained. London: Babani, January 1994.
BP351. [12], 179pp. Covers WordPerfect 6 for DOS. A companion floppy disk was available. Contents: 1. Package Overview; 2. The WordPerfect Environment; 3. WordPerfect Windows; 4. WP Document Basics; 5. Editing Your Documents; 6. Formatting Your Work; 7. Printing Documents; 8. Document Layout Features; 9. Using Boxes and Graphics; 10. Managing Documents; 11. More Advanced Techniques; 12. File Management; 13. Macro Basics; Appendix A. The Shell Program; Appendix B. Table Functions.

Orvis, William J. The ABC's of GW-BASIC. San Francisco: Sybex, [c.1990].

PC Advisor. Birmingham: IT Publishing, [October 1995-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: October 1995.

[PC Advisor.] Successful Presentations for Dummies. [London]: IDG Books, [199-].
Free with an issue of PC Advisor. 64pp excluding wrappers. By Malcolm Kushner.

PC Attack. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [May 1995-].
Periodical. Monthly. With a CD-ROM cover disk. Issue 1: May 1995 (editor: Jon Smith). Issues seen: 1-4, 6(October 1995, editor: Garrick Webster).

PC Answers. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1994-1998-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue seen: 55 (July 1998).

PC Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, [-1998-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1995.
Supplement. Free with the September 1995 issue of PC Direct. 88pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1996.
Supplement. Free with the August 1996 issue of PC Direct. 78pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Supplement. Free with the February 1997 issue of PC Direct. 134pp.

[PC Direct] The Ultimate Buyer's Guide. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Supplement. Free with the March 1997 issue of PC Direct. 100pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Supplement. Free with the August 1997 issue of PC Direct. 102pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Supplement. Free with the February 1998 issue of PC Direct. 94pp.

[PC Direct] Education Direct. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Supplement. Free with the August 1998 issue of PC Direct. 68pp.

PC Football. London: IDG Media, [1996].
Periodical format, perhaps only one issue published. IDG Collector's Series, 1. Supplied with a free Euro '96 wallchart.

PC Format. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1991-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue seen: 46 (July 1995). Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period).

[PC Format] Best of British: The Movers and Shakers of the UK Games Scene. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1995].
Supplement. 32pp. Edited by Mark Ramshaw. Undated, but most likely free with issue 46 (July 1995). Articles on: Bullfrog (Peter Molyneux); Rowan Software (Rod Hyde); DMA Design (David Jones); The Bitmap Brothers (Eric Matthews); Geoff Crammond; Argonaut (Jez San); Sensible Software (Jon Hare); Probe Entertainment (Fergus McGovern); Tony Crowther (co-founder of Gremlin); Revolution (Charles Cecil); Mythos Games (Julian Gollop); Dimension Creative Design (Kev Bulmer); Software Refinery (Ian Martin); David Braben (co-author of Elite).

PC Gaming World. London: Ziff-Davis, [1997-].
Periodical. Previously Computer Gaming World (Issues 1-6). First issue with this title, issue 7 (August 1997).

PC Guide. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [July 1995-1996].
Periodical. Monthly. A 16pp Issue 0 'taster' (June 1995) was issued as a supplement and given away for free with another magazine. Issue 1 (July) was published on 8 June 1995 (editor: Mark Higham). Latest issue seen: 8 (February 1996).

[PC Guide] Choosing a PC. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. Free with issue 3 of PC Guide (September 1995). 100pp. By William Poel.

[PC Guide] Get the Most out of Your Home PC. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Supplement. Free with the January 1996 issue of PC Guide. 100pp. Extracts from the new PC Guide book by Mark Higham and Paul Pettengale.

PC Home. Macclesfield, Cheshire: IDG Media, [1992-].
Periodical. Monthly. Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period). Issue 33 (May/June 1995) was a single issue to accomodate preparations for a relaunch.

PC Kids. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, 1995-.
Periodical. Part of the CD-ROM magazine series with various titles printed in a cycle. No. 2: CD-ROM 4, 1995.

PC Magazine. London: Ziff-Davis, [1992-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Mobile Computing. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the March 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Windows NT 4.0. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the April 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Building Your Own Network. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the July 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Servers. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the August 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Display Technologies. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the September 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to IT Desktop Management. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the October 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Upgrading Your PC. London: Ziff-Davis, 1997.
Free with the December 1997 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine] PC Magazine Guide to Clustering. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Free with the January 1998 issue. 16pp.

[PC Magazine.] Gadgets: The Ultimate Guide. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Free with the March 1998 issue. 68pp.

[PC Magazine.] Getting the Best out of Office 97. London: Ziff-Davis, 1998.
Free with the May 1998 issue. 68pp.

PC Marketplace. London: EMAP, [-1995-1996-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issued as an advertising supplement to PC User, What Personal Computer, and (every other month) Internet Magazine. Issues noted: 'Vol. 52; November 1995' to 'Vol. 59; June 1996'.

PC Plus. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [199-].
Periodical. Monthly.

[PC Plus] Keeping Your PC Virus-Free. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1995.
Free with issue 106 (August 1995).

[PC Plus] Getting Started with Visual Basic 4. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with the January 1996 issue. 100pp.

[PC Plus] All You Need to Know About Buying a PC. New 1996 Edition. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 113 (March 1996). 100pp. By William Poel.

[PC Plus] The Best of... Multimedia. How to Upgrade, Plus All the Best CD-ROM Software. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 114 (April 1996). 100pp. By Peter Comeau, Jon Smith, Matthew Richards, Rachel Harrison, and Dave Pearman.

[PC Plus] Getting Started with Micrografx Windows Draw! Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1996.
Free with issue 121. 100pp.

[PC Plus] The Networking Guide for Today's Growing Business. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, 1997.
Free with issue 131. 28pp.

PC Power. Bournemouth, Dorset: Paragon Publishing, [January 1994-].
Periodical. Monthly. Issue 1: January 1994. Supplied with a cover disk (optionally FD(s) or CD-ROM during the media transition period). Issue seen: 20 (August 1995).

[PC Power.] PC Power Platinum. Bournemouth, Dorset: Paragon Publishing, [1995-].
Periodical. Quarterly. Issue 2 advertised as going on sale in November 1995 (possibly Platinum Sports Vol. 2); Issue 3: 1996; Issue 4 advertised as going on sale in May 1996.

[PC Power] Get Yourself Connected: The Complete Guide to the Internet! Bournemouth, Dorset: Paragon Publishing, 1995.
Supplement. Free an issue of PC Power. 68pp. By Darren Irvine and John Kennedy.

PC Powerplay. Macclesfield, Cheshire: IDG Media, [Issue 13: May 1996-].
Periodical. A slim magazine-style guide accompanying a CD-ROM. Originally called CD Powerplay, the name changed at issue 13. Latest issue seen: 14 (June 1996; 20pp).

PC Pro. London: Dennis Publishing, [1994-].
Periodical. Monthly.

The PC-SIG Encyclopedia of Shareware. A Comprehensive Guide to Low Cost Software for IBM and Compatibles. Sunnyvale, California: PC-SIG, Inc., [c.1990].

PC Sports. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [1995-].
Periodical. Issue 1: Summer 1995; 2: Winter 1995. Issues seen: 1-2 (editor: Chris Buxton). With a free CD-ROM.

PC Tactix. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, May 1995-.
Periodical. Monthly. Gaming hints and hacks.

Penfold, R. A. Easy PC Interfacing. BP385. London: Babani, 1995.

Penfold, R. A. Electronic Projects for your PC. BP320. London: Babani, 1992.

Penfold, R. A. Interfacing PCs and Compatibles. BP272. London: Babani, February 1992.
Reprint: London: Babani, July 1996 (86pp). Contents: 1. PC Basics; 2. Interfacing Circuits.

Penfold, R. A. Understanding PC Software. London: Babani, 1991.

Perry, Greg M. QBASIC by Example. Carmel: Que, [c.1992].
'Special edition' published [c.1993].

Phoenix Technologies Ltd. ABIOS for IBM PS/2 Computers and Compatibles. The Complete Guide to ROM-Based System Software for OS/2. Reading, Massachusetts; Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, [c.1989].

Phoenix Technologies Ltd. CBIOS for IBM PS/2 Computers and Compatibles. The Complete Guide to ROM-Based System Software for DOS. Reading, Massachusetts; Wokingham: Addison-Wesley, [c.1989].

Phoenix Technologies Ltd. System BIOS for IBM PC/XT/AT Computers and Compatibles. The Complete Guide to ROM-Based System Software. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1989.
xxx, 524pp. 2nd edition (with the title System BIOS for IBM PCs, Compatibles, and EISA Computers. The Complete Guide to ROM-Based System Software): Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1991 (xvi, 365pp).

Platinum Sports. Bournemouth: Paragon Publishing, [1995].
Periodical. Possibly in the PC Power Platinum series. Internally states that the sequel would be published 'next year'. The CD-ROM cover disc instructions note that 'sport is the name of the game this month'. Issues seen: 'Volume 2' (editor: Damian Butt, 100pp).

Podanoffsky, Michael. Dissecting DOS: A Code-Level Look at the DOS Operating System. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1995.
x, 502pp. Includes the complete source code for the DOS work-alike operating system RxDOS, illustrating how MS-DOS works. 3.5" disk included. Contents: 1. The Structure of DOS; 2. How DOS Starts Up; 3. The DOS File Functions; 4. Reading and Writing Disks; 5. File Management; 6. Process Management; 7. Memory Management; 8. Command.Com.

Poole, Lon. Using Your IBM Personal Computer. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1983.
vii, 326pp.

Reich, David E. Designing OS/2 Applications. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1993.
xxix, 300pp. Foreword by Lee Reiswig. Contents: [Section I: Why OS/2?:] 1. OS/2 as an End-User Platform; 2. Why Program for OS/2?; 3. OS/2 as a Development Platform; [Section II: Overall Application Design:] 4. Good Programs Have Good Up-Front Design; 5. OS/2 Kernel Architecture; 6. Presentation Manager, Graphics, and the User Interface; 7. Features for Your Application; 8. Application Structure; [Section III: Use Building Blocks or Your App Will Crumble:] 9. Block Design and Architecture; 10. Designing the User Interface; 11. Where's the Beef?; [Section IV: Making It Happen:] 12. The Development Environment; 13. Prototyping the User Interface; 14. Building the Core Function; 15. Using Advanced Functions; 16. Non-English Language Support; [Section V: Performance:] 17. Base Tuning; 18. Visual Tuning; [Section VI: Testing and Code Change:] 19. Testing Methodology; 20. Code Change; [Section VII: Installation Programs:] 21. Designing the Installation Program; Summary and Conclusion.

Schneider, David I. Handbook of BASIC for the IBM PC, XT, AT, PS/2, and Compatibles. 3rd edition; New York: Brady, 1988.
First published in 1983, revised in 1985. Titles differ slightly.

Schneider, David I. Handbook of QuickBASIC. New York: Brady, 1991.

Schneider, David I. QBASIC: With an Introduction to Visual BASIC. 4th edition; Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1998.
With a CD-ROM.

Schneider, David I. Microsoft QuickBASIC: An Introduction to Structured Programming. San Francisco: Dellen Pub. Co.; London: Collier Macmillan, [c.1989].
With a 5.25" floppy disk.

Schneider, David I., and Gary Cornell. Visual BASIC for DOS. Inside and Out. Berkeley; London: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [c.1993].

Schneider, David I., and The Peter Norton Computing Group. QBASIC Programming. New York: Brady, 1991.

Shelly, Gary B., Thomas J. Cashman, and Kevin M. Gleason. QBASIC: An Introduction to Programming. Cambridge, Massachusetts; London: Boyd & Fraser, [1997].
With a floppy disk and a CD-ROM.

Simrin, Steven. MS-DOS Bible. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1985.
xi, 385pp. Title then changes to The Waite Group's MS-DOS Bible. 2nd edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1988 (xviii, 522pp). 3rd edition: Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1989 (xxi, 630pp; Coverage to MS-DOS and PC-DOS v.4.01). 4th edition: Carmel, Indiana: Sams, 1991 (xxxvii, 718pp). Contents (3rd edition): [Part 1: Information Jump Table]; [Part 2: MS-DOS Tutorials:] 1. Starting MS-DOS; 2. MS-DOS Files; 3. Directories, Paths, and Trees; 4. MS-DOS Batch Files; 5. Configuring Your System; 6. Redirection, Filters, and Pipes; 7. The DOSSHELL Interface; 8. EDLIN, the MS-DOS Text Editor; 9. Extended Keyboard and Display Control; 10. Disk Structure and Management; 11. Memory Structure and Management; 12. Expanded Memory; 13. Terminate and Stay Resident Programs; 14. MS-DOS Device Drivers; 15. DEBUG; 16. LINK; [Part 3: MS-DOS Commands]; [Part 4: Appendices:] A. MS-DOS Interrupts and Function Calls; B. Some Undocumented Features of MS-DOS; C. Practical Batch Files; D. Code Pages and Code Page Switching; E. An Assembly Language Primer; F. ASCII Cross-Reference Tables.

Snell, Ned. Navigating the Microsoft Network. Indianapolis, Indiana: Sams.net, 1995.
xiv, 372pp. With a CD-ROM. Contents: [Part I. Setting Up the Microsoft Network:] 1. Signing Up, Signing In, and Signing Out; 2. Maintaining Your MSN Account; 3. Member Rules and Etiquette; [Part II. Navigating the Microsoft Network:] 4. Basic Navigation Technique; 5. Reading and Contributing to Bulletin Boards and Newsgroups; 6. Hanging Out in Chatrooms; 7. Downloading and Uploading Files; 8. Composing, Sending, and Receiving E-Mail; 9. Viewing and Operating Titles; [Part III. Taking Control of MSN:] 10. Finding Anything on MSN; 11. Advanced Configuration Options; 12. Trimming Time Online; 13. Power E-Mail; 14. Speeding Up MSN; [Part IV. Navigating the Internet Through MSN:] 15. Understanding the Internet; 16. Browsing the World Wide Web; 17. Browsing Gophers; 18. Downloading Files with FTP; 19. Advanced Internet Techniques; [Part V. References:] A. Go Word Dictionary; B. Web Highlights.

Townsend, Carl. QuickC Programming for the IBM. Indianapolis, Indiana: H. W. Sams, 1988.
xii, 393pp. 2nd printing: 1988. Contents: [Part I: Overview of QuickC:] 1. Introduction to QuickC; 2. Getting Started; [Part II: The Language:] 3. Representing Data; 4. Basic Input and Output; 5. Arithmetic Operations; 6. Program Control: 'if' and 'Switch' Structures; 7. Program Control: Iteration Structures; 8. Using Functions and Macros; 9. Managing the Storage of Variables; 10. Arrays and Pointers; 11. Using Character Strings; 12. Using Data Structures; 13. Using Files and Other Input and Output; 14. Using Graphics; [Part III: Developing Programs with QuickC:] 15. Introduction to Structured Programming; 16. Developing with QuickC; 17. Managing Databases with QuickC; 18. High-Level Design: Menus; 19. Adding Database Records; 20. Editing and Deleting Records; 21. Reporting and Processing Programs; [Appendices:] A. Installation and Setup; B. QuickC Library Summary; C. ASCII Character Set; D. QuickC Operators; E. QuickC Data Types; F. QuickC Keywords; G. Resources; H. Tips for QuickC Users.

Townsend, Carl. Using dBASE II. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, 1984.
223pp.

Townsend, Carl. Mastering dBASE III: A Structured Approach. Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1985.
xvi, 338pp.

Townsend, Carl. Mastering dBASE III Plus: A Structured Approach. Berkeley, California: Sybex, 1986.
xviii, 342pp.

Townsend, Carl. Mastering dBASE IV Programming. San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1989.
xxii, 496pp. 2nd edition (with the title Mastering dBASE IV 1.1 Programming): San Francisco, California: Sybex, 1991 (xxiv, 546pp). Contents (1st edition): [Part I: dBASE IV Basics:] 1. Making the Decision; 2. Introduction to dBASE IV; 3. Files, Records, and Databases; 4. Data Types, Operators, and Memory Variables; 5. Using Expressions, Functions, and Programs; [Part II: Program Development Techniques:] 6. Introduction to Structured System Development; 7. Program Design Concepts; 8. Program Flow Control; [Part III: Database Design:] 9. Database Creation; 10. Ordering Records in a Database; 11. Database Planning and Design; [Part IV: Programming with dBASE IV:] 12 Designing Menus; 13. Creating the General Ledger Menu; 14. Output and Input Programming; 15. Adding Records to a Database; 16. Editing Records in a Database; 17. Deleting Records from a Database; 18. Designing Processing Programs; 19. dBASE IV Reporting; [Part V: Advanced Programming Techniques:] 20. Using Memo Fields; 21. Managing dBASE IV Databases; 22. Implementation; 23. Special Programming Techniques; 24. Views, Queries, and Linked Data Files; 25. Using dBASE IV with Other Programs; 26. Debugging Programs with dBASE IV; 27. Using SQL; A. Glossary; B. dBASE IV Specifications; C. Codd's Twelve Rules; D. dBASE IV Functions; E. dBASE IV Commands; F. dBASE IV Set Switch Commands; G. dBASE IV Resources.

Townsend, Carl. The Visual Guide to dBASE for Windows: The Pictorial Companion to Windows Database Management & Programming. Chapel Hill, North Carolina: Ventana Press, 1994.
xx, 544pp. With a 3.5" disk.

Underdahl, Brian. Upgrading to MS-DOS 5. Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1991.
xii, 388pp. Contents: Introduction; 1. Introducing DOS 5; 2. Upgrading to DOS 5; 3. Customizing Memory Usage with DOS 5; 4. Configuring DOS 5; 5. Interfacing with the DOS 5 Shell; 6. Using DOS Macros; 7. Preparing, Protecting, and Repairing Disks; 8. Managing Directories and Files; 9. Maintaining Disk and File Integrity; 10. Using Additional New and Enhanced Commands; 11. EDIT: Using the Full-Screen Editor; 12. QBasic: A Revised BASIC; Command Reference.

Underdahl, Brian. Upgrading to MS-DOS 6. Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1993.
xiii, 258pp. A revision of Upgrading to MS-DOS 5. (1991).

Villani, Pat. FreeDOS Kernel. [n.p.]: Miller Freeman, 1996.

What Personal Computer? London: EMAP, [June/July 1989-].
Periodical. Issue 1: June/July 1989 (cover states: 'Display until July 16'). Launch editor: Rob Beattie.

Windows 95 Utilities. Macclesfield, Cheshire: IDG Media, [1996-1997].
Periodical. Sold with a CD-ROM. Originally a one-off publication, stated to be bi-monthly from issue 3. No. 2 (20pp, September 1996); No. 3 (20pp, January 1997); No. 4 (20pp, March 1997); No. 5 (20pp, May 1997); No. 6 (20pp, July 1997); No. 7 (20pp); No. 8 (20pp); No. 9 (On sale October 1997; 76pp); No. 10 (76pp); Re-vamp promised for No. 11 (To be on sale December 1997).

Windows Answers. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [November 1998-].
Periodical. Issue 1: November 1998. Launch editor: Nick Merritt. Initially supplied with a covermounted CD-ROM. First issue given as 'November', but accompanying CD-ROM coded: WA/01/10/98 (ie. October 1998).

Wyatt, Allen L., Sr., W. Edward Tiley, and Jon Paisley. Using MS-DOS 6.2. Special Edition. Carmel, Indiana: Que, 1993.
xx, 1115pp. 10th printing: 1996. Contents: [1. DOS Fundamentals:] 1. DOS and the Personal Computer; 2. Starting DOS; 3. Using DOS Commands; 4. Using the DOS Shell; [2. Files and Directories:] 5. Understanding Files and Directories; 6. Understanding Disks and Disk Drives; 7. Preparing and Maintaining Disks; 8. Working with Files; 9. Managing Your Files; 10. Protecting Your Data; 11. Emergency Procedures; [3. Controlling DOS:] 12. Working with System Information; 13. Controlling Your Environment; 14. Controlling Devices; [4. Maximizing DOS:] 15. Using the DOS Editor; 16. Understanding Batch Files; 17. Mastering Doskey and Macros; 18. Configuring Your Computer; 19. Getting the Most from Your Hard Drive; [5. Customizing DOS:] 20. Understanding ANSI.SYS; 21. Understanding the International Features of DOS; Command Reference; [Appendices:] A. Files Supplied with MS-DOS 6; B. DOS Environment Variables; C. DOS Messages; D. DOS and DOS Utility Programs, Keyboard Commands; E. ASCII and Extended ASCII Codes; F. ANSI Control Codes; G. International Country Codes.

Wyatt, Allen L., Sr., et al. Using MS-DOS 6.22. Special Edition. Indianapolis, Indiana: Que, 2000.
xxviii, 1106pp. With a CD-ROM. Given as the 2nd edition (in a series with varying titles).

[ART] An, Dr. Pei. "Computerised Digital Radio Control System." Electronics Today International November 1995. pp.32-43, 69.
Constructional article with schematics, PCB layout and code in Turbo Pascal 6. Uses the M145026 encoder and M145027 decoder.

[ART] An, Dr. Pei. "An RS232 I/O Card for Psion 3s and PCs." Electronics Today International Vol. 27, No. 3. 27 February-26 March 1998. pp.33-36, 39-42, 44, 68.
Constructional article. Uses a 6402 UART.

[ART] An, Dr. Pei. "Versatile 24 Line RS232 I/O Interface." Electronics Today International January 1995. pp.26-32, 66.
Constructional article. Includes the schematic, PCB and sample code.

[ART] Baars, P. H. "Smartcard Reader." Elektor Electronics January 1996. pp.67-68.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given, but not the software.

[ART] Becker, John. "EPE Virtual Scope." Everyday Practical Electronics January 1998. pp.55-63; February 1998. pp.135-143.
Constructional article. 2 parts. Computer-controlled dual-trace oscilloscope simulator.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "PC Interfacing." Electronics Today International June 1989. pp.13-20.
Detailed, technical feature. Covers the PC and AT buses.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "Coming to Blows." Electronics Today International December 1989. pp.36-39.
Review of EPROM programmers for the PC: Stag Microsystems Stratos; Sunshine Electronics EW-901BN; Hi-Lo System Research EPP-01.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "64K EPROM Emulator." Electronics Today International March 1991. pp.56-61, 63; Correction: April 1991. p.57: 'The 64K EPROM Emulator last month should have displayed Fig 2c 2564 pod Fig 2d 2532 pod'.
Constructional article with a PCB foil.

[ART] Branscombe, Mary. "Browsing the Web - Again." PC Plus July 1995, No. 105. pp.330-331, 333-334.
Comparative review of web browsers: Mosaic 1 and 2.00 alpha 7 (W3.1); WinWeb 1.0 alpha 2.2.1s (W3.1); Cello 1.01a (W3.1); IBM WebExplorer 1.0 (OS/2); and WebSurf (W3.1, part of NetManage Internet Chameleon).

[ART] Buckin, Andrew. "Hard Disk Interface for the Printer Port." Elektor Electronics January 2002. pp.12-17.

[ART] Campbell, Martin. "Computer Dual User Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics July 1997. pp.488-490.
Constructional article. Use one computer from two different locations up to 10m apart, but not at the same time.

[ART] Denning, Adam. "Pop-Up Programs." Your Computer June 1987. pp.60-61, 63-65.
Part 1 of a 2-part article. Writing TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident) programs.

[ART] Ferber, J. "Infrared Remote Control for PCs using the RC5 Code." Elektor Electronics July/August 2001. pp.110-112.
Uses an AT90S2313 microcontroller, and a TSOP1736 or SFH5110 for the IR.

[ART] Gann, Roger. "How to Upgrade and Update Windows 3.x." What Personal Computer Issue 98. September 1997. pp.55-57.
Includes information on Win32s, Point to Point Server Update, CD Audio Driver, Video for Windows, Miscellaneous Windows Files, Speaker Driver, Serial.386, Network Updates, OLE, Calculator, Fax, 3.1 to 3.11, TCP/IP (TCP32B.EXE), and Internet Explorer 3.02a.

[ART] Garroch, Kenn. "Baby Blue." Personal Computer News No. 64. 9 June 1984. pp.32-33, 35, 37.
Review of the IBM PCjr.

[ART] Gerlach, Ingo. "I2C Interface for RS232 Port." Elektor Electronics July/August 2001. pp.48-50.

[ART] Gerlach, Ingo. "Versatile Centronics/I2C Interface with Logic Analyser." Elektor Electronics October 2000. pp.68-69.
Uses an EPP.

[ART] Grodzik, Richard. "Compact 27C16 EPROM Programmer." Electronics Today International Vol. 27, No. 5. 24 April-21 May 1998. pp.61-64, 66.
Constructional article. Runs from DOS commands. Uses a PIC16C54XT/P microcontroller (code given).

[ART] Grodzik, Richard. "Universal Infra-Red Printer Adaptor." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 18, No. 138. June 1999. pp.62-64.
Constructional article. IrDA 'lite' interface. Schematic and PCB layout. Uses a PIC16LF84 and HP HSDL1001 IR module.

[ART] Gueulle, Patrick. "Chipcard Reader/Programmer." Elektor Electronics September 1997. pp.26-31.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Sample code given in FORTH. Software available separately. Covers various card formats.

[ART] Gueulle, Patrick. "Mini Programmer for Serial EEPROMs." Elektor Electronics June 1997. Microprocessors Supplement. pp.II-III.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. Capable of programming Philips D2000 and D4000 chip cards.

[ART] Gueulle, Patrick. "PC-Controlled DTMF Decoder." Elektor Electronics June 1997. Microprocessors Supplement. pp.XIV-XV.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. With a sample program in GW-BASIC.

[ART] Gueulle, Patrick. "Smartcard Reader/Writer." Elektor Electronics Part 1: December 1997. pp.38-41, 43; Part 2: January 1998. pp.68-69.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. PIC16C84-based.

[ART] Hartog, U. "R/C Interface for PC Flight Simulator." Elektor Electronics October 1998. Extra Supplement pp.12-15.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Using a R/C model aircraft controller instead of a joystick to control a flight simulator.

[ART] "IRQ and DMA Usage." Elektor Electronics June 1998. Extra Supplement pp.10-12.
By the magazine's editorial staff.

[ART] Johnson, Neil. "Universal Interface Card for the PC." Electronics Today International October 1992. pp.16-22; November 1992. pp.46-50, 60-61.
Constructional article with PCB foils and a software listing.

[ART] Joostens, J. "Data Acquisition by Modem" Elektor Electronics March 1998. Extra Supplement pp.6-11.
Constructional article. 89C52-based design. Works with ANSI and VT102 terminal programs. 2400 and 9600 baud. Password protection. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately.

[ART] Holmes, Mike. "Get More from Visual BASIC 3." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Part 2: Vol. 17, No. 125. May 1998. pp.47-51; Part 3: Vol. 17, No. 126. June 1998. pp.54-58; Part 4: Vol. 17, No. 127. July 1998. pp.48-51; Part 5: Vol. 17, No. 128. August 1998. pp.67-69; Part 6: Vol. 17, No. 129. September 1998. pp.62-65.
6 part series.

[ART] Kainka, B. "Do More with the Gameport." Elektor Electronics September 1998. Extra Supplement pp.6-11.
With sample programs.

[ART] Kainka, B. "Infrared Transceiver for the PC." Elektor Electronics January 2002. pp.62-66; February 2002. pp.52-57.
Including the use of the RC5 standard.

[ART] Kainka, B. "Simple IrDA Receiver." Elektor Electronics July-August 2002. p.19.
Converts a PC serial port into an IrDA port. With a BASIC program.

[ART] Kainka, B. "Simple IrDA Transmitter." Elektor Electronics July-August 2002. p.99.
Sends a single character. With a BASIC program.

[ART] Kainka, B. "USB Interface: Experimenting with the Universal Serial Bus." Elektor Electronics September 2000. pp.44-49.
Based on the Cypress CY7C6300 microcontroller. See also: Jung, H. "Elektor Electronics USB Interface under Linux." Elektor Electronics July-August 2002. pp.96-97.

[ART] Lemmens, L. "4-Way Serial Port Switch." Elektor Electronics October 1997. pp.28-31.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Connect four devices to one serial port.

[ART] Lorek, Chris. "JOURNAL PC-Based Logbook Review." Ham Radio Today Vol. 16, No. 2. 30 January 1998. pp.9-11.
Review of JOURNAL by Derek Hughes.

[ART] Lorek, Chris. "JVComm32: The New 'JVFAX for Windows'." Ham Radio Today Vol. 16, No. 8. August 1998. p.11.
Review of JVComm32 by Eberhard Backeshoff.

[ART] Lorek, Chris. "Multimode Data PC Interface." Ham Radio Today Vol. 16, No. 7. July 1998. pp.10-11.
PCB design, TX and RX options. Connects your radio to your PC's serial port to work with programs such as HamComm, MScan and JVFAX to send or receive FAX, CW, RTTY, AmTOR, and SSTV.

[ART] Lorek, Chris. "RadioMax Radio Control/Scanning Software." Ham Radio Today Vol. 16, No. 11. November 1998. pp.12-13.
Review of RadioMax by Future Scanning Systems.

[ART] Lucassen, R. "Experimental Power Supply for PCs." Elektor Electronics September 1998. Extra Supplement pp.2-5.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Fits in a drive bay, adjustable from 1-12V, 50mA-1.5A.

[ART]
"The Modern Printer Port: IEEE-1284 is Quickly Gaining Ground."
Elektor Electronics April 1998. Extra Supplement pp.12-16.
Detailed analysis of the parallel port specification established in March 1994. No author cited.

[ART] Oehlerking, B. "Light Intensity Measurement with a PC. No External Power Supply Required." Elektor Electronics February 1998. Extra Supplement pp.14-15.
Connects to the serial port.

[ART] Oehlerking, B. "RS232-Controlled 8-Channel Switch: Using CMOS Logic and Visual BASIC." Elektor Electronics June 1998. Extra Supplement pp.6-8.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Accessing Serial Ports via MSCOMM Control." Everyday Practical Electronics June 2002. pp.442-443.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "AD8300 Serial Digital to Analogue Converter." Everyday Practical Electronics April 1999. pp.288-289.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Addressing the Printer Port." Everyday Practical Electronics May 1998. pp.357-358.
Circuit and BASIC program.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Audio Frequency Meter Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics August 1997. pp.560-561.
Circuit and BASIC program. Connects via the printer port.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Audio Millivoltmeter Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics June 1997. pp.411-412.
Circuit and BASIC program.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Bidirectional Printer Ports." Everyday Practical Electronics April 2000. pp.272-273.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Digital Capacitance Meter Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics October 1996. pp.768-769.
Circuit and BASIC program. Interfaces via the printer port.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Direct Control of PC Serial Lines using MSCOMM." Everyday Practical Electronics February 2003. pp.138-139.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Frequency Synthesis Using a PLL and Divide-By-N Counter." Everyday Practical Electronics April 1997. pp.248-249.
With circuits.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Electronics March 1992. pp.160-161.
Column. Using D/A converters.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday with Practical Electronics September 1993. pp.700-701.
Column. The digital and analogue inputs of the games port.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics July 1994. pp.540-541.
Column. Problems interfacing circuits with PCs. Using decoder chips.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics January 1995. pp.34-35.
Column. Fibre-optic data communications. RX and TX circuits.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics September 1995. pp.717-718.
Column. C.W. Tone Decoder circuit to read morse code with Hamcomm 3.0.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics January 1997. pp.42-43.
Column. Signal generation.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics February 1997. pp.116-117.
Column. Data lines as inputs on bi-directional printer ports.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics March 1997. pp.204-205.
Column. Signal generation. Includes a circuit based on the 74HC161.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Introducing VB.Net and VB 2005 Express." Everyday Practical Electronics October 2004. pp.698-699.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "LCD Monitor for Your PC." Everyday Practical Electronics September 1998. pp.670-671.
Uses a Hitachi LM016L LCD module and the printer port. BASIC listing.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Logic I.C. Monitoring via a PC." Everyday Practical Electronics August 2001. pp.566-567.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "1Hz to 32kHz Frequency Meter Interface." Everyday Practical Electronics October 1997. pp.696-697.
Circuit and BASIC program. Uses the printer interface.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "PC Audio Frequency Meter." Everyday Practical Electronics June 1999. pp.420-424.
Constructional project. BASIC program. Measures up to 32.767kHz with 0.5Hz resolution.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "PC Capacitance Meter." Everyday Practical Electronics October 1998. pp.752-757.
Constructional project. Stripboard design and BASIC program.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "PC Serial Port Interfacing." Everyday Practical Electronics April 2002. pp.258-259.
Using the 6402 UART and MAX202.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "PC Transistor Tester." Everyday Practical Electronics August 1998. pp.603-608.
Constructional project. Stripboard design and BASIC program.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Power from the Serial or Parallel Port." Everyday Practical Electronics June 2000. pp.424-425.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Producing a DIY MIDI Adaptor for your PC." Everyday Practical Electronics February 2002. pp.94-95.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "A Serial Approach to PC Add-Ons." Everyday Practical Electronics October 1999. pp.756-757.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "A Serial Approach to PC Add-Ons." Everyday Practical Electronics December 1999. pp.885-886.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Simple Analogue-to-Digital Converter using a 12-Bit Chip." Everyday Practical Electronics December 2001. pp.866-867.
Uses the AD7896AN.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Simple Transistor Checker." Everyday Practical Electronics March 1998. pp.192-193.
Circuit and BASIC program.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Single-Chip 32-Bit Output Port." Everyday Practical Electronics October 2001. pp.738-739.
Uses the UCN5818AF. Visual BASIC listing included.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Sound Card MIDI/Games Port and PC Upgrading." Everyday Practical Electronics December 1997. pp.842-843.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Team Quiz Monitoring via the Printer Port." Everyday Practical Electronics July 1998. pp.506-507.
Circuit and BASIC program.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "A 12-Bit Serial A/D Converter using the AD7896." Everyday Practical Electronics February 2000. pp.120-121.
Circuit, description, and software for Delphi.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Using MSCOMM to Receive Serial Data." Everyday Practical Electronics August 2002. pp.602-603.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Visual Programming for a Virtual Meter." Everyday Practical Electronics June 1999. pp.428-430.
Using Borland Delphi 1 for direct access to PC ports. This is a feature dropped from later versions, but version 1 is included with later versions to allow 16-bit programming.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Visual Programming for PC Add-Ons." Everyday Practical Electronics August 1999. pp.590-591.
Using assembler routines in Borland Delphi, and VisualBASIC to access PC ports.

[ART] Rigby, A. "Universal I/O Interface for IBM PCs." Elektor Electronics May 1991. pp.24-26.
Constructional article. Includes a schematic and PCB. Designed for XT, AT, and 386 PCs.

[ART] Saccasijn, E., and K. H. A. Duesman. "Projects for PC & Infrared Remote-Control." Elektor Electronics June 1998. Extra Supplement pp.14-16.
Constructional articles allowing a PC to decode RC-5 IR remote control signals, and the transmission of PC keyboard commands by remote control. Schematics and PCBs given. Software available separately.

[ART] Schröder, J. "12-Bit ADC Interface." Elektor Electronics October 1997. pp.54-56.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. Analogue measurement via a PC's printer port.

[ART] Schuurmans, J. "Serial I/O Port: RS232 Port Goes Parallel." Elektor Electronics November 1996. pp.38-39, 41.
Constructional article. Schematic, PCB and software given. 4 parallel inputs and 2 parallel outputs on a serial port.

[ART] Smith, Stephen. "Games Port Tutorial." Electronics Today International May 1996. pp.26-28.
Detailed examination. Example program in Turbo C.

[ART] Stephens, Paul, Simon Williams, Mary Branscombe, Chris Bidmead, and Huw Collingbourne. "Windows 95." PC Plus October 1995, No. 108. pp.259-290.
Review of Windows 95 in a series of articles.

[ART] Urban, C. F. "Flash EPROM Programmer/Emulator." Elektor Electronics June 1996. pp.32-37.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given, but not the software. Works with AMD 29F010 and 29F040 Flash EPROMs.

[ART] Verrij, J. F. "A Simple A-D Converter." Elektor Electronics June 1998. Extra Supplement pp.2-5.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Sample QBASIC program included.

[ART] Viernickel, K. "Keyboard Swap for PCs." Elektor Electronics June 1996. pp.40-41, 43.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Allows the use of two keyboards (AT or PS/2) on one PC.

[ART] Weidner, H. "Centronics Relay Card." Elektor Electronics September 1997. pp.52-55.
Constructional article. 8 relays. Schematic and PCB given. Sample BASIC programs given.

[ART] Walraven, K. "Infra-Red RS232 Link." Elektor Electronics November 1996. pp.58-61, 63.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. IrDA interface for the serial port. Uses a TOIM3232 RS232-to-IrDA interface chip and a TFDS4000 IR TRX module.

[ART] Weidner, H. "Data Acquisition System." Elektor Electronics September 1997. pp.18-21, 23.
Constructional article. Schematic and PCB given. Software available separately. Built around an 80C31 microcontroller.

[ART] Williams, Tony, Maurice Hunt, and Dennis Butcher. "IBM-PC Teletext Decoder for Windows: Interface Card." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 14, No. 94. October 1995. pp.24-31.
[Part 1.] Constructional article. Maplin supplied a kit. Uses an XC3020 FPGA.

[ART] Williams, Tony, Maurice Hunt, and Dennis Butcher. "Compact Television Tuner for use with the IBM-PC Teletext Decoder for Windows." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 14, No. 94. October 1995. pp.40-46.
[Part 2.] Constructional article. Maplin supplied a kit. Covers the 400 to 800MHz TV band (channels E22-E62). Uses a TDA8341 TV IF amplifier and demodulator.

[ART] Winstanley, Alan. "Net Work." Everyday Practical Electronics June 1998. p.469; July 1998. p.549.
Details on using FTP from DOS within two regular monthly articles.

IBM RISC System/6000

Harris, Clive. The IBM RISC System/6000. London: McGraw-Hill, 1993.
xiv, 265pp. Contents: 1. IBM and Open Systems; 2. UNIX Market-Place; 3. UNIX from IBM-AIX; 4. RISC System/6000; 5. Using the RISC System/6000; 6. The RS/6000 and IBM; Appendix A. Other IBM Systems.

Hoskins, Jim. IBM RISC System/6000: A Business Perspective. New York: J. Wiley, 1991.
xx, 295pp. 2nd edition: New York: J. Wiley, 1992 (xxiv, 295pp). 3rd edition: New York: J. Wiley, 1993 (xx, 346pp). 4th edition: New York: Wiley, 1994 (xviii, 364pp). 5th edition: New York: J. Wiley, 1995 (xvi, 398pp). 6th edition: New York: John Wiley, 1996 (xix, 405pp).

ICL OPD (One Per Desk)

A variant of the Sinclair QL with a built-in telephone. The same design was also sold as the British Telecom Merlin Tonto and the Australian Telecom Computerphone. 68008 CPU running at 7.5MHz, 128K ROM (extending to 320K with ROM packs), 128K-256K RAM and 2K battery-backed RAM. 32K VRAM taken from main RAM. 42 or 64 or 84 characters x 24 lines, 256 x 256 (8 colours) or 512 x 256 (4 colours), TI TMP5220C speech synthesiser with a built-in loudspeaker. Interfaces for the ROM pack and telephony module, parallel printer, and RGB monitor. 2 x 100K microdrives built-in, telephone handset built-in. Power supplied by the monitor. Q-DOS OS. Full-travel 73-key keyboard.

Lang, Kathy, and Terry Lang. Managing Your Business with the One Per Desk/Tonto. Eastbourne: Holt-Saunders, 1985.

IMSAI (San Leandro, California)

VDP-4X Series of Video Data Processors: VDP-40 (180K FDD); VDP-42 (400K FDD); VDP-44 (780K FDD). All have an 8085 CPU, 32K/64K RAM, dual internal 5.25" FDDs, 9" internal CRT, internal keyboard, and serial I/O. These systems use the IMDOS OS, supplied with 8080/85 assembler, video/context editor, debugger, and FDD utilities. The 780K FDDs use DD 77-track drives.

Interact (Interact Computers, Ann Arbor, Michigan)

8080-based micro with a built-in keyboard and cassette recorder. 16K RAM. Colour output to a TV. Sound through the TV. Internal cassette storage bay. 2 hand controller (joystick) ports. Edu-BASIC. Level II BASIC (may be TRS-80 Level II BASIC compatible).

Interak 1

The name is short for 'International Size Card Rack Mounting Computer'. ISBUS-A based system. The cards are also known as 'Kemitron' from the brand name. Uses a 4MHz Z80A CPU. Supplied by Greenbank Electronics in kit form, card by card.

Interak System Notes. Wirral, Merseyside: Greenbank Electronics, 1982-1983.
No. 1, July 1982 (INTK-1/1); No. 2, February 1983 (INTK-1/2; No. 1 with the addition of a 6pp letter).

Intertec Intertube and Emulator (Intertec Data Systems, Columbia, South Carolina)

Terminals resembling the later Superbrain computers, but smaller. The Intertube was a dumb terminal, the Emulator could emulate a range of common terminals.

Intertec Superbrain (Intertec Data Systems, Columbia, South Carolina)

Two 4MHz Z80A CPUs (one being a slave processor that can only access the 2K ROM, Data Buffer and Disk Interface), 2K ROM, 32K-64K DRAM (up to thirty-two 16K x 1 bit DRAMs in 4 banks, 0-3), 1K SRAM, built-in keyboard, built-in 12" mono monitor (80 x 24), 1 or 2 x 5.25" DD FDDs, 2 serial ports, DOS v.3.0 for CP/M 2.2. S-100 bus adaptor option. Weight: 23Kg. Pressing both red buttons at the same time resets the computer. Model 10 (Network only, no FDDs); Model Jr (179K SS FDDs); Model QD (358K DS FDDs); Model SD (716K FDDs).

The network version of the Superbrain was called CompuStar, using parallel cables. File servers: DSS-10 (10Mb 8" Winchester HDD); CDC (96Mb, 80Mb fixed HDD with a 16Mb removable platter); Priam (144Mb 14" platter Winchester HDD).

A Superbrain II appeared in 1982 with enhanced DOS and graphics.

[Manual]
Superbrain Users Manual.
[Fourth edition:] Columbia, South Carolina: Intertec Data Systems Corporation, September 1980.
Although perfect bound, supplements appear to have been added to editions of the manual. Note that owners with Revision-00 of the Keyboard/CPU module should use only the first or second edition of the manual. The fourth edition (Document No. 6831010, September 1980) is suitable for owners with Revision-01 of the Keyboard/CPU module and version 3.0 or higher of the DOS and boot loader. 4th edition (sectional pagination, sectional titles given-these differ from those given on the contents page): 1. Introduction; 2. Major Components; 3. System Operation; 4. An Introduction to CP/M Features and Facilities; 5. ED: A Context Editor for the CP/M Disk System. User's Manual; 6. CP/M 2.0 User's Guide for CP/M 1.4 Owners; 7. CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool (DDT) User's Guide; 8. CP/M Assembler (ASM) User's Guide; 9. The CP/M 2.0 Interface Guide; 10. CP/M 2.0 Alteration Guide; 11. Microsoft BASIC-80 Release 5.0 Reference Manual; 12. Microsoft Utility Software Manual; 13. Service Information; 14. Hardware Addendums; 15. Software Addendums. Examined copy notes: Section 4: 'Revision of January 1978'; Section 5: Has 'Appendix A: ED 1.4 Enhancements' (2pp); Section 11: Has 'Revision 1', '© Microsoft, 1979' on the title page; Section 13: Has 'Superbrain Documentation Non-Disclosure Agreement IDS-350B' (1p); 'Equipment Malfunction Report IDS-505A' (1p); 'Superbrain Limited Warranty Registration Form' (2pp); 'Customer Comment Card' (2pp); Section 14: Has 'Engineering Change Order IDS-910A' (ECO 01004, January 1980, Expanding Memory Size from 32K to 64K on Revision 1 CPU Modules, those with Revision 0 CPU modules should consult ECO 119001, 1p); Section 15: Has 'Superbrain DOS 3.0 Description' (2pp); 'Technical Bulletin IDS-912A' (B119004, November 1979, DOS Diskette, 6ff); 'Technical Bulletin IDS-912A' (B010008, 10 January 1980, Main Power Supply, 1ff); 'Technical Bulletin IDS-912A' (B010009, 10 January 1980, Keyboard/CPU Module, 1ff); FCC RF interference note pasted on to the title page.

[ART] Eisenbach, Sue. "Superbrain." Personal Computer World August 1980. pp.50-51, 53, 55.
Review of the QD model.

IRS-DIALTECH

The IRS-DIALTECH service allowed UK users to access the IRS (Information Retrieval System) based at the European Space Agency (ESA) in Frascati, near Rome. IRS-DIALTECH was administered by the Department of Industry, London. Connection to the system was via two London phone numbers, one operating at 300 baud, the other at 1200/75 baud. 110 baud access was also available. There were substantial charges (in International Accounting Units) for accessing files on top of the phone charges. The service could also be accessed via EURONET and PSS.

DIALTECH Subscriber Record Sheet. [London]: [IRS-DIALTECH], 1982.
[1]pp. Coded: 'TR313(Rev 5/82)'.

[Form letter to those enquiring about the IRS-DIALTECH service.] London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1983.
[1]pp. Coded: 'TR335(Rev 8/82)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'. Signed by Julie Baylis on behalf of B. A. Kingsmill, dated 13 December 1983.

Techsearch: Computerised Literature Searches to Order. [London]: HMSO for the DOI and COI, 1982.
Leaflet describing the TECHSEARCH facility. Contact address given as 'Mike Everest, TECHSEARCH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'. Imprint: 'TR300(REV 10/82) Prepared by the Department of Industry and the Central Office of Information. Reprinted 1982. Printed in England for Her Majesty's Stationery Office by Redington & Co. Dd 8299209 Pro 18767'.

IRS-DIALTECH: Terminal Specifications for IRS via DIALTECH or EURONET. [London]: [IRS-DIALTECH], 1982.
[1]pp. Coded: 'TR303(Rev 11/82)'.

IRS-DIALTECH: Choosing a Computer Terminal. London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1982.
[2]pp. Coded: 'TR304(Rev 11/82)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

DIALTECH Service. General Instructions and Information. London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1982.
Issue 6. November 1982. [2], 5pp. Coded: 'TR316(Rev 11/82)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

Agreement for DIALTECH Service. [London]: [IRS-DIALTECH], 1982.
[2], 4, [2]pp. Coded: 'TR336(Rev 11/82)'. A formal agreement to sign up for the service between the end-user and the Secretary of State for Industry on behalf of the Department of Industry. Contact address given as 'B. A. Kingsmill, IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

IRS-DIALTECH: Today's Technology Today. Information Retrieval through the IRS-DIALTECH Service. London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1982.
Colour brochure. [4]pp. Coded: 'TR351(Rev 11/82)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

IRS-DIALTECH: Files Available - January 1983. [London]: [IRS-DIALTECH], 1983.
[1]pp. Coded: 'TR357(1-83)'.

TECHSEARCH Request Form. London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1983.
[2]pp. Coded: 'TR310(Rev 4/83)'. Contact address given as 'Mr. M. J. Everest, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

IRS-DIALTECH: Summary of Commands. London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1983.
[2]pp. Coded: 'TR343(Rev 7/83)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

IRS-DIALTECH: Training Courses. London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1983.
3pp. Coded: 'TR359(Rev 8/83)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

DIALTECH: Training Application. [London]: [IRS-DIALTECH], [c.1983].
[1]pp. No code. Blank form.

IRS-DIALTECH: Charges. London: IRS-DIALTECH, 1983.
3pp. Coded: 'TR311(Rev.10/83)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'.

IRS-DIALTECH: New DIALTECH Users Please Note. [London]: [IRS-DIALTECH], 1983.
[1]pp. Coded: 'TR337(10/83)'. Contact address given as 'IRS-DIALTECH, Department of Industry, Room 204, Ebury Bridge House, 2-18 Ebury Bridge Road, London'. Concerns a new user discount offer.

Jupiter Ace (Jupiter Cantab, Cambridge)

Designed by Richard Altwasser and Steven Vickers. Z80A-based, 3.25MHz micro with 8K ROM, 3K-51K RAM, 32 characters x 24 lines monochrome display (64 x 48 graphics). Internal speaker, output to UHF TV, 1500 baud cassette tape and expansion bus ports. Could use some ZX81 peripherals with minor adaptations. Built-in 40-key rubber keyboard. External PSU. Runs FORTH from ROM instead of BASIC.

[Manual]
Jupiter Ace: FORTH Programming.
2nd edition; Cambridge: Jupiter Cantab, 1982.
By Steven Vickers.

Bishop, Owen Neville. Easy Add-On Projects for Spectrum, ZX81 and Ace. London: Babani, August 1983.
BP124. [8], 181pp. Contents: Introduction; 1. Pulse Detector; 2. Picture Digitiser; 3. Five-Key Pad; 4. Model Controller; 5. Bleeper; 6. Lamp Flasher, 7. Light Pen; 8. Magnetic Catch; 9. Lap Sensor; 10. Photo-Flash; 11. Games Control; 12. Rain Detector; 13. Weathercock; 14. Anemometer; 15. Thermometer; 16. Barometer; 17. Sunshine Recorder; Appendix A. The Address Decoder; Appendix B. Pin Lead-Out Details; Special Note for Readers in USA.

[ART] Freestone, Colin. "Trump Card." Hobby Electronics October 1983. pp.58-60.
Allows some ZX81 peripherals to be used with the Ace by re-routing signals at the edge connector. The Ace does not produce ROMCS and RAMCS (chip select) signals, so not all peripherals may be usable.

[ART] Freestone, Nigel. "Jupiter Ace Review." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1982. pp.70-71.
Review.

[ART] Lennox, Jim. "The First of Forth." What Micro? February 1983. pp.51, 53-54.
Review.

[ART] Lord, Mike. "Extending the Ace." Hobby Electronics August 1983. pp.42-45, 64.
I/O board with 2Kb or 4Kb of extra RAM. Suitable for controlling the HEBOT robot.

[ART] Moody, Paul, and Chris Lloyd. "Programmable Joystick Controller." Hobby Electronics August 1983. pp.11-16.
For the ZX81, Jupiter Ace, and Spectrum.

[ART] Perry, Roland. "Expansion Bus: Jupiter Ace Soundboard from Essex Micro Electronics." Radio and Electronics World January 1984. pp.74-75.
Review.

[ART] "Searching for Gold at the Beginning of the Rainbow." The First Sinclair User Annual: The Complete ZX Companion. London: ECC Publications, 1982. pp.47-48.
Interview with Steven Vickers and Richard Altwasser, ex-Sinclair Research, as they were preparing to develop the Jupiter Ace.

Kaypro

Produced by Kaypro, originally Non Linear Systems Inc., the Kaypro II was the first Kaypro model. Transportable with 2.5MHz Z80, 2K ROM, 64K RAM, 2K VRAM, built-in 9" CRT with 80 x 24 text, two 5.25" 190K SS DD full-height FDDs, internal PSU, running CP/M 2.2, and weighing 13Kg. Other versions: Kaypro 2'84 (1984; 4MHz Z80A, two SS DD half-height FDDs); Kaypro 2X (1984; 4MHz Z80A, two DS DD half-height FDDs); Kaypro II Plus 88 (1984; 8088-based); 'New 2' (1985; an 2X with 1 or 2 DS FDDs and no internal modem). The Kaypro 4'84 was renamed the Kaypro 2X or 2X MTC, replacing the original model.

The Kaypro IV (1983; later renamed the 4'83) was a Kaypro II with DS DD full-height FDDs. The Kaypro 4 (1984; known as the 4'84) was a transportable with 4MHz Z80A, 2K ROM, 64K RAM, 2K VRAM, built-in 9" CRT with 80 x 25 text, two 5.25" 390K DS DD half-height FDDs, internal PSU, running CP/M 2.2, 2 serial ports, parallel port, and internal modem. Weight: 15Kg. The Kaypro 4 Plus 88 had an 8088 second processor for PC compatibility running with 256K RAM.

The Kaypro 10 (1983) was a transportable with 4MHz Z80A, 2K ROM, 64K RAM, 2K VRAM, built-in 9" CRT with 80 x 24 text, one 5.25" 390K FDD, optional 10Mb HDD, internal PSU, running CP/M and ZCPR, serial port, parallel port, and internal modem. Weight: 12.5Kg.

The Kaypro Robie (1984) was a desktop machine with 4MHz Z80A, 4K ROM, 64K RAM, 80 x 24 mono text, two 5.25" 2.6Mb FDDs, and an optional 5Mb HDD. Built-in PSU. Running CP/M. Two serial ports, parallel port, and an internal modem. The high-density FDDs had a design defect that with continued use destroyed the disks.

The Kaypro 16 (1985) was a transportable PC clone running MS-DOS with a 4.77MHz 8088 CPU, 256K-512K RAM, 40/80 x 25 text, CGA and MDA graphics, detachable keyboard, built-in 9" green monitor, 5.25" 360K FDD, 10Mb HDD. IBM expansion slot, parallel, serial, and external monitor ports. Built-in PSU. Weight: 16Kg. The Kaypro 16/2 had two FDDs, no HDD, and a software bundle.

The Kaypro 2000 (1985) was a portable PC clone running MS-DOS with a 4.77MHz 8088 CPU, 256K-768K RAM, 16K VRAM, detachable keyboard, 16 shades LCD greyscale display, 40/80 x 25 text, 640 x 200 CGA graphics, 8087 co-pro socket, 720K 3.5" FDD. Serial port, 2 x RJ-11 ports, 100-pin expansion port. Lead-acid battery or mains adaptor. An optional docking station had 2 expansion slots and bays for 2 drives for a FDD and a HDD, with an adapter for an external 3.5" or 5.25" FDD, a parallel port, and a short expansion slot. An external battery was also available. Licensed to SMT (France) and sold as the Goupil Club.

The Kaypro 1 (1986) was a repackaged 2X with the FDDs mounted vertically.

The Kaypro PC was a PC desktop clone. The Kaypro 286i was a PC AT clone. Both included technical advances over the basic IBM specification.

Bennett, M. D. The Instant Expert's Guide to the Kaypro II. New York, N.Y.: Dell Publishing Co., [1984].
Illustrated by Bob Johnson.

Frankel, Steven M. The Compleat Kaypro. Complete User Instruction for the Kaypro II, Kaypro IV, and Kaypro 10. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., [1984].

Houze, William C., and David Lenfest. The Kaypro, Plain and Simple. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [1984].

Houze, William C., and David Lenfest. Kaypro Word Processing, Plain and Simple. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [1985].

The Human Connection. Using CP/M on your Kaypro 10. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [1984].
The Human Connection is a firm.

McWilliams, Peter. Word Processing on the Kaypro. Los Angeles, California: Prelude Press; New York, N.Y.: Distributed by Ballantine Books, 1983.
A special edition of The Word Processing Book for owners and prospective owners of the Kaypro II, 4 or 10.

Oaks, Robert. The Epson Connection: Kaypro. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., [1985].

Perry, James T., and Robert F. McJunkins. CP/M for the Kaypro. With an Introduction to dBASE II. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing, 1984.

Pro-Files: The Magazine for Kaypro Users. Solana Beach, California: Non-Linear Systems, [July/August 1983-].
Periodical. Bi-monthly to March/April 1984. Issues from October 1984 have the title Profiles. Recorded issues to January 1986.

Rensin, Joseph K., and Larry Joel Goldstein. BASICally Kaypro: Programming the 2, 4, and 10. Bowie, Maryland: Brady Communications Co., [1985].

Ryan, Lee F., and Andrew Townsend. The Kaypro Connection: Selecting, Installing and Using Peripherals. Blue Ridge Summit, Philadelphia: Tab Books, [1985].
No. 1880.

Uston, Ken. Illustrated Guide to the Kaypro. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, [1984].

Weber Systems, Inc. Kaypro User's Handbook. New York: Ballantine Books, 1984.

Williams, Gene B. Chilton's Guide to Kaypro Repair and Maintenance. Radnor, Philadelphia: Chilton Book Co., [1985].

Wolenik, Robert. Instant WordStar for the Kaypro. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing Co., [1984].

Kenilworth 83CG

Z80-based portable. 64K RAM, CP/M, choice of built-in mono or colour monitors. Weight: 28lbs.

KIM-1

Produced by MOS Technology in 1975. MOS Technology was purchased by Commodore. 6502-based SBC running at 1MHz. 2K ROM, 1K RAM, serial (for a teletype terminal) and cassette tape interfaces, six 7-segment hex LEDs, hex keyboard, and an expansion port for RAM packs. Power requirements were 5v and 12v.

Butterfield, Jim, Stan Ockers, and Eric Rehnke, eds. The First Book of KIM. Rochelle Park, N.J.: Hayden, 1978.

Leventhal, Lance A. Microcomputer Experimentation with the MOS Technology KIM-1. Englewood Cliffs; London: Prentice-Hall, [c.1982].

[ART] Bridge, Theodore E. "High Speed Cassette I/O for the KIM-1." Dr. Dobb's Journal June/July 1978, Vol. 3, No. 6. pp.24-27 (pp.263-266 of the annual volume).
Program listing.

[ART] Corbett, C. "A Mighty Micromite: The KIM-1 Evaluation Kit." Personal Computer World August 1978. pp.24-26.
Review.

Laser 200

4K RAM, 16K RAM pack, 128 x 64 colour graphics resolution, internal keyboard.

Limrose (Northwich, Cheshire)

Microtutor MPT8080: 8080-based training systemy . 1K RAM. Expansion modules: expansion motherboard; RAM; ROM; Teletype interface; VDU interface; cassette interface; EPROM/PROM programmer; EPROM eraser.

LMC6800-2 Microcomputer: 1K LIMBUG ROM, 4K RAM, 8K BASIC Interpreter in ROM, Teletype/VDU interface, 19" rack and 21-slot motherboard. Uses the Motorola EXORciser bus, offering card compatibility with 'little or no' modifications. Sold as a kit.

Luxor ABC-80

Z80A, 16K ROM with BASIC (expandable to a 24K ROM with Databoard 4680 BASIC), 16K-32K DRAM, 1K VRAM, built-in keyboard, Databoard 4680 bus, DataDisc 80 dual FDD (80K), 19" rack form. Running Cassette BASIC, Disk BASIC, and DOS.

[ART] Eisenbach, Sue. "Luxor ABC-80." Personal Computer World January 1980. pp.43-44, 47-49.
Review.

Mattel Aquarius I and II

The original Aquarius was a Z80A-based 3.5MHz micro with an 8K ROM (containing a Microsoft BASIC interpreter), 4K (1.7K available under BASIC) to 32K RAM, 16 colours, sound, 80 x 72 screen, 320 x 192 addressable, with 40 characters x 25 lines. Built-in 49-key rubber keyboard (considerably worse than the Spectrum's). 600 baud cassette tape, 1200 baud dedicated thermal printer/plotter, and expansion bus ports. Mini-Expander allowed the use of program cartridges, 4K, 16K and 32K RAM packs, and additional sound abilities. External 12v PSU. The Aquarius II came with a 16K RAM pack and could be taken up to 52K. It also had a better keyboard (it could hardly have had a worse one). Both machines failed to sell.

[Manual]
Mattel Inc. Aquarius Guide to Home Computing.
Hawthorne, California: Mattel Inc., 1982.
Multi-paged. Spiral bound. Coded: 5931-0240-G1. Contents: Introduction; 1. Getting Your Feet Wet; 2. Diving In; 3. Cassette Commands; 4. Branching Out; 5. Loops that Count; 6. A Splash of Color; 7. Subroutines - The Round-Trip Ticket; 8. READ...DATA - The Efficiency Experts; 9. Maximum Storage with Arrays; 10. Functions - The Super Shortcuts; 11. Digital Clock; Reference Section; [Appendix:] Programming 'Bugs' and Error Messages; Memory Maps; Characters; Arithmetic Operator Precedence; Practice Programs.

[Manual]
Mattel Inc. Aquarius Home Computer System Simplified Instruction Cards.
Hawthorne, California: Mattel Inc., 1982.
16 cards spiral bound with a folded card stand. Coded: 5931-0250-G3. Cards: Keyboard Overlay; Special Keys; Back Panel; Set Up; Your First Program; Graphic Man; Running Man; Colors; Checkbook; Editing; Troubleshooting; Phone Help.

Goode, Peter. The Aquarius Program Book. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix Publishing Associates, 1983.
92pp. 46 program listings.

Hartnell, Tim. 30 Dynamic Games for the Aquarius. London: Interface, 1984.
viii, 103pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. The Aquarius and How to Get the Most from It. London: Granada, 1984.
124pp.

[ART] Brain, Keith, and Steven Brain. "Secret Addresses." Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 2, No. 45. 10-16 November 1983. pp.31-32.
System locations to PEEK and POKE.

[ART] Guest, David. "New Age of Aquarius." Personal Computer News No. 71. 28 July 1984. pp.24-26.
Review of the Aquarius II.

[ART] Hetherington, Tony. "Aquarius." Personal Computer World November 1983. pp.152-155, 157, 159.
Review.

Memotech MTX500, MTX512, and RS128

The MTX machines (1983) were Z80A based micros running at 4MHz. TM 9918 or 9928 (video) and TI 76489 (sound) co-processors. 24K ROM (containing BASIC, an assembler, and Noddy), 32K (500) or 64K (512) to 512K RAM, and 16K VRAM. 32 or 48 characters by 24 lines, 4 graphic modes up to 256 x 192, 16 colours, sound. Built-in PSU. Interface for an RGB monitor, 2 joysticks, cartridge, cassette tape, audio, centronics parallel, and user port. A heavily specified machine released by a small British company at a time of intense price-competition. The RS128 (1984), named for the 64K RAM and 64K RAM disk, had a 9k6 baud RS-232 serial interface to connect to the FDX floppy disk drive, and an 80 column card for CP/M software.

Bishop, Owen Neville, and Audrey Bishop. The Memotech Games Book. London: Granada, 1984.

Goode, Peter. The Memotech MTX Program Book. Bushey, Hertfordshire: Phoenix, 1984.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Memotech Computing. London: Granada, 1984.

[ART] "Memotech MTX500 Hits the Streets." Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. pp.36-38.
Review.

[ART] "MTX500 Versus BBC B." Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. pp.38-39.
Comparison.

[ART] Sargeant, Richard. "MTX 500 Rivals the BBC." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1984. pp.35-37.
Review.

MENTA

Dedicated Z80 programmer. Designed by Barry Savage. Z80, 8255 PIO, 1K SRAM, UHF mono TV output, cassette interface, 8v unstabilised PSU. Z80 mnemonic-keyword entry.

[ART] Sinclair, Ian. "Z80 Self Assembly Part 2. Using MENTA." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1982. pp.33-36.
Using the MENTA Z80 programmer.

Merlin Tonto

A variant of the Sinclair QL with a built-in telephone produced by British Telecom. The same design was also sold as the ICL OPD (One Per Desk) and the Australian Telecom Computerphone. 68008 CPU running at 7.5MHz, 128K ROM (extending to 320K with ROM packs), 128K-256K RAM and 2K battery-backed RAM. 32K VRAM taken from main RAM. 42 or 64 or 84 characters x 24 lines, 256 x 256 (8 colours) or 512 x 256 (4 colours), TI TMP5220C speech synthesiser with a built-in loudspeaker. Interfaces for the ROM pack and telephony module, parallel printer, and RGB monitor. 2 x 100K microdrives built-in, telephone handset built-in. Power supplied by the monitor. Q-DOS OS. Full-travel 73-key keyboard.

Lang, Kathy, and Terry Lang. Managing Your Business with the One Per Desk/Tonto. Eastbourne: Holt-Saunders, 1985.

Marshall, Garry J. Introducing the Merlin Tonto. London: Century, 1985.

Morris, Stephen. Business Computing on the Merlin Tonto. London: Century Communications, 1985.

Micro APL Scorpion

68000-based portable. Built-in 9" screen, 800K 5.25" FDD. Uses Advanced Programming Language (APL). Weight: 29lbs.

Micro Concepts Concept 09

6809-based SBC, 64K 4116 DRAM (56K usable), 2K monitor in EPROM, three 6821 PIAs, 6840 timer, 1791 disk controller, two 175K 40 track SS FDDs (80 track, DS options). Runs FLEX OS. Four parallel ports. 6850 drives a serial port at 50-19k2 baud to drive a VDU. Sold by Micro Concepts of Cheltenham.

[ART] Gee, S. M. "Concept 09." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1984. pp.60-61.
Review.

Micro Concepts Microbox II

1MHz 6809-based SBC. 64K RAM. MC6883 SAM. 8K monitor in a 2764 EEPROM. NEC7220 memory-mapped graphics controller with 128K VRAM/RAM-Disk (up to 128 columns x 72 lines of text or 768 x 576 pixels). Double-speed model available. Capable of running the FLEX OS. WD1770 FDD controller. WD1223 dual RS232 controller. MC146818 clock/calendar. 6821 general I/O. Designed by Dave Rumball, sold by Micro Concepts of Cheltenham and published as a project in Electronics Today International magazine.

[ART] James, Mike. "A Box of Tricks." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1985. pp.39-40.
Review of the Microbox II.

[ART] [Mills, Gary, and Dave Rumball.] "6809-Based Microcomputer." Electronics Today International Part 1 (by Gary Mills of Micro Concepts): December 1985. pp.27-29; Part 2 (by Dave Rumball): January 1986. pp.36-39; Part 3 (by Mills and Rumball): February 1986. pp.31-37, 58; Part 4(by Mills): March 1986. pp.47-49; Part 5 (by Mills): April 1986. pp.49-51.
Constructional series. 6809 CPU, 8K EPROM, 64K RAM (56-60K usable), Flex OS, 128K VRAM, RAMdisc, EPROMdisc, two parallel ports, two serial ports, WD1770 FDC.

Micromation Z-Plus

Z80A-based S-100 bus compatible business computer. 64K RAM (using 4116 DRAMs), dual 8" SD/DD FDDs (1Mb each using DD). CP/M. Multi-processing version has five Z80s with a 20Mb HDD and 300K RAM.

[ART] Tseng, Vincent. "Strengths of Z-Plus Reside in All-Round Business Ability." Practical Computing May 1980. pp.55-57.
Review.

MICROS Microcomputer System

Designed and built in the UK by The Micronics Company, Twickenham, Middlesex. Z80 CPU, Monitor ROM, 2K RAM expandable to 64K, cassette i/f, video output, TV output, ASCII keyboard, PSU, and cabinet. RS232 and 20mA current loop i/f. Kit or pre-built (c.1978).

Microtan 65

Produced by Tangerine Computer Systems of Ely, Cambridgeshire. 6502-based and sold board-by-board. 1K RAM, 1K (later 2K) monitor ROM (TANBUG). 20-way hex keypad or a full ASCII keyboard. Chunky Graphics option offering 64 x 64. Lower Case Graphics option. TV output. An expansion board (TANEX) offered 4K ROM, 10K Microsoft BASIC ROM, 7K RAM, 32 parallel I/O lines, a serial port, XBUG (a 2K extension to TANBUG containing an assembler, disassembler, and cassette interface firmware), and a cassette interface (300 baud CUTS and 2400 baud proprietary). Other boards offered 40K RAM (TANRAM) and a disk interface (TANDISC). Tangerine supplied a 'mini-rack' case that held the Microtan, Tanex, and a PSU. Alternatively the system could be rack-mounted.

Microtan Computer Systems Ltd. later (c.1985) produced a single board controller based on the Microtan 65 design. This had the same bus as the Microtan 65 allowing it to use the same expansion boards, but could be configured to use the 6802, 6808, and 6809 CPUs. A 6502 CPU could use a clock frequency of up to 1.5MHz (twice that of the Microtan), CBUG ROM and the option of a BASIC ROM. A 6809 CPU could be run at 1MHz or 2MHz using a TVBUG ROM. The single board controller card contains no video circuitry (a VDU card was sold separately).

Tansoft Ltd. Tansoft Gazette. Ely: Tangerine Computer Systems, 1981-1982.
Periodical, six issues a year. Continued from the January/February 1983 issue as Oric Owner.

[ART] Bedford, Mike. "Single Board Controller." Electronics Today International March 1985. pp.35-40.
Constructional article/kit review with a circuit schematic and parts list. A description of the Microtan 65-based controller board using either a 6502 or 6809 CPU.

[ART] Budgett, Henry. "Microtan 65 Review." Computing Today June 1980. pp.28-31.
Review.

[ART] Green, Bob. "A Real Time Clock for the Microtan 65." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1982. pp.17-19.
Constructional article. Circuit diagram and software.

[ART] Lienfellner, R. "Microtan EPROMs." Personal Computer World June 1982. p.151.
Run several EPROMs from one socket using a software or hardware switch on a Microtan 65 with Tanex.

[ART] Microtanic Computer Systems. "Microtan 65." Electronics and Computing Monthly Part 1: December 1983. pp.94-95.
Description and circuit diagram. Available as a kit from MCS.

Microwriter Agenda

PDA with an ABC calculator-style keyboard and a 5-button microwriting text entry system. 4-line LCD screen, 64-128K RAM. 'L' (light, 15 hours battery life) and 'H' (heavy, 40 hours battery life) models. PC and Macintosh connection kits available. Mains adaptor supplied. Weight: 11oz without the battery.

MSX

The basic standard MSX implementation: 3.58MHz Z80A CPU, 32K ROM including Microsoft's BASIC, 8K RAM minimum, software cartridge slot, expansion bus, TI9918A video controller, 256 x 192 graphics, 40 x 24 text, 16 colours, AY-3-8910 sound chip, 1200 or 2400 baud cassette interface, at least one joystick. Standard optional extensions: 80 column display, battery-backed CMOS, RS-232 serial port, MS-DOS, 8-bit parallel port. MSX2 and MSX2+ standards were also developed. For full details of all MSX machines produced, see the MSX Hardware List online. Only machines released in the UK (or at least Europe) will appear here.

Canon.

Hitachi MB-H series. MSX1 and MSX2 machines in this same series.

Mitsubishi ML-F series. The ML-G series were MSX2 machines.

Pioneer PX-7.

Sanyo MPC series. MSX1 and MSX2 machines in this same series.

Sony HB (HitBit) series. The HB-F series were MSX2 machines.

Spectravideo SVI-728.

Toshiba HX-10. Both MSX1 and MSX2 machines appeared in the HX series.

Yamaha CX5 series. The CX7 series were MSX2 machines.

Yamaha YIS-503.

Avalon Software. The MSX Red Book. Pangbourne: Kuma Computers, [c.1985].

Bishop, Owen Neville. Easy Add-On Projects for Amstrad CPC 464, 664, 6128 and MSX Computers. BP171. 1986; rep. London: Babani, 1988.

Bland, Graham, and Jonathan Pearce. MSX: An Introduction. London: Century Communications, 1984.

Boyde-Shaw, Brian. Getting More from MSX: With Spectravideo and all MSX Computers. Wilmslow: Sigma, [c.1984].

Burkinshaw, C. I., and R. Goodley. A Programmer's Guide to the MSX System. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma, 1985.

Carter, Graham. Games for Your MSX. London: Virgin, 1985.

Carter, Lionel R., and Eva Huzan. How to Program Your MSX Computer. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1984.

Ellershaw, Derek, and Peter Schofield. Very Basic BASIC: The First 15 Hours on Your MSX. London: Century, 1985.

Gray, Sean. MSX. Book 1: Starting BASIC. Barnet, Hertfordshire: Glentop, 1985.

Gregory, Jim. The MSX Games Book. London: Collins, 1985.

Hartnell, Tim. How to Program your MSX Computer like a Professional. London: Interface, 1985.

Hoffman, Paul. The MSX Book. Berkeley, California: Osborne McGraw-Hill, [c.1985].

Kuczora, Paul, and Christine King. Introducing MSX BASIC. Southampton: Microbooks, 1984.

Marriott, Tony. Starting with the MSX. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1984.

Marshall, Garry J. MSX Applications. London: Argus Books, 1985.

MSX Computing. Teddington: Haymarket, November 1984-[March 1987].
Periodical. Monthly. The Bodleian have copies to March 1987.

Norman, Margaret. MSX Made Simple. London: Heinemann, 1986.
x, 264pp. Contents: 1. What is MSX?; 2. Choosing an MSX Computer; 3. Entering, Saving and Loading Programs; 4. Writing a BASIC Program; 5. Printing; 6. Number Systems, Variables and Constants; 7. Operators and Functions; 8. Input Commands and Program Data; 9. Loops and Branches; 10. Graphics; 11. Function Keys, Cursor Keys, Joysticks and Interrupts; 12. Sound; 13. File Handling; 14. Sprite Graphics; 15. Error Handling and Debugging; 16. Introduction to Machine Code; 17. The Video RAM and Video Processor; 18. Summary of BASIC Keywords; 19. Some BASIC Programs; Answers to Exercises; [Appendices:] A. Characters and ASCII Codes; B. Error Messages; C. Sample Graphics Design Sheets; D. Control Code and CTRL Key Functions; F. Colour Codes; G. Memory Map; H. Z80 Opcodes.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to MSX BASIC. BP154. London: Babani, 1985.

Pritchard, Joe. MSX Exposed. Richmond, Surrey: Melbourne House, [1984].

Ridley, G. P. Starting Machine Code on the MSX Microcomputer. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma, 1984.

Sato, Toshiyuki, Paul Mapstone, and Isabella Muriel. The Complete MSX Programmers Guide. Richmond: Melbourne House, [1984].

Shaw, Mike. Behind the Screens of the MSX. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma, 1984.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Introducing MSX Assembly Language and Machine Code. London: Collins, 1985.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. Working with MSX BASIC. London: Collins, 1985.

Ting, Steven M., ed. MSX BIOS. n.p.: Q[u]est Publishing, 1985.

Webb, Steve. Practical MSX Machine Code Programming. London: Virgin, 1985.

Webb, Steve. Useful Utilities for Your MSX. London: Virgin, 1985.

Wood, Robert Chapman. The MSX Standard: The New Computers. Blue Ridge Summit: Tab Books, 1985.

[ART] Bland, Graham. "Toshiba HX-10." Your Computer September 1984. pp.48-49.
Review.

[ART] Evans. Gary. "MSX: The Soft Options." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1984. pp.18-19.
MSX BASIC with a full list of commands.

[ART] Evans, Gary. "MSX: What Price a New Standard?" Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1984. pp.84-85.

[ART] "Spectravideo SV1-728 MSX." Which Micro? and Software Review September 1984. pp.90-91.
Review of the SVI-728 (the 'SV1' in the article title is an error').

[ART] Thomas, Igor. "Yamaha Tunes In." Personal Computer News No. 53. 17 March 1984. pp.18-19, 21, 23.
Review of the Yamaha YIS-503 MSX machine.

Multitech Micro-Professor MPF-I, MPF-I Plus, MPF-II, and MPF-I/88

Distributed in the UK by Flight Electronics of Southampton, Hampshire. The original MPF-I has a 1.79MHz Z80 CPU, 2K-8K ROM, 2K-4K RAM, 24 I/O lines, 6 digit 0.5" red LEDs for the display, 165bps cassette interface, 2.25" speaker, 36-key keyboard, and runs off 5v DC (although a 9v 0.5A or 0.6A PSU was supplied). Wire-wrap prototyping area.

The MPF-I Plus has a 1.79MHz Z80 CPU, 49-key keyboard and a display of 20 characters using 16-segment phosphorescent indicators. 2.25" speaker, 48 I/O lines. 8K 2764 EPROM containing the monitor. 4K SRAM. Four batteries for battery back-up (for five hours with the NMOS RAM fitted, or for up to a year with CMOS HM6116 chips). Spare socket for an additional 2764 or 2732 EPROM. 165bps cassette interface. No wire-wrap prototyping area. 40-way expansion connector. Supplied with a User's Manual, an Experiment Manual, and Monitor Program Source Listing.

The MPF-I/88 was announced in mid-1985. 8088 CPU, 4K-24K RAM, 16K-48K ROM, 59 full-travel keys, Centronics i/f, 64-pin expansion bus stated to be IBM compatible.

The MPF-II was sold in the UK by Maplin Electronic Supplies, Rayleigh, Essex. It was advertised as being capable of running 'most existing Apple II software'. 6502 CPU, 16K ROM (12K Applesoft compatible BASIC and a 4K monitor), up to 64K RAM if the 16K ROM is switched out. Built-in 49-key calculator-style keyboard, optional detachable 55-key keyboard, ports for FDD, cassette, video monitor, TV, thermal printer, and joystick. Internal speaker. 40 x 24 text, 40 x 48 low-res, 280 x 192 hi-res graphics, six colours. A Centronics parallel port interface was an optional extra.

[ART] Alexander, Ken. "MPF1-Plus Reviewed." Electronics and Computing Monthly November 1983. pp.32-33.
Review.

[ART] Fawcett, Shirley, and Pete Fawcett. "Micro-Professor." Personal Computer World September 1983. pp.168-171, 173-4.
Review of the MPF-II.

[ART] Herman, Gary. "Micro Professor MPF-I/88." Electronics Today International July 1985. p.58.
Review.

[ART] Huntington, A. A. "Microprofessor MPF-1 Review." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1982. pp.32-34.
Review.

[ART] Kelly, Paul. "Learning from the Micro-Professor." Hobby Electronics November 1982. pp.54-56.
Review of the original MPF-1.

[ART] Tooley, Mike. "Micro-Professor MPF-1 Plus." Practical Electronics April 1984. pp.58-60.
Review of the improved version of the MPF-1, the original having notched up sales of over 4000 units.

Multibus Systems

NCR Multibus Single Board Computers

The Multibus standard was originally developed by Intel. It specified four busses, called the Multibus System Bus, the I/O Expansion Bus (iSBX), the Execution Bus (iLBX) and the Multichannel I/O Bus. The multibus system bus was adopted as IEEE 796, and the iSBX bus was adopted as IEEE P959. In the early 1980's, Intel created Multibus II, which was later adopted as IEEE-STD 1296. The development of Multibus II led to the original Multibus being termed Multibus I. [Source: Sokos, Mark. Multibus I online (1997).]

National Semiconductor Systems: 8080-based systems: BLC-80/05; BLC80/10; BLC80/11; BLC80/11A; BLC80/14; BLC80/14A; BLC80/204. 8085-based systems: BLC80/24 and BLC80/28. Z80A-based system: BLC80/316. 8086-based systems: BLC86/05 and BLC86/12B. The BLX bus is a low-cost on-board expansion bus for these systems. The codes RMC-655 and RMC-660 are Rack Mounting Chassis codes, not computer model designations.

[Manual]
Intel Corporation. Multibus Data Book.
[Santa Clara, California]: Intel Corporation, 1985.

[Manual]
Intel Corporation. Multibus Handbook.
[Santa Clara, California]: Intel Corporation, 1983.

[Manual]
Intel Corporation. Multibus II Bus Architecture Specification Handbook.
Santa Clara, California: Intel Corporation, 1983.

[Manual]
Intel Corporation. Multibus II Product Data Book.
Santa Clara, California: Intel Corporation, 1986.

American Telephone and Telegraph Company. UNIX System V/386, Release 4: MULTIBUS Installation and Configuration Guide. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Unix Press, 1990.
Multi-paged.

American Telephone and Telegraph Company. UNIX System V/386, Release 4: MULTIBUS Reference Manual. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Unix Press, 1990.
Multi-paged.

Johnson, James B., and Steve Kassel. The Multibus Design Guidebook: Structures, Architectures, and Applications. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1984.
xvii, 424pp.

National Seminconductor Corporation, Microcomputer Systems Division. Multibus Board Level Computer Products Databook. [Santa Clara, California]: National Semiconductor Corporation, [1983].
Multipaged. Contents: 1. Single Board Computers; 2. Expansion Module Boards; 3. Board Level Operating Systems; 4. Memory Expansion Boards; 5. I/O Expansion Boards; 6. Peripheral Controllers; 7. Communication Controllers; 8. Analog I/O Boards; 9. Card Cages and Power Supplies; 10. Rack Mountable Microcomputer Systems. Codes on rear cover: W-T-245 and DA-RRD30M013. ©1983.

Nanocomputer (SGS-ATES (UK) Ltd., Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire)

Z80-based SBC trainer. NBZ80-B: CPU board, keyboard, card frame, PSU; NBZ80-S: CPU board, experiment board, keyboard, card frame, PSU; NBZ80-HL: NBZ80-S with 16K RAM, expansion board with an 8K BASIC ROM, video interface board and alphanumeric keyboard.

Nascom 1, 2, 3, System 80, and Micro-Ed

Z80-based. Originally a kit-based board-by-board design on the Nas-Bus (sometimes compatible with Gemini Multiboard 80-Bus cards). The Nascom 1 (Z80 SBC with 1K EPROM, 2K RAM, 1K of which was used for the display) was originally sold by Lynx Electronics, the UK subsidiary of North American Semiconductors (NASCO). The design was subcontracted to Shelton Instruments. The Nascom 2 (Z80A, switch selectable 2/4MHz, 10K ROM (2K NAS SYS-1, 8K Microsoft BASIC), additional 2K graphics ROM (3 graphics modes), TV output 48 x 16, cassette or teletype i/f, RS232, 16 programmable lines of I/O) was sold as an expandable SBC or as part of the cased 'System 80 Total Option Concept'. The System 80 case held the Nascom 2 board, up to 4 expansion boards, a keyboard and a PSU (3A unexpanded, 5A with 4 expansion boards). Nascom machines were sold by Nascom Microcomputers, Chesham, Buckinghamshire. When the company ran into difficulties, a group of dealers gathered under the MicroValue banner to support Nascom users and develop the hardware. Nascom Microcomputers was bought by Lucas Logic of Warwick, and the MicroValue dealers continued to support various 80-Bus compatible systems (ie. Nascom, Gemini Multiboard). The Nascom 3 is based around the Nascom 2, cassette or disk-based, running NAS DOS or CP/M. The Nascom Micro-Ed was designed for the educational market. Under a controversial deal, funding for the purchase of computers for UK schools was heavily directed towards the BBC Micro and the RML-380Z.

Hopton, Johnny. Z80 Instant Programs: Machine Code Routines for Nascom and other Z80 Computer Systems. 2nd edition; Wilmslow: Sigma Technical, [c.1982].
First published in 1979.

Spencer, S. J. BASIC Programming for the Nascom. Amersham: Interface, 1981.

Wilson, G. R. Machine Code Programming for the NASCOM 1 and 2. Amersham: Interface, 1980.

XTAL BASIC Operating Manual: A BASIC Interpreter for Z-80 Based Systems Including NASCOM 1 and NASCOM 2. Torquay: Crystal Electronics, 1980.
Software by Andrew Cornish and Crystal Electronics.

[ART] Borland, K. S. "Yours to Command: Britain's Own Microcomputer - The NASCOM 1." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 1. 1978. pp.20-23.
A description of the development of the Nascom 1.

[ART] Easson, D. Roy. "Microcomputer Organ Interface and Music Editor." Wireless World June 1983. pp.63-66.
Designed for a Nascom 2. Can be adapted to work with any Z80-based micro with two parallel ports.

[ART] Hanley, Robert. "High Resolution Graphics." Electronics and Computing Monthly May 1982. pp.17-19.
Circuit diagram for Z80 DMA-based 384 x 240 memory mapped graphics on a Nascom 2. Software not published.

[ART] Homes, S. J. "Animation Graphics." Radio and Electronics World January 1983. pp.59-65.
Constructional article. High-resolution colour graphics. Adaptable for other Z80 micros. Uses the TMS9928A (525 lines, 60Hz) or TMS9929A (625 lines, 50Hz) chips. Can accomodate the earlier TMS9918 or TMS9918A chip. The board has provision for two AY8910 sound generators.

[ART] "The Nascom 1 Reviewed." Electronics Today International November 1978. ['Computing Today' Supplement, bound within Electronics Today International, pp.5-8.]
Review.

[ART] Sinclair, Ian. "Nascom Micro-Ed." Electronics and Computing Monthly July 1982. pp.40-41.
Review.

[ART] Verrinder, T. R. "A Real Time Clock Facility for the Nascom-2." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1982. pp.56-59.
Circuit diagrams and software.

NEC PC8000 and PC8001

PC8000: 24K BASIC. 32K-64K RAM. PC8001: 64K RAM, BASIC, CP/M, colour, serial port, internal keyboard.

NEC APC

[ART] Tebbutt, David. "NEC APC." Personal Computer World September 1983. pp.152-155, 157, 227.
Review.

NEC-8201A Portable

80C85 CPU, 16K-64K RAM, 40 character x 8 line LCD display.

[ART] Scales, Ian. "Take-Away Micros." Personal Computer News [Cover:] No. 45. 21 January 1984. (p.1 has incorrectly, No. 44, 7-14 January 1984). pp.18-19, 21, 23.
Review of the Commodore SX64 (a luggable C64) and the Olivetti M10 portable. Includes notes on the Tandy Model 100 and NEC-8201A portables.

NEC PC Engine console

PC Engine (1987).

[ART] McFerran, Damien. "Retroinspection: PC Engine." Retro Gamer No. 40. pp.42-51.

Nintendo. General

Famicom (1983); Famicom AV; Famicom Disk System; Famicom Twin (a Famicom and Disk System combined, produced by Sharp); Super Famicom); Game&Watch; NES ('toaster'; international version of the Famicom); NES ('dog bone'; remodelled and improved NES); SNES (internatioanl version of the Super Famicom); SNES 2 ('JR' in Japan); Virtual Boy (VR gaming system).

[ART] James, Mike. "Computer Creators: Hiroshi Yamauchi." Computer Shopper No. 90. August 1995. pp.615-616.
Profile of Yamauchi, who took Nintendo into the consumer technology market.

[ART] "Retroinspection: NES." Retro Gamer No. 38. pp.62-71.

Nintendo GameBoy

GameBoy; GameBoy Pocket; GameBoy Color; GameBoy Advance.

[ART] Day, Ashley. "Retroinspection: GameBoy Color." Retro Gamer No. 24. pp.40-47.

[ART] Lemmens, Luc. "GBDT: GameBoy Development Tools." Elektor Electronics December 2000. pp.70-71.

[ART] Lemmens, Luc. "GBPB: GameBoy Prototyping Board." Elektor Electronics January 2001. pp.42-45.

[ART] Willis, Steve. "GBDSO: GameBoy Digital Sampling Oscilloscope." Elektor Electronics October 2000. pp.34-39; November 2000. pp.12-15.

Nintendo N64 and N64DD Consoles

N64 Magazine. Bath, Avon: Future Publishing, [April 1997-].
Periodical. Issue 1: April 1997.

North Star Horizon (North Star Computers, Berkeley, California)

S100 bus system. The basic HORIZON-1 offered a 4MHz Z80A CPU, 16K RAM, FDD, and 12-slot S-100 motherboard. Running North Star DOS and BASIC from disk. Options included a floating point board, 8K and 16K RAM boards, and serial and parallel interface boards. The HORIZON-2 had two FDDs.

Ohio Scientific Challenger 1P.

Built-in keyboard. Requires a monitor or TV with RF adaptor for the display. Cassette-based or used the C1P MF mini-floppy disk system. FDD system has 10K ROM and 12K-32K RAM and runs OS-65D v.3.0. The cassette-based system has 4K RAM.

Ohio Scientific Superboard.

6502-based SBC.

Olivetti M10 Portable

80C85 CPU, 8K-64K RAM. 40 character x 8 line LCD display.

[ART] Scales, Ian. "Take-Away Micros." Personal Computer News [Cover:] No. 45. 21 January 1984. (p.1 has incorrectly, No. 44, 7-14 January 1984). pp.18-19, 21, 23.
Review of the Commodore SX64 (a luggable C64) and the Olivetti M10 portable. Includes notes on the Tandy Model 100 and NEC-8201A portables.

Olivetti M20

Olivetti L1 M20: 4MHz. Z8000 CPU, 8K ROM, 160K-512K RAM, PCOS (Professional Computer Operating System), built-in keyboard, built-in 12" monitor (white, green and colour options), 64 x 16/80 x 25 text, 512 x 256 graphics, 1, 4, or 8 colours, two drive bays, serial and parallel ports. Introduced: June 1982. Olivetti's PCOS (which has a Microsoft BASIC 5.2 interpreter) used up just over 100K RAM.

M20D: 160K RAM, 2 x 320K FDDs, monochrome monitor.

M20E: 128K RAM, 160K FDD.

M20HC: 160K RAM, 320K FDD, 11Mb HDD, colour display.

M20S: 1 x 320K FDD.

[ART] Phillips, Max. "An Italian Beauty." What Micro? February 1983. pp.87-88, 90, 95.
Review.

Oric 1 and Oric Atmos

Produced by Oric Products International Ltd., Coworth Park Mansion, Coworth Park, London Road, Sunninghill, Ascot, Berkshire.

The Atmos is 1MHz 6502-based, 16K ROM, 48K RAM, ATMOS BASIC, 40 x 28 character display on a TV screen. Viewdata graphics mode. Full-travel keyboard.

[Manual: OS]
[Oric Products International Ltd.] Oric-1 BASIC Programming Manual.
London: Sunshine, 1983.
167pp. Spiral bound. By John Scriven. Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Setting the Computer Up; 3. Programming in BASIC; 4. Colour and Graphics; 5. Editing BASIC Programs; 6. Number Crunching; 7. More Mathematical Functions; 8. Words; 9. Advanced Graphics; 10. Sound; 11. Saving Programs on Tape; 12. Better BASIC; 13. Machine Code Programs; 14. Using a Printer; 15. Oric BASIC; [Appendices:] A. Memory Map; B. Control Characters; C. Attributes; D. ASCII Chart; E. Binary/Hex/Decimal Table; F. Pin Output Chart; G. Derived Functions; H. Text Screen Map; I. High Resolution Screen Map; J. Error Codes; K. The 6502 Monitor.

[Manual: OS]
[Oric Products International Ltd.] The ORIC ATMOS Manual.
London: Pan Books, 1984.
By Ian Adamson. Originally published by Pan Books in association with Personal Computer News. Revised edition: London: Pan Books for Oric Products International Ltd., 1984 (294pp). Contents (revised edition): 1. Getting the ATMOS Together; 2. The Language Lesson; 3. Building with BASIC; 4. Loops Beyond Compare; 5. Down Memory Lane; 6. Tapes and Data; 7. Graphics and Colour; 8. The Sound of Music; 9. Oric BASIC Keywords; 10. Introducing Machine Code; 11. Input/Ouput; [Appendices:] 1. ASCII Character Codes; 2. Escape Codes; 3. Error Messages; 4. Screen Grids; 5. Memory Map; 6. Binary/Hex/Decimal Conversion; 7. Oric MCP-40 Printer Use; 8. 6502 Op Codes; 9. ROM Routines and Addresses; 10. Input/Output Circuitry; 11. ATMOS I/O Connections; 12. BASIC Reserved Words and Tokens.

Adamson, Ian. The Companion to the Oric 1. London: Pan, 1983.
Published in association with Personal Computer News.

Apps, Vince. 40 Educational Games for the Oric Atmos. London: Granada, 1984.
168pp.

Apps, Vince. The Oric-1 Program Book: 50 Programs for Home, Educational and Business Use. Bushy, Hertfordshire: Phoenix Publishing Associates, 1983.
123pp.

Beaufils, Pierre. Apprenez l'electronique sur Oric et Atmos. Rennes: Soracom Informatique, 1984.
French.

Blake, Steven. Learning to Use the Oric 1 Computer. Aldershot, Hampshire: Gower, 1983.
x, 110pp.

Cole, David George John. Getting Started on the Oric-1. Chichester: Ellis Horwood, 1983.
164pp.

Erskine, Robert, Humphrey Walwyn, Paul Stanley, and Michael Bews. Sixty Programs for the Oric 1. London: Pan, 1983.
334pp.

Gee, S. M., and Mike James. The Atmos Programmer. London: Granada, 1984.
[176]pp.

Gee, S. M., and Mike James. The Oric Programmer. London: Granada, 1984.
161pp.

Gerrard, Peter. Exploring Adventures on the Oric 48K. London: Duckworth, 1984.
viii, 238pp.

Gifford, Clive. Dynamic Games for Your Oric. London: Interface Publications, 1983.
x, 210pp. Cover illustration by Keith Gidlow. 36 program listings, followed by: Some Possible Applications; Improving Your Programs; Loading and Saving; Some Useful Books; Glossary.

Hartnell, Tim, and Peter Shaw. Getting Started on Your Oric. London: Futura, 1983.
150pp.

Haworth, Jonathan. Oric: The Story So Far. [Cambridge]: Jonathan Haworth, 1989.
2nd edition: 1992. Reprinted: Cambridge: Jonathan Haworth, 1994.

Hickman, Ian. Computing with the Oric 1. London: Newnes Technical, 1984.
vii, 148pp.

Hicks, Henry E. Getting More from your Oric. Wilmslow, Cheshire: Sigma Technical, 1984.
v, 199pp.

Holmes, Peter, and John H. Watson. Beginners Assembly Language Programming for the Oric-1. Barnet: Glentop, 1984.
Multi-paged. Dr. Watson Computer Learning series.

James, Mike, S. M. Gee, and Kay Ewbank. The Atmos Book of Games. London: Granada, 1984.
143pp.

James, Mike, S. M. Gee, and Kay Ewbank. The Oric Book of Games. London: Granada, 1984.
143pp.

James, Wynford. The Atmos Book of Games. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro Press, 1984.
117pp.

James, Wynford. 20 Games for the Oric-1. Tunbridge Wells, Kent: Micro Press, 1983.
[5], 117pp.

Kosniowski, Czes. Games to Play on Your Oric-1. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, 1983.
128pp.

Lupton, Peter, and Frazer Robinson. The Oric Handbook. London: Century Publications, 1983.
249pp. Contents: 1. Computers and Programs; 2. Setting up the Oric; 3. Communication; 4. Programming; 5. Program Control; 6. Data and Programs; 7. Pieces of Strings; 8. Functions; 9. Logical Thinking; 10. Making a Noise; 11. Characters; 12. Low Resolution Graphics; 13. High Resolution Graphics; 14. Loading and Saving Programs; 15. Advanced Programming; 16. Example Programs; 17. The New Operating System; [Appendices:] 1. BASIC Commands; 2. BASIC Error Messages; 3. Attributes; 4. ASCII Codes; 5. Control Codes; 6. Screen Memory Maps; 7. System Memory Map; 8. Numbering Systems; 9. Musical Notation; 10. Speeding up Programs; 11. Editing BASIC Programs.

Mason, Gerard. Advanced Programming for the Oric. London: McGraw-Hill, 1984.
vii, 157pp.

Maunder, Bob. The Oric-1 Companion. Middlesbrough: LINSAC, 1983.

McLean, Ian. Understanding Oric. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey; London: Prentice-Hall, 1984.
xii, 284pp.

Oric User Monthly with Alternative Micros. [n.p.]: Robert Cook; Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire: Dave Dick, September 1987-September 1999 (No. 145).
Periodical. Monthly. Edited by Robert Cook (Nos. 1-34); by Dave Dick (Nos. 35-145). An index was maintained monthly, and printed to order.

Penfold, R. A., and J. W. Penfold. An Introduction to Programming the Oric-1. London: Bernard Babani, 1983.
BP129. 92pp.

Phillips, Geoff. Oric Atmos and Oric 1 Graphics and Machine Code Techniques. London: McGraw-Hill, 1984.
x, 158pp.

Shaw, Peter. Games for Your Oric. London: Virgin, 1983.
126pp. Listings.

Shaw, Peter. More Games for Your Oric. London: Virgin, 1984.
128pp.

Sinclair, Ian Robertson. The Oric-1 and How to Get the Most from It. London: Granada, 1983.
viii, 135pp.

Skinner, Bryan. Getting the Most from Your Oric. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1984.
192pp.

Smith, Bruce. Machine Code for the Atmos and the Oric-1. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1984].

Stewart, Ian, and Robin Jones. Easy Programming for the Oric-1. Nantwich, Cheshire: Shiva, [c.1983].

Tansoft Ltd. Oric Owner. Ely: Tansoft Ltd., January/February 1983-[January/February 1984?].
Periodical, six issues a year. Continues the Tansoft Gazette. The Bodleian have Nos. 1-7.

Vander Reyden, John. Meteoric Programming for the Oric-1. Leighton Buzzard, Bedfordshire: Melbourne House, 1983.

Whewell, Leycester. The Oric Advanced User Guide. Cambridge: Adder, 1984.

[ART] Baker, John. "Oric Output Port." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1983. pp.26-28.
Constructional article. An 8-bit latched port for use with the Oric's printer port.

[ART] Carroll, Martyn. "Retroinspection: Oric 1." Retro Gamer No. 29. pp.42-49.

[ART] Chanerley, A. A. "Oric A/D Converter." Electronics and Computing Monthly March 1984. pp.14-16; April 1984. pp.24-25.
Constructional article.

[ART] Maunder, Bob. "Atmospherics." Personal Computer News No. 49. 18 February 1984. pp.18-19, 21.
Review of the Oric Atmos.

[ART] James, Mike. "Born Again Oric." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.66-67.
Review of the Atmos.

[ART] James, Mike. "The Musical Oric." Electronics and Computing Monthly August 1983. pp.57-59.
The Oric's sound generator explored.

[ART] James, Mike. "The Oric 1." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1983. pp.46-47, 50.
Review.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Oric 1 Maplin Modem Interface." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 10. March-May 1984. pp.37-39.
Constructional article.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Oric 6522 In/Out Port." Electronics and Computing Monthly October 1983. pp.47-50.
Constructional article.

[ART] Penfold, Robert. "Oric Talk-Back." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 3, No. 9. December 1983-February 1984. pp.24-27.
Constructional article.

Osborne 1, Osborne Executive, and Osborne Encore

Osborne 1 (1981): Transportable. 4MHz Z80A, 4K ROM, 64K RAM, built-in mono screen as a scrollable window of a wider virtual screen, two built-in 5.25" FDDs, serial port, IEEE-488 port, composite video port, internal PSU. Running CP/M, DR CBASIC and MS MBASIC.

Osborne Executive: Transportable. 4MHz Z80A, 8K ROM, 124K-384K RAM, 6K VRAM, built-in mono screen, two built-in half-height 190K 5.25" FDDs, 2 serial ports, Centronics parallel port, IEEE-488 port, video port, internal PSU. Running CP/M+, DR CBASIC 2 and MS BASIC 5.22.

Osborne Encore: 80C86-based laptop, 16K ROM, 128K-512K RAM, 360K 5.25" FDD, 80 column x 16 line LCD screen, 480 x 128 pixels, MS-DOS 2.1.

Adam Osborne died in March 2003 in Kodiakanal, Southern India, at the age of 64. See: Hypergrowth: The Rise and Fall of Osborne Computer Corporation by Adam Osborne and John Dvorak (1984).

Anbarlian, Harry. An Introduction to SuperCalc Spreadsheeting on the Osborne. New York: McGraw-Hill, [1984].

Lewis, Theodore Gyle. Using the Osborne 1 Computer. Reston, Virginia: Reston Publishing, 1983.

Lord, Kenniston W., Jr. Using the Osborne Personal Computer. New York; London: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1983.

Osborne, Adam, and John Dvorak. Hypergrowth: The Rise and Fall of Osborne Computer Corporation. Berkeley, California: Idthekkethan Publishing Co., 1984.

Regis, Margaret. OSDEX. A Comprehensive Index to the Osborne 1 User's Manual. Santa Barbara, California: Periscope Press, [1983].

Zimmerman, Steven M., Leo M. Conrad, and Larry Joel Goldstein. Osborne User's Guide: Applications and Programming. Bowie, Maryland: Prentice-Hall/Robert J. Brady, 1983.
viii, 264pp. Contents: 1. Introduction to the Osborne 1 Computer; 2. CP/M: The Operating System of Your Osborne 1; 3. Writing a Letter Using WordStar; 4. SuperCalc; 5. Getting Started in MBASIC; 6. More About MBASIC; 7. Easing Programming Frustration; 8. Your Computer as a File Cabinet; 9. An Introduction to Computer Graphics; 10. Using String Variables; 11. Programming for Higher Mathematics; 12. Computer Generated Experiments; 13. A Fast Look at CBASIC; Answers to Selected Exercises; Appendix: Upgrading Your Osborne.

[ART] Cooke, Stuart. "Back for an Encore." Personal Computer News No. 68. 7 July 1984. pp.28-29.
Review of the Osborne Encore.

[ART] Laurie, Peter. "Osborne and the Case for Portability." Practical Computing February 1982. pp.54-55.
Review of the Osborne 1.

Outpost II (Tano Corporation, New Orleans)

6800-based business computer. 32K RAM. Business BASIC. Built-in keyboard, VDU (80 x 24), and up to 2 FDDs.

Panasonic 3DO Games Console.

12.5MHz 32-bit ARM60 CPU, 1Mb ROM, 2Mb DRAM, 1Mb VRAM, 32Kb NVRAM for game saving, Composite video, S-Video, RF outputs, 768 x 576 screen display, 16.7m maximum colours (32,000 standard), 16-bit sound, 2x CD-ROM drive, 30-pin expansion port, 68-pin MPEG Video CD adaptor, joypads can be daisy-chained.

3DO Magazine Gold. [Bournemouth]: Paragon Publishing, [1995].
Periodical. Issue 1: '1995/1996'. 132pp. Managing editor: Stuart Spencer Wynne. Only issue 1 seen. Assumed to be a 'special edition' of 3DO Magazine.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John. "Retroinspection: 3DO." Retro Gamer No. 28. pp.40-49.

Philips (general)

[Brochure]
Better by Definition: The Philips V7001 Computer Monitor.
Croydon: Philips Electronics, [198-].
[4]pp. Coded: PVB6378. The V7001 was a 12" green screen monitor with audio. It had RGB and composite inputs.

Philips P2000; P3000; P5000 Series.

P2000C: 15Kg luggable. Two 4MHz Z80A CPUs (one for I/O), 64K-320K RAM, 32K VRAM, 512 x 256 (80 x 25) built-in green screen, two 5.25" built-in FDDs (SS 160K, later 640K each), built-in PSU, keyboard attached by curly cord, external FDD and SCSI ports. CP/M 2.2. 8088 co-processor card option (with 512K RAM) for MS-DOS 2.11. Optional IEEE-488 card and optional internal HDD to 10Mb.

P2000M; P2000T: 2.5MHz Z80-based micro. 4K ROM, 16K-48K RAM, 7 colours, built-in micro-cassette recorder, keyboard, and two cartridge ports (giving an additional 16K ROM), sound, 80(/M) or 40(/T) x 24 text, serial port, built-in PSU. Philips JWSDOS. Expandable to run CP/M. P2000M had 2Mb VRAM an 80-column card and connected to a mono composite monitor, and a FDD connector. P2000T had 1Mb VRAM and connected to an RGB monitor or a TV.

Also known: P2000B (P2500): CP/M machine with 5.25" FDDs, ROM cartridge slot, and passive backplane. 8" FDD controller available; P3500: Multi-user MP/M system (stated to use TurboDOS OS for multiple users), 5.25" FDD and a HDD. No keyboard or VDU, connections for a serial printer and a terminal; P5020 word processor, two 5.25" FDDs, built-in 15" monitor and keyboard, large and heavy; P5040: smaller word processor with a separate monitor; P5010: Additional keyboard with LCD display and cassette recorder to plug into P5020 or P5040.

Philips G7000 Games Console

G7000 Computer (built-in keyboard, two joystick ports, TV port, ROM port); G7200 (a G7000 with a built-in 9" mono display).

[Brochure]
PHILIPS VIDEOPAC.
[Croydon]: [Philips Electronics], [198-].
64pp. Copy examined had the last 4pp excised, possibly a deliberate cancel removing 'forthcoming' peripherals that may not be available. Printed in the Netherlands. Coded on the rear: '3122 125 72301 GB'. Contains details of the G7000 and G7200 consoles, and the range of cartridges: 1-53 and C7010 (chess).

Philips CD-i Console

GDI-1000 CD-Interactive Player, known as the CD-i. Released in the US (1991) and UK (1992). CD-based.

[ART] Szczepaniak, John, and Devin Shockwell. "Retroinspection: Philips CD-i." Retro Gamer No. 32. pp.40-49.

Pied Piper Communicator

Z80-based system manufactured by Semi-Tech Microelectronics. Built-in keyboard and 5.25" 1Mb (784K formatted) FDD. Monitor, TV, external FDD, and printer ports. 40/80 column text, with horizontal scrolling for 80 columns on a TV. CP/M 2.2. Built-in handle. Options: 2-line 80 character LCD display, external HDD, 2 serial ports, and an internal modem.

[ART] Pountain, Dick. "Pied Piper." Personal Computer World September 1983. pp.144-147.
Review.

PowerTran PSI Comp 80

Z80-based SBC with an MM57109 maths chip, 1K Monitor ROM, 2K BASIC ROM, full-travel 56-key keyboard with 16-key Hex keypad and PSU all built on to the single PCB. Configures as 3K ROM/5K RAM or 4K ROM/4K RAM. 2K VRAM, 64 x 32 display, optional 64 character graphics. Kansas City cassette tape interface. Optional 8K ROM (8 x 2708) and 8K SRAM board. Supplied as a full kit or as separate packs. The design (by John Adams) was published in Wireless World magazine.

Powertran Cortex (Powertran Cybernetics, Andover, Hampshire)

TMS9995 16-bit CPU, 64K DRAM, 24K BASIC interpreter (held in three 2564 8K EPROMs and copied to RAM on booting-the BASIC interpreter can be erased from RAM to run larger machine code programs), 16K VRAM, 40 x 24 text, 256 x 192 colour graphics, cassette and UHF TV ports. RGB output an option. Supplied as a kit in four forms: A: (basic machine); B: (with a serial interface); C: (with a serial interface and two 125K FDDs); D: (with a serial interface and two 1Mb FDDs).

The Cortex II had a redesigned PCB and a slimmer case.

[ART] [ETI Cortex.] "16 Bit Computer." Electronics Today International [Part 1.] November 1982. pp.24-31.
Constructional series. Kits were supplied by PowerTran.

[ART] [ETI Cortex.] "Cortex Part 3." Electronics Today International [Part 3.] January 1983. pp.42-43.
Constructional series.

[ART] [ETI Cortex.] "Cortex BASIC." Electronics Today International [Part 4.] February 1983. pp.44-45.
Constructional series.

[ART] [ETI Cortex.] "Cortex Centronics Interface." Electronics Today International Part 1: June 1984. pp.65-67; Part 2: August 1984. pp.23-24, 70.
Constructional article in 2 parts, with a PCB foil.

[ART] [ETI Cortex.] Roberts, Richard. "Parallel I/O for the Cortex." Electronics Today International September 1985. pp.53-57.
Constructional project: a Centronics port, 22 lines of programmable I/O and 2 joystick ports.

[ART] [ETI Cortex.] Roberts, Richard. "Parallel I/O for the Cortex." Electronics Today International September 1985. pp.53-57.
Constructional article. A centronics port, two joystick ports, and 22 lines of programmable I/O.

[ART] [ETI Cortex.] Armstrong, Andy. "Cortex Video Fix." Electronics Today International February 1986. pp.52-53.
Fixing a problem with the video output.

PRESTEL and Viewdata Systems

A Viewdata (videotext) service run by the British Post Office, later British Telecom in the UK. PRESTEL data was held on six computers (Enterprise, Derwent, Dickens, Dryden, Keats and Kipling) with a seventh, Duke, used for editing and updating. New Prestel Ltd. took over the service from BT on 1 April 1994. The Micronet 800 service was originally run from the headquarters of EMAP in Peterborough.

Association of Viewdata Information Providers Ltd. PRESTEL Gateway Cost Effectiveness. Harrogate: R. Ackrill Ltd., 1981.

AMEXTEL. [n.p.]: [n.p.], [198-].
12pp colour leaflet on the American Express service on PRESTEL.

Boyle, Godfrey. Design and Innovation. Marketing. Sinclair's QL Microcomputer. British Telecom's PRESTEL. Technology T362. A Third Level Course. Block 2, Units 6-8. Milton Keynes: Open Univ. Press, [1986].

CitiTimes London: PRESTEL On-Line, [January 1997-].
Periodical. Volume 1, Issue 1: January 1997 (4pp). Launch editor: Richard Barden. Newsletter for the Citiservice and Citifeed financial information services.

Communications 2000: The Magazine for British Telecom's Online Users. London: Goldlink Magazines, 1989.
Periodical. Issue 1: September/October 1989. Launch editor: Surya Lovejoy.

Financial Times Business Publishing. PRESTEL Business Directory. London: 1979-1982.
Periodical.

Giles, Alan. Spectrum Micronet Book. Tring, Hertforshire: Melbourne House, 1984.
87pp. Contents: 1. The VTX5000 Hardware; 2. Calling PRESTEL; 3. Downloading Telesoftware from Micronet; 4. Sending Messages; 5. Communicating with Other VTX5000's; [Appendices:] I. The PRESTEL and Spectrum Character Sets Compared; II. PRESTEL Commands; III. The PRESTEL Computer Network.

Hickford, Barbara. The Micronet Handbook. Micronet, PRESTEL and Teletext: A User's Guide. London: Century Communications, 1984.

ITPL 225. A PRESTEL Pocket Directory. London: ITPL 225 for International Thomson Publishing Ltd., [1984].
Annual periodical. No. 1, 1984 (28pp, researched and prepared by the WOAC Communications Company, contents: Viewdata-An Introduction; PRESTEL Consumer Information; PRESTEL Business Information; ITPL 225 Information; Construction Industry Information; Meat Industry Information; Textile Trade Information; ITPL 225 TeleShop!)

Kania, Helena. PRESTEL for People - Report on a Project by the Social Information Providers' Group. London: Council for Educational Technology for the Social Information Providers' Group, 1983.

Log On. The Magazine for Micronet Members. London: Telemap, 1987-1989; [From Summer 1989 issue:] Hemel Hempstead: Micronet, [1989-1991].
Periodical. Quarterly. Vol. 1 concludes with No. 12 (Summer 1990). An undated (first?) issue of 8pp noted.

Mailbox: PRESTEL Mailbox User Guide. Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire: PRESTEL, July 1989.
32pp. Copyright 1989 British Telecommunications plc. Mailbox was PRESTEL's e-mail system. A telex could be sent from Mailbox using the Telex Link service. Contents: [1.] Introduction; [2.] Getting Started; [3.] The Whole Picture.

Maynes, E. Scott. PRESTEL in Use: A Consumer View. London: National Consumer Council, 1982.

Micronet 800. It Brings Your Computer to Life! Peterborough: Micronet 800, [1983].
[8]pp publicity brochure designed and produced by Gough Malcolm Associates, Hove, East Sussex.

Micronet 800. It Brings Your Micro to Life! Peterborough; London: Micronet 800, [1983].
Colour-printed publicity brochure. Supplied within a folder similarly titled.

Micronet 800 Offers the Most Spectacular Add-On Under the Spectrum. Peterborough; London: Micronet 800, [1983].
Brochure for the Prism VTX 5000 modem.

Micronet 800 Instruction Manual. Link into Micronet 800 with the Sinclair ZX Spectrum Microcomputer. Peterborough: Micronet 800, 1983.
16pp booklet. Manual to accompany the software supplied with to connect a VTX 5000 modem and a ZX Spectrum to PRESTEL's Micronet 800 service. Software by Scicon Ltd. Label attached to p.1: 'Warning: If using Interface 1 do not switch on by the jack plug. Switch on via the mains socket only'.

Micronet 800 Service. Newsletter and Directory. London: Micronet 800, [198-].
Number 1 (8pp). Supplied with the 'Welcome to Micronet 800' subscriber's package.

Mills and Allen Communications Ltd. PRESTEL: The Editorial Opportunity. A Report of the First Year of Editorial Research Carried out by Mills and Allen Communications for the British Post Office. London: Mills & Allen Communications, 1979.

McDonald, A. C., and P. J. Atkinson, eds. PRESTEL and its Use in Libraries. Proceedings of a Seminar held at Washington Town Centre Library on Friday 14th September 1979. Newcastle upon Tyne: Library Association University, College and Research Section, [c.1979].

Money, Steve A. Teletext and Viewdata. Sevenoaks: Newnes Technical Books, 1979.

Morris, Debra. "PRESTEL and Teletel: Entente Visuelle?" MA. Thesis, Loughborough Univ. of Technology, 1987.

Nicholson, Roger, and Guy Consterdine. The PRESTEL Business. London: Northwood Books, 1980.

Offline. London: British Telecommunications Plc., [1986-1988].
Periodical. Typically 2pp per issue. Issues known: April 1986; October 1986; January 1987; June 1988 (4pp?).

Post Office Telecommunications. The PRESTEL Market Research Executive Summary No.1: Introduction and Plan. [London]: Mills & Allen Communications Ltd., 1979.

Powell, Alison. "PRESTEL - An Assessment of Methods of Retrieval of Information." MSc. Thesis, City University, 1982.

The PRESTEL Directory. Incorporating PRESTEL Magazine. Birmingham: Directel Ltd. (on behalf of British Telecom), [1985-1986].
Periodical. Quarterly. Free to PRESTEL subscribers.

PRESTEL: Gateway to Third Party Databases. Camberley: Systems Designers Ltd., 1981.
Conference document.

PRESTEL User. Norwich: Eastern Counties Newspapers Ltd., 1980-1982.
Periodical. CUL have Vols. 3-6, No.1. Continues PRESTEL Users Guide and Directory.

PRESTEL Users Guide and Directory. Norwich: Eastern Counties Newspapers Ltd., 1978-1979.
Periodical. CUL have Vols. 1-2. Continued by PRESTEL User.

Race, Philip J. A Transputer Based Teletext to Speech Convertor. [n.p.]: [n.p.], 1988.

Rank Radio International Ltd. The Service Engineers Guide to Teletext. Ware, Hertfordshire: Rank Radio International, 1978.
Includes circuit diagrams.

Reid, A., ed. PRESTEL 1980: The Aims, the Product, the Market, the Marketing Strategy, and the Roles that will be Played in 1980 by each of the Parties on whom the Success of PRESTEL Depends. London: Post Office Telecommunications, 1980.

Shades. Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire: British Telecommunications, June 1991.
Folded advertising brochure for Shades, an online adventure game available via PRESTEL's Micronet, Telecom Gold, or directly. Shades was a 'Third Millenium Systems Game'.

Sheldon, Anna, ed. PRESTEL in the Library Context. Proceedings of Two Seminars held in November 1981. Boston Spa: British Library, [c.1982-1983].
Library and Information Research Reports, 6.

Sutherland, Stuart. PRESTEL and the User: A Survey of Psychological and Ergonomic Research. Brighton: University of Sussex, Centre for Research on Perception and Cognition, 1980.
A report commissioned by the Central Office of Information.

Thompson, Vincent. PRESTEL and Education. A Report of a One-Year Trial. London: Council for Educational Technology for the United Kingdom, 1981.

Trash. Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire: British Telecommunications, June 1991.
Folded advertising brochure for Trash, an online adventure game available via PRESTEL's Micronet, or directly. Trash was a 'Third Millenium Systems Game'.

Viewdata in Local Government. London: Information Technology Division, Department of Trade and Industry, [c.1984-1985].

Welcome to Prestel. [London]: [Telemap Ltd.], [1983].
Colour printed folder containing the 'welcome pack' for new subscribers to Micronet 800: A letter, five printed sheets of information: 'Problems?', 'Paying for PRESTEL', 'Getting the Best from PRESTEL', 'How to Use PRESTEL', 'Before you use PRESTEL-MICRONET 800', and Micronet 800 Service. Newsletter and Directory Issue 1.

Williams, Bernard C., and Anne Grimshaw. PRESTEL Equipment Survey. 5th edition; Hatfield, Hertfordshire: Cimtech, the National Centre for Information Media & Technology, 1985.
2nd edition (1984).

Yeates, Robin. PRESTEL in the Public Library. Boston Spa: British Library, July 1982.
Library and Information Research Reports, 2.

[ART] Brown, Mike. "Micronet: A Hackers' Guide." Electronics and Computing Monthly February 1984. pp.21-24.
By the technical manager of Micronet 800.

[ART] "Death of the Cassette?" Which Micro? & Software Review January 1984. pp.76-78.
The supply of computer software by PRESTEL (Micronet 800), Teletext (Ceefax and Oracle), and via cable (the Games Network).

[ART] Denning, Adam. "Graphics Designer." Electronics and Computing Monthly April 1984. pp.28-31; Letter with corrections: May 1984. p.13.
BBC Micro listing. Viewdata (Mode 7) page designer. Denning was the technical and software editor of the Micronet 800 service on PRESTEL.

[ART] Peters, Harold. "Teletext the Philips Way." Television April 1980. pp.298-301.
An explanation of the implementation using the SAA5020 TIC, SAA5030 VIP, SAA5040 TAC and SAA5050 TROM chips.

[ART] Sommer, Peter. "Videotex and the Micro: Interfacing the Individual to Information Sources." Practical Computing May 1980. pp.76-77, 79.
Overview.

[ART] Sommer, Peter. "Little Doubt that PRESTEL is Well on its Way." Practical Computing. June 1980. pp.78-79.
The Viewdata 80 exhibition, Picture PRESTEL and dynamically re-definable character sets (DRCS).

[ART] Thurlow, Barry. "Teletext." Electronics Today International November 1987. pp.10-17.
The current state and future potential of Teletext systems.

[ART] Williams, Tony, Maurice Hunt, and Dennis Butcher. "IBM-PC Teletext Decoder for Windows: Interface Card." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 14, No. 94. October 1995. pp.24-31.
[Part 1.] Constructional article. Maplin supplied a kit. Uses an XC3020 FPGA.

[ART] Williams, Tony, Maurice Hunt, and Dennis Butcher. "Compact Television Tuner for use with the IBM-PC Teletext Decoder for Windows." Electronics: The Maplin Magazine Vol. 14, No. 94. October 1995. pp.40-46.
[Part 2.] Constructional article. Maplin supplied a kit. Covers the 400 to 800MHz TV band (channels E22-E62). Uses a TDA8341 TV IF amplifier and demodulator.

Psion Organiser and Series 3

Aitken, Bill. Machine Code Programming on the Psion Organiser. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1990.

Aitken, Bill. Structured Programming in OPL on the Psion Organiser. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1991.

Gerhardi, Gill, Vic Gerhardi, and Andy Berry. The Psion Organiser Communications Handbook. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1990.

Gerhardi, Gill, Vic Gerhardi, and Andy Berry. The Psion Organiser Deciphered. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1990.

McGill, Peter, Simon Hewson, and Eric Emerson. CTS: A Real Time Event Recorder for the Psion Organiser. [Canterbury]: Univ. of Kent at Canterbury, Tizard Centre, 1994.

Shaw, Mike. File Handling and Other Programs for the Psion Organiser II. Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1988.

Shaw, Mike. Using and Programming the Psion Organiser II: A Complete Guide. 1986; Pangbourne, Berkshire: Kuma Computers, 1987.

[ART] An, Dr. Pei. "An RS232 I/O Card for Psion 3s and PCs." Electronics Today International Vol. 27, No. 3. 27 February-26 March 1998. pp.33-36, 39-42, 44, 68.
Constructional article. Uses a 6402 UART.

[ART] Cook, John. "An Everyday Utility?" Popular Computing Weekly Vol. 5, No. 19. 8-14 May 1986. p.11.
Review of the Psion Organiser II.

[ART] Flind, Andy. "PsiCom Experimental Controller." Everyday Practical Electronics February 1997. pp.94-97.
Constructional article. Interface for the Psion Series 3a.

[ART] Peel, Kathleen. "Psion Organiser." Your Computer September 1984. pp.57, 59.
Review.

[ART] "Psion Organiser." Which Micro? and Software Review September 1984. p.91.
Review.

[ART] Whitehorn, Mark. "How To Install New Programs on Your Psion." What Personal Computer Issue 80. March 1996. pp.55-58.
For the Psion Series 3.

Ralph Allen Engineering Micro-Set

Rack-mounted 6809-based system produced by Ralph Allen Engineering Co. of Norwich, Norfolk from September 1984. 1MHz or 2MHz 6809 CPU card (Issue 3), 16 slot 96-way back bus card, 32K RAM/EPROM card, 80 column colour VDU card, Parallel I/O card, RALBUG Monitor on EPROM, Disk controller card, running FLEX or SK-DOS. Promised for 1986 availability: 128K/512K RAM/EPROM card.

Ralph Allen Engineering Grifon-08

Promised specification for October 1986 availability: 8MHz 68008-based SBC, up to 1Mb RAM, colour, 81 x 25 text, 162 x 75 block graphics, serial port, 4 parallel ports, WD1793 FDD controller supporting up to four 3.5" or 5.25" drives, SS/DS, SD/DD, 40/80 track, MC146818 battery backed real time clock, RALBUG in ROM, running SK-DOS 68K (which also allows the running of SK-DOS and Flex).

RCA COSMAC VIP (CDP18S711)

RCA COSMAC-based SBC, ROM monitor, 2K-32K RAM, Tiny BASIC option, colour option, sound option, built-in hex keypad, QWERTY keyboard option, internal speaker, 8-bit I/O, CHIP-8 interpretive language, cassette i/f, video monitor o/p.

Research Machines 280Z, 380Z, Link 480Z.

Research Machines systems were distributed through SINTEL, Cowley Road, Oxford.

The 280Z was a cheaper version of the 380Z, comprising just the CPU board and video board, built and tested.

The first production models of the 380Z were despatched in December 1977. COS (Cassette Operating System) supplied in two 2708 ROMs. 8K BASIC. Cassette interface (300/1200 baud) for two cassette recorders. Monitor and TV outputs. Separate keyboard. Note that the TV output can supply a signal so strong that it swamps the AGC of a TV causing it to detune. Disabling the AGC can fix this. This is less of a problem on older monochrome TVs, otherwise use an aerial attenuator.

The 'Link 480Z' was a low-cost version of the 380Z for networking use in schools with 32K RAM, BASIC, colour display output, internal keyboard, IEEE 488 port.

[ART] Dennis, Mike. "Research Machines 380Z." Personal Computer World Vol. 1, No. 2. 1978. pp.47-53.
Review.

S-100 Bus Systems

The S-100 bus was extended to 16-bits under IEEE-696.

Bursky, Dave. The S-100 Bus Handbook. Rochelle Park, N.J.: Hayden Book Co., [c.1980].

Libes, Sol, and Mark Garetz. Interfacing to S-100/IEEE 696 Microcomputers. Berkeley, California: Osborne/McGraw-Hill, [c.1981].

Poe, Elmer C., and James C. Goodwin II. The S-100 and Other Micro Buses. 2nd edition; Indianapolis: H. W. Sams, [c.1981].
First published in 1979.

[ART] Cox, Francis E. "Bus of the Century: The S-100 Bus." Personal Computer World September 1978. pp.54-56.
A description of the S-100 bus.

Sam Coupé

Capable of addressing 512K in 32 pages of 16K. SAA1099 sound chip. 4 graphics mode from Spectrum compatible to 512 x 192 with 85 column text. Created by Allan Miles and Bruce Gordon and sold by MGT (Miles Gordon Technology) from 1989. FDD functionality hit by a ROM bug (a replacement ROM was produced). MGT went into liquidation in 1990. Miles and Gordon bought the machine rights and began trading again as SAM Computers Ltd. Voluntary liquidation followed in September 1992. The rights to the machine were purchased by West Coast Computers in April 1993, who apparently vanished. [Credit: www.sam-coupe.co.uk]

Sam Revival. Bi-monthly periodical. UK: Quazar, 2002-[2004].
First issue: August 2002. First cover disk supplied with issue 9 (June 2004). Edited by Colin Piggott.

[ART] Tooley, Mike. "On Spec." Everyday Electronics Vol. 19, No. 3. March 1990. pp.208-209.
Regular series. System variables and graphics.

[ART] Tooley, Mike. "On Spec." Everyday Electronics Vol. 19, No. 4. April 1990. pp.282-283.
Regular series. Programming the SAA1099 sound chip.

Sanyo MBC550 Series.

MBC550: 128K-256K RAM, 1 or 2 [160K, 360K, or 730K] FDDs, 640 x 200 colour graphics, 'IBM Compatible'. Also an MBC555 model.

SAT-16 System

16-bit 6-slot backplane-and-cards microcomputer incorporating 68000 and 68701 processors. Produced by Satellite Services of Leicestershire.

SBC-100 (SD Systems, USA)

4MHz Z80 CPU, Z80 CTC, USART, PIO, 1K SRAM, four sockets for 1K-8K each. S-100 compatible. 2K SD Monitor ROM. The 1981 review in Practical Computing used a 'Revision B' board dating from Summer 1978. Not a full SBC, more of a CPU board. Supplied as a kit or assembled.

[ART] Stephenson, Andrew. "Personalised System Giving Flexibility and Reliability is SBC-100's Best Role." Practical Computing January 1981. pp.66-67.
Review.

SBC Duet-16

Japanese PC manufactured by Panafacom, based on an 8MHz 8086. 128K-384K RAM. Two 720K 5.25" FDDs. 40 or 80 x 25. 640 x 400 screen, 8 colours. MS-DOS and BASIC-86.

[ART] Whitney, Mike. "Japanese Duet." Personal Computer News Vol. 1, No. 17. 30